Google
This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project
to make the world's books discoverable online.
It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.
Marks, notations and other maiginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the
publisher to a library and finally to you.
Usage guidelines
Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing tliis resource, we liave taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:
+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.
+ Refrain fivm automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.
+ Maintain attributionTht GoogXt "watermark" you see on each file is essential for in forming people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.
+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liabili^ can be quite severe.
About Google Book Search
Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web
at |http: //books .google .com/I
II
f
600093749
(
-i
LATIN GRAMMAR
BT
T. HEWITT KEY, M.A.
liATK PBOVESBOB OF LATIN IK UNTnEBSITY OOLLSCW, LONDON,
, NOW PB0FSB80B OF OOMPABATIYB O&AMKAB, AND
HBAD-MABTEB OF THB JT7KI0B SCHOOL.
JbeconH tuition, torrecteH anH enUrgeH.
LONDON:
BELL AND DALDY, 186 FLEET STREET.
CAMBRIDGE : DEIGHTON, BELL, AND CO.
1858.
IThe right of Translation is reserved.}
J^r.
: ^, /.
Bg ti* lamt Author,
A SHORT LATIN GRAMMAB
on THH BTarm or cbudb foomb.
Ciown 8to, doth, piloe 3i. Gd.
London : BELL and DALDT, 186 Fleet Street.
Alto,
THE ALPHABET j TERENTIAN METKES ; GOOD,
BETTER, BEST, WELL, to. Second laaaB, with a Paper on the
Pronouns of tbe Third Person. Crown Sto, prico 7«. 6d.
London : WALTON and MABERLY, 23 Upper Oower Street.
THE ELEMENTS OF GREEK GRAMMAR
Jl 8to, price Bi. 6d.
London : WALTON undJi^SS^, 28 Upper Oower Street.
PREFACE.
The chief changes which have been made in the present
edition are as follows :
1. The principle involved in the new section, marked
451. 1, has led to the introduction of forms which without
explanation might offend the eje of the scholar, viz. (Ho-
*say,' due- 'draw/ fid- Hrust,' niA- 'veil,' dd- or ddi- 'take
an aversion to.' Yet these forms are as legitimate for the
Latin language, as Xitt- {eXiirov) * leave,' <^vy (e^vyov) ' fly,'
in Greek grammars. Precisely as from these bases are de-
duced the imperfect tenses Xtiir-of, Xeiir-eiv ; 0£vyai, <l>evy-eiy ;
so we may likewise deduce in the sister language from the
short bases the imperfect tenses dic-o, duc-o, fid-o, nvb-o, and
a perfect odi, — forms which are no longer inconsistent with
maUd^/yas, faJt/idicus ; d/uan ditds, redox redHciSj edika/re ; fides ^
perfldus ; c(mniJlJbiwniy proniiba ; or 6diwnh.
2. It has been thought desirable to attach references to
the quotations employed in the Syntax.
3. Some difference of arrangement has been made in the
* principal parts' of the verbs, and in the syntax of the dative.
4. Attention has been drawn to some inseparable prepo-
sitions which represent the Greek ava in form and power, as
well as to an inseparable preposition inter, of like origin and
no way related to the o;*di]|ai:Jrj^eposition imier 'between'
(§§ 834 6. and d., 1308^1,'^r342:i). It may here be noticed,
that in order to retain a»-far as maybe the original numerical
headings of the paragraphs,^ such hew paragraphs as were re-
quired have been distinguished by added digits, which have
the appearance of a decimal notation. Instances have just
been given.
IV PREFACE.
5. To the cmde fonns a hyphen has been affixed (as in
the Smaller Grammar)^ so as to imply that an addition to the
word must be made before it is entitled to take a place in a
Latin sentence.
6. The defence of the crude-form system, which appeared
in the Preface of the first edition^ has been enlarged and trans-
ferred to an Appendix.
7. A second Appendix touches on some new views, which
were thought to be not sufficiently mature for admission into
the body of the Grammar.
It will still be found that much which is important to
the Latin scholar is wanting in these pages. But in reply to
some objections on this head, it may truly be urged that a
grammar is not the proper receptacle for the notice of pecu-
liarities, which should find a place in the dictionary alone.
The special office of grammar is to deal with general laws ;
and it was with justice that Caesar gave to his work on this
subject the title of Analogia Laiina. There has therefore
been an error on the side of excess in the admission of much
matter relating to the prepositions, the excuse for which is
the very unsatisfactory condition of our dictionaries in this
department.
Lastly, the writer has to express his acknowledgments to
Mr. John Power Hicks, of Lincoln College, Oxford, and to
his son Mr. Thomas Key, of Lincoln's Lm, for much valuable
assistance in the preparation of this edition.
Untvebsity Oollegb, London,
Feb. 15, 1858.
LATIN GRAMMAR
ALPHABET.
1 The Latin language was spoken in Rome and Latium, and after-
wards spread with the Roman conquests over Italj^ Sicily, and
the greater part of France and Spain.
2 The alphabet consisted, as Cicero tells us (Nat. Beor. ii. 37, 93),
of twenty-one letters. These must have been : abed efg hikl
m nop qr stu and Xy — ^without any y vwyz. That the alpha-
bet ended with x is implied in Suetonius (Aug. c. 88). Fand z
were introduced at a late period from Greece, and for a long time
limited to Greek or foreign words.
3 The vowels were i e a o u^ to follow the natural"*^ order of
their sounds.
4 The liquid consonants, following the natural order of their
formation from the back of the mouth towards the lips, were
rlnm, $
5 X is a double consonant, sounding as hs.
6 ^ is only used before a, as its modem name implies ; for ex-
ample, in the proper names Eaeso, Yolkaaus ; and in kalendae,
dedikare.
Q is used only before Uy as its modem name implies; for ex-
ample, in sequor ; and in old inscriptions, pequnia, <&c.
PA, ch, thy rh were not used in old Latin (Oic. Or. 48).
♦ See Professor Willis's experiments as detailed in the Cambridge
Philosophical Transactions, vol i. for Nov. 24, 1828 and March 16, 1829.
B
2 P&OKUNCIATION.
PRONUNCIATION.
7 The true pronunciation of the Latin language is no longer
known. The vowels were probably pronounced as they now are
in Italian.
8 In England the words are commonly pronounced nearly as they
would be in English.
9 When i before a vowel commenced a syllable, it was called by
the Romans % cofuonans; but was in &ct a vowel % very shortly
pronounced, like our y in yot<. But the English in such cases
change it into a j. Thus i u n i o r (yunior) y(mnger is commonly
written and pronounced ^junior.'
10 When u before a vowel commenced a syllable, it was called
u canaonans; but was in &ct a vowel u very shortly pronounced,
like our w in we. But the English change it into a v. Thus,
uinum (winum) vdiM is commonly written and pronounced
*vinum.*
11 (7 and g were probably always pronounced as in ca^ and gooacy
even before i and e. But the English follow their own rule. Thus
Oioero, the Roman orator, is commonly supposed to have called
himself Sisero,
12 The diphthongs, ae, oe, are generally pronounced as e.
13 A short syllable is pronounced rapidly, and is sometimes
marked by a crescent C) over the vowel, as the i in domlnus
magter,
14 A syllable or vowel is said to be long hy nature, when the voice
dwells upon the vowel, as v6rus true,
15 A syllable or vowel is said to be long hy position, when the
vowel is followed by two consonants which do not both belong to
the next syllable, as. mS.gnus great, sunt they are, St mater and
theTnother.
16 A straight line (') over the vowel is sometimes used to denote
a long syllable, as v6rus true, mS.gnus great,
17 A diphthong is nearly always long by nature, as aurum gold,
aes hronee, proelium dottle. The few exceptions consist of words
in which the diphthong is immediately followed by a vowel, as
praeustus burnt at the end,
18 A vowel followed by a vowel in the next syllable is nearly
always short, as filXus son, fiUa daughter, aureus golden. The ex-
ceptions consist of words in which the long vowel has taken the
P&ONUNCIATIOir. 3
place of a diphthong, or of two vowels, as flo (for feio) 1 become^
nulllus (for nuLLoius) of no one, alius (for aliios) another*^ : so
especially with foreign names, as Darius (for BarEus), Medea
(for Medeia).
l^d A short vowel followed by a consonant should generally be
pronounced with that consonant, as p&t-er /aM«r.
20 A long vowel followed by a consonant should generally be pro-
nounced separately from the consonant, as mSrter mother,
21 If a vowel, itself short, be followed by two consonants which
can be pronounced at the beginning of a syllable, — as j^r, cr, tr;
hr, gr, dr; and pi, — there are often two ways of dividing the word.
Thus funebris connected with a corpee is pronounced in prose
fti-nS-bris ; but in verse it may be pronounced fu-n6b-ris. In the
comic writers, however, such a syllable is always short.
A syllable which is sometimes long and sometimes short is
said to be common, and is marked C**) or (*) over the vowel, as
funebris or funebris.
22 If the last syllable but one be long, it has the accent, as ulnum
WM, &rcus low, regina queen, sagitta arrow.
23 If the last syllable but one be short and the last syllable but
two be long, this long syllable has the accent, as fQia daughter,
au6nculus a mothe/i'^ brother,
24 If two or more short syllables, exclusive of the last syllable,
come together, the second of them (counting from the beginning
of the word) has its vowel nearly dropped* in pronunciation. Thus
5pSra work should be pronounced almost as 6p'ra; mIsSrXa
wretchedness, as mls*ria; exXSrat he had gone out, as exi'rat;
1 & c r ii m a tear, probably as l&Vma. f
25 If the syllable to be so dropped be an t (or e) or u, pronounce
the i (or e) like y, the u like w. Thus m ii IX er woman should be
pronounced mtilyer; &rI8tis ofaram, &ryStis; pSrXXmus we *
are ruined, p6rylmus ; fltluXOrumq^ rivers, fluuy6rum ; P ii t S-
51i name of a town, Ptitydli; rSstltiiSre to set zip again, restit-
wSre.
26 A long word has sometimes more than one accent : as, immor-
tfiilis immortal; rgciipSrftre (r6c'perfife), to recover, to get back.
* See Bentley's Terence ad Eun. ii. 2. 36 ; Hennann de Re Me-
trica, speaking of miserum, p. 206.
t Compare the French larme.
4 WOBD-BUISDIHO.
27 EfidUies are little words pronoanoed and sometimes even
written with the word preceding : as, qpA andy mat6r-qae and
ike nwther; uS or, mat^-ue or ike mother; n8 in asking ques-
tions, as mat^r-ne ahiit ^ is the mother gone a/way f Prepositions
placed c^ter a noun are of this kind : as, altis-de montibns down
from the high miOwntainB,
2B ProdUice are words pronounced and sometimes even written
with the word following. Prepositions are of this kind : as, in-
t6r-nos between tM, int6r-se between them, in-pximis among thejirsty
^mefrom me,
29 Mieion, When one word ends with a vowel or a Towel and an
m, and the next begins with a Towel or an A, the final Towel and
m of the first word are not pronounced in poetry : thus,
Monstrt^m horrendt^m informs ingens ctil ItLmSn ftdemptum
should be read^
Monstr', h6rrend'^ inform', ing6ns cfil l^men ad6mptum.
Unearthly, ghastly, shapeless ; reft of an eye immense.
WORD-BUILDING.
30 i\xQ simplest words consist of one syllable ; as the verbs dtic-
draw, ftg- drive or ptU in miotion; or the substantives pSd- /oo^,
S&l-Mft.
These are called roate,
32 A suffix is a syllable which is* added to the end of a word and
adds to or alters its meaning: as, dUc-* draw, duc-to- dravon;
ftg- drive, ag-m8n- a drove,
33 A short vowel, generally 1^ seems sometimes to be inserted
before the suffix ; as in ftg-X-li- easily pwt in motion, active,
34 Several suffixes may be added one after another to the same
root : as, ftg- put in motion^ &g-l-li- a4stive, ftgXlI-t&t- activity, ftgl-
iXt&t-Is of activity.
Words formed by suffixes are said to be derived.
35 A pr^ is a syllable which is placed before a root, and adds to
or alters its meaning : as, dtio- draw, d6-diic- draw down ; 8g-
drive, ex-Ig- drive otU,
* For the quantity see § 451. 1.
HOITKS.
Words formed by prefixes are said to be com^unded.
36 In the derivation and composition of words the letters are
sometimes slightly altered : as, 8g- drive, ac-to- driven, ex-Ig-
drive <nU; 5p8s- work, 5pSr-Xs of work.
NOUNS,
f . e. Substantives and Adjectives.
37 The Latin language has no article, so that a Latin substantive
may be translated in three ways : 1. without an article, as mUliSr,
Vfoman; 2. with the indefinite article, as milliSr, a v?oman; 3.
with the definite article, as miiliSr^ the woman,
38 With Latin substantives there are three questions to be asked :
What is the gender t What is the case t What is the number t
39 The genders are two, masculine had feminine. If a noun be of
neither gender, it is called netUer,
See tables of genders, §§ 191, &c.
40 Little suffixes with the meaning of prepositions are added to
nouns. Thus SulmOn- was the name of a town in Italy. Add
the suffix em to it, and e-5 Sulm9n-em means I am going to ^id-
m/on. Add the sufiix t, and SulmOn-l h&blt-d means / reside at
8vhM>n,
41 A noun, before these suffixes are added, is said to be in the
crude form. A crude form is here printed with a final hyphen.
42 The word made up of a noun and one of these sufSxes is called
9k case,
43 There are five suffixes, which being added to a crude form
make five cases : the nominative, accusative, genitive, dative, and
ablative. To these is generally added the vocative.*
44 The Wimvnative is commonly formed by the suffix s : as, trftb-
a beam, nom. trabs.
The nominative marks the quarter /rom which an action pro-
ceeds, i, e, the agent. Thus, in the sentence, 'the master strikes
the slave,' the blow comes /rom the master : this word matter in
Latin would be in the nominative case.
* The case so called is in reality, so far as the Latin language is con-
cerned, a nominative ; except perhaps in the singular of the o declension,
viz. avX, But even with this compare the nominatives isti^ iUi, ipsi*
b2
6 vomni.
The nominaiive iB called the wbjtct in English grammar.
The vocative is used in addressing people.
45 The cuscuKctive is formed by the soflix em : as, tr&b- a heam^
aoc. tr&b-em.
46 The accusative answers to the question whither f or marks the
quarter to which an action is directed : as, eO SulmOnem, / am
going to Svlmon, Or again in the sentence, ^ the master strikes
• the slave/ the blow goes to the slave : this word iktve in Latin
would be in the accusative case.
The accusative is often used with prepositions : as, In urbem
v6nit, he came into the city*
The accusative is called the object in English grammar^''^
47 The genitive is formed by the suffix iHa or is ; as^ quo- v)h>y
gen. qu5-itis ; tr&b- heam^ gen. tr&b-Xs,
The genitive answers to the question whence f or signifiesyTWTi .*
as, c&lor s9l-Is, ths heat from the eun. It is commonly translated
by of: as, c&lor sOlls, the heat of the sun; or by the English suffix
'« .' as, c&lor soils, th^ mn^^ heat.f
48 The nominative and genitive both signify/rom ; but they differ
in this ; the nominative belongs to a verb, the genitive to a noun,
49 The dative is formed by the suffiix hi or I ; as, i- this, I-bi in
this place; tr&b- heam^ dat. tr&b-I.
The dative answeos to the question where f and is translated
by at or in : as, SulmOn-I, at Svl/mon ; &ll-bi, in another place. It
is used also for to, if there is no motion : as, haeret tXbi, it dings
to you,
50 The ablative has two very different meanings, and perhaps two
different origins. Sometimes it answers to the question whence t
sometimes, Uke the dative, to the question where f In the former
sense it had originally a final d, as, from Gnaivo-, the old form of
the praenomen Oneio- (Cneius), abl. Gnaivod. This form became
quite obsolete. In the classical writers the ablative in form, what-
ever be its sense, is very like to or identical with the dative ; but
the { is often changed into an S: as, tr&b- beam, abl. tr&b-S ; or
lost altogether, leaving the preceding vowel long : as, &la- wing,
abLftlS.
* The English language has the accusatival suffix in Attn, the accusa-
tire of A# ; sad hi wAom, the accusative of who,
f The English language has the genitival suffix in Ms, the genitire
oths f aiicl in whose, the genitive of who.
OONSONANT DEOUINSIOir.
The ablatiye sometimes signifies fnyn^^ as, Ctfrintho- Coriidk^
abl. O^rinthd /rom Corvnth : sometimes it agrees in meaning with
the dative, as, rOs- country ^ J). rur-I, or Ab. rtbr-S, in the oouaUry ;
D. Safan9n-I, or Ab. SubnOn-^, at Stdmotu
51 The ablatiye is often used with prepositions : as, ex urbS, <nU
of the city ; cum rSg-S, with the king ; In urb-6, in the city.
52 Nwmher, — The plural is generally marked in English by « or
euy as, dogs, oxen; in Latin sometimes by «, sometimes by umi.
These suffixes are added to the case-suffixes ; as in the genitives
servO-r-um for serv5-'s-um, of daves; r6-r*-um for r6-'s-um, of
things ; or in the datives, vd-bl-s, rS-bti-s.
53 Li adding these case-suffixes and plural-suffixes to the crude
forms, some changes take place, particularly if the crude form end
in a vowel.
54 These changes depend chiefly upon the last letter of the noun.
Nouns are therefore divided, according to the last letter, into
classes called dedensions.
55
CONSONANT (or THIRD)t DECLENSION.
Masovlinb a3xi> Fbkivikx Nouks.
Latin c.f.
* Gander.
English.
Tr&b-
fem.
beam.
Pritocgp.
masc. or fern.
Jirst, eMef.
Aucfip-
mascorfem.
bird-oateher.
Reg-
masc
king.
Ntto-
fem.
nut.
Singulai.
Nom.
Voc.
Ace.
Gen.
Bat.
AM.
trabs
trabs
tr&bem
tr&bls
trabi
trabS
princeps
princeps
prindpem
prindpKs
prindpi
prindp^
auceps
auceps
auciipem
auctipis
auciipi
auctipS
rex
rex
r6gem
regis
r6gi
regg
nux
nnx
niicem
niidfl
nild
niicS
PluraL
Nom.
Toe.
Ace.
Gen.
Bat.
AM.
tr&b^
tr&bSs
trfibSs
tr&bum
tr&blbtis
trSblbtLS
princip^
prindpSs
prindpSs
prindpum
prindplbiis
prindpn)iis
auciip€s
auciip€s
auciipSs
auctLpum
auciiplbils
auciiplbiis
r6g6s
rSgSs
rSggs
rSgum
reglbtls
rSglbiis
nticSs
niicSs
niic6s
niicum
nildbiis
ntLdHbiis
* The r for « in the genitire i» seen in the English genitives her and
their,
f The numbers of the declensions are given, because they are so
arranged in nearly all grammars and dictionaries.
8
OONSONAITT DB0LBV8IO5,
Masoulinb and Fbuinine Nouns— (<7on^mttei).
Latin c.f.
L&pYd-
CustOd-
Ariet-
C8m.yt-
Aetat.
Gender.
masc.
masc. or fern.
masc.
mascorfem.
fern.
English.
a stone.
guard.
ram.
companion.
age.
Singular.
Norn.
l&pis
custds
&ri8s
c5m^B
aetas
Voc.
l&pis
cust5s
&ri8s
c5mgs
aetaa
Ace.
l&pldem
cust5dem
&rigtem
cSmltem
aetatem
Oen.
l&pldls
custodls
SriStls
c5mltls
aetatls
Dot.
l&pldi
custodi
&ri8ti[
cSmlti
aetati
Abl.
l&pIdS
cust5d^
&rigt8
cSmttS
aetata
Plural.
Norn.
l&pldes
custodSs
&ri8tSs
cSmXtSs
aetatSs
Voc.
l&pldss
custodSs
llri^tSs
c5mIt6B
aetates
Ace.
%Id6s
custodSs
&ri8t§s
c5mXtSs
aetatSs
Gm.
l&pldum
custodum
ftrigtum
cSmXtum
aetatum
Bat.
l&pldlbiis
custodlbiis
&ri8tlbiis
c5mltlbiis
aetatitbiis
Abl.
l&pldlbiis custadlbtLsl ^riStibiis
c5mltlbiis
ael&tlbiis
Latin c.f.
Gender.
English.
Mfls-
masc.
cuttom.
PulvU-
masc.
duiU
Pllt«r-
masc.
father.
Cl&mOr-
masc.
ehofiU.
HiSm-
fem.
winter.
Singular.
Nom.
Voc.
Ace.
Gen.
Bat.
AU.
m5s
moa
m5]\im
moris
m5ri
mor3
pulvis
pulyls
pulvSrem
pulvgrfs
pulvSri
pulvgrg
p&tSr
p&t^
p&trem
p&tris
p&tri
p&trS
olamSr
clamor
clamSrem
clam5rls
clamOii
clamOrg
hiemps
hiemps
hiSmem
hiSmIs
biSmr
hiSmS
Plural.
Noni.
Voc.
Ace.
Gen.
Bat.
Abl.
m5res
m5res
m5res
moniTn
m5rlbiis
mOrlbtis
•
pHtrSs
p&tres
p&trSs
p&tram
pfttribiis
p&tribiis
clam5r@s
clam5res
clam5res
claTnSram
clamOribiis
c1aTn5rlbtis
hiSmSs
higmSs
hiSmes
hiSmum
hiSmlbiis
hiSmlbiis
* An acCi pulvSres in Horace.
OOiraOVAKT DB0LXN8I0V.
9
MASOTTLiirfl AST> Fexiitikb l^ouiTS — (continued).
Latin c.f.
G«nder.
English.
Sol-
masc
sun.
ConsiU-
mase.
consul.
R&tion-
fem.
account
Ord^n-
masc.
rank.
SanguXa-
masc.
blood.
Singular.
Nom.
Voc.
Ace.
Gen.
Dot.
AU.
sol
B5l
solem
sails
soli
sols
consiil
consiil
consiilem
consiills
consiil!
constQS
T&ti$
r&ti6
r&ti5nem
r&ti5nYB
r&tioni
r&tionS
ordd
ordd
ordYnem
ordlnls
ordlnT
ordlnS
sangafs
sangals
sangulnem
sangulnYfl
sangulnl
sangiiYnS
Plural.
Nom.
Voc.
Ace.
Gen,
Dai.
AM.
solSs
solSs
s5les
*
s5llbii8
soUbiis
constQSs
constQSs
constQes
consiilum
consiillbiis
consiillbiis
r&ti5n€s
r&tionSs
r&ti5nSs
r&tionum
r&ti5nlbiis
r&ti5nlbiis
ordlnSs
ordYnt^^
ordln^s
ordYnum
ordYnYbtLs
ordYnYbtLs
1
^Q l^BITTBB KoxrNS.
Keuter nouns differ from others only in the N. Y. and Ace.,
which are always aUke. In the singular these cases are nearly al-
ways short in the last syllable^ and in the plural always end in d.
Latin c.f.
English.
NOmSn-
name.
Opgs-
work.
Frig6s-
cold.
R6b6r-
hardness.
C&piSt-
liead.
Singular.
Nom.
Voc.
Ace.
Gen.
Dai.
AM.
nomSn
n5mSn
n5m8n
nSmlnIs
nOmYnl
nOmYnS
Spiis
5piis
Spiis
5p8rYs
5p^ri
9p^
frigiis
frigiis
fngiis
frigSrls
frigCri
frig5rg
r5bilr
rObiir
r5b<lr
r5bdrls
rObdri
r5b«i«
cSpiit
c&piit
c&piit
c&pItYs
c&pIH
c&pItS
Plural.
Nom.
Voc.
Ace.
Gen.
Dot.
AM.
nomlnS
ndmYn&
nomIn&
non^num
nomlnlbiis
ndmYnYbiis
5pSr&
Spgrii
5pSr&
5pSrum
5p€rYbiis
Cpgrlbiis
ftigSrft
frlgSrS
fng5r&
frigdrum
fng^rlbls
frigSrIbiis
rob«r&
rObdrii
T5b5r&
rob^rum
robSribiis
robdrlbiis
c&pltft
cftpYt&
c&plt&
c&pltum
c&pYtlbiis
c&pYtYbiis
* Not found.
10
CONBOHANT PBCLENSION.
Neutee Nouifs — (continued).
Latin c.f.
English.
Ub«r-
stream.
Os-
mouth.
Oss-
bone.
Criis-
leg.
Cord-
heart.
Singular.
Nom.
Voc,
Ace,
Qen,
Bat.
AbL
ubSr
ubSr
tibSris
tibSrf
tibSrS
5S
OS
5S
5ris
ori
5rS
8s
ds
8s
ossls
ossi
OBB&
criSs
crus
crtis
cruris
crOri
crurg
c5r
c6r
c5r
cordtfl
cordi
cords
Plural.
Nom,
Voe,
Ace.
Gen.
Bat.
AbL
tibgiit
ubgra
tibSrS
ubSrum
tibgribtis
tibgribiis
5ra
5r&
«
oribiis
oribiis
osa&
OBflS
OSB&
ORBlumf
osslbiis
osslbiis
crarX
crur&
crurS,
crurum
cruribiis
cruribiis
cords,
cords
cords
*
cordlbiis
cordlbils
57
Remarks on the Conaonant Bedennon.
The nominative, as has been already said, is most regularly
formed by the addition of 8 : as, tr&b- heaniy N. trabs.
58 If the crude form end in y or c, ^ is written instead offfs or
€8 : as, rSg- kin^y N. rex ; niic- ma, N. nux.
59 If the crude form end iadort, this letter is omitted : as, ISpld-
stone, N. Iftpls ; cSmIt- companion, N. c5mgs.
60 If in Greek words the crude form end in ant, ent, or unt, the
Nom. will end in as, t8, or U8 respectively.
61 Even in Latin words, this change is sometimes found : as, in-
&nt- infant, N. infans or infS.s.
62 If the crude form end in r or ^, the 8 is omitted : as, p&tgr-
father, N. pStSr ; constU- constd, N. consiil : if in n, either the n
or the 8 is omitted, as sanguin- blood, N. sanguis, or in old writers
sanguen.
63 If the crude form end in dn or Gn, both n and 8 are omitted : as,
hSm5n- human being, N. h5m6 ; r&tion- an accotmt, N. rStifi. In
Greek names in on or orU, the n is often retained, but not by the
best writers : as, L&cOn-, XSnSphont-, N. L&cdn, XgnSphOn ; better
L&od, XSn^phO,
* Not found. f Observe the irregular X.
C0N80VANT DB0LBN8IOV. 11
64 If the crude form end in « or m, only one s is left at the end of
the nominative : as, mus- motue, Os- rnmUh, oss- hone ; K. mUs,
9s, ds.
65 If the crude form end in U, rr, or rd, the second of these con-
sonants is omitted in the nominative : as, mell- haneyf £eut- speU,
cord- heart ; N. mSl, f&r, g6t.
66 If the word be neuter, the s is not added : as, &l6c- picMed
herring^ N. 9l8c. Many adjectives however take the a even for
the neuter N. Y. Ac. : as, fSrOc- haughty ^ praesent- preaerU; N.
y. Ac. neut. f^roz, praesens.
67 Neuters in rndt^ borrowed from the Greek language, imitate
that language in dropping the t in the N. Y. Ac. : as, poSmftt- a
poem, N. Y. Ac. poSmft.
68 If the crude form has a short i before the final consonant, this
jfi often changed in the N. into ^.- as, mlUt- soldier, N. mllds.
69 If the crude form end in & or ds, the N. and Y. generally pre-
fer iis : as, vSnSs- beauty, corpus- Jlesh, body ; N. and Y. vSntLs,
corpiis. Neuter words retain the iU in the Ac. also. Greek words
prefer ds in the N. Y. Ac. of neuters.
70 The crude form of comparative adjectives ends in Ss; whence
the neuter N. Y. Ac. end in iU, the masculine and feminine N.
and Y. in ^ ; as, mSliSs- better, N. and Y. m. and f. mSliSr, N. Y.
Ac. neut. mSUils.
71 ^When the nominative is left with a single consonant at the
end, the quantity of the preceding vowel generally remains as in
the crude form : as, s&lUt- eafety, cust5d- keeper, N. s&lus, custOs ;
and again, &n&t- duck, l&pld- stone, p&tSr- father, have in the N.
&nfts, l&pXs, p&tSr.
72 But the crude forms in dr have a short nominative : as, tlmdr-
fear, N. tlm5r. Yet such a form as timdr also occurs.
73 Crude forms in s coexist for the most part with crude forms in
r : as, arbSs- or arbSr- a tree, M58- or Cdor- scent. Of these, the
form with r is preferred in those cases where a vowel follows : as,
G. arbSrIs of a tree, MOris of the scent.
* In old writers, such as Ennius, Plautus, Terence (and occasionally
even Yirgil), nominatives, which should be short according to this rule,
are at times long : as, p&tSr, like the Greek irariip. So the nominatives
aer, sdnYpes, &bies, &ries, p&riSs, CfirSs, sanguis, pulvis, from the crude
forms aSr-, sJSnYpSd-, &bi8t-, &ri8t-, p&riSt-, C^rSs-, sanguYn-, ])ulyis-, have
some of them always, others at times, a long vowel.
12 OOVSOVAVT DBdilNBIOV.
74 If the omde form end in ii, ^ takes its place in those oases
where a vowel follows : as, polvXs- dutty G. pulvSrIs.
75 If the crude form end in ^ ^, ^, &C.9 the short vowel is
often changed into i in those oases where a vowel follows : as,
orddn- rank, c&piit- hectdy G. ordXnXs, 0&pItX& Cftr&n- JUsk drops
the vowel altogether in those oases : as, G. camls.
76 V. — Greek words in ant form the Y.m d: as^ Atlant- AtUuy
K. Atlfts, y. Atm.
77 Ac. — Greek words ofken form the Ac. in d^; as, Pall&d- tke
goddess PaUas, N. Pall&s, Ac. Pall&d& ; ft^ air, Ac* &&& ; aethSr-
tke region offi/re (ahove the air), Ac. aeth^SriL
78 G. — Greek words often form the G. in ^ or ^ •• as, Pall&d-, G.
PaI18d5s.
79 B. — The dative sometimes takes an ^ instead of an i / as, aes-
browse, D. aeil, and rarelf aerS.
80 B. — Greek words sometimes form the D. in i ; as, Pall&d-, D.
Pall&dl.
81 Ab. — The ablative sometimes takes an I instead of an ^.' as,
o&ptit- head, Ab. c&pltS, and rardy c&pltl.
82 1^. and Y. pi. — Greek words often shorten the last syllable of
the N. and Y. pi. : as, rhet^- oral&r, N. and Y. pi. rhstdr^
83 N. Y. Ac. pi. — ^Greek neuter nouns whose crude fc»in ends in
& form the N. Y. and Ac. pi. in ^e)^ or ^ ; as, 8p8s- an heroic poem,
N. sing. Spds, N. Y. Ac. i^. &pe& or $p9.
84 Ac. pi. — Greek words often form the Ae. pi, in Us: as, rh6t&-
orator, Ac. pi. rhStSrfts.
85 G. pi. — ^There is an old form of tiie G. {d. in Hrwrn : as, nilo-
nvit, G. pi. niicSrum.
86 I^« ftnd Ab. pi. — Greek nouns in vndt often form this case in
miUts, rather than in m&t^Sfils: as, poSmftt- a poem, N. Gong. poSmft^
D. and Ab. pi. po6m&tibiis, or poftm&tls.
87 D. and Ab. pL — Greek nouns sometimes form the B. and Ab.
pi. in sin or «i, with the final oonsonant of the crude form omitted,
so as to leave the preceding vowel short : as, TrO&d- a Trojan 'wo-
man, N. sing. TrO&s, D. and Ab. pL TrOtt^ or TrG&^
18
88
VOWEL DECLENSIONS.
1. Masculinb and Fbmuone Nouns.
Last let.
a
o
i
u
e
Declen.
1
2
3
4 '
5
Latin.
Ala-
Auo-
Aui-
Acu-
Be.
Gender.
fem.
masc.
fem.
fem.
fern.
English.
wing.
grandfather.
bird.
needle.
thing.
Sing.
Nom,
al&
&u5s^ &uiis
&ulst
S.ciis
r§S
Voc.
am
S.US
S,uls
SLciis
res
Ace,
alam
^uom, &uum
S,aim, S.uem
Scum
rem
Gen,
alae
a.ui*
S,uls
&CUS
rei, r6
Dot.
aJae
&U0
&U1
ILcui, &CU
rei, rS
AU,
ala
&U0
Hui, &uS
&CU
rS
Plural.
1
Nom,
alae
&ui
&uSs
&CUS
rgs
Voc.
alae
&U1
&uSs
&CUS
res
Ace.
alas
&UOS
&uis, SuSs
S.CUS
res
Gen,
alarum
&u5runi
S.aium
SiCuum
rerum
Dot,
allsf
&U1S
ftulbtis
S.cubiis
rebiis
AU,
alls
&U1S
S.ulbiis
SiCubils
rebiis
* The of the crude form may be traced even in those cases which
appear commonly without it. Compare the gen. sing, quo-iiis with the
Homeric hoyoM ; the old nom. pi. oloe for Uti with the Greek \0701 ;
the dat. and abl. pi. duobiUi and oloes for iltis^ with the Greek \oyots.
f The a of the crude form is visible through all this declension except
in the dative and ablative plural. That it once existed here also is proved
by the old forms ^quabiis, &c., and by the Greek dative fiovacus.
% Compare this declension with the Greek iroXi-, N. iroMs,
14
89
VOWEL DECLENSIONS.
2. Neuteb Nouns.
Last letter.
a
o
■
1
XL
e
Declexuion.
1
2
3
4
5
Latin.
Bello-
M&ri-
Comu-
English.
^
war.
sea.
hom.
Singular.
Nom.
§
bellum
m&rS
comii
XT
s
Voc.
23
bellum
mILFg
cornti
Ace.
p
bellum
m&rS
comti
3
Gen.
o
5
belli
m&rls
rcomusl*
O
Bat.
1
bello
m&ri
comui; comu
AU.
a
o
beUo
m&ri
comu
1
Plural.
Nom.
rt.
bella
m&riS.
comuS
sr
Voc.
beim
m^&
cornu&
Ace.
i
beim
mSri&
comu&
1—.
Gen.
bellSrum
m^ium
comuum
Bat.
P
bellls
m&rlbiis
comtibils
p
AU.
bellis
mS,r](bils
corniibtis
Remarks on the Mrst, or A Declension.
90 A very large number of feminine adjectives are of this declen-
sion, while the masculine and neuter forms end in o .* as, bSna-
f. ^goody b5no- masc. and neuter.
91 N. — Four words add an « to make the feminine nominative :
quae ; haec ; istaee ; illaec. In the last three the c has nothing
to do with the case-suffix.t
92 N. — The nominative in Greek proper names sometimes has an
8 : as, AeneSr Aeneas, N. AenSS.s ; but the best prose writers pre-
fer the N. and Y . in ^ ; as, Aristagor&.
93
94
95
96
a
n
y . — ^The vocative of Greek proper names sometimes has a long
as, Aene&-, voc. Aene&.
Ac. — ^The accusative of Greek proper names sometimes has an
as, AenSSr, ac. Aen6&n ; Mai&-, ao. Mai&n.
G. — The genitive has an old form in i : as, ftlfil.
G. — The genitive sometimes takes an « ; as, f&mllia- (fSEun'lia)
a ganff of daves^ an establishment of slaves, gen. f&mlli&s. *
• Not found. t ^3ee § 289.
VOWEL DECLENSIONB. 15
97 D. — ^The dative has an old fonn in i : as, &1&I.
98 G. pi. — The plural genitive sometimes has a short form : as,
caelXc^- inhabiiarU of heaven, Q. caellcSlum, instead of caellc^flft-
rum ; amphora- a measure (/ content, G. amphSrum. And in foreign
proper names ^ as in Greek, is sometimes written instead of um.
99 D. and Ab. pi. — The dative and ablative have an old form in
b&s: as, Squa- mare, J), and Ab. Squ&biis. This form is often re-
tained to distinguish the sex ; otherwise, Squo- horee, and ^ua*
mare, would have the same dative and ablative plural ; so also
dua- f. ttpo, amba- f. both, have D. and Ab. du&biis, amb&blis.
Semarks on the Second, or Declension.
100 The Greek words TrQ- a Trojan, and hSrO- a demigod, are de-
clined like Greek words of the consonant declension.
101 If the crude form end in ^o, the e is often dropped in those
cases where a vowel follows the r .* as, libSro- the inner hark of a
tree, a booh, N. and Y. UbSr, Ac. librum, drc. See § 124. 1.
102 K. and Ac. — ^The nominative and accusative prefer an o,\!lu
precede, as &uo- grandfather, N. &uSs, Ac. &uom : otherwise
u is preferred, as h&mo- hook, N. h&miis, Ac. h&mum. But if
the crude form end in quo, then ctbs and cum are preferred to ^us
or quo8, and to quum or quom : as, Squo- horse, N. 8cus, Ac. Scum ;
antique- eld, N. antlctLs, Ac. antlcum.
103 N. — In Greek words o is preferred to tt ; as, Dslo- the island
Bdos, N. DsWs.
104 N. and Y . — ^If the crude form of a masculine noun end in ro,
the N. and Y. ofben drop the letters that follow r : as, UbSro-
look, N. and Y. llbSr ; uXro- man, N. and Y. uXr.
105 N. — ^Three nouns form the N. in ^; ipso- sdf, N. ipsHs, more
commonly ipsS ; isto- that near you, N. istS ; illo- yonder, N. ill8.
If nominatives so formed take after them the enclitic c8, look or
lo, they have an i instead of an « ; hence ho- this, N. l^c \ isto-,
N. istlc ; illo-, N. iUXc.
106 Y. — The vocative from proper names in io contracts i^ into f .•
as, Ant5nio- AvJUmius or Antony, Y. Antdnl. So gSnio- a guardian
spirit, Y. gfini ; filio- son, Y. fill.
107 Y. — ^Meo- mine contracts the Y. into ml.
108 Y. — The nominative is sometimes used as a vocative : as, Deo-
Ood, N. or Y. DetLs.
109 Ac. — Greek proper names sometimes form the accusative with
n : as, Dslo- the idand Ddos, Ac. DelSn.
16
YOWBIi DBOLENBIOKS.
110 G. and I>.—* The following adjectives form their genitives in
tits, their datives in I, for the masculine, feminine, and neuter,
though some of them have occasionally the more common forms.
C.F.
G.
D.
C.F.
G.
D.
60-
Sjiis
ei
ipso-
ipsiiis
ipsi
quo- or
qu5iiis or
quoi, cul*
^0-
&Ms
Slii
cu-
cuius
or ciil
altgro-
altSrliis
altSri
iitSro-
utriiis
utri
Sno-
tinliis
uni
neutSro-
neutriiis
neutri
ullo-
ulli&s
uUi
ho-
hfiiiis
hui-c*
nullo
nulliiis
null!
isto-
istiils
isti
s5lo-
S5lltLB
soli
illo-
illT«3
im
toto-
totliis
t5tit
111 Many of these genitives ininsvae found in poetiy with a ^ort
penult, as iUliis ; hut the genitive lUliLs (contracted from aliius) is
always long. AlteilUs with a long i is found in old writers {Ter.
And. IV. 1. 4 and Bnn, ap. Donat. ad Ter. Ph. ii. 2. 25) : in prose
it is usual to pronounce the i short : altSrIiis.
112 G. — Substantives in io contract il into I ; as, 5tio- letsurcy G.
&tl. This final i is sometimes written so as to overtop the other
letters, as otI.
113 G. — Greek words sometimes form the genitive iau: as, MSn-
andSro- the poet Menander, G. MSnandrti.
114 !>.•— Names of places form a dative in % with the meaning at :
as, Mlleto- ^ town MUetuSy D. Mlletl at MUetits; so htbno-
growndy D. hiimi on the ground; ddmo- hovMy D. ddmX at home;
bello- war^ D. belli in war: and some adjectives in certain
phrases, as quinti die on the fifth day, &c.
115 K. pi. — ^The old nominative ended me: as, 5loe from olo-
yonder, instead of ill! from illo-. So also in Greek words : as,
Adelpho- brother y N. pi. Adelphoe.
116 N. pi. — Deo- Ood has the plural N. Del, Dil, or more com-
monly Dl ; and eo- this or that has a plural N. il, I, or more
commonly hi. «
117 N. and Ac. pi. — ^Duo- two and ambo- both have for the mas-
culine N. dud and ambd, Ac. duSs or du5, amb5s or amb5 ; for
the neut. N. and Ac. dtt5 and ambd.
* Pronounced as monosyllables : cut (ki), huic (hik).
t These words may be recollected by the following rhymes :
ifis and Iftom Ulio- altSro-, t eo- and quo-, tino- and uUo-,
solo- toto-, tLt^ro- neatSro-, I ho- isto- illo-, ipso- tmd nullo-.
YOmBL DB0LBV8IOV8.
17
118 G. pi. — ^The genitiye sometimes has a short fonn, espedallj in
numbers weights and measures : as, duo- ttoo, G. pi. duOrum or
duum ; mddio- a huahdy G. pi. medium.
119 G. pi. — Greek words form the G. pi. in ^ ; as, GeoigXoo- he-
Umging to agricvJUv/re^ G. pi. GeorglcOn.
120 D. and Ab. pi. — ^The dative and ablative of duo- and ambo-
are in the masculine and neuter duObiis, ambObiis.
121 D. and Ab. pi. — ^An old form of the D. and Ab. pi. is in u:
as, dloes from Slo- yondery instead of illls from illo-.
122 D. and Ab. pi. — ^Deo- has in the D. and Ab. pi. Dels, Dils, or
more commonly Dis ; and eo- has els, ils, Is, or more commonly
his.
123 Four neuters in o have a (f in the N. and Ao. singnlar : quo-,
quM ; isto-, istiid ; illo-, illtid ; &lio-, ftlitld.
124 Ho-, isto-, illo-, when compounded with the enclitic cS, look or
loy take neither d nor m in the N. and Ac. neut. : as, hdc, istdc or
isttlc, illtfo or illtio.
124.1
IRREGULAR DECLENSION.
Latin CF.
Gender.
English.
Pu&o-
masc.
boy.
VJro-
masc.
inon.
masc.
inner bark.
Filio-
masc
ton.
Equo-
masc
horte.
Singular.
Nom,
Voc.
Ace,
Gen,
DaJt,
Ahl.
pu8r
puSr
pu8rum
puSri
pu6r5
pu6r5
ulr
ulr
ulrum
ulri
ufrO
ulr5
llbgr
Kb6r
Itbrum
Ifbri
l!br5
llbro
faiiis
friT
filium
f nil or fm
mis
gctis*
6qu6
Scum*
Squl
6qud
8qu5
Plural.
Nom.
Voc,
Ace.
€r€n.
Bat.
AU.
puSn
pu^ri
pu6r5s
puSrorum
puSris
puSris
uM
uM
ulrOs
ulr5rum
ulris
uYriB
Itbri
Ifbri
l!br5s
ItbrSrum
Itbris
Ubris
filiT
filiT
filiOs
fili5nim
fllilR
frliTfl
Squi
^ui
Squ5s
6qu5rum
Squis
^uis
* So our best Mss. for the best authors ; but editors in their timidity
generally print equtu, equum,
02
18 YOWBXi IMMIiHirSIOllS.
Remarks on the Thirdj or I Deelemion,
125 Many words belong partly to the % declension, partly to the
consonant declension ; as, sorti- or sort- a lot or haUoi. In such
words the singular is generally formed according to the consonant
declension, the plural according to the % declension. (See § 148. 1)
126 Many words belong partly to the % declension, partly to the e de-
clension : as^ aede- or aedi- temple, (See § 148. 1) The forms from
e are seldom used except in the nom. and yoc. But f&me- or flimi-
hwnger has an Ab. f&me with the e long, as in the e declension.
126. 1 N. — Although neuter nominatives of this declension commonly
end in ^, pSti- possible has for the neuter in old writers pdtls, as
well as pdtS.
127 K. and Y. — If a crude form end in n, the letters which should
follow r are often dropped in the nom. and voc. : as, lintM- a wheny,
N. and Y. lintSr ; Ar&ri- a river in OdUia, N. and Y. Ar&r or Ar&rls.
128 N. and Y. — Some adjectives ending in ^ have both forms : as,
ftcSri- sharp, N. and Y. &c6r for the masculine, ftcrls for the femi-
nine ; but 9iCrl8 is sometimes used even for the masculine.
129 If the crude form end in iri, the e is often dropped in those cases
which do not end in er : as, lintSri- wherry, G. lintrls.
130 N. and Y. — If the crude form ends in li, the letters which should
follow I in the N. and Y. are sometimes dropped : as, viglli- a night"
sentindj N. and Y. vlgXl. This word is in origin an adjective.
131 N. Y. Ac. — If the crude form of a neuter substantive end in
dri or cUi, the N. Y. Ac. generally drop the final ^ and shorten the
a ; as, calc&ri- spur, K. Y. Ac. calc&r. These words are in origin
neuter adjectives.
132 N. and Ac— Three pronouns form the neut. sing. N. and Ac.
in c^ : qui- quid ; i- Id ; &li- &lld.
133 Ac. — Some few substantives are found only with the Ac. in
im : as, yi-m force, siti-m thirst; but em is in more general use.
With adjectives em alone is found, as from ISni- smooth^ Ac. masc.
and fern. Isnem.
134 Ac. — Greek words often form the accusative m n: as, F&ri-
Paris, N. P&rXs, Ac. Pftrln.
135 G. — Greek words sometimes form the gen. in 09 .* as, m&th6si-
hnawledge, G. m&thSseds.
136 Ab.— Neuter substantives (with the exception of names of
towns) and also a<yectives of all genders prefer the ablative in { .*
TOWIL DBOLBmOVS.
19
as, m&ri- aea, Ab. m&il ;* Isni- smooth, Ab. lenL But adjectives
used as masc. or fern, sabstantiyes admit the Ab. in ^; as afflni-
a relative by marriage, Ab. afflnS. Participles in efnJtir when used
as substantives, and also in the construction called the ablative
absolute (§ 1013), require the form in e.
136. 1 Ac. pi. — ^A form in ^ (»l«) also occurs in inscriptions.
137 G. pi. — Some nouns drop the i in the G. pi. : as, c&ni- c2o^,
jiivSni- yotmg m>an, c^M- quick ; G. pi. c&num, jiivSnum, c816rum.
This is often the case in poetiy : as, ftgresti- of the cowUryy G. pi.
Igrestium, or in poetry Sgrestum ; and generallj with those adjec-
tives which have no neuter plural : as, Xndp- hdpless, G. pi. Xn^pum.
138 G. pi. — Greek words sometimes form the G. pi. in dn: as,
mSt&morphOsi- change of form^ K. sing. mSt&morphOsXs, G. pi.
mSt&morph58e5n.
139 G. pi.— Plural names of festivals often form the G. pi. as if from
a o.F. in io : as, BaccSnSJi- of Bacchus, N. pL Bacc&n9ii&, G. pi.
Bacc&nSlium or BaccSnSJiGrum.
139.1
IRREGULAR / DECLENSION.
Xiat. C.F.
Gender.
English.
LintSri-
fern.
wherry.
VYgJli-
masc.
a night"
sentinel.
Affini-
mas. or fern.
relative by
marriage.
Anlmali-
neut
living being.
Calcftri-
neut.
spur.
Sing.
Nora.
Voc.
Ace.
Gen.
Bat.
Abl.
lintSr
lintSr
lintrem
lintris
lintri
lintr! or
lintri
ulgfl
uXgfl
uigllem
Ulgtltfl
ulglli
uYgUi or
uigns
afl^ls
affinis
affinem
affinte
affini
affini or
a£^6
RntmXl
calc&r
calcSr
calcic
calcarls
calcSif
calcSnor
caldlrS
&iImSI
&nlm^
&nlmalls
^Im&U
ftnlmSli or
&nlmSlS
Plural.
Nom.
Voc.
Ace.
Gen.
Dai.
AU.
lintres
lintrSs
lintris or
lintrSs
lintrium
lintrlbiis
lintrlbiis
ulgHes
uIglUs
uigllis or
uiglles
uigllumf
ulgmbiis
ulglllbiis
afflnSs
afflnes
affinis or
affinSs
af^nium
afi^nlbiis
affmlbiis
%nYnifili&
&Dlmali&
&nTmali&
S.nlmalium
Snimallbiis
&DlmaUbiis
calcSri&
calcari&
calG9ri&
calcarium
calcailbiis
calcailbiis
* But mUril as an abl. occurs in poetry after prepositions : as, i mdri
Lucr. I. 162, d€ mdri Ov. Trist v. 2. 2|.
t Observe the omission of the i before the «.
20 TOWBL DBOUairSIOHS.
Remarks on the Fourth, or U Declension.
140 Two monosyllabic nouns, su- a hoar or sowy gru- a crane, are
not contracted like the longer nouns of this declension, and are
therefore declined as in the consonant declension; but su- has
both siibiis and suXbtLs in the D. and Ab. pi.
141 Many crude forms in u coexist with crude forms in o .* as, lauro-
or lauru- laurd. Hence the genitives S8n&tl, tiimultl, &c. as well
as SSn&ttis, ttLmultus, drc. are found. See § 148. 1.
142 G. — From &nu- an eld woman the uncontracted Gen. SnuXs is
used.
143 G. pi. — One u is sometimes omitted in the G. pi. : as, curru-
chariot, G. pi. curruum, or in poetry currum.
144 D. and Ab. pi. — Many words change the penult U into i; as,
oomu- horn, D. and Ab. pi. oomXblis.
Bemarks on the Fifth, or E Declension,
145 Many crude forms in e coexist with crude forms in a .* as,
m&tSria- or matSriS- timber. See § 148. 1.
146 G. — Old forms of the genitive; such as diss and dil from die-
day, are found.
147 G. and D. — ^The penult e in the G. and D. was originally long
in all the noims of this declension ; but if no % precede, it is consi-
dered to be short in prose : as, from f Xde-/ai^, G. and D. fldSl ;
but from diS- day, G. and D. disi.
148 Few nouns in e have a plural, and still fewer a G. D. and
Ab. pL
148.1
MIXED PBOLEKSIONS.
21
Latin.
Consonant and i.
i and e.
nrb- or
part- or
nubi-
torqui- or
urbi-,/.
parti-,/
or nube-,/.
torque-, m. or/.
English.
city.
part.
cloud.
twitted chain.
Sing.
Norn.
nrbs
pars
ntlbSs or
nubls
torquSs or
torquls
Voc.
urbs
pars
nflbes
torquSs
Ace,
urbem
partem*
ntibem
torquem
Oen,
urbis
partis
nnbis
torquXs
Dot.
urbi
pard
niibi
torqui
Abl.
urbS
parts
nubS
torquS
Plural.
Nom,
urbSs
partes
nubSs
torquSs
Voc,
urbes
partSs
nubSs
torquSs
Ace.
urbis or
partis or
nubis or
torquis or
1
urbSs
partes
ntLbSs
torques
Gen.
urbium
piartium
nubiuiu
torquium
Dot.
urbflbiis
partlbiis
ntlblbtLs
torqulbils
Abl
urblbiis
partlbiis
nublbtis
torqulbtts
Latin.
English.
Sing.
Nom.
Voc.
Ace.
Gen,
Bat.
Abl.
Plural.
Nom.
Voe.
Ace.
Gen.
Dot.
Abl.
etokd. a.
mfttSria- or matSrie-,/
timber.
matSries or rnatSri^
matSriem or m&t^am
m&tSriae
matSriae
matSrie or materia
a and o.
b5no- or bSna-
ffood.
o
QQ
to
o and u.
fico- or f icu-, /.
Jiff-tree.
ficiis
ficum
f Ici or f ictls
f Ic5 or field
fic5 or fica
fid or f icus
fIcOs or f icfls
ficOnim or ftcuum
fids or f Tcftbtts
ficis or f ictiblis
* Rarely partim unless used ad?erbially.
22
DEFECTIVE AND IRREGULAR NOUNS.
149 Some nouns are not declined : as, nihil nothing , ffus permitted
hy HeaveUy nSquam good for nothing ^ quSt how mangy t5t eo manyy
and many numerals. See Numerals, § 252. Substantives unde-
dined are seldom used except as nominatives or accusatives.
150 Some want the plural : as, sSnectut- eld age^ vSr- n. spring^
sUperbia- jon'tfo, prOle- offspring^ auro- w. goidy Cleo- w. oil,
151 Some want the singular : as, tSnSbra-, N. pi. tSnd-brae dark-
ness; castro- n.y N. pi. castr&cam;?; anno- n., N. pi. arm& amhs ;
Piitedlo-, N. pi. PtiteSll Little weUs, the name of a town.
152 Some have both singular and plural, but with different mean-
ings : as,
PLUB. IfOM.
aedes a house.
Squae medicinal springs,
auxiliS allied troops,
copiae military forces,
fines boundaries^ territory.
fortQnae property,
gratiae thanks.
UtSrae a letter or epistle.
SpSrae labourers or hired men.
SING.
aedl- or aede- a room or templet
Squa-
auxnio- n,
cOpia-
fini-
fortana-
grfttia-
Ht^ra-
Sp^ra-
water^
help,
abundance,
endy
fortuney
favour,
a letter of the alphabety
worky assistanccy
153 Some nouns are deficient in one or more cases : thus, vie- tttm
has no N. or D. sing. ; 5p- hdp has no nominative.
154 Some nouns form their cases partly from one crude form, partly
from another. Thus, volgiJs- n, m>ob supplies a N. V. Ac. sing,
volgiis, and volgo- n. the G. volgl, D. and Ab. volgS ; ItSr- n, route
supplies a N. Y. Ac. sing. ItSr, and ItlnSr- n, the other cases ;
praeclp- headrforenvost supplies praeceps for the N. and Y. sing, of
all genders and the Ac. neut. sing., the other cases being formed
from praeclplt- ; v&s- n. a vessel is declined in the singular along
with v3so- n, in the plural.
155 Some nouns have one gender in the singular, another in the
plural. Thus,
die- day is m. or/, in the singular, but m. in the plural.
caelo- air, sky is n.
freno- bridle is n,
rastro- rake is n.
i($co- joke is m,
15co- place is m.
99
99
»
>>
99
99
9»
99
99
99
99
99
99
99
99
m, or n,
m, or n,
m, or n.
m, or n.
DSFECTIYE AND IRBEOITLAB NOXTITS. 23
156 Some adjectives are deficient in gender. Thus, mSmdr- mind-
ful, paupgr- eaming-litdey have no neuter ; victndl- or victrlo- victa-
TWOS is only fern, in the sing., only fern, or neut. in the plur.
Some Irregular Nouns declined,
167 BiJu- ox or cow^ N. V. bSs, Ac. b^uem, G. biJuIs, D. b8ul, Ab. bduS.
PI. N. y. Ac. bduSs, G. bduum or bourn^ D. and Ab. bObiis or
bubtls.
168 Deo- Oody N. V. DetLs, Ac. Deum, G. Del, D. Ab. DeO. PL N. V.
Del, Dil, more commonly Dl, Ac. Deos, G. DeOrum or Deum,
D. Ab. Dels, Dils, more commonly Dis.
169 Ddmo- or ddmu- /., house, N. Y. ddmiis, Ac. dSmum, G. dSmlis,
D. d5mul, d5mo, with dSmI at home, Ab. d^mtl or dSmO. PI.
N. y. d5mu8, Ac. ddmtls or d5m5s, G. d5muum or ddmOrum,
D. Ab. d5mlbiis.
160 lou-pltSr- (= pater-) Jupiter, N. y. IuppXt6r or Iuplt6r, Ac, ISuem,
G. I«uls, D. I8ul, Ab. I«u«.
161 lus-itirando- n,, oath (really two words), N. y. Ac. iusiurandum,
G. itirlsiurandl, D. iuniurando, Ab. iurSitirando.
162 Nig- or nlu- smm, N. y. nix, Ac. nXuem, G. nluls, D. nXuI, Abl,
nXuS. PI. N. Ac. nlu68, Ab. nlulbils.
163 Rs-publlca- commonrweaUh (really two words), N. y. res-publXcft,
Ac. rem-publicam, G. D. rel-publlcae, Ab. rS-publlca. PI. Ac.
res-publXcas, G. rerum-publXcarum, Ab. rSbus-publXcls.
164 SSnSc- or sSn- an old man, N. y. sSnex, Ac. sSnem, G. sSnIs, D.
sSnl, Ab. sSnS. PL K. y. Ac. sSnSs, G. sSnum, D. Ab. sSnXbtis.
165 Ylsi- uls- or Ml- force, N. y. uls, Ac. uim, G. uls, D. Ab. ul, PL
N. y. Ac. ulrCs, G. ulrium, D. Ab. ulrlbtLs.
So7ne Foreign Proper Names declined
166 Aivcm- Aene&- Aeneas, K. Aenes.s, y. Aen69., Ac. AenSSn or -am,
G. D. AenSae, Ab. AenS9..
167 Ayx^o'ct' or -rj- AnchlsSr or AnchisS- Anchises, N. Anchls6s, V. An-
chlse or -S^ Ac. AnchlsSn or -am, G. D. Anchlsae, Ab. Anchls9
or -ft.
168 Opetmj' Oreste- or -ta- Orestes, N. OrestSs, y. Orestft, Ac. OrestSn
or -em, G. D. Orestae, Ab. Oreste.
169 Mcvoydpo- MSnandSro- Menander, N. MSnandrSs or -driis or -d&,
24 PEFEOTIYB AND IBRSaUIiAB NOUJBTS.
Y. MSnandrS or -dSr, Ao. MSnandrSn or -dram, G. M^oandrtL
or -dri, D. Ab. MfinandrS.
170 Uav6oo- Panthoo- PanthuSy K. Panthtis, Y. Panthtt^ Ac. Panthtln
or Panthum, G. PanthI, D. Ab. PanthO.
171 A^a>- AthQ- or AthOn- (and perhaps Athd-) Mount Athos^ K. AthOs,
Ac. Athon AthO AthOnem (and perhaps Ath5n), G. D. AthO,
Ab. Athd or Athon&
172 AeiSoi- Didoi- Dido, N. Y. Aa DidS, G. Didtifl, P. Ab. DidO. Also
from Didon- N. Y. Dld8, Ac. DidOnem, <fcc.
173 Koo)- or Kg)- Coo- the idand Cos, N. COs, Ac. Coon or C6n, G. Col
or C5, D. Ab. Cos or CO.
174 nap4- or HapiS- Pftri- or P&rid- Pam, N. P&rls, Y. P&ris or PSrf,
Ac. P&rim or -In, P&ridem or -dft^ G. P&rldds or -dls, B. P&rXdl
or -dl, Ab. P&ridS.
176 A^iXXc/- Achillgu- or -1&- AchvUeSy N. AchillSs, Y. AchillS, Ac.
AchillSn or -Ian or -lem, G. Achille5s -lei -Us and in the best
prose Achilll, D. AchillSX or -lei or -ll, Ab. AchillS.
176 Op<t)€p- OrphSu- or Orpheo- Orpheus, N. Orpheus, Y. Orpheu, Ac.
Orph8& or -eum, G. OrphSSs or -Si or -ei or -I, D. Orphgl or -ei
or -eo, Ab. Orpheo.
177 tXMV€p' Ilidngu- llioneus, N. HiCneus, Y. Ili^neu, Ac. IliCneS,, G.
Ili^nSSs or Ilidnei, D. IlidnSX or -ei or -eo, Ab. Ili^neo.
178 Ucpa-cP- PersSu- or PersS- Perseus, like OrphSu- : but also N.
PersSs, Y. PersS, Ac. PersSn, G. D. Persae, Ab. PersS or -s5.
179 ^oKparca-- Socratfis- or SScrfttS- Socrates, N. SScrStSs, Y. SScr&tSs or
-tSs or -tS, Ac. S5cr&tSn or -tern, G. SOcr&tls or rather Socr&tl,
P. SScr&tl, Ab. Sdcr&tS.
180 n€p4icX€€(r- PgrfclS- Perides, N. PgrfclSs, Y. PgilclSs or -clfe, Ac.
PSrlcM or -clem, G. Pgrlclte or rather Pgrlcll, D. PSrldl, Ab.
PSricIS.
181 GoXi/T- Th&lSt- or Th&lS- Tholes, N. Th&lSs, Y. ThJQSs or -Is, Ac.
Th&lSt& or -tern, ThftlSn or -em, G. Th&lStXs Th&Us or -U, D.
ThaiSti or Th&U, Ab. Th&lStS or Th&IS.
182 Arv- Aty- Atys, N. Atys, Y. Aty, Ac. Atyn or Atym, G. Atyds or
Atyl8 or Aty?, P. Atyl or Aty, Ab. AiyS or Aty.
26
GENDER.
183 It has been already stated that there are two genders, mascu-
line and feminine, and that those nouns which are of no gender
are called neuter.
184 The gender may be determined partly by the meaning, partly
by the suffix or termination.
Oender determined by Meaning,
185 Males, months,* winds, and rivers, are generally masculine.
186 Females, countries,*^ islands,* and trees, are generally femi-
nine.
1 87 Nouns undeclined, as ^ righty nSf&s wrong, gummi gwm; words
belonging to the other parts of speech used for the time as substan-
tives, as hoc ipsum * diu' this very word ^ diu^ ; sentences used as
substantives ; and the produce of trees, are generally neuter.
188 Many substantives denote both the male and female, and are
therefore called common: as, s&cerd5t-j7ri^ or priestess. These
are for the most part really adjectives.
189 Sometimes there are two different words or two different ter-
minations, one for the male, the other for the female : as, tauro-
bnUf vacca- cow ; Squo- horse, ^ua- mare,
190 At other times the natural gender of animals is forgotten for a
fuiciful gender. Thus, the words uolpe- fox, (^ni- or cftne- dog,
&n&t- duck, are generally considered to be feminine. On the con-
trary, ansSr- goose, ISp^s- hare, are masculine. Those words which
under one grammatical gender are applied to both male and female
are called epicenes. If the real gender must be noticed, the words
m&s- male, and {&oalDSk- female, are added.
* The names for the months are really adjectives agreeing with the
masculine noun, mensi- * month,* understood. The names of countries and
islands are also often adjectives agreeing with the feminine nouns, terra-
' land,' and insula- * island.' So the names of ships (naut- understood)
and plays (fabukt" understood) are treated as feminines.
26
Oender determnad ly Suffixes.
MasoxtiiIkb SjmixBa.
191 The following aufflxes pFoduoe masouliiie nooiui. They are
arranged alphabetically according to their last letters.
Suffix
Added
to
Gives a
subst
meaning
Thus
tram
English
Is derived
English
a*
to
tc
on
On
5n
ot
iot
ulof
illot
ciilot
tnot
Sro
t«rot
tot
or
tor
tor
tu§
verbs
subst.
verbs
verbs
verbs
verbs
verbs
nouns
nouns
verbs
verbs
verbs
verbs
subst.
verbs
a person
a person
man
man
act
Uttle
little
little
little
little
means
one— ed
State
man
man
—ing
incttl-
nftui-
uort-
naso*
blb-
turba-
lU-
flu-
'ttim-e-
f5co-
o51-
Igga-
tim9-
&ra-
iftnuax
audi-
kJMU
ship
turn
nose
drink
whirl
play
flow
swell
fire
brother
out, dig
depute
fear
plough
gate
hear
inc»l-a-
naul-to-
uort-Xc-
Nas-On-
bft-On-
turb-dn-
lad-o-
fltlu-io-
tiim-iilo-
f8c-illo-
£rater-ciilo-
8s-lno-
ntim-8ro-
cul-tftro-
lega-tO"
tlm-Or-
&ra-tOr-
iftni-tor-
audl'tu-
inhabitant,
sailor,
eddy.
Big-nose*
tippler.
whirlwind,
play.
river.
mound.
a Httleflre.
lUtle brother,
ass,
number.
ploughshare,
deputy^
fear.
ploughman.
gatekeeper,
hearing^
192 It would be a iisdul exercise to collect exaxnples of each soffw*
Th^B, for the suffix a, from verbe, denoting a person ;
conulu-a- a messmate or ffueet, firom cdn together and ulu- live.
aduSn-a- a Granger ^
scrlb-a- a eecretary,
parrlcld-^- aparridde^
transftig-a- a deserter^
caellcdl-^- heaven-inhaJbitinffi
ign!IgSn-a-' jk^^bom^
ttd to and uSn- come,
sctlb- write,
jjHAXn" father and caed- day,
trans across and f&g-^.
caelo- sky and cdl- trihahit.
igni-^e and g^-prodw^.
* Words of this class may perhaps be considerod as common, but the
masculine is generally meant,
f See the neuter suffixes.
X These are really masculine participles.
§ These are often called supines.
OBlTDHft.
S7
193
FBxnriirB Sirnixis.
Snfflz
Added
to
Gives a
sabst.
meaning
Thus
from
English
l8deriv«d
EiDgliah
a
Terbs
act
fttg-
Jfy
ftig-a-
Jlight.
a
male
female
hospYt-
stranger
ho8pYt>a-
/emale stranger.
•
la
subst.
collective
f&mtilo-
slave
flbnYl-ia-
family*
ia
people
a country
Gallo-
a Gaul
OaU.ia-
Gallia,
•
la
adj.
quality
mYsSro-
foretohed
mYs^r-ia*
wretchedness.
Itia
adj.
quality
ftmico-
fiieruUy
&mic-Ytia-
friendship^
ela
verbs
act
qu«r-(r.)
complain
qu^r-ela-
eomplaini.
ela
subst
state
client-
vassal
client-ela-
vassalage,
protectum.
tela
verbs
act
tue- (r.)
protect
tn-tela-
ilia
nouns
little
UnYma-
breath
UnYm-tlla-
little breath.
ciila
nouns
little
B^ror-
sister
sdror^ciila-
little sister.
ma
verbs
act
h-
speak
ft-ma-
report.
Tna
pXte-
bespread
p&t-Yna-
dUh,
ina
male
female
rfig-
king
reg-ina-
queen.
Tna
verbs
act
ru-
rusk
ru-ina-
downfall.
bra
verbs
l&te-
He hid
l&tS^bia-
hiaing^plaee.
Sra
pSte-
bespread
plitr&r&-'
bowl.
Qra
verbs
act
model
fYg-Qra-
shape.
tOraf
verbs
act
P^g-
paint
pic-tOia-
painting.
ta
verbs
act
ulu-
live
ui-ta-
life.
ta
adj.
quality
iiiu^ni-
young
ifiuen-ta-
youth.
id
-torj
female
uio-tOiv
conqueror
uictr-ici-
conqueress.
e
verbs
act
fYd.
trust
fld-e-
faith.
me
acy<
quality
tristi-
sad
trist-Ytie-
sadness.
il
verbs
act
m»r- (r.)
die
mor-ti-
death.
d5n
verbs
quality
dulce-
be sweet
dulce-dttn-
sweetness.
gSn
tudttn
verbs
adj.
act
quality
^ri- (r.)
longo-
rise
long
8ri-g5n-
loDgY'-tlldKn-
origin,
length.
ion
verbs
act
5pina-(r.)
fancy
speak
&pin-idn-
opinion.
tiOn
verbs
act
dYc-
dic-tion-
speaking.
tat
nouns
quality
ciui-
citizen
ciui-tat-
citizenship.
tat
nouns quality
fieruo-
slave
seruY-tut-
slavery.
♦ Literally, * a slave-gang.^
t Perbaps more immediately from nouns in tor^ as from pictor-
* painter/ pictura- * painting.*
t i'C.tk substantive in $or»
28
OBNDBB.
194
Nbittbb Svffixxb.
Suffix
Added
to
Gives a
subst
meaning
Thus
firom
English
Is derived
English
li*
subst.
place, &c.
&ntma-
1^0
&nlmft-li-
animal.
ri*
subst.
place, &c.
puluino-
otuhian
puluinft-ri-
shrine.
Sn
verbs
ungu-
anoint
ungu-Sn-
ointment.
m8n
verbs
instrument
tgg-
cover
teg-m5n-
covering.
verbs
iilg-
yoke
iilg-o-
yoke.
io
verbs
act, &.C.
gaude-
rejoice
gaud-io«
Joy»
Itio
nouns
seruo-
slave
seru-ltio-
slavery.
iUo
verbs
instrument
i&c-
throw
i&c-iilo-
dart.
iilo
nouns
little
paulo-
a little
paul-illo-
a very little.
billot
bWoj
verbs
instrument
uena-
hunt
ufina-biilo-
huntvng'Spear
subst.
instrument
tfls-
incense
tiirY-bulo-
censer.
clilo^:
verbs
instrument
ugh-
carry
uShl-ciilo-
carriage.
cfilo
nouns
Uttle
5p^
work
5pus-ctilo-
a little work.
Yno
teg-
king
reg-no-
royal power.
gro
verbs
instrument
scalp-
scratch
scalp-ro-
graving' tooL
b'rof
cVot
verbs
instrument
c«r-
sift
cri-bro-
sieve.
verbs
instrument
sSpgl-
bury
s^pul-cro-
burial-place.
fro
verbs
instrument
r&d-
scrape
ras-tro-
rake.
to
verbs
thing done
lega-
leave
lega-to-
legacy.
to
trees
collective
arbds-
tree
arbus-to-
vineyard.
etoll
trees
collective
quercu-
oak
querc^eto-
oak-grove.
onto
verbs
ungu-
anoint
ungu-ento-
ointment.
mento
verbs
instrument
oma-
equip
oma-mento-
equipment.
«r§
verbs
it- or i-
go
Tt-«r-
route.
Yn&
verbs
it- or i-
90
Tt-tnSr-
route.
iir
verbs
fiilg-
shine
fulg-iir-
lightning.
Ss
verbs
g8n-
produce
gSn-Ss-
race^ birth.
58
verbs
frig-e-
be cold
frig-6s-
cold.
lii5s
verbs
f&c-
do
f&c-inSs-
deed.
195 The tables of suffixes here given are &r from sufficient to de-
termine the gender of all words. Indeed^ some of the suffixes
* These are really neuter adjectives, and the two suffixes are closely
related ; puluinari- being preferred to pululndli- because the word has
already got an /.
f biilo and 6Vo are probably the same suffix, the latter being pre-
ferred after a preceding /.
X The same may be said of cUlo and c*ro, and perhaps tWo.
§ But &, &St ds^ Us, together with ir, dr, dr^ Ur and at, are mere varie-
ties of the same suffix. So also inSr, tnds, tn6r, &c. are of one origin.
Compare the last three with the Greek rtfitv^a- ' sacred ground.*
II More strictly ectOj the first syllable of which is the diminutival «c,
see § 207. 1. Indeed the form ecto is preserved in uirectO' n., cdrecto^ n.
anvsmt.
29
ISg- choose^
cliii- dUsseriy
n5blli- ndble^
itLuSni- young ^
constU- consult f
will be found ooininon to the masculine and neuter tabled : as, o,
ioy 4lo, ^^, ifro, tiro, to,
195. 1 Suffixes which denote an. abstract quality or act are at times
used in the sense of ooUeetiye nouns, as from
Squlta- ride, ^ultft-tu- m., a hody of riders^ cavalry.
ItSIo- an Italian, It&I-ia- the body of Italians, Italy,
sSqu- {f^fodow, seo-ta- a hody offoUovws, a school,
g^n- prodtLoe, gen-ti- or gent- a race,
multo- Tnany, multl-ttldSn- a mvlsitude, a rnxk^
ISg-iOn- picked men, a legion,
clul-t&t- a body of citisena, a state,
nGbUl-t&t- a hody of nobles, a nMlity,
itiuen-tut- a body of yowng men, yotOh,
consll-io- n,, a body of persons consulting.
196 It will be observed that a large number of substantiYes in a
are feminine. But the rule is far from universal ; as may be seen
in the masculines : Belga- a Bdgian, Sulla- the Roman dictator,
MatrSna- m. the river Mame, Hadria- the ffadriatic, nauta- sailor,
inoSla- inhabitant,
197 The nouns m i occasion much trouble. The migority are femi-
nine, but the exceptions are numerous. These may perhaps be
remembered by the following acrostic :
f M asctillnl gSnSris crbiir
A mni-* axi- fflni-* fini-*
S enti-* denti- calli-* colli'
auli- &8ci- f usti- f oUi-
Y t'ri- uent'ri- uermi- assi-
L 6ni' posti- torri- cafisi-
1 gni- imb'ri- pisd- ponti-
N ftt&li- uecti- fonti- monti-
E nsi- mens!- p&ni-* orbi-
S angui- angui-* ungui- corbir;
197.1 Lai. CrV. Nem. English.
amni- amnXs river
BXkgoi* angolt snaBe
assi- as unit
* Many e'en of these, as flni-',
Are also gSn&is ftoiYnlni.
D2
Lat. ap.
Norn.
English.
axi- or
axYfl or
axle or
assi-
assXs
pote
cam-
callYR
path
30
DXMIirUTIYES.
T^at. C.F.
Nom«
English.
Lat CF.
Nom.
English.
cassi- (j^,)
cafiaOs
net
mensi-
menste
mawth
cauli-
cauUs
stalk
monti-
mons
motmtain
colli-
collXs
hiU
nfttAli-
nlltAlYfl
birthday
corbi-
corbis
basket
orbi-
orbis
round
ortiii-
crtnls
hand of hair
pftni-
p&nis
loaf
enfli-
ensis
sword
pisci-
piscXs
fish
fasci-
faRcIs
bundle
ponti-
pons
bridge
flni-
finte
end
posti-
postis
door-post
foUi- {pi.)
folles
beRows
sangui-t
sanguis
blood
deuti-
dens
tooth
senti-
sentis
thorn
fonti-
fons
spring
tom-
torrls
brand
ftini-
funYR
rope
uecti-
uectXs
pole
fusti-
fustis
dvb
uentSri-
nent^
hdly
igni-
ignis
fire
uermi-
uermis
worm
imbSri-
iinb^r
shower
ungui-
ungi^
nail
leni-*
lenXs
wine-press
titSri-
tttgr
skin.
FORMATION AND GENDER OF DIMINUTIVES.
198 Diminutives denote strictly small size, but are also used to
denote sometimes contempt, sometimes affection.
198. 1 The gender of a diminutive is the same as that of the noun
from which it is formed : as, frfttSr- m. brother ^ fr&terctLlo- m.
little brother ; c0r5na- f. a circular wreath or chaplet, corolla- f. a
smaU chaplet; corpus- n. body, corpusctQo- n. a smaU body.
199 Hence the gender of a diminutive will often assist the memory
to the gender of the primitive or word fr^m which it is derived.
Thus tuber-ctUo- n. a little hump proves that ttlbSr- bv/mp is neuter.
200 If the noun be of the first or second declension, that is, if it
end in a or 0, the diminutive ends in vda or iSdo (older form Ua^
^lo). Thus from &nlma- breath or life, dim. &nXmtila-.
201 If the letter before o and a be t^, ^ or i, dlo and dla are pre-
ferred. Thus from seruo- slave, llnea- line, serudlo-, llnedla- are
\ derived.
202 If the letter before a and o be an r, ^, or n, a contraction gene-
* Leni- s Kriifo- , whence Lenaeus * the God of the wine-press, Bacchus.*
*t< Hence nom. sanguis, ace. aanguem, Inscr. Or. 2270, 5054, the
diminutive sangui-ctdo- m., and the adj. ex'sangm" * bloodless.' Other-
wise tangu^n-, nom. sanguis, &c. is in use.
DIXI5VTIYX8. 81
rally takes place producing a termination Ua or Uo. Thus from
puSra- ^rly dctUo- ei/ej uino- wine, are derived (puSrSla-) puella-
f., (8c61tQo-) 5cello- m., (ulntllo-) uillo- n.
203 If the letter before a or o was an I, and that I was itself pre-
ceded by a long vowel or diphthong, the diminutive ends in ^nUa
or anUo, Thus fila- toin^^ axilla- armpit ; mSia- jawj maxilla- ;
paulo- n. litdey pauxillo- n. ; pSio- m. ttakey paxillo- m. ; talo- m.
ande, taxillo- m. ; uSlo- n. mil, uexillo- n^flag,*
204 If the noun be not of the first or second declension, the dimi-
nutive generally ends in cvla or culo (older form c&a, cSlo), Thus
from c&ni- f. dog, frSrtSr- m. brother, gSnu- n. knee, spe- f. hope,
are derived c&nlctila- f., frftterctUo- m., gSnXctUo- n., spSctLla- f.
205 But if the noun end in cot g,t or d, the form iUa or ^ is
generally preferred. Thus from comic- f. crow, rSg- m. hing,
c&ptit- n. Jiead, l&pld- m. stone, are derived comlctLla- f., rSgiilo-
m., c&plttUo- n., (IftpldtUo- contracted into) l&pillo- m.
206 If the noun end in (yn or dn, the o is changed into u. Thus
from hdmdu- man, r&tion- f. account, are derived hSmunctUo- m.,
r&tiunctila- f.
206. 1 If the noun end in any of the five terminations ds, dr, ds, dr, is,
this syllable becomes tts. Thus from rumOs- or rOmSr- m. report,
arbtfs- or arb8r- f. tree, 5p6s- n. work, are derived rOmuscillo- m.,
arbusctila- f., SpusctUo- n.
207 These rules for forming diminutives are applicable to adjectives
also : as, paupSr- poor, pauperctUo- ; mlsSro- wretched, misello- ;
^0- one, ullo- ; molli- soft, moUIcillo- ; paruo- little, paru^o- ;
aureo- golden, aure^lo-.
207. 1 Diminutives are also formed by the addition of suffixes ^ or
ic, e or i, and u.f Thus from sSn- an old man (which forms ac.
sSnem, gen. sSnIs, <fec.) comes sSn-^c- a little old man (with nom.
sSnex). Many of these diminutives have wholly superseded the
primitives whence they were derived, so that the latler have dis-
appeared : as, ctQ-Sc- m. gnat, dm-Sc- m. hug, ptU-^ isi.flea, s&l-lc-
f. wiUow, rad-lc- £ root, torqu-i- or torqu-e- f. twisted chain, &p-i-
f . hee, &n-u- f . eld woman, &c-u* f. n/eedle, m&n-u- f . hand, g8n-u- n.
hue.
* In these nouns a guttural has probably been lost before the /• Comp.
patico- ' few,' and /e/a- ' web' from tex- * weave.'
f These suffixes correspond to our English suffixes ock; ie or ee; eio,
ue, and (no : as seen in hillock, bullock ; lassie, knee, tree ; shrew, crew ;
clue s sparrow, willow, crow. See Phil. Soc. voL ill.
32 DixnnmTiii.
•
207. 2 A diminutiyal suffix leo also ocean. Thus firom ^uo- or teo-
hone, fictileo-. So also there are ftotLleo- m. a stingy mal-Ieo m.
a maSa, Probably deo in hordeo- or fordeo- bariey is TiriuaUy
the same suffix, added to the root fiir- ipeli.
5X>*7» 3 Diminutives may be fonned from diminutiYes : as cista- a Icdp^
disttUfr- a litUe box or cadea, cistella- a little easket, dstelliUa- a
very little casket. So from dcttlo- an eye (itself formed from an
obsolete Sco-)* come ^Scello- a Itt^ eye, and doellillo- a dear little
eye*
208 The feminine diminutiyes in io declined like neaters^ as Glj^-
cSrio- N. Gljfo&iam, from GljPoSn^ Sweet onSj belong to thtf Greek
language.
209 To the same language belong the masculine diminutiTes in ieeo
and aetifro : as, Sjfrisoo- lSi» Sj^risctts little Syrusy pttitotasttfrch a
little parasite.
210 Many adjectives are used as substantives, the real substantive
being understood. Thus :
MSdXcina-, arti- art understood, the art of healing*
Arithmetical, arti- art understood^ the art of wumbers,
MSdIcIna-, tftbema- shop understood, the doetor^s shop.
AgQlna-, €Ar6ur flesh understood, kmb*sjflesh, lamt.
BellSna-, dea- goddess understood, the goddess offaar.
Africa-, terra- land understood, the land oftheAfri.
AnnOna-, cOi»a- supply understood^ the year's supply.
GtfrGna-, uitta-^SZ^^ understood, circular jUlety chaplet.
GompM-, c&tSna- chain understood, /oo^-€Aam,/s<^.
MfinXoa-, cfttQuA- chain understood, hafnd<hainy handrcuf,
Annfili-, libSro- hook understood, year-hook,
Nfttflli-, die- day understood, hirthrday.
D&»mb$ri-, mensi- fMwth underatood, the tenth month (from
March), Decemier*
St&tu&rio- nK {a man) ofstatuetf a sculptor.
Praettkio-ai. (the place} of the praetor, the general's tent^
Grfin&rio- n, (the place) for grain, granary.
Oulli- n, (the place) for sheep, skeepfdld.
210. 1 Stich compounds in id atf triemi-io- n. (from tri- ih/teei anno-
yeai) a space of three years, interlun-io- n. (from int& between,
* Compare okko- or otrvo' and the Gemaai auge.
ADJTBOTIYES.
33
Itina- moon) the time when no moon is visiUe, are probably in origin
neater adjectives.
ADJECTIVES.
211 Adjectives are declined like substantives.
212 Adjectives with crude forms in o for the masculine and neuter,
in a for the feminine, are often called adjectives of three termina-
tions.
213
Bdno- m. and n., bSna- f. ffood.
214
215
Singular,
Plural,
Masc.
Fetn,
Neat.
Maso. Fern,
Neut.
i\r. bSntis
b5n&
bdnum
i\r. h6m bSnae
b5n&
V. b«nS
b«n&
b5num
V. h6m b5nae
b$n&
Ac b5num b5nam bdnum
Ac,h6n6a b^nas
bdn&
G. h6m
b5nae
bSni
G, 'bQn5rum b5narum b$n5rum
D. b«n5
bdnae
b5n5
D, b5nis b5nis
bSnis
Ah, bSno
b5na
bdno
Ah. bSnis bdnis
bCnis
AtSro- m. and n., ftt^ra- f. Uack.
Singular,
Flurai.
Maso,
Fern.
Neut,
Mate. Fern.
Neut.
N. atgr
atr&
atrum
N. atri atrae
atr&
V. atgr
atr&
atrum
V, atri atrae
atr&
Ac. atrum
atram
atnim
Ac. atros atras
atr&
G, atri
atrae
atri
G. atrSnim atrarum atrorum
D. atro
atrae
atr5
D, atiis atrls
atris
Ah. atro
atra
atr5
Ah. atiis atris
atris
AspSro- m. and n., aspdra- f. rough.
Singular,
Plural,
Mtl80,
Fein,
Neut,
Maao, Fern,
Neut,
N. aspgr
aspSrii
aspgnim
aspSri aspSrae
aspSrS
F. aspgr
aspSril
aspSrum
aspM aspSrae
aspSrft
Ac, aspSruTTi aspSram aspSrum
asp^ros aspSras
aspSr&
G. aspSri
aspSrae
asp^ri
aspSrSrum aspSrarum aspSr5rum
D. aspSro
aspgrae
aspSr5
asp^ris aspSris
asp^ris
ii6.asp^r5
aspSra
aspSro
aspSris aspgris
aspSris
216 Adjectives with crude form in % are often called adjectives of
two terminations.
34
ADJEonris.
217
Singular.
Mate. Fern. Neut,
N. tristis tristis tristS
F. tristits tristis trist^
Ac, tristem tristem trist6
G. tristits tristis tristis
D, tnsti tristi tristf
Ah. tristi tristi tristi
Tristi- di^^.
Plurak
Mtuo.
Fern, Neut,
N. tristes
tristes tristi&
F. tristes
tristes tristi&
Ac, tristis or-^ tristis or-Ss tristi&
tf. tristium
tristium tristium
D. tristlbtis
tristlbiis tristlbtis
Ah. tristXbiis
trist^ils tristitbtia
218
AcSri- sharp.
Singular,
Maso. Fem. Neut,
N. aoSr or acrls acrls acrS
F. acSroracrlsacrls acrS
Ac. acrem acrem acrS
0. acrls acrls acris
D. acri acri acri
Ah. acri acri acri
Plural,
Mato, Fem. Neut,
acres acres acri&
acres acres acri&
acris or acres acris or -acres acri&
acrium acrium acrium
acrlbiis acrlbiis acribiis
acribiis acrlbiis acribiis
218.1
CSlSri- ^vici&.
Singular.
Plural,
Mate. Fem.
Neut.
Maso. Fem.
Neut.
N. c616r or cS18ri!s
cSlerS
y. ceieres celSres
ceieri&
ceiSrIs
F. cSlSr or cglSris
cS18r6
F. csleres ceteres
cei8ri&
cSlSrIs
^0. cSlerem cSl^rem c^SrS
Ac, c&Ma or cflMs or
c8ieri&
oeieres csisres
6^. celSrls cSlSris
c^^rls
G. c^lSrum eSlSrum
c^Srum
i>. c^gri cSlSri
ceieri
J). cSl^ribiis cSieribiis
cSl^ribiis
Ah. cei6ri cSleri
oeiSri
Ah. c&ieribiis c^Mbiis
c^^jibiis
219 Adjectives with one crude form in a consonant, and another in
i, form the singular chiefly from the former, the plural from the
second : as,
Piaesenti^ or praesent- present*
Mate,
2^, praesens
F. praesens
Ac. praesentem
G, praesentis
2>. praesenti
Ah. praesenU or -tS
Singular,
Fem,
praesens
praesens
praesentem
praesentis
praesenti
praesenti or -tS
Neut.
praesens
praesens
praesens
praesentis
praesenti
praesenti or -tS
ASJionm*
Maso*
i\r. praesentSs
F. praesentes
Ac. praesentis or -t6s
G. praesentium
i>. jpraesentlbiis
Ab. praesentlbiis
Pimai.
praesentSs
praesentSs
praesentis or -tSs
praesentiam
praesentlbiis
praesentlbiis
Neui,
praesenti&
praesenti&
praesenti&
praesentium
praesentlbiis
praesentiHbiis
219.1 Nouns in ^ ore often used as maficaline a^jectiyes; nouns in
tfici or trie as fenunine a^jectiyesi and also in tbA plural as neuter
adjeotives.
YictSr^ arid uiotilGi- or uictilc- conquering.
Singular.
Maao, Fern*
N, nict5r uictrix
F. uict^ uictrix
Ac. uictOrem uictricem
G. uictoriB uictricls
D. uictOrl uictria
Ah. uictorS uictricS
Plural.
Mom* Fern. Neui.
N. uietQrSs uictric6a uictrici&
Vk uiotfirSs uictncSs uictrici&
Ac, uiotOrSs metrics uictrici&
G, uiotorum uictricdum uictricium
D,. ulotSrIbiis uictriclbiis uictridbiis
Ah, uiotOilbiis uictriolbiis uictnclblis
220 A^eotives with the crude fonn in a consonant are sometimes
called adjectiyes of one termination*
221
Ym&'old.
Singular.
Plural.
Afa89. Fern.
Neut.
Maso.
Fern.
NeuL
N. uStiia u^ttls
uStlis
uStSrSs
uStdrOs
ugt6r&
F. u^tiis u^tlis
uStlia
uStSrSs
uSt^r^
uStSrS
Ac. uSt^em u^tSrem uStiis
u^SrSs
U^t^f^B
uSt8r&
G. ^mi^ yAWia
uStMs
u^tSrum
uStSram
uSt^m
D. uStSri uStM
uStSri
uStSrlbiis
uStSrIbiis
uStSrlbiis
Ah, uStttrS or u8t6r6 or ugtfir^ or
uStSrlbtLs
uStSrlbtLs
uStSribiis
uStfiri Mmn
uSt&i
221.1
Dluit-n^.
Mat^
Fen,
NmU.
N. diufis
diu^
diu^
F. augs
diu^
diu^
Ac. diidtem
diultem
diu^
G. diulti(s
diuItXs
diultis
D. dMfi
diultl
diultl
Ah, diultS or
diuiti dui
lt» or diuXti
[ diuItS or
'diultil
36
ADJBOTIYES*
Mate,
iT. dloItSS
V. diuttes
Ac, diultes
G, diultum
2>. diultlbiis
Ah. diultlbiis
PluraL
dioItSs
dioItSs
dilutes
diuttum
dlaltlbtLs
diultlbiis
Neui.
not found.
diidtum
dloltlbiis
diultlbiis
There is also in the poets a contracted form, dit- or diti- ;
whence K. m. f. dls, Ac. m. f. dltem, &c. ; but for the neater of
the N. y. Ac. sing. ditS, plur. dlti&.
222
TristiOs-
or tristiSr^ more hitter.
Sinffular*
Mate*
Fern,
Neui.
iV, tristiCr
tristi^r
tristiiis
F. tristiSr
tristidr
tristiiis
Ac, tristiSrem
tristiOrem
tristitis
G. tristiSils
tristi5rls
tristiSils
D, tristiOri
tristi5ri
tristiSri
Ah, tristiOrfi*
tristiOrS*
Plural
tristiCrfi*
Mato.
Fenu
NeuU
N. tristiOrSs
tnstiSres
trlsti9r&
F. tristiOrSs
tristi5res
tristi5r&
Ac, tristi5r3s
tristi5res
tristiorS
G, tristiSmm
tristiOmm
tristiQrum
2>. tristi5rlbiis
tristiSilbiis
tristiSrIblis
Ah, tristiOrlbiis
tristi5rlbiis
tristi5rlbiis
223 Adjectives whose crude form ends in a consonant rarely have
a neater plural.
224 Some adjectives have a crude form in t as well as that in o or
yohed^whtogdher or biiiigi-
cheerfvl ,« hU&ri-
bfiiigo-
hXl&ro-
imbedllo-
Xnermo-
infrCno-
un&nXmo-
v)ecik
unarmed
unbridled
cf-one-mind
* Seldom iritHM.
imbecilli-
Xnermi*
infreni-
fin&nXmi-.
sinnpizBS OF asjeotiybs.
37
o
H
Hi
<
fit
O
OQ
H
H
M
QQ
09
I
I
I
I
§
e
s
I
S
60
lodd '§)
3 c5 c5
333
60 60&P
a c a
•r* 'f 'r*
to
4
a,:S-. §ar3 §3i3 5^ 3 § § § ?^ §
;i3ll€-:S'sSS-S£l's''s'IS
I
3
s
c5
a §J§ S S I
4}SoSSeeoooSooe
llillii
.s
OVOOgvOO
•s§
COS
I
•* 'o .2 j= a
M O liH >M 1^
109
s
M c »
•« fc »
';3 ^
S'a -J -^'C .^ 'c 'c I '2 ^^"
^ — ^ "^»
II
38
sunrezES or adjmiitxb.
•I
i
H
>■
M
»
o
H
M
P
CO
g^ Urn fi d B O S V o A aS'u-^ SiS'^'^'P
i hi
tlir
Mil'
ll ii 1
irirtiisiijfll!
iiiliiilliifili!
kit
^iliJlHimj
iilj|Jiilli*iiiiiiiLiil*ii
mill'
ssss
iffls
I 1 1
lliiTliillllli
tt:l!liliii|
[lliill;i||lllt
f
iIIIijIIiIiJIIsiIi,!
lis
a
I
,i
lit
m
40 ADJBOTIYES.
226 Of these suffixes many are closely coimected: as, dc and de;
lif ri, and rio; bUi and hiri; utri and esti; uoo, itto, uo, and to,
from verbs ; dso and €690, <Sro.
227 In adding the suffixes, the last Towel of the preceding word
must not be neglected. Thus, with the suffix ino or no, the
following derivatiyes are formed :
BOma- JRome, BOmft-no- of Bovne,
p5mo- appUy &c., PdmO-na- (goddess) offruitr
m&ri- 9ea, m&rl-no- of the sea,
tribu- tribe, tr9tba-no- {commander) qf a tribe, tribune.
^ge- (verb) want, ^6-no- in want,
228 Or, with a slight change :
diuo- a god, (dxuoino-) diuino- bdoTigin^ to a god,
ulp^ra- a viper, (uiperaino-) ulpSrlno- belonging to a viper,
229 And, lastly, since is readily interchanged with a :
Pompeio- Pompey, Pompeift-no- hdoTiging to Pompey,
230 Now, as by far the greater number of Latin notms end in a or
0, and the latter itself is often changed to a, the result was, that
of the adjectives formed with the suffix %no or no, a large msgority
were found to end in ano» Hence dno was itself mistaken for a
suffix, and from mont- m^ourOain was formed montftno- belonging
to the mov/ntaina, dire. *
231 Again, as the nouns ending in or a, when the suffix Irao is
added, offcen suffer a contraction so as to form adjectives in ino^
and as the same termination resulted from adding the same suffix
to nouns in i, the consequence was that lw> was mistaken for a
suffix. Hence from ansSr- goose was formed ansSiIno- beUynging
to a goose, &c.
232 Similarly, with the suffix li, or after a preceding I, ri are
formed :
ancdra- anchor, ancdrft-H- of the anchor,
puella-^tr^, puella-ri- ^'r^Wifce. •
fltLuio- river^ flilui9.-lL- of the river,
pdptUo- state, p JJptUSrri- of the sanu state.
dui- citizen, cluI-H- liJke a cUieeii,
tribu- tribe, tribu-H- of the sama tribe,
fide- faith, iid^'h- faithful,
233 Again, of adjectives so formed, the greater number wiU be
ADJBOTIYBS. 41
found to end in dli or ari. Hence these were mifitaken for suffixes ;
and, accordinglj, from c&piit- Aead^ uirgdn- maid, rSg- kin^, &c.
were formed c&piit-&li-, uirgln-Sli-, r6g-&Ii-.
234 In the same way drio was supposed to be a suffix in place of
rio, and from carb5n- coal was formed carbdn-Srio- coal-decder,
235 Acyectives are also formed as follows : — a. By prefixing a par-
ticle to a substantive : as,
from In not, genti- or gent- nature, in-genti- tmnattiraly immense,
y, 89 apart, cord- hearty sS-oord- senseless^
yy 86 apart, cura- care, sS-cdro- unconcerned,
,y cdn together, mOni- share, com-mfini- common,
236 h. By prefixing a substantive or adjective to a substantive : as,
from c&p^TO' ffoaty -pi^- foot, dipTi']^ISdr aoat-footed,
y, (quMia.-) four, jpM-foot, qxMrfi-piSdr four-footed,
yy ceniumhtmdredym&DU-hand, ceniX'm&DO- himdred-handed.
„ magno- ffreat, finlmo- mind, magn-&nImo- great-minded.
,, mIsSro- u^etchedy cord* hearty mIsM-cord- tender-hearted.
237 c. By prefixing a particle to an adjective : as,
from In not, utXli- useful, Xn-utUi- useless.
„ p6r thorough, magno- great, per-magno- wry great,
y, ^TQjepreeminentlt/, dSro- bright, prae-clSro- verg illustrious.
238 d. By prefixing a substantive, adjective, or particle to a
verb : as,
fromtiiba- trumpet, cftn- sing, ttlbX-c&i- trumpeter,
y, parti- joar^, c&p- take, . "paxti-c^T^ partaking,
„ c&r6n- flesh, udra- devotMr, castil-\ij6ro- flesh-eating,
y, (b6no-) good, g8n- produce, bfini-g'no-* generous.
„ m&lo- had, dXc-t speak, mSJl-dlco- abusive.
„ de dovm, sSd- sit, dS-sXd- doihftd.
„ c5m udth, Qtt- obs,, go] c5m-Xt- accompanying.
239 Adjectives are also formed from prepositions. See the table
of words derived from prepositions, § 838.
COMPARATIYES AND SUPERLATIYES.
The suffixes which form the Comparatives and Superlatives are
so much used, that they must be spoken of more at length.
240 The simple adjective is said to be in the positive degree : as,
longo- or -a- long.
* Literally well-born. f See § 451. 1.
b2
42 ASJiorms.
241 • The comparatiye degree takes the suffix ids or iSr: as, kng
iOs-* or long-i5r- longer or more lon^.
242 The superlative degree takes the suffix ttmof or itno, iaaiiimei
or u8imo : as^ long-isstinio-^ hn^ett or fM>st hn^,
243 If the adjective ends in 4rOy &riy or ir, the superlative suffix:
is slightly changed : as, nIgSro- black, niger-rtbno- Uachest; llb^ro-
free^ llberrtlmo-; acSri- sharp, &oerriimo- ; c6l6ri- (j^ick, o&erriimo- ;
pai^Sr- poor, pauperriLmx>- ; uSt^ old, uSt^riimo-.
244 If the adjective ends in Ui, the superlative suffix is dightly
changed: as, f&cUi- easy, f&cil-liimo- easiest; difflctii- difficult,
difflcilltbno- ; gr&cXli- slender, gr&cilllimo- ; sXmfli- like, Btmilltimo- ;
diflfiYmYli- unlike, dis^dnillibao-.
245 The following comparatives and superlatives are irregular :
Pos, Comp, Sup,
bdno- ffood, m^lios^ better, optiimo- best.
m&lo- bad, pSiOs- (=ped-i5s^) tporse, pessttmo- worst,
mag-no- ^reat, mftios- ( » mag-i9s-)^rear^, maxiimo- greatest .
paruo- litde, minds- less^ mXniimo- leasts
multo- much, plus-t n. m^yre, plurlimo- n. TMSt,
multo-|| pL many, plur- pi. more, plurttmo-|| pL moat.
See also the table of words derived from prepositions, § 838.
246 Sometimes one or more of the positive, comparative, and su-
perlative are deficient : as,
Pos. Comp. Sup,
Oc^ios- quicker, 6c-issttmo- quickest,
nsqu-ios- worse, nequ-isstlmo- worst,
n5uo- 'ivew, ■ nSu-isstlmo- ^lewest,
faiUso- false, -. fels-issttmo- mast false,
ingenti- immense, ingent-i5s- m>ore immense,
de^d- slothful, dSsId-ios- more slothful,
iiluSni- yov/ng, iuniOS'* younger.
SSnios- cider has no corresponding positive : see § 207. 1.
* In adding the suffixes of the comparative and superlative the vowels
Of 0, t, at the end of the crude form of the positive are discarded.
i* The forms with u are the oldest. They were used by Terence, &c.f
down to Cicero, inclusive.
X From pie- * full,' the root of pie-no-, is formed ple-ios- contracted
into pious- and plus-. Compare the Greek irXc-tov and vKi-ov,
II These are used in the singular in poetry.
4d
NUMERALS.
247 OEtrdinal numbers answer to the question, qu5t ? (undedined)
hyw ffumy f as, one, two, three, <fec. ; or tdt (undecl.) so many.
248 Ordinal numerals state the plaoe occupied in a rank or series.
They answer to the question qudto- or -ta- N. qudttls, -t&, -tum ?
occwpying what place in the aeries ^ answer, first, second, third,
<Src. ; or t5to- or -ta- occupying tfwch a place.
249 Distributives answer to the question, qudteno- or N. pi. qu5-
tSnl, -ae, -& ? how many at a time f one <xt a time, two at a time,
<Src. ; or the preposition hy may be used, hy twos, hy threes, &c. ;
^ or the word each, as, two eachy three each, <Sro.
250 The numeral adverbs answer to the question, qudtiens or
qudtiSs ? how often f once, twice, thrice, four-4imes, &c. ; tdtiens
or t^ties so often.
251 Roman Symbols, — The symbols for 1, 10, 100, 1000, soem to
have consisted of one, two, three, and four lines respectively : viz.
I, X^ C> M ; for the last two of which the more easily written
symbols, O, and /i\ or A^ were afterwards substituted. The
mark for 1000 seems to have suggested those for 10 000, 100 000,
ko. viz. /^/^, or J^ Ak.i &o» The next step was to find sym-
bols for the halves of these numbers, and the most easy course
was to take the half of the symbols themselves. Thus, V, L, h
or K9 1^ or 1^, ^ or |ik.> severally denoted 5, 50, 500, 5000,
50 000» Lastly, modem printers found it convenient to use the
existing types for letters, to avoid the expense of new types for
the numerical symbols. Hence, in modem Latin books, we find
the letters I, V, X, L, 0, D,, M, and the inverted D, all used in
the representation of Latin numarals. It was probably an acci-
dent, that of these seven letters, two were the initials of the words
for which they stood : viz. and M, of centum and millS.
* No single £iigliiih word corre^onds to fuoUh. Such a form as
wkat'th, like j^-^A, sia^th, would best suit it.
I . lias
« itijilsliil
I3ili1rllllll1.
-i S'^'S
i II
fill
im
lit
lliallilaalSlii
l'lsfg1S9
Ji'illll*!
al^llllifili
;E:eeg«Hg'gafe6£BssS
1^ il S . Sill alls ail
Ifttit I . liHlll
lis la a _
ifrflttllll
H-wS I'll i'if"
I ililfllilllllHiiiii
ii-^frt
■tt|t|||||itjlntl
iS5SSSSSS8||||||S§||||
If
I*
I.
11
a if ^
mil
46 KUMEBALS.
253 Oardirud Numbers, — ^Those from quattu5r to centum, both in-
dueive, are not declined. Mlli- is both substantive and adjective.
If no smaller number accompany it, it is more commonly used as
a substantive. Hence the phrases mille hdmlnum or mille homi-
nes ; tri& milia hdmlnum, tri& mlli& trScenti hSmXnSs.
254 The three first numerals are declined. Uno- one makes G.
unltls, D. tinl. The other cases are regular. The plural is used
with those substantives which with a plural form have a singular
meaning : as, N. pi. 1in& castr& one camp,
255 Duo- dua- tvfo is declined thus : Plur. N. dud duae du5, Ac.
dud or duos, du&s, duS, G. duOrum du&rum duGrum or m. f. n.
duum, D. and Ab. du5biis duSibiis duobiis. In the same way
is declined ambo- amba- both, except as to the quantity of
ambo.*
256 Tri- three is declined regularly.
257 MiUi- or mlli- thousand is declined : Sing, for all cases millS,
Plur. N. Y. Ac. mlli&, G. milium, D. and Ab. mll][biis.t
258 From 13 to 19 there occur also dScem et trSs, ko. Between
20 and 100 there are two forms, viz. uiginti untLs or untLs et
uiginti, &c. Above 100, the greater number precedes : as, trS-
centi sexSgintS. sex or trSoenti et sexSgintSi sex.
259 The practice of prefixing the smaller number to the greater
in order to denote subtraction, as lY (one from five), IIX (two
from ten), extended also to the names. Ilence duddSulgintl, 18 ;
undsulginti, 19; duddetilgintS, 28; undetrlgintfi, 29; dudde-
qu&drSginta, 38 ; undSqu&drSgintS,, 39 ; and so on to duddScen-
tum, 98 ; undScentum, 99. Series of the same kind belong to the
ordinals, distributives and adverbs.
260 The high numbers were chiefly required for representing
money. Here abbreviations were found convenient. Thus nul-
Hons of sesterces were commonly denoted by adverbs alone, the
words cent€n& mlli& being omitted : as, d^ens ten limes {a hunr-
dred thousand) sestercesy that is, a million sesterces; ulciens ttocTUy
times &c,f or two million sesterces.
261 Ordinal Numbers. — From 13 to 19 there are also sometimes
found dSctimus tertiiis and dSctLmiis et tertiils, <fec. Between 20
♦ See Prof. Ramsay's Latin Prosody.
f A single / was preferred before the vowel « ; so that from uiUor ' a
farm' comes ut/lco- m. ' a &rm-bailiff.*
NUMEBALS. 47
and 100 there are two fonns, uloensfimus quartiis or quarttb et
ulcenstiiniis, <feo. For 21,31, 41, d^c, untLs et ulcenstbniis, ana
et uIcenstLm^ or Tinetulcensiim&, &o, frequently occur.
262 Digtribviive JVumerals, — ^These are also used as cardinal num-
bers with those nouns which with a plural form have a singular
meaning : as, N. binae aedes ttoo hotises, binae littSrae two letters
or epistles. Duae aedSs, duae HttSrae, would signify ttiH> temples,
two letters of the alphabet. With Gno- there could not be the same
confusion : hence un& Htt^rft, unae littSrae. signify respectiyely
one letter of the alphabet^ one letter or epistle. The distributiveflf"
are often used by the poets for the cardinals.
263 Adverbs. — Between 20 and 100 there are three expressions :
bis et ulciens, ulciens et bis, ulciens bis. Bis ulciens would
mean twice twenty or forty times,
264 There is a series formed from plica- a flat surface or fold,
answering to qu6ttt-pllci- or -pl6c-, N. qudtiiplex how many
foldf vi^ sim-pUci-t, dtt-pUci-, trl-pUci-, qu&drii-plici-, quincti-
pllci-, , septem-plld-, , , dScem-pUci-, and
centum-pUci-.
265 There is a series of similar meaning, with crude form end-
ing in plo' (=to our ftdl) and answering to quStiiplo- ? viz. sim-
plo-, dtlplo-, triple-, qu&driiplo-, quinciiplo-, , septtiplo-,
octiiplo-. '
266 There is a series with suffix rio formed from the distributives,
containing two, three, &c. : viz. , binario-, temario-, qu&-
tem&rio', quin&rio-, sSnSfio-, septSnario-, octonS.rio-, &c.
267 There is a series with suffix ra>, formed from ordinal series,
bdongin^ to the fvrst, second, <Src. : viz. prim&no-, sScundSno-, ter-
tiano-, &c. These terms are chiefly used to denote the legion to
which a soldier belongs. Hence, in the higher numbers are found
such forms in the nom. as tertia-dScfimSruiis, tertia-et-ulcens1im9r
niis ; where the feminine form of the first part seems to be deter-
mined by the gender of the Latin word ISgion-.
268 Fractions are expressed by the ordinal series with parti- or
* The distributives are also used in phrases of multiplication, as ^tMitor
qwni ' four times five men.'
f Not from Uni pltcat but from an old root tUm or sdm * one ;* which
is also found in singula', simplo', «tmt/t-, sineero-, s&nel, simui ; 6r. a/xa,
ovdofjLO-, airXoo- ; Eng. same ; Germ, sammlung, &c.
4d
PBOHomrs.
part- part expressed or understood : as, nom. |, terti& pars ; ^,
tres sept&nae.
269 But many shorter forms were employed. Thus, when the
numerator is one less than the denominator : as, nom. f , duae
partes, two parts out of three ; |, tree partes, three parts out of
fov/r, <&c,
270 Again, when the denominator is 12, the unit or whole being
represented by assi-, N. as (our ace\ the parts are
■f^ uncia- (our otmoe and inch)
•^ or ^ sextanti-, nom. sextans
•^ or ^ qu&dranti-, n. qu&drans
■j^ or ^ trienti-, n. triens
■^ quincunci-, n. quincunx
•^ or i semissi-, n. semis
•^ septunci-, n. septunx
•^ or f bessi*-, n. bes
-,1^ or } dodranti- (from d<S-quXdranti-)
■^ or f dextanti- (from ds-sextanti-)
4^ de-unci-, n. deunx
271 Fractions were also expressed by the addition or multiplication
of other fractions : as, nom. terti& septtLm&, i of ^, or ^ ; tertia et
septtlmS, i+l or ^,
'HT^Z >!iyed numbers were denoted by the Latin for the fractional
j^art accompanied by that number of the ordinal series which ex-
coeds by unity the given whole number. Thus, nom. 3^ is quadrans
quarttls ; 5]^, sSmis sexttis ; 2i, s6mis tertiils, or rather, by con-
traction, Bcstertiiis. The last quantity, viz. 21, was represented
in symbols by adding «, the initial letter of s6mis, to the symbol
for tioo, with a line running through the whole symbol, as in our
own !b, £y for pounds ; thus, 44^. But printers have found it
convenient to substitute the letters HS.
PRONOUNS.
273 P^mouns are, strictly speaking, substantives, adjectives, ad-
verbs, <Src., and therefore belong to those heads of grammar ; but
it is convenient to discuss them separately, partly because they
sometimes exhibit the suffixes in a more complete, sometimes in
a less complete form than other words belonging to the same parts
of speech, and partly because they are so much used.
274
PBOVOUNfl.
4
Pbbsohal PBOiroTnrs.
FIRAT PEB80N.
275 SEOOND PEBSON.
O.F. not known,* /, <&c.
C.P.
tSb- ^Aow, Jc.
Sing,
P/ttr.
Sing,
Plur
F, Sgo
nos
N, tu
u5s
F.
F. ta
uos
Ac, mS
n5s
Ac,\j^
u5s
^. mei
nostrum or
-ri
G, tul
nostmm or -ri
D, mihiormi
n5bis
D. tibi
udbis
Ah. me
nobis
^5. te
nobis
276 For the pronoun of the third person, viz. A«, ahe^ it^ the several
parts of the adjective eo- or i- are used.
277 The nominatives of these pronouns are not expressed unless
emphatic, because the personal suffixes of the verbs already denote
the persons.
Reflective Pboi^ouns.
278 Be^ective pronouns refer to the person or thing expressed in
the nominative case. In English the word sdf is used for this
purpose.
279 Reflective pronouns, from their very nature, can have no no-
minative or vocative.
280 In the first and second persons, the common personal pronoims
are used, viz. m6, mel &c., tS, tul <kc. For the third person the
several cases formed from the crude form s6b- self are msed with-
out any distinction for number or gender, to signify hirrmlf^ her-
9dfy itsdff themsdves.
C.P. s8b-t seif.
Ac. sS, G. sui, D. sibi, Ab. sS.
JRemarks on the Pronouns Eao, Tu, Se.
281 Ac. — Med and ted are used by old writers, as Phiutus, for mS
and t€. Md, te, sS, are also doubled, as m6m6, tete, sSsS. The
two first are rare, and only used to give cmphasiis. SSsd is not
uncommon. Mehe is an antiquated form for m3.
* Probably ifgHmift (corresponding to the Sanscrit a8mat\ or rather
mig^miiL Compare too the Greek ^/act- (for ly/ucr-) of rifjunpoSf implied
also in {J\^Ju^*s) itfieis.
f The same as the old English adjective sib * related,* still preserved
in Scotch. In Greek the form is <r«^, whence <r^c, <r^€Tc/>o», &o.
50
PA0N0U9S.
282 Q. — Mis and tis are antiquated forms, found in Plautus.
283 D. — Ml is rarelj used in prose writers. Me, tS or tlbe, s^y
are severally antiquated forms for mihi, tibi, sXbi.
284 Ab. — ^Med and ted are found in old writers.
285 G. pi. — These are merely genitives of the possessive adjectives
nostSro-, uostSro-. Indeed nostrdrum, uostrorum for the m , and
nostrarum, uostr&rum for the f., are found in old writers, yestrum,
uestn, with an e, are used by later writers. The genitives nostrl,
uostil are used only in the objective sense. (See § 927.) Nostrum,
nostrum are required in partitive phrases. (See § 922.)
285. 1 D. and Ab. pi. — Nis for n5bls is given in Festus.
Dbmonstrativb Pbonouns.
286 The three demonstrative pronouns are adjectives, which point
as it were with the finger to the place occupied : as, ho- this near
me, isto- that near you, illo- that yonder.
287
Illo- (older form 6lo-* or olio-) that yonder.
Sinffular.
288
289
290
Plural
Masc. Fern, NeuU
N, iUi iUae iUS
Ac, illos illas ill&
G, illorum illanim illorum
B, illls illis illis
Ah, illis illis illis
In the same manner is declined isto- that near you A
To the three demonstratives, and to the adverbs derived from
them, the demonstrative enclitic c^ or c ijmky lo) is often added
for the sake of greater emphasis.
Illo- with enclitic cS.
Masc.
N. illg
Ac. ilium
G. illliis
D. iUi
^5. ill5
Fern.
ill&
illam
illliis
ill!
ilia
Neut.
illiid
illiid
illliis
ill!
illo
Singtdar.
Plural.
Masc. Fern. Neut.
Masc.
Fern. Neut,
JV. iUlc illaec ill5c or illiic
JV. illicS
illaec illaec
Ac. illunc illanc illSc or illtic
Ac. illoscS
illascS illaec
G. ilHuscS illiuscS illiuscS
G. illorunc illarunc illorunc
i>4 illic illic illic
D. illiscS
illiscg illiscS
Ab. illoc iliac illoc
Ab. illiscS
illiscS illiscS
♦ See §1173.1.
f The Mss. often drop the t, as Hor. Ep. ii. 2. 163, nemp^ mUdo sto,
(See Lachmann^s Lucretius.)
X The dative illlo is only used as an adverb.
PBOirotTHS. 51
291 In nearly all those cases which end in c, the e may be added :
as, Ac. m. illuncS, &c.
292 In the same manner is declined is^o- with c&,
293 If, besides the enclitic cS, the enclitic nS whether is also added,
the first enclitic takes the form cl throughout : as, illl(^8 illae-
dnS illddnS <kc. ; istlclnS istaecInS istdcInS dire. ; hXcInS hae<^S
hSclnS &c.
294 Many of the cases from ho- alone, have disappeared from the
language, their places being supplied by those formed from ho-
with cS. Hence in part the irregularities of the following de-
clension.
295 Ho- thtSy partly with, partly without the su£Gix cfi.
Singular,
Plural.
Masc,
Fen,
Neut
Mate. Fern, Neut,
N.
h!c
baec
bdc
I^.
hi hae biaec
Ac,
bunc
banc
bdc
Ac,
bos has haec
G.
hHiiis
hiliiis
buiiis
G,
horum barum bOrum
J),*
hmc
hmc
buic
B,
bis bis his
Ab. hoc bac hoc i Ab, bis bis bis
296 Those cases which do not end in c, as here declined, may have
that enclitic added : as, G. htiiusc^ ; N. pL m. hlc^ f. haecS or
haec ; Ac. hosed, <bc.
297 An old form of the D. or Ab. pi. is hibtis.
298 The adverbs from illo- (or olo-) are ill5 or illGc or illUc to yonder
place f thither; illim or illinc from yonder place; illl or illlc in
yonder place, yonder, there; illSi or ill&c by yonder road, alonff that
line; and 5limt formerly or hereafter, in those days. See also
Table of words derived from prepositions.
299 The adverbs from isto- are, isto or ist5c or isttic to the place
where yo^ are, to your part of the comUry; istim or istinc from the
place where you are; isti or istic where you are; istSi or ist&c along
the place or cowntry where you are,
300 The adverbs from ho- are, hoc or hue hither, towards me;
bine hence, from me, from this time ; hic here, n/ear mjt ; bftc along
this road, by m/e; and si (very rare), more commonly sic, so, thus,
in this way,
* Hic is the form of the dative when used as an adverb.
t Unless oUm be the equivalent in form of our whUum, an old dative
of while, and signifying *at times.'
62 PBOiroirHfl.
LooicAL Pbonouhb.
301 Logical pronouns refer onlj to the words of a sentence. To
these belong i- or eo- this or tluU^ and qui- or quo- which^ &c.
302 I- or eo-* this or that.
lingular.
Mate, Fern, Neut,
N. U e& Id
Ac. earn, earn Id
G. Siiis Siiis Siiis
2>. el ei ei
Ab. e5 ^ e5
P/firaA
Mate. Fern. NeuL
N. nor I or raiher hi eae e&
Ac, eos eas e&
6r. e5nim eanim eorum
D, feis ils or is or rather \nafor aU ^en-
Ah, \ dera,
303 Old forms are N. hX8,t Ac. im or em, D. or Ab. pi. IbtLs and
e&biis.
304 The adverbs from i- or eo- are, e6 to this or to that pUxce or
degrw, thither ; indS (in compounds im or in, as ezim or exin)
from thisX yfrom that , thenoe; Ibi in or at this , in
that , there, then; eft alon^ this or that line or road; lt& thus^
so ; iam notp, already, at last,
305 Qui- or quo-§ which, what, who, any.
Sinffular.
Mate. Fern, Neui.
N. quXs or qui quae or qu& quid or qu8d
Ac, quem quam quid or qu5d
G. quoiiis or cuiiis ybr all genders
J), quoi or cui or cul/or aU gendere
Ah. qu5 cr qui qua or qui quo or qui
Plural,
MoMo. Fern, NmU.
iT. qui quae quae or qu&
Ac, quSs quS8 quae or qu&
^. qu5rum quarum qu5rum
D. -46. quibtis or quis ^br aU gendere,
* An older c.f. was in, whence in-^ adT. ' from this place.' Com-
pare the Greek cy-0cy, as illuRtrated by ouco-0cy, tfit-Btv,
f Fest .sub voce ' Muger.*
t For the blanks insert time, ftlaee, jv., as it may be.
§ An older c.f. was quin or ctm, whence un-di (for eund^, compare
$i-inindX) * from what place.'
PBOiroinrs. 53
306 Of the double forms, qui N. and quM are adjectives ; quis
commonly a substantive, rarely an a<yective ; quid a substantive
only.
307 Qui- or quo- is called a rdative when it refers to a preceding
word, as, the person who , the thing which , the knife with
which , <bc. . To the relative belong all the forms except quls
quft and quid.
308 It is called a direct interrogative when it asks a question, as,
who did it ? and an indirect interrogative when it only speaks of
a question, as, we do not know who did it. To the interrogative
belong all the forms, except qu&.
309 It is said to be used indefinitdy when it signifies any. In this
case it is placed after some word to which it belongs ; very com-
monly after si, n6, num, ec, &li. All the forms are used in this
sense, but qu& is more common than quae.
310 K. Ac. — Quls and quem in old writers are sometimes feminine.
311 ' G. D. — Quoiils and quoi are older than the other forms. They
appear to have been used by Cicero. An old genitive cul occurs
ili the word cul-cul-m5dl of whatever hind*
312 Ab.—QuI is the older form, and is only used by the later
writers in particular phrases : as, 1. quicum = quOcum m. or n. ;
2. without a substantive in the sense wherewith; 3. as an in-
terrogative, hy what means, how ?
313 N. pi. — QuSs is a very old form.
314 D. and Ab. pi. — Quls, sometimes written quels, is the older
form of the two.
315 The adverbs from quo- or qui- are, qu5 whither, to what ;
undS (formerly cundS) from what , whence; iibi (formerly
ciibi) in what , where, when; qua aUmg what road or lir^, ko.
316 The conjunctions from quo- or qui- are, quom quum or cum
when; quando when; quam how; quare (quS. r6) qutir or cor
why ; iit (formerly ciit) or iitl how, that, as; qu5d that, because, d;c.
Other Pronominal Adjectives, &c.
317 The following adjectives are derived from quo- or qui- : quanto-
how great; i\}jJS^' like what, of what kind; qu5t (imdeclined) how
many (whence qudtiens how often)*, qu5to- occupying what place
in a series,
318 From an old root, to- this, are derived the adjectives, tanto- so
great; t&li- liJee this, of this kind; t5t (imdecl.) so many (whence
f2
64 novomis.
t5tieiui 90 often) ; t^to- occupffing tkU plaee; also the acLyerbs tarn
90 ; tarn or (with the aiolitic dS) tunc then.
319 Of pronominal origin are, nam thtts or /or, and num now
(Qreek low), an old word still used in )$tiam-num even now, etiU^
and in ntldius tertiiis now the third day, two dayi ago. In com-
mon use the enclitic cS is always added, as, nunc now.
320 Ali is prefixed to many of the relative forms : as, iUXqui- any,
9om6 (emphatic), declined like qui- any; N. n. ilXquantnm eomey
a comiderable quantity; Ulqutft (undeclined) 999m, a eoneiderMe
number, &o,
321 Ec is prefixed: as, ecqui- &o. whether anyf ecquando whether
at any time ?
322 Num whether, Aif,rA not, are also prefixed: as, numqui-
whether any, slqui- if any, nequi- lest emy. N. nunquis, Slquls,
nSquXs, &c.
323 Of the adverbs formed from iUXqui-, n6qui-, numqui-, tfqui-,
many take the old initial e, as SJX-cilbi, &lX-cund6, &o.
324 Ytdro- (originally cii-tSro-) — g^ierally an inteiTOgative, which
of the two f and sometimes a relative, he of the two, who ; and after
81, either, as, fSL iitfiro- if either — has G. iLtrltts, D. iltrl. Hence
neutSro- N. neutSr, &c. (formeriy ne-cilt^) neither,*
325 Ipso- ipsa- sdf, very, is declined, K. ipsfis or ipsS ipsi ipsum,
Ac. ipsum ipsam ipsum, and the rest like iUo-.
326 The K. ipstLs is found only in old writers, as Terence. Aps^
or 'psS imdeclined is sometimes lound ia old writers instead of
the proper case of ipso- : as, re-apsS for re-ipsft, etmpsS for earn
ipsam, ^.
327 Alio- one, amtJier, has G. Ultts, D. &IiX, and N. and Ac. neut.
sing. Uiild, and the rest like iUo-. 'Erom a <amde form &li- are
daived the old N. m. f. &Us, n. ftUd, and the adverbs Uibi dee-
where, KUtfr otherwiee,
* The plural of those words which have the saffix tiro must be care-
fiiUy distinguished from the singular. Thus,
N. sing, iit^ which of the two individuals.
N» pi. Ulri which of the two classes, parties, nations, aimies, &c.
N. nog. alt^ one of the two indiYiduals.
N. pi. altiri one of the two classes, parties, nations, armies, &c.
N. sing. Utergui both of the two individuals.
N. pi. atriqui both of the two classes, parties, nations, armies, &c
K. sing, fitfttf^r neither of the two individuals.
N. pi. neutrl neither of the two classes, parties, nations, armies, &«.
PBOvoiTirs. 65
328 When &lio- is used in two following sentences, it is translated
by one , another ; or Mme , ^diers : as, ftlios
ildety ftlius l&oriimat one lauffhs, another cries ; ftliOs oaedlt, Slios
dimittit he kUU some, and lets others go,
329 When &lio- is used twioe in the same sentence, that sentence is
commonly translated twice over : as, iUiiLd &liO tempdrS one thing
at one tiraey another at arukher; or by each other : as, ttlii ftliis prO-
sunt they do good to each other.
330 AltSro- (from &li-) one oftwoy another of two, the second, has 6.
alt&iils, D. altSif ; but altBrltis occurs in poetiy.*
331 When altSro- is used in two following sentences, it is trans-
lated by the one , the other : as, alter ildet, alter ULcrtboat
the one laughs, the other cries,
332 When altSro- is used twice in the same sentence, it is com-
monly trandated by eachr-other : as, alt^r alt^rum uolnSiat each
woimdsthe other,
333 As 8Ii- and qui- form &Uqui-, so from aliSro- and tLtSio- is
formed altSr-tltSro- one of ike two, whidbi is declined in both parts ;
but elision generally taJces place if the first part end in a vowel or
m : as, N. alt^riit&r altSr'iitr& alt^r'iitrum <fec., but G. altSriiis-
iitrlils.
334 XJUo- any (a diminutive from uno- one) has G. uUxiis, D. uUl
<kc. It is accompanied by a substantive, and is used only in negi^
tive sentences. Hence nullo- none, declined like ullo-.
335 Many enclitics are added to the pronoims to give emphasis to
them : viz.
336 Quidem : as, Squid-em, for Sgd quXdem lot least.
337 Mdt: as, ^dmSt Imgsdf ; uosmSt you yoursdves. It is com-
monly followed by ipsS : as, suismSt ipsi praesSdils they theTosehes
with their own troops,
338 TS, only with the nominative tfl : as, tILtS thou ihysdf,
339 CS, only with the demonftxative pronouns. See §§ 286-300.
340 Pots : as, ut-pStS vfumnMck ««, as.
341 PtS, in certain old forms : as, mihiptS, meptS ; and above all
with the abkitives, meoptS, meaptfi, suoptS, snaptS, <fec.
342 Dem, with tibie pronoun i- or eo- : as, i-dem the same. The
N. m. drops the s, but leaves the vowel long ; the IS, and Ac.
neut* take no d, and have the vowel short In the Ac. ang. and
* See note p. 54.
66 PKONOirirs.
G. pi. tbe final 971 becomes n before d. Thus, N. Idem e&-dem
Idem, Ac. eun-dem ean-dem Idem d;c. So also with \X»ty ti$tl-
dem (undecl.) precisdy cu many ; and with tanto-, K. m. tantus-
dem, <S?c. of ike savne magnitude,
343 Dam, with quo- or qui-. N. qui-dam qu8D-dam quid-dam or
quod-dam, Ac. quen-dam quan-dam quid-dam or quod-dam <fec.
a certain person or thing. It is used when a person cannot or
will not state whom or what he means, and often serves to soften
adjectives which would express too much: as, dlvln& quaedam
6l0quenti& a certain godlike doquence^ a tort of godlike doqitence,
I had almost said a godlike doqtience. From quidam is derived
quondam at some former or future tim£y formerly ^ hereafter.
344 Quam, with quo- or qui- : as, N. quisquam quaequam quid-
quam or quicquam <S?c. any^ in negative sentences. It is com-
monly used without a substantive. See ullo- above. From quisquam
are formed the adverbs imiquam or unquam (originally cimiquam)
ever; from whence nunquam never ^ nS-qulquam in vain, haudquS.-
quam in no way, by no mean^s, neutlquam or rather niltlquam in
no way, by no m^ans, usquam any where, nusquam ru> where,
345 Piam (probably another form of preceding suffix), with que-
er qui- : as, N. quispiam quaepiam quidpiam or quodpiam ^q, any
(emphatic). From qui-piam comes the adverb uspiam any where.
346 Nam : as, N. quisnam or quinam quaenam quidnam or quod-
nam <&c. who, which ? in interrogations (emphatic) ; and N. iiter-
nam which of the two f in interrogations (emphatic).
347 QuS (this enclitic is probably a corruption of the relative
itself) : as, N. quisquS quaequS quidquS or quodquS <&c. everyy
each; whence the adverbs iiblquS every where, imdIqu6/rom every
side, iitlquS any how, at any rate, usquS every step, every moment;
also N. iiterquS iitrSquS iitrumquS each of two, both,
348 QuisquS in old writers is used in the same sense as quIcunquS.
349 QuisquS is generally placed — 1. after relatives and relative
coi\jimctions : as, ut quisquS uSnit as each arrived; 2. after reflec-
tive pronouns : as, prO s6 quisquS each for himself; 3. after super-
latives and ordinal numerals: as, optiLmus quisquS all the best
men, dSciimus quisquS every tenth man, qudtus quisquS t {every
how mmiyeth) how few f
350 CumquS or cunquS (an old variety of quisquS) : as, N. qul-
cunquS quaecunquS quodcunquS <fec. whoever, whosoever, whichever,
whatever: so also N. iitercunquS iitrftcunquS iltrumcunquS &c.
PKOKOUNB. 67
whichever of the two ; N. m. quantiucunquS &c. kow great soever,
quandOcunquS whensoever Isc. OunquS may be aeparated from the
other word : as, qui me cunquS uldit iohoever eaw me, QuleunquS
is rarely used as an indefinite, any whatever.
351 Yls (thou wis/iesty from udl- wink) : as, K. qulnls quaeuls quid-
uls or quoduls <S?c. any one you please (the best or the worst), a
universal affirmative ; whence quamuls ae much aeyouplecuey no
matter how , though ever so ; and iiteruls tLtr&uIs iitrum-
uls whichever of the two you please,
352 Lilbet or llbet (itpleaseth) : as, N. m. qulliibet &o, any one you
please ; and N. m. tLterliibet &c, whichever of the two you please,
353 Relative forms are often doubled. Thus, qui- doubled : as, N.
m. quisquls,^ n. quidquld or quioquld whoever y no matter who;
whence cuIcuImSdl, a genitive, of whatever K/u^and qu5qu0 mMo
in any way whatever,
355 Quanto- doubled : as, N. m. quantusquanttLs <S?c. how great
soever y no matter how great,
356 Qu&li- doubled : as, K . m. quSJisqu&Us &c. whatever-like, no
matter what-like,
357 Qu5t doubled : as, quotqudt (undeclined) how many soever,
no matter how many,
358 So also there are the doubled adverbs or conjunctions : quam>
quam however, no matter how, although, and yet ; iltiit however,
no matter how ; quoquo whithersoever ; undSundS whencesoever ;
tlbiiibi wheresoever; quSquS. along whatsoever road,
POSSESSIVB PaONOUlfS.
359 Meo- mea- mine, my,
Tuo- tua- thine, thy, your, yours (referring to one person).
Suo- sua- his, hers, her ; its ; theirs, their,
KostSro- nostSra- ours, our ; K. nostSr no6tr& nostrum ^.
VostSro- uostSra- or uestSro- uest^- yours, yov/r (referring to
more than one) ; N. uostSr uostr& nostrum &c.
Ouio- cuia- whose,
360 These are all declined regularly, except' that the m. Y. of meo-
isml.
361 Suo- is a reflective pronoun, and can only be used when it re-
fers to the nominative (see § 280). In other cases his, her or its
must be translated by the genitive SiQa from i-, and their by the
genitive e5rum or e&rum.
* No special form for tlie femiiiifl^ in use.
58
PBOKOUNS.
362 The adjective cCLio- is rarely met ynih, the genitives cuitlSy
quorum, qu&rum, being used in its place.
363 The possessive pronouns, if not emphatic, are placed after the
noim they belong to. If they are emphatic, they are placed before it.
364 ' From the possessive pronouns are derived :
Kostr&ti- or nostr&t-, N. nostras of owr country,
Vostrati- or uostr&t-, N. uostrS.s of your country,
OtiiS.ti- or cui&t-, N. cui&s of whose country,
365 Formed in the same way are infiim&ti- hdonging to the loipest,
summftti- hdonging to the highest. All these are declined like
Arpln&ti- or Arpln&t- hdonging to Arpinum,
366
Table of Pronominal Advebbs.
Ending in
M or 1, dat.
d(=om)acc.
d«(=M*
old gen.
a, abl. fern.
Meaning
where
whither
whence
alonff what
road
ho-
hic
h5,t hoc,: hue
hinc
h&c
isto-
isti, istic
i8t5,i8t0c,tisttLC
istim, istinc
ist&, ist&c
iUo-
im,imo
ills, ill5c,: illuc
illim,illinc
ill&, iUac
i- oreo-
Ibf
eO
iudS
eS.
i- or eo- + dem
Ibidem
e5dem
indldem
e&dem
qui- or quo-
iibf
qu5
iindS
qua
dtfiro-
titrSb!
iitr5
iitrindS
iitrS.
aiio-
aiiiibf
&U5
&Uund8
ftlift
&U-
&llb!
altSro-
altro§
altrind$(1) |
neutSro-
neutriib!
neutrO
&li- + qui- or quo-
ftllcilb!
ftUqud
ftUcundS
&llqu&
si + qui- &c.
slctibi
slqu5
sIcundS
8lqu&
nS + qui- <fec.
nSciib!
n6qu5
nScundS
nSquS.
num+qui- &c.
numcHbi
numquo
qui- doubled
tibitlb!
qu5qu5
undeundS
qu&quS.
qui- or quo- + UTR
iibluTR
quouls
undSuIs
qu&uls
qui- <fec. + liibet
iibUiibet
quOliibet
undSlUbet
qualiibet
qui- &c. + qu6
tiblqufi
quOquSt
undlquS
1it5ro-+qu6
iitrSblquS
iitrOquS
iitrinquS
tttraquS 1
qui- <fec. + quam
•
quoquam
quaquam**
qui- <fco. + nam
iiblnam
qu5nam
qi:^ijiam
• See §790.
J Occurring in horsum for ho-uornun • hitherwarda.
Less used than the other forms.
§ Occurring in etlird-uors&s ' towards the other side.'
II Virtually occurring in altrins^c&s * from the other side.*
% In guoqiiifuorsiia ' in every direction.'
••In nequaqueun and haudqudqwtm ' in no way, by no means.'
59
VERBS.
367 An active verb denotes action, that is, movement : as, caed-
feU, ctU or strike, ciir- run,
368 The person (or thing) from whom the action proceeds is called
the nominative to the verb.
369 The object to which the action is directed is called the accusa-
tive after the verb,
370 A verb which admits a nominative is caiMedpersoncd: as, caed-
strike ; whence uir caedXt the man strikes,
371 A verb which does not admit a nominative is called impersonal :
as, t5na- thunder ; whence tdn&t it thunders,
372 A transitive verb is one which admits an object or accusative
after it : as, caedit puSrum he strikes the boy,
373 An intransitive verb is one which does not admit an accusative :
as, ciir- run ; whence currlt he runs,
374 The object of a transitive verb may be the agent himself: as,
caedo me I strike mysdf, caedis te you strike yoursdf, caedit sS h^
strikes himself, &c. A verb is then said to be used as a reflective,
375 In Latin a reflective suffix is added to a transitive verb, so as
to give it the reflective sense : as, uert5 I turn, uertSr I turn my-
self ; uertis you turn, uertSrls you turn yoursdf; uerbXt he turns,
uertltiir he turns himsdf,
376 A reflective verb then denotes an action upon oneself, and in
Latin is conjugated in the imperfect tenses with a suffix s or r,*
It will be denoted by an r between brackets : as, uert-(r.) turn
onesdf,
377 The perfect tenses of a reflective verb are supplied by the verbs
^- and fu- be, united with the participle in to-,
378 An intransitive verb is generally in meaning reflective : as,
cikr- run i. e. put OTiesdf in a certain rapid motion, ambiila- walk
• This suffix is no doubt the pronoun se ' self,' which, as it is not limited
in number and gender, was probably at first not limited in person. In
some of the Slavonic languages the same pronoun is actually applied to
all the persons ; and in the Lithuanian the reflective verb is formed from
the simple verb through all the persons by the addition of «. The inter-
change of B and r has been seen already in the nouns; another example
presents itself in uert^r-U^ which is formed from vertts^ precisely as the
gen. pulu^r-U from the C.f. puluts, and the old pi. gen. nttcir-um (see
§ 8/)) from the sing. gen. nucts. So also tapidSrum, regSrum (Charisius,
p. 40 Putsch.), bouirum ^Cato B. R. 62j.
60 YBBBS.
i. e. jyiU onesdf in a certain moderate motion ; but as the object in
these cases cannot easily be mistaken, no reflective pronoun or
suflSx is added.
379 When the source of an action (i. e. the nominative) is not
known, or it is thought not desirable to mention it, it la common
to say that the action proceeds from the object itself. A reflective
so used is called a 'passive : thus uertXttbr, literally, he ttims him-
gdf, is often used for he is turned,*
380 This passive use of a verb with a reflective suffix is more
common than the proper reflective use.
381 The nominative to the passive verb is the same as the accusa-
tive after the transitive verb, caedunt puSrum they strike the boy,
or caedXtur puSr the boy is struck,
382 Hence passive verbs can be formed only from transitives.
383 An impersonal passive verb however is formed from intransi-
tivest : as, from ndce- do damage^ ndcStiir dainage is done; from
resist- stand in opposition, offer resistance, r&istXttir resistance is
offered. When the intransitive verb can be thus expressed by an
English verb and substantive, the passive impersonal maybe trans-
lated by what is also strictly impersonal, the person who does the
damage, or offers the resistance, <&c. not being mentioned. At
times this is impracticable, and it is necessary to use the word
they OT people with the active, as from i- yo, Itiir they go,
384 Transitive verbs also may form a passive impersonal : as, from
die- say, dicXtiirt they say ; but in this case the words of the sen-
tence that follow dicXtiir may perhaps be considered as a nomina*
tive to it. See Syntax, § 1240.
* Many European languages will afford examples of this strange use
of the reflective ; as the German : Dtu versteht sich von aelbst, ' that is
understood of itself;* the French : Le corps »e trouva, *the body was
found i* the Italian : Si loda fuomo modesto, * the modest man is praised ;*
the Spanish : Las aguas se secaron, * the waters were dried up.' There
is 8ometi)ing like this in our own language : the chair got broken in the
scuffle. Nay, children may often be heard to use such a phrase as the
choir broke itself.
f Where the action of an intransitive verb is to be expressed without
mentioning the nominative, the artifice of supposing the action to proceed
from the object is of course impracticable, because an intransitive verb
has no object. Here a second artifice is adopted, and the action is sup-
posed to proceed from itself ; thus, nocetur^ literally translated, is * damage
does itself/
X In Italian, «t dice ; in Spanish, se dine. In German it is expressed
by man sagt^ ^ man says;' from which the French have literally translated
their on dit, originally horn dit.
61
385 A itatic verb denotes a state : as, te- i^, doimi- deep^ i&ce- lie^
uigfla- he awctke, m^ta- fear.
386 Static yerbs genenJIj end in e^ by which ihey are sometimes
distlngoished from acidve verbs of nearlj the same form and
meaning: sls,
i&c- or i&ci- throw^ i2lce- lie,
pend- hanff or siMpendy pende- hartff or he stupended.
Bid- (sidSre) alight or sink, sSde- dt or ie seated.
€&p^ or o&pi- toi&«| h&be" hold or AavSk
possid- enter upon poueuiony posslde- pooosMS,
feru- hoUy feme- hehoUinghoU
[cand- M^ oTi^rtf], cande- d^osie, <& c&le- he hot.
tend- stretchy strain^ tSne- A(7^ ^t^A^.
alba- whiien^ albe- d^wAite.
387 A static Imperfect is nearly equivalent to the perfect of an
active : as, possSdXt he hu taken pouestion, and possldet he pos-
sesses or is in possession; possSdSrat he had taken possession^ and
pos^debat he possessed or v^as in possession ; posaSdSiit he will
have taken possession^ and possldsbit he wiU possess or he in pos-
session,
388 Hence many static verbs in e have no perfect ; and even in
those which appear to have one, the perfect by its meaning seems
to belong to an active verb. Hius frige- he cold is said to have
a perfect frix-. The compoimd rSfrixit does exist, but not with
a static meaning : thus ulnum rSfrixit the wine got or has got
cold again, The form <d the peifeot itself implies a present rS-
ftlg-, not r6£nge-.
389 Hence two perfects £rom active verbs are translated as static
imperfects : as, gno^ or gno-so- examinsy whence perf. gnOuit he
has examined or he knowsy gnOuSrat he had examined or he knew;
consne- or consnese* acquire a hahit or accustom oneself y whence
perf . consueuit he has acquired the habit or is accustomedy oonsue-
n&at he had acquired the habit or was accustomed,
390 Two verbs have only the perfect in use, and these translated
by English imperfects of static meaning, viz. od-'*', m6mln-, whence
Sdit he hatesy odSrat he hatedy Od^rlt he will hate; mSmlnit he
* These imply an imperfect crude form Hd- or Hdi- * take an aversion
to,' whence Sdio- sb. n. * hatred ;' and m^n- 'mind' or ' notice,' whence the
sb. f. men-ti' or ment- * mind.'
62 TEBBBf
rememherSf mSmXn^rat he remmbertd^ mtolnSrit he wW, ftfiMmr
her.
391 Static verbs are for the most part intransitiye ; but some are
transitive, as those which denote possession, h&he- hold, tSne- hold
tight, keep, posslde- poseesi, sci- know; and verbs of feeling, as,
&ma- lave, time' f ear •
Ibbbgitlabitixs 0¥ Form ajsd Mbanino.
392 A static intransitive has sometimes a reflective or passive per-
fect. Such a verb is commonly called a Neuter-Pastive : as.
Lot.
English,
Pres, 3 peri* Perf, 3 pert, mate.
aude-
dare,
audet ausiis est.
gaude-
refoice,
gaudet g^ulsiis est.
fld-
trust.
f idU f IstLs est.
sWe-
he teont.
stflet sSllttLs est.
To the same
\ class belong several impersonal verbs of feeling,
&c. : viz.
TnYsSre- denoting j9t^,
mXsSret mMrltom or mlsertum est.
ptLde- „
^me,
piLdet piiduit or piidXtum est.
pXge- „
reltictance.
plget plgoit or plgltnm est.
taede- „
weariness,
taedet taeduit or per-taesum est.
liibe- „
pleasure,
liibet ItLbnit or ItLbXtiini est.
pl&ce- „
approhation, pl&cet pl&cuit or pl&cltum est.
lice- „
permission,
licet Ucoit or Udttom est.
394 Some transitive verbs are used without a reflective pronoun or
suffix, yet with a reflective or intransitive meaning : as, fortun&
uertSrat/or^t^ntf had turned i. e. had turned hersdf. In these cases
the pronouns me, tS, 86 &c. are said to be understood.
395 This use of a transitive form with a reflective or intransitive
meaning is more common in the perfect tenses : as, rSuertlttir he
retwns, rSuertebftttLr he toas returning, rSuertetiir he wiU return;
but rSuertit he has returned, rSuertSrat he had returned, rSuertSrlt
he will have returned. So deuertlttLr he turns out of the road into
an inn, but dQuertit (perf.) he has done so ; planglttLr he heats him-
self, but planxit he has heaten himsdf
396 Some of the principal verbs which are thus used with both
a transitive, and reflective or intransitive meaning, are the fol-
lowing:
TBBB8.
63
Lot, Trans.
Ifiiremt.
Lai. Trans.
Intrant,
inl$ue- move,
move.
plang- heatf
heat oneself.
auge- increcuey
increcue.
indpi- beffifhy
begin.
]axa- looien,
get loose*
inclTna- darU,
slant.
l&ua- wash.
wash.
abBtlne- keep away.
abstain.
mutSL- change,
ehmige.
r^TnYt- let go again,
rdax.
8ta- set upf
ttcmd.
suppSdXta- heepjdling vp,
abound.
rur ptUinvioleni
t ru«A.
^TBddlpitSL-throw headlong^
, rusk head-
motion^
long.*
397 In some verbs the transitive meaning, though originally be-
longing to the word, has become nearly or quite obsolete, as in
pr5pSra- hasten^ trans, or intrans., prdpinqua- make near or ap-
proach,
398 The reflective form seems to have been originally given to some
verbs to denote redprocal action : as.
amplect-lmur we embrace each other,
conulcia-miir we abuse each other.
we talk together.
we talk together.
we wrestle together.
we kiss each other.
fabiilft-miir
16qu-imiir
lucta-miir
OBCiila-miii
paril-miir we share together.
pToelm-miixwe^ht each other.
rixa-miir we snarl at each other.
flolSrmiir we comfort each other,
sorti-mttr we cast lots together.
sauia-miir we kiss each other.
399 Many reflective verbs are translated by an English intransitive :
as, prdfXc-isc- (r.) set out, laeta- (r.) rejoice, which have still a re-
flective sense. These are called Intransitive Deponents,
400 Many reflective verbs have so far thrown off the reflective
meaning, that they are translated by an English transitive and
take a new accusative : as, mira- (r.) admire, uSre- (r.) fear, am-
plect- (r.) embrace, indu- (r.) doihe onesdf, put on, sSqu- {^^foUow,
Imlta- (r.) make onsdf like, imitate. These are called Transitive
D^onents,
401 Some intransitive verbs, by a slight change of meaning, are
used transitively : as, from horre- bristle or shudder, hoiret tSn6-
brfts he dreads the dark; m&ne- wait, m&net aduentum eitis he awaits
his arrival; die- smell, diet unguentft he smdls of perfumes. This
* It is m this way that /i-, only a shortened fonn of fSci-, first sig-
nified * make myself,' and then ' become' or ^ am made.' It is indeed pro-
bable that the c in/dcio was not always pronounced. This would account
for its disappearance in the Italian infinitive yiire and French /a<r«; and
would also account for the fieict that^S is commonly long before a vowel,
aafl-o ' I am made,' for^t-o*
04
is paiiicularlj the case with Bome neuter pronouns : as, from
ttbOra- lahattTy id l&bOrat he Ul<dwwring at tkU. (See § 909.)
402 IntnuusitiYe verbs may have an acoosatlve of a noun which has
the same meaning : as, nitam ifloondam molt he is living a cfe-
lightffd life. This is called the OoffnaU Aeouaative (§ 894).
403 IntransitiTd verbs when compounded sometimes become transi-
tiye : as, ufld-* goy Solid- go tmty escape; whence fluftdfo^ pM-
ctQO or ex pMcttld to make onde ioay <wi of dangery or Qu&dM
pSilcttlam to escape danger ;-^\i6Tdr oomsy oonufoi- come toge-
thcTy meet; whence oonuSnIre Ulquezn to meet one, to go and see
a person;— gjMr or gr&di- (r.) march, ^grSd- or 5gr6di- (r.)
march ovsty leave; whence 6gr8di urbS or ex urbS to march o'^ of
the citgy or Qgr^ nrbem to leave the city,
404 Some transitive verbs when compounded take a new transitive
sense, nearly allied to the original meaning, and thus have a double
construction : as, da- pui, drcumda- pvi rotmd or surround;
whence circumdSrS mOrum urbl to throw a wdH rormd the city, or
drcumdftre urbem mtirO to sttmmnd the city with a waU;-^
sSr- sow or planty insSr- plani in, graft; whence insSrSrS pirum
om5 (dat.) to graft a pear on a wild ash, or insSrSre omum plr5
(abL) engraft a wHd ash vnth a pear; — du-^t^, indu- piit
on, doihe; induSrS uestem &llcul to put a dress on one, or induSre
ftUquem uestS to doihe one with a dress,
405 The verb then has two forms or voices : the simple voice (com-
monly called the active)y which does not take the reflective suf-
fix; the reflective voice (commonly called Hhe passive) ^^ which does
take it.
«
PiBflovAL SurriXES vo Ybbbs.
406 In En^ish the pronouns /, you or thou, he, she, tty &c. are
prefixed to a verb. In Latin, as in Greek, little syllables with the
same meaning are attached to the end of a verb so as to form one
word with it.
407 The Greek verb in its oldest shape fbrmed from the pronouns
me- 971^, su- or tu- thoUy and to- this, the three suffixes mt, sty ff,
or, with a short vowel prefixed, dmty fyi, iSt%,'\^ Now the Latin lan-
guage has its personal suffixes not unlike these : viz. dm, is^ U^
* See §451.1.
t Compare the old verb ci|it (t tf*/Ai)» t (r-ffi, €r«ri, with the old reflec-
tive verb TvnT-o/A-oi, TwirT-f(r-oi, tottt-ct-^oi.
tlEB0. 06
408 The suffix dm, belonging to the first person, is but little altered
in sum ("Ss-um) lam^ or in inqu-am* liatf,
409 More commonly the suffix om undergoes one of two changes.
Either the m is lost, as, scrlb-o IwriUy for scrtb'omf; or, if a
vowel precede, the o sometimes disappears, leaving the m, as,
BcnbSba'm Ivhxs writing,
410 The final o of the first person is always long in Yirgilt, but
common in later poets.
411 The suffixes of the second person, if§, and of the third person,
i^, also lose their vowel, if the verb itself end in one. Thus,
fidlb-Xs you write, and scilb-it he wrUes ; but scilbeb&'s you were
writing, Sr&'s you jiUyagh, scilbeba*t Ke woe ioriting, &ra't he
jploughe. So also the i is lost in fers you bring, fert he hringe; te
(for te-Is) you are, eat he is; and uolt he wishes,
412 When the suffix & thus loses its vowel by contraction, as,
Sra-It, &rat he ploughs, it might be expected that the syllable
would be long ; but it is in fiict nearly always short. Still in the
reflective the right quantity is preserved, sctlbeb&t-ttr, ftr&-tiir;
and the old poets, including even Virgil, have examples of a long
quantity in such words as vers&t, augeftt, accXdSt.
413 The form of the second person suffix in the perfect is ^ for ^ .*
as, scripsis^tl you have written,
414 The suffixes of plurality for the nouns were s and um, (See
§ 52.) Those employed for the verbs are nearly the same.
415 From dmS and s is formed the double suffix dmis * we' for the
old Greek verb. The old Latin prefers i^t2«, as in uSl-iUniis we
' fm4, stbntLs (^^-tbniis) we ar^, ' quaes-iLmiis we ask. Commonly
UnUs is written, as scrlb-Xmiis we write.\\
* The English language still retains a trace of the first person sufiix
in the verb am,
t See the adverbs of motion towards, where om final is similarly
lednced to o.
t Spondeo and netcio appear to have a short o in Viigil, hut in reality
are to be considered as words of two syllables, spondo or apondyo and
netcyo, Sdo in Italian has become so,
§ The English language still retains its suffix of the second person
est J and of the third person eth or «, as ia sendesi and sendeth or sends,
ii See the same interchange of <{« us and ^mus in the superlatives
($ 242), and in the ordinal numerals (§ 252). Nay the Emperor Au-
gustus wrote simus (i. e. stm^) for sumus in the indicative.
O 2
416 He Yis lost after a TOwel t ai^ 0QrlMbft*]|i1is w$ i^ere writing^
ftrft-mtLs v>e plougJu
417 From iu or ti and < ia formed the double suffix tU * you' (pi.) ;
or, with a short vowel prefixed, Uii •• as, scilh-XtXs yot« (pi.) torUe,
418 The prefixed % is lost after a vowel ; as, soiibeba-tls yoti (pi.)
were writing, &r&-tXs you (pL) pUmgh, So also iu es-tXs yp« ore,
fer-tXs you hring^ and uol-tis you wUh,
419 The syllable attached to the verb to form the third person
plural is urU : as, scilb-unt they write.
420 The u is always lost if the verb end in a or «, and sometimes
if it end in u Thus, scrlbebarnt they were uniting, scrlbe-nt they
wiU write^ scripsSri-nt they will have written / but audi-unt they
hear.
421 In the imperative mood the suffixes of the second person sin-
gular and plural change the ie into ^, and UU into US: as, scrlb-8
and scrlb-ItS w^He, scnbXt5-t£ ye shall write,*"
422 The final ^is lost after a vowel : as, &r& phugh; also hi 9Sx
hring, f&o make, die eay, dfLc lead, te he.
MQpi>9f ^p.
423 The iffidieative mood is used for the main verb of a sentence,
whether it be affirmative, negative^ or interrogative. It is alBO
used in some secondary sentences*
The indicative mood has no special suffix*
424 The imperative mood ^ommande^ Its suffix in the future tense
is the fiQrllable tQovUd: as, scilb-ltO thofu shalt write.
426 The two tenses of the imperative are commonly united aa one.
427 The mbjunctive mood, as its name implies, is used in second-
ary sentences subjoined to the main verb.
428 In some sentences it is not uncommon to oniit the main verb,
and then the subjunctive mood eeem^a to agmfy power, ]j>ermiHi9fh
duty, wish, purpose^ reeuU, aU^oHoni hypotheeie; whereas in &ct
these notions rather belong to the verb which is not expressed.
Thus the phrase. Quid f&dam t is translated by Whai should I
dof ot What ami to do t But the full phrase is Quid uis ^iam?
Wha^ do you wish m^ to dof
* So in the Greek, eren tbe indicatiye has nnrrcre for rvwr^ns.
Compare also the double foriLS trit^ and tnMU, magU and magi, and
above all the second persons of lefiectiTe Yorbs: uidertt, uideri; uM^-
bartt, videbarif &e.
4Si9 The laffiz of the Bahjunotive mood oannot be easQy separated
from those of the subjunctiye tenses. *
430 The infinitive mood is also used in seoondary aentenees sub-
joined to the main verb. It difPers from the subjunctlTe in tbftt it
does not admit the personal suffixes to be added to it.
431 The suffix of the infinitive mood is W or A*^: as, ee-«tt i0 he,
•cilVM to write.
432 The infinitive mood may also be considered as a neuter sub-
stantive undeclined, but differing from other substantives in that
it has the construction of a verb with a noun following.
433 The tupinea are the accusative and aUative cases of a maseuliae
substantive formed firom a verb with the suffix Uu or tu, !%• tuy
cusative supine ha4 ocoasionally the construction of a wb with
the noun following.
434 The accusative supine is in many grammars called the supine
active ; and the ablative supine, the supine passive.
435 The gerund is a neuter substantive farmed from a verb with
the suffix endo or unda; of which the first vowel is lost after a
and e. In the old writers it has the construction of a verb with
the noun following*
436 A participle is an adjective in form, but differs from acyectives,
first, because an adjective speaks of a quality generally, while a
participle speaks of an act or state at a particular time ; secondly,
because a participle has the construction of a verb with the noun
following.
On Tekses in oenebal.
437 Tense is another word for time. There are three tenses : pcut,
j>re»ent, taidfuUtire,
438 The past and future are boundless ; the present is but a point
of time.
439 As an act may be either past, present, or future, with respect
to the present moment, so yesterday had its past, present, and
future; and ta-merr<m again will have its past, present^ and
future.
Thus, first in reference to the present moment, we have : Past,
he has written to A; Pres. he is writing to B; Fut. he isyoin^to
write to 0.
Secondly, in reference to yesterday or any other momflpt now
68
TBBB8.
gone by : Past, he had written to D; Pres. he vxu writing to E;
Fat. he was going to write to F,
Thirdly, in reference to tomorrow or any moment not yet
arrived : Past, he will have written to O; Pres. he wiU be writing
to H; Fut. he wiU he going to write to L
440 Or the same ideas may be arranged as follows :
Aotion finished, or peffect: at a past time, he had written to
D; at the present moment, he has written to A; at a future time,
he wiU have written to G*
Action going on, or imperfect : at a past time, he was writing
to E; at the present moment, he is writing to B; at a future time,
he wiU be writing to ff.
Action intended : at a past time, he was going to write to F;
at the present moment, he is going to write to C; at a future time,
he win be going to write to I,
441 Or lastly, the same ideas may be represented by the lines in
the following diagram :
PAST TIMB.
VUTUBB Tins.
t
a
/-
k*
m*
^^
g p t
A point in the vertical line pp denotes present time ; a point
in gg denotes yesterday or some past time ; a point in &, tomor-
row or some future time.
The several horizontal lines a, b, e, &o. denote the time occu-
pied in writing to Ay By (7, <kc. respectively. Thus,
a is wholly to the left of pp^ and signifies he has irriiMmr— pre-
sent perfect.
b parilj on the left^ pmtif pn tbo riglit : he u im6'»^— pioient
imperfect.
€ wholly to the right ; he it goiruf to write — ^present mteatioii.
d wholly to the left oiyy: he had written at time ^^^pMt pw-
fect.
e partly on the left, partly on the right : he was writing at time
y — ^past imperfect.
/wholly to the right s at time $f he was goiitg ta «mf^^past
intention.
g wholly to the left oittt he wiU have written at time ^-^twre
perfect.
h partly on the left^ partly on the right : he tnU be writing 9t
time <^fature imperfect.
i wholly to the right : ai time t he will be going to write — ^future
intoition.
442 The word * perfect' in all these phrases means rdativety past :
thus the present perfect is past, the past perfect was past> the
future perfect wiU be past.
443 Again, the perfect tenses are used for events reeendg past^ the
consequences still remaining. / ha/ve passed a good nighty and fed
r^eshed; he had had his breakfast^ and was putting on his boots ;
you wiU then have finished 2fc^r letter, and wiU be ready to wndk with
me. But we oannot say, William the Conqueror has died in JVor-
mandy,
444 8o also the tenses of intention apply to a time soon to arrive^
445 The aorist, he wrote, is not thus limited ; it may be applied to
any past time ; as, Cicero wrote a history of his constdship^ It does
not, like the past tenses which we have been considering, stand in
any relation to any other point of time. The consequences of the
act are not alluded to, as in the perfects ; nor the duration of the
act spoken of, as in the imperfiects. On the contrary, the aorist
treats the act as a mere point of past time.
446 In the diagram the aorist mi^ be represented by the point km
447 The simple future, he will write, corresponds in general eha-
racter to the aorist of past time. It is equally independent of
other points of future time, wi speaks of the act as momentary,
448 In the diagram the future may be represented by the point k
449 If the simple preset were strictly limited to the mere point of
time which belongs to it, it would seldom be used ; but this» like
some of the other tenses, is employed to denote a state of things,
70 • VB&BB.
ctutomsy general truths, &o., the duration of which in &ct is not
limited to a mere moment.*
450 The true present may be represented in the diagram by the
point m mppm
Tenses ov the Latin Yebb.
451 The Latin indicative has six leading tenses : — three perfect
tenses, and three which, for convenience, but somewhat inaccu-
ratelyt, are called imperfects ; viz. the present, the past-imperfect,
the future ; the present-perfect, the past-perfect, the future-per-
fect.
451.1 The c.F. of a verb is often strengthened for the imperfect
tenses : (a.) by lengthening the vowel : thus, die- «ay, dtic- lead,
M- trusty become in the imperfect tenses die-, due-, fid-, (b.) by
doubling the final consonant : thus, mit- let goy ctUv rwriy uSr-
vweefpy become mitt-, curr-, uerr-. (o.) by substituting two conso-
nants for the final consonant: thus, rtLp- Imrsty scid- tmr^ tto-
stretchy become rump-, scind-, tend-.
452 The present has no tense suffix : as, sctib- writey scrlbit he
writes.
453 When an affirmation is made with emphasis, also in nega-
tive and interrogative phrases, the verb do is commonly used in
the translation : as, he does write; he does not write; does he
write?
454 The present-imperfect has the same form in Latin : as, scnbit
he is writing*
* An example of the true present, as applied to acts, occurs in Ivan-
hoe (c. xzix.), where the agitated Kebecca, standing at the lattice, re-
ports to the sick knight the proceedings of the siege. ^ He blenches not,
he blenches not !" said Rebecca. '* I see him now ; he leads a body of
men close under the outer barrier of the barbican. They pull down the
piles and palisades ; they hew down the barriers with axes. His high
black plume floats abroad over the throng, like a raven over the field of
the slain. They have made a breach in the barriers ! they rush in ! they
are thrust back ! Front-de-Boeuf heads the defenders ; I see his gigantic
form above the press. They throng again to the breach, and the pass is
disputed hand to hand and man to man. God of Jacob ! it is the meet-
ing of two fierce tides — the conflict of two oceans moved by adverse
winds." Such a use of the true present can only be looked for in dra-
matic writing. The historic present^ as it is called, is an imitation of this
dramatic excitement.
f Inaccurately, see § 469.
YBBBS. 7X
455 The present is sometimes employed in past narrativey both in
English and Latin, as if the scene described were passing before
one's eyes. This is called the historic pregent : as, he tkenjlwnges
into the river ^ swims across^ and seeks the tent of the Jdng.
456 The present is also used in Latin when a state has continued
for some time and still exists : as, iam tris mensis &best he has,
been absent now three months.
457 The present in Latin sometimes denotes not even the begin-
ning of an act, but only the purpose, when the mind alone is em-
ployed upon it, or the matter at best is only in preparation : as,
uxdrem diicXt he is going to he married,
458 On the other hand, the present is at times used in Latin after
certain conjunctions when past time is in foot meant : as,
A» Quid pater, uiuitne? B. Yiuom, quom inde ahimus^
liquimus (Flattt* Capt. ii. 2. 32),
A, Well and your &ther, is he living ? B. We left him alive,
when we came away.
Dim studeo obsequi tibi, paene inltisi uitam filiae {Ter. And,
V. 1.3).
While I have endeavouredf to oblige you, I have almost trifled
away my daughter's life.
So also with postquam, tibi, and tit, when they signify the moment
that.
459 The past-imperfect has the suffix eba : as, scrlbsba- was writ-
ingy scilbebat he was writing.
460 But the e of ibd is lost after the vowels a and e : as, &r&'bat he
was jiloibghingy ddcS'bat he was teaching. While after the vowels
i and u the e is commonly left : as, uSni-6bat he was coming^ &cu-
6bat he was sharpening.
461 The verb i- go loses the e : as, I'bat he was going. The old
writers and the poets often use this contracted form with other
verbs in i : as, molll'bat he was softening.
462 Sometimes this tense is expressed in English by the simple
past tense, he wrote. Thus, in answer to the question. What ttsed
to be his duties in the cotmting-house F the reply might be, Ee
wrote the foreign letters. This would be expressed in the Latin
by the tense in ebdy because a continued state of things is meant,
* In editions generally abiimus^ which is against the metre (^dbyirmts,
see § 25). Some Mss. at any rate have abimtu ; and see § 1455 e.
f Or, * In my endeavouis.*
7i TSBB8.
Borib^bat he used to wriu^ he choayt wrote* The Latin aorist would
speak (Hilj of one act : Bie wrote the foreign Uttete on, a paftievtair
i>ecaei0n, smpsit.
463 The use of the English simple past tense for a oontinned state
of things is very common with veibs of tkUic meaning (see fi 385) :
as, he sat (o^ the time) ^n a rock; he loved frani and open con-
dtiet.
464 The past-imperfect is also used in Latin when a state I»d con-
tinned for some time, and still exiited at the moment qpoken of :
as, iam tris mensis &bdrat he had been abeent then three months,
465 The past-imperfect sometimes denotes only a past purpose, or
thait a matter was in preparation : as, ux^irem dUoebat he teas
goin^g to he marrioL
466 Tbe simple /u^w^ appears to have had for its suffix the syllable
H6f which however loses its vowel after vei4» in a or e, and its
consonant^ after verbs ^ding in a conBonant, t, or ». Thus
j&om verbs in a and e we have, 8.rS.niH wU plonghy ttiftVXt he
ftnUplotigh ; ddcS'b- vnU teach^ d6o6'b-)[t he will teeush^f
467 Those verbs which retain only the vowel prefer a for the first
parson singular, and e for the rest : as, scnb-a'm I ehaH write,
scrib-e's you wiU write, scrlb-e't he will write, 4t04
468 The verbs In i, according to the preceding roles, form the
future with a or e as, audi-a'm / ehaU hear, audi-6's you will
hear, <&c. But the verb i- go prefers the future in 5 ; as, I'b-It
he win go. In the old writers many othw verbs in i have a future
of the same shape : as, sclVIt he wiU Jknow.
469 The Latin future from an active verb is not an imperfect future ;
thus scrlbet signifies he will write, not he will ke writing*
* The loss of a 5 has been seen already in the datives of nouns.
f The suffixes ebd and db seem from their form to be related to one
another. Perhaps they are both connected with the verb h&be- ' have,*
which is so common an auxiliary in all languages. Thus eba would be
a past tense, having that past time denoted by the a, as is the case in ^a
'was,* from (Ss- ' be ;' and the meaning of ^6a would be, * had the matter
in hand,' which accords accurately with the notion of the past-imperfect.
On the other hand, db would be the simple verb, and would signify,
'have the doing of any thing/ This would precisely agree with the
formation of the futures in French, Spanish, and Italian, which consist
of the present of the verb signifying ' have,' fuided to the infinitive, wH3i
little or no change. Thus, in French, aimer-aiy aimer-aSt aimer^a, pi.
mmfft'Ont, and^mr-at, &c. It is also confirmed by the use of a similar
phrase in Latin : Seribendum est «ttAt ' I have the writing ;' which is
often used as a future, and in est miki has an exact equivalent for Aa6«o.
VERBS, 73
470 The perfect tenses are formed by the addition of certain suf-
fixes to a crude form of the perfect,
471 A crude form of the ^perfect is formed from the simple verb in
three different ways :
a. By redupliccUionf that is, by prefixing to the verb a syllable
more or less like the verb itself : as, morde- bite, mdmord- or md-
mord- bit; tend* stretchy tStend- stretched,*
b. By a long vowd: as, f&c- or f&ci- fnakcy f^c- made; uSn- or
u8ni- comet u6n- oame,\
c. By s sufixed : as, serlb- writer scrips- wrote ; die- «zy, dix-
said,
d» But many verbs, including nearly all those which end in a
vowel, abstain from all these three changes.
472 All the perfect tenses of the three moods, indicative, subjuno-
tive and infinitive, were formed by adding the tenses of the verb
8s- be. This is clearly seen in all but the present-perfectt of the
indicative, and partly even here ; as,
* The English language appears to have an example of this formation
in what we may perhaps call one of its oldest verbs, do^ ^ert did, the
original meaning of which verb was * put»* whence d^on * put on,* d'off*
' put off,* d^out * put out* The German compounds of thu'n would
confirm this view of the meaning. Thus our Eiiglish verb corresponds
to a Latm verb of kindred form and meaning, viz. da- * put' (for such is
its m,eaning), perf did-. The Gothic abounds in perfects of reduplica-
tion : as, halt * call,* perf. haihait * called ;' fkaid * separate/ perf. skm-
skaid ' separated.'
f This formation also has its ])arallel in the English oome^ perf. oame*
It is not improbable that the long-vowel perfects originated ^i reduplica-
tion : as, uSni- * come,* perf. uiuin- contracted into uen^ ' came ;* dg-
* drive,* aeig- contracted into iff' * drove.' The last contraction is pre-
cisely the same as occurs in the subj. pres. of the verb ofna- ' love,' c.f.
am€M- ame-t 3d pers. amaat, amei, Uompare also the so-called temporal
augment of Greek verbs.
X In some parts of the present- perfect irregularities conceal the con-
nection of the terminations with the present tense of Ss- * be.' Yet the
singular soripS'UH * thou hast written* corresponds with great precision
to the plural serips-itfts ^ you have written.' Again, in the third person
singuiar there is something peculiar in the occasional length of the suffix
t/, as uendidit PUmt. Gapt. prol. 9, perruplt Wor. Od. i. 3. 36, despexit
Catui, 64. 20 ; and especially in the compounds of t- * go,' which have
this syllable always long, b& prtieteriit Ov. A. A. iii. 63 &64 ; reditt Ov.
Her. VI. 31 and xiii. 29; mbiit ffor. Sat. i. 9. 21, Ov. Met. i. 114. This
peculiarity is accounted for, if soripnt had an older form scrips-isi corre-
sponding to eat * he is.* The loss of the s in this position would resemble
that which occurs in the French tenie/usse, fusses, fAt(^old French Just).
Indeed the s is silent in the French est. Lastly, scripsi must be regarded
74 T1BB8.
Indic. — Present, Present- Perfect,
estis you are, scripfi-istls you have written,
(&unt* or) sunt they are^ scrips-fipuntf they have toritten^ &c
Past. Past-Perfeet.
Sram / loas^ scrips-Sram / had written,
SrSJS thou wast, scripa-Srfts thou hadst written^ ho.
Fftture, FtUure-Perfeet,
Sro 1 shall hey scrips-Sro 1 shdU have vfritten.
Sris thou unit he, scrips-Sils thou wHt have written^ &c.
S C7BJUXC. — Present,
(Ssim or) sim / am, scrips-^rim / have written,
(^fiils or) sis thou arty BGrips-Srls thou hast written, he
Past,
essem / wasy Bcrips-issem / had written.
essSs thou werty scrips-issSs thou hadet writteny &o.
Infinitive.
essS to hey scrips-issS to have written,
472, 1 Many Latin verbs, particularly those which end in a, ty i, or a
liquid, have z, uX m the perfect immediately before the suffix
borrowed from Ss- he : as,
as a corruption of seripsitn, and that of scrips-ism^ where ism would re-
present the old Latin isum * I am.' The loss of the s in this position is
what has occurred in the Greek cifu * I am' for tfffiL, and in our own am,
Nay, the Gothic form is im. If scripsim then be admitted as a theoietical
form, the plural scripsimtis is also explained.
* See §722. 4, note.
f Though scripserunt is the ordinary pronunciation, the short penult
is not rare in the poets.
X This u (pronounced as our w) was no doubt an original part of the
verb &- * be,* m the form uH-. Thus, the Gothic had ws-an * to be,* the
Icelandic ver-a ' to be.' So the German tees-en * existence* is but an
infinitive mood ; and from a form wes is deduced our own past tense toas^
precisely as the Germans form er las ^ he read* from les-en ' to read.'
We have said that the original meaning of esse was * to eat.* So the form
ues also means to eat in the Latin ueseor ' I feed myself,' whence the sub.
n. uisc-es- * flesh.' In the old Latin writers uiscera did not mean ' en-
trails.* We have said nothing of the origin of the suffix s as seen in
scrips- &c. If this be a genitival suffix signifying ' from,' the formation
of all the perfect tenses is simple enough ; as, soripsi ' I am from writings
TBBBS. 76
lira- plough^ ftr&-uistlB you have ploughed.
ddc-e- teachy dSo-uistIs you have taught,
audi- heafy audl-uistXs you have heardt
e&T'puty eHir-xusi^ you have put,
C01- tiUj cdl-uistis you have tilled,
gSm-produce^ g^n-iusVis you have prodttced,
gSm- groauy gSm-uistIs you have groaned,
473 The present-perfect tense of the Latin is also used for an aorist :
as, scripsit he has written or he wrote,
^^ Thus the English language confounds the aorist and past-im-
perfect; while the Latin confounds the aorist and the present-
perfect. See § 462.
475 For the formation of the past-perfect* and future-perfect, see
§472.
476 The future-perfect of the indicative bears a very close resem-
blance to the present-perfect of the subjunctive. Hence much
confusion arose, so that even the first person of the indicative
tense in ^o is occasionally found where a subjunctive in ^'m was
to have been expected. But the greatest confusion is in the quan-
tity of the syllables. As the future-perfect is formed from Sro,
Sris, &c., we ought to have had in the indicative scripsSrls, scrip-
fiSrlmtls, scripsSrltls ; and on the other hand, as the present-per-
fect subjunctive is formed from sim, sis, &c. we ought to have
had in the subjunctive scripsSrIs, scripsSrlmtis, scripsSrltls ; but
the two tenses are commonly confounded in respect of quantity.
477 The perfect tenses of some intransitive verbs are expressed in
I have written* ; scHpseram ^ I was from writing, I had written' ; acrip-
sera ' I shall be from writing, I shall have written.' The use of a pre-
position in forming tenses is seen in our periphrastic futures * I am to
write,* * I am going to write* ; and also in our periphrastic present ' I am
a- writing,* where a represents the old preposition an, now written in. * I
am a-writing* is the old form of the language, now corrupted to * I am
writing.* Compare also the French je viens d^icrire, literally * I come
from writing,* i.e.'l have just written.'
* The formation of the past-perfect scripsiram agrees with that of
the Greek frervtpea, which had once a <r, eTtTwpfo-a-, as may be seen
from the third pers. pi. fTfTv<pt<ra-p. Thus, the Greek suffix of this tense
is co-a corrupted into ca, and the Latin is Sra^ itself a corruption from
^sa. Consequently the two tenses have the sJame suffix, viz. the past
tense of the verb Ss- * be.* Nay, in the first person of the present-perfect
T€-Tv<^o the a represents afi^ that is our first person of the verb * to be ;'
and probably the preceding aspirate represents the sufiixed 8 of scrips',
or in other words is a genitival suffix a' from,'
76 VERBS.
English not only by the auxiliary verb have, but also by the tenses
of be. Thus, rSdilt he has returned or he is returned^ rSdiSrat he
had returned or he was returned, rfidiMt he will have returned or
he will be returned. These perfect tenses expressed by the auxili-
aries is, teas, wiU be, are often mistaken by beginners for passives.
But a little reflection would of course satisfy them that the verbs
in question do not admit of a passive.
478 The perfect tenses are often expressed in English without the
perfect form. Thus, in the three phrases :
If a Roman soldier left his post, he was put to death,
If an English soldier deep on his post, he is shot.
If you receive a letter, you vnU send it on to me,
the verbs left, sleep, receive^ would be expressed in Latin by per-
fect tenses : viz. left by a past-perfect ; deep by a present-per-
fect ; receive by a future-perfect ; for an offence precedes in order
of time the punishment, and of course a letter must be received
before it is forwarded. (See f 1159.)
479 The imperative has two tenses, a present and a future ; but
the so-called present might be more fitly named an immediate
future.
480 The imperative, mSmentS, mSmentotS, you wiU remember, is
derived from a perfect crude form, like all the other tenses of the
same verb. (See § 390.)
481 The subjunctive mood has four tenses : the present, the past^
the present-perfect, and the past-perfect. Of these, the two former
are often caUed the imperfect tenses.
482 The suhpmctive present has the suffix d, as scnb-9r, whence
the third person, scrlbat. When the suffix a follows another a»
the two are contracted into e, as &ra- plough, subj. pres- &raa-
contracted into &r@-, whence the third person &ret. An old suffix
of this tense was ie or i, as ide- or si- from Ss- be, third person
siet or sit. So also uSli-m, nOli-m, m&li-m, £di-m, dui-m, and
perhaps ausim, from the several verbs u51- wish, n5l- be unwilling,
mSl' prefer, 6d- eat, da- or dn-put, aude- dare,
483 The subjunctive past has the suffix Sse or Sre, as from Ss- be^
subj. past es'sS-, from scrib- write, subj. past scrlbSrS-, whence
the third person esset, scrlbSret. The suffix ^e loses its short
vowel after a, e, i, as third person S,r9,-'ret, ddcS-'ret, audl-'ret ;
and sometimes after a consonant,- as fer-'ret.
TEBBS. 77
484 For the formation of the perfect tenses of the sabjunctive see
§472.
487 The translation of the subjunctive tenses has various forms,
which depend chiefly upon the meaning of the verb to which the
subjunctive is attached.
488 If the preceding words denote a oomma/nd^ the subj. pres. and
past are translated respectively by %hM and shoiildy or by to. Im-
pure ut mittat I command that he shaU send or I command him to
send ; impSr&ui ut mittSret / comrrumded that he should send or
1 commamded him to send,
489 If the preceding words denote permission, the subj. pres. and
past are translated respectively by may and mighty or more com-
monly by to. OoncSdo ut mittat 1 grant that he may send or 1
permit him to send; concessi ut mittSret I granted that he might
send or I permitted him to send. '
490 If the preceding words denote a purpose, the subj. pres. and
past are translated respectively by may and might, or is to and
was to, Ob earn causam scrtbo ut sci&s / ivrite for this reason,
that you may know ; 6h eam causam scripsi ut scIrSs I wrote for
this reason, that you might know. Mittit qui dicant he sends per-
sons (who are) to say ; misit qui dlc^nt he sent persons {who were)
to say.
491 When the preceding words speak of the cause which leads to
the restdt expressed in the following subjunctive, the latter mood
is translated as an indicative. TantiLs est terror ut filgiant so
great is the alarm that they fly.
492 The subjunctive in all its tenses may be translated as an in-
dicative in passages where the assertions or thoughts of another are
expressed. Qui scrlbat who is writing (they say), qui scrlbSret
who was writing (they said), qui scripsSrit who has written (they
say) or who wrote (they said), qui scripsisset who had yyritten {they
said),
493 The subjunctive in all its tenses, after certain conjunctions,
may be translated as an indicative. Quum scrlbat as he is writing,
quum scrlb^ret while he wa>8 writing, quum scripsSrit a>s he has
written, quum scripsisset when he had written.
494 The subjunctive in all its tenses may be translated as an in-
dicative in indirect interrogatives : as, nescio quid f&ciat I know
not what he is doing, nesciebam quid f S,cSret / kne^o not what he
was doing, nescio quid f^rit / know not what he has done or
h2
78 TBBB8.
iohat he didy nescidbam quid f^cisset / knew not what he had
done.
495 When the two verbi in these phrases have tiie flame nomina-
tive, the meaning is ambiguous : as, nescio quid f&dam / in&w
9u>t what I am doing or / kruyw not what to do, nescis quid f&ci&s
you know not what you are doing or what to do &c.
496 In hypoihetiood sentences, the sulgunctiYe, which marks the
condition, is expressed by English ^km^ tenses : as,
^ scilbat, if he were writing t)r were to write,
si scnbSret, if he had been writing,
81 scripsSrit, if he were to write.
SI scripsisset, if he had written.
497 With verbs of static meaning, the past indicative of the Eng-
lish is still used, but somewhat differently : as,
si sciat, if he knew.
Bl sclret, if he had known,
A adsit, if he werepreeent.
si adesset, if he had been present.
498 In hypo^ietical sentences, the subjunctive, which marks the
eoneeqttence, is translated in the pres. by should or wotUdy in the
past and past-perfect by should have or would have : as, v
scnbat, he would write.
scnbSret, he wovld have been writing.
scrips^rit, he would write.
scripsisset, he ufould have written.
499 In elliptical sentences, with quftsi as ify tanquam as if <bc., the
subjunctive is translated nearly in the same way : as, tanquam
dormiat as if he were adeep (when in £&ct he is not), tanquam
dormlret as if he had been adeep (when in fact he was not) ;
quftsi nunquom antehac proelio adfuSrIs as if you had never before
this been present at a battle (when in fact you have been) ; quftsi
nunquam anteft proelio adfuisset as if he had never b^ore tfuU been
present at a battle (when in fact he had been).*
500 The subjunctive mood has no special future tenses ; still all its
four tenses are at times used as future tenses.
501 The so-called subjunctive present is used for a future after
a pres. or fut. : as, mitto qui rdgent 1 am sending persons to asky
* The clauses in the brackets are 'useful guides to the Latin tense.
TEBBS. 79
mittam qui regent 1 ahaU send persona to ask, mlfil qui rtfgent
1 have aeTUperaons to oak,
502 The so-called subjunctive past is used for a future after past
tenses : as, mittfibam qui rdg&rent liffaa aendin^ persona to cuky
misl qui rdgarent / aeiU peraona to oaky mlsSram qui r^rent
I had aent peraona to ask,
503 The so-called subjunctive present-perfect is used for a fut.^
perf. after a pres. or fut., and the so-called subj. past-perf. is used
for a fut.-p^. after a past. Thus, in the phrase, is cdr5nain
aodtpiet qui prlmtb escend&rit the man shall receive a chapleC
icho first climbs tip, the word escendSrit is the indicative future-
perfect. But, hj making the 'sentence depend upon such a word
as dicit he sat/s, or dixit he said, the indicative escendSrit will be
<^ianged for a subj. : as, dicIt eum cdrOnam aoceptiirum qui
prlmiis escendSrit he says that the man shaU receive a chaplet who
first dimhs up, dixit eum c((rOnam acceptHrum qui prlmtls es-
oendisset he said that the man shotUd receive a chaplet who first
dimhed up,
504 Thus, when the subjunctive perfect tenses are used as future-
perfects, the present-perf. of the Latin is translated by the Eng-
lish ind. pres., the past-perl of the Latin bj the English ind.
past.
505 If then we unite the different uses of the tenses in the sub-
junctive as so &r explained, we shall have—
Tense in a Pres. or Fut. after Pres. or Put.
„ ^e Past „ Fut. after Past.
„ ^r* Pres.-Perf. „ Fut.-Perf. after Pres. or Fut.
„ isse Past-Perf. „ Fut.-Perf. after Past.
505. 1 The subjunctive past is often used in phrases denoting a
result with the power of an aorist, as, accldit ut primus nunti&ret
it ftappened that he was the first to bring word. Hence, although
the present-perfect indicative is habitually employed as an aorist,
the present-perfect subjunctive is rarely so used. Still examples
occur (see § 1182, ex. 5 ; § 1189, last two examples), especially in
negative clauses.
606 The infinitive has strictly but two forms, the imperfect and
perfect.
507 The infinitive imperfect has for its suffix ^ or Sr^: as, from Ss-
be, inf. es'sS ; from scrlb- write, inf. scrlb^rS.
80 YEBBS.
608 Slightly irregular are the infinitives, fer*r8, from ftr- hear;
ueFlS, noils, mal'lS, from udl- or uSl- wish^ n5l- he unwiUing^ mSl-
prefer,
509 The infinitive imperfect may be translated in three ways : — ^by
to: as, inclpit rldSrS he hegins to laugh: in some phrases the
English language omits this to, as, potest ild6rS he can laugh
i.e. is aUe to laugh, uldi eum rldCrS I taw him laugh; — ^by ing :
as, inclpit ridfirS he hegins laughing, or uldi eum nder& / taap
him laughing; — as an indicative, vdth that before the English
nominative: as, scio eum rldCrS I know that he is laughing, sd^
bam eum ridfirS I knew that he was laughing.
510 For the formation of the infinitive perfect, see § 472.
511 The infinitive perfect may be translated in three wajrs : — by to
have : as, scripsissS dicltur he is said to have written; — ^by having :
aS; ilsisse exlti5 fuit the having laughed was fatal; — ^as an indi-
cative, with that before the English nominative : as, scio eum.
scripsissS I know that he wrote or that he has written, sdSbam eum
BcripsissS I knew that he had written.
512 Thus the infinitive imperfect scrlbSrS corresponds to two indi-
cative tenses, scrlbXt and scrlbsbat; and the infinitive perfect
ScripsissS also to two, scripsit and scripsSrat.
513 The infinitive imperfect is sometimes used as a future, where
the preceding verb itself implies a reference to futurity : as, pol-
llcStur d&rS he 'promises to give.
514 The participle in eMi or ^tj^ is an imperfect, and belongs alike
to past, present and future time.
515 The participle or gerund in endo is also an imperfect, and
belongs alike to past, present and future time.
516 The participle in to is a perfect, and belongs alike to past,
present and future time.
517 The participle in tv/ro denotes intention or destiny, and belongs
alike to past, present and future time.
Conjugations.
518 As the changes which take place in adding the sufiixes to a
verb depend in a great measure upon the last letter, verbs may be
divided into the following classes or conjugations*, viz. :
* See a similar division of nouns into declensions, §§ 54, 55, 56,
88, 89.
TERBS, 81
The consonant (or third*) coi\jugation| as scrlb- wriie^ whence
scrlh^rS to wriUy and scrlbls thou ivritest.
The a (or first) coivjugation, as ftra- plough, whence &r&r8 to
plough^ and ftr&s thou ploughesi^
The e (or second) conjugation, as d<k$e- teach, whoice dScSrfi
to teachy and ddc6s thou teachest.
The u (or thirdf) conjugation, as ftcu- dharpen^ .whence ftcuSrS
to iharpen^ and ftculs thou ^larpenest.
The i (or fourth) coigugation, as audi- hear^ whence audIrS to
hear, and audls thou hearett,
519 The conjugation has nearly disappeared from the Latin lan-
guage. There remain however fragments of two or three verbs of
this conjugation, viz* :
gno- examine, whence gno-sco, gn5-ul, gno-tum, or, as they are
more commonly written, no-sco, nd-ul, n5tum ; also the substan-
tives n5-m6n- w., n6-ti5n- /. <fec. ; po- X drinky whence the par-
ticiple p5-to- drunky the substantives p5-ciUo- n, dHnking-cupy
p5-tion-/. drinking y and the adjective p5-ctilento- drinkahUy dtc. ;
aegro- make sicky implied in the participle or adj. aegr5-to- sick,
520 The other verbs, which might have been expected to end in o,
have changed that vowel for a (see § 229) : as from auro- gold is
formed the verb in-aura-rS§ to gild.
521 The monosyllabic verbs ending in a consonant generally denote
an act, and may be considered as belonging to the old verbs of the
language : as dtic- draw. (See § 30.)
522 The verbs in a are generally formed from substantives or ad-
jectives of the a or declension, and have b, factitive meaning, that
is, signify to make : as from albo- or alba- white, alba- make
white; fr^m medico- phyaidany mS(Uca- ij,) make ontcself a phy-
siciany act thephyndany cure,
523 The two monosyllabic verbs, da- pviy and sta- 8tandy must be
classed with the old verbs of the language. So also many other
* The numbers of the conjugations are given, because they are so
arranged in nearly all grammars and dictionaries.
t Observe that the u and consonant conjugations are united to form
the third conjugation, just as the t and consonant nouns are united to
form the third declension.
X Compare the Greek verb Tif-» ' I drink/ or rather the tenses irw-ow,
§ The Greek language retained many verbs of the o conjugation : as
8ov\o-€if * to enslave,* x/>v(ro-civ ' to gild,'
82 TEBB8.
verbs ending in a had older forms without that final a, which
therefore belonged to the consonant conjugation and the old verbs.
See those verbs of the first or a conjugation, which are said to
form their perfects and supines irregularly, as ctiba- lie, &o,
524 The verbs in e generally denote a state, as i&ce- lie ; and often
correspond to a consonant verb, as i&c- throw. (See § 386.)
525 The monosyllabic verbs, fl&- weep, ne- spin, &c. should per-
haps be classed with the old verbs of the language. So also many
other verbs in e had older forms without that final e, which there-
fore belonged to the consonant conjugation and the old verbs, as
ride- or rid- lattgh,
526 The verbs in {« are often derived from substantives in te, as
from m^vL- fear is formed mStu-Sr5 to fear; from tribu- a divi-
sion, trIbu-SrS to allot.
527 The monosyllabic verbs, nu- nod, su- sew^ <fec. must be classed
with the old verbs of the language.
528 The verbs in i are often derived from substantives or adjectives
in i, as from tussi- a amgh is formed tussI-rS to cough; from
molli- soft, molll-r6 to soften.
529 The monosyllabic verbs, sci- know, i- go, ci- rotise, must be
classed with the old verbs of the language. So also those verbs
which had an old form without the », a^ uSni- or ugn- come.
530 An attention to the final vowel of a verb is required in the
formation of the derivatives, particularly as regards the quantity.
tsg-
arma-
[cre-]
cover,
equip,
grow,
t§g-tl-mento- covering.
armft-mento- equipment.
in-cr5-mento-* increase.
argu-
S-m6li-
prove,
heave up.
argu-mento- proof.
6m5lI-mento-t great effort.
[gno-] examinee, know, co-gn5-mento- surname.
Pbincipal Pabts op a Verb.
531 When the infinitive, the indicative present, the perfect, and
the supine or verbal in ^ of a Latin verb are known, there is
• Monumento-^ doc&mentO', said to be derived from the verbs mane-,
dace-, imply rather verbs of the consonant conjugation, viz. mon-, doc-,BB
do also the perfects and supines of the same.
f Not to be confounded with e-mdl-u-mentO' ' outgrinding or profit'
(of the miller, who pays himself by the excess of bulk in grinding his
customer's com).
YXSB8.
83
seldom any diffioolty in conjugating it. They are therefore called
the principal parts of the yerb.
532 In the following lists the crude form of the verb with its trans-
lation) the infinitive, the first person of the present and perfect
are given, and the accusative of the supine, or for reflective verbs
the nominative masculine of the perfect participle. In most of
the compounds the infinitive has been omitted for the sake of
brevity.
533
THIRD oa CONSONANT CONJUGATION.
LlP-LBTTBRS, B, P.
sc&b- scratch
sc&bSre
sc&bo
sc&bi
l&b- lick
lambSre
lambo
Iambi
bXb- drink
blbSre
bibo
bibi
scrib- write
scrlbSre
scrlbo
scrips!
scriptum
ctlb- lie dovm
[cumb^re
cumbo]
ciibui
cilbXtum
ntlb- veil onesdf^
nubSre
ntlbo
nupsi
nuptum
dip- or c&pi- take
c&pSre •
c&pio
c6pi
captum
r&p- or rftpi- teisse
r&pSre
r&pio
r&pui
raptum
rSp- creep
repSre
rgpo
repsi
reptum
strSp- resound
strgpSre
strSpo
strSpui
strSpltum
SiHilp- scratch
scalpSre
scalpo
scalpsi
soalptum
carp- nibble^ plitck
carpgre
carpo
carpsl
carptum
serp- creep
serpgre
serpo
serpsi
serptum
ciip- or cilpi- desire
cilpgre
ciipio
ciiplui
ciipltum
riip- burst
rumpSre
nimpo
rtipi
ruptum
534 Thkoat-lettebSj
, c, a, H
,Q,x.
f &c- or f &ci- make, do
f&cSre
f&cio
f^
&ctnm
i&c- or iSici- throw
i&cgre
i&cio
iSci
iactum
p^- comb
pectSre
pecto
pexi
pexum
flgc- bend
flectSre
flecto
flexi
flexum
plSc- plait
plectgre
plecto
plexi
plexiHii
nSc- linky join
nectSre
necto
nexit
nexum
Xc-t strike
icSre
loo
ici
ictum
die- show, say
dicSre
dico
dixi
dictum
uXc- conquer
uincSre
uinco
uici
uictum
* As a female in the marriage ceremony.
t But in-nexuit Virg. % Another form of toe- ' throw.'
84
YSRBS.
paro*«2Mifv
parcSre
paroo
p^rci
panom
pose- demand
poscdre
poeoo
pdpofioi
dtio- drawy lead
dao^re
daco
duxi
ductum
535 flg- drive
&gfire
ago
egi
actum
plSg-* strike
plangSre
plango
planxi
planctom
p&g-^
pang^re
pango
pfiplgit
pactum
fr&g- break
frangSre
frango
fregi
fractum
iX^- touch
tangSre
tango
tStXgi
tactum
ISg- nM^, fUMcf
ISgSre
18go
ISgi
lectum
T^- make straight
r6g£re
rtgo
rexi
rectum
t^- MotoA, cover
tSgfire
t«go
texi
tectum
tig'Xfix
figure
figo
fixi
fixum
fig- TMmldy invent
fingSre
fingo
finxi
fictum
pig- JMIITI^
pingSre
pingo
pinxi
pictum
8trig-^r(Mp,^wa
stringgre
stringo
strinxi
strictum
t!g-(^ye
tingSre§
tingo
tinxi
tinctum
fulg-,/2(uA
fulg^
fulgo
fiilRi
ang- strangle
angSre
ango
anxi
cing- ^ir«?
dngSre
cingo
cinxi
cinctum
ung- grease
ungSref
ungo
nnxi
unctum
sparg- or 8p&r-|| Mo^r
spargSre
spargo
sparsi
sparsum
merg- or mSr-H wnifc
mergSre
mei*go
mersi
mersum
terg-** or Wr- mp*
terggre
tergo
tersi
tersum
i^-ori^-fiee^fiy
fiigSre
filgio
fugi
ftLgltum
\^' yoke Join
iimggre
iungo
iunxi
iunctum
piig. punctwre
pungSre
pungo
pttpfigi
punctum
v'QLg' suck
sOggre
stLgo
suxi
Buctum
636 tr&h- (froE^
trSiigre
tr&ho
trazi
tractum
u6h- carry
uShSre
udho
uexi
uectum
537 iXq- leave
linquSre
linquo
Ilqui
c(k[- cooife
cSquSre
c^uo
coxi
coctum
C38 tex- weave
texSre
texo
texui
textum
* For the quantity compare €v\ayr\v,
f But panxit Enn., pegi PacuY.
% Fig- * fix' and^- * mould' may perhaps be originally one, with the
sense ' squeeze,* like 0-^17-. See Paley's Propertius. Observe too that
fietus for fixus was preferred by Varr. B. R. iii. 7. 4, afficttu iii. 3. 2, &c.
§ Also tingu^e, Hnguo ; unguh'et tinguo.
II Comp. <rrcp- of <nrtifM. ^ Comp. mari^ ' sea.'
*♦ Also terge-, Comp. rep- of rcpw, and ier-ra * dry-land.'
TBEB8.
86
639 ulu- or uig- live
ulufire
Qiao
• •
UlXl
uictnxn
flu- or fkLo-Jlow
fluSre
fluo
flllTl
flozum
stru- or stsr\iO'j)ile, huild stmSre
sirao
struxi
structum
TEBTH-LETTETtfl, D, I
540 (M'*faU
c&dSre
c&do
cScIdi
c&sumf
r&d- iompe
r&dfire
iftdo
r&d
r&sumf
M-or^-eat
^dreoreese
edo
6di
66umt
caed-/s2?, gtrike, cut
caedSre
caedo
cScldi
caesum
laedr t^rt^, A^^r^
laed^
kedo
laesi
laesiim
oSd- ^ piieUify yidd
cSdSre
o6do
ceflfli
oeflsum
sSd- n^^fo«0n
8ld^
6ldo
86di
seasum
fldd- ^r, c«^
scindSre
Bcindo
BcXdit
scissum
fid' deave
findSre
findo
fldi
fissom
stTld-§ AiM, screech
Btild^re
stndo
stildi
scand- «?tmd
Bcand^
soando
scandi
scansnm
maud- cA^iff
numd^
mando
mandi
inausviiii
pand- or p&d- vpread
pand^re
pando
passamll
pend- Aon^, le^A
pendflre
pendo
pSpendi
pensum
tend- or tSn- stretch
tendSre
tendo
tStendi
tentumt
f8d- or f»di- rf^
f5d&e
fSdio
f^
. fossum
rtfd-j^fun^
tOQ6P6
YOdo
rod
Ydmnn •
dtid- shut
okad^
daudo
daud ^
clausom
plaud- dap
plauddre
plaudo
plaud
plausum
ciid- hammer y coin
cUdSre
ctldo
ctidi
ctLsum
ft<SL-pour
fdndSre
fondo
fadi
fuflum
Itld- pfey
ItldSre
ludo
Ifid
Itlsum
trtLd- thrust
tradSre
trado
trOgi
trusum
ttld- hammer y thump
tundSre
tundo
ttLttldi
tunsum
quftt- or qu&ti- «^r%^
qu&t^re
qu&tio
quassum
mSt- moiff
xnSUre
mSto
messui
messum
p^- or pSti- ^0, M«£
pStSre
pSto
pStlui
pStltum
mXt- let goy send
mitt^re
mitto
mid
yn^ffff^wi
* Akin to eaed-f just as oxafdtt to fell,
^ f The liorms with m teem to have been originallj in use with old
wxiters, and even with Cicero, Viigil, &e. as cassumt estum,
X Scieidi andfijidi were probably the older forms of these perfeets.
Ennius has the former. Comp. tetulif afterwards tulu
§ Also stride-. H But pansis in Germanicus and YitruTius.
f Tensua in Quintilian and late writers.
I
86
TfeBBB.
stert- snore
uort- or uert- twm
sist- make to stand
stertSre sterto stertui
uortSre uorto uorti uorsnm
sistSre sisto stStiorstlti Bt&tum
542 The compounds of 6s^*ptU or ^five, with prepodtions of one
syllable, are all of the third conjugation ; as, with
&b, ptU avmfy hide
abdSre
abdo
abdldi
abditum
&d, pv;t tOj add
addSre
addo
addldi
addltum
c6n, jnU together
condSre
condo
condXdi
condltum
ds, piU dovm, surrender dSdSre
dedo
dedXdi
dedltum
dls, diarihute
didSre
dido
didldi
didltum
gc, pvi otUy utter
ed^re
6do
edldi
edltum
In, put on
indSre
indo
indldi
indltum
]p^Tyford0y destroy
perdSre
perdo
perdXdi
perdXtum
8b, put to (as a bar)
obdSre
obdo
obdidi
obditum
pro, abandon, betray
pr5dSre
prodo
prSdIdi
prodltum
r^ put hooky restore
reddSre
reddo
reddldi
reddltum
siib, ptit up
subdSre
subdo
subdldi
subdltum
trans, hand over
tr&dSre
tr&do
tr&didi
tr&ditumf
To these add two other compounds of da-^>t^ ;
uend-!): exhibit for sale
uendSre
uendo
uendldi
uendltum
crOd- trusty beiieve
cr6d^
credo
,N.
credXdi
credltum
543 81- raise, rear, feed
&lgre
&lo
&lui fiUtum or altum
GSil' cheat
&USre
fallo
Mem
falsum
OH' salt
sallSre
sallo '
salsum
p^Sl-push, drive
pellSre
pello
pgptUi
pulsum -
xlSI- puU, pltick
uellSre
uello
uelli
uolsum
M' dig, till
c^gre
cdo
c01ui
cultum
mSir grind
mglSre
mSlo
mglui
mgUtum
* Some Sanscrit Bcholars would lay it down that dor in these com-
pounds represents the root 0c- of ridrifu^ not 8o- of ZiZafiu They forget
that the archaic forms perduim, ereduim claim immediate connection with
the archaic duim of da^. Besides 0e- or rather Otff' (Jdw-iun) is repre-
sented in Latin by ser- ' put/ whence exser-t inser- &c.
f Praedito-, ' armed' or ' endowed (with),* implies a vb. prae-dere,
X Literally ' put in the window/ The first syllable is an abbreviation
ofuenum, which occurs in uenum t-rtf, uenpre, uenun-^-re*
TSRBS.
87
VSL' raise, hear
toUSre*
toUo
ttUit
Ifttumf
uHSL- wish
uelle
udlo
u^ui
544 Sm- taJce, huy
^mSre
Smo '
6mi
emptmn
gSm- groan
gSmSre
gSmo
gSmui
gSmYtum
mm- roar
frSmSre
frSmo
frSmui
Mmltum
"pr^m- press
pr^mSre
prSmo
pressi
pressunx
trfim- tremild
tr^mSre
trSmo
trSmui
545 o&n- sing
c&nSre
c&no
otelni
cantiim
gSn- produce
gigngre
gigno
gSnui
gSnXtum
Hh' smear
UnSre
lYno
iQui
UtninT
sXn- pat, permit
fiSnSre
Bino
8lui or m Bltiimt
B^S.
546 p&r- or pJinrproduei
p&rSre
p&rio
p^pSri
partum
quaer-, qiiae8-§ seek^ ask quaerSre
quaero
quaeslui
quaesltiiTn
cSr- sift, separate
cemSre
cemo
cr6ui
cretum
fSr- raise, hear
ferre
fSro
tiUi
latum
gfir- or gSs- wear, oarry
gSrSre
g«ro
gessi
gestum
epSr- ftf/ec^, despise
spemSre
spemo
sprSui
sprStum
sSr-j pt^
sSrSre
a&TO
sSrui
sertum
sSr- 1 /?^n^, sow
85r6re
sSro
eSm
B&tum];
t^r- n«i
tSrSre
tSro
trtuil
tiltum
8tSr- ^rtfv
stemSre
stemo
strftui**
stratum**
u4t' sweep
uerrSre
uerro
uerri
uersum
UT- or us- ittffi
QrSie
tbx>
ussi
ustum
ciir- nm
curr^
ouxro
cticurri
cursum
547 p&s- or ps^feed
pasoSre
pasoo
p&ui
pastum
ds-dtf
esse
sum
fui
* In meaning the following go together : toUere, tollo, sustulif subla-
turn. Seefet',
t An old form of the perfect is t^t&lL Latum is for tlatum. Comp.
tAij/xi, roKaSi To\fi7i»
X Obserye the quantity of litum, sttum, sdtum.
§ Quaeso is used in the senne, * I pray* or ' prithee.* A form quaesi-
is implied in quaesUum ; as also in quaesitor ' a commissioner* or 'judge.'
II Sh-- ' put* and s^ ' sow* are one in origin.
^ Triui, trUum imply a secondary verb M6-, whence trthuh- sb. n.
* a threshing harrow.' Comp. rpi/B- of Tpl$c».
♦♦ From a secondary verb strag- {—ater'ag'), whence strag^e- sb. f ,
stroff'Ulo- adj. ; also stramen- ' straw.* Comp. our verb strew, old form
straw.
88
YBBB8.
vSj^gotOBee ulsSre ulso ulsi
VSM^eiBr* provoke l&oessSre Iftoesso IftcesSIui l&oesGltiim
Wi«»-* pefform^ eafue f&oess^ fftoesso f&cessi
turceBB-* aendfor aroessSre arcesso arcesslui arcesfltum
(^ifpeM-* take c&pessSre c&pesso c&pessloi c&pessltum
pSs-^nf^ pGnSre pQno pSsui pSsXtum
Y.
548 l&u-t wash
Iftu&re
l&uo
l&ui lautiimorlotum
tribu- dieinbuU
tilbuSre
trlbuo
tribui
trlbutum
^6iG^- sharpen
&cadre
&CUO
&cui
Scutum
t^rga- prove
arguSre
arguo
argui
argutum
Bolu-looeen
soluSre
Boluo
solui
B5lutiim
uolu- roU
uoluSre
uoluo
uolui
udlutum
wHnvL' lessen
mXnuSre
minuo
minui
mXntltum
stemu- sneeze
stemuSre stemuo
stemui
spji' qnt
spuSre
spuo
spui
sptitiim
ru- malte to rush,
rush
ruSre
ruo
rui
riitnmt
Ba-sew
suSre
8U0
sui
Butum
st&tu- set vp
st&tuSie
8t&tU0
Bt&tui
Bt&ttitum
mfitu- /ear
mStuSre
•
mStuo
mStui
mStHtum
FIRST OE A CONJUGATION.
649 da-§ put^ give
d&re
do
dedi
d&tum
f^^iM^to statu
LstcmdMsc^
6t0
BtSti
st&tam
ctLba-Y lie oiib&re ctLbo ciib&ui
nSca- stifisy hUl nSoftre nSoo nSc&ui'^* nSc&tnm
sSca-oie^ sSc&re sSco s^ui sectum
plica- /o?(f plic&re pUco pUc&ui pUc&tum
♦ These four verbs are formed from Ide- or Idct'^fde- or fUci-^ ard-
(oompound of d- ' call *), c&p- or c^jm-. So also pHess- ' seek/ from pXt-
or pj^-. '
f See also Idua- § 549, and dUw § ft55.2.
X ObserYO the short vowel of r^um. RuUuro' is the participle in
turoo
§ Da- stands apart from the other verbs in a hj the irregularity of its
quantity. See § 732.
{] The derivatives from sia- have often a short vowel, as stHtth sb.,
stdbili' adj., stdHm adv.
^ See also ciUh § 538. ** Neeuit Enn. and Phaedr.
yWXBBn
89
miesL-mhraie
micftre
mloo
mlcui
Moa^rub
Mc&re
frlco
Moui
frictum
dtfma- tame
dtfm&re
ddmo
ddmui
dtfmXtum
80na- wund
B^nftre
Bdno
sSn&ui
Btfn&tiiTn
or sSno
Btfnoi
sdnltum
t5na- thwnder
t^n&re
t{$nat
tdnuit
tdnltum
or^pa- ereaJsj ckaUer
crSpftre
crSpo
cr^pui
crSpItiim
\k6t8tr* forbid
uSt&re
' u8to
uStui
uStltom
Vkxuk'iffosh
l&u&re
l&uo
l&u&ui
l&u&tiiTn
i&uj&re
iiiuo
iaui
ifLtumf
651 The thirteen disyllabic verbs giyen in the preceding section
were probably at one time all monosyllabic, and consequently of
the consonant or third conjugation. The yerbs IftuSre, abluSre,
prOcumbSre, plectSre, &o. are met with in the best authors ; and
in the older writers there occur such forms as sdnSre, sonlt, sdnunt,
tdnlmtLs, &c. Observe too that the same thirteen verbs have all
the first vowel short.
552 The other verbs in a form their principal parts like
Ikok' plough &r&re &ro &r&ui i&rfttum
SECOND o& E CONJUGATION.
553 h&b-e- hM^ have
h&bere
h&beo
hftbui
h&bltum
8orb-e- tuck up
sorbere
sorbeo
Borbui
iilb-e- Mdy order
iiibSre
iiibeo
iusd
iussum
i&c-e-;ie
Ulcere
illceo
iftoui
t
t&c-e-^nZm<
t&cSre
t&ceo
t&cui
t&cYtum
d5c-e- tMch
dSc6re
ddceo
djknii
doctum
n5c-e- do damage
nSc6re
ndceo
nScui
n^timi
aro-e- oonfiri^ keep off
arc6re
arceo
arcui
§
miso-e- mix
miscQre
misoeo
miscui
miztum
8uftd-e- recommend
suftdere
su&deo
siAsi
su&sum
ild-e- laugh
ildere
rideo
rlsi
rTsum
uld-e- eee
uldere
uXdeo
uldi
ulsum
prand-e- breakfast
prandere prandeo prandi
pransom
pend-e- hang (intrans.) pendSre
pendeo
pSpendi
* Old form uUta-, PeniuB has uetauiU
f luuaturo- in Sal. and Plin. ep.
X laeiiuTHh Stat § Areto- or arto- as an adj. * confined.^
l2
90
spond-e- promUe
Bpondfire spondeo
Bptfpondi
sponsum
tond-e- shear
tondSre
tondeo
tdtondi
tonsum
mordr^ lite
mordfire
mordeo
mdmordi
morsum
xsig'^ press
urg6re
lufgeo
ursi
wig-e- increase (traiiB.) augOre
augeo
auxi
auctum
lOg-e- mourn
lligere
Itlgeo
luxi
d-^-rotue
oiOre
deo
oltii
dtum
fLe-vfeep
flere
fleo
fleui
fletum
01-e- smdl
01ere
Sleo
dliii
ddl-e*ad^
dtflere
d01eo
ddlui
dttUti&s
iHm-e-fear
tlmQre
tXmeo
tXmui
ne- spin
nSre
neo
nSui
n6tiim
m&n-e- remain
m&n^re
m&neo
mansi
mansum
tSn-e-* hold
tSnQre
tSneo
tSnui
mdn-e- tpam
zndnere
zndneo
mdnui
mdnltum
torque- twisi or hurl
torqu^re torqueo torsit
tortumt
c&r-e- be without
c&r6re
c&reo
c&roi
pftr-e- wait on, oheif
p&rCre
pftreo
pftrui
P&rltujn
hsuer-e- stick
haerere
haereo
haesi
haesum
m6r-e-t earn, deserve
mSrSre
mSreo
mSrui
mSrltum
t&r- or torr-e- roast
torrOre
torreo
tomii
tostum
oen-se- or cSn-§ count
censSre
oenseo
oensui
censum
l&t-e- lie hid
l&tere
l&teo
l&tui
nlt-e- <Aintf
nXtere
Dlteo
nltui
c&u-e- be on cm^s guard c&uSre
c&ueo
cftui
cautomll
f&u-e- 'i0M^ fcv^
fftuSre
f&ueo
f&ui
fikutumll
p&u-e-/sar
p&oSre
P&ueo
pftui
f5u-e- heef warm
fSuSre
fSueo
f5ui
f^tum
mdu-e- »ww
xnduQre
mdueo
mOui
mOtum
Udu-e- WAD
tt($a6re
uSuoo
uOui
uOtuin
fero-e- Joi^lT
£9ni6re
feraeo
ferbui
* Comp. tend- ' stretch.
f From a root ter- or tor-, whence toT'toT', tcr-men;
X Also mere^ (r.).
§ The literal sense of oen^ was 'puncture,* and so 'count* Henoe
cen^tro" sb. n. * centre/
11 Cauitum and/attt/tfm were preferred by Cioeroi>
f Also/tffti-^0*
TBSBS.
91
FOimTH OR / CONJUGATION.*
554i-y0
Ire
eo
Xuiorii
Xtum
fold' prop
MiSie
fdlcio
falsi
fultum
BSOiid'haUow
Banoire
sancio
saacltti
saxuatom
or sancio
sanxi
eanctom
uinci- hind
uinoire
uincio
uiiizi
uinctum
&rci- cram
fiurdre
fiindo
farsi
fiurctom
sard- mend
sardre
sarcio
sarsi
sartum
tXii'leap
8&llre
sUio
s&lui or saliisaltum
sSpSli- bury
sSpSlIre
fiSpSlio
s^pSlIui
sSpoltuin
u8ni- com«
uSnlre
uSnio
u^ni
uentum
saepi- hedge in
saepire
saepio
sepsi
septum
&p$ri- (>^m
ftpSiire
&pSrio
&pSrai
ftpertum
5pSri- cotw
5pSrIre
dpSrio
SpSrui
Spertum
hauri- (^aw (wa^^r)
haurire
hanrio
hausi
haustum
555 The other yerbs :
in i form their principal parts like
)
audi- hear
audire
audio
audlui
audltum
555. 1 Some inceptiye verbs with a suffix esc or isc :
lang- droop fjlag hmguesco hmgui
dXc-t learn disco
luc- get light liLciscIt
ard-!t blaze up ardesco
ptLt- become putrid p^tesco
c&l- get hot c&lesco
u&l- get strong u&lesco
sll- become silent tHieBco
quie- become quiet quiesco
ere- yrow cresco
* The iiregular supines of the rerbs in § 554 imply verbs of the con-
sonant conjugation ; and indeed such forms as euenat, &c. fbr the imper-
fect tenses occur in £nnlus and Plautus. Perhaps in Hor. Od. it. 4, 65
we should read puhhrior euenei,
f DXe- * learn/ oriffinally identical with diC' ' say,' or more properly
' show.' Comp. Sen- othtuwviu * show.* Dihe- * teach* is also of the same
fisonily. Disco is for dio-'seo.
X Ard' is probably akin to 8/- ' raise,* so often used with Jtammam.
Compare as to form arduo- * lof^,' which is immediately formed from o/-
* nise.* Comp. too «p- of tupm,
11 Calitwro't wUihuro:
dXdIci
luzit
*
arsi
putui
c&lui|
u&lui|
sYlui
quiSui
quietum
crQui
crGtum
92
YEBBS.
sue- become cusctutomed
rS+s&p-* come to one*» seruei again
rS+frig- get odd again
r^ulu- come to life again
T^^^'find out (a eecret)
cdii-i-&l- or SI- grow together
ftd+^- or file- grow up
&b+^e- grow outofuee
ob+0^e-t get covered with dirt
555.2 Compound yerbs :
pr5+ciib- lie down
r6+c&p- or c&pi- tcJce lack
ab+rttp- or rttpi- carry off
d^A^csjr^pM to pieces
per+f&c- or f&fSL- finish
cSn+i&c- or i&d- huH
r&f i&c- or i&d- throw hack
ad+l&c- or li&d- draw to
ec+l&c- or l&d- draw out
in+spSc- or sp9ci- look in
r6d+&g- drive hack
o5n+Sg. drive together
oon+pSg-^ together
per+Mg- hreak throtigh
oon+t&g- tofich doedg
oon+18g- sweep together
r^+lSg- read again
mi^t-^Vig' pick vpy perceive
dl+lSg- esteem
neg+lSg- leave hehind
por-f 1^- lag out {a corpse)
por+r6g- stretch forth
por+rdg- ke^ straight on
sub+r^- rise
ab+fllg- dash down
Buesco 8u6ui suetum
rSsXpisco rSslpIui
rfifrlgesco rSfrixi
rSuIuisco rSuizi
resdsco resclui rescltum
co&lesoo co&loi oo&Utum
ftdSlesco ftdSleui ftdultom
Kbtflesoo &bdl6ui
obs^esoo obsQlSui obsifletum
prOGombo
r^clpio
abrlpio
discerpo
perflcio
cOnXcio
reiXcio
allXcio
6lXcio
inspXcio
rMXgo
cOgo
oompingo
perfiingo
contingo
colUgo
rSlSgo
intellSgo
diUgo
neglSgo
pollingo
poTilgo
pergo
sorgo
affllgo
prOctLbui
r6o6pi
abrlpui
disoerpsi
per&ci
oonieci
r6i6ci
allexi
Qllcui
inspexi
rSd^
coSgi
compegi
perfrSgi
contlgi
oollSgi
rSlegi
intellexi
dllexi
neglexi
pollinxi
poirezi
perrexi
Burrexi
afflixi
prociibXtum
rSceptum
abreptum
discerptum
perfectum
coniectum
reiectum
allectum
6li(^tTim
inspectum
rSdactum
coactum
compactum
per&actum
contactum
collectmn
rSlectiim
intellectum
dllectum
neglectum
pollinctuin
porrectum
perrectum
surrectum
afllictimi
* Bead the symbol (+) as plus or * with«'
t The root of this verb is connected with s9lo- sb. n. 'soil,* also with
torde* and sordido-. It appears again in the French gale * dirty,* souUliTi
and in the Eng. soil yb. or sb., as well as suUp and «/««A.
93
oon+fllg- dcuh together
ec+Bti^- stamp out
dis+stig- epoi
ec't-mtLg- mpe {note)
oon+spaTg' beepcUter
con+pttg- ptmetureforciUy
rS+Uq- leave
ob+c&d- eet {as 8tm\ die
r8+cM-/aW back
ec+u&d- come out
ob+caed- ctU dovm, kiU
con+laed- dash together
re+scld- cut away again
dis+fld- 6ieave in two
r6+eild- svhside
dl+uXd- divide
Bub+cand- set fire to from hdow
ec+scand- dimh up
d8-i-fend- ward off
ex+pend- weigh out
prae+hand- taJce hold of
or
obs+tend- hold towards
ex+diid- shut out
con+ttld- hammer to pieces
per+qu&t- strike violently
r6+sist- stand against
per+cSl- overturn
con+p61- drive together
r6+pSl- drive hack
con-i-8^-1] sit together^ consult
ex+dm- take out
de+Sm- take down
con+Sm- arrange {the hair)
pro+8m- bring out
oonfllgo oonflixi oonflietam
extinguo extinxi eztinctiua
distingao distinxi distmotum
Qmuiigo emunxi flmunetiun
conspergo ooDsperai oonspenom
compungo Gompunxiooiiipanfitam
rSlinquo rSllqui riSliotam
occldo occldi occftsom*
r^Ido recddit' rBciflnm
Suftdo euftsi fioftsum
occldo occidi oodsum
collldo collisi ooUlsum
rescindo rescldi rescissam
diffindo diffldi diffiawim
rSfildo rSsedi rSflessum
diuXdo dlulfii dlulsum*
suooendo succendi sucoensom
escendo escendi esoensum
defendo defend! defNiiom
expendo expend! expenBom
prehendo prebend! prehensom
prendo prend! prenniin •
ostendo ostend! ostensumt
ezcltLdo exclusi exclHsom .
contundo contiid! contusum
perctLtio percuss! percassnm
rSsisto restit! restltom
percello perctLli perculsom
compello comptLU compulsum
rSpello repptdit rSpuIsum
consiilo constdu! consaltom
eximo exSIn! exemptnm
demo dempsi demptom
cQmo comps! comptom
prOmo promps! promptum
* Also in the older writers oeeassum, diuUsum^ &c.
t For re-oeeidif re-pepulu Hence the double consonant.
X OstensO' in Lucan ; but in Ter. Ph. 7. 4, 7. and in Yarr. ostento:
il SSI', an obsolete verb, is the parent of sdlio' sb. n. ' a seat.' It is
also akin to sSde* sb. f., tiSde- rh,, sddali-, sella-t subsellio-'.
94
TISBS.
stLb+Sm- take up
r^+prlSim' press hack
oon+tSm- (cut up) despise
oon+c&n- sinff together
de+^bi- (put down) leave off
oon+quaer- get together
ab+fSr- carry off
eo+fSr- carry out
oh+f&r- present
rS+fSr- bring back
oon+B^T' plant aU over
con+btlr- bum up
ob+ciir- run toioards
in+du- put on
eo+dvL'ptUoff
dis+lu- or l&u- dissolve
ob+ru- overwhdm
in+su- sew in
re+st&tu- set up again
eo+nSca- hiU off
ex+plXca- umfdd
in+crSpa- chide
pro+h&be- keep off
de+h&be- owe^ ought
prae+h&be- present
co+arce- con^me
ex+erce-§ work out, drtU
re+sponde- ansufer
iii+dulge-i| be kind
de+le- or Un- Hot out
&b+01e- abolish
BtLmo sumpsi Bumptum
rSpilmo rSpressi rSpressum
contemno contempsi contemptoin
ooncliio concXnui concentoin
deslDO desii desltum
conquiro oonquISIaiconquIgltum
aufSro
abstilli
abl&tiim
e£fSro
exttUi
el&tum
ofPSro
obttUi
obl&tiim
rSfSro
retttOi*
rSl&tiiTnf
oonsSro
cons6ai
consltum
combOro
combussi
combustiim
oocurro
occiirrit
occursum
induo
indui
indutiim
exuo
exoi
exutum
dTliio
dTlni
dlltLtum
obruo
obrui
obriitum
insuo
inenii
institum
restltuo
restltui
restltutum
SnSco
6n6c&ui
6n8c&tiixn
orenSco
GnScui
enectum
expllco
expUcftui
expllc&tmn
orexplXco
expllcui
expUdtnm
incrSpo
incrSp&ui
incrSp&tnm
or incrgpo
incrSpui
incrSpItiim
proMbeo prohlbui
prohibitum
debeo
debui
debltnm
praebeo
praebui
praebXtiiTn
coerceo
coercui
coerc^tuin
exerceo
exercui
exerdtum
respondeo respondi
responsum
indulgeo
indulsi
indultum
dsleo
deleoi
deletiim
&b51eo
&b8l6m
&b51itnm
* For re^tetulif re-peperi. Hence the double consonant.
t Rellatum also in old writers. Comp. reddUo; redd',
X Also oceucurti,
§ Erce- or aree- is an obsolete vb. akin to the Greek Pepy-y whence
^c(- and the neut. sb. c/>7o-.
II DtdgC' most be an obsolete vb. akin to the adj. dulci-.
TBSB8.
95
ex+ple- fill up
expleo exi^Sui
expletum
r8+tSne- hold loch
rStlneo rStlnui
rgtentum
rS+cense- review
rSoenfleo rScensui rScensItum
ex+i- go out
exeo
exii
exXtnm
&m+lci- throw round one
&mXcio ILmlcui
&mictum
in+fitrci- cram in
infercio infers!
infertum
rS+p&ri-,/&w?
rSpSrio reppSri"
' rSpertum
con+p&ri-/7ui out
oompSrio oompSi^ oompertom
. 3 Reflective verbs :
l&h-dip
Iftbi
Iftbor
lapsus
am-pledr emhraeei'
ampleoti
amplector
amplexus
llc-e- hid at an auction
iXceri
iXceor
iXc^tus
plSg- heat onesdf
plangi
plangor
fang- discharge OTUsdf
fungi
fnngor
functus
t^' follow
sSqui
sSquor
s^tLtus
Viq-tam
ljk[ni
l^uor
IdctLtus
fru- or frog- enjof/t
froi
fruor
frultus
gr&d- or gr&di- march
[gr&di]
gr&dior
greflsus
ee+gr&d- march out
^rSdi
SgrSdior
egressus
ordi- begin weaving
ordiri
ordior
orsus
ftt-e- confess
f&tSri
f&teor
fassus
pro+ffit-e- profess
prSfltSri
pri(fIteor
prdfessus
p&t- or pSti- suffer
p&ti
p&tior
passus
per+p&t- suffer to the last
perpSti
perpStior
perpessus
iiIc-§ Jkneely lean
niti
nitor
nisus or nixus
mSn- or menti- measure
mStIri
metior
mensus
ad+sSn- or senti-o^iwrn^assentlri
assentior
assensus
tLt-i»0
tLti
ator
tisus
ez+pSri- fty
expSiIri
exp^rior
expertus
ob+p&i- wait for
oppeilri
oppSriot
oppertusll
qaSr- oomp2am1F
quM
quSror
questus
♦ See note * p. 94.
t See § 398.
X More literally ' fbed oneself.'
§ Old form gnttor &c. from geni^ (or genie) * a knee.* See Festus.
(1 But PlautuB haa opperiius,
^ Literally < beat oneeelf ;' for quifs' is but a variety of qudt' * ttiike.'
Comp. pldg- (r.) and jcoirr- (r.) ' beat oneself'
96
dr- or dri- rise
dzlri
Srior
ortos
mtfr- or mM- <2itf
m&A
mtfrior
mortaufl
re-fM/bn.
ten
reor
r&iuB
mUr-e- earn
xnSrbi
xnSreor
mMtns
ufir-«-/«r
uSrBii
uSreor
Q&ItCUl
ta- Of tae- guard
taSri,
taeor
tuitus or tatoB
H^oktaifi
ftpifoi
&pi80or
aptuB
&d+&p-oto*n
UfoiSGL
ftdipisoor
Kdepttia
pro+ffto- Mf ot^
pri(flciRci
prSflciflOor
prSfectus
n&o- 19m, odtotn
nandsci
nanoisoor
Dftnotus*
\Xi/f^fiXy bargain
p&dsci
p&ciscor
pactus
vlo- avenge
uldBci
uldfloor
ultus
ex+por+]%- i/^ai^ t^^
expoTffiBci
exporgifloorf exporrectns
d9+f&t- ^m in
dsfetisd
defttisoor
dsfessus
con+mSn- tntn^n^
oommXnisd
obllniRci
<^TnTnyTiifK*^rnnTnTnAnfnfl
ob+lXu-/<wy«<
oblluiscor
oblltus
* So ratlier than naeiut in
t Literally ' I begin to itreteli mTself oat*
fXBBBt
97
556
CoNJTGATIOir OP IVPBBYXCIT TsiTSBS.
Last letter a
e
oonsonant
a
i
Conjugation 1
s
8
a
4
Lat. o.F. ili-a-
d^ioe-
BCXlb-
&CU-
audi-
TRngliiih
pUmgk
tsaich
— •■* -
«Aar/Mi»
hear
•
^.ftro
d5ceo
sorlbo
flouo
audio
P
&rftB
d5068
scrlbls
&cuIb
audlB
S
&r&t*
d5cSt*
serlbli
toiXi
audit*
?
PJbr&miLa
ddcemtts
sorlblmtts
ftouXmtts
audimiU
1
ftrStla
d5o6tIs
BcrtbKtIs
ftcultis
audltis
I
o
•
1
ftrant
ddoent
Bcrlbuxkt
ftcaimtf
audinnt
S* ilrlLbam
d5c6bam
sctlbebam
ftcuSbam
audiebam
A
ftr&bfts
d<$c6bft8
scrlbfibfts
&ou6bas
audiebas
&rab&t*
ddc6b&t»
sorlbebftt*
ftcu6b&t*
aadi«b&t*
*
P.&rabamii8
dSceb&mils
scrlbebftmiis
ftouebftmilB
audiebamiiB
g
1
ftrabatis
d5c6b&tls
scrlbeb&tlB
ftouebatis
audiebatis
&r&bant
dScebant
flcrlbsbant
&cu6bant
audiebant
«
S, &r&bo
d5o6bo
Bcrlbam
&cuam
audiam
1
&r&bl&
d5c6b!8
scribes
ftcuGB
audiSs
(<<
ftr&blt
d5c6blt
BCrtbSt*
acu6t*
audiSt*
1
P.arablmtts
dSceblmtls
scrtbSmttB
flcuSmtts
audiemtLs
J
fti«bms
dScebltiB
Bcrlbetito
ftcuetfe
audiOilB
^
ir&bunt
ddcebimt
scilbent
&cuent
audioit
•
§
1
S. 2. ftrft
d5c9
MiU
&cafl
audi
1
P.2. &rat«
dSoetS
scnbltS
&cult«
audits
S. 2. &rftto
d5o0to
scrlblto
ftculto
audlto
3. &r9,to
d5c6to
scrlblto
&cuIto
audlto
^
P.2. Sr6t(H«
d5o6t9t6
BcnbltdlS
ftcultdtd
aadlt5t8
a
3. &ranto
dSoento
Bcrlbanto
ftcunnto
audiunto
•
iSl&rem
d5ceam
Bcrlbam
&cuam
audiam
1
&rSs
d5ce&s
BCTlb&B
ttcuas
audias
^
^'
&r«t*
d5ce&t«
BCrtbftt*
ftcu&t*
audi&t*
p
sf
PilremtU
d^foe&mtU
Bcnb&mtls
ftcuftmiiB
audiamtiB
1
&retl8
d5ce&tX8
BcnbftUs
ftcuatXs
audiatls
iQ
»•
ftrent
d5ceant
Bcrlbant
ftcuant
audiant
/S'.ftr&rem
d5c6rem
BcrlbSrem
&ca8rem
audlrem
D
&i
ftrftrSs
d5o6r68
Bcrlb^res
acuSres
audlres
&rarSt»
d5c6r«t»
BCrtb«r6t*
acuCrgt*
audlrgt*
QQ
1
P.&r&rGmiU
d5o6r6mtU
Bcrlb^remtLB
&cu8rem1i6
audlremiis
&rS,r6tX8
d5cer6tXs
BCrtbMtXs
llcaeretSs
audlretls
&r§rent
dScSrent
scnb^reat
aculrent
audlrent
* But see for quantity § 412 and note. f Or acuont.
98
TBBB8.
Last letter a
Conjugation 1
e
2
oonsonant
8
8
i
4
Lat. c.F.
English
ftra-
plough
Uack
Borlb-
wriU
Jlca- '
audi-
hear
IKFIKI-
TIVB
Mood.
ftnu-s
d^rS
scrlbSrS
&cu6r6
audirS
Pabtioi-
PLB.*
&ranti- or
dScenti- or
ddcent-
scrlbenti- or
scrlbent-
ftcuenti- or
ftcuent-
audienti-<>r
audient-
Pabt.
FUTUBB.
ftrfttOro-
or — a-
doctflro-
or — ^
Bcriptfbro-
OT — a-
nUmXtHro-
audlturo-
or — a-
GEBUND.f
&rando-
dScendo-
scilbendo-
&caendo-
audiendo-
i&o-
99
i&ci- throw
557 There are certain verbs which mix together the consonant and
i conjugations in the imperfect tenses, viz. :
flU;- or fiUn- make f9d- or f5di- dig
fttg- „ filgi-/ctf
c&p- yy c&pi- take
r&p- ,9 r&pi- 9eize
Together with the reflective verbs :
*gr&d- or gr&di- march I mdr- or mSii- die i pSt- or pSti- mahe
9r- „^ri- rii0 | p&t- ,, p&ti-«t(^erl oneadf matter.
Observe too that all these seventeen verbs have the vowel short
[Iftc-lt ,, Iftci- d/rav>
[Sp^tyy S^i^'hoJc
8&p- or s&pi- tatU
cttp- „ cttpi- desire
p&r- ,y p&ri- produce
qu&t- ,, qn&ti- shake.
558 MIXED CONSONANT AND / CONJUGATION.
Indioativb Mood.
Present Tense.
S» fngio f ugls fiiglt ; P. fdglmas fiigltis foginnt.
Past-Impeffect. Fviure^
S. fiigiebam, fugiebas &c. S. fugiam fugies &o.
* Declined like praesenti- or praesent^. See § 219.
f Declined like a neuter noun in o. % Only used in componndii
J
YBBBS. 99
IXPBRATITB MOOP.
Present. S. fugS ; P. fuglte.
Future.
JS. % faglto, 3. fuglto ; P. 2. fagltote, 3, fagiunto.
SuBJUVOTiYE Mood.
Present Tense. Past Tense.
S. fugiam fugias &o. S. f ogSrem fagHres &c.
Infinitiye^ fagSre. PabtioipiiE, fagienti- or fugient-.
pABTiciPLE FuTUBB, fuglturo-. Gbbuitp, fugiendo-.
55& Observe that those forms, which have the vowel after y marked
short, follow the consonaiit conjugation ; the others are derived as
'fix)m a verb in i.
560 In old writers sach forms as capire, fodire, parire &c. occur.
561 CONJUGATION OF PERFECT TENSES.
Grade form of perfect, &r&-Tils-.
Indicative Mood.
Present-Perfect or Aorist.
S. &r&uX SAuistl &r&uit ; P. ftiAuXmiis ftrftoistls &rflu6rant
or &r&u6r8.
Past-Perfect.
S. &rauSram &Au8ri&s ftrftuSrat ; P. &]AuSr&miis &r9.u8r9.tl8 &r&-
uSrant.
IhOtbre-Peffect.
S. ftr&uSro &r&u6rXs &r9.uSrIt ; P. ftrftuSrlmtis ftrftuMtls ftrftuSrint.*
SuBJUircTiVE Mood.
Present-Peffect or Aorist,
JS, &AuSrim &r&a8ils ftrftuSrit ; P. &r&u8rlmiis &rS.uSrltIs &r&u8rmt.*
Past-Perfect,
S, &r9.uissem &r9.uiss6s ftrfiuisset ; P. &r&aiss6miis &r9,uiss6tXs &r&-
uissent.
iBFiiriTivE Mood.
&r&uiss8.
562 The conjugation of a perfect which takes the suffix U, instead
of ufyy differs solely in the absence of the u. See § § 5S4, 588, 590,
613, 620, 628.
* These two tenses are often confounded by Latin writers as regards
the quantity of the i. See § 476.
100 Trass.
563 The perfect tenses often widez]||o a contraction : as,
&r&nl
ftrfinistl or ftrastl
Itiftnit
ftr&uXmibi
ftr&uistls or ftrastls
&rS.u6rant or ftrftru^t or &r&a5r6.
ftrftuicram or ftraram S^o.
&c(uSro f, &rSlro &c.
ftrftuSrim ,, &r&rim &o,
&r9.uissem „ i&rassem &c.
&^iii8s8 fj ftrassS.
564 In the perfects of the i conjugation nmilar contractions oc-
cur: as,
audlul or audil
audluisti, audiisti, or audisti
audluit or audiit
audlulmiis or audilmUs
audluistlB, audiistis, or audistSs
audluSrunt or audiSrunt, or
audluGr^ or audi6r8.
audluSram or audiSram &q.
audluSro ,, audiSro &o,
audluSrim ,, audiSrim &o»
audluissem ,, audiissem or audissem &c.
audluissS „ audiissS or audissS.
565 If the crude form of the perfect have a; or 8 before U, as dix-Xs-,
the following contractions are found :
dixl
dixisti or dixtl
dixit
diximiis
dixis^ or dixtXs
dixSrunt or dix6rS.
dixissem or dixem &c.
dixissS „ dix8 &c.
566 As the future-perfect of the indicative originally ended in fyo,
rather than ^, and the subjunctiye perfect in ^m, rather than
4rim, the following contractions, which occur in old writers, are
explained :
Ind, fut.'perf, faxo, fiuds&c. for ^Sro &c.
JSid^, pre8,-perf, faxim, faxis &o, „ f^6rim &a
i^ubf. past-petf. faxem*, faxSs &Q» „ f^cissem &c.
567 So again, ftrasso, &rassls &c. for &r&y8ro &c.
* See § 1209 /. note.
BBVLECTIYB OB PAB8IYB YBBBS.
101
568 From this future-perfect is formed an old infinitive future
ftrassSr^.
569 The gerund of the consonant and i conjugations often ends in
undo, rather than endo ; as scilbundo-.
670
REFLECTIVE OR PASSIVE VERBS.
OoBJUGATioir ov iMPBavBOT Tensbs.
Last letter a
e
consonant
u
i
Conjugatioii 1
2
3
8
4
LatCF.
oma-
dSoe-
uort-
m6ta-
audi-
English
drett
teach
turn
fear
hear
•
S, omtfr
dScetfr
uortdr
mStutfr
auditfr
i
omSrls*
dtfcSrIs*
uortgrls
mStuSrIs
audlrls
^'
om&tiir
ddcetiir
uortltiir
mStuXtiir
audltiir
"8
P.om&miir
dScemiir
uortlmiLr
mStuImitr
audlmiir
i
om&mlnl
ddcemlnl
uortXmlnl
mStuImlnl
audlmini
•
omantiLr
d5centiir
uortuntiLr
mStuuntiirt
audiuntilr
•S*. om&b&r
ddceb&r
uorteb&r
mStu6b&r
audieb&r
1
1
om&b&rls or
d(k>6b&rXs or
uortsb&ris or
mStueb&rls or
audi6b&rls or
o
om&b&rS
dSc6b&r8
uorteb&rS
mStu6b&rS
audieb&rS
H
1
om&b&tiir
d5ceb&tiir
uorteb&tiir
mStueb&ttir
audieb&tiir
>
1
P.omS,b&miir
ddcebftmilr
uorteb&miir
m^tuebftmiir
audieb&miir
<
omS,b&mInl
ddc6b&mXnI
uortQb&minI
mStueb&mXnl
audieb&mlnl
1
om&bantiir
dtfcebantiir
uortebantiir
mStuebantilr
audiebanttlr
•
S, om&bdr
d(k>6bdr
uort&r
mStu&r
audi&r
£
om&b^rls or
d5c6b6rls or
uorterls or
mStuSils or
audieils or
om&bSrg
dScebSrg
uortSrS
m8tu6rS
audi6r6
«
om&bltiLr
dScebltiir
uortetiLr
mStuetiir
audietiir
^
P.omablmiir
ddceblmiir
uortemiir
mStuemiir
audiemilr
^
om&blmlnl
dSceblmlnl
uortSmInX
mStuemlnl
audiemlnl
om&buntiir
d5c6buntiir
uortentiLr
mStuentilr
audienttLr
§
1
S, 2. om&r6
d(k>6r8
uortSrS
mStuSrS
audirS
1
•
1
P.2.om&mlnI
d5c6mXnI
uortlmlnl
mStuXmlnl
audlmXnl
^Homattfr
d6cSi6T
uortlt^r
mStuXtSr
audltCrJ
^
>
^
1
P.3. ornantSr
d5centdr
uortuntSr
mStuunt5r§
audiuntSr
* Arbitrarit utderU, for arhUrdrts^ uiderXs, occur. f ^^ metuontur,
X There was also for the 2d and 3d person of the singular an old form
in mino ; aafa-mUnOf progredi-fntno, ^ Or meiuontor,
k2
102
BBrXiXCTITB OS PASSrf I TEBB8.
Last letter a
e
consonant
u
i
Conjtigatbn 1
2
8
8
4
'Lat.OJf.
oma-
dttoe-
uort-
m8tu-
audi-
Engliflh
<2re««
teocA
twm '
fior
hear
•
S'.omSr
dtfce&r
uort&r
mStu&r
audi&r
omSrls or
dSce&xlsof*
uort&Elsor
mStu&iis or
audi&rls or
Is
omerS
d($oe&r9
uortfirS
mStuftrS
audi&rS
•
«
omStiLr
dSce&tiir
uort&tiir
mStu&tiir
audi&tilr
g
§
P.omemtlr
ddceftmilr
uort&mtir
mStu&miLr
audi&miir
>
i
^
omemlnl
ddce&mlnl
uortiSmlnl
mStu&mliil
audi&mXm
omentiLr
dSoeantilr
uortantiLr
mStuantiLr
audianttlr
S, om&rSr
dScSrSr
uortSrSr
mStuSrSr
audlrSr
W
P
^
om&rSris or
d5cer6rX8 or
uortSr6rXs or
mStuSreris or
audlrSrls or
{3
1
om&rGr^
dfioSrerS
uort&6r6
inStu8r6r8
audlrSrS
QQ
^
om&retiir
ddcQr^tiir
uortSretiLr
m^tuSrettlr
audlretiir
1
P.omaremtir
ddoeremiir
uortSremiir
m^tuSremiLr
audlrSmtlr
^
ornftrSmlnl
ddoeremlnl
uort8r6mInI
mdtuSremlnl
audliemlnl
omibrentttr
ddoQrenttir
uortSrentiLr
m^tuSrenttir
audlrentibr
Ihfinx-
TIVE
M00D.»
om&riSr or
d6cen^r or
uortifir or
mStuiSr or
audlriSr or
om&n
ddoerl
uorti
mdtui
audlrl
Pa
CIl
BTI-
»LB.t
omando-
dtfcendo*
uortendo-
m^uendo-
audiendo-
671 MIXED CONSONANT AND / CONJUGATION.J
IiTDiCATivB Moop. Present Ten$e.
S, mdridr mSrSrXs m^rltilr ; P. mdrXmiir mSrlmXnl mSriontttr.
Past-Imperfect, FSOwre.
& zu5ri9b&r m^eb&ris &c. S, mSri&r mOiierls &c.
Impebatiyb Moop.
Present Tense, J$. m&SrS ; P, mSrlrnXnl.
Future. JS. 2. mdrXtdr, 3. mOiltdr ; P. 3. m^riuntdr,
SuBJUNCTiYB Mood.
Present Tense, Past Tense.
S, mdriftr mSriftrls &o« S, m9r6r& m5r6r6rl8 &c.
IvriKiTiYBy mHA, Pabtioiple, mdrienti- or mSrieni-.
Pabtioiplb Fxttubb, mdrltaro-. Gbbuvp, mdriundo-.
* The infinitives in er belong to tbe old language,
t The reflective verbs have also participles in enli- or eni- and in
tw<h. t See § 567.
REVLECTITB OB Pik0SIYB VEBB8.
103
671. 1 In old writers each forms as mdnxntb and mSrIrl occur.
572 Oii* (r.) r%9e, and p^i- (r. ) mate onesdf magter, partake mow of
the i conjugation : as, SilrSr, 9rM ; pdtlrls, ptftlttb, pStlmiiri p5-
tlrSr, pOtlrl.
573 The perfect tenses of a reflective or passive verb are formed by
the perfect participle in to and the verbs Ss- or fii-.
674 CONJUGATION OP THE PERFECT TENSES OF A
REFLECTIVE OR PASSIVE VERB.
Ibdioative Moob.
PreserU'Perfect or Aorist,
or ful P. om&trt' stLmtts or fulmiis
„ foistl om&tl estis „ fuistis
„ fuit omfttlsunt fu6runtorfuM.
8. om&tus* sum
om&ttLs 6b
om&tiis est
S, om&tiis 6ram
om&ttUi 6r&8
om&tiis Srat
iS*. omfttiLs 6ro
omattLs SrXs
om&ttis Srit
Pcut'Perfect,
or fuSram P. om&tX MmtUi or fii&&mtl8
„ fuSrito omfitl Sr&tis n fu^r&tXs
„ fuSrat om&tl Srant „ fuSrant.
Futwre-Perfect,
or fuSro P. omftti SilmtLs or fu^ilmtis
fuSrIs om&tl SrltXs „ fiiSrltXs
9)
yy faSrlt
om&tl Srunt
M
fiiSrint.
S, om&tussim
omfttussis
om&tus sit
SlTBJUirOTlVB MOOB.
Present'Perfei^ or Aorist,
or fii^rim P. omAtl simtU
,f fuSns om&tl sitis
orfiiSiImiis
,1 fuSntXs
99
fiiSrit
om&tl sint „ fiiSrint.
Past'Peffect,
S, om&ttLs essem or fuissem P. om&tx essemils or fuissSmiis
om&tiis esses „ fuisses om&tl essQtls „ fuissStls
om&tiis esset ,, fuisset om&tX essent „ fuissent.
Ibfinitivb Moob.
omatiis essS or fuissS.
* Ornat&ii omaid or omatt/m^ to agree with the nominative,
f Omaiij omatae or omatd, to agree with the nominatiye.
104 VXSB8.
CONJUGATION OF A SIMPLE* VERB, WITH THE
ENGLISH TRANSLATION.
570 cjp. bcbXb- write*
Principal parts : scrlbSrS scrlbo scripid scriptum.
IlTDIOATITE MOOP.
Freamt Tente^ scilb-.
As a present-imperfect, am ing :
Ad fr&trem xneum scrlbo, 1 am writing to my brother.
Ad fr&trem tuum scilbXs, Tou are writing to yowr brother.
Ad fr&trem suum scrlblt, Se is writing to his brother.
Ad fr&trem nostrum scilblmtLS, We are writing to owr brother.
Ad fr&trem nostrum scrlbltls, Tou are writing to your brother.
Ad fr&trem suum scrlbunt, They are writing to their brother*
576 ' as an historic present :
PostSrS die ad sSnem scrlbo, The next day I write to the old man.
677 as a present of custom :
Eg5 c&l&mO scrlbo, / write with a reed.
TH pinn& scrlbls, Tou write with a pen,
678 as a present, translated by do :
Egd u6r5 scrlbo, Tesldo write.
Tti u6r9 scilbis, Tes you do write,
579 as a present, including past time, have been ing :
lam du&s boras scilbo, I have been writing now two hours.
680 Past-Im^perfecty scrlbeb&-.
As a past-imperfect, was ing :
Scrlbebam cum puSr intr&uit, / vhzs writing when the boy came in.
681 as a past tense of custom, used to :
-*
Egd c&l&mO scnbebam, / useeh" to write with a reed,
TH pinn& scrxbsb&s, Tou used to write with a pen.
* That is, not reflective or pasnve.
t Or • I wrote,' &c
105
582 as a past tesm, inoludixig time preceding, had been
iriff:
lam triB hOcaa flcnbebam, / had been then ipriUn^ three
htmn,
583 Future Tenxp Sdlbft- or sctlbS-.
Translated bj shaU^ wiU :
Oras m&nS scrlbam, I shall write tomorrow morning,
Cras m&nS scrlbSSy JTotf wUl write tomorrow morning,
Freeent'Perfect Tense, scripsXs*.
584 As a preaent-perfeoty have en :*
QuattaSr Spistttlas scripsl, / have written fimr Utters,
585 as an aorist, translated l^ the English past :
HSri ad nfig5ti&tQrem scripSI, / virote yesterday to the m/er-
chainL
586 — as an aorist, translated bj did :
Eg5 uSrS scripSIy Tes I did write,
TH u^rO Bcripsistl, Tes you did write,
587 as a present-perfect, trandated by an En^sb pre-
sent:
■
Eg5 si scriptf, resGrtbIt, If 1 write, he writes a^ain.
Ta 81 scripsisti, rescrlbXt^ ^yov write, he writes again.
588 Past-Perfect, eoripsSra-.
Translated by had e n :
Ante id tempus scripsSram, I had written before that time,
589 ' translated by an English past :
Eg5 SI scripsSram^ rescrlbdhat. If I wrote, he wrote again*
TfL SI scripsSras, rescrlbebat, Ifyofu, wrote, he wrote again,
* That is, the perfect partieiple of the English verb.
106 YEBB8.
590 Futwre-Perfect^ scripsSr*.
Translated by shaJH have eiiy vnU have
Ants noctem ecripsSro, / shall have tmtten before night.
Ants noctem BCiip8&:l8,* Tou will have written hefore night,
591 ■ translated by an English present :
EgS 81 BCiipsSrOy rescrlbet, If I write^ he will write again,
Ttx fli scripsSris, rescrlbeti If ywt write^ he will write again.
692 Impe&ativb Mood.
Present Tense,
Translated by the simple verb :
Scribe ad p&trem tuum. Write to your father,
Scnblte ad p&trem nostrum. Write to yoiMr father,
693 Futv^ Tense.
Translated by shaUy must, let; or by the simple verb :
Scrlblto, Thou shalt write. ScilbltOtS, Te shall imte.
ScilbltOy He shall write. Scrlbunto, They shall write,
594 SiTBJnNCTiYB Mood.
Present TensSy scnb&-.
As a present-imperfect, am ing (indirect interrogative) :
Nescio quid scrlbam, / know not what I am writing,
Nescio quid scrlbfts, I know not what you are writing.
595 ■ translated by an indicative present (result) :
IndS fit ut nihil de hac r6 sen- Hence it happens that I write
bam, nothing on this subject,
Ind8 fit ut nihil de hac r6 scrlbSjs, Hence it happens thai you write
nothing on this subject.
596 translated by do (concession) :
Yt scnbam, nSn est s&tis, Ihen granting that I do writCy it is not
enough,
y t scilbas, nSn est s&tXSy JSven granting that you do write, it is
not enough,
• But see, as legardB the quantity of the i after r, § 476.
YBBB8, 107
597 tranfilated by skcndd, wovld (hypothesis) :
Si pinnH mihi sit, sczlbamy If I had a pen, IwvM forite.
Si piim& tibi sit, scrlb&s, If^ou had a pen^ you toould write,
698 ■ translated by were ing :
SSdeo hic, tanquam sdlbam, / sit here^ as if I icere writing.
SM6s istic, tanquam scilbfts^ Tou sit there, as if you were writing,
SSdet iUlCy tanquam sdlbat, ffe sits yonder, as if he were writing,
699 translated by may (purpose) :
Pinn& d&tur, qu&* scilbam, 1^ pen is givers me, that I may
writ^ with it,
Pinn& d&tur, qu& scrlb&s. Hie pen is given you^ that you may
write wM it*
699. 1 ■ translated by must or shaU (command) :
Lex est ut scrlbam, There is a law that I must write*
Lex est ut scilbfts, There is a law that you must write,
600 translated by to (indirect interrogative) :
Nescio quid scrlbam, / know not what to write.
Kesds quid scilbas, Tou know not what to write,
601 translated by thaU, wiU :
Puer timet n6 scnbam. The hoy is afraid I shaU write.
Puer timet n6 scnb&s. The boy is afraid you vnU write,
^2 translated hjfrom ing :
Hoc impSdit n6 scrlbam, This prevents me from writing.
Hoc impSdit n6 scrlbfts. This prevents you from writing.
602. 1 translated by English infinitiye :
SinS scrlbam. Let me write, SinS scrlb&miis, Let us write.
SinS scnbat, Let him write. Sln8 scrlbant. Let them write,
* Literally, * with which.'
f Or rather, ' to write with.*
108 TIBB8.
602. 2 translated bj an EngHsh impeiatiTe :
Ne SGilbani, Let me not write, N6 scrlbfimtts^ Lei ua not write.
K6 flcnb&fly Ih not write* K6 scrlb&iXB^ Do not write,
N6 sorlbat. Let him not write, N6 BCilbant, Let them not write.
603 Past Tenae, scrlbSrO-.
Asa past-impeifecty woe in^ (mdireat intmogatiye) i
Kesciebam quid scrlbSrem, / knew not what I was writing,
Nesciebam quid sciIbSres, / knew not what you were writing.
604 tran^ted by an English past (result)*
IndS factum est ut nihil de hac Hence it happened that I wrote
te scHbSrein, nothing on thie subfeet.
IndS &ctum est ut nifai! de hao ffenoe it happened that you wrote
r6 sciIbSres^ nothing on this mbject,
605 translated by should or wo\dd have been ing (hy-
pothesis) :
Si pinnH mihi esset, scrlbSrem, If there had been a pen for mey I
should have been writing.
Si pinn& tXbi esset, sorlbMs^ If there had been a pen for you^
you would have been writing,
606 translated by had been vng :
SSdQbam hic, tanquam scnbfirem, / vfos sitting here, as if I had
been writing,
SMSbfts istlOy tanquam scilbSres, You were sitting thersy as if you
had been writing,
SSdfibat illlo, tanquam scilbSret, Be was sitting yonder^ as if he
had been writing,
607 translated by might (purpose) :
Finn& d&ta est qu&* scrlbSrem, The pen was given mey that Imightf
write with it,
Hmi& d&ta est qu& scilbMs, 2%e pen was given y&Uy that you
might write with it.
* Liteially, ' with which.' f Ox rather, 'to write with.'
YXBBflU 100
608 ■ ■ translated by must or should (command) : '
Lex Srat at scrlb^rem, There was a law that I fMUt VfrUe,
Lex tot ut scrlbSres, 27iere was a law that y<m must write,
609 translated by to ^^dlrect interrogatiye) :
Nesdebam quid sctlb&renly Jhtetc not what to write.
Nesdebas quid scrlb^rGs, You knew not what to write,
610 translated by should or would :
Paer timebat ne scrlbSrem, Hie loy was afraid I should write,
Puer timebat ne scrlb^rSs, The hoy was afraid you would write,
61 1 translated by from ing :
Hoc imp^iebat n6 scrlbSrem^ This prevented me from writing.
Hoc impSdiSbat n6 scrlbSr^s, This prevented you from writing,
612 translated as a past order* :
Ne scnbSrem, {He hade) fne not write,
Ne scnbSres, {He hade) you not write,
613 Present-Peffeetf scripsSn-.
As a present-perfect, have en (indirect interrogative) :
Neseio quid scrips&miy I know not what I have written,
Nesds quid scripsSrlst , Tou know not what you have ^written,
«
614 — as an aorist (Indirect interrogatiye) :
Nesdo quid hSri ^cripsSrim, J know not what I wrote yesterday,
Nesds quid hSrl scripsSrls, Tou know not what youwroteyesterday.
615 translated by may have »■■«! ;
ForsXtan nYminm scripsSrim^ Perhaps I niay have written too much,
ForsXtan nYminm scripsSns^ Perhapsyoumay havetmttentoomuch,
* In reported speech.
t But seei aa regards the quantity of the i after r, § 476.
L
110 YBBB8.
616 as a future-perfect after a present, translated by an
English present (reported speech) :
Caesar poUXcGtur s6, SI scripsSrim, Ccuar provn/Ues that if I write, he
rescripttLrum, vnU write again.
Caesar pollXcetur s6, 81 soripsSiISy Ccesar promises that if you writer
rescripttlrum, he wiU write again.
617 translated by were to , or English past tense (hy-
pothesis) :
Si* scripsSrim &d eum, rSdeat, If I were to writef to hinty hewovld
retwm.
Si scripsSns &d eum, rSdeaty If you were to write to him^ hewovld
reiwm,
618 translated by should^ would (consequence of hypothesis) :
Frustr& scripsSrim, Ishoudd write in vain,
Frustrft scripsSrls, Tou would write in vain.
619 translated by had en :
SSdeo hic, tanquam Spist^flam I sit here^ as if I had written the
perscripsSrimt, whole letter*
SSdes istlCy tanquam SplstSlam TousitihereyOsifyouhadwrit''
perscripsSns, ten the whole letter,
SSdet iUlc, tanquam Spist^flam HesitsyoTideryasifhehadwrit-
perscripsSrit, ten the whole letter.
620 translated as an imperative :
Id nunquam scripsSrim, Let me never write that.
Id nunquam scripsSrls, Never write that.
Id nunquam scripsSrit, Let him never write that.
* This ft might be omitted. Thus in the English too we might drop
the \fy and say, ' were I to write to him,' &c.
t Or, * if I wrote,' &c.
X PoT'Scrib' literally signifieB ' write through, write to the end*'
YBKBS* 111
621 Piut-Perfect^ scripsisse-.
Ab a past-perfect, translated by had en (indirect inter-
rogative) :
QuaefiStum est, iitrum scripsissem, The qitettian was asked^ whe-
ther I had wriUen*
Quaesxtum est, iitrum scripsissSs, Hie question was asked, whe-
ther you had written,
622 as a future-perfect after a past, translated by an English
past (reported speech) :
Caesar polllc6b&tur sS, si scripsis- Ccesar promised that if 1 wrote,
sem, rescripturum, he would write again,
Caesar poUlcSb&tur sS, si scripsis- Cassar promised ^uxt if you
sSs, rescriptHrum, wrote, he would write again,
623 translated by had en (hypothesis) :
EtiamSI scripsissem, firustra esset, Even if IhadwriMen, it would
have been in vain.
Etiamsl scripsisses, frustra esset, Even if you had written, it
would have been in vain,
624 translated, by should have, wovld have (consequence of
hypothesis) :
Turn* qutfquS scripsissem, Even in that case* I should have written.
Turn qu^quS scripsisses, Even in that case you, would have written,
625 IirriNiTiTS Impebfeot, scrlbSrg.
Translated by an English infinitive :
Debeo sciIbSrS, / ought to write,
NSqueo scrlbSrS, / canviot umte,
626 translated as an English indicatiye :
Scio eum scrlbSrg, / Jctiow that he is writing,
SdSbam eum scrlbSr^, 1 hneio that he was writing,
627 translated by an English perfect infinitive :
Pebebam scrlbSrS, / ought to have written,
* LiteraUy • then.'
11^ watr.
i
628 IirviNitiTB Pebvbod, ficrip^BS^
l^ratlfil&ted by an English perfect infimtivd s
ScripsiEeS dldttb, He ia said to have vffiUen>,
629 translated by an English indicative :
Scio etim BcripsigBS, I hiow thai he has written.
Scio eum h&tl scripsissS, / know that he wrote yesterday^
SdSbam eum scripsissS^ / knew that he had written.
630 -- — ^ translated by the having en, :
Scripsisse ezltio el fuit. The having written was fatal to hitn,
631 Pabticifls Impehvecv, sctlbenti- or scrlbent-.
Translated by ing :
SSnex Spistiflam scrlbens d^ddity The dd man^ white vmting a
letter^ fdl doim,
632 Pabtioiple Futitbe, scripture-.
Translated by abottt to , intending to .*
Ad ipsum eras scripturtiSy haec InJteivding to wriU to himsdf to^
nunc Smitto, fnorrow, 1 pass over these Migs
now.
632* 1 Dxco me scripttirum essS^ / say that J wiU write.
Dixl mS scripturum essS, / said that I would write.
632. 2 Dixl mS scripturum fuissS, / said that I wovld have written.
633 ^^...^^.^ translated as an intenticm not fdlfilled :
H&bSbam eX gr&tias, scripttirus* Ifdt gratefvl to him, and shotdd
qu5qu8, nisi aegrOtSjrem, have written too^ if I had not
hem HL
634 Qebund, scrlbendo-.
Translated by ing :
N. Mihi est scnbendum ^pistd- To me hdongs the writing the
l&st, letters.
Ac. Dsllgltlr ad scrlbendum ffe is selected for writing the
Spistdl&sty letters,
* See also tbe conjugation of the verbyii- with the participle in itiro,
f Most of these constructions are confined to. the old writers. See
the use of the Gerundive, § 1287.
TSBBS. 113
G. YeniSpist^flaBBorlbendlcauflsS^ 1 earns for the sake of writing
ihelettert.
D. Apttls est Bcrlbendo Spist^jlfts*, He is fit for writing letters,
Ab. Scrlbendof Spist^l&s occ1ip&- He is engaged in writing letters,
tfis esty
635 SupOB, flcriptu-.
Tranfilaied as an Knglieh infinidve :
*Ac. Eo illuc scriptumy / am going yonder to write.
Ab. Hae litt^rae difflclles sunt These letters are difficidt to write,
soriptti,
CONJUGATION OF A REFLECTIVE VERB, WITH
THE ENGLISH TRANSLATION.
636 Arma- (r.), arm oneadf.
Principal parts : armfti!, armor^ arm&tii8.
637 IimiOATiYB Mood.
«
Present Tense, am arming myself, arm myself &G.
Armor, I am arming myself ,
Arm&tlB or ann&rS):, Tou are arming yourself,
Arm&tlir, Se is arming himsdf
Arm&mtLr, We are amdng oursdves,
Armftmlnl, Tou are arming yov/rsdves,
Armantlir, They are arming ikemsdves,
638 Past-Imperfect, was arming myself ko,
ArmUbar, / was arming m/ysdf
Armftbftrls or armftbiirS, You were arming yoursdf,
Arm&b&tliry He was arming himsdf*
Arm&bftmlir, We were arming ourselves.
ArmUb&mXnl, You were arming yowndAies,
Arm&bantiir, They were arming themsehes.
• See note tp, 112.
f This form of the Gkrund, although an ablative, is often shortened
in late writers, as uigUandS {Juv, 3. 232).
t The form in r^ is not common for the present indicative ; it may
be from fear of confusion with the infinitive.
l2
U4
/
639 Futurey shall or Will ann mjseli; &o, '
AjmUbory I^uUl arm mysdf,
Arm&bSris or ami&b6rS» J<>t« ii^i2{ arm yofwndf.
Ann&bitlir^ He vnll arm himself,
Arm&bXmiir, We shall arm owrsdves,
Arm&blmlnl, Ywi wUl arm yotbrsdves,
Arm&buntliry They t9iU arm thoMSb^eA.
640 Presera-Perfecti bavd armed mTsel^ &c. (or Aorist, armed myBelf.)
Arm&tos* sum, / have armed mysdf.
Arm&tiis* fis, Tou have armed yoursdf,
Arm&tiis* est^ He has armed hvmsdf.
Arm&tlf siLmiiSi W4 have armed owndves,
Arm&tit estlSi Tou have armed yovrsdves.
Arm&tit sunt, They have armed themsdves,
641 Past'Peffect^ had armed myself, &c.
Arm&tiis Sram]:, / had armed mysdf,
Arm&tiis ^r&s, Fot» had armed yonrsdf,
Annfttilfl &at, He had armed himsdf.
Armftti Srftmiid, We had anned oursdves.
Ann&ti SrfttiB, Tou had armed yowredves.
AmAti &ant| They had armed themsdves,
642 Futwre-Perfecty shall have armed myself, ko,
Arm&ttU &o,§ 1 shaU have armed mysdf,
Arm&tiis Wa^ Tou wiU have armed yov/redf.
Axm&tils &it, He trill have armed htmsdf.
Axm&ti Mmttfl^ We shall have armed oursdves.
Arm&ti SrltXii^ Tou unU have armed yotwedvea.
Aim&ti &runt, They trill have armed themedves.
643 Ihpxbatiyb ^[oop.
PreserU,
Arm&r6, Arm yoursdf, | Arm&mlnl, Arm yourselves.
* Armata if the nominative be feminine, amnSium if it be neuter*
t Armatme if the nominHtiTe be feminine, armSiH if it be neuter.
t Oi fiOram, &c $ OtftOro, &c.
115
644 Fuiwrt.
Aim&lor or armamXno, You mugt arm ytmrsdf*
Annfttor or arm&mXno, £fe must arm hvmsdf,
Amumtory Theg must arm themkhes,
645 SuBJUircTrvB Mood.
Freaeni. (See the several translationB of scribcMn,)
Constll impSrat ili Brmer, The congul commands ms to arm myself.
Gonsiil imp^rat Ht armfiils The consul commands you to arm your-
or armSrS, self.
646 Fast. (See the several translations of scribere-^.)
OonsiU imp^rftiiit ifct amdrer. The consul comananded me to arm
myself.
OonstQ impSribuit Ht arm&rQrls The consul commanded you to arm
or armiUrerSy yoursdf.
647 Fresent-Feffect, (See the several translations of scrvpseri-m>,)
Nescio qja&re ann&tus sim^ I know not why I have armed myself.
Nescio qu&re aon&tus sXSy I know not wfiyyou have armed yoursdf,
648 Fast'FeffecL (See the several translations of scripsisse^m,)
liTesciebam quire am^ttifl essem, / imew not why I had armed
m^sdf
Nesdebam qu&re armfttils ess^s^ / knew not why you had armed
649 IirnsixiVE Impesfsot.
Dsbeo arm&il, / ought to arm mysdf,
Sdo eum armftily I know that he is arming himsdf.
Sdiebam eum mrmfitf, I knew that he was armdng himsdf.
Arm&rl fiignmn beUi est^ To ahn cnrmelf is a sign of war.
Dflbebam anaSKl^ I ouglu to ham armad mys^.
<65Q iH'jriAiTiVJfl PmuPBCV.
Sdo earn arm&tom ess^i I know that he has armed himsdf.
Sdebam earn arm&tom esBS, / knew that he had armed hitnsdf
Sdo eum anu&tum fSriS, Iknowthathe wiUhave armed himself .
116 .TEBB8.
m
651 Pabtioiplb Ihpebfeot.
Armanti- or armant-, (While) arming onese^,
652 Pabtioiplb Pebpeot.
Arm&to-^ Having armed onetdf.
653 Pabtioiplb Futube.
ArmfttOro-^ About to arm oneadfm
654 Gbbuitd.
Armando-, Arming oneklf.
CONJUGATION OF A PASSIVE VERB, WITH THE
ENGLISH TRANSLATION.
PrSm- prest.
Principal jparts : prSmI, prSmor, presstts.
Indioatiye Mood.
656 Fres, PrSmor* / am pressed, prSmSils you are pressed^ prSmltiir
he 18 pressed, PrSmlmtLr V)e are pressed^ prSmlmlnl you are pressed^
prfoiunttLr they are pressed,
656 Past, PrSmebarf / was pressed, prSmSb&rls or prSmeb&rS you
were pressed, prSmSbftttLr he was pressed, PrSmeb&mttr we were
pressed, prSmSb&mXnl you were pressed, prSmSbanti&r they were
pressed,
657 FvJbj/re, PrSmar / shoiU he pressed, prSmSils or prSmSrS you. wiU
be pressed, prSmSttLr he wUl be pressed, PrSmSmtLr we shaU he
pressed, prSmemXnl you wiU be pressed, prSmenttbr they wiU be
pressed,
* With manj verbs this translation would not give the meaning, and
indeed the English passive is defective in the imperfect tenses. Thus
domus aedificatur means, not ' the house is built,* for that would imply
that the building is completed, but ' the house is being built* or ' is a-build-
ing ;' but of these two phrases, the first is scarcely English, and the second
is obsolete. Again, such a verb as occldor must not be translated ' I am
killed,* but rather ' I am on the point of being killed.'
f Similarly, domus aedifioaheUur would signify ' the house was being
built' or ' was a-building.' So oecidebar must not be translated ' I was
killed,' but rather ' I waa on the point of being killed.'
U7
658 Pre»*'^erf, Pressus* somt 1 have been prtuedt^ pxessttfl Ss ^ou
have been preued, preasiis est he has been preeeed, Pranl fliimilfl
we have been preuedy press! ettXs you have been pressed, presSX sunt
the^f have been pressed,
659 Pasi-perf. PressilB* Snun§ 1 had been pres8ed\\, pressiiB Ms you
had been pressed, pressiiB Srat he had been pressed. Press! Mmtts
vfe had been prosed, press! Mils ytm had been pressed, press! feont
ihey had been pressed,
660 Fut.-perf, PresstLs* SrolT /«^a2Z Aa«« been pressed, pressiis &tt
ydi£ wtU have been pressed^ presstUi Silt he wQl have been pressed.
Press! folmiis we ^edl have been pressed, press! Siltis you wiU have
been pressed, press! fount they wHl have been pressed.
Ihpsratiyb Mood.
661 Present, PrSmfofi be thou pressed, prSmlmlnl be ye pressed,
662 Future. PrSmXtor thou shalt be pressed, prSmltor he shall be
pressed, PrSmuntor they shaU be pressed.
663 SuBJUNOTiYB Mood.
Present Tense. B6s eO rSdUt, ut m&lis prSmar, Matters are come
to this, that I am pressed with troubles.
664 Egd 81 tot m&lis prSmar, pfoeam. If I were pressed by so many
trouMes, I should die.
665 Turn nTminm prSmar, In that case I should be too much pressed.
666 TXmdr est n6 prSmar, The/ear is that I shall be pressed,
667 Stat per Gaium, quOmlnus prSmar, Caius prevents me from bein^
pressed.
668 Nitor ii6 primary / am striving not to be pressed.
669 Past Tense, TXm5r 6rat nS prSmSrer, There was a fear that I
should be pressed.
670 Bfis e9 rSdiSrat, ut m&lis prSmSrer, Matters had come to this,
that I was pressed with troubles*
* i. e. Pressiis, '•d, or -tun.
t Or as an aorkt, * I was pressed,' &c.
% With aome yerba the tranalatioii ' ia ed* ia admiaaibla. Thus
domus aedificata est means ' the house is built* or * the building ia now
completed.* Ocdsus sum, * I am killed.' § OTjkieram, &c
II With some verbs this tense may be translated ' was — ed.* Thtn,
domus iam aedificata erat, * the house was now built/ i, e, the building
was completed.
^ Otfuero, &c.
118 YBKBS.
671 Egd SI tot mSJis prSmSrer, pSiIrem, If I had been pressed with
90 many trovJtiUs^ IthovMhave died.
672 Turn TiYminm prSmSrer, In that case Ishovld have been too much
pressed,
673 StStit per C^um, nS prSmSrer, Cavas prevented me from being
pressed,
674 Nitebar n6 prSmSrer, I was striving not to he pressed,
675 Pres,-perf, Nescit, quam gr&ulter pressus sim, He knows not
how heavUy I have been pressed,
676 As an Aorist, N6mo scit, quantis turn m&lis pressus Eom, No
one knows with what great troubles I was then pressed.
677 Si pressus sim, cSdam, If I were pressed^ I should give way.
678 Palleo, tanquam &b urs5 pressus sim^ / look poky as if I had
been pressed by a bear,
679 Kequlquam pressus sim, 1 should be pressed to no purpose,
680 Scit m6^ 81 m&l5 pressus sim, t&mSn inctfliimem €u9,8urum, He
knows that if I am pressed by trouMe, stiU 1 shall come out unhurt.
681 Fast-peff, Nesciebat, quam gr&ulter pressiis essem, JSe knew
not how heavily I had been pressed,
682 NSqulquam pressiis essem, / should have been pressed to no pur-
pose.
683 SciSbat mS, si m8l5 pressiis essem, t&men nunquam cessurum,
Ke knew that if I were pressed by trouhlcy still Ishovld never yidd.
684 Infinitiye Impebfeot. Pr^ml to be pressed.
Infinitive Perfect. Pressiis* ess6 to have been pressed,
Pabtioiple Imperfect. Pr&nendo- being pressed or to be pressed.
Participle Perfect. Presso- pressed.
685 CONJUGATION OF A DEPONENT VERB.
O.F. ^^k^-foUow,
Principal parts : s^ul, s^uor^ sSctltiis.
Indicatiye Mood.
686 Present, Sfiquor I follow, s8qu6rls you fdUow, sSquItiir he fol-
lows, SSquImiir we follow, s^ulmlnl you follow , sSquunturf they
foUow
* The case and gender will varj with the sentence.
i* The forms sequontur and sectmtur also occur.
YBBBS. llfi
687 Past, SSquSbar / tpas foRomngy 8^u6bi&Tl8 or s^uCl^b^ ^u
iffere followinfff s^ueb&tiir he was f (Mowing. SSquSbSlmtlr we were
fottowing^ s^uebUmlnl you were following ^ BSquebantUr they were
following,
688 F'uJbi/re, S^uar lehaUfoUoWy s^uSrls or B^uSrS you wiUfcl'
low, B^quSttLr he willfoUow, SSquemiLr we shall follow , s^uemlnl
you wiU follow, sSquenttLr they wUlfoUow,
689 Pres.-perf SSctitus* sum I have followed^ , sScfLttls ^ ycu have
followed, sScutiLs est he has followed, SScCLtl}: siLmtLs we have fol-
lowed, sScfLii estXs yow have followed, sScutl sunt they have followed.
690 Past-perf, S^iittis'^ ^ram§ I had followed, s^uttis Srfts you had
followed, sScfLttLs 8rat It/e had followed S^utit Sr&mtis we hadfd-
lowed, s5ctlti Sr&tis you had followed, s^iiti Sraut ihey had followed.
691 Fvit.-^erf, S^ctittis* Sro|| IshaU have followed, sSoHtiis Sris yvu
wUl have followed, sSctittLs Srit he will have followed, Steutit M-
miLs iM shall have follotoed, s^uti Srltls y(m wiU have followed,
sSctLti Snint t^ wiU have followed,
Ihpebatiyb Mood.
692 Pr«807i<. SSquSr^/o^^oiT <A.(my BSquXmlnl/(>2?(m^ytf.
693 Futwre. SSquItor or s^uImXno thou shall follow, s^uXtor or
sSquXmlno he shall follow, SScuntor they shaU follow,
694 SUBJTJNOTIYB MooD.IT
Present, SSquar, s^u&ris or s^uftrS, s^uftttLr; sSquftmtir^
s^T^Amlnl, s^uantUr.
695 Past, SSquSrer^ sSquSrSils or sSquSrerS, sSquSretUr; s6quSr6-
miir, s^uSremXnl, sSqaSrentttr.
696 Pres.'^rf, SdcfLtus sim**, sSc^tuB Els, sSctltus sit ; s^atl 81-
intLsy s^utl BItIs, sScfLtl sint.
697 Past-perf, SScuttis essemff, sScuttls essSs, sScattis esset ; s^ilti
essSmiis, sScdti essetXs, sSotiti essent.
* Sectitiis, 'H, -um, according to the gender of the nominatiFe.
f Or as an aorist, * I followed,* &c.
X Seeuti, *a«, -^, according to the gender of the nominati^re.
§ Oijtterafn, &c II Or fuero, &c.
^ For the Engliah translation, see the mode of translating scriba-m,
&c. §§ 594-624 ; and observe that Deponent verbs are translated by
English active verbs.
•• Or Juerim, &c ff Or fuissem, &c
698 LnrnriTTVE. &kivil to foUow.
IirnNiTiYB Pebfect. SScuttLs essS to have foUowecL
Pabticiple Impeefbot. Sfiquenti- or sSquentr/oBtwwi^.
Pabtioiple and Gebund. S^kiuendo- following.
PABTioiPiiB Pebpbot, QlUcutO' having foUovwi,
6d9 CONJUGATION OF AN IMPERSONAL VERB.
cj. Plu- rain,
IsDicMsrrs Moo]).
I^resent. Plult t7 raifu.
Past. Plu^bat it weu raminff* ^
JFhOtire, Pluet it wiU rain.
Tra.-perf, Pluuit it has rained, 4»
As an Aorist. Pluuit it raineeL
Past-petf. PltiuSrat it had rained.
Iha.-perf. PlauMt it will have rained^ &o.
700 CONJUGATION, IN PART, OF AN IMPERSONAL VERB
OF THE FEELINGS. (See § 393.)
O.F. PtLde- shamem
Iin>icATiTB Mood.
Presevst,
PiLdet me ignS.uiae^ / am ashamed of my cowardice,
PiLdet te ign&uiae, You are ashamed ofyov/r cowardice.
PUdet eum ign&uiae^ Be is ashamed of his cowardice,
PtLdet n5s ignftuiaey We are ashamed of our oowardice,
Pttdet uOs ign&uiae, Tou are ashamed of yofwr cowardie^
PtLdet e58 ign&uiae^ They are ashamed of their eowarddc0.
«
Past.
PtLdSbat me ignHuiae, / was atkamad of my cowardice,
PtLdebat te ign&idae^ Tou were ashamed of yowr cowardiee^ ^,
MOure*
PtLd^it me ign&uiae, 2 shall he ashamed of my cowardice.
PUdSbit te ignS.uiaey Tou wiU he ashamed ofyov/r coipardice, &o.
121
701 Conjugation, in part, of a PasraTe Impersonal Yerb :
c.p. B^ist- stand against^ make oppontion^ oppose,
Indioativb Mood.
PreaefUn
BSsistXtur mihiy Opposition U made to me^ xxt I am oppomi,
BSsistltur tibi. Opposition is made to you^ or you are opposed,
BSsistlttLr el, Opposition is made to him, or he is opposed,
RSsistltur nobis, Opposition is made to us, or loe are opposed*
BSsistltur nobis. Opposition is made to you, or you are opposed.
BSsistltiir els, (^position is made to them^ or they are opposed.
Past, ^sisteb&tur mihi. Opposition was made to me, or I was
opposed* ^
BSsisteb&tur tiCbi, Opposition was made to you, or you were op^
posed, <ko.
Future, ESsistStur mibi, Opposition wiU he made to me, or /
shM he opposed,
ESfiistetur tlbi. Opposition wiU he made to you, or you will he
opposed, &o.
Pres,'perf, Ee8t!(tum mihi est. Opposition has heen made to me,
or / have heen cppoeed.f
Restltum tYbi est, Opposition has heen made to you, or you have
heen opposed, <kc.
Past-perf. Bestltum mihi Srat, Opposition had heen made to me,
or I had heen opposed,
Eestltum tlbi Srat, Opposition had heen made to you, or you had
been opposed, &a
702 Conjugation, in part, of the participle in tQ^ with the verbs
Ss- and fu- he in the sense of intention or destiny,
Indioatiyb Moon.
*
With the present of Ss-, intend to »
NihH acttLrus sum, / intend to do nothing,
* i.e.* All this time* or ^ fbr a time.' This tense must not be con*
founded with the oorist*
t Or as an aorist, * Opposition was made to me,* &c«
122 YIBBB.
am destined to
Quid ttmeam, 81 befttus ftLtOros sum f What am I to fear ^ if I
am destined to he happy f
703 With the Past of &-, intended to —
Nihil acturtLs Sram, I intended to do nothing •
was destined to *
Quid tXmeremy 81 be&tus fUtHrtLs Snun ? What was I to fear^ if
I iHU destined to he happy f
706 With the Perf • of fu-, intended to ^ and shotdd have done
sOy if- . «
• DedXtOs, ocdsiirus fiil^ If they had heen given up, I shotdd have
killed them,
iffas destined to , and shotdd have done so, if ,
"NM r^uertissem, intSiItOrus ful. If I had not tinned hack^ I
should have perished.
706 With the Past-perf. of fii-, had intended to , and UH>uld
have done so, if .
Quam uim l&trO mihi fdSrat illfttfUiis, In ipsom conuerti, The
violence which the robher had intended to direct against m>e, I turned
against himself.
707 SuBJTriroTiyB Mood.
With the Pres. of Ss-, intend to .
Sorlbam quid actiirus sim, / wHl write word what I intend
to do.
can destined to .
Nescio quandd sim mSiItfUiis, I know not when I am to die.
708 With the Paat of »fl-, intended to .
ScripSI quid actflrtis essem, I wrote word what 1 intended to do.
was destined to
Nesdebam quando essem mSiItllrtLB^ I knew not when I was to
die.
TBRBB. 123
709 With the Perf. of fa-, intended to, and should have done 90,
if .
Quis dtibXtat quin dSdXtOs occlsaras fuSrim f Who doubts hU
that, if they had been ^ven up, I should have hilled them F
was destined to, and should have done so, if
S^ultUr ut hM rSuertissem, intMttLras fuSrim, It follows thai
if I had not turned hack, I should have perished,
710 With the Infinitive of «»-, intend to .
Scio* eum nihil acttirum essS, I know* that he intends* to do
nothing,
is destined to .
Scio omnSs hSmXnes mdrlttirGs essS, / hww that aU men are
destined to die,
711 With the Perf.-inf. of fii-, intended to , and should have
d4meso,if .
F&ma est m6 dedXtOs ocolsHrum fuissS, There is a report that if
they had been given up, Ishovld have hiUed them,
was destined to , and should have done so, if .
Oertum est m6 nM rSuertissem, intSriturum fuissS, It is cer-
tain that if I had not tinned back, I should have perished,
712 Conjugation of the participle in endo when used with the verb
&- and fa- ^0 in the sense of duty or necessity.
Indicative Moon.
With the Pros, of Ss-.
Mihi omnia tinO teimpdrS sunt ftgendft^ I have every thing to do
at once,
713 With the Past of &-.
Mihi omnia tind tempore Sraxit Sgend&, I had every thing to do
at once,
714 With the Put. of &-.
Mihi omnia 11n5 tempore Srunt Sgendft, / shaU have every thing
to do at once.
* After a past tense, as sdebam *I knew/ the infinitiye would be
translated by ' intended* or ' were destined.*
124 viXM.
715 With the Pre8.-perf. of fu-.
NM fiim&ta extrSma agmlnis fuissent, ingens dfidSs aoc9tpiend&
foity If the rear of the line of march had not been ttreT^gihened^ a
tremendous blow must have been received*
Ab Alezain&i5 fuit h&beoda OrfttiQ, The speech was to have been
made by AlexamentUy (but as he is now dead) &c.
716 With the Past-perf. <d fa-.
Ab AlexamSnO fdSrat h&benda 5rftti5, The speech was to have
been made by Alexamerms^ {JImt as he was then dead) &c.
717 SiTBJiiiTOTiyB Mood.
With the Pres. of &-.
Nesdo quid dt n5bls Sgendum, 1 know not what we ought to do.
718 With the Past of ^.
Kesdfibam quid easet nGbls ftgendom, 1 knew not what we ought
to do.
719 With the Pres.-perf. of fu-.
Hoc baud dSLbiom fSBcit quin nisi firmftta extrSma agmlnis
fuisBent, ingena dfidfis aodpiendk fo&ity This made it certain that
if the rear of the line of march had not been strengthened, a tremens
dous blow mMst have been received,
720 Inviititivb Mood.
With Impeif. of ^»
Sentit di£fSrendum esse In aest&tem bellum, He feels that the
war must be pttt off to the sitmmer,
721 With the Perf. of fu-.
Hoc Bcio^ nM r^uertisset, In illo el condftul ctLbandum fuiss^
This 1 hmowy that if he had not turned back, he amild have had to
deq^ in that chamber,
722 SOME IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS
CONJUGATED.
The Yerb Ss- means, first, eat; secondly, live; thirdly, emsttc^
the senses, be; fourthly, exist for the mind, be. In the first sense
the forms in use are as followa :
.TSIIB8.
125
&• eat.
Inpioatiyb Moop. Present, S. 68 ifou eat, est he eats; P. estis
ffGueat,
Impbbatitb. Present. S, 68* eat thou ; P. e8t6 eat ye,
FiUure, JS» estO thou shalt eat^ eM he shall eat; P, est6t6 ye
Mm eat.
SuBJirircTiTB. Pott, JS. essem e886s esset; P. e8s6mtis e8s6tl8
essent.
Infinititb. e886 to eat.-f
Passiyb. Indie, Pres. S. 3. esttLr. JSkihj, Past. iS. 3. e886tiLr.
722. 1 The same forms exist for several of the compounds^ as cdmSs-
eaC upy whence ctfm6s, earnest, cdmestis, cSmessS.
722. 2 The verb 6d- eat is but a variety of 68- eat. It is declined
regularly, except that for the subj. pres., besides the regular 6dam
&c. it has also an old form 6dim, 6dls &c.
723
Present.
JS. sum lam
Ssit you are
eBt% he is
P. stlmtLs we are
estIs you are
sunt they are
68- or fu- ie.
(a) Imperfect Tenses.
Indicativb Mood.
Past.
S. 6ram Iwas
6r94S you were
6rat he was
P. 6r9miLs weivere
6rfitls you were
6rant they were
Ihiturt.
& 6r5 IshaUhe
6rls you wiU he
6rlt he vnll he
P» 6rlmtl8 we shall he
6]itls you wiU he
6runt they wiU he.
Ihpe&ativb.
Present. 8. 6s he; P. est6 he.
Futwre, 8. est5 tliou shalt he^ estO he shaU he; P. e8t5t6 ye
shaU hey euntO they shall he.
* The quantity is not proved by the authority of any poet, but in-
ferred from the statements of the grammarians Prisdan (iz. 1, 11) and
Serrius (ad Aen. v. 785).
f Thus it appears that forms which begin with es, and these alone,
are used with the double sense of ' eat* and * be.'
X Es and est often lose the «, as sanu's^ iussffs^ for sanUs ^s, iussUs
lis ; bonust, bonasty bonumatf for bonUs est, bona est^ bontan est; quantist
for gitanti est.
m2
1S6
&• sini 1 am
as you are
dt he 18
P. flSmtis we are
SItIs you are
flint tkey are
SirB7in!KJTI7B,*
Fad.
S. essem I was
esset
P. essemtifl
esseiXs
easent
hewaa
iffe were
youwere
they toere
InuriTira.
easi^ t^be; i8r6 «m2Z he.
Pabtioifui Futubk
S. fSrem
fMfl
f5ret
P.
fSrsnt*
723.1
/SI fdl I have been
fdisti you Aai« dem
fait he has been
S. fbl Jftwrt
fvdM you were
fuit AtfWM
/SI fhSram/Aocideen
(J) Perfect Tenses.
iHSIOATITBi
PreserU-perfea.
P.fiiXmtis
faistXs
fdSrant or fuSrS M^ Aa];^ ^^em.
Oroa^omt.
P. fiiXmiis iM iMfv
foistXs you were
f uflrant or fafirS they were.
Paatrperfeet.
P. filSrimiLs we had been
fii6r&tX8 you had been
foiSmit theyhadbdetu
Fviwre^perfect.
& fdSi6 lihaUhawbeen
faSrls yot£ wiU have been
foXiAi he wiU home been
P. f(i8rMtis we shall hate been
fuMtls you wiU have been
fil&nnt ikeywiU have been.
* For the other meaningp of th« 8tthjimotL?o tonic* see the conjugii-
tion oitoribam^ &c«
tSBBS. 127
StTBJtTirCTIVH.
PruerU-perfect»
Sm fuSrim /trot
iaXsOA you were
fuSiit hevHu
S. ^aoBBem I had been
fuisses you had been
fiiisset he had been
P. fuSrlmi&B we have been
f uSritXs you have been
fuSrint they have been.
OfosAoriii*
P. fuSiimtis we were
fuSritIs you ioere
fuSrint they were*
Padrperfeet.
P. fdissemtis we had been
fixiflsetls you had been
fuiisent they had been.
LfrariTiYB.
faiaeft to ham been, was or had been.
724 As regards <]pantit7y a, Es is often loDg in old writers (as
PlaotttSy Mil. Gl. in. 1. 30), whidi agrees with the formation from
esis (eis), with 6s eat, and with the Greek tis. b. For the quantity
of the i after r in lo^Sris^ fdSrimiis^ folritXs, of the indicative and
snbjnnotive, see § 476.
725 Old forms afe, a. teum I am^ SstimtLs, Ssunt, Ssim &g. (see
Varr, L. L. ix. 57), which are in nearer agreement with the root
fe-. b, simns for sibnns (oomp. scriblmus) was used hj Augustus
{Suet, Aug. 87). e, esoit, an inceptive present (§ 752), occurs in
old writings (as xii. Tab. ap. OeU, xz. 1. 25^ Luar, i. 612) as a
fatare. So indeed the whole future tense Sro, Sris <kc. is in form
a mere present. Compare also fSrS (*fuSrS), a present in fonn, a
future in meanii^» d, A fuller form of the subjunctive present,
siem, si6s <kc., is common in the older writers, e. Another form
of the present subjunctive, used in old writers, is S. fuam, fufts,
fiiat ; P. fuant. /. The past subjunctive — 8, fSrem, f8r6s, f5ret;
P. fSrent— sometimes takes the place of essem in classical writers,
especially in hypothetical sentences (§ 1209), and those which de-
note a purpose (§ 1179). It also occurs in compound tenses for
essem, but not in Cicero.* g. In the perfect tenses a fuller fonn,
* ThisfiBttniKadvig.
128 YEBB9.
fa-uls- existed for the older writers, as fuulmtLs {Enn, ap. Cic, de
Or. III. 42), fuuisset {Enn. ap. Odl, xii. 4. 4). h. An imperfect
participle enti- (N. ens) is attributed to Caesar by Priscian. The
compounds praesenti- present, absenti- absent, for prae-Ss-enti-,
&b-Ss-enti, are in form participles, in meaning adjectives. So also
consentSs for cSn-Ss-ent6s, in the phrase, Bl consentes, literally
the united gods. In late philosophical writings ens is used as a
Bubstantive for a thing.
727 Es- or fu- compounded with pr5 or pr5d, he proJUable.
Ihdioatiye. Pres, S, Pr5sum prOdSs prOdest, P. prGsiimiis
prOdestXs prSsunt. Past. JS. ProdSram prSdSrfts <fec. Ihit. S.
Pr5dSid prodSrls &c. Pree.-perf, PrOfuI &c. Past-perf. Pr5fu8-
ram &c. JFhU.-perf, Pr6fu6r5 <fec.
Impebatiye probably not in use.
SuBjuNCTiYB. Pres. PrQsim &c. PiJist. PrOdessem &c. Pres.-
per/. PrOfuSrim <fec. Past-petf, PrOfcdssem &c.
Infii^itiye. Imperf, Pr5dess6. Peff, Pr5fuiss6.
Pabticiplb. Ihit. PrOftLttlro-.
728 Es- or fii-, compounded with the adjective pSti- or pSt-, be
able, can.
Indicative. Pres. S. Possum pStSs potest, P. poss&mtUi p5-
testXs possunt. Past. S. P5tSram pStSr&s p5tSrat, P, pStSrfimiis
pStSrSltls pStSrant. Fut. JS. P5t«r5 pStgrXs pStSrlt, P. pStSilmtis
pStSrXtls p8t6runt. Pres.-perf. P8tul pStuistI &c. Past-perf. Pi5-
tugram <fec. FtU.-petf. S. P6tu8r5 pStuSris pStuSrlt^ P. p8tu8-
rlmtis pStuSrItIs pStuSrint.
Imperative not in use.
Subjunctive. Pres. Possim possis <fec. Past. Possem possSs
&c. Pres.-perf. JS. PStuSrim pStuSrls pStuSrit, P, p5tu6rlm1ts
p5tuSrItl8 pStuSrint. Past-perf. P5tuissem pStuiss6s &c.
Infinitive. Imperf. PossS (used sometimes as a future, wUl
be able). Perf. P6tuiss6.
Pabticiplb. PStenti-* or patent-.
729 FSr- bring. (For the perfect tenses see § 546.)
Indicative. Pres. JS. F6ro fers fert, P. fSrImiis fertXs fSrunt.
Paa-imp. FSrSbam &c. Fut. FSram &c.
* This is used rather as an adjectiFe than as a participle.
129
Ikpbsatiyb. Pres. S. FSr^ P. fertS. Fut. S. FertO totS, P.
ferUHS ftmnto.
BuBJVKOViTi. Prei, Ftam Ae. Pott, Ferrem Arc.
IirrnriTiyi. FerrS. Par^. F&enti- or ftrent-. Qtfwnd. F^
lendo-.
The pasBiTe is regular except in the indUo, pres, terABj fertiir ;
ifn/perative fertor ; tubj.patt ferrfo Ac. ; »7i/^ fem ; Kmipart.peif.
Iflto-.
730 Inqa- or inqui- My has only Ihd* Pres. iSl inquam iuquHs in-
qulty P. inquXmtts inquXtIs inquinnt. Past-imperf.
inqniShat. Fut. inquifis inquiet. Per/, inquistl in-
quit.
IxvsBAT. Prti, 8. inquS. Fui, inqnXtO. The present inqoam
is only used in repeating a phrase, I ^Vi I^ yo^ once more; and
inqnit k^s he or $aid he introduces a direct speech, and always
follows one or two words of this speech.
731 OM- give^ tdl, only used in the imperative present
S, C8d6 give (me), tell {me) ; P. cettfi give (me), tdl (me).
732 Da- put or give,
IimiCATiYE. Pres. JSL D9 dfts dat, P. d&ntts d&tXs dant Past-
imp. D&bam &c Fut. D&b6 &a Pres.-perf. DMi Ac Past-
perf. DSdfiram Ac. Fut.-perf. MJM An,
Ikpebatiyb. Pres. S. D&, P. d&t& Fut S. D&tO d&t5, P.
aXt5tSdantO.
SmiJuircTrrK. Pres. & Bern dfo det, P. dftntts dStlB dent
Past-impeff. B&rem &o. Pres.-perf. DSd6rim &c. Pastpetf.
DSdissem&c.
iNFuriTiYE. Imperf. D&r6. Perf. BWssS.
Pabticiple. Imperf. Panti- or dant-. FiU. D&tQro-. Ge-
Buvn. Dando-.
The Bubj. Pres. has also an old form, duim, duls &a, from a
crude fonn du-.
733 V51- or ufl- wish.
Ii^DiCATiYB. Pres. JS. YS\A uls uolt or uult, P. u^lilmiia uoltXs
or uultXs uSlunt. Past-imp. Ydl6bam Ac. FtU. Ydlam uAes Ac
Pres.'perf. Vdul &o. Pastpetf. YSluSram <frc. Fut.-perf. V5-
luSrfi ^a
130 TSBB8.
Impebatiyis not in use.
Subjunctive. Pres, 8, YSlim uSlls u61it, P. uSllmiis u^tXs
uSlint. Pcut. Yellem uellSs kc. Pres.-perf. YSluSrim &e. PaO-
perf, V^luissem &c.
IirKifiTiVE. Imperf. VellS. Perf, y51aiBS&
Pabtioiple. Imperf. Vdlenti- or uSlent-. Gebukd. Vfflendo-.
734 NSuSl- or nQl- he wnwiUingy a compound of ne or n5n and u51-.
Indicative. Pres, 8. Nol6 nSuIs* x>r nonuls n6uolt* or non-
uoltf, P. ndltbntis nSuoltls'^ or nonuoltlsf n5lunt. Past-imp.
Ndlebam &c. FtU. n5l6s nOlet &c. Pres^-perf. Nolul &c.
Past-perf. NoluSram &c. Fvit.-perf. N6lu5r5 &c.
Impebative. Pres. 8. NOll, P. nOlltS. Iha. 8. NOlltO, P.
nOlltdtS.
Subjunctive. Pre^. N5lim nOlls &c. Po^. Nollem &o. Pres.-
perf. N5lu6riin &c. Past-perf. NOluissem &c.
Infinitive. Imperf. NollS. Perf. N5luiss6.
Pabticiple. Imperf. NOlenti- or nolent-. Gebund. NOlendo-.
735 Mau51- or m9.1- prefer y a compound of m&gS arid uSl-.
Indicative. Free. 8. M9.u515t or m&ld mauls m&uolt§y P.
mSltimtis m&uoltIs§ mftuSluntt or m&Iunt. Past-imp. MSlSbam
&c. ^^. males malet &c. Pres.-perf. Malul&c. Past-petf.
MaluSram kc. Fut.-perf. MsIuSrft &c.
Ikpebative not in use.
Subjunctive. *Pre8. MauSlimt or malim malls &c. Patt.
MauellemJ or mallem &c. Pres.-perf. MaluSrim &a Past-perf.
Maluissem &c.
Infinitive. Imperf. MauellSJ or mallS. Perf. MaluissS.
736 Fi- become, used in the imperfect tenses as a passive of f&ci- or
Wi- make (see § 534).
Indicative. Pree. 8. Fl6 fis fit, P. ftunt. Past-
imp. Fiebam &c. Iha. Flam fi[6s &c
Ikpebative. Pres. 8. Fl, P. fltg.
* The forms with ne are found in the older writers.
t Or nonuult and nonuultis.
X The longer forms mauolo &c. are found in the older writers.
§ Or mauult and mauuUia.
TBBB8. 131
SuBJTTKOTivB. IVw. Flam &c. Past, F!8rem* &c.
iBPiiriTiVB. Imperf. RSrt.*
737 I- go.
Indioativb. Pres. S, "E^ la it, P. Imtls Itte eunt. Past-imp.
Ibam &c. Ihit. Ib8 IbXs &c. Pres.-petf, Jul or il iisti ilt &c.
Past-perf. luSram or iSram &o. FvZ,-ptrf, luSrfi or iSrS &c.
Impbbativb. Pres, S. I, P. ItS. i^. /X ItO ItO, P. ItOtS euntfl.
SuBJUNOTivB. Pr«. Earn ^s &c. Past, Irem &o. Pres.-petf
lu^rim or iSrim &o, Past-perf, luissem or iissem or iaa&oa. &o.
Inpinitivb. Imperf, Irfi. Perf luissS iissfi or issS.
Pabtioiplb. Imperf, leuti- or lent-, iT. iens, -^o. euntem, G,
eimtls &o. FiU, IttLro-. Gbbund. Eundo-.
737. 1 The pasdve is used impersonally. Iin>ia IttLr, ib&tiir, iblttir,
Itum est &c. Subj. E&tiLr, IretiLr» Itum sit &o. Ibfib. In, Itmn
essS.
737. 2 Some of the compoimds being transitive form a passive, as &di-
approach. Hence Ibb. Pres. S, &de5r &dlrls SdltiLr, P. ftdlmiLr
&dlmlnl ftdeuntiir &c.
737. 3 VCni- /or u6nam i- be offered for sale^ is a compound of i- go,
and consequently conjugated like it.
738 Qui- he oMe^ and nSqui- he undbU^ are conjugated as i- go ; but
have no imperative, no participle imperfect or^ture, and no ge-
rund.
739 Ai' affmn^ say^ is seldom used except in the following forms :
Indicativb. Pres, S. Aio als or us ait or ait, P.
aiunt. Past, Aiebam or aibam aisbfts dire.
740 DERIVATION &a OF VERBS.
It has been stated that many substantives and adjectives in a
and are used as verbs in a (§ 522) ; that some substantives in u
are used as verbs in t« (§ 526) ; that some substantives and adjec-
tives in t are used as verbs in i (§ 528)^
• The i is sometimes long in old writers, as Terence (Ad. i. 2. 26)
and Plautus (Trin. ii. 4. 131).
132
741 It has been stated (§ 224) that some adjectives have a crude
form in » as well as that in o or a. Similarly some a^i^ives in o
or a coexist with verbs in i; and some a^ectives in % coexist with
verbs in a. Thus there is
An adj.' insftno- mady and a verb insftni- he mad.
yy largo- bounUftdy ,, largi- (r.) lavish,
,y cSlSri- ^teky „ M<6nr quicken,
yy VSm-lighty ,9 VSiw^lifL
>, Vsmr»mooihy ,9 l^xjihr fclidi,
742 As so laige a number of substantives and adjectives ended in o
or a, and these led to verbs in a, the consequence was, that there
was a tendency to introduce an a in all such secondary verbs, even
when the substantive or adjective ended in a consonant. Thus
there is
A subsi n5m8n- namey and a verb nQmlna- name,
„ laud-^>mtM, „ ]bxiA2^ praise,
,, tfnSs-* loady ^ 6nfira- load,
yy r^Siol^T- hardnessy y, i6h^nr harden.
99
extU- an exiUy „ exiila- he an exile*
An adj. mSmSr- mindftdy „ m&nSra- mention.
„ exoss- hondess, „ , exossa- hone,
„ praeclp- or praec^plt- head foremosty and a verb prae-
capita- send headforemost,
742. 1 A few compoiftid verbs take a final a although the simple verb
ends in a consonant : as,
From spSc- or spSci- (obsolete) hohy consplca- (r.) hehdd,
„ diic-t leady 6dtica- hring vjpy warse,
„ spem- despisSy aspema- (r.) spwm,X
* Verbs formed in this way from nomis mis^His he, are 7ery numer-
ous: as, pignera-, uenera' (r.), Jrigera-, tempera-t uofnero', genera-y
ghmera-f modera- &c. The neuter noun modes- is obsolete, it is true, but
its existence is proved by the adj. modesto; Ramshom erroneously con-
siders hn as a verbal suffix, and even quotes as an example uocifenh' (r.).
t See §461.1.
X This class is probably formed directly from compounded nouns, as
is certainly the case with remtga- ' row/ from remtg' ' rower ;* and that
from remo' (m.) * oar/ and ag- ' put in motion*' F^Zi/Soa- (r.) ' make
sail,' from uelifico- ' making sail / and that from uekH (n.) ' sail* and
BBBIYATIOir or TEBB8. 133
742. 2 Sonle verbs in a from subsiantiyes signify to supply with the
thing which the substantive denotes :* thus there is
A subst. iXhiStlar planky and a verb oont&biila- cover with planks.
yy tigno- (n.) hearn^ and a verb oontigna- furnish tnth
beams.
,y calceo- shoe, and a verb calcea- shoe.
743 Such verbs are often found only as perfect participles in to :
thus.
From barba- beard, barbato- bearded.
dciilo- et/ef dciil&to- provided with eyes.
auri- ear, BJitlto^ provided with ears.
comu- horn, comuto- homed.
aes- brome, aerSlto- armed with bronze.
denti- or dent- tooth, dentato- armed with teeth.
cord- heart, b8n6 cordato- good-hearted, i. €., in the Ro-
man sense of the phrase, dever.
744 Certain reflective verbs from substantives also signify to pro-
vide oneself with what the substantive denotes. The verbs in
question belong chiefly to military phraseology :
From ftqua- tpoter, ftqua- (r.) fetch water.
„ frtimento- (n.) com, frumenta- (j.) fetch com, forage.
„ pftbiilo- (n.) fodder, pS.biila- (r.) fetch fodder, forage^
„ m&tSria- timl>er, m&tSria- (t.) fetch tirnher.
„ VufpiQ' firewood, ligna- {v.) fetch firewood.
„ praeda- booty, praeda- {r.) go plundering.
„ ^vxi-fish, pisca- {T,)fi8h. •
744. 1 Again, certain reflective verbs from adjectives signify to regard
as what the adjective denotes : as,
From gr&ui- heavy ^ gr&ua- (r.) regard as heavy y be unwiUing to
bear.
„ digno- worthy, digna- (r.) deem worthy of one, deign,
fac- * make.* Vodferor (r.) ' raise one's voice,* from an obsolete adj.
wH^fero- * raising the voice ;* and that from uoe- ' voice* and/?r- ^ raise.*
Opitttla- (r.) * bring help,* from an obsolete adj. epitulo- * bringing help ;*
and that from op- ' help' and tol- * bring.'
* The English language agrees in this use of substantives as verbs.
Thus we use the phrases, to shoe a horse, to water a horse, to horse a
coach.
134 DEBITATI05 01* YSBB8.
From indigno- urmorthyy indigna- (r.) deem umDorthy of i/M.
,, mlsSro- wreU^df mlsdra- (r.) regard as wretched, pity.
745 Verbs called frequentative, and they are very numerous, are
formed by adding the suffix Ua to the simple verb : as,
Ag- put in motion, ^ta- put in constant motion.
Quaer- seeh^ quaerlta- seek perseveringly.
Cl&ma- cry out, clftrnXta- keep crying out.
Mina- (r.) threaten^ mMta- (r.) keep ihreaiening.
FhX'Jlow, flulta- keep flowing.
Sequ- (t.) follow, secta- (r.) be in the hahit offoUotoing.*
746 As this suffix ita is very similar to ^o, the suffix of perfect
participles, similar contractions and alterations commonly take
place: thus,
Merg- sink, participle merso-^ frequentative mersa-.f
Trah- draw, participle tracto-, frequentative tracta-.
P81- drive, participle pulso-, frequentative pulsa-.f
747 Some frequentatives are formed by the suffix tita : as, from
scrlb- write, scriptlta- ; from ISg- read, lectXta- 5 from ulu- live^
uictXta-.*
748 Many frequentatives have superseded the simple verb : thus,
gus-ta- taste was formed from an obsolete verb gtks- taste, which
is also the root of the substantive gus-tu- &z^; Xmlta- (r.) copy
was formed from an obsolete verb Ima- (r.), which is also the root
of the substantive ima-gtfn- likeness ; p5ta- drink to excess, was
formed from an obsolete verb po- drink, which is also the root of
the participle ^to- drunk, and of the substantive pO-ciilo- (n.)
drinkin^-cup.
749 A few verbs form, what are at once diminutives and frequenta-
tives, with the suffix fco ; as, f5d- dig, fSdXca- keep digging or nttc^-
ing; u^- pvU, ueUlca- ke^ plucking.
750 A few diminutive verbs are formed with a suffix ilia or tUla :
98, fdue- warm, fScilla- cherish ; scrlb- write, oonscrlbilla- scrUMe
over ; sorbe- suck, sorbilla- suck a drop or two ; c&n- sing, can-
* The s(M;alled frequentatives in oina- (r.), as sermo-oina- (r.) ^ con-
verse,^ jMz^o-ctna- (r.) * act the patron,* uati-cinO' (r.) ^ act the prophet,*
are probably formed upon the same principle from the verb can^ * siogt'
just as msdikt' (r.) is at one time applied to music, at another to any
repeated, act
+ But Uie frequentatives fn«rto-, putta- are used by the old writeiB.
DBBIVATIOlir OF TBSB8. 135
- tillar tParbU. VentXli^ fan^ from the subst. uento- ihindy and
ustiila- tinffej from the verb Gb* or tlr- bvmy are also diminu-
tivea.*
751 A few imitative verbs are formed from nouns, with a suffix in
isaa: as, from p&tSr- /o^Aer, p&trissa- tcJx after one's father; from
Graeco- a Greek, Graecissa- he in the Greek fashion, f
752 Inceptive verbs are formed from verbs,^ substantives and adjec-
tives, with the suffix escX or isc: as,
From feru- boU, feru-esc- or feru-isc- heffin to boil,
„ [sSn- an old man], sSn-esc- grow old,
y, Itic- liffhty lUdsc- or luceso- ^et liffht,
752. 1 If the substantive or adjective end in o or a, the e ot esc is
sometimes omitted, and the vowel a prevails : as, from
Pu6ro- a bot/f rS-puSra-so- become a boy again,
IntSg&ro- or -a- yihde, rSd-int^ra-sc- become whole again*
753 But there are exceptions both ways, those verbs taking an a
which are not entitled to it, and those which should have it
dropping it : as,
From mfttHro- or -a- r^ m&ttiresc- ripen,
„ uStSs- cld^ uStSrasc- become old.
754 The suffix ess is added to a few verbs in i without any marked
change of meaning : thus,
From c&pi- take is formed cfipess- take,
„ [l&ci- obs, draw] „ l&cess-^/^rot^o^.
„ [arci- chs, call to one] „ arcess- sendfor,^
755 A few verbs, called desiderative, are formed from verbs with a
suffix tiiri, which is liable to the same changes as the participial
suffix to; thuSy
■
* Ramshom erroneously treats as diminutival verbs ejfula-, iaculor
(r.), opiiula- (r.), uigila-, straTigtdorf the last of which is probably formed
ftom an obsolete ' subst. strangida- * a halter,* corresponding to the Greek
■ <rrf)CB77aAa-.
f These verbs are formed after the Greek verbs in i(: as, Mridi(-uv,
Indeed the later Latin writers use the z instead of ««, and write patriz-are.
X In Greek wk or wk.
§ Petess^ ' seek* is formed in this way from the obsolete form peii*
* seek,' which is also the root of jm^u-, peHhu^ petUor,
136 OOMPOSITIOK 01* TXSBS.
From 6m- huy^ emptiiri- duire to buy,
), M- eatf esiiii- he himgry.
„ pftr- or p&ri- bring forthy partiiri- he in lahowr.
So SullftttLri- denre to play SuUay implies such a verb as Sulla-
(y.)play SuUa. (See § 522.)
756 Compounds of f&c- or f&d- and h- are made with prefixes com-
monly supposed to be verbs : as,
From tSpe- he warm, t&pl^&uC'* or tSpSf&ci- make warm, tSp£ft-
hecome toarm,
,, IXque- Tndty liquSf&c- or UquSf&ci- melt, cause to mdt,
iXquSfi- mdty heco9ne mdted.
757 The compound verbs formed by prefixed prepositions are vety
numerous. (See prepositions in the Syntax.)
758 The verbs so compounded often undergo certain changes of the
vowel : thus, & frequently becomes i before one consonant, e be-
fore two consonants : thus,
From st&tu- set up, is formed constitu- estaJtlish.
„ Q^'faUy „ (xxiiAr set or die,
„ s&li- leapy yy insUi- leap upon.
yy c&p- or c&pi- take, „ acdfp- or accXpi- receive, and ac-
oepto- received,
„ ifto- or iftd- throw, „ cGnIc- or c5nlci-t hwiy and con-
iecto- hurled.
But the compounds of c&ue- heioarcy m&ne- waity tr&h- draWy &ma-
lovCy remjun unaltered.
759 Again, i generally becomes % before a single consonant : as,
From sSde- siiy asi^de- sit near,
„ rSg- make straigkty dlrlg- guide,
„ tSne- keep, abstlne- keep away.
But the compounds of pSt- go or seeky t^- covcTy tSr- ruhy g6r-
wear or carry y remain unaltered,
760 The diphthong ae becomes I, and au becomes ooru: thus,
From caed- cviy occid- kill,
„ laed- strikCy iUld- dash against,
* In these words the vowel e before /is seldom long except in the
older poets.
f Commonly written conjio-* or conjici'.
OOHPOSITtOBT or YXBBS. 137
From qoaer- seek, exquir- seek out,
,y daud- or clUd-* shuty redtLd- open.
„ plaud- dap (the hands), ezplQd- drive off (the stage by
clapping the hand8).t
Bat the compounds of haere- gtiek retain the diphthong. Qene-
rally for the changes in compound verbs see { 555. 2, Ao.
761 A few compound verbs are formed with a prefixed particle :
thus,
From n9 not and sci- know, nesci- know not.
nS not and qui- he cMey nSqui- he unoMe.
n6 not and u81- wUhy nSu51- or nol- he wnwiUvng,
m&16 {U and die- speaky mftl$dlc- abuse.
bSn6 wdl and f&c- (£>, bSnSf&c- do a kindness.
mSgS more and uSl- wis^, m&uSl'- or mSl* prefer,
s&t enoi^^A and Sg- <^, s&t&g- Aatv enou^A to do.
762 The negative in appears never to be prefixed to verbst, except
to the partidpleSy especially those in to, and even then the com-
pound participle commonly becomes an adjective ; except also the
verbals in tu, which occur only as ablatives^ as iniussa- mthora
orders, incultu- vyithout cuUiwUion.
Docto- tauffht, indocto- UTileamed,
LQto- washed, illSto- unwashed^
Sdenti- knowing, itisdenti- not kmmnff.
Dicenti- speaking, indlcenti- not speaking.
763 Many of these partidples in to with in prefixed are to be
translated hj not to he ed: as,
uicto- conquered, inuicto- inmncihle.
menach measured, immenao' immeasurable.
penso- weighed, impenso- too enormmu to he weighed.
* Probably contracted from sach a form as elamd'. Compare the
Oreek subetantlTe KKriPii", Latm elam-, and gaudeo gauisus.
t Corresponding in effeet to tiie English * hooting o£r, hissing o£*
X Hence it is probably an error to derive ignosO' * pardon' from in
* not' and gnosc- ' take cognizance.* See § 1308. 2.
ir2
138
PAHTICLES.
764 This tenn includes those secondary parts of speech which have
little or no yarietj of form, and are called adverbs, prepositions,
conjunctions and interjections.
765 It is not always possible to draw the line between these, as the
same word may be at one time an adverb, at another a preposi-
tion ; or again at one time an adverb, at another a conjunction.
Thus, ants hefore ox formerly may be either adverb or preposition ;
and sImiQ at the mme time or as soon as may be either an adverb
or a conjunction.
766 A large number of the particles must be treated individually
to show their origin. In a grammar, however, it is out of place
to do more than exhibit those suffixes which apply to whole
classes.
ADVERBS.
767 Adverbs are formed in Latin from adjectives and substantives,
including pronouns, and also from verbs.
768 From adjectives in o or a are commonly formed adverbs in e :
as, from the adjective l&to- or -a- unde^ the adverb l&t6 loiddy ;
from the adjective pSrlciilSso- or -a- dangeroits^ the adverb pSrlcii-
10s9 dangeroudy.
769 From participles in o or a, used as adjectives, are formed in
like manner adverbs in e: as, from docto- learned^ the adverb
doctS learnedly ; from omato- d/reseedy the adverb om9.t€ wUh
ornament; from doctisstlmo- mjost learned, the adverb doctissiime
most learnedly,
770 But m&lo* had, and bSno- (old form bgno-) good, form their
adverbs, m&lS til, and bSnS well, with a short ^. InfemS hdow,
and sUpemg above also occur with a short ^. So also HtS duly
has a short ^, though only a shortened form of recte.
771 Some adjectives and participles in o or a form adverbs in :*
* In some cases this termination is the ablative of the noun ; in others
it probably corresponds to the Greek adverbs in as, from adjectives of
the same form. Thus, even in Greek, o^ras and oiW-w * thus,* apyws and
a^pw ' suddenly,* coexist.
ABTXBBB. 139
* as, from rftro- or -a- scattered, an adverb r&r5 tddom; from ttlto-
or -a- ja/«, au adverb tUtO 9afdyj and tatissiimO fito<t mfdy.
772 But cito- or -a- quich forms its adverb citd quickly with ^.*
773 From adjectives and participles in t or a consonant are fonned
adverbs in U^ or tSr : as,
From moUi- toft^ the adverb molUtSr 9ofdy.
„ cfilSri- *M;ty3?, c^SrltSr swiftly.
„ f^llci- or ftllo- fortunate, ftllcXtSr foriunatdy,
„ mSm5r- mindful, mSmdrltSr /rom memory,
774 If the adjective or participle end in H or t, one t is omitted :
thusy from &manti- or &mant- loving is formed the adverb &mantSr
lovingly,
775 As adjectives In o or a sometimes coexist with adjectives in %,
so adverbs in USr or tir are sometimes found in connexion with
adjectives in o or a .* as,
From dUro- or -a- hard, the adverbs dure and diMtSr Mverdy*
„ largo- or -a- bountiful, the adverb largltSr bountifuUy.f
776 Many adjectives, particularly comparatives, use their neuter
singular as an adverb : thus,
From f&cUi- easy, the adverb f&cIlS easily.
„ multo- or -a- mtu^, the adverb multum much,
doctiOr- m>ore leamed,ike adverb doctiUs more learnedly. %
99
776. 1 The neuter comparative should end in iiis {=^ios), as just seen ;
but in a few words a shorter form is produced by the omission of
one of the vowels : thus without the % we have mlniis (for mX-
nitLs) less, pltls (for ple-iiis§) mxyre; and without the u, mftgis (for
* Veto * in truth,' sero ' late,' poatremo * at last,' have always a long o
in the best writers. It is only in the late writers, such as Martial and
Statins, that these words are used with a short o. Even oUo has a long o
in the old writers, as Ter, And. iii. 1. 16, and elsewhere.
i* Observe the same irregularity in the formation of the verb largi-(r.)
♦ lavish.' AHter * otherwise,' like aiibi ' elsewhere,' is formed from the
obsolete pronoun a/t-, whence the nominatives alia and olid.
X The poets use adverbs of this form more freely than the prose wri-
ters, and even in the plural ; as Virgil, acerba tuens, crebra ferit.
§ Comp. xXtioy and ir\€oy (for ir\€-iov).
140 ADTSBB8.
mSgitU) more^ nImXs too mucky s&tXs enofughJ* So piitft for prifis
^oTtf enters into the formation of the adjectiTO pris-tibio- /ormer.
777 From adjectives and suhstantives are formed adyerbs in U&a or
t&B% : thus we dedaoe from
antlquo- ddy antlqultiis/rom ofold.
caelo- heaven^ caelltils /ro9» heaven*
dlulno^ divine, diuInltiUi/rom a divine sottrce*
fundo- bottom, fandHtafrom thefotmdation.
radio- root, ilUllcIttbB /rom the roots*
publico- sb. n. pvilic money, publXdtiis at the pMic coeL
778 A few adjectives form adverbs with a suffix pSr, denoting tima :
as, from nSuo- or -a- netp, ntlpSr lately. So also pftrumpSr and
paulispSr/or a litUe while, tantispSr eo long, quantispSr as long as^
semp&§ (dways,
778. 1 The adverbs of numerals have already been given in § 25% last
column.
779 Adjectives and substantives form adverbs in tim with the sense
dioM at a time or one by itself: thus, from the adj. singtllo- or
-a- one at a time, the adverb singHUltim or singill&tim or singultim
ono at a tim>e; from paulo- (n.) little, paul&tim little by little;
from ulro- man, uMtim man by man; from tribu- tribe, ia^utim
tribe by tribe ; from grSg- flock, grSgS.tim ^lock by floch ; from
gr&du- step, gr&d9.tim step by step. \\
780 From verbs also are formed adverbs in tim : as,
From sta- stand, st&tim constantly, st&tim immediatdy.
* For the meaning of nimis compare the use of the comparative^
§ 1155. 4, &c. SaHs Uterally signifies * rather full' (see § 1 155. 7).
t To this corresponds the Greek xpiy (for irpiotf) ' before.' So also
T\tiy for fr\€ioy. Tlpiv has more than once a long vowel in Homer.
X This termination corresponds in meaning to the suffix of the old
Gkeek genitive $€v : as, ovpcufoBtw * from heaven.* Indeed the fbrms also
are identical ; for the B must necessarily lose its aspirate in Latin, and the
final syllable tv of the Greek would be t» in Latin : compare rvwroiAmt^
scribimus. The corresponding Sanscrit suffix is ids.
§ The first syllable of semper is probably the same root which is
spoken of in the note to § 264 ; so that it would signify ' one unbroken
time/
II Compare the irregularities of pauhtim, uiritim^ gregatitn &e. with
the irregularities in the formation of adjectives, §§ 227-229. This suffix
Hm is identical with the Greek dov: as, from a7€Aa- *herd,* ayehTfiop
* by herds.*
ADYEBBfl. 141
From prae hefore and sSr- p^^ praesertim especially.
„ caed- cuty caeBiin* hy cutting,
,9 pung- pierce, punctim by piercing.f
781 From substantives and verbs are formed a few adverbs in ^;
thusfrom
Odn together and mfinu- hand, cO-mln-tLs hand to hand,
^ front and m&nu- hand, e-mIn-tis/rY>m a distance.
So from the verb ten- stretch, the adverb tSn1is}l«^r^Atra^; whence
prdtSntis forthwilh,^ And from the verb uort- turn the adverb
uorstist, which has also the fonn uorsum, corresponding in mean-
ing to the English termination -wards*
782 From substantives and verbs are formed a few adverbs by
adding the sufGlx am,\
Thus cdn together and ds- or 5r- (n.) movith or face form an
adverb, o^TKOifacetofa^e,
The verb pand-|| open forms an adverb, pftlam openly.
The verb cela- hide forms an adverb, clam secretly.
783 In analogy with bis twice (for duls), we might have expected
trlst and qu&trls, but instead of these we have tSr and qu&tSr, an
s being commonly rejected after an r,
784 The cases of adjectives and substantives, particularly pronouns,
are often used as adverbs : thus the following, sometimes called
adverbs, are in origin datives denoting the time when or the place
where &c., hSrI yesterday, m&nl in the morning, IticI in the daylight,
dSmI at home, rtlrl in the comUry, fSrIs ovt of doors, multlmSdls in
many a way, quStannIs every year,
785 The pronominal adverbs in hi or % which answer to the ques-
* The $ in this word represents the t, as it does so often in the per-
fect participle with verbs in d,
-f* This corresponds to the Greek suffix ^v added to verbs : as, from
ypcup- ' write,' ypafiSriv ' in writing.'
X These are also prepositions.
§ There is also a form tenam of the same meaning as tenus, whence
protenam * forthwith.'
|] Compare scancU ' climb' and scala- ' ladder ;' mand" * chew' and
mala^ * jaw ;* sede- * sit' and sella- ' chair.'
Tf Compare the Greek rpij, and perhaps rtrpcucis. For the loss of
the 8 compare Hnter * a boat' for linfris, puer for puerus, uidebare for
uidebarii.
142 ADVUBS.
tion where or wheny and may be seen in the second column of the
table in § 366, are probably old datiYes.
786 Again, the following, sometimes called adverbs, are in origin
accusatives :
Ddmum home i. e. to one^e horne, rus irOo the oourUry^ fdrfts
ofU of doors i. e. going out of doors,
787 The pronominal adverbs in d, which answer to the question
whither^ and may be seen in the third column of the table § 366,
are probably old accusatives which have lost the final m.
788 Closely related to the pronominal adverbs in d are the adverbs
in tr6 from prepositions <fec. : as,
E8-trO backward,
Tor-T^* forward,
Ol-trOf Umards the speaker,
Yl-trdf to a dist(mce,forwardy vohmtariltf,
In-trG inwards,
Oon-trO totD€ards,%
789 Adverbs in d§, chiefly from pronouns, are used with compara-
tive acyectives or comparative adverbs : as,
EQ mS^ so much the more or the more.
Quo mXnUs by how much the less or the less,
H5c titXlXiUi to this extent the more ueefMy,
KihXl5 mIntbB never the less,
790 The terminations indSj in, and m, seen in the fourth colunm
of the table § 366, must be considered as varieties of one suffix,
since the compounds deindS, exindS <Src. have also the shortened
* P^ IB the old preposition, corresponding to our 'for,^ whence comes
por-tro, por-ro^ and by contraction pro,
+ Whence ultro dtroque * backwards and forwards,* in which the
word ' backwards' is a translation of cUro. The common derivation of
uUro ' willingly/ from fiol- * wish,* is altogether indefensible.
X This word is seen in the compound verb oontro-uort' ' turn against.'
These adverbs in tro, though ultimately derived from prepositions, are
immediately formed from adjectives, more or less obsolete, in tero,
§ These are commonly held to be ablatives, and supposed to be trans-
lated literally when we say multo mator ' greater by much.* The Greek
too, uses ToAAy pLei(uy. Still it is possible that they are in reality only
the old accusatives in o, which have lost their final m: eo maior * the
greater to this degree.*
r
Jlptssbs. 143
forms ddiiy enn, ezim* &c. The suffix is striotly dif, the n be-
longing to the pronominal base.
791 The adverbs in an^ from pronouns^ denote how muck : as, tarn
80y quam how, quanquam however^ no nuOter howy alchoughy quam-
uls or quamltlbet as much as yov, please, although,
792 The adverbs in wn, chiefljr from pronouns, denote the time
'when : as, turn or tunct theny (num) or nunc}; 'ivow, quom or quum
or cum when, umquam or unquam (formerly cumquam) ever, num-
quam or nunquam (for ne-umquam) n^ver, quondam (for quom*
dam) at a certain time {past orfuttire), plfirumqud generally,
793 The adverbs in a§ generally denote the road along which any
thing is done. A large majority of these are from pronouns, as
may be seen in § 366. Other examples are, rect& in a straight
linsy dextrft along the road on the righty sXnistrft along the road on
the left,
794 Some ablatives of nouns are used as adverbs : thus, ergO[[ in-
deedy really y in the matter o/, is the ablative of an old Latm noun,
ergo- (n.) work ; and similarly mSd^t ordy is literally hy maasurey
being the ablative of mddo- (m.) measu/re. likewise m&jid in the
m>omingy diu in the daytimcy noctti or noctS by nighty IflcS in the
daylighty may be considered as ablatives.
795 The adverb quand5, from the relative, and those connected
with it, denote time : as, quand5** wheny Sllquandd** sometimey
quandocunquS whenevery quandoquS whenever, soma time or other,
* ThiB 18 the orthography used in Viigil.
*^ This suffix corresponds to Bw of cr-tfcF, ico-Bw. and indeed the
final V of the suffix Bw disappears at times in Greek, as in oirur-Oc or
ofKiff'Ba ioT oTTur-Bty.
t This c is the demonstrative enclitic : see § 289. And if the inter-
rogative enclitic ne be added, ci is preferred to c, as in nuncine: see
§293.
§ It is generally held that these are feminine ablatives agreeing vith
via ^ road' understood.
II Corresponding to the Greek dative tpy^ * in reality.*
^ Whether we are speakine of a very great or a very small quantity^
it adds weight to our assertion if we can speak of the quantity as known
by measurement. Hence, with small quantities, modo ' by measure' may
be translated by 'only.' On the other hand, with great quantities, €ui-
mcdum * up to the measure' is equivalent to ' fiill, quite.v Observe that
modo in old writers has a long final o, as in Ter, And. iv. 1. 6, Plant.
Asin. prol. 5, Aul. ii. 2. 62, Pseud, ii. 8.23, Poen. i. 2.7, Luer, ii. 941
and 1135, Cio, Arat N. D. ii. 42. 107.
** The later writers shorten theo in these two words.
144 ADTBRB8*
796 The adverb Utl or Ht how, that, when (itself connected with
the relatiye), has many adverbs compounded with or derived from
it : as, titlqufi anyhow, at leasty tittit no matter how, utcunquS
howsoever, whensoever, neutlquam or ntitXquam (for ne-iitXquam)
in no way, tltlnam that !
796. 1 The adverbs in us, from pronouns of relative origin, conmionly
denote the place where or whither: as, usquam any where or to
any place, uspiam any where or in any place, nusquam no where
OTtono place,
797 Many adverbs are nouns and prepositions written as one word :
thus,
Prdfect5^ indeedf is from prO fsuM/or a thmg don/e.
Imprimis specially, from in prlmls among thejvrst.
lUcO immediatdy, from in 15c5 on the spot,
Indies every day (more and more), from in dies.
DenuO a-freshy from de n^u9.
Obiter in passing (or in French, en passant), from 8b XtSr on
theroad.
Interim meanwhile, from int^r imt during this.
Admddum quite, from ad m^dum up to the measure,
798 Thus the preposition or adverb uorsum or uorstis -wards is
added to a number of adverbs in o, prepositions <kc. : as,
Horsum hitherward, istorsum towards your neighbou/rhood, illor-
Bum towards yonder place, quorsum in what direction, &liorsum in
another direction, ftUquOuorsum in some direction, quoquouorsum
in every direction, titrOquSuorsum in both directions, aduorsum
towards, prorsum§ or prG6um§ forwards, downright, rursum or
ru8um§ (for reuorsum) hackward, again, deorsum dovmwards, sur-
sum or stisum upwards, intrOuorsum or introrsum inwards, rS-
trorsum backwards, dextrouorsum or dextrorsimi towards the right,,
sXnistrorsum towards the left, ||
* Plautus uses this word with the first syllable long,
t Indeed '^in-deediR itself a parallel example from our own language ;
80 &\bo forsooth.
X An old accusative, or perhaps rather dative, of the pronoun •- *• this,'
for an older form is intertbi.
§ Prosum is preferred by Plautus, and rusum by Virgil. Prosus and
rusus occur even in Cicero, if we follow the Medicean Ms. ad Fam. xiii.
13. and ix. 9. 3.
II Most of these adverbs have also another form ending in uorsus in-
stead of uorsum, and also in uersum, uersus.
ADYIBBS. 145
799 Thus too prepositions that goyem an aoousative are attached
to the pronominal adverbs md: as,
Ade5 to this or that degree^ so ; in addition to this, moreover.
Quo&d to wivat degree^ how far ; to what time, how long,
Adhuc to this time, so far y as yet,
800 The prepositions that govern an ablative are prefixed to the
pronominal adverbs in dSy or their shortened forms in in (see
§ 366) : as,
ProindS* or proin henceforward, therefore, aeeordingly, at once then,
DeindS or dein after Ms, afterwasrds,
SiibindS soon after, ever and anon,
ExindS, exin or exim after this,
Abhinc /rom this time (reckoning towards the past)*
Dehinc /rom this time forroard, after this.
801 Thus too the suffix spoils is added to pronominal and other
adverbs in d^, or rather to the shortened forms in in : as,
AltrinsSciis /rom the other side, ExtrinsSctis /rom mthout,
YtrinquSsSciis /rom both sidfis, IntrinsSctLs /rom within,
802 Thus too the prepositions that govern an accusative are pre-
fixed to pronouns in am or a, which last also appear to have been
corrupted from accusative pronouns in am : as,
Antes hefore this or that, Praeterquam besides that, , , .
Posted after this or that, Siiperquam over and above that, . •
IntSreSi in the meanwhile, Anteh&c hefore this,
ProptSre9./or this or that reason, Posth&c after this,
PraetSreSb besides this or that. PraetSrh&c besides this,
Ant^uam before that. , . , Postillft since that tifke,from that
Postquam after that. , , , time,
803 Thus too the preposition t^ntLs stretching, is suffixed to pro-
nominal forms in a ; as,
E&tSntis to this or that extent, Istact^niLs so far as to reach your
90 far, neighbourhood,
HactSntis to this extent, Qu&t^niLs to what extent, so far as,
* Perinde is only a corruption oiproiiuie or rather j9or-tn<i«, and in
no way related to the preposition per. Indeed the Mas. generally have
proinde where editions give perinde.
146 PBEP08ITIOH8.
AUqu&tSniiB to aome extent. Qu&damtSnfis to a certain extent.
804 Some so-called adverbs consist of an adjective and substantive
written as one word : thus,
Qu5xn0do how is from qu5 m^5 in what manner.
Magn5pSr6 gready is firom magno 0pSr3 with great labour.
HOdie, or rather hOdie, today ^ is from hO* die.
Qudtldie every day^ from quStit die.
806 Ntldiustertiiis, or rather nudiustertitts, th^ day before yesterday ^
19 for masi dius tertiiis now the third day.
806 Some adverbs are formed by the addition of two or more par-
ticles : as, Stiam even now, stiU, also, from St even^ and iam now ;
and Stiamnum even nffuo-a-dofye, from et, iam, and num.
807 Scilicet, uldellcet, lUcet, though called adverbs, are in origin
verbs. When literally translated, they signify respectively :
SdlloetJ om may know, of cov/ne.
Videlicet one may see, tu) do^dt.
lUcet one may go, iiisaU over.
PREPOSITIONS.
808 Prepositions are particles that are prefixed || to substantives
and verbs, and sometimes to other parts of speech. In their
* The old ablative before the enclitic c was added. We should pro-
bably pronounce hodie as a disy liable, hojee ; or like the Italian oggi.
f An old dative case.
X The old form which with the enclitic ee produced nunc ' now.* Ditu
is that nominative of the u declension which has an ablative diu ' in the
daytime.' Further, dius is but a monosyllable, just as dies often is (see
hodie above). Hence nuditutertius should be pronounced something
like nujusteriius {Plant, Host iv. 2, 40).
§ These words are actually employed as verbs. Thus seilicet^ Plant.
Cure. II. 2, 10, Luor. ii. 468, Sal. Jug. 4 ; uidelieet, Plaut. St. iv. 1, 49
and 51, Luor. i. 210 ; ilicet^ Ter. Ph. i. 4, 31. Similarly licet 'it is per-
mitted,* became used as a conjunction in the sense of ' though.'
II The name preposition itself implies this. But in foct they occa-
sionally follow (more particularly in the older authors) ; as in me-^nim
* with me/ quo-ad ' to what degree,* de quo or quo de * concerning which.'
So in English we have Aere-tn, here-upon, &c.
FREPOSITIOirS« 147
original sense they denote the relations of place : as, stLb up^ dfi
downy 9b towards.
809 The letter $ is often added as a prepositional suffix. Thus &b
by sometimes becomes abs, aps or afi \ siib up becomes sus ; ^
toward*^ obs or os ; So outy ex ; dl difftrevU toays^ dis \ [ci, obs.,
ihi$\y cXs ; [oly obs., yon], uls.
810 The first three of these prepositions, viz. ftb hy or from^ siib
up, 9b Unoards, take this s more particularly in composition with
verbs which begin with one of the letters^, e or 7, <»* as,
As-porta- carry away Sus-pend- hang up Os-tend- stretch to^
Abs-cond- pUt away Sus-clp- take up wards.
Abs-tlne-* keep away Sus-tXne- hdd up
811 Ecf 0^ takes an s before the same consonants, and also before
vowels: as,
Ex-p98-t jEt^ 0^ Ex-cUr-t rum, <nU
Ex-tend- stretch ota Ex-Im- take out.
812 Di different ways takes an s before the same consonants, and
takes «, or its substitute r, before vowels : as,
Dis-pds-t put in different places Dls-Xc-§ throw different ways
Dis-c8d-t depart Dlr-Im- disperse
Dis-tXne- keep apart.
813 Ec before a verb beginning with an s has two forms, as from
sSli- leapy exsUi- or exUi- leap up^ which do not differ in sound. ||
814 DXs is preferred to dl before a verb beginning with s, if that s
be followed by a vowel : as, dis-sSna- sound a different note; but
* Absia found even before nouns in old authors, if a tenuis follow :
as, abs te * by you,* obs quiuis homine ' by any man you please/
t This form became obsolete, but was still preserved in the composi-
tion of verbs which begin with /; as, eo-fer- ' carry out,* eo-fod- * dig out,'
&c. Such at least was the orthography of Plautus, Terence, Cicero and
Viigil. The Greek too has ex.
X See § 451. 1.
§ Commonly written disjio- or disjici-. For the quantity of the pre-
position in the compounds of loct-, as conM»-,«i<6tct-,see A. Gellius, iv. 17.
II XSf i. e. X2 to use the Greek characters, was the symbol ori^nally
of the sound chs ; but as the Romans never used the aspirate X m any
other combination of letters, they eventually came to look upon X as re-
presenting the sound edr, and therefore discarded the superfluous «. Hence
ejfsUi' may be looked upon as the older form, but representing ech-tUi^.
148 FBBPOSITIOire.
not so if that s be followed by a consonant, as di-scrib- distribute
in writing,
815 The letter d is often added as a prepodtional suffix. Thus pr5
/dr, Xn tw, r6 Jocit, become severally prOd, ind, r6d*, as in prOd-i-
go forward^ ind-Ige- he in wznt, r6d-i- go hack^ red-d- pitt hacky
red-diic- bring back, and by asidmilation of cf to the following I
rellXgi5n- rdigien^ relllquiae N. pi. remains.
816 The prepositions often lose one of their final letters. Thus ftb
becomes & in the composition of verbs which begin with the letter
m : as, ft^mSue- fnove away. Before the verb fu- he, &b and & are
both found : afi, ab-fuit or &-fuit he was absent ; while before the
verbs fSr- carry ^ and fiig- fly^ the form au is used : as, au-fgr-
carry away^ au-f&g- fly away. Similarly a instead of &b is used
before many nouns beginning with a consonant.
817 In like manner Sc ovJt becomes 9 before other consonants than
/>, cox git : as, 6-bXb- drink up, ^diic- lead ont, &c.
818 P5r for (see $ 834), siipgr upm, and intfir up (see § 834), be-
fore words beginning with I, assimilate the r to this l^ as poUloe- (r.)
hid heforehand, promise ; poUing-t lay otU (a corpse) ; stipell8g-t
(nom. siipellex) and siipellectlli-, strictly adjectives, laid upon,
and hence as sb. f. tapestry, furniture ; intellSg- pick up or gather
(information), perceive.
819 Trans across before verbs sometimes takes the form tr& : as,
trft-diic- lead across, tr&-d- hand over.
820 Cum with before verbs becomes com or c^n or co : as, cSm-M-
eat up, con-cid- cut to pieces, co-i- go together, meet.
821 The other changes which prepositions sometimes undetgo be-
fore verbs maybe seen in the tables of perfects and supines, §§ 533-
554.
822 From prepositions and two of the pronouns demonstrative are
* The prepoflition se * aside* might hare been added to these, as the
conjunction sM^'hMV is another fonn of that word. SedUion- * a division
of the people,' or ' emeute,' implies the previous existence of a verb se-d-
* put apart, separate,* from da- * put* (§ 542), rather than sed-4-, a com-
pound of i- ' go,* as Madvig would have it (Lat. Gr. § 203), for then the
e would be short. In old authors other prepositions take this d : thus
post^ ante, supra, extra^ &c. become postid, antid, tuprad, exirad^ &c.
Perhaps apud ' near' may be only another form of ah, or, as the Greeks
wrote it, apo *by.' This is consiBtent with the original meaning oiab, as*
may be seen in the Syntax.
f These compounds imply a simple verb Ug- or ling', corresponding
to the Greek root Ac^-, German legen, and our lay.
VBBPosiTioirs. 149
formed adjectives in t^* and iro ; and from these again, prepo-
sitions in ^ or ir, and in trd or rd. Thus from stih up is formed
the adjective stipSro- upper ; whence the prepositions siipSr and
Buprft above. So from the obsolete root inf-, or rather SnSf-, belowy
is formed first the adjective infgro- laufer^ and secondly the prepo-
sition infrft below. Again, from In tn is formed first the obsolete
adjective intSro- innefy and thence the prepositions intSr hetweeriy
and intrft unihiny &c From the obsolete preposition &d- again is
deduced a comparatival form ItSrum again,f
823 From prepositions and two of the pronouns demonstrative are
formed comparatives and superlatives. Thus from prae or prO
before, a comparative prior- former, a superlative prlmo- Jirst ;
from In in, a superlative Imo- inmost or lowest; from siib up, a
superlative summo-t uppermost; from post after, posttLmo-§ last;
from So or ex ovt, eztiimo- ovimost or uttermost; from the obsolete
pronominal root ci this or near, (^ttimo-|| hithermost, nearest; from
an obsolete ol yon, ultiimo-I| farther,
824 Comparatives and superlatives are also formed from the inter^
mediate adjective in tiro or ^. Thus from post after is formed
first the adjective postSro- after, and thence a comp. postSriGr-
and a superl. postremo- ; from ex out, an adj. extSro- outer, and
thence a comp. extSriOr-, and superl. extreme- ; from d6 doum, an
obsolete adj. detSro-, and thence a oomp. detSriOr-t uH>rse, and
superl. d6terriimo-1f worst; from stib up, an adj. siipSro- upper,
and thence a comp. slipSri5r- higher, and a superl. stiprCmo-
highest, &c.
825 From the simple pi^poSitibns and from the adjectives in $4^
and iro are formed other adjectives in no .* as,
SlipXno- looking upward, prOno- looking downward.
m
* These are in fad comparatiyes, as may be seen in the Greek xpo'
rtpo' &c
t Compare the Welsh ad, old German it or ita, Danish otter, Swedish
&ter, all signifying ' again.*
X For ntbimo' or suptmo-* In the same way from sub * up,* and em-
* take,* is formed the compound sum- ' take up.* Indeed the best Mss.
more commonly have summ-*
§ The vulgar orthography is posihumo^, which is grounded upon a
ludicrously erroneous derivation firom post humum.
11 Belated respectively to ho- ' this,* and Ulo- * yonder.*
f Literally * lower, lowest ;' but they occur only in the sense of value.
o2
160 PBBP06ITI0KB.
Sttpemo- aJbovey inferno- hdow»
Extemo- without^ intemo- within,
826 From some of the prepositions are formed a^jectiyes in Igo^
Thus,
Postloo- behind, as postIc& iSnuH the hack gaJte,
Antico- or antlquo- 'preceding (either in time or value).
827 From some of the prepositional superlatives are formed adjec-
tives in ^'; as,
From summo- highett, sonmi&ti- or somm&t- of the highest rank,
„ infttmo- lot^esty inflim&ti- or inftim&t- of the lowest rank.
828 Adverbs in tue (§ 777) are formed from prepositions : as,
hMsfrom within or within^ subtiis wnder,
829 For the adverbs in tro and trin from prepositions, see § 838.
830 The prepositions* in use before substantives are the following.
First, before accusatives alone :
ftd to oontrft/aon^ praetSr beside
aduorsum or aduorsiis erg& tovfards pr^pS near
towards infr& below prtfpiiis nearer
ants before intSr between proptfo near
&ptid n^ar intrft within proxi&me nearest
circ& rovmd iuxtft near secundum /a2?owm^
drcItSr ahovt ^ towards slipr& above
circum round p8n6s in the hands cf trans across
cXs on this side cf pSr through [uls, obs., begond]
cXtrfi on this side cf post cftsr ultrS. begoTuL
831 Secondly, before ablatives alone :
&b, abs, or I, by or from [So], ex, or H out of
absqud vnthout prae before
cum with pr5 b^ore
de down from sXnS withoiU,
832 Thirdly, before an accusative or ablative :
In in subtfr fmder
sUb tip or under sfip6r upon,
* Many of these prepoutions are common to the Greek language, viz. :
ah^avo. ecscic con or cumssoi/y or |vk.
obBfirc. anteBOKTb proa^rpo.
sub and supera^o and http, ia—w or to. Tfotlt^fi/rra or «-<Ab ?
nxposiTioirB. 151
833 Clam eecreUy^ cOram face to facey p&lam openl^f ^(mtLl ai the
same time, tSntLs extendingy noreJis or uentb t/owardiy usquS all
ike way or all the time, are rather adverbs than prepodtions. But
see the syntax of prepositions.
833. 1 Some substantiyes in the ablative followed by genitives partake
of the nature of prepositions^ afi causS. /or the sake {of), grftti&/or
the doke (of), and in old Latin ergO on account (of). So inst&r
instead (of), like its English equivalent, appears to be compounded
of In and some substantive signifying * station/* This also is
followed by a genitive : as, Pl&to mihi untLs est inst&r onmium
(Cic» Brut. 51. 191) Plato alone in my eyee is worth the whole let*
834 Other prepositions are found in the composition of verbs and
adjectives, and therefore called inseparaJble prepositions, viz. :
a. Amf roundy as, am-bUr- hwm round, singe; am-bSd- eat
round; and the adj. an-clp- or an-dtpXt- two-headed,
b. Ant up, as &n-h6la- send up (a bla^t of air). (See § 1308.
1.)
0. Dl§ or dXs different ways, as, dis-cSd- d^mrt, and from corda-
strijig, the adj. dis-cordi- or dis-cord- of a different note.
d. Intfoll, inseparable prefix, np, — a corruption of an obsolete
antSr, and related to In or &n tfp (see two paragraphs above and
§ 1308. 1), as praetSr to prae, and propter to prSpS (see | 822),
— as intel-lSg- pkh up or gather (information), perceive, (See
§ 1342.1.)
e. P5r for or forth, as por^rXg- stretch forth, pol-lice- (r.) hid
beforehand, promise; pol-ling- lay otct (a corpse).
/. Rd or rSd back, as, r^piSl- drive bad:, r^-i- go back, and the
adj. HS-dtLe- retimiing.
g, Se? or bM aside, as, 8&-pSs- put aside, and the adjectives
a&-cGro- uneoneemed, se-ocNrd- or 80-cord- q>iritless.
* Am if for in-stmn or ii^ttdrii, where star- ought be an obsolete neater
BuhstantiTe deriyed fiom Ihe verb sia-. Compare the German an-statt,
t Related to the Oreek oft^i, and German urn.
X Related to the Greek ova, German ent, and English tm. See
* Transactions of the Philological Society,* for Jan. 27, 1854.
§ Related to the Greek 8<a, and the German zer.
II This inter ^ which must be carefhlly distinguished from inter * be-
tween,* corresponds to the German inseparable unter in untemehmen
&a, to our under in undertake, understand, and to erUre in the French'
entretenir and entreprise.
f Related to the English sund-er and German scnd^em.
152 PBBPOSITIONS.
h. Yell* or u6- awayy afi the adj. ue-cord- (hearUess, i. e.) senae-
lesSf uehSmenti- or uehfiment- (^devoid of mind)^ furiou8,'\
835 The prepositions in modem editions are usually written in
immediate connection with yerbs^ but separately from noims.
The Romans themselves however generally wrote them in con-
nection with nouns also : as, infSrO in theforum,X
836 Hence if an enclitic be inserted, it commonly follows the noun,
not the preposition : as, inf9r5qu8 and vn. the forumy or, to copy
the modem mode of printing, in foroque {Cic. ad Att. iv. 1. 5).
837 If the preposition be repeated, it has a stronger emphasis, and
may be separated from the noun : in curia inquS fSrOf in the
aenate-hoiue and in the forum,
838 It will be convenient to exhibit a table || of words derived from
prepositions :
* Belated to the German weg, and English emay,
f To these might be added the Bolitary example of neg * after ;* viz.
neg-leff- (* leave behind,*) ' neglect.' This prefix is identical with the
German naeh^ and consequently with the English nigh.
Z This consideration is of importance in the laws of metre.
§ Precisely on the same principle and under the same circumstances
Lucretius separates the preposition even firom a verb, and writes disiectit
disque tupatis (i. 652).
II The contents of this table maybe useftilly compared with similar
formations in our own tongue. To the superlatives in umo correspond
Anglo-Saxon superlatives in ema: as, innrema, fU-^ma^for'nu^ aft-ema^
mid-emOf nid-emOf lat-ema, hind-etna. The Latin language forms seveial
•ompavttives and roperliilivip from words already in tiie comparative
form. Nay, in prim-nree * front-(men or teeth)* we see a comparative
from a superlative. So the Anglo-Saxon formed superlatives upon super-
latives, as viem-est^ nidem-ett, I'dtem-est^ or Jbrem-oti, hindm-ott^ utm-o§i
(see Grimm, D. G. iii. p. 630). Our own form-er agrees accurately witii
the Latin prim-or- ; and in near-er we have a comparatiye formed upon
a comparative ; since near itself is bftt a compression of nt^A-er, as next is
of nigh-est. Under the head of pronominal prepositions we may com-
pare beyond^ before^ behind, beneath^ beout (ohs.), ti^Sf omtd, ttbefi^
abov§0
1 f -
V
/,
P&BMSITIOirS.
153
CO
O
CD
O
o
PS
o
Eh
IH
p;
P
Pci
O
N
n
I?
D
OQ
6
I
00
•I -1
•S 0)
"S je 'c 2
a fl «
IS
se
I
P4
lO
•o-
4-4
lO
.a
15 !§
1
s
■83
I
o
I
8
•♦a
I
o.
^2
II
•8
S^'S^ E3 p<
^iS^'S 0*1
>4 CIj oq «T3iiii>hi« iPUcSO
154
CONJUNCTIONS.
839 The name 'coigunction' is oommonly given to eeyeral classes
of particles which require to be distinguished.
840 Copulative conjunctions are those which unite words, phrases
* or sentences, without making one dependent upon another. Such
are St andy the enclitic quS* andy atquS and; uSlt or^ autt or;
together with the interrogatiye particles &n or, n6 or,
841 There are several words compounded of the above particles
which also serve as copulative conjunctions : for instance, nSquS
wor, n6u8 nor, Slu6 or if,
842 Many of these may be used in pairs : as, St hoc St illiid hoth
this and that, Dlque hSmXnesquS hoth gods and meny uSL hoc uSl
illiid either this or that, aut hoc aut illtid either this or that, nSque
hoc nSque illtld neither this nor that. Slue hoc slue illiid whether
this or that.
843 Several of the particles above mentioned admit of abbreviation.
Thus, atquS, uSl, nSquS, nSuS, siuS, may severally become 9.C, uS,
nSc, neu, sen.
844 Many adverbs, when used in pairs, perform the part of copu-
lative conjunctions : as, nunc hoc nunc illiid now this now thaty
mSdo hoc mddo illiid at one time this at another that, tum s&piens
tum fortXs on the one hand wise on the other brave,
845 Certain phrases which run in pairs may also perform the office
of copulative conjunctions : as, nOn mSdo hoc, sSd Stiam illiid
not ovdy this, but also that.
846 Accessary conjunctions are those which unite an accessary sen-
tence to the main sentence : as antSquam in the compound sen-
tence, antSquam lux nOs obprlmat, Srumpftmiis let us saUy out
before daylight comes upon us,
847 Accessary conjunctions are often formed by prefixing a prepo-
sition to some derivative from the pronoun quo- : as, quam, qa5d,
* The same as the Greek re. Compare the interrogatires ru and
qu%8,
t Probably an obsolete imperatiye of the verb uol- * wish/
t Probably a corraption of alterumy as our or is of other. Compare
the German oder.
oovjuiroTiovB. 155
Ht.* Thus there are : post-quam after that or after^ antS-quamf
hefoTt that or hefore, siiper-quam bei/ond what, pro-iLt according as,
848 Conjunctions of this character perform for a secondaiy sentence
the same office which simple prepositions perform for nouns. Thus
the same idea might be expressed by antS lUcem CrumpSmtLs let us
sally out before dayli^h^. Or, again, we may say either post r6dX*>
tum fiiiis after his return^ or postquam rSdilt after he returned^
849 Sometimes instead of a preposition, a comparative adjective or
adverb, or other word of comparison, precedes the relative adverb :
as, mSior quam spSiiluSram greater than I had hopedy priusquam
spSrftuSram before I had hopedy &lXter quam sp6r&uSram dijfererUly
from what I had hopedy sImtU ut uldi eum {he moment I saw him.
850 Or some phrase may precede : as, eS consUio ut t6 terr6rem
with the design that I might frighten you or of frightening you, hao
ISge ut ne rSde9s with the condition that you shaU not return.
851 Sometimes the relative adverb is doubled : as, ultra quam ut
uldeam beyond seeing y stiper quam quod dissensSrant besides the
fact that they had disagreed,
852 Sometimes a derivative from eo- this is inserted between the
preposition and the relative adverb : as, po8t-e&-quam aftery pro
* This use of quam, quod, ut is probably to be explained on the prin-
ciple on which Home Tooke has explained the origin of the English con-
junction that. * I know that he is returned' may be resolved into two
sentences : ^ He is returned, I know that fkct.* So, in Greek, \eyM 6ri
TtOvrjKt ' I say this : he is dead.' The quatn, quod, tit then have, in
the phrases we are speaking of, the signification this or that ; a meaning
which accords with the use of the Greek relative in Homer. The par-
ticles in question enable the reader to pause before the words to which
they refer. So long as we have only a preposition and noun, no such
pause is requisite. In the same way the mathematician reads a x 5,
a into b ; but if we substitute for b a quantity containing more than one
ter m, a pause is required in reading, and a vinculum in writing : as,
a X 5 + c, which is read, a into .... 6 + 0. Precisely in the same way, if
a long infinitive or subjunctive clause be employed after a Latin verb, it
adds to perspicuity if we insert near the main verb hooy ita or tic. Thus
Cicero says, Velim ita siaiutum habeas, me tui memoriam cum sumtna
beniuoleniia tenere (ad F. yi. 2. 1) ; and again. Sic habeto, neminem esse
qui me amet quin idem te amet (ad F. xvi. 4. 4) : and Terence (Andr. i.
5. 46) says. Hoc scio, esse meritam ut memor esses sui. Lastly, the French
form in the same way their conjunctions puis-que, sans^que^ pour-quoi,
par'oe-que ; the Germans, in-dem, naoh^demf dar^aus doss ; and the
English, before that, beyond what, according as. See ' Penny Cyclo-
paedia,' under the words Article and Conjunction.
f Sometimes the preposition is separated : thus we might say. Ante
erumpamus quam lux nos obprimat.
156 ooHJViroTioirs.
eo lit accordingly as, pro-inde Hijtut as, propt&veS qu8d/or the
reason that, ex eO qudd/rom the fact thatt iReottintheactof.
853 Sometimes the particle atquS* or So occupies the place of the
lelatiye. Thus we may say ^ImtU Hi at the same time that, as soon
as, or sXmiil atquS as soon as; aud in familiar Latin, m&i5r atqud
greater than.
£(54 Sometimes the relative particle is omitted. Thus we may say
sXmiil ut rSdilt or sXmul rfidilt as soon as he returned,
855 Very frequently the prepositional word is omitted, and a soli-
tary relative adverb performs the office of a conjunction : as, tit
kow^ iohen, in order that, quum when, quando when, qudd because*
856 Or the relative may be accompanied by its noun : as qufi-r6, or
abbreviated cur, wh^,
857 Or the relative adverb may have an enclitic partide attached
to it : as, quandd-quXdemt since, qu5n-iam (=»quom iam) since.
858 These relative adverbs, with the exception of quum and qu5d,
are used in direct questions, in which case they no longer perform
the office of conjunctions, and may be more conveniently called
interrogative adverbs : as, quando when f ctir why f Ut how f
qvLoHA how long ^ &c.
859 Many conjunctions have correlative adverbs in the main sen-
tence which point to them ; and these, in one sense, may also be
called conjunctions, t
Thus, It& so, and file so, answer to Hi as; tam so imtch, to quam
as ; tum then, to quum when ; t&mSn yet, to quanquam although ;
lt& on the condition, to SI if; &.oon the condition, to fil if; &t yet,
to A if, dtc.
* This use of aique grows out of the abbreviation of a longer phrase.
Thus, AHud ego dico aique aliud tu dieit * I say one thing and you say
another,' easily degenerates into AHud ego dico atque tu. See § 1148. 8.
f Perhaps this word was pronounced as a trisyllable, guandoquem,
for there is good reason to believe that guidem and 7c represent the same
word, as in equidem and wyvyt. See * Penny Cydopasdia,* under Terentian
metres.
X In fact, they are to their conjunctions what the antecedent Is to the
relative ; and the relative itself is the great conjunction of all languages.
167
INTERJECTIONS.
860 Interjectioiis are abbreviated sentences which denote a sudden
and hasty emotion of the mind. They are commonly inserted in
another sentence as a parenthesis.
861 In respect of form, they are for the most part violently cor-
rapted from what they were ; yet a few admit of being analysed.
Thus, the formula, to may suck a deity preterm me, is the source
of several
It& me Herctiles adiiiuet is corrupted into meherctiles, meher-
ctile, mehercle, merctile, hercle.
It& me Deus Fldiiis'^ adiiiuet, into' mSdius-fldiiis.
It& me Deus Pollux adiiiuet, into SdSpol, Spol, or pol.
And similarly, from the names of Castor, luno, Ceres, there
arise the interjections mecastor or Scastor, eiuno, 6c^re.
862 Some of the more common interjections are :
Ah, &, ahy alas,
Att&t (for &t&t&t) denoting a sudden discovery, ah ah.
Aut dorCty have done,
Ecc^t behold,
Ehem, hem, denoting surprise, aA, often best translated by
repeating the word which caused the surprise.
Eheu, heu alas.
EhO§, calling a person's attention to a question, here, answer
m/e thisy or expressing surprise, v)hat f
Ei& do you hear f
En, em, hem behold, see,
Eu and eugS ffoody bravo (ev and rvyr, theatrical phrases).
HahaorhahahaAaAa^ (laughing).
Hei or ei alas,
* That is, * the god of Faith,* like the Greek Zcvf dpKios or Zcvf iricr-
TMf. Some incorrectly derive this phrase from AiosJilitUy L e. Hercules,
t Perhaps for aufer ie * take yourself away,'
X Probably the imperative of an old verb.
% Probably connected with ho or hue ' hither,'
158 IVTBBJJB0SIO5B.
HeuB* harkee, hoUoa.
Hui bless me / or more strictly a whistle.
N6 verily y almost always at the begimiing of a sentenoe, and
followed hy a pronoun.
Oh, 0, denotes emotion, oh.
Ohe (8) avast.
P&pae 1/e gode.
PrOhf, pr5 avert it heaven^ oh.
St histy husih,
Yae woe, as uae tlhi 'iooe to i/ou.
Yah has various senses, depending upon the tone in which it
is uttered, and must be translated according to the context.
863 There are also several neuter adjectives which are used as ex-
clamations : as, mSIum iU betide youy the deuce ; in&ndum urir
tUteroMe thought, &c.
864 A few unaltered verbs are used almost as interjections : as,
ftgS quicky quaeso prithee, ttm&bo fUease, obsScro hy aJU that*8
sacred, &bi that'll do,
865 The preposition p8r with its accusative, in the sense of im-
ploring, belongs to the class of interjections : as, per dextram
banc hy this right hand. (See § 1350, ^ and k.)
* Probably the imperatiye of an old verb. Comp. the root-syllable
of aus-ouUor * liBten.*
t Perhaps for jE>r6AI&«* keep o£'
SYNTAX.
866 Stittax means the oonnection of words in a sentence. In
treating this part of grammar the same order will be followed as
in the former |>art
NOUNS.
NoKiKATivs Cabs.
867 The nominative* case marks the quarter from which an actionf
proceeds. Hence the nominatiye is commonly a living being : as,
yip&r& llmam mSmordit {Fhaedr, vni. 5), a viper hit aJUe,
Aper sSgStes prOculcat {Ov, Met. viii. 290), the mid boar tram-
pUe down the crops.
868 Instead of living beings, inanimate}: and abstract nouns are
often used as the nominative : .as,
Cursum mutftuit amnXs (Hor. ad Pis. 67), the river has changed
its cowse.
Dies l6nit Irfts {Liv. ii. 45), time assuages wrath.
YerbSr&t imbSr htimum {Virg. A. ix. 669), lashes the grrnnd
the rain,
869 The agent may act upon the agent. Hence the nominative is
used with reflective verbs : as,
Khenus septentriOn&li Oce&nO miscStiir {Tac» Ger. i.), the Bhrne
mixes {itsdf) wi^ the Northern Ocean,
870 As the use of the passive! has grown out of that of the reflec-
tive, the nominative is also found with passive verbs : as,
Instila adpellfttur Mon& {does. B. G. y. 13), the island is called
Mona,
• See S§ 44, 48, 368, 381.
f The active yerb Ib probably the oldest foim of the verb.
X This savoun of poetry, but language in its early state is always and
of necessity what we call poetical. § See §§ 879-382.
160 8TNTA2.
871 As verbs of a static character have generally something of
action* mixed up with them, the nominatiye is used before static
verbs: as,
Ttir6 c&lent &rae ( Virg» A. i. 421), with incenae glow the altars.
872 The old construction of verbs of feeling is seen in ff 700, 889,
&:c But a large number of verbs which denote feeUng have a
nominative like other static verbs : as,
CIcSro eum St &m&bat et uSreb&ttLr {Cie» ad Q. F. i. 3. 3), Cicero
both loved and respected him.f
872. 1 Impersonal verbs admit a nominative of a neuter pronoun, just
as in English we use it, there*
Lucis<dt hoc {Ter, Haut. iii. 1« 1), it is getting light, look,
l^on te haec ptldent ? {Ter. Ad. iv. 7. 36), are you not (uhamed
of these things f
873 Thus the nominative is used before verbs of almost every kind.
A very common use of it is before the verb signifying ' be :' as,
Tu es tristls {Ter. Ad. v. 1. 6), you are out of spirits,
SSnectus ipsast morbiLs {Ter. Phor. iv. 1. 9), old age itsdf ia a
disease.
874 Some grammarians are in the habit of treating those sentences
which have the verb he as the form to which all others are to be
reduced. Hence they divide a sentence into three parts :
The Subject, that of which you speak ;
The Predicate, that which you say of the subject ; and
The Copula, or verb he, which unites the subject and predicate.
Thus, for instance, in the sentence or proposition, man is an
animal, man is the subject, animal the predicate, is the copula.
The subject, according to this system, is the nominative case.
When, instead of the verb he, another verb is used, they resolve it
into some part of the verb he and a participle. Thus, Cicero writes
a letter is resolved into Cicero is writing a Utter, where Cicero is
the subject, writing a letter the predicate, is the copula.
* Thus, he who sleeps often snores or drops his head, or dreams. At
any rate, the going to sleep is commonly preceded by certain acts of pre-
paration.
f The old writers said Cicero eitu uerebatuty or even Cieeronem eius
uerebatur. Nay, Cicero himself has ottos non est ueritum (de Fin. ii.
n. 39).
KOKIITATITX. 161
875 The substantiye, adjective, or participle that acoompanies the
verb ^ as a predicate, is in Latin made to agree in case with the
subject nominative, and is called the nominative of the predicate.^
Thus,
Sftpientia est rSrum dlulnftrum St humftn&mm sdentilL (Oic,
de Off. I. 43. 153), pkUoBopky U the hnmUdge cf things
divine and human,
Insignis anniis hi&n8.nXuo6fi fuit {Liv^ y« 13), the year was rth
marhahlefor a m/owy mnter.
Viae clausae, TibSrIs innfiuIgftbUis fuit {Liv, v. 13), the roads
were hloched up^ the Tiber not naviffahUm
876 In the same manner other verbs have at times a nominative in
the predicate referring to and agreeing in case with the subject
nominative (see § 1050) : as,
Mlinltidnes intSgrae m&n6bant (Goes. B. G. vi. 32), the forti-
Jloations remained untoiiched.
Hand iniltae c8cId6rS minae (Idv. vi« 35), the threats did not
faU without effect*
876. 1 Although a noim substantive or adjective with &h he usually
constitutes the predicate, the place may be supplied by a descrip-
tive word or phrase of a different form : as, a. a genitive or ablative
of quality (§§ 928, 1010) ; h. dative of the light in which a thing
is regarded (§ 982) ; c. a prepositional phrase ; or cf. an adverb : as,
a. NSmo 6 dScem s&i^ mente est {Gic, de Leg. ni. 10. 24), not
a man of ike ten is of sound mind,
N&ttira hum&na aeul brSuXs est {Sal, Jug. 1), hwnan nature is
shordived,
h, Cul b5n5 fuit % {Cic. p. Rose. Am. 30. 84), to whom was it
beneJlcialF
c. Sunt In h5n5rS {Cfic, p. Rose* Am. 28. 77), they are hieSi in
honour.
d, Tut5 non Sris {Oic, ad Att. zv. 11), you wiU not be safe.
See also § 1401.
* This nominative in the predicate must be referred to what gram-
marians call ' attraction.* The German language in such cases very pro-
perly divests the adjective of all case : Der Mann Ut gut, not gtUer* See
also below.
p2
162 8TNTAX.
877 The accusative with the active verb becomes a nominative with
the passive: as,
BSgem eum appellant, they kUvJU him cis king — Whence
Bex ab suls appell&ttLr (Caes. B. G. vii. 4), he is saltUed king
hy hU friends,
Oaimn TSrentium consiUem creant, they dect C. Terentius con-
sul — Whence
Cains TSrentius consul cre&tilr (Liv, xxiu 35), C, Terentius is
dected consul.
Doctiorem i^cSrS duXt&tem, to make the citizens more learned —
hence
Discipllna doctior factast dultfis {Cic, B. P. ii. 19. 34), hy
instruction the citizens were made (or became) more learned,
878 Even when verbs are in the infinitive mood dependent upon
another verb, the noun in the predicate referring to the subject
nominative will still agree in case with the subject nominative, if
no reflective pronoun in the accusative be interposed : as,
Hdmlnes minus credtili essS coepSrunt {Cic. de Div. ii. 57. 117),
men hegan to he less credulous.
Cum omnibus ptftius quam s5ll pSHrS uSluSrunt ((7^c• in Oat.
IV. 7. 14), they resolved to perish with all rather than to perish
alone.
Vis formos&* uXdSrl (ffor. Od. iv, 13. 3), you wish to appear
heaviifvl,
879 It is only in poetry that we find such phrases as
Sensitf dSlapstLs In hostis ( Virg. A. xi. 377), h^ perceived that
he had unvdttingly fallen among the enemy,
880 In the old authors, and in the poets, the nominative is found
for the vocative : as,
Ag^um Pontlfex FubUcus prael uerb& quibus mS pro ISgio-
nlbus d6u5ueam (Liv. viii. 9), come, Priest of the State, re-
peat (for me to follow) the words in which I am to devote my^
sdf for the legions,
Almae filius Maiae (J7or. Od. i. 2. 42), thofu son of fostering
Maia.
* The insertion of the pronoun te would require a change : thus, Vis
te formosam uideriy ' you wish yourself to appear beautiful.'
t In prose it must have been Sensit se delapsum in hostis.
TOOATIYB. AOCUSlTIVi:. 163
881 In inteijectional phrases the verb is often understood : as,
EccS littSrae (t. e, m!hi tr&dunttir) {Cic, ad Att. zui. 16. 1),
hekold^ a letter U all at once piU into my hand»*
VOOATIVB,
882 The vocative is used in addressing a person : as.
Die MarcS TuUl (Cic, ad Att. vii. 7. 7), »pe<iky Marcus TvJSiius^
882. 1 The interjection o is only used in strong exclamations : as,
Dl btfnl, quid est In hdmlnis uita, din ? (Cic, de Sen. 19. 69),
good heavens^ what is there lasting in the life of man f
882. 2 The vocative, if emphatic, commences the sentence ; if not, it
is usually preceded by a few words. It is also frequently placed
immediately after the pronoun of the second person.
883 In the old writers, and in the poets, the vocative is sometimes
used with verbs of the second person, instead of the nomina-
tive; as,
MactSt uirttite est5 (ZiV. rv. 14), he increased in mrtue^ i. e.
go on in thy virtuous coursey and heaven Uess thee,
Qu9 mtfrlturS ruis ? ( Virg. A. x. 811), whither dost rush to die Ft
Accusative.
884 The accusative case answers to the question whitlier. Hence
motion to towns§ or small islands is expressed by the accusative :
as,
C&puam concessit {Idv, xxiii. 18), he withdrew to Capua,
N3.ulg9.bat Syrfkcusas (Cic. N. D. iii, 34. 83), he was sailing to
fSgracusae.
885 With the names of countries the preposition in is usually em-
ployed, II But the poets use the simple accusative with names of
countries, and even other words, after verbs of motion : as,
* For the nominatiye in apposition see below.
t The Romans, losing sight of this being a vocative, retain it in the
construction of the infinitive, as, luberem macte uirtute esse (Liv, ii. 12).
X For the vocative in apposition, &c., see below.
§ If any phrase be added by apposition to the name of the town, the
preposition in is required : as, Se contuiit Tarquinios in urbem Etruriae
Jiorentissumam {Cic, R. P. ii. 19. 34). Peruenit in oppidum Cirtam
{Sal, Jug. 102). See also Sal. Jug. 75.
II Thus, Tarentum in Italiam uenit^ * he came to Tarentum in Italy.*
164 BTVTAX.
ItiOiam i^t5 prSfttgos lAuIn&quS uSnit LittSriL (Ftr^. A. i. 6),
to Italia, hyfate an otttcastf and to the Lavine beach he came.
886 The accusatives dSmum, rOs, fSr&s, u6num, and in the old
writers infltifts^ m&lam rem, are used after verbs of motion : as,
DSmmn rSuortSrS (Cic. Tusc. v. 37. 107), they returned home,
Blis Ibo (Ter. E. ii. 1. 10), I shall go into the couvUry,
Ecfogl fSrfts {Ter, E. v. 4. 23), I escaped into the street.
D&rS uSnum (Liv. zxiv. 47. 6), literally to piU in the mndovf
{for sale) — Whence to seU.
Infitias ibit {Ter, Ad. iii. 2. 41), he tinU have recotirse to suiter^
fuges.*
Mal&m rem hinc ibis ? {Ter, E. iii. 3. 30), vnH you go and he
hanged f
887 The verbal substantives in im (called supines) are used in the
accusative after verbs of motion (see also § 1299) : as,
E5 pfibtUfttum uSnient {flaes, B. G. vii. 18), ikey vnU come here
to get fodder.
In eam spem Srect& duXt&s Srat, dSbelUktum Irl {Idv, zzix. 14),
the citizens had been encouraged to hope that they were going
to finish the war,
888 After active verbs the object to which the action is directed is
put in the accusative case : as,
DSmlnus seruom uerbSr&uit, the masUr flogged the dave*
889 The impersonal verbs of feeling have the accusative of the per-
son who suffers that feeling : viz.
Me mXs^t eitis, et piget ;
PtLdet taedetque ac paenltet : as^
Eds infllmiae suae non pi&det {Cic. i. Yerr. 12. 35), they are not
ashamed of their infamy,
890 So also certain other impersonals take an accusative of the
person who suffers : viz.
Ms uel te iiiuat dScetquS,
Tum praetSrit fiigit l&tetqu8,
Falllt dportet dfidScetquS : as,
* The usual translation is ' deny ;* but this is inconsistent with such
a passage as Liv, ti. 40. 4 : Neque nego negue ir^Utaa eo.
▲OOUSATIYE. 165
1^6minem uostram praetSrit {Cic. n. Terr, iil 5. 11), it escapes
no <me anwng you*
891 Many reflective verbs, called transitive deponents, take an
accusative :* as,
Naturam s6qult {Cic, de Off. i. 28. 100), tofdUow wUtwre.
892 The so-called perfect participles are used, particularly by the
poets, like those of reflective or deponent verbs, and so take an
accusative case : as,
Membr& stlb arbiito Strfttiis iflor. Od. i. 1. 21), hiving spread
his limbs tmder an arbute tree.
Aduersum fSmur trilgtUa ictfisf {Liv, zxi. 7), wov/nded in the
front of the thigh with a tragle,
893 Similarly, some verbs, which are commonly intransitive, are
occasionally used (by the poets more particularly) with an accu-
sative : as,
Ingr9.ti &nlml crimen horreo {Cic. ad Att. ix. 2 A. 2), 1 shudder
at the charge of ingratitude,
Meum casum ddluSrunt {CJic, p. Sest. 69. 145), they lamented
my misfortune,
894 Some verbs, commonly intransitive, take an accusative of a
noun related to the verb in form or meaning (called the cognate
accusative), often in order to attach thereto an adjective : as,
Hirum s6mniaui s6mnium (Plata, Bud. la, 1. 5), / have
dreamed a wonderful dream,
Amd,nti hero qui e^ruitutem s6ruit {Plaut, Aul. iVf 1. 6), he
who is in the service of a master that is in love,
Alium cursum petluit (Cic, ad Att. ni. 8. 2), he went another
route,
895 Similarly, the verbs of smdling and taste, and a few others,
take an accusative which defines the nature : as,
Piscls ipsum m&rS s&pit (JSen, Q. N. in. 18), the fish tastes of
the very sea.
* This and some of the following sections have been anticipated. See
^ 400 to 404. But the repetition was necessary for completeness.
t The compound (^sequ- (r.) ' follow the wishes of any one, oblige/
requires a dative of the person obliged, agreeing thus with the Greek con-
struction of the allied word lar-o/iai (Aoriitt k-CTr-oyLiiv).
X Ictiu, * having it wounded.'
166
Olet pSrSgilnum {Oie, de Or. ni. 12. 44), it has a foreign tmdl,
RMtflet antlqoXt&tem (Cic, Brut. 21. 82), it savoun cf amJtiquity.
886 Verbs of making^ creating, electing, haye an accusative of the
new condition or office (called the factitive accusative), besides the
aocasatiye of the object : as.
Me h^Stem m^estiae reddXderant {Cic. ad Att iz. 17), for
myedf, troubles have made me dull of feding,
Bect& prS.u& f&dunt {Ter. Ph. y. 2. 6), ^^ey make straight things
crooked,
Ancum Marcimn r6gem ptfptUos cre&uit* (lAv. i. 32), the citi-
zens dected Anctu Marcius king,
897 So also verbs of calling, thinking, showing, seeing, take two
accusatives : as,
OdAuimn sul Caes&rem sSltlt&bant {die. ad Att. xrv. 12. 2),
OctaviiLs his own friends saluted a* Cossar,
S(k}r&tes tdtlus mundl se incSlam et cluem arbXtriib&tiir iCic,
Tusc. v. 37. 108), Socrates thought himsdf an inhabitant and
citizen of the universe.
Qrhtum me praebeo {Oic, p. Plane. 38. 91), / duno myself
graUfvl,
898 The verbs ddoe- teach, csla- hide, keep in the dark, may have
two accusatives, one of the thing, one of the person : as,
Quid te littSras d^eam f (Cic. in Pis. 30. 73), what, am I to
teach you your letters f
Non te celfiul sermOnem AmpI {Oic, ad Fam. n. 16. 3), I did
not conceal from you the conversation with Am^us,X
899 With the passives of these verbs, the accusative of the person
becomes the nominative, and the thing taught or concealed may
be in the accusative : as,
* There is a sort of moHon to in this construction : * They put him
into the office.' A German indeed would insert the prepoflition signify-
ing ' to :* nSySie w'dhlen ihn zum Fuhrer^ ' they choose him leader.*
f With Terbs of thinking the ablatiyes numero and heo, and the pre-
position pro, are also used : as, in numero hosHutn eum habeo, in loeo
hostis habeo, pro hosts hdbeo,
X These two verbs are also used with de of the matter referred to, or
with an ablative alone of the means employed : as, eelare or doeere de
ahqua re, doeere fidibus*
ACKmSATZTX. 167
CSftaMr {Oic. in BulL n. 6. IS), Ihhu hept in the dairh
Koene h6o celatoe t&mdiu ? {Ter. Hea it. 4. 23), to think that
VKy ofaUpeopU, ahovld have been kept in the dark about this
tolxmg,
Doltils doct& m5d0s (JJor. Od. m. 9. 10), taiagkt eweet measuree.
900 Some transitive verbs of motion, compounded with trans, cir-
cum, praetSr, &d, may have two accusatives, one of the thing
crossed ^c, one of what is conveyed across &c. : as,
IbSrum cOpias tr&ificit {Liv. xxi. 23), he threw his forces over
theMro.
EquXtfttum pontem transdflcXt (Caes. B. G. n. 10), he leads the
oavodry over the bridge.
Idem iusiurandum &dIgXt AfHinium {Goes, B. 0. 1. 76), he 00m-
pds Afranius to take the same oath,
Arbltrum (aliquem) &dlg&d (Oic, Top. 10.43), to force (a per-
son) to go before ajvdge,
901 ' The thing crossed, &o. may, with the passive verb, be an ac-
cusative:''^ as,
Belgae Bhenum transdtlcunttir (Caes, B. G. 11. 4), the Bdgae
cross the Bhine,
SoSpi&los praeteruect& uldettir Orfttid mdl (Cic, p. Gael. 21. 51),
my speech seems now to have passed by the rocks.
Tunc deindS c9tSr& mandantur iusifLrandum ftdactls (Sen. ep.
95, p. 602 0.), then and not tiU then the ether dtUies are
intrusted to them when they have been sworn.
902 Many verbs of asking, begging , demanding, may have two ac-
cusatives, one of the person, the other of the thing : viz.
E5ga- perconta- (r.) fl&^ta-quS,
Pose- rSposc- interr5ga-quS,
Quaes- St 5ra- postiila-qud : as,
P&c&n te poscXmtbBi omnSs (Virg, A» xx. 269i), peace of thee ask
weaU,i
* Or, 80 &r as traic', tramit- are concerned, in the nominatiye : as,
JRhodanus traieotua est, *" the Rhone was crossed.' With the thing con-
veyed the nominative is required in the passive: as^eoferoitus traiectus
est.
t Pet' * beg,' and quaer- * ask,' never take an accusative of the per-
son, but employ a preposition ; the fint a6, the second ab^ ea or de.
168 BTHTAZ.
FrOmentam Aeduos fl&gli&bat ((7ae9. B. G. 1. 16), he kept de-
mandinff com of the Aedui,
903 The thing ask^d with the passive verb may be an accosative :
as,
Stilts me n9n essS rtfg^tum sententiam {Oic, ad Att. 1. 13. 2),
1/ou must know I vxu not asked my opinion,
904 Many yerbs which are originally intransitive* become transi-
tive when compounded : as, firom i- ffo is formed co-i- go together
or meety and hence
OoIrS sdciSt&tem (Cic, Phil. ii. 10. 24), to form a partnership.f
So, from uersSrrl to turn is formed &-aer8&-rl to turn away (in
horror) : and hence,
Fllium &uers&tiis (Idv. vni. 7), tttming away in horror from
his son,
Aaers&tur sc^tls {Cwrt» vi. 7), he turns away in horror from the
(proposed) crime,
905 Some transitive verbs, when compounded, slightly change their
meaning, and thus have a changed construction : as, from sparg-t
scatter, sprinkle, spargSre ftquam to sprinkle water; but consper-
gSre§ &llquem &quSi to hesprinMe any one wUh water,
906 Hence some compound verbs have a double construction!], one
derived from the simple verb, one from the changed meaning of
the compound, viz.
Adsperg- St inspeig- indu-5-qu8,
Exu- drciimda- inperti-5<quS,
Adds circtunf iid- insSr-o-qu&
907 Abstract nouns from verbs occasionally follow the construction
of the verb, and take an accusative : as,
DSmum rSdltiSnis spS subl&tft (Goes, B. G. i. 5), the hope of
returning home being taken away,
Qidd tibi banc curlltiost rem ? (Plant, Am. i. 3. 21), what Easi-
ness have you to troviU yom^sdf about this matter?
* See § 403.
f Hence in the paasiye soeieias oot/tir, ' a partnership ib formed.'
% Only the poets, and their prose imitators, use sparg- in the sense of
* besprinkle.*
§ The same difference exists between spu" and conspu-, between ser^
and conser- or obser',
H See § 404.
AC0U8ATITB. 16d
Quid tibi istanc t&ciiost ! {Plant. Oasu u. 6. 54) what huiiness
have you to touch that permm 9
908 The adjectives prtfpiQr- and proxiimo-, and the adverbs prSpiiis
and prox&mS, from the preposition prSpS, sometimes, like that
preposition, take an accusative (as well as a dative) : as,
Exercltum hS.b6rS quam proxtime hostem {Cic, ad Att. vi. 5. 3),
to keep the army as neovr as possible to the enemy.
L&oonlciis &ger proximus flnem eOrum est (Liv. xxxY. 27), the
territory of U^e Laoones is nearest to their frontier.
909 The neuters of pronouns and of adjectives or substantives
which denote quantity are often used in the accusative where
other nouns in the accusative would be rare, or even inadmissible.
In these cases the English language often requires the insertion of
a pr^K>sition :
Id tIbi suscensul {Plant, Pers. iii. 3. 26), it was at this 1 took
offence.
Ynum omnes stiidetis {Cic, Phil. vi. 7. 18), you are aU eager
for one object,
. Cetera assentior Orasso {Cic, de Or, i. 9. 35), as to the other
points I agree with Crassns*
lam hoc &liud est quod gatideamus {Ter. K v. 8. 11), then
again we have this other matter to rejoice at.
Id 5p$ram do {Ter, And. 1. 1. 130), lam labouring at this,
VtrumquS laetdr {Cic. ad Fam. vii. 1. 1), lam ddighted at both
things.
Quid l&crtLm&s ? {Ter. Ad. iv. 5.45) what are you crying for i
Idne 6stis auctords mihi ? {Ter, Ad. t. 8« 16) is this what you
recomTnend tom^f
BSnlflcio isto nihil utltfir {Cic, in EulL li. 23. 61), that adr
wintage you offer he maJces no use of.
Eft quae ab n&tur9. m5n9mtLr {Cic. de Am. 24. 88), those warn-
iTigs which we receive from nature.
And even unconnected with a verb : as,
Id tempdrls {Cic, de Fin. r. 1. 1), at that time.
HdmlnSs Id aet&tls^ {Cic. de Or. l 47. 207), men at that age.
Ego istiic aet&tis {Ter, Haut. i. 1. 58), latyowr time of life.
* The phrase hoc aetafis waM at last corrupted to hoc aetata. See
Nonius, p. 192 ; and compare magS, uererSf for moffU^ uererts. In Phut,
Trin. it. 3. 83. we should read hoc aetate, not hoc aetatei
Q
170 BTITTAX.
910 The possessive pronouns in a which accompany the impersonal
verhs refert and interest are in origin accusatives feminine singular.
Thus,
Me& refert, it concerns me, is a corruption of meam rem fert, it
carries with it something hdonffing to me. So,
Nostra^ interest is a corruption of nostram inter rem est, it is
in the midst of and consegttentl^ mixed tip with something
belonging to us,
911 After many active verbs, instead of a single word, a whole sen-
tence may take the place of the object, in which case the secondary
verb is put in the iofinitive mood, and the agent or subject of that
verb is put in the accusative, called the subject accusative. Thus,
Oaesar rSdilt, Caesar is returned.
Nuntiant Oaes&rem r^diissS, they bring word that Oo/esar is re-
iumed.f
For other remarks on the construction of the accusative and
infinitive see below.
912 Similarly, when a subordinate sentence is attached to a verb
• as its accusative, the nominative of that sentence is sometimes
picked out and made the accusative of that verbj : as,
Nosti Marcellum quam tardus sit {Goes, ap. Oia ad Fam. vni.
10. 3), you know how slow Marcellus is,
Istam times ne ilium t&lem praerlpiat t^i {Ter. E. i. 2. 80),
* The use of re- in this sense of interest' is common : thus we find
mea res agituVf ' my interest is at stake i* in rem meam esty ' it is to my
advantage ;* e re mea esi^ * it is suggested by my interest.' The expla-
nation above given applies equally to the use of the genitive of the per-
son, as Ciceronis refert^ dceronis interest; as well as the genitive of
the value, as magni refert. The long quantity of the a is proved by
Ter. Ph. v. 7. 47. and Haut. it. 5. 45. Similarly, postea^ from posteam^
lengthens the a when the m is discarded. See sJso §§ 409, 787, 802.
f A mathematician might have expressed this by — Ferunt (Caesar re-
diU)em^ attaching the symbol of the accusative case to the clause. As
the Romans were afraid to do this, adopting what under the circumstances
was perhaps the best make-shift, they selected for the addition of the
suffix the chief substantive. Again, the passive construction should have
been (Caesar rediit)s fertur ; but here again, by a similar make-shift,
they wrote Caesar rediisse fertur ; and even in the first person, ego rediisse
feror,
X Hence even in the passive voice, an dea sim dvMtor (Ov. Met. vi.
208), ' it is doubted whether I am a goddess.' So Cie. N. D. ii. 44. 115,
inteiiegi gualia sint non possunt ; and 59. 147, e» quo seieniia inteUegitur
qualissit.
AOOUSATITB. 171
you are afraid tliat that girl you speak of vnU cui you out
with thatjme gentleman,
Impurum uide Quanttim ualet {Ter» Ph. y. 7. 93), see how
strong the scowndreL is,
Non s&tis me pemosti 6tiam qualis sim (Ter, And. m. 2. 23),
you do not quite thoroughly understand even yet what sort of
person I am.
Virtus tu& me ^It ut te audacter mjjneam (Ter, Haut. i. 1. 4),
your own worth makes me boldly warn you,
Fac me at sciam (Ter. Haut i. 1. 32), mind you Ut me know,
912. 1 Although the employment of the accusative as the agent or
subject of a verb in the infinitive should, according to the ex-
planation above given (§ 911), be limited to the case where such
a clause follows a transitive verb as its object, this use of an accu*
sative before an infinitive mood became general (see §§ 1239, 1240,
1246), and even when not expressed affected the case of words
referring to it* : as,
Ylsumst utUius sOlum quam cum alt&5 regidrS (C^. de Off. m.
10. 41), iJt was thought better for one to hold royal power alone
than to share it with another — ^where in the indicative we
should have had sGlus regnat.
913 The prepositions In and stLb sometimes require the accusative,
and always after a verb of motion : as.
In urbe est, he is in the city; but. In urbem uSnit, he cam/e
into the city.
Sub mtlr5 stat, he stands under the wcUl; but, Sub mCLrum
u6nit, he came up to the wall,
914 The mi^jority of the other prepositions^ which do not imply
' motion from,' also govern the accusative. See Prepositionst.
915 ExterU of place or time or degree is commonly expressed in
the accusative]: : as,
* But see § 878.
f Those prepositions which require the ablative are included in the
first two of the following lines ; those which are found with both, in the
third line. All others have the accusative alone.
Absque cum sine, ab coramque,
Prae pro de tenus, ec palamque ;
Boih^ super in sub, subter clamque.
But the use of clam with an ablative seems doubtful.
X Where a point of space is fixed by a distance from another point.
172 8TVZAZ«
A rect& conscientifi ndn transuorsam unguem discOdit {Cie. ad
Att. XIII. 20. 4), he departs not a nail*$ breadth from a right
conscience^
Foss& quindScim pSdes l&t& {Goes, B» G« vxi. 72), a dit^ fifteen
feethroad.
DSoem azmSs urbs oppugnftta est (Xm v. 4), /or ^^ years was
ike city besieged,
Yndemginti aonos n&tfis (Cic, Brut, 64. 229), nineteen years old,
Ma^dmam partem lactS uluunt ((7ae9. B. G. it. Ij^/or £^ most
part they live on milk,
916 The accusative is occasionally used by the poets in coimection
with an adjective^ to define the particular part, and is often called
the Ghreek aocusatiye. C6tSr& in other respects is so used even in
prose writers (Sallust^ Livy, Yelleius).
Ecus trSmIt artus ( Virg. G. ni. 84)^ the horse trembles in his
limbs.
Vir cetera 6grSgitLs (Liv. L 35), a man in other respects of dis--
tinguished merit,
Os hIiindrosquS d^ sXmilis (Virg, A. i. 693), in face and
shoulders like a god,
917 The accusatives uicem^ tum^ ht^ ggntLs hind^ and sSctLs seXy
are often used in an independent manner ; as,
StiLpentis et suam iam ulcem mSgls anxios quam illlus {Liv,
Till. 35), ofnazed and now mwre anxious abo%it their own
than the other's position.
In id gSnus uerbis ( Var, L. L. x. 5. 180), in words of that dass,
Sds me ftUquId id gSnus s^tum scrlbSH^ {Cie. ad Att. xiii.
12. 3), you know that 1 am in the habit of writing something
of that kind.
lAhMnim o&pltum uIillS s&tts ad dSoem mllitt capt& {Liv,
XXVI. 47), of free persons of the male sex fuil 10,000 were
taken.
917. 1 The accusative partim is used even as a nonunative to a verb :
Fartim 6 n5bis timldl sunt, partim & rSpubUca &uersi {Cic,
as,
the ablative is used by good writen, and sometimet with the preposition
ab. See also § 1018. 1.
* The equivalent perhaps in foim and meaning of the German wegen.
QSKITITJL 173
Phil. Till. 11. 32), gome of tts are timidy some iU-diepoeed to
ourcoufUiy,
918 In sentences of exclamation the aoousative often appears, the
word with which it should have been connected being suppressed :
as,
Me caecum* qui haec antS non uldSrim {Cic, ad Att. x. 10. 1),
my blindneee, not to have seen all this before.
Quo mi, inquit, mutam sp^ciemf, si uinc6r sono ? (Phaedr. m.
18.9), what goody says she^ is dumb heaiUy to ms^ if in song
I am worsted?
Hem D&uom tlbit (Ter, And. v. 2. 1), tooh^ here is Daws at
your service*
BSnS td p&tSr§ {Ov, Fast. n. 637), a blessing on thee, sire,
Oeititite.
919 The genitive, like the nominative, denotes ' from.' The ^dif-
ference between their uses is this, that the nominative denotes
the source of the action expressed by a verh^ while the genitive is
used chiefly in connection with substantives. It will often be found
that the preposition d6 with the ablative may be substituted for
the genitive, and sometimes &b or ex||.
GSKITIVB WITH SUBBTANTIVBB.
920 The genitive is attached to another substantive to denote the
origin of an action, and may be translated by/rom, of, or the
English genitive in « .* as,
OonsUlis iusstl {Cic. in Oat. 1. 1. 2), 5y an order from the consul,
by order of the consul , by the constd^s order.
921 This phrase corresponds to consul iussit, where consiQ would
be called the subject of the verb iussit. Hence this genitive is
often called the subjective genitive.
* Perhaps dico understood.
t Perhaps das understood. Literally thus : * To what end do ye giye
me beauty ?*
X Perhaps do understood, or eape.
§ Perhaps Di etdiuuent understood.
II Hence the substitution of d^, or a woi^ like it, in all the European
languages derived from the Latin. In our own language too (/appears
to be only a variety of the preposition off,
q2 «
174 tmnjAx,
922 When of or from a whole a certain part onlj is taken, that
whole is expressed by the genitive.* This is often called the par-
titive genitive : as,
Pars mllltum (Coig, B. G. yx. 40), a part of the eddiers^
Oi^torum praestantisstLml {Cic, Opt. Gen. Or. 4. 13), the most
distinguished of orators.
Vis aun \Cic. Tusc. v. 32. 91), a quantity of gold.
Nemo nostrum {dc. de Fin. ii. 8. 23), not one of w.
Qui e)frum curiills gessSrant m&gistrat^ {Liv, v. 41), such of
them as had held cunde magistrtzcies.
Rfiltquom ultae (Liv. xxxix. 13), ike rest of his life.
DelectI pgditum (Liv. xxvi. 5), men chosen from among the in-
fantri/, or a picked body of infantry.
£bd[guom campi (Liv, xxvii. 27), a small portion of the plain.
VltiimS. CeltlbSriae (Liv.^XL. 47), the farthest parts ofCdtiberia.
D&emulri &gro Apptllo, quM Qius publicum pSpilll Bom&ni
8mt, dluXdendS (Liv. xxzi. 4),^ eommissioners for divid-
ing the ApvUian territory, i. e. so much of it as was the pvMic
property of the people of Rome,
Id nSg5tl (Tev. And. Ptrol. ^, tha^ piece of business^ or Aat
husiness.
Allquid n5ul (dc. ad Att. v. 6. 2), sonvething of new mattery or
some news.
QuQdt @ius f%cSr8 possum (Cic. ad Att. xi. 12. 4 ; ad Fam. m.
2. 2, and v. 8. 5 ; and de Inv. u. 6. 20), so miich of it as T
can, or so far as is in my power.
Qhs. When the whole are included, the genitive in Latin can-
not be used, although in Engliah we still use the word ^ of.' Thus,
* Three himdred of us have sworn* — ^if three hundred form the whole
— ^must be expressed by TrScentl conlurS.uImtls (Liv^ ii. 12).
922.1 Still, as the pronouns quisqu^ and ilterqug deal with each
unit of the whole number separately, though ultimately including
the whole, they are entitled to a genitive of the whole : as,
Tu5rum quisquS n^cess&ridrum (Cih. ad Fam. i« 9. 25), every
one of your connections.
* Infttead of this partitive genitive^ the piepcMntions of kindred mean-
iii|», faeih aa e» and 4e, we often used,, and even the prepoiition intsr^
f In this construction our editioiis hAV^guoad, but the best MsB. qmnL
OSNITXTB. 175
YtrlquS nostrum gr9,tam flBcSrlB {€ic, de Am. 4. 16), y(m witl
oblige both of us,
Yterque eOram ezerdtum SdHcuut {Caes, B. G. m. 30), hoik
lead their armies out,
923 The same partitive use of the genitive is found with adTerbs :
as,
VbXnam gentium ? {Plata. Mere. ii. 3. 97), where among the
nations f in whai part <)f the whole world i
£5 consuettidlnis res adductast {Liv^ xxv. 8), the thing was
brought to that degree of habiL
NescIrS uXdemlnl quo ftmentiae prQgressI sitis (Liv, xxviu. 27),
gou seem not to know to what a degree (f madness you have
advanced,
Int£re& Idcl {Ter. Haut. n. 3. 16'), in the meanwhile,
SulplcitLs omnium nQbHium mazilmS Graecis littSris stMuit
{Cic, Brut. 20. 78), Sulpicius of aU our nobles applied hinv-
self m/ost teodoivdg to Greek literature,
924 When a thing is said to belong to a person, it has generally
come from him. Hence th^ owner to whom any thing belongs is
in the genitive> which is then called the possessive genitive : as,
ThSbae pdpiUl R(}m&nl iurS bell! faetae sunt (Liv. xxxiii. 13),
Thebes beoam^e the property of the Eoman people by right of
war,
Pr8p6 Caes&rls hortos {Hor, Sat. i. 9. 18), near Ccesar's park.
Omnia hostium ^nt {Liv, xxi. 11. ad fin.), the whole country
belonged to the enemy,
Hebs Hannlb&lis t5ta Srat {Idv. xxnr. 14), ike eommonaUy
were entirdy at the disposal of Hannibid,*
925 The possessive or partitivef genitive is very common in speak-
ing of a characteristic, office, part, duty!|I : as,
* Instead of tbe genitive of the personal pionouns, the possessive
adjectives are required : as, est tuum uidere, quid agatur {do. p. Miir.
S8. 8«^), * it does belong to you to see what is going on ;' nos nom iumus
{Plaut, Mil. Gl. II. 5. 21), ' we belong to ourselves, we are our own mas-
ters.* So also humanum, alienum, imperatorium, muliebre^ regtutn^ &c,
may be used instead of ibe genitives of the nouns whence they are derived.
f The term * partitive' has been used, because in all these casea the
notion of a part is perceptible* ' To make mistakes is one element in
the character of man.' So again, ' it is one element towards constituting
a perfect judge to' &a
X A term for part, duty,&c. is often exprened : as, mtmor, negotkan^
176 SYNTAX.
Ouiusuls hdmfols est errftrS*, nulllus nisi inslpientls In errSrS
persSuer&rS {Cic. Phil. xii. 2. 6), it is in the character of
every man to make a mistake, of none hut a fool to persist in
a mistake,
S&pientis iadlcls* est, quid lex c5gat, c5git&rS (Cic. p. Cla. 58.
159), it is the dvJty of a wisejvdge to consider what the law
requires,f
926 The genitive of connection is not unfrequent : as,
S5r5ri8 suae ulrum (Cic. in Oat. it. 6. 13), his sister*s hfidfand.
Htliiis &u5s Lentiill (ibid.), the grandfather oftliis Lentttltis.
Diuom p&t^r atque hdmlnum rex ( Viry, A. i. 65), sire of gods
and king of men,
926.1 A genitive is occasionally found where a case in apposition
might have been expected (genitive of de/mition) : as,
Haec uox Ydlupt&tls (Cic. de Fin. ii. 2. 6), this word ^ pleasfwre.*
Aliifl uirtatlbus — contlnentiae, iustltiae, ftdel — tS consill&ta
dignissilmum iudlc&ul (Cic. p. Mur. 10.23), in respect of
other good qualities^ as those of integrity, justicCy honour, I
thought you thoroughly fitted for the considar office,
Ynum gSntLs est infestum nQbis, e5rum quos OlQdl ftLror r&plnis
pftuit (Cic. p. Mil. 2. 3), one class and hut one regards us
with deadly hostility ^ I mean those whom the demon ofCloditu
hasfattmed on rapine.
927 The genitive of the quality or quantity requires an adjective or
participle with it : as,
Ylr et oonslll magni et uirtCLtls (Goes, B. G. ni. 5), a man of
great talent and great courage.
Quattuor iugSrum ftg€r (Liv. ni. 26), a farm offourjugers.
Foss& quindScim pSdum (Caes. B. G. v. 42), a ditch of fifteen
feet (in width).
Frtimentum dierum trlgintft (Liv, vi. 31), thirty days* com.
Hannlb&l, annOrum ferme nSuem (Liv. xxi. I), Hannibal, a
hoy of about nine years.X
qffieiumf proprium, &c ; but it is idle to talk of an ellipiis when no such
noun is expressed.
• See note f p. 176. t See note ♦ p. 175.
X See also the ablative of the quality, § 1010. The use of the geni-
tive in this sense is less common than that of the ablative, and limited to
I
I
QwnsjTB, 177
928 mkt objective genitive is that where the genitiye takes the place
of what would be the object after a verb.* In this case the
English often requires the substitution of another prepositiont for
* of :' as,
Lecti5 IXbrSrum ((7t<?. Aoad. Pr. n. 2.4), the reading of hooks.
OiipXdIt&tes immensae dluXtiftrum, glOriae, ddmlnfttidnls ((7i(7.
de Fin. i, 18.59), boundless desires, as for wealthy for fflortf,
for povfer,
Iniuri& mtUiSrum S&bln&rumt (Liv, i. 13), the wrong done to
the Sabine women.
Which phrases severally correspond to iXbros IggSrS ; diultias, gl5-
riam, ddmlnatiSnem ciipSrd ; mtUiSrSs inillria afflcSrS.
928.1 In the construction of the objective genitive, mel^ tul, sul,
nostn, uestrl are required.
Gr&t& mihi uehSmentSr est mSm5ri& nostil tu& {Cic, ad Fam.
XII. 17), lam exceedingly pleased with your rememJbering %ls.
H&b6tis dticem mSmdrem uestri, oblltum sul {Cic. in Cat. iv.
9. 19), you have a genial who thinks ofyou^ and forgets him-
sdf.
Magn& mei Xm&go ( Yirg, A. iv. 654), a great image of me.
Genitive with Adjectives.
929 Adjectives and participles are sometimes followed by a genitive
of the caus^ in the poets and later writers : as,
Lassus m&rXs {Hor* Od. n. 6. 7), weary of the sea,
Interrltus l6tl {Ov. Met. x. 616), not frightened at death.
Inuictus l&bOrXs (Toe. Aim. i. 20), unconquered by toil.
p^manent qualities ; the ablatiye denotes both permaneat and temporary
conditions.
* Yet such phrases as amor uirttttis, taedium laboris, can scarcely be
considered as objective phrases, seeing that the virtue and the labour are
the causes or origin of the amor and the taedium,
f This objective genitive is far removed from the true meaning of the
case ; hence it is not surprising that our own language does not follow it.
% Sometimes the subjeetive and objective genitives are at once attached
to the same noun : ast HeluHiorum iniuriae populi Bomani {Caes, B. G.
1. 30), ' the wrongs done by the Helvetii to the Roman state;* wheie Hel-
ftetiorum is the subjective, populi the objective genitive.
§ More commonly an ablative of the cause is preferred.
178 STSTAZ.
930 Adjectives or participles which denote removal or separation
may be followed by a genitive in the poets :* as,
OpSrum sdltitiis (-ffbr. Od. ill. 17. 16), ^ loose from work.
Liber l&b5rum (Hor. ad Pis. 212), free from toils.
ScSlgris ptirtis (Hor. Od. i. 22. 1), dear of crime.
y&cuas caedis m&nus {Ov, A. A. i. 6. 42), hands free fro^n blood-
shed.
931 Adjectives offtdness may be followed by a genitive ; as,
D5mus plena 6bri5rum (Cfic. Phil. ii. 27. 67), a house fuU of
drunken men.
Lactis &bundanst ( Vir^. Buc. ii. 20), abounding in milk.
932 Some adjectives, formed from substantives, retain the substan-
tive's power of being attended by a genitive : as,
StildiSsiis SquOrum (Ov. Met. xiv. 321), fond of horses,
Expers 6rtidItionls (Cic. de Or. n. 1.1), unthoui any share of
edttcation.
Oonsors l&borls (Gic. Brut. 1.2), having a common lot of labour.
Securus f&mae (Ov. Trist. i. 1. 49), withotU regard for what the
world may say.
933 Adjectives denoting accusation, yuHt, or innocence, are fol-
lowed by a genitive : as,
B.eiis &uS.rltiae (Cic. p. Flac. 3. 7), charged with avarice.
Sanguinis insons (Ov. Met. xiii. 149), guiltless of blood.
934 Many adjectives from verbs, and participles imperfect, are used
as substantivest, and followed by an objective genitive : as,
Otlpldus uSrltfttls (Oic. de Or. i. 11. 47), eager for truth.
Auidus gl5riae (Oic. p. Marc. 8. 25), greedy of glory.
TSnax prSpdsItl (Hor. Od.'ni. 3. 1), ever dinging to his purpose.
Edax r6rum (Ov. Met. xv. 234), devoitriyig aU things.
EffXciens udlupt&tls (^Cic. de Off. ni. 33. 116), productive of
jpleasure.
* More commonly an ablative with or without ab is preferred.
f This and many such adjectives prefer an ablative of the cause.
X Observe the difference between labor em eontemnens, ' despising the
labour/ and laboris contemnena, ' a despiser of labour ;' the former speak-
ing of the single occasion, the latter of an habitual feeling ; which is the
usual distinction between a participle and an adjective.
OBNITIVE. 179
G^rens nSgdtl {Cic, p. Quinct. 19. 62), enigaged in huginess as a
^merchant.
935 Adjectives, more particularly in the later writers, take a geni-
tive which may be translated by in, in respect to, in poiiU oj* : as,
V&lldtis dpum (Tac. Hist. n. 19), strong in resources.
StrSnuus mlUtiae (Tac. Hist. ni. 42), energetic in war.
Integer ultae (ITor. Od. i. 22,1), pure (in point) of life/
936 Some adjectives, which commonly govern the dative, being
used as masculine or feminine substantives, take a genitive : viz.
SScio-, stLperstlt- afflni-quS.
Flnifmo-, c6gnftt(o-) aequSli-qu8.
PrSpinquo-, simli- consorti-qu8.
P&r-, famli&ri- uIclno-qu8.
Kdcess&rio- contrSfio-quS.
Amlc(o-) et inuId(o-) aemtQo-qu8.t
937 In the same way some neuter adjectives have become substan-
tives, and as such take a genitive : viz.
P&r, prSprium, sImilS and commUnS.
Oenitive with Yebbs.
938 The impersonal verbs of feeling (see § 889), together with the
* An ablative with or without in is preferred by the older and better
writers. Ruddiman (Stallbaum^s ed. ii. 73) has given from Johnson a
list of adjectives found with the genitive in addition to those which fall
under his seven defined classes. In this list 133 are of that kind which
are to be translated by ' in' or ' in point of.' But not one of these is from
Terence, Lucretius, or Cicero, and only five from Plautus ; whereas,
among the later writers, there are twenty-six from Tacitus, and forty-four
from Silius. Again, of the whole 133, not less than fifty-five have the
one word animi. For instance, of the five examples from Plautus, four
have this word, the remaining one having mentis (Trin. ii. 4. 53, and this
evidently corrupt) ; and of sixteen quoted from Apuleius, thirteen have
the same. From these facts we are inclined to infer, that animi is in
truth, what the sense requires, a dative (see § 114), as it certainly }& when
used with the verb excrucior, 8cc. (see § 952), and that the use of the
genitive with this sense in later writers grew out of a false analogy from
animif and words of like form, aided by the ambiguity between the two
cases in the first declension (see § 951). Virg. A. ix. 255. has integer
aeui ; Albinovanus, iii. 5, integer eteuo,
f That many of these are substantives is confirmed by the fact, that
they admit the possessive pronouns : as, inuidos meos. Even their super-
latives are so used as substantives : as, inimicissumum sutim, do. p. Mil.
9. 25 ; meus familiarissumusj Oc. ad Fam. xiii. 35. 1.
180
personal verbe mlsSre* (r.) and mlsfireso-, take a geoitive of the
moTing cause : as,
61 duSnim paenlUbit, addentur doae {Plata. St rr. 1. 45% if
you think tvfo not enough^ two more ahall be added^
Hnnc nostrum copi£nim sappaenltet {Cie, ad Att tii. 14), our
friend here Judfthinke that he hat not force enough
Me tol pftdet (Ter. Ad. iy. 5. 49), lam adorned of you.
Pttdet dedmm hdmlnnmqaS {Liv. UL 19), I feel ashamed hrfore
heaven and before man.*
939 OocasionaUy in the older poete a genitiYB is found with other
personal verbs of feeling : as,
Fastldit mel (Plaut. AuL n. 2. 67), he hoe take^ a didilte to me,
Stiidet tul (quoted by C!^ N. D. m. 29. 72), he is fond of you.
Quae non uSrStur uXn {Afrcat, api K<A* iz. 3), wAo has no
respect for her husbands
lustUiaenS prius mlrerf bellmS l&bOrum ? (Firy, A. xi. 126)
thy justice first should I admire or toils of war t
Kec uStSrum mSmXnl laetoruSf m&lorum (yirg. A. ZL 280),
nor their old griefs remerrJber lor glory in.
NSque ille
SepSflltl dcSris nee longae inuldlt &u6nae {Hor. Sat n. 6. 84),
nor hoarded vetch nor taper oat he grudged,
940 Occasionallj verbs of removal or separation have a genitive of
the whence in old writers and in poetiyt : as,
AbstinCto Irftrum c&lldaequS lixae {Hor, Od. in. 27. 69), abstain
shale thou from wrath and heated fray.
BMnS mollium tandem quSrfilSram {Hor, Od. n. 9. 17), eeaae
at last from plaints unmanly.
Tempus desists pugnae {^irg. A. z. 441), 'tis time to desist
from battle.
* The genitive of the penon with pudet may be either one who has
acted shamefully or one who has been dealt with shameAilly, so that the
tight of him in either case raises the fe^ng of shame.
f The reflective form of these verbs proves that the construction with
an accusative could not orif^inally have belonged to them. The idea of a
Grecism is unnecessary. The genitive is the very case that might have
been expected from the nature of the idea.
t The le^ language here, as in so many caaes^ retained tiaces of the
old construction : as, liberare tutelae (Dig. zzzu. 60. 2).
GsnnTS* 161
WSjxfL signXftc&rS coepit, at quiesoSrent pugnae (Quadriff, ap.
Gell. iz. 13), he began to make a signaL with hie hand that
they ekofM reatfrom battle.
Me 6mniuin i&m labordm lenas (Flout, Bud. i. 4. S7)s Sfou at
last relieve tmo/oU my trouHee.
Nee senndnis Mieb&r tamen {PlauL Bp. u. 2. 55), nor yet was
I cheated out of what they eaid,
Miror morbl purg&tum te ilUiis (Bor, Sat n. 3. 27), I wonder
thou art cleansed of that diaeaae.
941 Some verbs oi fulness, want^ and need, may hsie a parfiti'Mi
genitive (as well as an ablative) : as,
011am den&riQnun implSrS non pdtSs (Cic. ad Fam. iz. 18. 4),
you carmotfUl the pitcher with denaries.
Oompletus iam merc&tOrum carc&r feat {Oic n. Yerr. t. 67. 147),
the prison was at lastftSed with captains of trading shipg,
Non tam artls indigent quam l&borXs (Cie, de Or. I. 34 156),
it is not so much skill they are in need of as indu^ry,
942 The verb p5ti-* (r.) make oneself master has a genitive (as well
as an ablative) : as,
Si explorfitum t)0[H est, poss9 te illlus regnl pStlrl (Cie, ad Fom.
I. 7. 5), if you have ascertained that you reedly can make
yoursdf master of that kingdom.
Hi qui pStiimtur r6rum (Cie, ad Fam. i. 8. 4), ^ioh who are
now masters of every thing,
m
943 Terbs of memory, although they take an accusative of the thing
actually remembered, have a genitivef of that ahovt wluch the
memory is concemedt : as,
MSmlnl Cinnam (Cie. Phil. v. 6. 17), / remember Cinna (L e.
his person),
M^mlnl ulu5rum (€^, de Fin. y. 1.3), I remember or think of
the living,
* If the adjective poti' was ever used as a substatntive, signifying ' the
powerful one, the master,^ as poienii- in fact was, the verb would natu-
rally take the genitive. Tacitus uses a genitive with the reflective verba
apisc- (Ann. vi. 45) and adipisc- (Ann. iii. 55).
f De with the ablative is also very common.
X Hence verbs of ' reminding/ 'making mention,' must have a geni-
tive of the thing brought to mind, unless indeed it be a neuter pronoun.
(See § 909.)
B
182 BTVTAZ.
KSqne tmquam obllmscar noctls illltis (Oic, p. Plane. 42. 101),
nor shall I ever forget {tke occv/rrenoes) of thai night,
YSnit mihi Pl&tOnXs in mentem {Cic, de Fin. y. 1. 2), the thotight
of Plato comes across me.
FlfigltiOrum saOrum rScordftbltiir (Cic, in Pis. 6. 12), he wHl
remember his scandalous proceedings,
Ihilcis rSmXnisdtttir ArgOs ( Firg, A. z. 782), he rememibers sweet
Argi,
944 Verbs* of acciisingy convicting^ acquitting, take a genitivef of
the offence charged : as.
Alteram ambltOs aocnssat (Cic, p. CaeL 7. 16), he accuses another
of bribery,
Pdtestne hSres furti ftgSrS t {de. ad Fam. yii. 22) can an heir
bring cm action for theft f
PrOdltiOnIs eum inslmiil&bant {Com, B. G. yii. 20), they were
inclined to accuse him of treachery,
945 The^^no^ is expressed in the genitiYe in a few phrases : as,
ArcessSrS c&pltls {Cic, p. Deiot. 11. 30), to bring a charge affect-
ing a person^s stattu as a citizen.
Octtlpllt dampnfttust (Cic, n. Verr. iil 12. 29), he was con-
demned to a payment of eightfold,
Dampnfttus l&b5rls (Hbr, Od. n. 14. 19), condemned to toU,
946 With Yerbs of buying j selling^ costing, the price is expressed by
the genitiYCS tantlf, quanti, mXnSris, plUrls ; in all other cases by
an ablatiYC. (See Ablative.)
* For adjectiyes of this claas see § 988.
•^ Or de with the ablative, which in some phraaes is necessary, or at
least more common: as, de tit, de mortbua^ de testamento, Cicero (p.
Clu. 41.114) says de peeuniis repetundis ; Tacitus (Ann. iii. 33) repe^
tundarum without the substantive.
t Also eapite dampnare (Cic. Tusc. i. 22. 50).
§ We have called these genitives, in deference to common opinion,
but they are perhaps old datives; a supposition which will account for the
use of the forms in o (see preceding note), and remove the strange con-
tradiction of idioms which appears in Hor, Sat. ii. 3. 156 :
Quanti emptae ? Paruo. Quanti eigo ? Octussibus.
The phrase too in Catullus (xtii. 17), nee pilifadt uni, will no longer
have a license in the last word. If our theory be right, minoris, pluris^
huius and assis will afford another instance of an anomaly growing out
of a fidse analogy (see § 935).
DATIYX. 163
947 The worth or value is expressed hj the same genitives; and also
bj parol, magnl, mlniiml, mazHml; and plOriiml,* as well as the
following, which generally are strengthened by the addition of a
negative: viz.
HfLitis et assis, flood pUlquS,
Naud nlOiIll, tSnincilquS.t
948 With the verbs rofert and interest are employed tanti, quanti,
parol, magnl, besides the ordinary adverbs of qoantity.
949 Of being so commonly the translation of the genitive, it may
be a useful caotion to observe that the English phrases signifying
t& talk off to think o^, are to be translated with the preposition dS.
Still certior fiSH, to be informed, often takes a genitive.
DATIVlLt
950 The dative case answers to the qoestion where? in or near
what place ? and to the time when f Hence its place is often
sopplied by such words as Xn or cum with the ablative, or by the
ablative alone, seeing that the ablative is often only another form
of the dative.
951 At a town or in a small island is expressed by the dative ; but
«
in the o (or second) declension the old dative in { is veiy generally
preferred : as,
B5mae {Liv, xxi. 6), at Roma (or /2ome) /
Athdnis {Oic. de Sen. 13. 43), at Athenae (or Athens) ;
T&rentlf (Cic. de Sen. 12.39), at Tarentum;
* Ablatiyes however are occasionally found, even in Cicero : as, in
II. Yerr. it. 7. 13, lata permagno aestumas; de F^n. it. 23. 62, non nihilo
aettumandum. Festus has bos centusHbus^ ouis dectusibus aestmaretwr ;
and atae carum est is an old phrase.
i* We have not added p^im, because the phrase neque quidquam penti
habebat is equiyalent to ne^ue quidquatn pendebat, the word pensi being,
according to the common idiom, attached to the neuter pronoun (§ 922).
Aequi boni comulere, * to take in good part,* has never, so far as the writer
kiiows, been satisfactorily explained.
t As the order of the paragraphs under this head has been much
altered, the numbers of the sections will not correspond with those of the
preTious edition.
§ In the phrase habitat Mileti {Ter. Ad. it. 5. 20) Donatus saw no
genitive case ; he calls it aditerbiutn locale* The dative of nouns in o
ended at one time, like the Greek oikoi, \oytp &c, in the diphthong oi,
of which the old dative qtioi is an example ; and from this diphthong
arose the two forms of the case, seen in nttllo and nullu
IM nvTAX.
Tjfr5 {Virg. A. nr. 36), a* ^^;
LioUiiO (Z»v. T. 52), (3tf Zavmtum/
Piite^flls {(He, ad Att xtL 14. 1), at Pvteoli;
Tibttrt* (Oie. ad Att. xri. 3. 1), at TUmr (or TVtwi*) /
Ottrlbiis {Liv. i. 18), at Oures;
Ith&cae (Cu;. de Off. dl 28. 97), tn Ithaea ;
Lemmt (Ter, Ph. it. 3. 75), in Lemnos;
Ksffth&f^* N5uae (Epii. of Iav» zzYxu.^for 00 the Ms& ), at
Iffw Carikage^X
952 The dative signifying where? maintained itself in oertain
words in spite of the inareasing tendency to express this idea by
In and an ablativa Bach datives are : hiimi on the gr<mnd^ terrae
{Vvrg, A. zi. 87) on the gnmnd^ dSmI at heme^ rurl in the wwntry
(in poetiy also rOr^), f5ns wit of doore^ AchSruntI (Plaut. Oapt.
m, 5. 31) in Acheron or Tartartu^ cSmXtils at the dectton, lildls
at the games^ L&tlnis (so. f^rils) at the Latin festival^ gl&di&t5-
rlbtls at the gladiatorial exhibition^ &nlml in the mind (pi. &nl-
mis).
953 The so-called adverbs in bi and t , which denote where, as, WA
where, ibi there, <&o. (§ 366, coL 2), are all datives in origin.
954 The time when is put in the dative in oertain words : as,
hSiI (piUo hSrS) yesterday, m&nl [or m&nS) in the morning^ ues-
pSiI (or uespSrS) in the evenifig, loci in the daylight, die quinti
(or quinte) on the fifth day (see O^, z. 24), diS pristXnl the day
before, did crastlnX tomorrow, Id&us martils on the ides (or 15th)
of March, belli in war, mllitiae on military service, tlbi whexi,
Ibi then, Ao,
955 Adjectives which denote nearness take a dative : as,
* The poets take the liberty of Bhortening such fonns as Tibttrt to
Tiburi (see § 980).
f See note §, p. 183.
X If the word urb- or oppido- be expressed, the preposition in must
be used, as, Milites Albae consHterunt in urbe munita {(He. Phil. it. 2. 6),
(Httis RomanM NeapoH In eeleberrume oppido cum mitella uidimtu {Cic,
p. Rab. Poet 10. 26). ' In a country* or 'in a laige island* is commonly
expressed by in with the ablative ; yet there are passages where the dadve
is found, especially in the poets, as Cretae {Vir§. A. iii. 162), Libyae
(Virg» A. i?. 36), and late prose writers, as the Pseudo-Nepos, Cher-
soneti (Milt. 2), Cypri (Chabr. 3). The passage in CUc, R. P. iii. 9. 14
is not an example, for there Graeeiac, as Madvig has pointed out« is a
genitive in connection with delubra.
DATIYS. 185
Belgae proidml sunt Genn&nls (Cdes. B. G. l 1), the Bdgae are
nearest to the Oermans,
Heu quam ulclna est ultlm& terrft mihi {Ov» Trist. ni. 4. 52),
tdasy how near is the end of the world to me,
Tibi gSnSrS prdpinqui {Sal, Jug. 10), those near akin to you.
d56 Verbs which denote nearness take a dative : as,
P&r6rS* u51unt&ti archltecti (Cic, N. D. l 8. 19), to wait upon
the win of the architect,
OluXt&tSs &mlclti& Oaes&rl coucIli&rS {Com, B. 0. m. 66) y to
unite states in friendship with Cheaar,
Si pSpiQus BOmftnus foedSrS iungfiretur r6gl {Liv, zxyi. 24.
13), if the people of Rome shovld he united to the king hy
treaty*
Ourru iungit Hftlaesiis ^uQs {Virg, A. yii. 724), to his car
Halaeso yokes the steeds,
NescXt ^uo haerSrSt (JSor, Od. in. 24. 54), he knows not how
to ding to steed,
Forti miscSbat mell& F&lem5 {Hor. Sat. n. 4. 24), with strong
Fcdemian he would honey mix.
Luctantem Ic&riis fluctibtLs {Hor, Od. 1. 1. 15), wrestling with
Icarian waves.
Sslus tlbl certSt Amyntas ( Virg. Buc. 5. 8), let Amyntas alone
contend unth thee,
957 Adjectives compounded with prepositions of rest take a dative
dependent upon that preposition : as,
Qui mihi conscitls ess6 s5l6s (Cic, ad Att. L 18. 1), you who are
wont to share my secrets with me,
Mihi conscius sum (Cic. Tusc. n. 4. 10), I share the knowledge
with mysdf (alone)— or I am conscious.
£iu8 mors consentftne& ultae fuit (Cic. Phil. ix. 7. 15), his
death was in agreement with his life.
OoenisquS trlbus iam pem& stLperstes (Mart. z. 48. 17), and a
ham that had survived three dinners.
• That ' to be present,' * to wait upon,' rather than • to obey,' is the
trae meaning of this verb, to say nothing of other evidence, is shown by
the use of the verb appare- with such a dative as magistraHbuSf and by
the noun apparitor- * an officer in waiting.'
f This use of the dative with many of these verbs is limited to the
poets : Cicero would rather have said haerere in equo, miseere cum
FalemOy luetari cumjtuctibutf eertare tecum.
b2
166 miVAZ.
958 Verbs compounded with pMpositions of red take a dative*
dependent upon that preposition.
Quern qu6ndam loni I6no custodem &ddidit {Plcmt. Aul. HL
6. 20)y whom Juno of yore set as a watch o'er lo.
Hi scrlbendo affu6runt {Cie. ad Fam. Tin. 8. 6), i^ following
were present eU the registration,
ladlces slbi constftr^ debuSrunt (Ci^. p. Olu. 22. 60), the jury
ought to have been consistent with themsehes,
Ta meo inf^lld errSn sOliis ill&oriimastl (2^. xl. £6), you
alone have wept over my unfortunate mistake.
OamptLs interiftcens Tlb^ ac moei^us ROm&nls (Idv. xxi.
30), the plain that lies between the Tiber and the waUs of
Piidor n5n {(best 5rS,ti5nI (Cic. de Or. i. 26. 122), modesty does
not stand in the way of a speech^ or is not pr^udicial to it,
OmnlbtLs 6ius consflils obstXtl {Cic. in Oat. in. 7), aU his plans
I have thwarted.
Qui classlbus praeSrant {Goes, B. 0. in. 25), those who were in
command of the fleets.
HSmXnes bestiis praestant {Oic, de Iny. i. 4. 6), men stand before
(or excd) beasts.
Magnlttidlne &nlml potest rSpugnftrl fortilnae ((Xc. de Fin. iy.
7. 17), unth magnanimity a battle may be maintain^ against
fortune.
Sdperfuit p&trl (Liv. L 34), he murvived his father,
959 In the examples so far quoted the verbs are of a static cha-
racter ; but even after verbs of motion^ when the resultmg position
rather than the movement to attain it is before the mind, the
dative is still used (see § 1336 Jt) : as,
AntSttilissem u51unt&tem tuam comm5d5 me5 (Cic ad Fam. v.
20. 1), / should have preferred yowr wishes to my own advan-
tage.
t
* Thus the Latin here agrees with other languages in attaching a
datiye to prepositions of rest. So we have in the old language posHbi
and interibi^ the latter of which was eventually comipted to inter-im.
So too in postguamf antequam &c., the quam is probably a dative in
origin rather than an accusative, as is admittedly the case in the parallel
Ibrms of the Oerman naoh-dem Ac It is thus too that we find a dative
in auro contra^ § 1320 k.
ifATIYI. 187
GontiOnantl drcumfdndeb&tnr mullSttldo (Liv, zxii. 14), as
he went on haranguvng^ a fne^ kept pouring round him,
YSnienti occurrlt^ morbo (Pers. in. 64), hcuten to meet the com-
ing disease.
Ora ipsa ^tUis prGpSnYUS (Cie, p. Best. 7. 17), place their very
faces before yoiwr eyes.
Bum circomuentG filiO (subufinit, mterflclttbr {Cau. B. G. t.
35), as he ad/wmoes to support his son v>ho was surrounded^
heis killed,
An&tum 5u& galllnis saep^ suppOnlmiis {Cie, N. D. n, 48. 124),
we often put ducks' eggs under hens,*
960 Even simple yerbs at times take a dative to express the where :
Ihmmdrlgl custSdes pOnlt ut qiiae &gat sdrS possit (Oaes, B. G.
L 20), he places men about the person of Ihtmnorix to watch
him^ that he nvdy know what he is doing,
Oustos fromentO publico est ptfslttts (Oic, p. Flac 19. 45), he
was set as serUind over the puilic com,
Jinem 5r&ti5nl f&c6rg (Oic, n. Terr. n. 48. 118), to set a limit to
a speech,
961 Adjectives, being in their very nature static, express the rela-
tion to an object by a dative : as,
GolUs aduersiis hulc et contr&riiis (Caes. B. G. IL 18), a hiU
facing and opposite to this,
Sita Antlc^ est laeuft parts slnum Odrinthi&cum intrantlbtis
(Liv. XXVI. 26), Anticyra lies on the left as you enter the bay
of Corinth,
Aptum est tempSri et persOnae (Oic. Or. 22. 74), it is adapted
to the time and to the person,
Yerbum L&tlnum par Graec5 (Oic. de Fin. n. 4. 13), a Latin
word equal in force to the Greek one.
Fllhis p&trl sXmllXs (dc, de Fin. y. 5. 12), a son like his father.
Nihil tarn dissImXl^ quam Cott& SulpIciO (Oic. Brut 56. 204),
there is nothing so unlike as Ootta to Sulpicius,
Lluiiis Ennio aequfilis fuit (Oic, Brat. 18.73), Livius was of the
same age inth Ennius,
* Bmt some verbB so compounded, especially with at/, are occasionally
regarded as transitive yerbs, taking an accusative : as, allabitur awes
(Vvrg, A. ix. 474), oum Tiberi genua aduolueretur (Toe, Aim. l 13).
188 8THTAX.
QuM illl caussae maxUme est ftUSnuin {Cic, p. Caec. 9. 24),
'what is mast unfavoraJUefor that side.
Is d^or commtLnis uObis mOcum est (Cic. de Prov. Cons. 1. 2),
indignalian at this is common to you with me,
Eius c&put I5ul B&crum estS {Liv. m. 55), that mavCs head shaU
be devoted to Jupiter.
Id aer5 mlUtlbus fuit pergr&tmn (Goes. B. 0. l. 86), this indeed
iffos most acceptable to the soldiers.
WkoHnSa omnlbiis Iniqnl (Oic. p. Plane. 16. 40), men unfriencRy
^ ^ to every one.
Yirtus fructuOsa filils, ipSI l&bOriOsa aut pSilciQosa aut oeite
gr&tTiIt& (Cic. de Or. ii. 85. 346), energy fvU of fruit for others^
f^ hvmsdffvJH of suffering or danger^ or at best vnthout re-
ward,
NSque &de5 tibi ullis ulta asset me& (Liv. zl. 9), nor would
my life have been so cheap in yov/r eyes,
N^uftquam specie aestlimantlbus p&rSs (Liv. yii. 10), hy no
m/eans equal in the eyes of those who judged of them from out-
ward appearance,
HSmeros Sceptr& pStltiis dlidem ftliis* sSpltii quietest {Lucr.
ni. 1038), ^en Homer ^ who won our sceptre^ was drugged by
the same deep {of death) with others.
962 Similarlj adverbs may have a dative of relation : as,
OonuSnienter n&turae uluSrS {Cic. de Off. m. 3. 13), to live agree-
ably to nature.
Qnam sXbi constanter dicat, non l&bOrat (Cic. Tusc. y. 9. 26),
how far he talks consistently wUh himsdf^ he heeds not.
Impr5bo et stulto et InertI nemXnl bSne essS potest {Cic. Parad.
2. 19), with a villain or a fool or a duggard things cannot be
wdl,
963 Statio verbs express their relation to an object by a dative : as,
Hoc tlnum Oaes&il dsfuit {(joes. B. G. iv. 26), this one thing was
wanting to Caesar,
Qui diUgebant hunc, illl f&u6bant {flic, p. Bosc. Com. 10. 29),
those who esteefmed this man wished wdl to the other.
AeduOrum cluXt&tl praeclpue indulsSrat (Caes, B. G. l 10), he
had been particularly i/ndndgent to the state of the AedwL
I
I
* This coDBtraction occuxb onlj in poeteu i
DAVXTS. 189
n Smleis non tSmSre sSleG {Cie. PfaiL ym. 6, 16X lean not
ioofU mth light cause to he angry mthfriends^
Kull& fuit duXtas quin Oaes&rl pftrOret (Com. B. 0. m. 81),
there was not a single ttate hut woe obedient to Caeear, or readiy
to obey hie orders.
Hoc omnibus p&tet {Cic, p. Mur. 13. 28), this is open to aU.
Kon plftcet AntOniO oonstLlfttus meiiB, at pl&ouit P. SerolliO
(Oie. Phil. n. 5. 12), my consulship does notjmdfawyur vM
Antony f truey yet it found favour unth PuUius ServUius,
Qui nee sibi nSc altSrI prOsunt {Oic, de Off. ii. 10. 36), men who
are useful neither to themselves nor to their neighbour.
Sio nostSr hie rector stiiduSrit leglbos cognoscendls (Cie, R. P.
Y. 3), so let this ruler of ofurs first devote himsdfto the wbudy
of the laws,
Adttlescentx nihil est quod susoenseam (TVr. Ph. n. 3. 14), wiffi,
the yowng man I have no reason to he offended.
Quod tibi lubfit, id mihi Inbet (Plaut Most, l 3. 136), what
pleases you, that pleases me.
C&t5nl llcuit TusctLll 86 d6lect&r6 (Cie, B. P. 1. 1), it was per-
mitted to Cato to amuse hiansdf at Tusculum,
d64 In the older writers d^t admitted a dative of the person,
unless an infinitive followed the verb ; but in other writers an
accusative of the person is alone admissible.
Istuc facinus, qu6d tu insLmulas, n6stro generi n6n deoet
(Plaut, Am. II. 2. 188), an act, such as that you con^tlain
of, would not he becoming in our family.
965 Some verbs compounded with dls, which often require an Eng-
lish translation hy from, and in Latin are usually accompanied by
the prepositions ftb or intSr or cum, occasionally in the poets take
a dative* : as,
Longd me& discrSp&t istis Et uox et rfttiO {ffor. Sat. i. 6. 92),
my words, my views are wholly out of harmAmy with them,
PSd6 certo Biffert sermOnI {Hor. Sat. i. 4.48),^ the fused
rhythm alone from prose it differs.
Quantum Hj^p&nis dissXdSt Eridftno {Prop, L 12. 4), far as the
Mypanisfrom the JSridanut is distant,
* Thii conBtruction is like that of the dative in connectioii with such
adjectivM as diseimiH-, dispart.
190 BTVTAX.
Scurrae dist&t ftmlcus (Hor, Ep. i. 18.4)^/rom the hiffoGn far
different thefriend»
966 The yerb 6s- he stands out from among other static verbs by its
frequent use of a dative of the person to denote relationship, con-
nection of office and ownership.
Nattek tu iUi p&ter es {Ter, Ad. i. 2. 46), hy nature you are Ms
father,
Mihi quaest5r impSr&tOrl fuSrat {Cic, post red. in S. 4. 35), he
had been my qvaestor when I was commander-in-chief.
Quibtis dpes nullae sunt {Sal, Cat. 37), those wJu> have no pro-
perty,
967 From this idea of ' having' comes the use of Ss- with a dative
of the person in connection with a perfect participle and a gerun-
dive ; a use which was extended to phrases of apposition where
the verb 6s- is no longer expressed.
Quicquid mihi susceptumst {Cic, p. leg. Man. 24. 71), whatever 2
have undertakeriy — ^less accurately, whatever has been under-
taken by me,
LSgendus mihi saepiiis est Ofttd m&iSr {Cfic. ad Att. xiv. 21),
I have to read again and again the* de Senectvte^^ — ^less ac-
curately, it must be read by 7ne, or / must read it,
967. 1 Participles often become virtually adjectives, and as such are
entitled to a dative of relation : as,
Pinn&s in littSrS pandunt Dllectae ThStldi alcySnSs {Virg. G.
I. 399), their feathers on the beach spread out the kingfishers
to Thetis dear,
NOtiis mihi nOmlnS tantum {Bbr, Sat. i. 9. 3), knovm to me by
name alone,
968 It is rare, even in the poets, for a dative to be used of the
agent with imperfect tenses of a passive. Some passages in prose
writers, which seem to £edl under this head, admit of a different
explanation.
Carmln& quae scilbunttLr &quae p5t9ribiis (ffor, Ep. i. 19. 3),
verses that are written in the realm of water-drinkers,
Scilberis YftriS fortXs (Hor. Od. i. 6. 1), thy bravery shall be told
in Varius'page,
Ho6 in l&bOrlbus uluentl nOn intellSgltiir {Cic. de Sen. 11.38),
this to one living immersed in labour is rwt perceptible.
DAVIYE. 191
Barb&riis hlc ggS sum, quiS nOn intell6g«r ulli {Ov. Trist, v.
10. 35), a barbarian here am I^for to no one am I intelligible.
969 Eyen substantiyes take a datiye to denote the object referred
to: as,
E bestianim corp^rlbus mult& rSmSdi& morbls et uolnSrn)ii8
SU^tmiis (Cic, N. D. n. 64. 161), from the bodies of beasts we
sdect many remedies for diseases and wounds,
KSque mihi ex ctdusquam altltudlne ant praesldift pSrlctUlB aut
adiiimenta hdnOrlbus quaerS {Cic, p. leg. Man. 24. 70), nor
do I seek in the exalted condition of any one whatever either
protection against danger ^ or aid to political adn>ancement,
T^Iment& g&leis mlUtSs ex ulmMbus ^Sr8 iiibet (Caes, B. C.
in. 62), he bids the soldiers make coverings for their helmets
of the osiers,
EquXtSitam au:dliO Oaes&il mlsSrant (Caes. B. G. i. 18), they
had sent a body of cavalry as an aid to Caesar,
«
970 Where an habitual state of things is expressed, a datiye of the
person is sometimes used to define those with whom the habit
preyails: as,
Barb&rls ex fortunS. pendet fidSs {Idv, xxyiii. 17), vnth bar-'
barians fidelity depends upon fortune.
Hdnest& b5nis uMs, non occulta quaerunttir (Cic. de Off. in.
9. 38), rdth good men the honoural>le, not the mysterious^ is
the object sought,
Etiam s&pient^us ciipldo glOriae nduisslma exuXttLr {Tac, Hist.
ly. 6), even among the wise the love of glory is the last thing
discarded,
971 Terbs of habitual action may in one sense be regarded as static,
and so haye a datiye of the person to whom the habitual action
refers. Such yerbs are often reflectiyes.
Appius mihi blandlttir (Cic, ad Q. Fr. n. 12. 2), Appius performs
the part of the * Uandus horiM* to Tne, — is all smoothness to m£,
NS quid pars altSr& gratlAc9jl pSptUO EQm3,nO* posset (Liv,
XXI. 9) y for fear that the other party shoiUd do the obliging to
* Instead of populo Romano the Mss. have pro Romania^ which,
though nonsense, is retained in all the editions. Populo Romano was
shortened as usual to 'p-ro'^ and then mistaken for pro^ which of course
needed a noun, and to supply this need Romania was added.
18S SXBXAX.
the Roman people^ u e. ^unM wacrifiee any matter to oSltffe
Rome,
Oaes&rl supplXcftbo (Oic. ad Fam* ti. 14. 3), IwUl'play ike pari
of suppliant to Caesar,
Alii glOriae seroiunt^ &lil p^oniae {Oic Tusc y. 3. 9), eotM are
slaves to ylory, some to money,
972 Where an action ia dome to part of ihe bodj, the party suffer-
ing ifl expressed by the datxre (thoogh the Bngliah hxnguage pre-
fian a possessive pronoun or possesnlTe ease) : as,
Ooi ^0 iam lingn&m praecidam atque 6calos ecfodi&m domi
(Plata, Aul. n. 2.12), Ivnll at onee out off her tongue, and
dig her eyes out here in ike house,
Ta9 ulro SciUl dSlent {Ter. Ph. t. 8. M), your husband's eyes
ache.
Quid uis tibi dan in manum ? {Ter, 1%. iy. 3^ 29) how muck
do you wish paid down into your hand f
Tibi SIC& d8 m&nXbiis extortast {Cic, Oat. i. 6. 16)^ tha dagger
was wrested out of your hands.
973 Thus verbs alike of giving and taking away have a dative of
the person ; but it must not be inferred from this thai either
motion to or motion from is really expressed by the dative.
DSdi ad t8 llbert5 tu9 littSrfts {Cie. ad Att. vi. 3. 1), I gaee a
letter to yourfreedman (to he ddivered) to you.
Reddidit mihi littSr&s {Cic, ad Att. v. 21), ke ddivered the letter
to me,
Ingfos* eiil lumSn ftdemptum (Vvrg. A. m. 656), from whom a
monstrotu eye had been taken away.
Id tdtum MpSr« nobis cSnfttiiBt (Ok^ in EolL n. 7. 19), ojf £Aw
he has endeavoured to tearfivm you,
974 Verbs of trusting, for to trust is to put a thing into a personals
handsfy have a dative of the person in whom the trust is placed :
as,
* That ingens is the epithet of lumen is shown partly by the same
epithet having been given to lumen in v. 636, telo lumen ierehramus acuta
Ingens ; partly by V irgiPs habit of making the relative in this part of his
▼ene an enclitic attached to the preceding word. See § 1463 note. I
had to thank a friend and then colleague for the suggestion.
f Indeed cre-dot cre-didif ore^ditum, and the old subjunctive cre-^wmf
evidently belong to a compound of do,.
DATITIU 193
/ Sd suKque omnia ftUenisstLmis or6dld6nmt {Can. B. G. vi. 31),
th£y trusted themselves and all their property to perfect strarv'
gets,
Cred6ii tibi hoc ? {Ter, And. m. 2. 17) am I to believe this thai
you tell me F
Mihi cr6d6 (Cic. in Cat. i. 3. 6), take my word for it.
Qui slbX ftdit* (Hor. Ep. i. 19. 22), who in himadf confides.
Multlttldo hostium nulll rel praeterquam nttmM fiettt* (Liv.
Yi. 13), the mob constituting the enemy^s force, trusting to
nothing but their numbers.
975 Some verbs oi giving are used with a dative of the person in
the sense of doing something out of regard to that person, par-
ticularly in cases of forgiveness or concession : as,
Praetdrlt& fr&trl conddnat {Caes. B. G. L 20), the past doings
{of Dumnorix) he forgives out of regard to his brother (Divi-
tiacus).
PeccS.t& llbSrum p&rentum mXsSrIoordiae concessSrunt {Cic. p.
Clu. 69. 195), they have passed over the offences of sons otU of
pity to their parents,
Tu inlmldtias relpubllcae dOnastI {Cic. ad Fam. v. 4), you have
dropped your enmities out of regard to the public wdfare^
MSmdriam sXmult&tum p&triae rSmittXtf {JAv, ix. 38), he for-
gets his private quarrds oui of regard to his country*
Quantum consuStudXnl ftoaequS dandum sit {Cic. Tusc. i. 45«
109), how far we ought to make allowance for custom and what
the world may say.
976 Many verbs which denote an act done in the presence of or in
reference to another concerned therein, take a dative of the per-
son, in addition to the accusative of the thing, especially verbs of
showing and telling.
AltSrI monstrant uiam {Enn. ap. Cic. de Div. i. 68. 132)^ they
show a fdlow-creature the way,
• See also § 1002.
f Literally ' lets go back,* ' sends back.* The idea of punishment in
the Latin language generally takes the form of a fine. The offender dat^
pendit, soluit poenam, * pays the fine ;* the injured party sumUj exigit
poenam, * takes, exacts the fine;' or should any common friend succeed
in assuaging his anger, then the offended party remittit poenam inierces-
<ort, * returns the fine to the interceding party,' that the offender receiying
it from him may know to whose kind ofilices he is indebted.
S
194 STVTAZ.
Haec hSrO dicam (Plata. Am. 1. 1. 304), aU this I will tdl {to)
my master,
Yirgo nupsit MStellS {Cic. de Biv. i. 46.104), the maiden took
tlie vei^ to MeteUtu, i. e. married him.
977 This dative of the person often denotes for his advantage or on
his account, and is translated hy for : as,
Sic uos non uQbis mellXfic&tIs ftpes (Vir^, in uita), so ye toOy
bees J not for yowrsdves are honey-makers,
Non solum nobis diuXtes essS udlUmus, sed llb^ris, prSpinquls,
&mlcis, maxiimequS reXpubllcae {Cic. deOff. m. 15. 63), it is
not merdyfor ov/rsdves we wish to he rich, but for our children^
our rdations, ourfrieTids^ and above all our country.
Til fors quid me fiat parui p^ndis, dum ill! c6nsulas {Ter. Haut.
IV. 3. 37), you perhaps care little what becomes of me, so you
provide for him,
Tlbi Umul {Ter. Haut. m. 2. 20), Ivhis alarmed for you, or on
your account,
MSliiis el c&uerS u01o quam ipse lUiis s^et {Oic. ad Fam. m.
1.3),/ am determined to take better security for him than he
himsdf is tpontfor others,
Nee tet tu& ftinSr& milter Pr^SduxI pressiue ^iilGs aut uolnSr&
Iftui (Virg. A. ix. 486), nor for thee led thine own mother
forth the funeral pomp, or dosed thine eyes, or bathed thy
wounds,
978 The dative of the personal pronouns more particularly, is used
to denote an interest of the party (datiutts ethicus), and often
ironicaUy. In this case much latitude of translation is requisite
to give the shade of meaning : as,
Tongllium mihi eduxit {Cic. in Oat n. 2. 4), TmgUius he has
done me the favour to take out {of Rome) with him.
At tibi rSpentS uSnlt ad me O&nlnitLs {Cic. ad Fam. ix. 2. 1),
hU i^hai thimk yov) aU at once there comes to my house your
friend Caninius,
* The flame-coloured yell, flammeolum^ used in the ceremony of
marriage.
t 7"^ a dative, and tua a nominatiye, the two pronouns being thrown
together for the sake of emphasis. Another instance of /« as a dative is
seen in Ter. Haut ?. 2. 34, te indulgebant. See also p. 197, note f.
DATIYEi lOdi
Haeo uobis istOrum inlUti& fait {Liv, zz. 60), iMs was tfie mUi-
tary service you have to thank your petitioners for,
979 A dative and accusatiye seem to be rivals with each other in
the construction of some verbs. The cases of this nature ML for
the most part into two classes : a, those of older writers, who,
adhering to the original meaning of a verb, employ a dative, which
in later writers gives place to an accusative ; or the two construe-'
tions may even coexist with a slight difference of meaning in the
verb : b, those where, the verb being entitled originally to a dative
of the person and accusative of the thing, the thing is in a man-
ner personified, and so put in the dative.
AdtLla-il, ' to wag the tail at,' hence ^ to wheedle*, &wn on.'
PStenti &dtll&tiis est {Nep, in Attico, 25), he favmed on the
potoerfid man.
Praesentlbiis &dtl}andG (Liv. zxzvi. 7.4), hy fawning on those
present.'f
AemtLla-rl, *to play the rival,* hence * to rival, envy.*
His aemtU&mur, qui ea h&bent, quae n5s h&bSrS ctLplmtLs (Cfic.
Tusc. I. 19. 44), toe envy those who possess what we are eagef
topossess.X
Ignosc-SrS, literally * to forget'§ , and hence * to forgive,' strictly
with ace. of offence forgiven, dat. of person.
Yt eis delicta ign6scas (Plata, Bacch. v. 2. 68), that you may
forgive tkem thevr shortcomings.
Hoc ignoscant di immortales uSlim p^ptUo EQm&nO (Cic. Phil.
I. 6. 13), /or this I would pray the immortal gods to forgive
the RoTMin people,
Inuide-r8, * to regard with an evil eye,' hence * to envy, grudge ;'
originally it would appear with an ace. of the thing envied and a
dat. of the owner.
* Observe that the German verb wedeUn means * to wag the tail.'
f So again plebi a., Liv. iii. 69. In Cie. in Pis. 41. 99, omnibua a, ia
justly preferred by Lambinus. But in later writers the ace. is used : as,
canes far em a., Col. tii. 12 ; principem^ Tac, Hist. i. 32, aut gitem
€i/mm, Ann. XYi. 19 ; (^omtnum, Sen. de Ira, ii. 31. Hence in Quints
IX. 3, huio non huno adulari iam dicitur, the words huio and huno should
be transposed.
X But Pindarum ae.fffor, Od. it. 2. 1 ; uirttUes^ Ttic. Agr. 15 ; uinum^
P/m. XIV. 2.4.
§ * To un-know,' if we had the word, would best suit.
196 SYNTAX.
lamprldem nobis caeli t6 r@gi&, Caesar, InuIdSt ( Yirg, G. i. 503),
Ifmg, lonff has the palace of the sky envied us thy preserice,
Caesar,
Afrlcae s51o Sleum et ulnum N&tura inuldit {Plin» xy. 2. 3),
nature grudged the soil of Africa oil and wine,*
M9dl<^rl and m6de-n, literally 'to act the physician,' hence
' to cure, heal, remedy,' with a dat. of the patient or ace. of the
disease.
Ego possum in h&o re medicari mihi (Ter, And. y. 4. 41), in
this matter Icawplay the part of physician to mysdf; — but
Ego istum 16pide medicab6rt metum {Plaut. Most n. 1.40),
I will cure that fear nicely.
Dies stultis qu^uS m^erl sdlet {Cic. ad Fam. yil 28. 3), Htm
is wont to cure even fools; — ^but
Elusmodi . . . c^piditlktes, Quas qu4m res aduorsa^ sient, paul6
mederi p6s8is (Ter, Ph. y. 4. 2), desires of sfuch a hind that
when things go wrong j you can cure them at little cost.
M5d5rS.-n, 'to act as a limit or check (to)', hence 'to cheeky
moderate,' and so generally ' to govern, control.'
N6n uinum hominibiis moderari, s^d uino homines &8Solent
{Plaut. True. iy. 3. 57), it is not the hotde for the most part
that has control over the man, httt the rruzn that has control^
over the bottle; — so at least the unfairly abused bottle would
say if it could speak.
MddSr&ri St &nlmo St 5r3.tionI quum sis Irattis, est non mSdiO-*
cils ingSnl (Oic. ad Q. Fr. 1. 1. 13. 38), to check both one*s
fedings and ona^s words when one is angry, is indeed the act
of no ordinary character. I
Parc-SrS, 'to save, to spare,' originally with ace. of the thing
and dat. of the person for whom.
Argenti atque auil mSm5ras quae mult& t&Ienta Gn9.tis parcS
* Thus i.florem liberum {=liberorum) in Att. ap. Gic. Tusc. iii. 9.20 ;
i. nobis naturatn (as an instructress), Cio, Tusc. iii. 2. 3, if the text be sound.
As the evil eye might also be directed upon the owner himself, an ace.
would not have been out of place ; and so we have an explanation of the
forms inuideor * I am envied,* Hot, Ep. ii. 3. 56, and the participles in-
uiso- ' envied,* inuidendo- * enviable.*
t Some good Mss. with Ritschl medicabo, .
X In the general sense of 'governing* an ace. is common in Cicero ; but
even in the sense of checking* an ace. is found in later writers, as Tac. and
Suet
DATIYl. 197
tola {Virff, A. x. 532), the sUver, ayt anigM of wMch thou
9peaJcetty oUlfor ^y children save.
Saftd6-r6, literallj ' to sweeten'*, hence ^ to recommend, give
advice,' with ace. of thing recommended, dat. of person to whom
the advice is given.t
Qa6d tibi su&deam, so&deam me6 patri {PlaiU, Capt. n. 1. 40),
any thing 1 wovld reconrniend to you, Iwndd recommend to
my own father.
TempSr&-r0,]; ' to act as a limit, to set bounds (to)', hence
' to check, spare,' and so ' to regolate, govern, mix in due propor-
tion ;' originallj, it would seem, only with a dat.
Linguae tempera {PUmL Bud. iv. 7. 28), 9et limits to your
tongue,
N^ue sibi homines fSros tempSr&tflrOs existlm&bat quin &c.
(CSzef. B. G. I. 33), nor did he think that^ savages as they
were J they toonld ketp a check upon thefnsdves so as not dkc,
Eum sXbi crSdls & mend&ciO tempSr&turum (Auct. ad Her. nr.
8. 25), this man you sv.ppo9e wiU rtf rain from a lie.
Si culquam ulla in re unquam tempSr&uSrit, ut uos quSque ei
tempSr&rStXs (Oic. n. Yerr. n. 6. 17), that if he ever spared
any one in any thing , you also should -spare him, §
980 Of the extension of the dative from the person to the thing
the following are examples :
Ignoscas u61im huic festln&tioni {Oic, ad Fam. y. 12. 1), pray
forgive my present haste.
* From suaui-' * sweet,' Greek oSv-. Advice is often represented
under the idea of medicine, wholesome, jet bitter and so needing some
sweet to disguise it, as in Ltusr. i. 936, sed ueluti pueris &c.
f In quit te pernuuit {Enn, ap. Serr. ad Aen. x. 10) /« is a dative.
But an ace. of the person was eventually used, as tuforem eius suasi, ApuL
Met. IX. p. 288. Hence in the passive, animus persuasus uidfitur esse^
Auct ad Her. i. 6 ; persuasus erit^ Ov. A. A. iii. 679 ; persuasa est,
Phaedr. i. 8.
X Perhaps originally, like 'moder<t-ri, a reflective verb. In the sense
of * regulate, mix in due proportion,' an ace. was soon used : as, rempulh
licam, Cic. de Div. i. 43. 96 ; acuta cum grauibus, Cic, R. P. vi. 18 ; trof,
Vlrg. A. I. 61.
§ That imita^ri * to make oneself like (to)% and sequ-i ' to attach
oneself (to)', must in some olden times have had a dative, seems to fol-
low from their reflective form, as well as from the meaning. Thus the
Greek iiceffOcu and Germ, folg-en always take a dat.
S2
Id8 8TVTAZ.
HSnOri inulderant meO {Cic in Bull. IL ST.IOS), iheif looked
with envy on the office I held.
Com c&pltl mSdSil debeO, rSdiiuiam ctir5 (Cic. p. Rose. Am.
44. 128), when I ought to he doctoring the head^ lam dressing
an agnail,
BSgO Bumpta n8 parc&s (Cic, ad Fam. xyi. 4), I beg you not to
spare expeme*
TSque his SrIpS flammis {Virg. A. ii. 289), and thysdf too rescue
from these flames,
981 When the active or simple yerb requires a datiye, care must
be taken to use the passive as an impersonal.
Eius testlm0m5 crSdi 5portet (Cic, ii. Yerr. m. 71 . 166), his
evidence oiight to he believed. *
Omnes dSprSc&t5res qulbus non drat ignOtum, Stiam quibiis
Srat, In Afrlcam dicuntur n&ulg&ttlrl (Cic, ad Att. xi. 14.1),
all the intercessors who have not been forgiven, even those who
have been, are abotU to sail it is said for Africa.
InuldettLr Snim commas hdmlnum ipsOrum (Cic, de Or. n.
51. 207)yfor even the advantages they themselves enjoy are re-
garded with an evil eye,
Mihi nihil &b istis n«c6n potest (Cic, in Cat. ra. 12. 27), 1
cannot be injured by yoitr friends in any way,
Cui Snim parol p5tuit ? (JAv, zxi. 14) for who cotdd have been
spared F
Diets p&retiir (Liv. ix. 32), the order is obeyed.
His persu9d€ri ut ditltius mdr&rentur non pStSrat (Caes, B. G.
II. 10), they cotdd not be persuaded to stay any longer, f
982 In Roman book-keeping, the account where an item was to be
entered was expressed by a dative. Hence in phrases of this
class two datives often present themselves, one pointing to the
account, the other to the side of the account, whether Or. or Dr.
* It is useful for beginners to translate verbs of this class by phrases
which include a substantive and verb : as, cred- * give credit,' ignoso- * grant
pardon,' noce- ' do damage.' By this contrivance an impersonal transla-
tion is obtained for the passive: c^rec^t^ur * credit is given/ ignosdiur ^ par-
don is granted,' noceiur * damage is done ;' and thus a hmt is given for
putting the person * to whom' in the dative.
f Still, exceptions occur: as, credemury Ov, Fast. iii. 351 ; creditus^
Ov. Met. VII. 98. See also p. 196, note *, and p. 197, note f.
DATIYl. 199
Minns D^bell& yerri aco^nm retttUity* qnam Y errts iUi ex-
pensom tiilgrit {(He, n. Yerr. l 39. 100), DohbeBa placed to
the credit of Verree a smaller mm than Verres placed to his
(Dolabdla's) dOit.
Quern fors diSrum cumqu6 d&bit, liicro App5n8 (ffor, Od. i.
9. 14), every day that fate shaU give^ set down, to profit*
Pdstulare id gr&tiae app6m ubi (TVr. And. n. 1. 32), to expect
. that it shovld he set down to his credit as afawmr received.
Hoc ultiO mihi dant {Cic. ad Fam. xi. 28. 2), this they set down
against me as afavLt.
Nostram culpam illi (sc. terrae) imptLt&mlifirl' {Flin, xyiii. 1. 1.
2), we debit her for our own miscondtict,
983 Henoe a datiyet is used to denote in what light a thing is re-
garded, what it serves as,
Kec earn rem h&buit rellgiSnl (Oic. de Div. i. 35. 77), nor did
he regard this as a warning from heaven,
Yt sint r^lXquis dSci&mentO {fkiM* B. G. vu. 4), thaJt they may
serve as a lesson to the rest,
Yos eritis iiidices Laudin an uitio dtici id &ctum op6rtuit {^er.
Ad. prol. 5), you shall be jvdges whether this act a favU or
credit shovld he deemed,
Cul§ b5n5 fuit ? {Cic, p. Rose. Am. 30. 84), to whom was it an
advantage f or who was the gainer hy it f
MatrSnis persu&sit nS slbi ultio uert^rent qu5d ftbesset ft pfttri&
(Ci/i, ad Fam. yii. 6), she persuaded the matrons not to inter-
pret her absence from her fatherland as a fault in her,
984 Hence again the dative is sometimes used to denote the pur-
pose : as,
* The first entries being made into the day-book {aduersaria)^ are
thence carried to the proper heads in the ledger (tabulae). Hence the
compound re-fev' used of the second entry. Aeeeptum and expensum
mean * received' and ' spent* by the book-keeper.
t Literally * score against.*
X For this dative may be substituted pro or in loeo. Often a mere
nominative or accusative may be used ; but the dative softens the phrase.
Sunt reliquia dooutnentum (Q. Curt. viii. 14.26) is, * they are a lesson to ^
the rest.' Still, in the English translation of this dative the * as' is often
omitted for brevity.
§ The favourite test of the old lawyer Gassius for discovering the
author of a secret crime. A ridiculous blunder commonly marks the
modem use of this quotation.
200
8TVTAX.
Quinqug oohortis castxis praeddiO rSllquit {Goes. B. G. yn. 60),
he left five hatuHione as a garrison far the camp, or to gvard
iheiximp,
Huno sXbi dSmlcIliO Idcum dSlSgSrant {floxe, B. G. n. 29), thU
place they sdected as (or for) a residence.
Hio ntiptiis dicttist dies {Ter. And. 1. 1. 75), this is the day fixed
for the marriage,
Triumuir rel publlcae constltaendae* {Nep. in Attioo, 12), <me
of three commissioThers for regulating the state,
^^ The datiye of a name ia often used by attractiont to the datiye
of the object named : as,
N6men Arctur68tt mihi {Plant. Bud. proL 5), my name is Arc-
twro.
Ooi nuno cognOmSn Itilot AddXttLr {yirg. A. 1.271), to whom
the surname ItUo now is added.
L^es quXbus t&btOis duSdScim est nSmSn (Idv. m. 57), the
laws which have the name of the ^ twdve taJtles.*\
986 The phrase soluendo nOn Srat, ^ he was not able to pay, he was
insolvent,' as in Cic. ad Fam. in. 8. 2, seems difficult of explana-
tion.
987 The poets use the datiye (especially in nouns of the o deden-*
sion) after yerbs of motion : as.
It cl&mor caelOII {Virg. A. y. 451), rises the shoui to heaven,
ABLATiyE.
989 The ablatiye appears to unite in itself two cases of different
origin, one similar in form and power to the datiye, the other
origioally ending in a final d, signifying /rom. We commence
with the former.
• Written briefly IHVIR- R- P' C
f Other instances of similar attraction aro to be seen in § 1060.
X Can this construction have grown out of the use of the crude form,
which in reason should have been used in such phrases P
§ Sometimes the name is in the same case as nomen. But in Cicero
II. verr. it. 53. W^^fons cut nomen Arethusaest, the letters at alone per-
haps constitute the verb, leaving a dative Arethusae,
II Can this be a corruption of an accusative caehm, as the so-called
adverbs quoj eo^ &c. have also probablv lost a final m. See also tenua^
§ 1384 b. note.
ABLATm. 201
990 At a town or in a small island the poets express by an ablative
when the metre requires it, which oan be only in the third or con-
sonant declension : as,
Sard&niomqaS diicem Tjhnft EarthftgXnS* qui nunc Ezpectat
( Virg. A. IT. 224), and the Dardan chief at T^yrian Carthage
who Now laitereth,
991 The place where in some other phrases may also be expressed
in the ablative, as rva^ in the country, l^ot unfrequentlj it is
better to insert the preposition In. But this may be omitted at
times, particularly if an adjective accompany the substantive.
When that adjective is tOto- whole, it would be wrong to use the
preposition.
992 Time when is commonly expressed in the ablative : as,
Bellum eOdem tempSrS mihi quSque indixit {Cic. Phil. n. 1. 1),
he declared war at the tame time against me too.
993 The time within which any thing occurs is expressed by the
ablative, whether the whole or any part be meant : as,
SfttumI stell& trtginta ftre annis cursum suum confitdt {pic.
N. D. 11. 20. 52), ike Mar of Saturn com^pietee its cottrae in
abotU thirty geare.
Yrbte AMcae annisf prSp6 quinquftgintH nullum R5m&num
exerdttum uldSrant (Liv. xxix. 28), the cities of the Afri
daring a space of nearly fifty years had seen no Eoman
army,
994 Hence the intenral within which one «vent follows another may
be expressed by ablatives : aa^
Mots BoscI qu&tilduO quot Is occlsust Chrf 85g5n5 nunti&ttir
{Cic. p. Boflo. Am. 36. 105), the news of the death of Boscius
is brought to Chrysogonus within four days after he is killed.
* See Dative, ^ 951. That the ablative is only a licenie is stated by
Senrius on this passage ; '^ Carthagine pro Carthagini . . . Sic Horatius :
Romae Tybwr amem^ uenionu Tybure Romam, pro Tyburi.^'' In Livy the
best Mss., where reported, have Karlhoffini &c.
f Hence the ablative is occasionally used when the accusative might
have been expected. See ^ 1018. L
X Literally * the death of R. is reported to C in the same four days
in which he was killed,' the death occurring near the commencement of
that period, the communication near the end of it.
202 8TN9AX.
995 Hence
Testftmentum fScit, atque his difibus p&a&B est mortal (Cfic. p.
Clu. 7. 22), she made a vnU, and a few days after this died,
996 From the notion of where, the ablative is used with the prepo-
sitions In and stLb if there be no motion implied, and also with
prae, prO, &c. (See § 914, note.)
997 In, in point of, in respect to, is often the meaning of the abla-
tive where it is used to define or limit the sense of any word or
phrase : as,
Ennius fiiit m&ior n&ta* quam Plautiis {Cic. Tusc. L 1.3),
EnnitLS was older than Flauttis.
Sc81Sr0 p&r est illi, industria infSriSr {Oic, Phil. iy. 6. 15), in
wickedness he is equal to the other ^ in industry below him.
Sunt 6nim quidam hSmines non r6 sed nOmlnS (Oie, de Off. i.
30. 105), for there are, it mvM he confessed, some who are
hwman beings not in reality, but in name.
LSp5re omn^tbus praestXtit [flic, de Or. n. 67. 270), in wit he
espceUedall,
YictOrift 8U& glOrianttLr {Goes. B. G. 1. 14), they pride themsdves
on their vuOory.
998 The ablatives of verbals in tu, called supines passive, are often
so used with adjectives, though the more familiar translation is
by an English infinitive : as,
PlSrftquS dictH quam r6 sunt fftcflidr& (LCv, xzxi. 38), most
things are easier in the saying than in the reality , i. e. easier
to say than to do.
Quid est tam iacundum* cognltu atque auditu ? {Cic. de Or. i«
8. 31) what is so ddightfvl to see and to hear f
999 The substantive SpSs- (n.) work, and occasionally usu- (m.)
advantage, have an ablativef to express the object which it is
necessary to obtain : as,
Opust fuit HirtiO conuento {Cic. ad Att. x. 4.11), it was neces-
sary to have an interview with Mirtius.
* Literally ' greater in point of birth.'
f The nominative is alBO found in this construction, more particularly
if it be a neuter pronoun. (See § 909.)
X * The work to be done consisted in seeing Hirtius,* which accom-
plished, other things might follow. This might have been expressed by
ABLATIYB. SK)3
Prlmmn Srat nihil, ctur prSp^rftto dptts esset (Cfic, p. Mil. 19. 49),
in the first place there was nothing which made if necessary to
hurry,
Ybi saeua ortast tempestas, turn glbem&tOre* Spust {JAv, xxiv.
8), when rough weatJier springs up, then there is need of a
pilot,
1000 Byy with, or from, &c. is frequently the translation of the ab-
lative when it denotes the instrument, means, or cause : as,
ComXbuB tauri, &prl dentlbus s6 tutanttbr (Cic. N. D. it. 50.
127), vnth his horns the htll, the hoar with his tusks defends
himsdf,
P&triae ignl ferrOqud mlnXtSLtiir (Oto. PhiL xiii. 21.47), he
threatens his cowniry with fire and sword^
EtSsi&rum fl&ttl nlmil tempSrantur c&l5r6s {Cic. N. D. n. 53.
131), hy the Mowing of the Etesian winds the excessive heat is
moderated.
1001 The ablative of the means accompanies the five reflective verbs,
fU-ty nU-y tiesc-, fru-y pasc' : as,
PelUbiis utunttbr {Goes. B. G. vi. 21), they use shins,
Pur& qui nltlttlr hasta (Virg. A. vi. 760), who rests him on a
simple shaft,
LactS uesoSbantlir (Sal, Jug. 89), they lived upon milk,
L^o8 fruXmlir (Cic. p. Hose. Am. 45. 131), 'loe enjoy the light of
day,
Fron^us pascuntiir (Virg, G. in. 528), they feed themselves
with branches.
1002 The ablative of the means in the same way accompanies the
verbs, ulu- live, fid- trust, and the participle freto- rdying : as,
a somewhat similar phrase in Greek : as, ^fyov iiv tnrfY^v^aBai €<s >joyov$
'Iprup,
* Perhaps such a phrase as this had originally its participle also, as,
for instance, inuento.
t ' Fire and iron* would be a more precise translation, the latter re-
ferring to the destructive axe quite as much as to the sword.
X The literal translation of these verbs would perhaps be, utor * I assist
myself with any thing,' i.e.*I use it f nitor * I strain myself by acting
upon something/ t. «. ' I lean upon it ;' uescor * I feed myself with,* or
' I eat* (used in speaking of human beings exclusive of slaves) ; fruor * I
feed myself with,' or ' I enjoy ;' pascor * I feed myself with,' or • eat'
(used in speaking of animals and slaves).
204 0TNTAZ.
LaotS uluunt (Oizes. B. G. it. 1), iksy live upon rnilk^
Pradentift consfliOquS Mens {Cic, de Off. i. 23.81)9 trustinff
inforesifflU and mental power.
IngSniO fretl* (Cic. de Or. n. 24. 103), rdying upon their talents
1003 The ablativef of the means is used with the verbs filo- or f&ci-
make or do^ fi- become, and fd- he, especially in the participle
ftLttlro-.
Nesdt quid f&dat aurO (Plata. Bac. n. 3. 100), he knows not
what to do with the geld.
Quid hoc htoind fftoifttXs ? {CHc. u. Yerr. i. 16. 42) what are
you to do with thisfeUow f
Tu9 quid feictumst paUio ? {Plant. Oas. y. 4 9) what is become
of your doak f
Quid TuUi51& me& het ? (Cic. ad Fam. xnr. 4. 3) what vnU
become of my little TuUia f
Si quid eO fufirlt {Plaut. Trin. i. 2. 120), if any thing happen,
to him,
1004 The ablative of the means often accompanies verbs or a^jec-
tives of filling, increasing, mixing, joining, &a : as,
N&uls cM5nls pastSribusquS complet {Co/es. B. 0. i. 56), he fUs
the ships with farmrlahourers and shepherds,
MactS uirtfite estO {lAv. iv. 14), heaven bless thy nohle deeds,X
Yilla &bundat§ lactS, cftseO, mellS (Cfic. de Sen. 16. 56), the farm-
house abounds in mUk and cheese and honey.
I&pldibusll pluuit {Liv. i. 31), t^ rained stones.
1005 The price is the means by which any thing is obtainedt in
purchase, and hence the ablative accompanies verbs and adjectives
of buying, selling, bidding and valuing :** as,
* Literally 'supported by,* yr«/o- being in origin a participle of fer^
*bear.'
t In these phrases the preposition de is often used, as quid de me
ftet?
t Literally ' be increased by thy manliness.'
§ This should perhaps have been referred to § 997.
(I The accusative also is found.
% Em-f commonly translated ' buy,' means properly ' take,' as is seen
in the compounds dem-^ exvn-^ mm-, &c See § 544.
** Or it would perhaps be more correct to be guided by the English
prepontion a/, defining the point at which the price stands at a given
ABLATIYB. 205
EmSre &qaae 8extS.rium cSguntur mlnS. {Cic. de Off. it. 16. 56),
they are compelled to buy a pint of water for a mina,
Multd eangulnd Poenis uictGri& stStit {Liv, xxiii. 30), the vic-
tory cost the Carthaginians much blood.*
Quod non Sptis est, assS cS.rum est (Cato ap. Sen. Ep. 94), what
you don't want is dear at afaHhing,
1005. 1 To affix a penalty implies an estimation of a crime. Hence
the amount of penalties, like prices, is in the ablative :t as,
DScem mlllbtLs aeris dampn&tiis {Liv, vii. 16), sentenced to pay
a penalty of 10,000 pieces ofm^oney,
MultarS ultia h5mlnum dampnis, ignCmlniis, uinctLlis, uerb^
ribtis, exHiis, mortS (Cic, de Or. i. 43. 194), to jnmish the
vices of men withfine^ degradation, imprisonment, flogging,
exile, death.
1006 Verbs of sacrificing often take an ablative of the victim, that
is, the means employed : as,
Oum f&ciam ultiil& pr9 frtLglbtU, ips8 uSnIto ( Virg, Buc. in.
77), when I offer a calf for my crops, thysdf shall cotm,
Quinqu&ginta c&pris s&crlflcftruntt {Liv. xlv. 16), they sacri-
ficed fifty goats,
1007 Verbs signifying to a^ccustom, take an ablative of the means,
though in English the preposition to is prefixed : as,
H5mlnes l&b5re adE^duo et qu5tldiS.no adsuStlf {Cic. de Or.
in. 15. 58), accustomed as they are to constant and daily
labottr.
OredSrS rSgil gSnus pugnae quo assu6rant fSrS {Liv. xxxi. 35),
the king's troops thought the battle wotdd be of the kind they
were accustomed to,
1008 The road by which any thing is moved is also a means, and
therefore expressed by the ablative : as,
FrOmentum flumlne Ar&rl nftulbus subuexSrat {Caes. B. G. L
16), he had conveyed com in ships up the river Arar,
moment. We often talk of prices rising, falling, and being stationary.
' I bought consols at 63, and sold out at 94/
* Literally * stood them in much blood.*
f See also § 945. % The accusative is also used.
§ The dative also occurs after this word, as well as ad with the accu-
sative.
206 . »TNTAX.
1009 The attending eircumstances, mannery fedings^ are expressed
by the ablative : as,
SummS. contentions dixit {(Jic, Brut. 20. 80), he tpoke wUh the
exertion of aU his power,
Infestis armis (XHicommt {Liv, i. 25), they run together with
their arms aimed at each other.
ExpSdito* exercUu Iter feci (Cic. ad Fam. xv. 4. 8), I proceeded
9mth my army in light marching order.
Id aequo ftnlrndf non fSret clultas (Cic. de Or. n. 33. 144), this
the citizens wUl not hear calmly.
Du9.nim cohortium dampno exercltum r^ucSr^ (Caes, B. G. yi.
44), to lead the army back with the loss of ttoo battalions.
1009. 1 In this construction, if no ad[|ective accompany the noun, the
preposition cum is commonly added, as summft cur& with the
greatest care, or cum cUrS* with oare. Tet certain ablatives have
become virtually adverbs, and so are used without either adjective
or preposition : as, ordXnS in order ^ r&tion8 rati&nally, iurS justly y
initlri& withotU reason, morg according to custom, fraudd fravdw-
iently. Ml forcibly, uXti5 undvly, sllenti5 sHenily (but also cum
sllentid), BSr6n5 with a dottdless sky, austro ^pith a south wind,
1010 The ablativet of quality is the name usually given to that use
of the case which denotes a condition of mind or body, ^* But
it is essential that an adjective accompany this ablative :
Tanta est el^uentia. (Cic, de Or. u. 13. 55), he is so eloquent,
QuS. f%ci@ fuit ? Crassis suris, magno c&plte, admSdum magnis
pSdXbiis (Flaut, Ps. iv. 7. 119), how toas he made ? He had
thick calves, a great head, and very great feet,
Spelunca infinlta altlttidlnS {Cic, ii. Verr. it. 48.107), a cavern
of boundless depth.
HSmlnSs emSrltis stlpendils (SaL Jug. 84), vOerans who have
served out their time.
1011 This ablative is occasioDally used when the state is not a per-
manent one : as,
NullG frigdre addtidttir, ut c&p¥te dperto sit (Gic. de Sen. 10.
34), no cold weather ever induces him to go wUh his head
covered,
* Literally * unencumbered.' f * Wi*b a level or calm mind.'
X See also genitive of quality, § 928.
ABLA.TITS. 207
Magn9 tXm(5rS sum {Cic. ad Att. v. 14. 2), lam in grecst alarm.
1012 Similar to this is the addition of the ablative of the name of
the tribe or city to which a person belongs : as,
Ser. Sulplcius Q.F * Lemoniaf Roftts {Cic. Phil. ix. 7. 15),
Serviua JSulpicitu Emfmy son of Quintw, of the Lemonian
tribe, *
Gn. Magius OrSmdn&t (Cae8» B. 0. i. 24), Cneiua Magiua of
Crem^yna,
1013 AUative ab96l\Ue is the name commonly employed when an
ablative of a noun is accompanied by a substantive, adjective, or
participle, to denote the time when, the means by which, or any
attending circumstances. It therefore belongs properly to the
heads already given. There is however this peculiarity of trans-
lation, that the English often requires no preposition : as,
Abl. abs. of time when : Is, M.§ MessSla, M.§ PlsOnS oo8s.§
conifir&tiOnem f^cit {Com, B. G. I. 2), this man in the con-
itilshipW of Marcus Messala and Marcus Piso formed a con-
spiracy*
Abl. abs. of means : C&t&pultis dispdsltis mtiros dcfens5rlbu8
nud&uSrat {Liv, xxi. 11), hy his catapvlts placed at different
points he had deared the wall of its defenderSy or he had
placed his cataprdts at different points cmd so had deared &c,
Abl. abs. of circumstances : N&tCurft diioe errftrl null5 pact5
pdtest (Gie, de Leg. i. 6. 20), with natwre for our guide, the
path can no way he mistaken.
Quid dlcam hac i^uentutd ? (jCic, ad Att. x. 11. 3) what am I
to say with such young r/ien as we have n^m-a-days ?
Voluntas t&cltis nGblst intellSgl non pdtSrat (Cic, p. Oaec. 18.
53), our wish could not have been understood, had we been
silent,
1014 That by which any thing is measured is a means of measure-
ment, and therefore in the ablative : as,
• QuinHfllius. t 3>t6ti understood.
X Or the same might have been expressedj by an adjective, Crenuh*
nensis, ^
§ To be read, Marco, Maroon eontulibus,
II Literally * M. Messala, M. Piso (being) consuls.*
^ Literally * we (being) silent.*
208 BTNTAZ.
y^apt&te omiii& dlrigSr^* {Cie. de Fin. n. 22. 71), to tea every
thing hy pleasure,
Non niimSro haeo iudXcantur, sed pondSrS (Cic. de Off. n. 22.
79), it 18 not hy number thai these things are estimated^ hut hy
weight.
Discriptus pSpillus censti, ordXnlbiis, aets.tlbiis {Cic, de Leg.
in. 19. 44), the people distrHmted into different dosses accord-
ing to income and rank and age.
1015 The compamtive takes an ablative of the object with which
the comparisonf is made : as,
Ylliiis aigentumst aurO, uirtfltibiis aurum (Hor. Ep. 1. 1. 52),
silver than gold is cheaper ^ gold than virtue,
1016 Similarly the adjectives digno, indigno, and the verbs formed
therefirom, take an ablative of the object with which the compari-
son is made : as,
Eum omnes cognltiGne St hospItiQ dignum existiim&runt {Cic,
p. Arch. 3. 5), this {foreigner) all deemed worthy of their
acquaintance and friendship.
Hand Squldem t9Ji m6 digndr hSnGre ( Virg. A. i. 339), not in
truth of such an honour do I deem me worthy,
1017 The amount of distance or difference in time, space, or quan-
tity is commonly expressed in the ablative.
Id uiginti annis ante &pud nos fScSrat CdridlSutis {Cic. de Am.
12. 42), this Coriolanus had done among us twerUy years he-
fore,
Haec est aetas dScem annis minor quam constUfijrls {Cic, Phil.
V. 17.48), this age is ten years less than that required for a
consul,
Tribus t&ntis illit minus redit quam obs^ueris {Plata. Trin. ii.
* Literally ' to keep in a straight line as a carpenter does by apply-
ing his rule.'
f A comparison implies proximity of the things compared. Hence
this use of the ahUttive flows easily from the original meaning of the da-
tive. Observe too that all the verbs denoting comparison signify strictly
the bringing together, as com-para-y eonrfer-^ con-tend-, eom-pos-. So
also the prepositions of proximity, Od (§ 1304 *.), prae (§ 1366 d.), pro
(§1361 ^.), are used in comparisons.
t Theadrerb.
▲BLATIYE. 209
4. 128), for every Imshd you aow <m that land, you lose three
luehds in the retum.*^
MllibuB passuum sex ft Oaes&ris oftstris oonsedit {Cdes, B. G. i.
48), he took a position six mUesfrom Cauai^s camp,
1018 The ablativest of pronouns and adjeotiyes of quantity are much
used in this way with oomparatives : as,
Yi& quantG tfitior, tant5 fSrS longiSr {Liv, ix. 2), a road longer
in about the same proportion as it was safer.
Qu9 m&idr est In &nlmis praestantia, eO mftidre indigent dlU-
gentift (Cio, Tusc. it* 27. 58), the greater the exodlence in the
soul, the more attention it needs,
1018. 1 An ablative is occasionally used instead of an accusative (§ 915)
to denote duration of time.
Quinque hOris proelium sustlnuSrant (Caes, B. 0. i. 47), they
had kept up the battle for five hours,
OctOginta annis uixit {8en, Ep. 93), he lived to the age of eighty,
1019 The form of an ablative is sometimes found in inscriptions, old
writers, and certain phrases, where a dative would be expected :
as,
lovB OPTVMO MAXSVMo (luscr. Grut. XVI. 8), to Jupiter, the best,
the greatest,
Postquam mortd d&tust Plautus, c5moedi& luget(P^au<.]:), now
that Plautus is given to Deaths Comedy is in m^nx/ming,
Triumuiri auro argento aer6 flandO fSriundd (Inscr. Orell. 569),
the three commisdoners for smeUing and stamping gold, silver
andbroTize,
1020 Hence the poets, to accommodate their metres, occasionally
substitute the form of the ablative where a dative might have
been expected : as.
At si uirglneum sufffidSilt 9rS rttbOrem^
VenttLs Srit {Vvrg,Q, i. 430),
But if a maiden* s Uush she§ pour from beneath upon her cheek, f
Wind will there be,
* Literally * less by three times aA much.* Thus the extravagance
of the phrase runs beyond possibility.
t But see § 789, note.
X First Ycrse of the epitaph written by Plautus for himsel£ GelL ii. 24.
§ i,e.* the moon.*
t2
210 SYNTAX.
MoUe O&lenum
PoiTectQT& uirO miscet sltientS — ^riibetam {^uv, i. 69),
MUd Calene about to hand
To her thirsting lord, she mixes therein — a toad.
1021 A true ablative ending in the letter d* belonged to the old
language, and the loss of this cf led to a form very similar to the
weakened dative commonly called the ablative. Hence, from a
town is sometimes expressed by a mere ablative : as,
CtfrinthOt fugit {Cic. Tusc. v. 37.109), he fled from Corinth.
1022 Similarly the ablatives rurS and ddmd are used : as,
C]tbftri& i^i quemquS d5mo efferrS itLbent (Caes, B. G. i. 5),
thejj^ bid them bring food from homey every man for himsdf
P&ter rtirfi rgdilt (Ter, E. in. 6. 63), m/y father is returned from
the country.
1023 Verbs and adjectives of removed and separation are followed by
an ablative: as,
Signum non p5t8rat m5u6r6 IdcO {fJie. de Div. i. 35. 77), he
could not move the standard from where it was.
Tuos culpS. llb^ro {Cic. ad Att. xm. 22. 3), I free yowr people
from blame,
Praeturft se abdloatj (Cic. in Oat. iv. 3. 5), he lays down the
office of Praetor.
D6functl§ regis impSriG {Liv, i. 4), having discharged the hinges
order.
His ^ua atque igni interdixSrat {Com. B. G. vi. 44), these he
had forbidden fire and water.
Inuldet ignS rSgl mlsSrls {Lucr. vii. 798), he grudges the poor
wretches the fi/re of a funeral pHe,
* As, for example, on one of the epitaphs of the Scipios (Orelli 550),
Cfnaiuod patre prognatus for Cneuo &c.
f More commonly a Corintho, as a Gergouia discessit (Caes. B. 6.
Tii. 59). When a word denoting town is added, a preposition is neces-
^sary, as Expellitur ex oppido Gergouia {Caes. B. G. tii. 4) ; Generis
antiquitatefn Tusculo ex clarissumo municipio profeotam (Cic. p. Font.
14. 41). See also §§ 884 note, and 951 note t.
i Literally ' he unbinds himself from,* the office being a sort of charge
or burden which for security he had fiutened to his person.
§ The reflectire verbs /iing-^ dejung-^ probably meant originally to
relieve oneself; and the burden, as with abdico met will for the same
reason be in the ablative. Hence the word ' discharge,* i. e, ' unload,'
will be literally correct.
KUMBEB OF SUBSTANTIVES. 211
BQm9i c&remtLs {Cic, ad Att. ix. 19.1), we are deprived of Rome,
1024 The verbs or participles which denote hirik or origin take an
ablative: as,
Merctirius, I5uS n&tiis et Mai& (Cic. N. D. in. 22. 56), Mercwry
horn of Jupiter and Maia,
1025 The prepositions which signify removal or separation have an
ablative : as, Sc, d@, &b, slnS, absquS, clam. See § 914, note.
Number of Substantives.
1026 Some substantives are used in the plural where the English
translation has a singular* : as,
Cassi ftdXpSst {Cic, in Cat. m. 7. 16), the fat of Camm.
Inlmlcltiae cum Boscils {Cic, p. Rose. Am. 6.17), a qiuirrel
with the Boscii,
Cerulcesit s^uil subiScit {Cic. Phil. n. 21. 51), ?ie presented his
neck to the hatchet,
1027 Pie terms of weather are sometimes used in the plural where
the English language would almost require the singular : as, c&-
I5r6s, frlg5r&, grandlnSs, imbrSs, nluSs, pltiuiae, prulnae. Thus,
Terr6re &nlmos fulmXnlbus, nlulbus, grandlnlbtls {Cic, N. D. n.
5. 14), to frighten the minds of men with thunder, and mow^
and hail.
TranscendSre Apennlnum intSlSrandis frlgMbtis {Liv, xxii. 1),
to cross the Apennines when the frost was wnbearable,
1028 The plural is preferred in general truths, where the English
has commonly a singular : as,
Ylri In ux5res ultae nScisque h&bent p5tests.tem {Caes. B. G.
VI. 19), the husband {in that country) has the power of life
and death coer the wife.
1029 The singular of some words is found where the English trans-
lation requires a plural : as,
yita§ illustrium {Ji^epos), the lives of illustrious mm,
* See also § 152.
t Editions commonly have erroneously and contrary to the Mss. the
singular. See Steinmetz.
X CeruiO' probably meant a single vertebra.
§ See Servius Aen. i. 872. See also Fischer^s Pseudo-Nepos, Pre-
face, near the end.
fil2 STKTAZ.
1030 The singular is preferred with animals and vegetables where
there is an allasion to the table, because they are considered in
the mass, not counted : as,
Villa &bundat porco, haedo, agnQ, galllnft {Cic, de Sen. 16. 56),
the farm-hovM cihcfwndi with pork and kid and laml* and
fowl,
L8p5rem et galllnam et ansSrem gustSrS &s non ptltant (Goes.
B. G. Y. 12), hare and fowl and goose they think xtanaxAof
impiety to taste.
Pfth&gdrlcis interdictum Srat n6 f&lA uescSrentiir (Ctk;. deDiv.
I. 30. 62), the Pythagoreans iffere forbidden to eat beans*
1031 So also with other words where the mass does not admit of
numeration : as,
Pululnus rSsa fartils (Cfic. n. Verr. v. 11. 27), a pillow stuffed
with rose4eaves*
In ui^ aut in r5s& {Cic, Tusc. y. 26.73), on violets or roses
(meaning the gathered flowers).
1032 In military language the singular is used at times for a plural :
SB,
Quo&d ins^ul pMesf p5tuit {Liv, n. 25), as far as the infantry
could pitrsite,
EquSs eds ad castra 6git (Liv, n. 25), the cavalry drove them to
their camp.
Hie miles m&gis pl&cuit (Liv. zzii. 57), a soldiery of this kind
was preferred,
RSmSlniis Ira 5didquS pugn&bat {Liv, m. 2), the Bomansfouffht
tinder a feeling of indignation and hatred,
DSFSOTIYB StTBSTANTIYES.
1032.1 TJndeclined substantives (§ 187) can only be used as nomina-
tives or accusatives. But the names of the letters, and generally
words spoken of as words, may be used as genitives, datives or
ablatives, if an adjective or substantive in apposition fix the case.
* Observe that the omission of the indefinite article in English makes
the distinction between the animal for table and the living animal.
f The singular however has its force, drawing attention to the indi-
vidual. Thus, in the last phrase, ' each individual soldier has his own
feelings of anger;* so again in the first sentence, 'a foot-soldier* would
have been an equally good translation, signifying ' inasmuch as he was a
foot-soldier.*
ELLIPSIS OF SXTBSTAirTIYBS. 213
Omission or Ellipsis of Substantives.
1033 The masculine adjective is often used in speaking, of men, the
neuter in speaking of things ; especially where the gender is dis-
tinguished in the termination. See § 1044.
1034 Some adjectives used as substantives may be seen in § 210 ;
and to these may be added,
St&tlu&, hlbem&, <kc. (castrft understood).
Tertiftna-, quart&na-, &c. (fSbri- understood).
Oircenses, SaeciUftrOs, &o. (lUdl understood),
TilrGmi-, actuftria-, &c. (nftui- understood),
StLburb&no-, Tusciil&no-, <kc. (praedio- [n.] understood),
BSpStundftrum (r6rum understood).
Centenstbnae, <kc. (ustlrae understood),
AgGn&U&, LlbSr&li&, &c. (s&cr^ understood),
Pnmae, sScundae (partSs understood),
Tertia-, quarta-, <Src. (parti- understood).
In postSrum (diem understood).
1035 The genitive of a deity is often used with prepositions, the
proper case of aedi- a temple being understood.
H&bltftbat rex ad I0uis* St&t5rls (aedem understood) (Liv, i.
41), the king resided near the temple of Jupiter Stator,
A Yestae (aedS understood) ductast {dc. ad Fam. xiv. 2. 2),
she was taken away from the temple of Vesta.
1036 But the Latin language does not copy the English in the use
of the genitive of a person's name, meaning his house ; but either
inserts the word for house, or uses a preposition with the name of
the person :t as,
Yenisti in d5mum Laecae {Cic, in Oat. i. 4. 8), you came to
Laeca*s,
D5ml Oaesftris dsprensust {Cic. ad Att. 1. 12. 3), he was caught
at Caesar^ s.
1036. 1 When a sentence contains two corresponding genitives governed
• This is like our own phrase, • St. Paul's' for * St. Paul's Church.'
f The use of the prepositions is as follows:— to Cicero's house, ad
Ciceronem or domum ad Ciceronem ; at Cicero's house, apud Cioeronem ;
from Cicero^s house, a Cicerone or a Cicerone domo ; and this even though
Cicero be known to be absent. See these prepositions, §§ 1305. o ; 1 31 1 . o ;
1303. /.
214
8TNTAZ.
by the same substantive, this substantive need for the most part
only be expressed with the first genitive : as,
Flebat p&ter d@ fill mortS, d6 p&tris filitis {Cic. n. Yen*, i. 30.
76), ike father was weeping for the death of his son, the smi
for that of hisfaJ&vef,
QuXs est qui possit oonferr^ ultam TrSbGnl cum D51&b^lae?
(Cic^ Phil. XI. 4. 9) who is there who can compare the life of
Trebonitu with that of Iklahella /
Me5 ifidlciG stSLrS m&ld quam omnium r&Uqu5rum (Cic. ad Att.
XII. 21. 5), I choose to abide ty my ownjudffmenty rather than
hy that of all the rest,
1036. 2 As a wife, son, daughter or ^ve may be said to belong to a
man, the genitive of the possessor is oooasionally used without
the substantives denoting those relations : as,
Hasdrtlbal GisgSnls {Liv, xxv. 37), HasdruhcHy the son ofGisgo,
Verftnift PlsOnls {Plin, Ep. n. 20), YmLuiay the wife of Fisoy
more literally Piso's Verania,
Flaccus Claudl (Ter, And. tit), Flacctts, Ckmdius^s slave,
ABnBOIITES, &c.
1037 Adjectives and participles are attracted into the same case,
gender and number as the substantive to which they refer.
Thus, from docto- or docta- learned, and hSmSn- Tnan ; bSno-
or b5na- good, miiliSr- woTnan ; gr&ui- heavy, SnSs- had, we have :
N. doctiis hSmo.
F. docte hSmo.
Ac. doctum hdmlnem.
G, docti hSmlnXs.
2). docto hSmlnL
Ah. docto hdmlnS.
SnroiTLAK.
b5n& miiliSr.
bdn& mtOiSr.
bSnam mtLliSrem.
bSnae mtUiSrls.
bdnae mtUiSn.
b5n9» mtOiSrS.
gi^ue 5ntLs.
gr&ue SntLs.
gr&ue 5niis.
gr&uls SnSils.
gr&ui ^nSiI.
gr&ui 5n^.
N. docti homines.
F. docti hdmin@s.
Ac. doctOs hSmlnSs.
G. doctOrum h^mlnum.
i>.^.doctl8 hdmXnIbiis.
Plxtraii.
b^nae mtUi^rOs.
b^nae mtUiSres.
bdnas mtUiSrSs.
bdn&ram mtUiSrum.
b^nis mtUiSribiis.
gr&uia 5n8rfi.
gr&uia ^n8r&.
grftuia 5nSriL
gr&uium dnSrum.
grftulbiis dn^ribtis.
'^s^BaK (WIVES,
thep'' ^S^jr ufthc at
idjective or participle
fonn of the BubBtan-
/ i), oJZ age* i. e. perton*
t. , sScuri peronaal nmt (it*;
s. !, were Hogged and Btheadtd,
ConcursuB p . rei esset (Liv. I. 41), a nm-
ning together _ ,, vr/to ivoTultred what wat the
E3 niiinErost qui semper l actl aunt habltl (Cie. p. Arch. IS.
31), he is one nf a do-'s who haa- c'trr f,een aaeounled taered.
CBtSril multltQdo dSdmue qoisque ad auppUciuDi lecti {Liv. n.
69), of tht gnat mait rerruiining, ewry tenth man mat tweeted
fw pwAthmmt.
19 If a relative or other pnmonn be the subject of a eetttence
which itself containa a predicatiTO aubatantive, the gender and
number of the pronoun are oommonlj determined bj the latter :
as,
TbSbae, quod BoeOtiae c&pQt est {lAv. xlii. 44), Thebet, whUh
is Hu cajnial of Boeotia,
Iust& glSii&, qui eat fruotus uSrae uirtQUs {Cic. in l^s. S4. 57),
the geauine ghry, which i» the frait of true merit. .
Efit qufitemS mijia fiiant (Jiiv. xsi. 17), Otex ^egione) were
each ^X)0 etrpvff.
Hoc (fpfis, hio labCr est ( Virg. A. vi. 129), thii ia the tati, thit
tht labour.
rO IfBD at^eotive or participle refer to Gereralnouna of different
gender or number, the gender and number are commonly deter-
mined b7 one of the three roles following :
a. Most commonly the atfj^i^ agrees in number and gender
with the noun to which it is nearest ;
b. Or, if the nouns be living bmogs, the masculine plural maj
e. Or, if thej be things without li&, the neuter plunl maj be
* This is called the amutrvcth ad tj/rKtint,
t Nay, we find in Livy, XXI. &5, Daodeaiginli milia Romana traitt,
the Bomaiu amounted to 18,000 ;' for m all the bat Hss.
816 SYNTAX.
a. Mens St Unlmiis et consilium et sententift cluXtfttis p^tast
in ISgibtLs (Cic. p. Olu. 53. 146), the intellect , and soul, and
forethought^ and feelings of a state reside in the laws,
GingStSrigl princIp&tiLs atque impSrium est tr9.dltum (Oaes.
B. G. Yi. 8), the chief post and the supreme command were
handed over to Cingetorix,
Ntbnldas mSgis pSdes quam arm& ttlt& sont {Sal, Jag. 74),
the Nvmidians owed their safety rather to their feet than
their arms,
h. P&ter mi et m&ter mortal sunt {Ter, £. ni. 3. 12), my father
and m/)ther are dead.
c. L&bor uSluptasquS, dis8tmillYm& n&ttiri^ sSciSt&tS qu&dam
int6r sS n&tHrSlI sunt iunct& {Liv. y. 3), toil and pleasure,
tttterly unlike as they are in nature, are still joined together
in a sort of natural partnership.
1041 As a plural adjectlYe may be distributed between two substan-
tiYes, so may a plural substantiYe between two adject! Yes. Thus,
Quarta et Marti& Iggi5n6s {Cic. ad Fam. xi. 19), the fourth and
the Martian legions.*
1042 Many words which were originally a^jectiYes or participles are
at times used as substantiYes, and as such may haYe adjectiYes or
genitiYes attached to them : as,
NS.tfilis metis {Cic. ad Att. yii. 5. 3), my birthday.
y^tus uldnUs {Cic. p. Mur. 27. 56), an old neighbour.
Inlquisstlml mel {Cic. ii. Verr. v. 69. 177), my greatest enemiei.
P&temtls Inlmlctis {Cic. p. Scauro, 2. 45. h.), an hereditary enemy.
Publicum m&lum {Sal. Cat. 57), pMic misfortune,
Praecl&rum responsum {Cic» de Sen. 5. 13), a glorious answer.
8umm& pectoris {Cic. ad Fam. i. 9. 15), ih/e highest parts of the
breast.
Occult& templl {Caes. B. 0. iii. 105), the hidden recesses of the
temple.
Summum mentis {Sal. Jug. 93), the summit of tfi£ m/mntain.
Medium diei {lAv. xxyi. 45), the middle of the day.
1043 The neuter a^jectiYe often found in the predicate of a sentence.
* Not unlike this is the use of two pmenomiDa with the gens in the
plural : as, C. et L. Cctepasii^ i. e. Coius et Lucius Caepasii {Cie. Brut.
fifi. 212^. * the two CSaenasii. riaiiM ttnd T^nnino.*
when the subject Ib not of that i^^nder, is to l)e considered as a
substantive. Thus,
TristS liLpus st&btllxs (Virff, Buc. ni. 80), a tad thing is the wolf
urUo the stall,
Y&rma et mut&bllS semper F6m)(n& (FtVy. A. it. ^69), a thing
of modey hue and ever changeaUe is wman,
1043. 1 A neuter of an adjective is often used with prepositions, espe-
cially to form adverbial phrases : as,
St&re In occulta {de, p. Clu. 28. 78), to stand in some dark
comer.
In postSrum prGulderunt {Oic, in BulL n. 33. 91), they provided
for the future.
So also de impreHHsfi unefippeotedlf^, de int^Q e^rM, sXn$ d&biO
vn^iout dotiUs
1044 There is greater freedom in using as substantives those parts
of an adjective which show their gender ; as, for instance, the no-
minative and accusative of neuters. Thus the genitives of neuters
of the third declension should be avoided in this construction, un-
less some other genitive less ambiguous accompany them. For
example, we may say,
Nil humani {Ter, Haut. i. 1. 25), nothing like the conduct of a
num>j where hum&nl is virtually a substantive ; or,
Kll hum&num, where hum&num is an adjective.
But if the adjective be of the i declension, as clulli-, then we
have no chmce but nil dullS, nothing like the coquet of a citizen;
nnless ixideed two adjectives are united, as ;
Si quidquam in udbis, non dlc5 clulUs bM humani esset (Liv.
y. 3), if there had been atight in you nf ihefedings^ 1 do not
say of a cvtizeny hut of a man,
P((tidr utilis quam httnesti c1lr& {I/iv. xui. 47), it i$ better to
concern oneself about (he useful than the horumraHe,
1045 When the gender is not at once determined by the tennination
of the adjective, it is commonly better to use a substantive with
the adjective : as,
Multls hSmlnlbtLs or multis rebils, rather than multls alone.
1046 The Roman gentile names, that is, the second names in to, are
really adjectives, and hence are at times found with substantives
of various genders attached to them : as,
u
218 SYNTAX.
Sulplcia horreS {Hor. Od. rv. 12.18), the Svlpician granariet^
Oct&ai& portlctls {VeUe, i. 11), the Octavian portico,
Iuli& lex {Cic, p. Balbo, 8.21), the Jvlian law.
OomeM castrS. {Goes, B. 0. ii. 37), ifie Comdian camp.
1047 The Bomans use possessive adjectives formed from proper
names instead of the genitive : as,
ExtendXttir tina
Horrid^ per latos &cXes yolcSiii& campos (Ftfy. A. x. 407),
Bpreadi wnbrohen
G^er the wide plain the bristling host of Vulcan,
HSnlis ftliiis (Ter. Ph. i. 1.5), master^s son,
Pomp6iS.niis exercXtiis (Caes» B. 0. iii. 99), Pompeifs army,
1048 Possessive adjectives include the notion of a genitive, and
hence an adjective or participle, with or without a substantive,
in the genitive case, is often attached to them ; or it maj be a
relative sentence, referring to the noun implied in the adjective :
as,
Quo! n5men meum absentXs hj$n5n fiiisset, el meas praesentis
prSces non piitas prSfuissS ? {pic, p. Plane. 10. 26) do yo/ht
think the prayers which I addressed in person were of no ser-
vice to one to whom my inere nam/c in my absence had been an
7ionov/rf
Yt me& defunctae moUltSr oss& ciibent {Ov. Am. i. 8.108), ^at
my bones when 1 am dead may softly lie,
Meam ISgem contemnXt, hSmlnls InXmlcI {Cic, p. Sest. 64.135),
he treats my law with contempt, but then lam his enemy,
Yestril consXlia acctisantur, qui mihi summum hSnorem im-
p5suistXs {Sal, Jug. 85), it is yow wisdom which is im-
peachedf for it was you who imposed upon ine the highest
opce,
Yestrfi, qui cum summa intSgrlt&tS uixistis, hoc maxiime in-
terest {Cic, p. Sull. 28. 79), you who have lived with the
greatest integrity are most concerned in this,
Yeiens* bellum ortumst, quXbus S&bini arm& coniunxSrant
{Idv, II. 53), a war with Veii arose, with which city the
Sabines had united their arms,
1049 An adjective in agreement with the nominative often accom-
panies a verb where the English has commonly an adverb : as,
* * Of or belonging to VeiL'
ADJECTIVES. 219
Et tibi Lub^ns bene £Etxim (Ttsr. Ad. v. 5.5), w^d I wovld gladly
serve you.
In phjfsXcis totust ftliSntLs (Cie, de Fin. i. 6. 17), in natural
philosophy he is altogether out of his dement,
LUpufi grS^buB noctumiis SbambtUat ( Virg. G, in. 538), the
wolf in presence of the flocks by night walks to and fro,
FhUStlmus nullus uSnit {Cic, ad Att. xi. 24. 4), Philotimus
has not made his appearance at all.
1090 The adjectives prIQr-, primo-, postr6mo-, prindp-, sOlo- &c.
are used in immediate connection with verbs in such a manner
that the English translation often requires the insertion of th^
verb 6s- le and the relative, or some other periphrasis : as,
Prlm& SlcXli& prQuinciast adpellS.t& (Cic. ii. Yerr. ii. 1.2),
Sicily was the first that was called a province.
HispSiii& postrSma omnium prOuinci&rum perdj^mltast {Liv.
xzviii. 12), Spain was the last of aU the provinces to be
thoroughly stU>dued.
Stolcl sQli ex omnlbtis Sl^uentiam uirttitem essS dix6runt
{Cic. de Or. in. 18. 65), the Stoics are the only sect of the
whole number who have declared eloquence to be a virtue,
1051 A neuter adjective is often used as an adverb. Thus,
H5die aut summum crSls (Cic, ad Att. xiii. 21. 2), to-day or at
farthest to-morrow,
DuloS* ridentem {ffor, Od. i. 22. 23), stveeUy laughing,
1052 When substantives signifying agents have one form for the
masculine, another for the feminine, they so feur take the charac-
ter of adjectives, that they must agree in number, gender and
case with the word to which they refer : as,
L6g!s aetemae uis, quae qu&sl dux ultae et m&gistra offlciOrum
est (Cic, N. D. 1. 15.40), the force of an eternal law^ which
is as it were the guide of life and the instructress in duty,
Timor, non diiitumus mfigistSr ofifld (Cic, Phil. ii. 36.90),
/ear, no permanent instructor in duty,
1053 Other words commonly treated as substantives take a similar
liberty between neuters and masculines : as,
* This is carried to a great extent by the poets, who use even the
plural neuter in this way. The comparative neuter is the only form for
a comparative adverb.
fl^ 8TN9AZ.
Mftfe Ooe&num {Caes, B. G. iii. 7), Mtf aea caHed Oceanw*
Fltimen RhSnum (Hor. ad Pis. 18X ^ river Bhetms or Rhincm
Erid&num osdum (P7tn. iii. 16)^ M^ m(n£th of the Bridanue.
YoltumiLs amnls (Ltv. xziii. 19), ^A« river Volturmu,
Voltumum oppldum (PlifH, H* N. iii. 5.0), fA« town Vokt»%wn,
1054 Although a substantive in Latin has commonly but one adjeo-
tive attached to it, except where conjunctions are employed, this
restriction does not apply, a. to pronominal adjectives, b, to nu-
merals, c, to adjectives of quantity, d. to those which accompany
terbs as part of the predicate, e. to the possessive adjectives, such
ta Pltlt$ni& (see § 1047),/. to three or more adjectives, with pauses
to supply the place of conjunctions (see $ 1435 b,) : as,
a. £&dem ilia indiuldua et s51Id& corp5r& (Cic. de Fin. i. 6.18),
those same indivisible and solid bodies.
b. lOu^Scim milia AttlcS. tftlentS d&to (Liv. xxxrtit. 38), he
shall pai/ 12,000 Attic talents.
c. Onmes rectae r6s atquS laud&blles e5 rSfSrunttLr (Cic. de Fin.
I. 12. 42), aU right and praiseworthy things are referred to
this standard,
d. PrincepsquS dScim& ISgio el grati&s Sgit {Caes. B. (3. I. 41),
and the tenth legion tvas the first to thank kim.
e. £t ddmtls exilis F11itdni& (Hor* Od. I. 4. 17), and JPluto's
shadowy hotLse.
f. m u51upts.ri&, delicate, mollis hftbStur disclpllnft (Cic. de
Fin. I. 11.37), this is accoimted a vdvptwmsy tender^
effeminate school of philosophy*
OottPARAtlVlSlk
1055 The second of the objects Compared is expressed by the abla-
tive in short and simple phrases (§ 1015), but quam is employed
for UbiB purpose in longer or more oomplioated phrases, or when
greater emphasis is desired. Thus,
a. When the comparative adjective (or adverb) does not belong
immediately to the two objects compared, quam is required : as,
Fllium frSquentiOrem cum illiir quam s^cum cernSbat (£m;.
XXXIX. 53), he saw that his son was nwre frequently in their
company than in his o^mi.
b. But suppose that the adjective does belong to both, still if
/^
COMPARATIVES. 221
the first object be governed by a word which does not govern the
second^ the second should be in a distinct proposition of its own
preceded by quam : as,
Meliorem quam eg6 sum 8uppon6 tibi {Plattt, Curc« ii. 2. 6), /
give yov, as a substitute a better than mysdf,
H5n^I non gr&tiosiorl quam Oalidius est, Curidio ai^entum
reddldisti {jCic, ii. Verr. iv. 20. 44), y(yu, paid the money to
Curiditts, a man not more injltiential than Calidius,
PompSius dixit sS munltiorem fSrS quam Afrlcftnus fuisset
{Oic, ad Q. Fr. n. 3. 3), Fompey said thai he should be better
guarded than Africanus was**
(J^s, Tet even in this case, if the first object be an accusative,
the second is often, though illogically, put in the accusative by
attraction: as,
P&trem tarn pl&cldum reddo quam 5uemt {^Ter, Ad. iv. 1. Id),
/ make yov/r father as quiet as a lamb, X
c. But even when the two objects are under the same con-
struction, quam should still be used with other cases than the
nominative or accusative.
G, AlbSnQ non plus &n!mi 6rat quam fidel (Liv, i. 27), the
Alban had no more cov/rage than honour.
D, His Igltur quam physlds p5tius crSdendum existiim&s?
(Cic, de Div. u. 16. 37) <fo you thinJc then that we ought
to trust these rather than the natural philosophers f
AU, AbsoluSrunt admirations m&gis uirttitis quam iurS caussae
{Liv. I. 26), they acquitted (him) rather from admiration
of his valour than for the goodness of his cause,
d. But JV. ElSphantQ b6luS,rum nullft prudenti5r (Cic. N. D. i.
35. 97), not one ofaUthe great beasts has more intelligence
than the elephant.
Ex 6ius linguS. mellS dulcior fluSbat 5rS.tiO(CV(7. de Sen. 10.31),
from his tongue flowed words sweeter than honey,
* Here the difference of time, the one being future and the other
past, made qtuim desirable.
+ For quam outs est
X Examples of both these constructions occur in Ttbt^ multo maiori
quam Africanus fuit^ me non multo minor em quam Laelium, et in repub-
lica et in amidtia adiunctum esse patere {Vio, ad Fam. v. 7. 3), where
Laelium stands for quam Laeliusfuit.
u2
^2 BTiraAX,
M^8r est cert^ pax qtiam sp8rllt& uictOri& {Liv, xxx. 30), u
eertam peace is better than a hoped-for victory*
Pliiris est ocul&tus testis ^nus quam auriti decern {Plata. True.
II. 6. 8), one e^-ioitness is worth more than ten ear-wit-
nesses.
Ace* SSpiens hum&na olnnia infSriOrft uirtfLtS ducXt {Cie. Tusc.
IT. 26. 57), a wise man looks upon all human things as
inferior to virtue,
Qu9 gr&uidrem Inlmicum nOn hftbiil (Q. €htrt. ti. 43), a greater
enem^ than whom I never had,*
It& sentio, L&tlnam linguam l^iipletidrem essS quam Graecam
{Cic, de Fin. i. 3. 10), my feding is this^ that the Zatin
language is richer than the Greek,
1065. 1 The adjectives of dimension, such as m9ior-, minor-, longiSr^,
IfttiSr-, altidr-f, and tiie adverbs plOfl, miniis, amplitbs, txta often
used without quam, yet so as not to affect the construction of the
numerical phrase attached to them : as.
Plan septingenti capti (Liv, xli. 12), more than 700 were taken
prisoners.
Quinctius tScum plus annum uixit {Cic, p. Quioet. 12.41),
Quinctius lived with you more than a year,
Constabat non minus dtLcentos fiiissS (Liv, xxix. 34), it was
dear that there had been not less than 200.
NSquS longius mlli& passuum octo &bSrant (Caes, B. G. v. 53),
* nor were they more than eight miles off,
Sp&tium nOn amplius p^um sescentdrum (Caes* B. G. i. 38),
an interval of not more than 600 feet,
Obi^des uiginti d&t5» n6 mXnor6s oct5num dSnum neu m&iores
quinum qu&dr&genum (Liv, xxxyiii. 38), hostages he shall
give twenty in number^ not yountger than eighteen years of
age, nor older thanforty-fhe.
Plus tertia parte interfecta (Goes, B. G. lu. 6), more than a
third part having been dain,
A OaecIliO pr5pinqul mXn5rS centenstLmis nummum mduSrS
non possunt (Cic, ad Att. i. 12.1), from Caocilius his enon
immediate connections cannot get a siifipence at tesi than
* With the relative the use of the ablative is alone admissible,
t AUidr (Lucr. iv. 416).
COXPABJmVBS. fiS3
twdve per ^ent per annum (literally, one in a hundred per.
month).*
1055. 2 A comparison of two qualities in the same object is expressed
either by two comparatives, or by niftgls and two positives : as,
Paulll contio fuit uSrior quam gratior pSptllo (Liv. xzii. 38),
the harangue of Pavllua was more true than agreedJtle to the
citizen>8,
Bell& fortius quam f^llcius gSrSrS (Liv. v. 43), to conduct wa/rs
with more cowrage than good fortune,
Artem i&rls hi^bSbltlfi mSgis magnam quam difflbUem idc, de
Or. I. 42. IdO), you will then have a treatiw on law rather
hdky than dificuU.
1055. 3 For the sake of brevity an ablative is sometimes used where
the correct expression of the idea would require many words,
especially with sp6, dptoiQnS, iustO, aequ5.
Oaes&r 5plnion8 cSlSrius uSniet (Cic» ad Fam. xiv. 23), Caesar
wiU come more quickly than was expected,
Amnis sdlXt5 (dtfilior {Liv, xxiii. 19), the river rwnning with
greater rapidity than umod.
1056 ' Too great in proportion to something' is expressed by a com-
parative and quam pr5 : as,
PuluSrem mS.iorem quam pro ntLmSro exclt&bant (lAv. x. 41),
they raised a doud of dust greater than might have been ex-
pected fro'm their number^
Proelium S.tr5cius quam pro niimSro pugnantium {Liv, xxi.
29), a battle morefurums than was to have been expected from
the numJber of combatants,
1056. 1 ^ Too great for something' is ^i^yressed by a oomparoiive and
quam qui • or quam iit — : as,
M&ius gaadium ^rai quam qfUjSd hiSmlnes c&pSrent (Z^t^.xxxm.
32), the joy was too great for human beings to contain.
Campftnl mBiOr& dellqu^raut quwn -qtiiXbtiB ignosdl posset [Liv.
XXVI. 12), the people of Capua had been guilty of misconduct
too, grave to be pardoned^
1056. 2 * Too grcsat'' generally, without formal reference to a piupose
* Obseare that all these oonfitnxctions would remain ocvrect in La-
tinity, even if the compaiatiyes were struck out.
5224 6TNTAZ.
or standard, may be expressed by nXm!s and the positive^ or by a
comparative with the ablative aequo or iust9, or thirdly by a sim-
ple comparative : as,
Ydluptas quum mS.i^ atquS longi^r est, onme &n!ml ItimSn
extingolt {Cic, de Sen. 12.41), when pUamre is too irUense
and continued too long, it puts out the whole ligJU of the souL
Llb«ri6s si Dixgr« quid (Hor. Sat. i. 4. 103), too fredy if I
aught express,
1056. 3 The simple comparative sometimes denotes only an excess be-
yond the average, and may then be translated by ' somewhat' or
'rather/ or by one of our diminutival adjectives in ish. In this
sense the Latin comparative with a diminutival suffix in c&lo is
also used, although it may also take an ablative : as,
S^nectus est nfiturfl l^u&ddr {Cic, de Sen. 16. 65), eld age is
naturallg rather talkative.
Virgo grandiusciQ& (Ter. And. rv. 6,19), a girl pretty u>eU
grown up ; a biggish girl.
ThSis quam Sgo sum m&iusclilast {Ter. E. iii. 3.21), Thais is
a little older than I am.
1056. 4 AtquS and ftc in old writers and in poets are at times used in
place of quam after comparatives : as,
N6n Apollinis magis uerum atque h6G responsumst (Ter. And*
rv. 2. 14), not Apollo gives a truer answer from his orade
than this.
Haud miniis ac iussi f&ciunt {Virg. A. lu. 561), not less than
ordered do they.
1056. 5 The degree of excess is expressed by the ablative of substan-
tives (see § 1017), and by the ablatives e5 or hQc and qu9, tantS
and quantO, multS and paulO, &llquant9 and nihXlo ; also by the
numerical ablatives altSrO-tantO or dUplO, ajs much again ; sesqui,*
hdf as muck again, &c. (see § 1018). But the accusatival forms
* This word is probably an ablative, whose full form may have been
««fnw^^t,the latter part being the ablative of the obsolete positive <^m<t-,
whence the eomparative sequior- (but observe the different quantity), in
the sense of * following, second, inferior.' Thus semii-sequis contracted
into tesquis would be like the Gterman anderthalb or 1]^, just as semis-
tertius contracted into sestertius is equal to the German driitehalb or 2|.
See § 272. It may be added that the assumed meaning of sequi- would
account both for its being superseded by the comparative and also for its
having no superlative.
SUPEBLATIYBS. S25
in um, are not uncommon : as, mnltum impr^iSr {Plata, Most.
in« 2. 139)^ lUXquantam amplidr {Idv. i. 7), quantum miigXs (Liv.
m. 15).
6xrp]miiA«nTBS.
1057 The use of the superlative is chiefly in such constructions as
the following i
a. ConsIli& sua opttbnQ quoiquS prShant* {Cic, p. Sest. 45. 96),
the^ 9cUUfy aU the hat men of the ejuceUence of their mea-
suree.
lUnunt^runt Itidos I8ul pnm5t qu5qu9 diS f&ciund5s {Liv,
XLii. 20), thei/ reported that games should be edebrated in
honour of JwpiUr on the earliest possible day,
Multl mortflles conu6n6r6, maxlme proxXml qulquSt, Oaenl-
nenses, Orusttbnini, Antemn&tes {JAv, i. 9), a large nvm-
her of people came to the meeting, chiefly the inhabitants of
the several nearest states, Caenina and Crustumermn and
Antemna,
b, OptiLmus quisquS maxtUne postSrltfttl seruit {Oic, Tusc. i.
15. 35), the best m>en edways do the most to serve posterity,
e, Vt quisque optUmS dicit, ItS maxiimS dicendl difflcult&tem
pertlmescit {Cic, de Or. i. 26. 120), the nearer a man ap-
proaches perfection in speaJHngy the more is he alarmed at
the difficulty of peaking,
It&, quam quisquS pessttmS ftcit, tarn maxtUnS ttitust {Sal.
Jug. 31), thus, the worse a man acts, the safer is he,
d, Tam sum mitis qoam qui lenissiimlis {Cic, p. Sul. 31.87), /
am as mild as the gentlest man on earth,
Tam sum &mlcus relpubllcae quam qui maxiime {Cic, ad
Fam. v. 2. 6), lam as attached to the country as any one
living,
Hulc commend&tiOnI tantimi tribuSrS quantum quoi tribuisti
pltiriimum {Cic. ad Fam. xiii. 22), to attach as much weight
to this recommendation as you ever did to cany oncm
* Literally * make them to appear good.'
t This phrase should he contrasted with tdtero qudque die, tertio ^uo-
que die, &c. which imply the passing over one, two, &c. days every time.
Primo quoque die therefore signifies * the first day of all ;*. if that be im-
possible, then the next, and so on, allowing not a day to past witboni an
attempt.
X Plural, because each sh^gle state ftimished a number.
u
226 SYNTAX.
Te sic tuebSr ut quern dlUgentisslime (Cic» ad Fam. xiii.
62), / shaU waJtck your interests witk as much care as I
ever did those of any friend.
D5mu8 oSlSbr&ttLr Xta ut cum maxttme (Cic. ad Q. F. IL 6. 6),
my house is thronged as much as ever it v>as,
M&ter nunc cum* maxtUnS fllium interfectum ctLplt (Cic.
p. Clu. 5. 12), she desires the death of her son now as much
as ever.
e. Quam pdtui maxtLmis XtlnSrlbiLs &d Am&num exerd[tum
duxl {Cic. ad Fam. xv. A.7), lied the army to the Ama-
nus by the greatest possiUe marches.
St&tue ftUquem confectum tantis dSlorXbus quanti in hSmX-
nem maxtlml c&dSrS possunt {Cic, de Fin. 1. 12. 41), pic-
tv/re to yowrsdf any one exhausted by the greatest sufferings
manCs nature is capaUe of.
Quantam maximam potest uastit&tem constUi ostendit(i^«;.
XXII. 3), he exhibits before the consults eyes the greatest pos-
sible devastation,
Yt pdtui accur&tissiime tS tut&tus sum (Cic. ad Fam. y.
17. 2), I have protected your interests with the greatest care
in my power.
/. Quam maxiimas, quam pilmum, quam saepissiime grftti&s
Sget {Cic. ad Fam. xiu b. 6), he wHl express his gratitude
in the strongest possible terms, at the first possible opportu-
nity , as often as possible,
g. Quern tinum nostrae dultfitis praestantasslimum audeo dlcSrS
{Cic. de Am. 1. 1), whom /venture to pronounce of all men
in our country the most excellent.
h. Ex Brltannls omnXl)us long6 sunt hiim&nis8lml {Caes, B. G.
y. 14), ofaUthe Britons they are by far the most civilised.
Mult5 maxiim& pars {Cic, p. leg. Man. 18. 54), by far the
greatest part.
In fIdXbtLs aures uel mlniim& sentiunt {Cic. de Off. i. 41.
146), in the strings of musical instruments the ear perceives
the very slightest differences of note.
i. The superlatives which denote place or time, together with
mWo-y which in power is a superlative, are used in agreement
* One might have expected nana ut own maxume.
APPOSITION AHD ATTBAOTION. 227
with a substantive to specify the part of it to which the saperla-
tive applies : as,
Summus mons (Caes. B. G. i. 22), the top i>f the motmtain.
In extrSmO Ubro tertid {Cic, de Off. ni. 2. 9), at the end of the
third book.
Prima, lacS {Caes. B. G. i. 22), at daybreak.
k. A superlative which in English would stand in the antece-
dent clause, in Latin is attached to the relative clause : as,
P. Sclpioni ex multis disbus quos in ultft laetisstUnos uldit,
ills dies d&rissiiinus fuit {Cic, de Am. 3. 12), of the many
joyous days which PMvua Scipio saw in the course of hie lifcy
thai day wae the briffhtett.
Apposition and Attraction.
1058 When one substantive is attached by way of explanation to
another, it must agree with it always in case, and generally in
number, and when practicable in gender : as,
P. y&rius, uir fortisstlmtLs atque optiimus cIuXs (Cic, p. Mil.
27. 74), FuUius Varius, a most ffaUant gentleman and excd-
lent c^izen,
Duae urbes pj^tentissiimae, Earth&go atquS NtUnantiil (Cic. p.
leg. Man. 20. 60), two most poteerful cities, Carthage and
NuTMinJtia.
Dellciae meae DIcaearchiLs (Cic. Tudc. i. 31.77), my darling
IHcaearchtu.
P5piQus BOmSnus uictor dj$mXnusque omnium gentium (Cic,
Phil. VI. 6. 12), the Roman people, the conqueror and lord of
all nations.
Omitto ill&s omnium doctrlnSrum inuentrlds Ath6n9.s (Cic. de
Or. I. 4. 13), / omit that great inventress of every science,
Athens,
Ants mS consiilem (Cic. Brut. 15. 60), before I tpas consul.
1059 When the logical connection is lost sight of, and the construc-
tion is affected by the proximity of some connected word or idea,
it is called attraction.*
* Observe that the German is logically correct in giving no termina-
tion to the adjective in the predicate. Still more logical would it have
been to have given the adjective one fixed form under all circumstances.
Cases and number and gender strictly belong to the substantive alone.
S28 gTVTAZ.
1060 It is thus that the adjective or substantive in the predicate is
made to agree with the substantive in the subject : as,
iT. Y51o » esse «t h&bwi grftttts {Oic. de Fin. n. 22. 72), J with
both to he and to he thought grat/efuL*
Ace. Creditur PythftgSrae audltOrem fuissS Kiiinun {Liv. xl.
29), it is hdieved that Numa wu a pupil of Pythofforas,
Q. OaptXuOrum ntimSrus fiiit sepiexn milium ac diioent5rum
(lAv* z. 36)y the numher ofpriiOTiere was 7200.
Messi cl&rum gSniLs Osci* (flor, Sat. i. 5. 54), Memo's glori'
<nu race was Oscan.
D* Vobis nScessest fortlbus uXrIs essS {Liv. zzi. 44), ^ou have
no choice hut to he hrave, ,
Fons &quae dulcis quoi nQmSn ArSthusae'stf (Cic. n. Yerr.
rv. 53. 118), a spring of fresh water the name of which is
Arethusa.
Vtl mllltlbiis exaequ&tus cum imp^r&tOr6 l&bos uSlentitbiis
esset {Sal, Jug. 4), in order that the generoTs taking
an equal share in the labour might he gratifying to the
sMiersX
Ahl. FiliO su5 m&gistro Squltum creS.t5 (Liv, iv. 46), his son
having heen appointed master of the horse.
Consiillbus certiSilbus factis (Liv. rv. 46), the consuls hav-
ing heen apprised.
F. Buf^ mihl frustra crSdlte &mIcS (Cattd. 77. 1), Evfus in
vain hdieved to he my friend,
1061 An attraction of case and gender is seen at times wiiii the
relative: as,
Baptim quibus quisquS pStSrat elfitis, agmSn impl^uSrat ui&s
(Liv, I. 29), hastily carrying of what each coidd, a line of
people in motion hadfUed the roads,
Antm&l hoc quern u^cftmiis hSmlnem (Cic, de L^, i. 7. 22),
this animal which we call man.
But the different examples of attraction are also given in their
several places.
* Some editors would make Osoi here a nom* pl«
f For 80 we should read, and not Areihusa est.
X %o again c. 84, Neque plebi militia uolenii puiabaiur; Toe, A4pr.
18, Vt quibus beUum uolentibus erat; Macr. Sat i. 7, Si uobis uolenHlnu
erit. The idiom is possibly borrowed from the Gkeek : as, rip wkji$§i ov
fiouXofMPip ^ rmf ABrpwwp wpioracrBmi, Tkue. u. 8. This fiom Cortius.
229
NUMERALS.*
1062 Vno- one is used in the plural when a plunl sufosiantiTe con-
stitutes a new unit.t
Vni ex transrhen&nis lSgS.tos mlsSrant (Caes, B. G. iy. 16),
they were the ordy people of those beyond the Bhine who had
sent andxismdora.
£x tinis geminas mihi confides nliptias {Ter, And. it. t. 50),
oiU of VM marriage you wiU make me a brace of marriages.
Ynae atque alt^rae scfilae commXnutae (Sal, Jug. 60)^ first one
and then another ladder was broken to pieces,
1063 Sescento- six hundred is often used Yaguelj for a'Teiy large
number.
In qu9 mult& m^estft, discessus noster^ belli pMctQum, mill-
turn imprdbltas, sesoentft praet^re& (Cic. ad Att. ti. 4. 1),
in which there are fiuaiy vexatious matters, our leaving the
ootrntry, the danger of war, the violence of the soldiery, and
a thousand things besides.
1064 MlH- a thousand in the singular is commonly an adjective ; in
the plural perhaps always a substantive.
Mille ^ultes Gallia eodem uersa in Punlcum bellum hftbuit
{Liv. zxi. 17), OaUia lying in the same direction had a
thousand horse as a protection against an attach from the
Carthaginiatis,
Quo in fundo f&cflS mille hSmlnum uersabfitiir {Cic, p. Mil.
20. 53), on which landfuU a thousand men were engaged,
DScem mlli& tftlentum G&blnXo sunt promiss& {Cic, p. Rab. Post.
8. 21), ten thotisand talents v^ere promised to Oabinius,
1065 If a smaller numeral be added to the thousands, thai the con-
struction of an adjective is preferred : as,
Phllippel numml du5dScim mlH& quftdringenti uigxnti du5
{Liv, xxzix. 5), 12422 golden Philips,
* Some remarks upon the construction of numerals have been made
in the first part (§§ 263-272).
f llius, many human beings make up one people ; many letters of
the alphabet go to a single letter or epistle. Sometimes the singular of a
word happens not to be in use, and it may then be difficult to decide
what was its meaning. Thus it is a question what was that meaning of
eastro- in the singular which caused its plural to signify ' a camp.'
X
290 SYNTAX.
But the genitive is still found at times : as,
PhXlippeOrum nummSrum sedScim mlli& tr^ntl uiginti {Liv,
zxxix. 7), of golden Philips 16320.
1065. 1 An ordinal number is sometimes used elliptically, so as to im-
ply an addition to the cardinal number immediately preceding : as,
a. Where a nominative of an ordinal forms part of a predicate :
as, •
Tu qudttLs essS uSlis rescrlbS {Hor. Ep. i. 5. 30), he it yofwn to
my how many you wish to he.
Die quSttls et quanti ctipXas cenarS {MaH. xit. 217), say what
you wish to he the number to dine together^ what the charge
per head.*
h. Where the ordinal is attached to one of the fractional divi-
sions of the ^ (§§ 270, 272) : as, sSmis tertitLs, contracted to ses-
tertiUs, half of the third unitf, meaning altogether 2^. Thus,
Trientem tertium pondO c5ronam auream dSdit I5ul dOnum
(T. Quintius ap. Fest. v. trientem), he gave as a gift to
Jupiter a gold crovm weighing 2^ lbs.
Lignum b€s alt^rum (Fest, ibid.), a log 20]: inches in diameter,
or more idiomatically, a 20-inch log,
Quartus qu&drans {Fest. ibid.), 3^.
c. With tantum as much, expressed, or more commonly un-
derstood : as,
Immo etiamsi <erum Tantum § perdundumst, p6rdam potius
qu&m sinam {Plant, Ep. in. 4. 81), nay thxmgh I must lose
as much againy lose it IwHl rather than permit this.
Ex eOdem sSmlne ftlitLbi cum dScXmOU r^t, filiiibi cum quin-
t5dSc!mo Ht In HStruri&. In Sj^b&rXtanO dicunt Stiam cum
centensImS rSdIrS s511tum ( Varr. B. B. i. 14. 1), from the
* Compare the corresponding Greek phrase : ffrpwniyos riv B€irojcXei8i|s
wtfiirros auros, Thtio. I. 46 ; or ^peOij Trptfffitvnis HtKoros ctvros^ Xen. Hist.
Gr. II. 2.17.
t See note to § 1056.
X More literally *• If feet broad.* The fuller phrase would be hessem
alterutn latum, or best^ alterum I.
§ LiteraUy ' a second as much.'
II For cum deeimo tanto, i. e. literally * with a tenth as much.' The
use of tantum * as much' in the measure of crops is seen in Flaut. Trin.
II. 4. 129, Tribus tdntis ilii minus redit quam obsSueritn
NUMBSALS. 231
Mime seed there is in some lands a tenfold return^ in others
J^ieen/old, as in ffetnma. In the district of Solaris they
say that the usual return is even a hundred for one,
Ager (Leontlniis) ecfXcit cum octftuQ, bSne iit Sg&tur, u6rum tLt
omnes di adittuent, cum dSciimd {Cic. n. Yerr. ni. 47. 112),
a return of eightfold from the land of Lentini is satitfactory ;
but it needs the united blessing of all the gods to bring about a
retwm of ten for one,
Frament& m&iOrS quldem parti It&liae quando cum quarts
respondSrint uix mSmlnissS posstUnHs {CU. in. 3.4), we
can scaredy remember a time when com, so far at least as the
greater part of Italy is concerned, gave a return of four for
one.
1066 The difitributive numerals are often used in pairs : as,
SingiQoB singtUi p5piill lictdres dSdSrunt {lAv. i. 8), each of the
(tufdve) states provided one lictor,
Quln& d6n& itlgSra &gil d&ta in singtQos pSdItes sunt {Liv,
xxxY. 40), fifteen jugers of land were given to every foot"
soldier.
1067 The particular distributive bino-, like gSmXno-*, is often used
of but two things when they match one another : as,
Bln5s h&bsbat scj^hos {Cic, u. Terr. ly. 14. 32), he had a pair
of cups.
1068 The distributives bino-, trlno-t &c. are used, like the plural
of tlno-, with plural substantives that have a singular sense : as,
Quinis castns oppldum circumdSdit {Com, B. 0. m. 9), he swr-
rovmded the town with five camps.
Litt&ras reddidit trlnfts {Cic. ad Att. xi, 17. 1), she delivered
three Utters.
Trlnis c&t6nis uinctus trah6bS.tiir {Caes, B. G. i. 53), he was
being dragged along bound with three sets of chains.l
* DupUci" in its original sense is used where the two things lie flat
against each other, as dupHces palmae^ the joined hands in the act of
prayer, and duplices tabellae 'folded tablets.'
f Not temo- nor aingulo-,
X Even in speaking of one person the phrases are inicere catenas
alicutf conicere in oaienasy esse cum eatenis, as indeed the English phrase
is also plural. Hence in Hor. Od. iii. 4.80 we should probably r«id
JVecenae Pirithotun cohibent catenae.
S32 BTKTAX.
1069 The poets occasionally use a distributiTe in place of the simple
number, and that both in the plural and singular : as,
Dispar septSnis fisttUft cannis {Ov. Met n. 682), an uneqtud
pipe of^even reeds*
Guilts septSnd r&pXdus m&rS subm^St amnis {Luean, Tin.
445), with sevenfold flood the rapid river bids the sea with-
draw.
1070 The word sestertio-^ which is strictly only a numeral, 2}, is
commonly used in reference to money, and in that sense signified
originally 2} asses or lbs. of bronze ; but as the weight of Roman
money decreased to a great extent, and silTer coin came into use,
sestertio- (or sestertio- nummo-, or nummo- alone) was eventually*
the name of a small silver coin worth about 2j^.t of our money,
and was the ordinary unit of money. It is also used as an insig-
nificant sum of money.
PrStium constltutumst in m^os singiilds HSt III {Cic, ii.
Verr. ra. 70. 163), the price fixed was three sesterces the bushel.
Sestertium sescentft qu&dr&gint& mlli& defend ad bQ d5mum
iussit (Cic, p. Clu. 25. 69), he ordered 640,000 s^terces to be
carried down to his house.
Ecquls est qui bdnS. PosttLml numm5 sestertio slbi addlcl uSlit ?
{Cic, p. Bab. Post. 17. 45) is there any ona who wovld be
willing to have the whdU property of Postumus Jtnocked down
to him for a single groat f
1071 A million sesterces fall short of 10,000^. Hence the numbers
required^ when the sesterce is the unit, soon became inconveniently
large, and the only mode the Bomans had of expressing numbers
above 100,000 was by means of the numeral adverbs : thus,
AccSpI ulciens dtLcentS. trigints. qxiinquS mlliS., quS.dringentos
septendSdm nummOs {Cic, n. Verr. l 14. 36), I received
2,235,417 sesterces.
Sestertium dSciens centSnft mlli& {Cic. n. Yerr. i. 10. 28), one
million sesterces,
*- Towards the close of the republie.
f This would make the denarius about 9(f., which is slightly aboTe
the usual estimate. But our antiquarians commit the strange enror of
taking the averoffe of existing d^aarii instead of the very largest for the
rtttndiid, as though coins could have gamed weight by time.
t To he read perhaps sestertii term ; but the Mss. have nearly all
the mere symbols. See § 272.
NUKEBALS. 233
1072 By way of brevity centCnS. xnlli& was dropped with the adverbs,
causing no ambiguity, because the adverbs could only be used with
sestertium in this sense : thus,
Sestertium qu&dringentiens absttQit {Cic, ii. Yerr. i. 10. 27), he
carried offfcHy miRion, sesterces.
Et eum tu accuss&s &u&rltiae, quern dicis sestertium ulciens
utfluissS perdSrS ? {Cic. p. Flac. 33. 83) and do you accuse
of avarice one who you say wished to throw away two million
sesterces F
1073 Although sestertium as used with mlliS. was in &ct a genitive,
it was found convenient to treat it as a neuter-substantive : so that
sestertiSi* was used as a nom. or ace. pL, and signified so many
thousand sesterces.
C&plt iUe ex suis praediis 8esc9n& sestertia, 6go cent6na ex mels
(Oic, Parad. vi. 3.49), yonder man draws, let us suppose,
600,000 sesterces per annum from his estates, 1 100,000 /rom
mine,
1074 Similarly with the adverbs it was found convenient to give to
sestertium a genitive and ablative singular.
DScem pondo auri et argenti ad summam sestertii dSciens In
aerS.rium retttUit {Idv, xlv. 4), he paid into the treaswry ten
pound weight of geld, and of silver to the amount of a million
sesterces,
KSque in sestertiS ulciens p&rum s6 splendXdS gessit, n^ue in
sesterti5 centiens affluentius uixit quam instltuSrat {Nepos
in Attico 14), as his establishment was sufficiently handsome
when his income was two million sesterces, so he lived with no
greater Ivav/ry than al first when his income was ten miUioTis.
1075 The construction of pondot hy weight or pound, and llbra-m
pound, in denoting weight, is very anomalous, the first having
* The word sestertium (nom.) is sometimes said to have been a coin.
There in flEict was no such coin and no such word. There is perhaps
something parallel to the anomaly mentioned in the text in the practice
of declining the genitive cuius of the relative as though it had been an
adjective.
f Pondo would appear to have been originally an ablative ' by weight ;*
libram, libras, seem inexplicable. But in Liv, iv. 20 all the best Mss.
have librat which would admit a simple explanation ' by the scales,* and
so, like pondo, come in a secondary sense to signify * a lb.*
X2
234 BTITTAX.
always the same form, the second being alwajs an aco. singular
or plural.
P&tSrae aureae fuSrunt diicentae septiUlgintft sex llbras ferme
omnes pondo, argenti dSoem 8t oet9 milia et tr6cent& pond5
(Liv. xxvi. 47), there were 276 gdden, bowls ail abcut a pownd
in weighty and of silver bullion 18,300 Z&x.
PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
1076 The nominatives of the personal pronouns are not commonly
used, because the terminations of the verb already express the
notion ; but if there be any emphasis, then they are required
Quis tu h5mo 6s ? (Ter. And, it. 1.11) who are you ?
Ego istum iiiuSnem d5ml tenendum censed (Liv. xxr. 3), Tfor
my part think that this stripling of yours should be kept ai
home,
NaturS. tu illl pfttSr es, consllils ^o {Ter. Ad. i. 2.46), by nature
you are his father, as guardian 1.
1077 Similarly he, «^, it, they, if emphatic, must be expressed by
the proper pronoun, i-, ho-, isto-, or illo- (see below).
1078 These nominatives appear however at times to be required
when there does not seem to be any emphasis upon them. Thus,
in repeating a person's words in surprise, it is usual to insert the
omitted nominative :
M. Quid fecit ? R Quid ins fScSrit ? {Ter, Ad. i. 2.4) M. What
has he done f D. What has he done, ask you ?
Where the words what and done seem to require the special em-
phasis.
1079 So in confirming an assertion or answering a question, the
nominative of the pronoun is required*
Ego uSro Utar prord^tidnS diSI {€ie, ad Att. xiii. 43), yesy my
friend, you are right, /shall avaU mysdfofthe postponemsTit,
Where the word shall is emphatic, not the pronoun.
1080 So again where quldem it is true introduces a word preparatory
to a sSd &z^ ; as,
DeindS tul munXcIpes, sunt illl quXdem splendldisstimi hSmXnes,
set tSmen pauCI {Cic, p. Plane. 8. 21), then as to joxxrfdlow-
townsmen, they are, / grant, men of the highest station,, but
still only few in mmber.
PBBSOHAl^ PEONOUNS. S36
Or&t5rifi8 ezerdttfttidnes, non iti quldexn rSllqmstl, sed phflSsS-
phiam illls antSpdsuistl (Oic de Fato, 2. 3), your exercises
in oratory you have noi abandoned, it is true, hut you have
given philosophy ihsfftferemn over them,
No8 BdtO de uBtSre fM nostift 8enteiiti& prOp^ iam essfl d^finlsos,
non noB quidem ut nostvae d^^t&tis elmtts oblltl, Mi Ht
h&be&muB r&tiOnem Sllquando Stiam s&lutXs (Cic, ad Fam.
I. 7. 7), we^ you must understand, have been almost weaned at
last from those old opinions of ours, not ifideed so far as to
forget our dignity,^ hut so as som>etim>es to take account ofov/r
safety also,
1081 The singular tu and ploial uos* being commonly translated by
the same word you, it is often useful to insert some plural vocatiye
or other phrase with the latter, so sa to prevent ambiguity.
Si quid est quod mea Sp8ra Spus sit uObis, ui tu plus iddes,
M&n^bo (2Vr. And. it. 3. 23), if there he any thing in which
you {and your young master) have ooooiionfor my assistance,
as you {Davus) understand matters better than I do, lunU
stay,
1082 The use of a first person plural for the singular — ^n5s for Sgo,
nostSr for meiis — ^is occasionally met with in Latin, but more from
a feeling of modesty than pride. See dic&mtts (C^. p. leg. Man.
16. 47), and cohortftti sUmtts — ^p9fcuXmii8— arbltrftremitr— ostendl-
miSs (Oic, de Diy. n. 1. 1).
Se, swh, Ac,
1083 The reflective pronouns of the third person, both substantive
and adjective, are variously translated according to the word they
refer to. This word is commonly the nominative of the sentence :
as,
E& praedia &liis cSluit, non sibi (Oic, p. Rose. Am. 17.49),
^lese farms he cultivated for others, not for himself,
Tum ill& r^iecit se In eum (Ter. And. i. L 108), then the other
threw herself hack into his arms,
IusUti& propter se est cSlendft (C^« de Off. n. 12. 42), jwtice is
to he cidtivatedfor itsdf.
Non BUI conseruandl caussS prdfugSrunt (Cic, in Cat. X. 3.7),
it was not to save themsdvee that they ran off,.
* The same ambiguity exists between the possessive acyectiVes /uo-
and uoatero', and may be remored in the SBine way.
236
Sii& quae namt fikcinora t (TVr. Hani n. 1. 8) vAo^ doings cf
his cwwdoes he recount f
Vine haec ignoiaret 8a6m patrem t {Ter, Ph. y. 6. 34) the idea
of this wman not kncwmg her own father !
Ali6n& m^uB dliudlcant, quam sa& {^er. Haut. m. 1.95), they
judge better of other peo'ple's affairs than their own,
1084 Se ka. and buo-, in a secondary sentence, may of course refer
to the nominative or subject of that secondaiy sentence. They
sometimes however refer to the agent of the main sentence, parti-
cularly if the secondary sentence express something in the mind
of that agent : as,
Yir bdnus nihil quoiquam qu5d in 88 transfSrat detrahet {fJU,
de Off. m. 19. 75), a good man tnU not force any thing from
any one to trarufer it to himsdf
Sentit finlmus s6 ul suA, n5n Sli^ft mSu6iI (Cie, Tusc. i. 23.55),
the mind feds that it is acted upon by a force of its ovm, not
one from without,*
1085 Se &c. and suo- sometimes refer to a noun not in the nomi-
native, if that noun be substantially the subject : as,
A Oaes&re inultorf, sibi ut sim lOg&tiis {Cie. ad Att. n. 18. 3),
/ am invited by Caesar to be legate to him.
FaustiUO spes fuSratt, rSgiam stiipem &pud se Sdiicfirl (Liv, i.
5), Fausttdus had entertained the hope that the chOdren at
nttrse in his cottage were of royal stock,
1086 Se &c. and suo- sometimes refer to nouns not in the nomina-
tive, if placed near them : as,
Furnium per 86 uldl liibentissiime (Cic, ad Fam. x. 3.1), Fttr-
nitu, so far as he himsdf is concerned^ I saw with the greatest
pleasttre,
B&tio 6t OratiO conclliat inter se homines (Cic, de Off. 1. 16.50),
reason and speech unite men to one another,
* In Caes, B. O. i. 36, tui haec Arumisttu respondU &c., which
chapter is all one sentence, there is much freedom in the use of these
pronouns. Thus, in the last clause, quod sibi Caesar denuntuxret se
Aeduorum iniuriat non negleoturum, neminem secum iiine sua pemieie
eontendiiSCt — sibi and seoum refer to Ariouistus, se to Caesar, tua to
nsfninen,
t Equivalent to Caesar me inuiiat,
t Equivalent to Faustulus spem habuerat.
TEOBOVAL PK0N0UN8. S37
Suas lee SjhrttcHs&nis xestttuit {Idv. zziz. 1), ke retiored to the
Syracuwns what hdonffed to them.
Pl&cet Stolds sud quamquS rem nGmXne adpell&rS {Cie. ad Fam.
IX. 22. l)yitis a law with ^ Stoics to call every thin^ ly ita
own name,
M&gSnem enm dassS sua In HiBp&niam mittunt {Iav^ zziii. 32),
they send Mago with his fleet to Spain,
BMXmendl 86 captluis oOpiam f ftcSrS {Liv. xxii. 58), to give the
prisoners an opportunity of ransoming themselves.
1087 Int^r 86 is used with active Terbs for se int^r 86 : as,
Inter se adsplciebant {Oic, in Gat. UL 5. 13), they kept looking
at one another,
1088 The possessive pronouns often denote what is &yourable to the
party, especially in connexion with nouns signifying time or place :
as,
BSgo ut n^ue occ94n0nl tuae desis, n6qu6 suam occftsiCnem
hosti d6s {Liv. xxii. 39)^1 ask you neither to be wanting to
tm opportunity favoura^ to yoursdf^ nor to give to the enemy
one favoured to him.
1089 The possesdve pronouns are often omitted in Latin where they
are expressed in English : as,
Non diibiumst quin ux6rem nolit filius {Ter^ And. i. 2. 1),
there is no doubt that my son is tenwiUing to marry,
Et eri semper Unitas, uerfibar quorsum eufideret {Ter. And. i.
2.4), and my master*s* constant gentleness^ I was afraid what
it would end in.
Ipso-.
1090 Ipso- is used with the personal pronouns and other nouns to
denote emphasis :
Calpumius custOdift mllltSrl cincttls extinguttur; Priscus se
ipset interffecit {Too, Hist. iv. 11), Calpumius is sur-
rounded by a guard of soldiers and put to death; Priscus
dew himsdf,
Frfttrem suum, dein se ipsumt interf&cit {Tac, Hist. in. 51),
he killed his brother, and then himseif.
* So in English we say * master, father,' &c. for 'my master, my
fiither.*
f Observe the difference between these two phrases.
238 STITTAZ.
Triennio* ipsO minor quam AntOnilis {Oic, Brat. 43. 161), exae&y
three years younger than Antonitu.
Ipeae defluebant c5r5nae {Ctc, Taso. y. 21. 62), the wreaths kept
dipping down of themsdves.
Is, 8t ipse Alplniis amnis, diffldlUmus transitu est {Liv, xxi.
31), this^ itadf too an Alpine river, ia most difficvU to cross, *
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
1091 Ho-, isto-, illo-, are called demonstratives, because the speaker
in using them points to the things he speaks of.
Ho- is the demonstrative of the first person, and points to what
\a near me,
Isto- is the demonstrative of the second person, and points to
what is near you,
nio- is the demonstrative of the third person, and points to
what is distant from both of us.
1092 Ho- this has the following uses : First, it points to something
near the speaker : as,
Set quid hoc ? PuSr herde'st. MtUier, tu appSsuisti hunc ?
{Ter, And. iv. 4. 2) but what is this (at my feet) f Faith,
it's a baby. Woman, tpos it yon placed this baby here f
Hie uersus PlautI ndn est, hie est {Serv, ap. Cic. %fi Fam. ix.
16. 4), this verse is n/>t Flatttus*s, this is,
1093 Hence hie h5mo may mean Sgo, the speaker : as.
Yah, s61us hie homost, qui sciat diuinitus (Plant, Cure. n. 1. 33),
bah, yowr hwmJbte servant has not his match as a prophet,
1094 Secondly, ho- refers to present time : as,
Ab illls hdmXnibils ad banc hdmXnum liibldXnem ac Ucentiam
me abducXs ? (Cic, n. Verr. ni. 90. 210) do you propose to
draw m>e away from the men of those days to the adf-^ndul'
gence and intemperance of the present race ?
Quid hoc pdpiilo obtlnSrl potest ? (Cic, de Leg. iii. 16. 37),
what measure can be carried with such citizens as we have
now-a-days ?
* Whenever ipso- is used, the student should asl^ himself to what it
is opposed.
DEMONSTBATIYE PBONOITNS. 239
1095 Ho- maj also be used logically : First, at the beginning of a
sentence referring to something immediately preceding : as.
Est genus hominum, qui esse primos se .6mmimi reriim uolunt,
N6c sunt — ^Hos cons^ctor {Ter, E. n. 2. 17), Oiere is, you must
know, a doss of people who will have it that they are first in
every thing, btU are not so — These are the game I hunt dotcn.
1096 Secondly, as a so-called antecedent to a relative, when placed
after that relative : thus,
Quam quisque norit &rtem, in hac se ex^rceat (ap. Cic, Tusc.
I. 18. 41), whatever art each knows, in that let him exercise
himsdf.
1097 Thirdly, when referring to what is coming : as.
Quorum dp6rum haec 6rat r&tio {Caes, B. G. i. 25), of these
works the following was the plan.
Hoc &nlmo sclto omnis sSii5s ut mortem serultuti antSponaut
{Oic. ad Fam. x. 27), you mtbst know that all Tnen in their
senses have determined upon this, to prefer death to slavery.
1098 Isto- that (connected with you) has the following uses : First,
it points to something near the person spoken to : as,
Istam quam h&b€s unde h&bes uestem ? (Ter, E. rv. 4. 28), that
dress whieh you have got on, where did you get it from f
Tti tibi istas posthac comprlmltj m&nus {^Ter. Haut. in. 3. 29),
ycv,, sir, must keep those hands for the future to yourself.
1099 Secondly, isto- refers to the second person, though there is no
pointing: as,
S. HOdne Sgis annOn ? B, Ego u6ro istuc (Ter. And. i. 2. 15),
S. Do you attend to what I am saying or not f J>. Yes, sir,
1 do attend to what you say. ,
1100 Isto- signifies in itself neither praise nor blame, neither love
nor hatred. The context may imply one or the other :
Bdno &nlm0 fac sis Sostr&t& ; 6t istam quod pStes fac consdlSrS
(Ter. Ad. m. 5.1), keep up your spirits^ Sostrata; and do
your best to comfort your poor daughter there.
Istuc est s&pSrS (Ter. Ad. lu. 3.32), tJiere you show true wis-
dom, sir.
Video de istis qui s9 pSptU&iIs h&bSrl utflunt, ftbessS non nSml-
nem (Cic, in Oat. iv. 5.10), 1 perceive that of your would-be-
thought friends of the people^ a certain gentleman is absent.
&40 6TNTAZ.
1101 JHo- yonder f dutant, former, other, points to something com-
paratively distant : as,
ToUe hanc p&tlnam. Auf& iUam offiun porolnam {PlauL Mil.
GL m. 1. 164), take away tkie ditk^ .Remove yonder rissole
deporo.
Set quis iUic est procdl quern uideo ? (Ter. Ad. lu. 3. 84) biU
who is yonder man there, whom J see in the distance f
1102 Referring to something distant, though not visible : as,
lUe suam semper 6git uitam in 6tio, in conuiuiis {Ter, Ad. y.
4. 9), my brother there has always passed his tim£ in idlenesSy
in society,
1103 nio-, like ho-, may be used logically ; that is, refer to the words
of a sentence. When they are used together, ho- refers to the
nearer word, illo- to the farther : as,
Melius dS qu!tbusdam ftoerbi Xnlmlcl mSrentur quam hi &nici
qui dulces uldentiir. lUl uSrum, saepS dicunt ; hi, nun-
quam {Cic, de Am. 24. 90), bitter enemies deserve better of
soTne persons than those friends who seem to be all stffeetness.
The former often apeak the truth, the latter never,
1104 Sometimes not the nearw word but the nearer^ thin^ is marked
by ho-, the more distant thing by illo- : as,
MSli5r est cert& pax quani sp9r&t& uiot5ri&. Haec in tua, ilia
in Deorum m&nu est (Idv. xxx. 30), certain peace is better
than hoped-for victory. The one (peace) is in your own hands,
the other {victory) in those of the gods,
1105 A change of person is often marked by illo-, in which case the
word other is often the best translation : as,
YercingetSrix obuiam Oaes&rl prdflciscltiir. Ille oppldum N9-
uiddanum obpugnSlre instltuSrat {Caes, B. G. vii. 12), Ver-
cingetorix sets out to meet Caesar. The other {viz, Caesar) had
begun to besiege Noviodwnwm,
AeSlus luctantls uentos impSrio prSmlt. lUl circum claustr&
frSmunt {Vvrg, A. i. 56), Aeolus the struggling winds vnth
sovereign sway restrains. They thus restrained around the
barriers roar,
* In this way are to be explained all those passages where illo- is said
to be referred to the nearer word, and ho- to the farther word : as, for
example, in Liv. xxv. 29, where iile and illius refer to Hiero as long
dead, Mo and huius to Hieronymas as still among the living.
PEM0N8TBATIYE PBONOUKS. 241
1106 lUo- also introduces something about to be mentioned, in op-
position to what has been just mentioned : as,
, Horum SgS sermonS non mSuSbSr. Illud, uSr6 dicam, m6
mduet, ftbessS tris cohortis {Cic. ad Fam. iii. 6. 5), by what
these men said to <me anot^ I taas not annoyed. One thing
however (i wiU he candid with you) does annoy me^ and that
is, that three bcUtalions are absent.
niud tlbi pr5mitt5, quicquld 6rlt & t6 factum, id sSn&tum com-
pr^9.turum {Cic, ad Fam. x. 16. 2), on^ thing I promise you,
whatever you do, that the senate willfully approve.
1107 Illo- expresses distance in time, past or future : first past time :
as.
Quid ille, iibi est Mll6sXus ? (Ter. Ad. iv. 5. 68) wdl, and that
g&nJdeman from Miletus you were speaking ofy where w he ?
Hei mlhl quSlls Srat ? quantum mutSLtiis &b illo Hect5r8 qui
rSdlt extluias indutiis Achilli ( Virg. A. ii. 274), alas, what
was he likef How changed from that Hector of other days
rdwming dad in Achilles^ spoils !
Ille SgiJ lib6r, ill6 fSrox, t&cul (fh. Met. i. 757), /once so free,
soproudy was silent.
1108 Hence illo- is applied to well-known personages of past times :
as,
C. S^qu&r, iit instltui, diulnum ilium ulrum.
A. Pl&tdnem uldellcet dicls. C, Istum ipsum, AttlcS {Cic. de
Leg. ni. 1.1),
0. I will foUow, as I have begun, that heaven-inspired man.
A. You mean Plato, no doubt. C. The very same, Atticus.
1109 Also to proverbs : as,
Yerum illud uerbumst, u61go quod dici solet,
Omnis sibi 'sse melius malle quam <eri {Ter. And. n. 5. 15),
Too true '« the dd saying in every body^s mouth,
Ml Tfien wish better to themsdves than to their neighbour.
1110 Ho- and illo- are used together to mark the connection of some-
thing present with something past : as,
At&t hoc illud est ;
Hinc illae lacrumae, haeo illast miseric6rdia {Ter, And. 1. 1.98),
Ah, ah I then, this explains that matter ;
Herux all that weeping, heruse that sympathy,
Y
242 6TNTAX.
1111 Illo- is also applied to future time : as, i
Hie ddmils AenSae cunctis d5mln&blttir oris,
Et n&tl n&tonun, et qui nasoentiir ilb illis ( Virg, A. ui. 97),
Here thail .^Sfieas* house 6*er every border rule.
His children'^ children and their i^hildren too,
1112 ' LOGICAL PRONOUNS.
a. i', eO'^ &c*
I'y eo-, kc, this, that, the, he, she, it, a, one, mch, is never a
demonstrative, and consequently it never takes the enclitic ce;*
it always refers to some word or words in the context.
1113 Commonly i- refers to a word preceding : as,
£imtl mihi Antium, n6nit obuiam tuos puSr« Is nuhi litt&r&s
abs t6 reddidit {Cic, ad Att. n. 1. 1), a* I was going to An"
iium, there came across me yowr servant. This servant (or
he) gave me a letter from you.
Ynam r^n ezpUc&bo <eamquS maxiimam {Cic. de Fin. i. 8. 28),
o^M thing I wiXL explain, and thai the most imjportant,
1114 I- also refers to what follows : as,
Id tfti affirmO te In istis mdlestiis non diutius fiittirum {dc.
ad Fam. rr. 13. 4), this I asmere you lof, theU you will not be
long in yowr present paimftd situaUen there,
1115 I- is often used as an antecedent to a relative^ aaid then may
« often be translated by the words a, one, a man, <feo., especially if
a reason be implied :
Si In eos quos sperS.mus ndbis prSfiitttros, iion d^MtSmus con-
ferre offIci&, quSlSs In e5s ess^ d^6m?cis qui iam piOfuSrunt ?
iflic, de Off. 1. 15.48) if we do not hesitate to bestow our good
offices on those by whom we hope to be ben£/Uted, haw ought we
to behave touKxrds those by whom we have already heem bene-
fitted?
HostU &pud maiSres nostras is dictiifitur quern wanojp^grinum
dlclmtls {Cic. de Off. i. 12. 37), he whom we now caU pere-
gcinus {foreigner) was caJULed among owr ancestors hostis.
* The passage in Plautus (Merc. Frol. 91) is corrupt. See Bothe's
edition.
iioaiCAii PBONonirs. 243
MlnihuS conuSnU ex eo SgrO qui Caes&ris iussti diuld&tiir, oum
mduSri qui Caes&ris bSnXflciO sSnator sit (five, ad Fam. xiii.
5. 2), t^ ti (dtogether inconsistent thai a man who is a senator
hf Caesar's favour should he ejected from land fohich is in
course of distribution under Caesar's order,
Nam qu6 redibo ore &d earn quam cont6mpserim ) {Ter, Ph. y.
7. 24) /or with what face shall I go back to a woman whom I
have thoroughly insnUed f
1117 The relative clause often precedes, in wMoh case this second
pronoun is emphatic :
Hoc qui admIrS.tilr, is se quid sit uir bSnus nescirS f&te&tiir
(Ctc. de Off. iiL 19. 75), ^ any one wonder at this, let that
man confess that he knows not what a good man is.
K5n est consentSneum, qui mStti non frang3.tilr, eum frangi
cUpldltSitS {Cic. de Off. i. 20. 68), it is an inconsistency for
a man to he proof against fear^ and then not to he proof
against temptation*
1118 I- is used before a relative in saoh a manner as to denote the
belonging to a class, and is to be trafislated by tttch, the sort of
person, one qfthosCf the man to — , so — as to: thus,
NSquS tu Is es qui quid sis nesci&s {Cic, ad Fam. t. 12. 6), nor
are you the person not to know what you are.
1119 In this sense i- is often foUonred by iit : thus,
In eum res rSdiit iam Idcum, ut sit nSoessum {Ter, Haut. il
3. 118), matters are ai last com£ to such a state that it is neces-
^xry,
b. qui', quo-, Ac.
1120 The relative quo- or qua- and qui- agrees like other adjectives
with its noim if expressed : as,
Intellexit diem inst&rS qud dis frumentimi mStIri dportSret
{Ca^. B. G. I. 16), he saw that the day was dose at hand,
on which day it was required that he should measure out the
com.
Oaussam dlclt eS, legS quS, legS sSn&tQres s5ll tSnenttLr {Cic. p.
Olu. 57. 156), he is making his defence under a law hy which
law senators alone are hound.
244 BTITTAX.
1121 In the sentences just given the noun is expressed twice over.
This repetition is unnecessaiy ; and commonly the noun which
should accompany the relative is omitted, so that the relative
agrees with the antecedent noun in number and gender, but has
its case determined by its own clause : as,
Ab rSllquis princlplbus qui hanc temptandam forttinam non
existlm&bant {flaes, B. G. vii. 4), hy the other chiefs who
thought that this risk ouffht not to he run,
IntrSmissIs SqultXbus, quds arcessendos ctLrSruSrat (Caes, B. G.
V. 56), horsemen having been let into iheptace^ whom he had
sewtfor^
Adeunt pSr Aeduos quorum antlquXttis Srat in fids cinlt&s
{Ca£». B. G. VI. 4), they make their approa^sh hy means of
the Aedui wnder whose ^protection the state had heen from of
old.
Quid uos hanc mlsSram sectamlnl praedam, quibus iXcet iam
essS fortunatisslmis ? {Caes. B. G. vi. 36) why do yoM pursue
this wretched booty' you who have it in your power tbOw to he
the most fortunate of men f
AduersSLrios suds S. qulbus paulo ante Srat eiecttis {Caes. B. G.
VII. 4)) his opponents hy whom he had heen a little before
expelled,
1122 The relative may have a different noun from the sentence to
which it is attached : as,
Erat lun& pl6n&, qui dies m&rXtlmos aestus maxImSs efflcSrS
consuSuit {Goes, B. G. iv. 29), it was fM moon, which day
usually makes the sea-tides the greatest.
Oulnae, quam Graecl turn urbem tSnSbant {Idv, iv. 44), Ctwiaey
which city Cheeks then occupied.
1123 A very common construction consists of the relative and its
so-called antecedent divided by the other words of the relative
clause : as,
H&betis quam pStistis f&cultatem* {Caes. B. G. vi. 8), you have
now the opportunity you sought.
* In sentences such as these it is a common habit in modem printing
to place the relative clause between commas, whereas the connection is as
close as between an ordinary adjective and its noun. Indeed it is useful
to translate such sentences in the exact order of the words : thus, ' In
the-which-followed winter;' ' The-which-you-sought opportunity.*
LOGICAL PKOKOUITS. 245
E& quae s^ctita est hiSmS {Caa. B. G. iv. 1), in the winter
which follow^
Ad eas quas dixlmus mUnltidnfis {Cdu. B. G. iii. 26), to the
fortificationa which we have meniioned,
1124 In the first and last of the phrases just quoted the noun be-
longs equally to both clauses. In the following it belongs to the
relative clause :
Qu5s in praesenti& trlbunos mllltum circum se h&bebat, s6
sSquI itlbet {Cae8. B. G. v. 37), eitch tribunes of the soldiers
as he had about him at the moment, he orders to follow him.
1125 Thus, sometimes the noun of the main clause, more commonly
that of the relative clause, is omitted. But if the noun be sepa-
rated from the main verb by the relative clause, it sometimes
takes its case from the relative clause, to which it is nearer : as,
P6pulo ut placerent qu&s fecisset f&bulas {Ter, And. prol. 3),
that the plays he might write should please the people,
Yrbem quam st&tuo uestrast ( Virg, A. l 577), the city which I
am setting up is yowrs,
1126 An antecedent is not always necessary : as,
NSc Srat quod scrlbSrem {pic, ad Att. xn. 9), nor was there any
thing to write,
AssSquerS quod uls {Cic, ad Att. xi. 7. 3), you wiR obtain what
you wish.
HSbsbis quoi des littSr9.s (Cic, ad Att. xi. 13. 5), you loiU have
som/e one to send a letter by.
InteruCnit Snim quoi mStuistI crSdQ nS saluO c&pItS nSgSxS
non posses {Cic, PhiL ii. 38. 99), for there sitddenly stepped
forward one to whom you were afraid, /suppose, you could
not say no without getting your head broken.
Parts* qu5d ftuebfts {Hor. Sat. i. 1. 94), having acquired what
you longed for,
BSne est cul Detls obttQit parcS. quod s&tXs est m&nu {Hor. Od.
in. 16. 43), His uxU with him to whom the Deity has offered
with frugal hand what is enough.
Dies deindS praestltutft c&pltSlisquS poen& qui non rSmlgrasset
ROmam singiilos mStu suo quemque 5b6dientls f^it {lAv,
* Here quod auehas may be conudered as a noun in the ablative.
t2
246 SYNTAX.
Yi. 4), a day was then named, and capital punishment hdd
otit to any one who should not hy that day have returned to
Eame there to live, and this decisive measure made them, aU
obedient, each individual being influevuxd by fear for himsdf
Praemia atque h5nores qui mllXt&r8 sScum u51uiBsent pr5p5suit
{Liv, XXIII. 15), he hdd out rewards and honours to such as
should be willing to serve wider him,*
1127 Such omissions fall for the most part under the four following
heads : a, where the antecedent, if expressed, would be in the
same case as the relative ; b, where the verb immediately precedes
or follows, and thus shows the connection ; c. short relative
phrases, where the antecedent would be a nominative or accusa-
tive ; d. an antecedent dative before qul.f
1128 The relative in short phrases sometimes adapts its case to the
main sentence : as,
Quern utdsbltur praeflcies {Oic. ad Att. vi. 3. 2), you will place
at the headoftlie business whom you think proper.
Quo consuSrat interuallo hostis sSqultiir (Caes, B. G. i. 22), he
follows the enemy at the interval he was accustomed to. X
Baptim quibus quisquS pdtSrat 6l&tls {lAv, i. 29), each hastily
carrying out what he covld,
11^9 When a relative referring to the preceding sentence is sepa-
rated from its verb (or other governing word) by a conjunction or
relative, it is convenient in the translation to substitute for the
relative some proper form of the pronoun * he' or * this,* with an
English conjunction if need be : as,
Quod postquam barb&rl fiSri &nImaduertSrunt {Caes, B. G. m.
15), but when the barbarians saw that this was being done,
Qu5d iibi audltum est {Caes, B. G. iii. 18), and when this was
heard,
1130 When a relative is connected in meaning with two clauses, it
generally adapts its case to the secondary clause, if that precedes
the main clause : as,
* See also examples under § 1226, and lAv, iii. 19. 6.
*f« This was probably at first owing to the similarity in sound between
qui and cut or quoi, so that the case d would be virtually included in a ;
and then extended to the plural.
i The English often omit the relative, which however must always be
supplied in translating into Latin.
LOaiOAL PRONOUNS. 247
Is Snim fuSram, quoi* cam llcSret magnOs ex 5ti5 fructus c&-
pSrS^ non diibXt&uSrim m6 gr&uissilmis tempest&tlbiis ob-
uium ferrC {Cic, R. P. i. 4. 7), for I had been one, who having
it in my power to derive great advantages from, repose, still
did not hesitate to face the mostfeatftd storms.
Nam quid d6 mS dicam, quoi iit omm& contiiigaiit quae u^o,
IdvlUrl ndn possum ? {Cic, ad Att. xii. 23. 4) /or what should
I say of mysdfy when, though every thing should hefaU me that
I wish, siiU I could not be relieved f
Is quit albiis atemS fugrit ignOrSs {Cic. Phil. n. 16.41), one of
whom you cannot say whether he was white <yr Uack.
Quem nisi Sftguntlnum scSlils &g!t3.ret, respIcSret pr5fectO ko.
{Liv. XXI. 41), and if Heaven's curse for his crimes at Sagun^
tum had not been pursuing him, assuredly he would have looked
back at dtc,
1130. 1 When two relative clauses are combined (as by 6t, quS, &c.),
and the cases of the two relatives should strictly speaking be dif-
ferent, the second may sometimes be omitted, when it would be a
nominative or accusative : as,
Bocchus cum pSdXtibus quos YSlux adduxSrat, nSque in priOrg
pugna affuSrant, postrQmam Rdmftndrum &ciem inu&dunt
{Sal. Jug. 101), Bocchus, with the infantry which Ydux had
brought up, and who had not been present in the preceding
battle, attack the rear of the Eonuin army. X
1130. 2 The adjectives tali-, tanto-, and t5t, as also the adverbs tarn
and tum, are used as antecedents to the respective relatives qu&li-,
quanto-, qudt, quam and quum.
1131 The relative § is often used in parentheses with the sense of
the logical pronoun i- or eo- : as,
* Rather than qui cum mihi liceret, &c. Hence probably we should
read in Phil. ii. 7. 17, hoc uero ne P. quidem Clodiut dixit unquam, quoi
quia iurefui inimiotu, doleo a te omnibus uitiis iam esse superatum.
f Had the ignoras preceded albus, the phrase would have been quem
ignoras, &c.
X Sometimes the proper case of t- is supplied in the second clause,
aseosia Cic. de Glar. Or. 74. 258.
§ So also the relative adverb ut is used for sic or ita in Ter. Ph. y. 2.
9, Haud scio herole («/ homost) an mutet animum, * I am only too much
afraid &ith (knowing the fellow^s character) he may change his mind.'
Compare Hec. iii. 5.10, Sio sttm, * it is my way.*
248 8T5TAZ.
Quod si mihi permlsisses, qui metis &mdr iu te est, conf^dssem
{Cic, ad Fam. vii. 2. 1), whereas if ywt had left this matter
aUogeUier to me, such is my affection for you, I shoMi Juive
KtOed it.
Quod si f&city qu& impiidentiaBt {Cic, p. Rose. Com. 16. 45), if
he does this (and he has impvdenoe enough to do it)^ <&e.
1131. 1 Logical pronouns, — and we here include, besides i- or eo-, all
the pronouns so used, as ho- ($ 1095), illo- ($ 1103), and quo-
(§ 1131), — are at times used in immediate agreement with a sub-
stantiTe, where a genitive of the pronoun with rel might have been
expected : as.
Hoc mStu l&tius uSg&n proMbebat {Caes, B. G. y. 19), by the
alarm which thence arose he prevented (the troops) from wan-
dering ahout to any great distance,
Haec quXdem est perf&cUis defensiO (Cic, de Fin. in. 11. 36),
the defence of this eU any rate is a very easy matter,
1132 I-dem.
I-dem same is employed in many constructions, the chief of
which are the following :
ImpSrl nostn terr&rumque illftrum Idem est extrSmum (Cic,
• de Prov. Oon. 13. 33), our empire and that country have now
the same boundary,
QuaerlttLr IdemnS sit pertlnftcia et persSu6ranti& (Cic. Top. 23.
87), the question is, whether obstinacy and perseverance be the
same thing,
Ac&d8mlciis St idem rh6tj$r (Cic, T^, D. n. 1.1), an academician
and at the same time a professed speaker.
Animus te erga est idem ac fuit (Ter, Haut. u. 3. 24), my fed-
ing towards you is the same as it was.
Idem &beunt qui uSnSrant (Cic, de Fin. it. 3. 7), they go away
the same thai they came,*
EOdem ltfc5 r6s est quftsi e& pSc1ini& l6gS.t& nOn esset (Cic, de
Leg. XL 21. 53) j the matter stands in the same position as if
the said money had never been left.
Idem nSgas quidquam certi possS rSpSrIrl, Idem t6 compSrissS
dixisti ((kc, Acad. Pr. IL 19.63), on the &ne hand you say
* With their opinions unaltered.
INTEBBOGATIYB PRONOUNS. 249
that nothing certain can he found hy man^ and yet on the other
hand you aleo mid thai you had discovered ao and ao,
NSque ego SiUtSr accSpi ; intellexl t&mSn Idem {Cic. ad Fam.
IX. 16.3), nor did I take it otherwise; I saw however ai the
same titne <&c,
1133 The construction with a dative or with cum belongs to the
poets and the later writers : as,
E5dem mScum p&trS gSnltiis (Tac, Ann. xy. 2), sprung from the
same father as myself.
Inulttim qui seru&t, Id6m f&cit occldentl (Hor, ad Pis. 467),
who saves a man against his wiU does the same as one who
hiUs him.
INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS.
1134 The use of the interrogative pronouns qui-, iitgro- <bc. falls
under the two heads of direct* and indirect questions ; the former
having commonly the indicative,t the latter nearly always the
subjunctive: as,
Direct questions :
Quis tu es ? (Ter. And, iv, 1. 11) who are you ?
Quid Igltur sibi uolt p&tSr ? {Ter. And. ii. 3. 1) what does my
father vn/ean them, ?
Indirect questions :
Quid rStlneat per t8 mSmlnit, non quid S.mlsSrit {Cic. p. Deiot.
13. 35), he remembers what he retains through youy not what
he has lost.
Quftlis sit &nlmiis, ipse &nlmus nescit {Cic. Tusc. L 22. 53),
what sort of thing the soul is, the soul itself knows not.
* In the direct question the English language puts the nominative
after the verb or its auxiliary, except indeed when the question is about
the nominative itself and begins with * who,* ' which/ or * what.* Secondly,
an interrogative pronoun or particle commences the sentence, unless in-
deed the question be about the act itself, in which case the verb or its
auxiliary comes first. Thirdly, the mark of interrogation (?) is placed at
the end of the sentence. On the other hand, the indirect interrogative is
always attached to some word or phrase, generally to a verb. Secondly,
the nominative, as in ordinary sentences, always precedes its verb. Thirdly,
it is not entitled to the mark of interrogation.
t See below.
250 8TSTAX.
Both;
Quid factQiI fiiistis t QnamqiBim qnid &ctQTl fd&rltis d&bltem,
com uldeam quid f^cMtfo! (Oie, p. Lig. 8» 24) what would
you have done? And ^ am I to dovibt what you would have
done, when I see what you actitally have done f
Both:
Quid nunc flet ? Quid flat r^gSs ? {Ter. Ad. m. 1. 1) what wiU
become of U9 now t What wiU become of us^ ash you ?
1135 A question is sometimes asked with a participle dependent
upon the main yerb, in which case it is commonly necessary for
the English translator to substitute a verb for that participle, and
at the same time to insert a relative before the original verb : as,
YndS pStltum hoc in me i&cXs ? {Hor. Sat. i. 4. 79) whence didst
thou get this stone {which) thou, ^rawest atfneF
Quibus mos undS dsductiis AmSz^niS. sScurl dexti^ 5barmet,
quaergrS distiill {JSbr. Od. iv. 4.18), but whence derived the
custom which with Amazonian axe equips their arm, I ask
not now.
OSgltatS quantis 18.b5rlbus fundfttum impSrinm, quanta, uirtutd
st&bYlltam llbertatem un& nox paen^ delSrit {Cic, in Oat.
IT. 9. 19), consider what hJbour was employed to fownd that
empire, what valour to establish that liberty which a single
night has almost annihilated,
1136 Occasionally two questions are included in one sentence, and
require to be separated in the translation : ai^.
Nihil iam &liud quaerSrS dfibetia, nisi HtSr iltri in^dias fecSrit
{Cic. p. MIL 9. 23), you have now nothing else to inquire into
but this, which of the two plotted against the other^s life^ which
had his life so endangered,
OetSrOrum mIsSrS.bIli5r 5r9.ti5 fuit commSm5rantium ex quantis
5plbus quo receldissent Earthfiglniensium rSs {Liv, zxx.
42), the language of the rest was stiU more affecting, as they
dwelt upon the power fvl station from which, aitdthe low depth
to which the state of Carthage ufosfaUen,
1137 It may be observed, that the Latin language employs the in-
direct interrogation much more frequently than the English, which
often prefers a mere relative with an antecedent substantive, or a
substantive alone : sus.
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 261
Nunc quid Sgendum sit coxuadSr&tS {Cic, p. leg. Man. 2.6),
consider now the business which you have to transact,
Kon sum praedXc&turus quant&s illS res d5ml mllltiaequS ges-
sSrit {Cic. p. leg. Man. 16. 48), / am not going to proclaim
the greatness of his achievements at hom^ aivi abroad,
INDEPmiTE PRONOUNS, ifec.
1138 The simple qui- any is an enclitic,^ and cannot occupy the
first place in a sentence.
Omni& semper quae mftgistrSLtils ill8 dlcet^ sScundls aurlbus,
quae ab nostriim qu5 dicentiir aduersis accIpietXs ? {Jav, yi.
40) wHL you always receive with a favouraUe ear what those
magistrates say^ and with an unfavourcMe ear what is said
by any ofusF
1139 Xhe nse of this word is frequent in sentences beginning with
the lehtiTe or relatiye advwbsy and after si, nM, nS, num : as,
lam illis prOmissis standiim nOn est, quae coact6s quis mStil
prOmlsit {Oic. de Off. i. ID, 32), lastly^ there is another doss
of promises which are not binding, viz. those which one makes
under the compulsion of fear,
Qvl6 quis uersutior est, hOc inulsior {Oic, de Off. ii. 9. 34), the
more crafty a man is, the more is he disliked,
Ybi sSm61 quis pSiSr&uMt, ei cr6dl posteft n5n Sportet {Cic. p.
Bab. Post. 13. 36X when a man has once forsworn himself,
he should not afteneards he bdieved,
STfim fjpasHd ^dquentiae uestlgium app&ret ? {Cic, de Or. i. 9.
.37) is there emy trace ofdoquence to be seen, /
HSbent l^gibus suictum, si quis quid de r6 publlcft flLm& ac-
oepSrIt, iiti ad jnSgifitr&tum defSrat, nSuS cum quo &li5
commQnlcet {Coies, £. G. ti. 19), they have it provided for
hy law, that if any one hear any thing by report on matters
of state, he sludl latf it before the authorities, and not com-
municate it to any other person.
Si qui gr&uiOrS uolnSre accepto ^u9 dScldSrat, circumsistsbant
{Caes, £. Gt, L 48), whenever any one at all severely wotmded
fed from his Aorse^ ^cy formed ■around Mm,
** This of course -does not prerent the compounds m^^, jm^oi-, &c.
fiom being emphatic.
252 8T5TAX.
1140 In the phrases with sl-qui-, the main senteuiQe has no connect-
ing pronoun, the sl-qui- clause itself performing the office of a
noun : as,
Si quid est pabiili* obruunt nluSs {Liv, xxi. 37), what fodder
there is, is buried under the snow,
1141 AUqui- some, ant/, is always emphatic, and is opposed to such
words as aU, much, none : as,
Ynum &Uquem n5mIn9.tS {Cic, p. du. 66. 185), name som£ one
or other.
Sl n5s &d &llquam SHctLius comm^ SHquando rSctipSrandl
spem forttm& rSseruSLuit, miniis est erratum 9. nobis {Oic.
ad Fam. xiv. 4. 1), iffortu7ie has reserved us for any chance
{however small) of recovering at any time (however distant)
any thirty desiraUe {in the slightest degree), then our error
has been less.
Est istuc quidem S.llquid, sed nSquSquam In isto sunt omni&
{Cic. de Sen. 3. 8), what you say is, I grant, something, but
it by no means indvdes the whole.
Si uIs esse ftllquldf {Juv, i. 74), if thou wishest to be somebody
in the world.
1142 The substantiyet qui-quam and adjective ullo- signify any ^
only one, and no matter what that one may be), and are used in
negative, interrogative, conditional and comparative sentences :
as,
SinS s5ciis n6mo quidquam t9JS cSnfttiir {Cic» de Am. 12. 42),
without companions no one attempts any such thing,
Idcirc5 c&plte et siipercllils est r9.sis, ne ullum pllum uM b^ni
h&ber6 dlcattlr {Cic, p. Rose. Com. 7. 20), he goes with his
head and his eyebrows shaved, that he may not be said to have
a single hair of respectahUity about him,
Et quisquam lunonis ntimSn &d5ret PraetSreSLf {Virg. A. i. 52)
and is any one after this to worship the divinity of Juno f
* Thus, si quid estpabuli may be considered to be the accusative case
after the verb obruunt,
i* So Juvenal, if we may trust the best and the majority of the Mss.
(Madvig.) — Cicero uses both sum eUiquis and sum cUiquid.
t Qui-quam however is at times an adjective, and utto- at times a
substantive, in speaking of persons : as, qui-quam, Ter, Haut. i. 1. 39,
Plaut, Ps. III. 2. 62 ; ulh-^ Caes, B. O. I. 8. 3, lAn, v. 40, Cio. ad Fam.
XIII. 26. 1.
IKDEFINITB PB050UN8. 253
Nam census ullum &nlmal^ qaod sanguXnem h&beat, slnS corde
essS possS ? {Cic. de Div. i. 52. 119) now do you think thai
any animal that has Uood can exist withoitt a heart f
Si ull& mea S.p6d ts commend&ti5 u&luity haec ut u&leat r5g9
{Gic, ad Fam. xiii. 40), if any recainmendation of mine ever
had weight with youy I leg that this may.
Quamdiu quisquam Srit, qui t6 defendSre audeat, uIuSs {Cic,
in Oat. I. 2. 6), as long as there is a single living being who
dares to defend yoUy you shall live.
Ouiuls potest accidere, quod cuiquUm potest {Syr. ap. Sen. de
Tranq. An. 11), that may happen to every one^ which may
happen to any one.
Nihil est exItiOsius clultfttlbus quam quidquam &gl per uim
(Cic, de Leg. m. 18. 42), nothing is more pemicuyus to a state
than that violence should be resorted to in any thing.
1143 Qui-piam is used like &llqui- :^
Quaeret quispiam {Cic. in Bull. ii. 8. 20), some one will ask.
Fordt&n &llquls &lIquando eiusm5dl quidpiam f^cSiIt {Cic, it
Yerr. n. 32. 78), perhaps some one wiU some time or other
have done something of this kind.
FScuniam SI quoipiam fortuna &d6mit, aut si iUIcuiiis 6rlpuit
iniUrilL, t&men consdl&ttLr hSnestSfi Sgest&tem {Cic, p.
Quinct. 15. 49), if money be taken from any one by misfor'
tune, or wrested from him by the violence of some one, stiU
integrity is a consolation to poverty.
1144 Qui-uls and qui-liibet any you please are universal affirmatiYes,
and may often be translated by every one ;t v^
Abs quiuls h^mlnS bSnIflcium accIpSrS gaudefis {Ter, Ad. n.
3. 1), ons would be glad to receive afavowrfrom any one.
Mihi quiduis s&t est {Plaut. MiL Gl. in. 1. 155), for me any
thing is enough,
Non cululs li5mlnl contingit ftdirS 05rintlium {Hor. Ep. l 17.
36), it is not every man*s lot to visit Corinth.
* Except that it has never the meaning of * something important,'
which aliqui' often has.
f A superlative may often he substituted for them ; as for example
in the following sentences : ' the greatest stranger,* ' the least quantity,'
* only the most fortunate.'
s
254 SYNTAX.
QuQpi sSquar ? Quemliibet, modo ftUquem {Cic, Acad. Prl n.
43. 132), whom am I to take fw my guide f Any body yaw
please^ provided it he wtMMiy,
1144.1 Qui-qaS (N. quisquS) every y aU taken each by itsd/y is opposed
to unluerso- aU united as a whole. See examples under § 1057, a,
hyc*
1145 Qui-dam some is used both generally, and in reference to par-
ticular objects which we either cannot or do not choose accurately
to define. Hence it is often employed to soften some strong me-
taphor or epithet :
Sed sunt quldamf It& uoce absdni tit In 5rS.t9rum niimSrum
u6nIrS non possint (Gic. de Or. i. 25. 115), bttt there are in
fact 8om>e of so unmusical a voice that they can never he ad-
mitted into the number of orators.
Accurrit quidam, n5ttis mlhl nomlnS tantum {Hor, Sat. i. 9.3),
there runs up a certain person known tomehy name alone,
NSqud pugnas narrat, quod quidam}! f&clt {Ter, E. ui. 2. 29),
n>or does he talk of his battles, as a certain person does.
H&bet 8nim quendam &cilleum contiLm6li& quern p&tl ulrlbdnl
diflntcilliime possunt {Cic, ii. Verr, in. 41. 95), /or insult has
in fact a sort of sting in it, which a gentlem/in can with the
greatest difficulty tfndwre.
Fuit Snim mXrXfXcus quidam in Orasso pilddr {flic, de Or. i. 26.
122), for there was in fact in Crassus a bashfulness I had
almost called astounding. ,
1146 Qui-cunquS is commonly an adjective, and is used in three
ways (of which however the first is by far the most common) ; a.
as every one who, in the same way as the ordinary relative is used ;
b, without any antecedent, but so as to admit the insertion of such
words as no matter before the who ; c. in the sense of some one or
other, the best I can.
a. QuM Srit cumquS ulsum, ftgSs {Cic, de Fin. iv. 25. 69),
whatever you think proper, you unU do.
b, QuGcunque in lSc5 quis est. Idem est el sensfis (Oic. ad Fam.
VI. 1. 1), wherever a person is, his/edings are the same.
• See also § S49.
f Here Cicero hag no partieular persons in yiew.
X Here there is a particular person in view, viz. the braggart Thiaao.
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 266
c. Quae s&n&il pStSnint, qaSk)anquS* r&tiOnS s&n&bO {Cic, in
Oat. II. 6. 11), what parts admit of heing healed^ I mil heal
in the best way I can.
1147 Qui-qui-t is commonly a substantive, and is used chiefly in
the sense of no matter whOy &c. ; but at times as a relative in
grammatical connection with the main clause :
Ago gr&tiasy qu5quo &nlm6 f&cis {Cic. Phil. n. 13. 33), I thank
jfouy no matter with whatfeding y<m do it*
Quioquid auct9rlt9.td possum, Id omnfi tibi pollIce6r (Cic. p.
leg. Man. 24. 69), whatever power I pouea in my name, I
promise you the whole of it.
1148 The chief constructions of &lio-t one, somey other, are the fol-
lowing:
Alitld est m&lSdXcSre, &liild accusslU^ (Cic. p. CaeL 3. 6), it is
one thing to abusSy one to accuse.
Quae minus tuta Srant, &li& fossis, &li& uallls, &li& turrlbus
mtlnisbat {Liv» xzzii. 6), the parts which were less protectedy
he was fortifyiTig, some with ditcheSy some with palisades,
some with towers,
Ipsi inter se &lils &lil prGsunt {dc. de Off. i. 7. 22), they them-
sdves mutually assist one another,
Ms qu6tldie &littd ex &lio impWt (Cie. ad Fam. ix. 19), for
myself y one thing after another hinders me every day,
Equites mii &li& dllapSIiBunt {Liv, xlit . 43), the cavalry slipped
off, some by one route, some by another,
lussit &li5s &libi fSd^ {Liv, xliy. 33), he ordered them to digy
SMM in oneplaecy some in another.
Qu6tannis Uium atque Uium d6mlnum sortiunttir (Jav. xxxl
29), they take the chance of the lot every year, first for one
master, then for another,
TimeO ne fiiiud orQdam atque iUiiidf nuntiSs (Ter, Heo. y. 4.4),
* Poiero might have been inserted.
t The use of gui-qui'' in the sense of qm'que is trery raie, at any rate
in the best writers.
X That alio- did not originally mean difference is shown by the fact
that aHqui' is connected with it, and that its other deriTative altero' in
itself never signifies difference.
§ This shows the way in which atque alone came to be used after a/to-.
256 SYNTAX.
lam afraid that I am giving credit to one thing, and you
asserting another. *
Longe &li& n5bls ac tu scripsSras nuntianttir {Cic, ad Att. zi.
10. 2), the accounts brought to us differ vnddyfrom what you
write.
NOn &litis essem atquS nunc sum {Cic. ad Fam. t, 9.21), /
should not have been a different person from what I now am.
Lux longe Uliast, soils et* lychnOrum (Cic, p. Cael. 2S.67), there
is a wide difference in the light of the sun and of a lamp.
Lut&tiO quae &li& res quam cSlSrItas uict5riam d^t? {JAv,
xxii. 14) what else but rapidity gave Lutatius the victory ?
Quid Snim &liud quam admdnendi essStls ut morem tradXtum
8* pStribus seruS,retXs ! {Liv. xxii. 60) for what dse would
there have been to do but to remind you of the dwty of main-
taining a custom handed doum by yowr fathers f
Quid est dicSre &liud, Quia indignos uestrS. u^untatS cre&ttirl
nOn estis, n8cessUS.tem u5bis creandl quos non uoltis im-
p5nam ? {Liv, vi. 40) what is this but to say : Since you vnU
not wiUingly elect umoordiy persons, 1 will impose on you the
necessity of electing those whom you do not like f
B^gfluit, numquld Uiud ferret praetSr arcam {flic, de Or. n.
69. 279), he ashed whether he was carrying any thing dse be-
sides a chest.
1149 AltSro- is used in the following constructions, being alyrays
limited to one of tv)o, or the second of many :
Qudrum altSr exer(^tum perdldit, alter uendldit {Cic. p. Plane.
35. 86), of whom one has lost, the oth^r has sold an army.
AltSilt dimlcant ; altSrl uictorem timent (Cic. ad Fam. vi. 3.
4), the one party stake all upon war, the other look with terror
to the conqueror.
Miluo est quoddam bellum quft^ n&tfb^S cum coruo ; ergo
altSr altSriils ou& frangit {dc. N. D. ii. 49. 125), between the
kite and the crow there is, as it were, a sort of natwral war ;
consequently each breaks the other's eggs.
Alt^rit altSr5s &llquantum attrluSrant {Sal. Jug. 79), each
nation had consideraUy reduced the power of the other.
* When et or que are used in these phrases, the things compared are
brought together. A pause too should precede. Atque is not so limited.
t See the note to § 324.
PRONOXIRAL ADYBRBS. 257
VterquS niimSnis plSntLs, aliSr alt^rft d0 caussa h&betiir {Cic,
Somn. Sc. 2), both nimben am aocomited fM^ ike one for
one reaeoHy the other for another.
Omnes qu5rum In altSrius m&ntl iilt& pdsfltast {die, p. Quinct.
2. 6), aU thote whose livet are in the hande of another.
Ttl nunc Srls altSr &b illo {Virg, Buc. y. 49), thou shaU now be
next after him.
Ad BrtLtum nostrom hos lA>rG8 alt&ros quinquS mittemilB {Cic,
Tusc. T. 41. 121), we shaU send to our friend Brutus this
second set of five books.
Alteram tantum Squltlbus diulsit (Liv. z* 46), he gave to each
horse-soldier as much again.
1149.1 Kexntfn- no man, no one, though properly a substantive, is
found with appellations of persons, as nSmo cluls no dtizen, n6mo
ROmftntLs njo Eoman, nSmo quisquam no one whatever, where how-
ever duls, ROm&ntLs, quisquam, may be regarded themselves as
a<yeotives. In place of the genitive and dative nullliLs and nulll/:
are preferred*
PRONOMINAL ADVERBS.
1150 The pronominal adverbs,^ especially by the old writers, were
often used as adjectives in connection with nouns : as,
TSque Ibidem peruoluam in liitS {Ter. And. iv. 4. 38), and I
win give you a good rolling in the same mud.
Quid Sg5 nunc &gam nisi in angiilum &Uquo &beam ? {Ter. Ad.
y. 2. 9) what am I to do now, but take mysdf off into some
quiet comer f
Yenit medit^tus &licunde ex sol6 loco {Ter. And. n. 4. 3), lie is
just come, after conning his lesson, from some sdibary place.
Modo qu&ndam uidi uirginem hio uiciniaef (Ter. Ph. i. 2. 45),
I just now saw a maiden in this neighbourhood.
Qu5 tendltis inquit ; Qui gSnils ; undg d5m9 ? {Virg. A. viii.
113) whither haste ye, says he; who by race ; from whathorM f
Indldem ex Achaia 5riundl {Liv. xzrr. 15), sprvngfrom the same
Achaia.
Indldemne ex Amerifi ? {Cic. p. Rose. Am. 27. 74) what from
the same Ameria f
* Those forms of course being selected which accord with the relation
of place expressed in the accompanying phrase.
f Hio ttiotmae, both datives. See § 952.
z2
258 8TNTAX.
1151 The relative adverbs, Hke the relative itself, are often used
without an expressed antecedent ; as,
Feigam qu3 coepi hoc Xtgr {Ter. Hec. i. 2. 119), IvfiXL oovOinue
thU journey of mine to the place I started for.
Si rdm seruassem, fdit ubi neg6tiosu8 68sem {Plant, True. i. 2.
38), if I had saved my VMmey^ I shovld have had something
to em/pky mysdf upon.
Est, dis gratia, iinde haec fiant {Ter. Ad. i. 2.41), there isy
thanks to the gods^ the wherevnthal to do this.
Y2ig&rl qua uSlit {Cic, de Or. i. 16. 70), to wander along what-
ever road he pleases.
1151. 1 The adverbs of all pronouns used logically, especially those
.connected with the relative, may refer to antecedents of any
gender or number, so that undS, for example, stands for &b or ex
quo, qua ^r quibfis, qu9 for In or ad quem &c., iibi for in qu9
&c. : as,
Omnibiis undS pStltiir, hoc consUl dSdSrim (Cic, ad Fam. viL
11. 1), to aU defendants in a suit I would give this advice.
Fittest fiSri, tit Is undS te audissS dlds, Irfttus dixSrit (Cfic. de
Or. n. 70. 285), it may be that the person from whom you
9ay you heard it said so in anger.
N6qu8 praeter tS quisquam fuit, tibi nostrum ius contra illQs
obtlnQrSmtis {dc, p. Quinct. 9.34), nor was there besides
you any one before whom we could maintain our right against
them.
Hdmo &piid eos qu9 s6 contiilit grfttiOsiis (Cic. n. Yerr. rv. 18.
38), a man of influence among those to whom he betook A»m-
sdf.
Omni& qu& ulstls Srat constr&ta armis {Sal. Jug. 101), cill the
ground along which the eye could see was bestrewn unth arms*
YERB.
Febsons, Number, &c.
1152 The verb agrees in number and person with the agent (or no-
minative), and where it contains a participle, in gender also.
1152. 1 Where there are two nominatives to a verb, the verb either, a.
adapts itself to both, taking the plural form ; or, b. to the nearer
nominative.
PBB80NS, 5VMBSB. 269
a. Haec nSque ligo nSqaS tH fteXmiis* {Ter. Ad. i. 2. 23), trw^
neither Ivwryou ever acted thus,
Castj$r et Pollux ex Squis pugnilrS ulsl sunt {Cic, N. D. n. 2. 6),
Ccutor and Pollux appeared fighting on horseback,
b, Et tu St oxxm6B hSmlnes sciunt (Cic, ad Fam. xiii. 8. 1), tfou
and aU men hum,
SSn&tus p5piilusqu6 R5m9.iiiLS intellSgIt {Cic, ad Fam. y. 8. 2),
the senate and people of Rome perceive,
Emissae e5 cohortes quattuSr et 0. Annius praefectiis {8al,
Jug. 77), there were sent oitt to that plcuxfour battalions and
C, Annius as governor,
1152. 2 But of course when the compound sentence does not admit of
being broken up into separate parts, a plural verb is required : as,
Jus St iniuri& n&ttlr& dliUdlcantiir {Cic, de Leg. 1. 16.44), right
and wrong are natu/raUy distinguished from each other,
1152. 3 The second person, as in English, is often used indefinitely,
where we might also say ' a man.' (See \ 1224.)
1 152. 4 The third person plural, as in English, is often used indefinitely,
especially with the adverb uolgO promiscuoudy : as, aiunt they say^
fSrunt they carry the news about^ they report.
1152. 5 The compound tenses formed with fu- are rarely used. When
found beside those with Ss- they denote more forcibly precedence
in point of time : as,
LSges, quum quae l&tae sunt, tum uSr5 quae pr5mulg&tae fu6-
runt {Cic, p. Sest. 25. 66\ both those laws which were passed^
and above all those which (fhough never passed) were duly
advertised,
Arm& quae fixa in p&riStlbus fuSrant, ea htbnl sunt inuent&
{Cic, de Div. i. 34. 74), arms, which had previoudy beenfiaed
up on the walls, werefovmd on the ground,
NSque &Uter GamutSs interflciendl Tasgetil consilium fuissS
captures, nSque Ebur5nes ad castr& uenturOs essS {Com, B.
G. Y. 29), buit for this {he said) neither would the Camutes
have conspired {as they had done) to put Tasgetius to death,
* It need scarcely be noticed that 'we* has a twofold meaning, includ-
ing with the first person sometimes the second person — ego et tu, ego et
U08 ; sometimes the third, ego et hie. So also ' you' may include several
persons addressed together, ftt et tu; or may denote 'you* and 'he,' 'you*
and * they,* &c.
200 fTNTAX.
nor would the Fburones have been marching [as they then
were) to the camp,
1152. 6 FSrem &c. is used in compound tenses by many writers* pre-
dsely aa essem is.
1152. 7 The compound tenses made up of fa- with the participles in
t&ro and endo are used only in hypothetical phrases : see §$ 709
to 721, and 1214.
liTDiOA^iTB Mood.
1152. 8 The indicative is employed in affirming, denying, and asking
questions. The chief uses of this mood and its several tenses have
been already stated-t Moreover, it is evidently sufficient to point
out the cases where the other moods are required. Hence all fur-
ther remark upon the indicative is nearly superfluous. However,
it may still be useful to draw special attention to those cases where
error is not uncommon.
1153 Conditional sentences may be divided into two general heads :
1. those which put an imaginary case, the non-existence of which
is implied in the veiy terms, and which are here called hypothe-
tical, such as, ' If he were here, he would tell us,' or ' If I had
been ill, I should have consulted the physician ;' in which cases
it is clearly implied that * the person spoken of is 7ix>t present,' that
' I was not ill.' 2. Those suppositions which may be the fact or
not, so far as the speaker professes to know, as, ' If I receive the
letter, I will forward it.' This distinction being understood, it
may be stated that conditional sentences of this second class have
nearly always the indicativet in Latin in both clauses, although
the English language may have the subjunctive : thus,
Erras si id crSdXs {Ter, Haut. i. 1. 53), you a/re mistaken if you
believe that»
Perfidetur bellum, si urgSmtLs obsessSs {Liv, y. 4), the war wiU
be finished^ if we at once press the besieged,
8i qu5d 8rat grandS uas, laeti adfSrebant ; SI minils eiusmSdl
quippiam u9n&rl pJ$tuSrant, ill& quidem cert6 prO ISpusciilis
c&piebantur, p&tellae p&t^rae turlbtil& {Cic, n. Yerr. iv.
* Ai Salltnt, LiTy, and the poettt, but not Cicero,
t See §§ 45U478 and 575-691.
X But see below.
INDIOATIVB MOOD. 261
21. 47)9 if any great W9td fell in their way, they brought it
to him with joy; but if they were unaHe to run down any
thing of that eort, then at any rate they would catch him as a
sort of leveret, apUUe, a chalice^ a censer,
Apud m6 Biquld Srit eiusmj^dl, me imprudente Silt {Cic. ad
Att. 1. 19. 10), in my writings, if any thing of the hind exist,
it wiU exist without my knowledge.
Si qui aut prlu&ttLs aut pSptilils eSrum d6cr6i0 non stStit, b&-
orlfldls interdlcunt (Goes, B. G. yi. 13), if any party,
whether an individual or a state, abide not by their decision,
they forbid them the sacrifices.
S6t si tu neg&ris ducere, ibi culpam in te tr&nsferet {Ter» And.
IL 3. 5), but ifjou refuse to marry, then he*U throw the blame
on you,
Gr9.tiss11mum mihi {QcKinB, a &d eum ultr5 u6nSrIs (Cic. ad
Fam. Yii. 21), you wiU greatly oblige me if you wUl make
the first move and caU uj^om. him,*
1154 Often the indicative mood is in the clause of condition, fol-
lowed by an imperative, or a subjunctive used as an imperative ;
as,
Si me dlllgis, postrldie k&lendSrum coena ftpdd m6 {Cic, ad
Att. IV. 12), as you love ms, dine with me on the second.
Si quicquam inueuies m6 mentitum, occidito {Ter, And. r. 2.
^^9 ifyoufmd that I have told any falsehood, kill me.
Si it&st, &cturus 4t sit officiiim suum, F&ciat ; sin alitor de
hli.c re est eius sent^ntia, Re8p6nde&t mi {Ter, Ad. ni. 5.4),
if the fact be that he will do his duty, why let him do it ; but
if his purpose in this matter be otherwise, then let him give
TM an answer,
1155 The indicative mood may be used without si as a condition or
supposition : thus,
NSgat quis,t n^o ; alt, aio (TVr. E. u. 2. 21), a man says no,
I say no; he says yes, I say yes,
* It will be here seen that the conjunction may be used with every
tense of the indicatiye ; yet it is a common assertion in Latin grammars
that the subjunctive denotes doubt or contingency, and that si takes the
subjunctive.
t A mark of interrogation is often inserted, but is unnecessary.
i
8T5VAX.
1156 So also an indicative mood at the beginning of a sentence often
expresses a concession, as introdnctoiy to something opposed : as,
Triumph&uit Suim d6 Mithrld&tS, s8d It& triumph&uit, tit iU8
pulsus regn&ret {Cic, p. leg. Man. 3. 8), tnu^ SvUa did
triumph over JUithridaies, hut his triumph was of such a
nature, that the other, though defeated, stiU held roycX power,
1157 So also the double SIuS SIuS has the indicatiye mood : as,
H5mlnes n^blles, tfluS recte sen perpSram f&cSr6 coepSrunt, In
titrGque excellunt ((Tu;. p. Quinct. 8.31), men of family,
whether they commence a course of good or had conduct, in
either career become distinguished,
1158 The doubled forms of the relative,* and those which have
cumquS attached to them, take the indicative : as,
Quidquld Srit, scribes {Oc, ad Att. xrv. 1), whatever it he, you
wiU write,
Tu qu&ntus-quantu'sf, nil nisi sapi^ntia's {Ter, Ad. m. 3. 40),
yov,, every inch of you, are nothing hut philosophy,
Quamqu§,mst scelestus, n6n committet h6die unquam iterum
ut u4pulet {Ter, Ad. n. 1. 5), he he ever so great a scoundrel,
he will not run the risk of a second thrashing today,
Ytut 6rat, manstim tamen op6rtuit {Ter, Haut. i. 2.26), no
matter how it was, he ought stiU to have staid.
Hoc qu5quo Ib5 mScum 6rlt {Plaut. AuL ui. 3.1), IwiU have
this with me wherever Igo,
Quicunque Is est, el m6 pr5flte^r InXmlcum {Cic. ad Fam. x.
31. 3), whoever that man may he, I dedare myself his enrnvy,
Dsitft&n c5pias, quantaecunquS sunt, nostrfts essS duco {Cic,
ad Fam. xv. 1.6), the forces of Deiotarus, in their full ex-
tent. Hook upon as ours.
Qui tlMcunquS terrftrum sunt, !tbi est omn8 relpubllcae prae-
sXdium {Cic, Phil. ii. 44. 113), and wherever in the world they
are, there is every thing that is to guard the cowntry,
1158. 1 In relative propositions which limit something which is stated
in general terms, the old writers, and even Cicero at times, used
tiie indicative.
* See § 353-358.
f Printed in the editions so that the veib wholly disappears ; a com-
mon eiror in the text of Terence.
IKDIOATIYE HOOD. 363
C&t5uem u6ro quis nostrSrum 5r&t5rum, qui quldem nunc sunt,
Iggit ? {Cic. Brut. 17. 65), hu Goto — who of owr onUorSy at
least those now living ^ ever reads f
Ex 5rS,to]ibtis AttXcIs antlquisstbnl sunt, qu5rum quldem 8cript&
constant*, PMdSs St Alclbl&d6s {Cic. de Or. n. 22. 93), of
Athenian orators the oldest^ at least among those whose writ-
ings are atUhenticatedy are Pericles and AUihiades,
Quae tibi mands.ul, udlim oilres, quod sInS tuS. mSlestift f&cSrS
p5tSrl8 {Cic, ad Att. i. 5. 8), these commissions IwotUd thank
^ou to attend tOy as far as you shall be able vnthout inconveni-
ence to yourself
Tu t&men uSlim ne intermittas, qudd Sius f&cSrS pStSris, scrl-
b6re ad ,m6 {Cic, ad Att. xi. 12. 4), you however will 1 beg of
you not cease, so far as you have it in your^ower, to write to
me,
Erus, quantum audio, ux5re excldit {Ter, And. n. 5. 12), mas-
ter, from what I hear, has lost the chance of a wife,
Kil locist 80c6rdiae^ Quantum intellexi m6do senis sent^ntiam
{Ter, And. i. 3. 1), ikere is no room for stupidity, to judge
from what I saw just now of the old marCsfedings,^
1159 Sentences which express repeated action have the indicative in
the secondary clause in the best authors : as,
Quum uSr essS coepSrat, d&bat sS l&bOrl {dc, n. Yerr. y. 10.
27), o^ the beginning of every spring he gave hirnsdf up to
business.
Hostes tlbi &lIquos singiil&rls ex n&ui Sgrgdientls conspexSrant,
impSdItds idSriebantiir {Caes. B. G. it. 26), the enemy, when^
ever they saw any coming ovJt of a ship by themselves, fdl upon
them before they could get dear.
Si S. persSquendo hostis deterrSrS nSquIuSrant, disiectSs & teigO
circumufiniebant {Sal, Jug. 50), if they could not deter the
enemy from jpwrsuit, as soon, as they were scattered, they hept
endosing them on the rear.
* So the Mss., not oonstent.
f In such phrases as : non ego te, quod sciam, unquaim ante hune
. diem uidi {Plant. Men. iii. 2. 35), sciam is probably an old indicative
corresponding to injjuam ; as it must be in haud scittm an ne opus sit
guidem {Cie, de Am. 14.51), and in haud sciam an iustissumo triumpho
{lAv. IX. 15). It seems not unlikely that an erroneous interpretation of
this sdam led to the use of the subjunctiye in the parenthetic phrawf,
quod meminerim, &c. (See § 1 195.)
264 SYNTAX.
Yt ctiiusqug sors excldSrat, &l&cSr arm& c&piebat (Liv.* zxi.
42), everi/ time the lot of any onefdl ovJt of ike urn, ddigkted
he took his arms,
Efistolabt Tenses.
1160 The use of the tenses in epistolary writing is occasionally very
peculiar. The letters in ancient Italy being sent nearly always by
private hand, and the roads with the &cilities for travelling being
very defective, a long time often elapsed between the writing and
the receiving a letter. Hence it was not uncommon for the wri-
ter to make allowance for this interval, and to use those tenses
which were suited to the time when the letter should be read : as,
EtsI nil s&ne hdhebam\ ndul, quod post a^Misset quam dMissem
ad te PhllSgSnl littSras, t&men quum PhXlStlmum Romam
r^itt^rem, scrlbendum &llquid ad tQfuitf <bc. (Cic. ad Att.
Yi. 3. 1), aUhxnigh I have indeed wxthing new that has oc-
curred, aJt least since I put my last in the hands of FhUo-
genes for you^ yetasl&m sending Philotimus hack to Eome^
I am botmd to write something to you,
HdMbam acta urb9.na usque ad N5nas Marti9.s, 9 qulbiis intd-
Ugebam omni& pdtiiis actum Xrl quam de prouincils {Cic, ad
Att. YI. 2. 6), / have the proceedings in the city down to the
7th of March, from which I am disposed to infer that the
question of the provinces wiU he postponed sine die,
Litt^rftrum exemplum qu&s ad PompSium scripsi, mm tlbi {Cic,
ad Att. III. 8.4), 1 enclose you a copy of a letter IhavejuM
written to Pompey,
1161 Such terms as * yesterday,' * today,' * tomorrow,' * here,' are
avoided for the same reason. Besides, it was ^ from the ordi-
nary practice to affix a date of time and place, so that the words
might have been unintelligible.
PtLtedlis magniis est}: rumor Pt516maeum esse in regn5. . • •
* Livy is not consisteiit in this construction. Examples of a sub-
junctive in him are : ubi dUfisset (i. 32), quum uidissent (ii. 27), quem^
cumque prehendisset (iii. 11), sicubi conserta nauis esset (xxi. 50), ubi
semel procubuissent (xxii. 2), ubi conuenissent (xxii. 38).
f Otherwise the tenses should have been, habeo^ acciderUj dederim^
remittatn^ est.
% The epistolary tense would have been erat.
IXPESATITE. 266
PompfiiilB in Oom&num P&illXbuB uSnit. Misit ad m8 stft-
tdm qui 8&latem nuntiftret. Ad eum postrldis m&nS uddi^
ham quum haec icrip^ {Cio, ad Att. iy. 10), we have a strong
report down here thai Ptolemy has been restored to his throne,
.... Pompey arrived at his villa yesterday. He forthwith
sent one of his people with his compliments to mje. lam going
to pay him a visit this Wyoming,
Puteoli, April* 22.
Trlginta. diss irant ipsi, quum has ddham litt^ras^ per quos nul-
l&s & u5bls aceepifram (Cie. ad Att. m. 21), it is now exactly
thirty days since I heard from you,
1162 ' Sach change of tenses occurs chiefly at the beginning and end
of letters, where the writer has it more forcibly impressed upon
him that he is not in conversation. It is also confined for the
most part to those matters which are likely to be affected by the
interval of time that must elapse before the letter is read.
IXPEBATIYB.
1163 The chief distinction between the two tenses is seen in §§ 592,
593. The future is chiefly used in laws.
Diuls omnibus pont^ces, singtUis flSmlnes suntQ (apud Oic.
de Leg. n. 8. 20), /or the gods in general there shaU be a col-
lege of poTUificeSy each separate god shaU have hisflamen,
1164 It is also used in the language of wills : as,
TXtius fOius mens mihi her6s estS (Gaiusy ii. 179), my son
Titius shall be my heir,
1165 It is also used generally in reference to future time, more par-
ticularly if that time be fixed by any condition or otherwise : as,
Ybi n6s lau^rimus, si uoles lau&to (Ter, E. in. 5. 4S), when we
have bathed, bathe if you will,
Quoquo hie spectabit, e6 tu spectat6 semul ;
Si quo hie gradietur, p&riter progrediminot {Plaut, Ps. in. 2. 69),
♦ The Festival of Pales was on the 21st
f So the Mas., not progrediminor ; and indeed the passage requires
the nngular. Moreover Madvig has proved, what Kvarup already main-
tained, that the form in minor does not exist. That in mino does exist,
and belongs to the singular. See Madvig, Opiisc. ii. 239.
A A
266 SYNTAX.
Wherever he looksy thither must you look with him ;
Wherever he Ttiarches^ march you too forward by his side.
Cum u&letudlnl tuae constUaSris, turn consiilltd nfiulgSLtiSnl
(pie, ad Fam. xyi. 4. 3)^ when you have taken measures for
your heaJUhy then and not tiU then take measures for your
voyage.
1166 The present is used in a less authoritative manner, and is ap-
plied both to the immediate occasion and to general directions.
Iun6 Lucina Ur opem (Ter. And. in. 1.15), Juno Ladna^ aid
me, I implore thee.
Mihi cr6dS (Cic. ad Fam. ix. 16. 8), take my word for it.
lustltiam c01e et piSt&tem {Cic. Somn. So. 3), cuUivate justice
and affection.
Yld$ quam rem figas {Ter, Ad. ni. 2.45), have a care what you
are after.
C&uS sis (Ter. E. iv. 7. 29), he on yowrgvard, if you please.
1167 The present of the subjunctiye mood is often used as an im-
mediate imperative : as,
EcfSrant^ quae secum hue att1il6runt (jTer. Haut. iv. 4. 23),
let them hrvng out what they hrouglu here with them.
Quod be$nl d&tur, fru&rSf dum licet (Ter. Haut. ii. 3.102), all
the good that offers^ enjoy while you may.
1168 The presents cur& and ^ and the subjunctive uSlim are often
prefixed to a subjunctive of a verb, with or without tit, and so
express more forcibly what might have been expressed by a simple
imperative of the latter verb : as,
Qu&rS sd quod constltiltum cum pMfigra h&bes, fSc iit In &lium
diem diffSr&s (dc. ad Fam. vii. 4), if then you have any
cTigagement with the gout, mind you put it off to another day.
Fftc &put te ut si6s (Ter, And. n. 4), mind you have your wits
about you.
* This subjunctiye is due to an ellipsis of a verb which is occasionally
supplied: as, Treuiros uites censeo (Cic. ad Fam. yii. 13.2), * 1 recom-
mend you to fight shy of the Treviri.*
t Madyig would limit this use of the second person to the cases of a
general nature, where * you' means * any one.* But he admits that there
are some examples where * you* is used in its definite sense, and himself
quotes from Terence, Si cerium est facere, facias ; uerum ne post ctd-
pam con/eras in me^ * If you are resolved to do it, why do it ; but do not
afterwards throw the blame on me.*
IMPEBATIYE. 267
Oura ut quam priinum uSnias {Ck, ad Fam. iy. 10), take care
and come as soon as you can,
Tu uSlim &iiimo siipienti fortlquS sis {Cic, ad Fam. ix. 12), do
yov, meanwhile^ I leg yoUy act vnth pkUosophy and firmness,
1169 * An affirmative in the future often expresses a direction with a
confidence that it will be followed : as,
Tu intSreS. non cessabXs St e& quae h&bSs instXttit& perp^li6s
(Cic, ad Fam. y. 12. 10), yon meanwhile wiU lose tio time in
giving the last polish to what you have in hand.
liquid accXdSrit ndul, HlciSs ut sciam {Cic. ad Fam. xnr. 8), if
any thing new occurs, you will let nfi£ know.
1170 The present imperative is used at times to express a condition :
as,
Tolle hanc dpiniSnem, luctum susttQMs {Cic. Tusc. i. 13. 30),
OTice put an end to this opinion, and you wiU have put an
end to all mowmingfor the dead.
1171 A question may be so asked as to amount to an order : as,-
Etiam t&c9s t^ Egd c&u6bo {Ter. Ad. iv. 2. 11), hdd your
tongue; Syrus will he on his guard.
Quin conscendlmtLsf gqu5sf {Liv. i. 57) comcy come, let tut
m/ownt our horses.
Abint hinc in mal&m rem cum suspicione ist&c, soelus % {Ter.
And. IL \.VI) go and he hanged with your suspicions, you
rascal.
Non tu hinc &bis ? {Ter. E. iv. 7. 29) he of, sir.
1172 Hence in some phrases, such as those just quoted, the present
imperative takes the place of the indicative : as,
Etiam§ tu hoc resp6nde, quid istic tibi negotist. Mihin ? Ita
{Ter. And. v. 2.8), answer m/e this at once, what husiness have
you in that cottage {which you have just left) f What husiness
have I ? Yes, you.
* Literally * Are you yet silent P' with a hint that he will soon be
made so.
f Literally * Why do we not mount our horses ?
X Literally *Are you going? &c. ; if not, I^Il help you.* Pronounce
dbtn^ ain.
§ Pronounce ityam, qu*i8tio, ti and iiit».
^68 BTHTAX.
Quin* dio, quid est (Ter. And. n. 6. 18), eomey come, sir^ teU me
what U is.
Quin tu hoc audi (Ter. And. n. 2.'9), come^ wim^ listen to this.
1173 Sentences of forbidding, Ao. are Yariously formed. H6 with
the future imperatiye is used in laws, and occasionally elsewhere :
Noctum& miiliSrum 8&crXfici& n6 sunt5, praetSr oll& quae prO
pdpillO nt6 ilent; n6ue XnltiantO, nisi iit assdlet, GSrSi!,
GraecO s&crO (apud Cic. de Leg. n. 9. 21), sacr^ices by wrnien
at night there shall be none, save those which are dultf made
for the state ; nor shall they cd^rate mt^steries, except as is
wonty to CereSy according to the Oreek rite,
B^re9. flantS, ne &r&td, sSmen n6 i&clt5 (apud Plin. xviu. 77),
when the north wind Uows, pUmgh not, sow not.
1 174 Ne with the present imperative is found for the most part only
in the old writers and the poets, and even there but rarely : as,
Ah n6 saeul tant5p8r8 {Ter, And. y. 2. 27), oh, be not in swh
a passion.
Quaeso &nlmum n6 desponds {Plcmt. Merc. lu. 4. 29), I prithee
despond not.
immium n9 crSdS c51drl (Virg, Buc. n. 17), trust not too much
to the otOside.
1175 The subjunctiye mood is used in forbidding, <S7C., but generally
in the perfect tense. The use of the second person of the present
subjunctiye is rare, except when that person is used indefinitely .t
Nihil ignOuSris, nihil grfttiae caussft f^ris, mlsSricordia com-
mStus n6 sis {Cic. p. Mur. Z1.65), forgive nothing (fhey say),
do nothing to oblige a friend, be proof against pity.
N6 transiSris IbCrum, n6 quid rel tXbi sit cum Sftguntlnis {Liv.
XXI. 44), cross not the Ebro {he says), have nought to do with
the people of Saguntttm.
Ne me istoc posthac n6mine appell4ssis {Ter. Ph. y. 1.15), do
not caU me by that name for the future.
* In this way these two particles, etiam and quin^ practically acquire
a new meaning, just as mtidni^ * why not,' comes to signify * of course.'
Compare too the secondary meaning of wkow arising from its use in
questions.
t These qualifications are from Madvig.
SUBJUNOTIYE. 269
N6 quaer&s (TVr. Ilaut. it. 4.23), ask no questions,
Isto bSno UtarS dum adsit, quum absit nS r^ulr9.s {Cic. de
Sen. 10. 33)^ enjoy that Uessing wkUe you have U ; when goTie^
grieve not for it.
1176 The verbs c&uS, noli, nQlim, are frequently used in negative
requests : as,
Cauneas, t. e, c&uS ne eSs (ap. Oic. de Div. n. 40. 84), do not go,
C&u8 te essS tristem sentiat {Ter, And. n. 3. 29), take care he
does not perceive you are otU of spirits.
C&ug dixSris (Ter. Ad. in. 4. 12), say it not.
Nollte id uellS quod fiSrI non p5test {Cic. Phil. vii. 8. 26), do
not wish for what is impossible.
Hoc nSlim m6 i5c&rl piitSs (Cic, ad Fam. ix. 15.4), do not, I
pray you^ suppose that lam joking in this.
1177 The poets have many other imperatives used in negative re-
quests, as fugS, mitts, parcS, &c.
Quid sit fiiturum eras, fiigS quaerSrS (Sor. Od. i. 9. 13), what
shaU be Uymorrow, shim to ask.
Mitts sect&n {Hor. Od. i. 38.3), ceate to search.
Subjunctive.*
1178 A secondary clause or subordinate proposition is attached to
the main clause or proposition in four ways : a. by a relative, h,
by an interrogative, c, by an accessary conjunction, or d, by the
construction called accTisative and infinitive.
1178.1 With this subordinate relation must not be confounded the
relation between two coordinate clauses, united by such words as
St and, quS or, or else placed beside each other without any con-
junction. Coordinate propositions are either both main propo-
sitions, or both subordinate clauses attached to the same main
proposition.
1178. 2 When a secondary clause beginning with a conjunction pre-
cedes the main clause, the secondary clause is called the prdt&sU
(putting forward), and the following main clause the dpdddsis
(payment of a debt).
* The chief uses of the sabjunctive have already been briefly pointed
out in §§ 487-505 and 594-624.
Aa2
270 8TVTAZ.
1178.3 The subjunctiye is used where a proposition is put forward^
not as a fact^ but as a conception to be spoken of. Hence it is
used in secondary clauses attached to the main clause of a sentence
by a conjunction, or relative, or interrogatiye : 1st, where an ob-
ject is expressed ; 2d, where the assertions or thoughts of another
than the speaker are stated ; 3d, where that which does not exist
is imagined, <bc. But it will be practically more useful to deal
with the separate cases.
1179 The objecf* or purpose of an action may be expressed by an
imperfect of the subjunctive and the coi\junctionB tit, quo, qui,
and the relative ; or if the object be prevention, by ut n6, n6^
quOmlniis, and quin : as,
Aliis ndcent, iit In ftlios llbSr&les sint {Cic, de Off. i« 14. 42),
theif injwre some, that tkey may he generous to others,
Mftgis mihi tit incommSdet quam iit obsSqu&tur gn&t5 {Ter,
And. 1. 1.135), m^yre to antwy me than to oblige my son,
Sibi quisqud tendebat ut p8rIctQ5 prlmtisf SuSdSret {lAv, xxi.
33), every <mefor himself was striving to be the first to get out
of the danger.
Obducuntur cortlcS trunci qu5 sint & frigdrlbus tuti5r6s (Cic.
N. D. n. 47. 120), the trunk of a tree is sheathed with barky
that it may be safer from the edd.
Yerb& rgpert& sunt quae indlc&rent udlunt&tem {Cic, p. Oaec.
18. 53), words were invented to indicate the wiU,
Galllnae pullos pennis fluent n9 frlgdrS laedantiir {Cic, N. D.
n. 52. 129), hefns warm their chickens with their wings, that
they may not be hurt by the cold,
Vix me contlneo quIn inuiJlem in C&pillum (Ter, E. v. 2. 20), /
with difficulty restrain myself from flying at his hair,
ElSfantds in primam &ciem induci iussit, SI quern InlcSre e& res
tiimultum posset {Liv, xxvii. 14), he ordered the elephants
to be led into ^ first line, in hopes thai tliis manoeuvre might
cause soma confusion,
1180 Hence also verbs of commanding, advising, begging, wishing,
compelling, preventing, permitting, are followed by an imperfect
of the subjunctive, and tit, or the negatives^ ut n9, n6, quomlntts,
quIn:
* See §1 699, 607.
t Prtus in the Mas., altered by some to prior.
StTBJVVOTIYB. 271
A112(br0glbii8 impSrSuit iit hb frOmentl cOpiam fSoSrent (Cae8.
B. G. 1. 28), he commanded the AUchrogee to mpply them
fpithcom.
M5net iit in rSllcum temptiB omnls suspIciOnes ultet {Caes*
B. G. I. 20), he advises him for the fiUiMre to avoid aU sus-
picion.
Per te Sgo deQs Oro ut me aditLuCs (Ter, And. m. 3. 6), ^ the
gods I heg you to assist me,
Sinite 6rat6r ut sim* {Ter. Hec* proL n. 2), aUow m^ to he an
intercessor*
1181 Not unfrequently the iit is omitted before the subjunotiye in
short phrases : as,
SlnS me expurgem (Ter, And. v. 3.29), allow me to dear mysdf.
Quo dis B5m& te exltorum piites uSlim ad mS scnba^ (Cic. ad
Att. n. 5. 3), / wotdd wish y&u, to write me word what day
you think you shaU leave Eome,
1181. 1 But Terbs of wishing, and also proMbe-, imp6ra-, sXn-, itLbe-,
p&ti- (r.), and uSta-, are also found with the accusative and infini-
tive, especially the passive infinitive; and indeed the last three of
these six verbs are but rarelj found with iit.
1182 The result\' is expressed by the subjunctive. This construction
is common after verbs, &c. of accomplishing and happening : as,
TempSrantia ecftdt iit appStltiOnes rectae r&tiOnI pSi'eant {Cic.
Tusc. IV. 9. 22), sdf-restrairU effects thisy that the passions
wait v/pon right reason,
Accldit ut primus nunti&ret {Cie, p. Bosc. Am. 34. 96), it hap-
pened that he was thefiret to bring word,
Nunquam accsdo quin abs te &beam doctior {Ter. E. iv. 7.21),
1 never go near you withotU leaving you the wiser. %
Non possunt multl rem SmittSre ut nont plUres sScum in ean-
dem c&l&mXt&tem trahant {Cic. p. leg. Man. 7. 19), it is
impossible for many persons to lose their property without
dragging a stUl larger number into the sama calamity,
* This has been altered to exwatw sim by those who did not know
that the last syllable of orator might be long in Terence.
f The form fctxo is used only parenthetically, and does not affect the
mood of the verb which accompanies it, which is always the future of the
indicative. Faxo tcieSf * you shall know, trust me for that.' This has
been shown by Madvig in the second volume of his Opuscula.
X Non is required where the result is expressed ; ne would be wrong.
272 8T5TAX.
niud tibi affirmQ, si rem istam ex sententia pressSris, fSre tit
absens & multis, cum r^Srls ab omnibus coUaudSrS {Cic.
ad Fam. i. 7. 5), of one Mng lasswre you^ and, ikat is thisy
that if you carry the matter out aatisfactorilyy the consequence
vnU be that even in your absence you will be praised by many,
and when you return you will be lauded to the skies by aU.
Tantum Spes creu^rant, ut mSuSre ann& nee Mezentius, n^ue
ulli &lii acc^dae ausi sint {Liv, i. 3), so yreatly had their
power increased^ that neither Mezentius nor any other of their
neighbours dared to draw the sword,
1183 With phrases which denote hindrance^ opposition, avoiding,
omission, doubt, the subjunctiye is preceded by nS, qu5mlniis or
quin, but by the last, only in case there be with the main verb a
negative to express the non-existence of the hindrance : as,
Lnp^or d5l5re &nlml n6 pluriL dicam {Cic, p. Sulla, 33. 92), /
am prevented by indi^uUionfrom saying more.
Per m6 stetit* quo minus hae flerent ntiptiae {Ter, And. iv.
2. 16), it was myfauU that this marriage did n^t take place.
N^ue &best suspldo quin ipsS slbi mortem conscIuSrit (Caes.
B. G. I. 4), nor is there wanting a suspicion that he was the
author of his own death.
Prorsus nihil &best quin sim mlserrttmtls {Cic, ad Att. xi. 15. 3),
absolutely nothing is now wanting to complete my misery,
Numquidf uis quin ftbeam? {Ter, Ad. n. 2.39) is there any
thing else I can do for you before I go f
F&cSrS non possum quin ad t6 mittam {Cic, ad Att. xii. 27. 3),
/ cawiMt but send to you,
Kon diiblto quin mirSrS {Cic, ad Att. xvi. 21), I do not doubt
that you are surprised.
Quid est caussae quin cSlSniam in l&nlctLlum possint dSdacSrS %
{Cic. in Bull. n. 27. 74) what reason is there to prevent them
from founding a colony on the Janicvlum itsdff
1184 Impersonal phrases that signify an addition, &c. are generally
followed by ut and the subjunctive : as,
I
* Forcellini is inaccurate in making per me stat equivalent to sum in
caussa. The phrase can only be used of hindrances.
f A question is often equivalent to a negative. This, or a shorter
form, numgttid uis 1 was a civil mode of saying ' Good bye^ {Plaut, Cap. i.
2. 88).
r
SUBJITNOTIVB. 273
BSIlcTimst ut d6 ftlldtfttS pauc& dic&mtLs {Cie, p. leg. Man. 16.
47)^ it rtmaimfoT tM to My a few words on good fortum/t,
Accessit* eo ut mllXtes 6iu8 concl&m&iint pficem 86 uellS (^.
ad Fam. x. 21.4), there tDoa added to all this thai his aoldienf
cried out they wuhedfor peace,
1185 In the same way tit and the subjunctive often follow the verb
est with or without a substantiye or neuter adjective : as,
SSd est m5s hdmlnum ut nOlint eundem plurlbus rSbiis ezcel-
ISrS (Cie, Brut. 21.84), hzUttis in fact a habit with the world
not to allow that the same person excds in eeveral things,
YSrlsImXlS ndn est ut mdnilnientis mSidrum pSctiniam antSpO-
nSret (Gic, n. Yerr. iv. 6. 11), it is not likdy that he valued
mxyney above the monuments of his ancestors,
Atque el ne intSgrumf quXdem Srat ut clulbus iur^ reddSret
{Cic, Tusc. V. 21. 62), hut he had it not even in his power
then to restore to his countrymen their rights.X
1186 Verbs &c. oi fearing have the subjunctive, with nS if the ob-
ject be not desired, with tit if it be desired :§ as,
YSreor ne hoc serpat longitLs (Cic. ad Att. 1. 13. 3), IfeoMr that
this wUl cre^ further.
Omamenta m^tuo ut possim r6cipere {Plant, Cure. iv. 1. 3),
^e omam/ents I am afraid I shaU not he able to recover*
Hand 11 s9ii6 pSrlciilumst n6 non mortem aut optandam aut
certe non timendam piltet {Cic. Tusc. v. 40. 118), there is
asswredly no risk of his escaping from the hdief that death is
an object to he desired^ or at least not to he feared.
* Aeeedit is often followed by quod and the indicative, particularly
where the past or present is spoken of. So also adde quod,
f Mihi non est integrum^ * the thing is no longer entire ; I have taken
a step in it by which I am committed to a continuance in the same direc-
tion.*
X In such phrases as the preceding a notion of futurity is commonly
implied, and hence it will generally, perhaps in good writers always, be
found that an imperfect of the subjunctive is alone admissible. Even
in the second sentence the idea is, ' It is not likely we shall find that
&c.* It should be observed too, that the subjunctive phrase always fol-
lows.
§ Observe that the Latin inserts a negative where the English has
none, and vice versa.
II This is an example of a practice common in Cicero, the crowding
natives in a sentence.
274 . 8T5TAZ.
1187 The quality or quantity is often expressed by the subjunctive
with iit, or the relative, preceded by some word signifying so or
sitch.
Non tarn impfirltust rQrum ut non sciret (Caee, B. G. i. 44), he
is not so inexperieTiced in the world as not to know,
Bes SiusmSdl cUiiLs exitus pr5uXdSrI possit {Cic. ad Fam. vi. 4),
a matter of stick a kind that the issue of it can be foreseen,
N^ue Snim tu Is es qui quid sis nesci&s (Oic, ad Fam. v. 12. 6),
nor indeed are you the sort of person not to Ictmw what is due
to you*
Tant& ptitS.bS.tiir titllXtas perclpi ex b5biis, iit eorum uiscMbus
uesci scSltis h&b6r6tiir {Cic, N. D. n. 64. 169), so highly
valued were the advantages derived from the oxy that to eat
hisfUsh was deemed an impiety,
1188 Sometimes the pronominal noun or adverb is omitted in the
Latin, but the subjunctive still retained : as,
PlnftritLs Srat ulr ftcSr et qui nihH in fIdS Slciildrum rSpOnSret
{JAv. XXIV. 37), Firyarius was a nvan of energy y and not one
to rdy at all on the honou/r of the SicUians,
1189 In ind^nite expressions the relative preceded by a verb sig-
nifying existence is followed by a subjunctive* : as,
Sunt qui censeant {Cic, Tusc. i. 9. 18), there are persons who
think,
Inuenti autem multl sunt qui dtiam ultam pr5fundSr6 prO
p&trift p&r&ti essent {Cic, de Off. i. 24. 84), and there have
heenfotmd many who were ready to pour out their very life^
Uoodfor their fatherland,
Quis est quin cemat ? {Cic, Acad. Pr. n. 7. 20) who is there
who does not see? ^
Fuit anteSi tempus quum Germftnos Galll uirtutS siip^r&rent
{Caes, B. G. vi. 24), there was formerly a time when the Ger-
mans were surpassed in valour by the Oalli.
Est quS.tSniis ftmlcXtiae d&rl uSni& possit (Cic. de Am. 17. 61),
there is a line up to which friendship may be indulged.
Est iibi id u&leat (Cic, Tusc. v. 8. 23), there are cases where this
principle avails,
* In these sentences the English language can always employ the
word ' ther^*
BUBJUNCTIYE. 275
Null& ddmiis in Slcflift 15ciiples fiiit, iibi istS non textrlnum
instltuSrit {Cic, il Yerr. it. 26. 58), there was not a wecHihy
houae in SicUy^ but what tJiai man eetupinit a doth mornvr
factory,
InuentiLs est scrlb& quldam qui comlcum ^tUos confizSrit
{Cic, p. Mar. 11.25)^ ^lere turned up a certain derkt who
caught the weasde napping,*
1190 There are many phrases apparently similar to these where the
indicative is found, but in most of these it will be seen that the
relative clause is the subject, and what precedes it the predicate :
as,
Quis illic est qui c6ntra me astat ? {Plaut. Pers. i. 1. 13) who
is the man yonder who stands facing me f
Here the person alluded to is altogether definite.
Sunt autem multl qui Sripiunt ftliis qu5d Uliis largiantiir {Cic,
de Off. L 14. 43), and indeed those who rob one set ofnien to
lavish what they thus rob on, another set, are a num^ous doss,
1191 Sometimes est-qui, sunt-Kjulf are to be looked upon as nouns,
equivalent to nonnSmo, nonnulll, and are then followed by the
indicative: as.
Set 6st-quod suscens6t tibi {Ter. And. n. 6. 17), but he is an-
noyed with yov, about a certain matter.
Sunt-quos currXciilQ puluSrem Olymplco
CoUegissS iiivat {Ear. Od. L 1.3),
To some on Olympic course to have swept up dost is maddening
Sunt-qui Xt& dicunt impSri& Pisonis siiperbft barb&ros n^ul-
uissS p&tl {Sal, Cat. 19), som^e do say that the barbarians could
not bear the tyrannical commands of Piso,
Est-iibI peooat (Hor, Ep. n. 1. 63), sometimes {the world) goes
wrong,
1192 After digno-, Id5neo-, apto-, Uno-, sSlo-, prlmo-, <Src., what is
necessary to complete the predicate is expressed by the relative or
tit with the subjunctive ;t as,
* Literally ' pierced the eyes of the crows.'
t Nay Propertius (iii. 7. 17) has ett-quibua for a dative. Compare
too the Greek tertvou
t But an infinitive also in later writers, as legi dignus {Q^%nt, x. 1. 9Q),
See also § 1255.
276 BTHTAZ.
Liui&nae fiSbbtUae non 8&tis dignae sunt quae ItSrum l^aniiir
{Cic, Brut. 18.71), the plays of Idvius do not deserve a second
reading,
IdSneus udn est qui impStret (Cic. p. leg. Man. 19. 57), he is
not a fit person to obtain his request,
SOltLs es, Caesar, oilitLB in uictori& cScldSrit n6m5 nisi armS.tiis
{Cic, p. Deiot. 12. 34), you are the only conqueror, Caesar, in
whose victory no onefdl unless armed,
1193 After comparatives, quam qui- or quam iit is followed by the
subjunctive: as,
MfiiorSs arbdres caedebant quam quas ferrS cum armis miles
posset (Liv, xxziii. 5), they were cvMing dovm trees too heavy
for a soldier to carry in addition to his arms,
FSrociSr or&tio ulsa est quam quae b&benda &pud r6gem esset
{Liv, xzxi. 18), the speech was looked upon as in too high a
tone to he addressed to a king,
KXmis laet& rSs est uls&, m&iorquS quam tit eam st&tim c&pSi^
&nlm5 posset {Liv. xxii. 51), the suggestion seemed too de-
lightful and too grand for him to grasp imvnediaJtdy,
Senior iam St infirmior quam ut contentiSnem dicendl sustl-
n6ret, obmutuit et concldit {lAv, xxxiii. 2), leing now
advanced in years and too weak to support any violent effort
in speaking, he suddenly lost his voice andfeR to the ^/hmndm
1194 A predicate is limited and explained by qui- and the subjunc-
tive :• as,
PeccassS mihi uldeor qui 9. t8 discessSrim (Cic, ad Fam. xvi.
1.1), I did wrong, I think, in leaving you.
Satin sfi»nu's, m6 qui id r6gites ? (Ter, And. iv. 4. 10) are you
quite in your senses to ask me that f
1195 So also a relative clause with a subjunctive (but not to the
exclusion of the indicative)tiB used at times to limit what is said :
as,
• Quippe qui-, utpote qui-, ut qui-, are also used in this way, but
with greater emphasis. The indicative is found in some writers in these
phrases.
f See § 1158. 1. Many passages are unduly put forward as examples
under this head by both Madvig (§ 364, Anm. 2) and Zumpt (§ 559) : as,
quod sine molesHa iua fiat {Cic. ad Fam. xiii. 23), qui modo tolerabili
eondioione ait {Cie, in Cat it. 8. 16), qvod suum did uellet {do, ii. Verr.
IT. 16.36).
StTBJTNOTiyS. 277
RSfertae sunt Sr&tiOnes centum quinqu&gintS., quas quldem
&dhuc inuenSrim et legSrim, et uerbis et rebiis illustilbtLs
(Cic, Brut. 17. 65), the hundred and ffty orations are replete^
at least such of them as I have hitherto come across and ready
with brilliant language and hriUiant matter,
NSque Srat In ezerclttl, qui quidem pSdestrift stlpendift f^cisset,
uir fEtctis nObUidr (Idv, yii. 13), nor was there a soldier in
the army\ at least of those who had served on footy more dis-
tinguished for his deeds,
1196 In indirect questions, i, e, where an interrogative pronoun or
conjunction and verb are attached to some verb or phrase, the
verb following the interrogative* is in the subjunctive : as,
K&tur& decl&rat quid uSlit (Cic. de Am. 24. 88), Nature pro-
claims what she wishes.
TSneo quid erret, et quid figam h&beo {Ter. And. in. 2. 18), /
twig what his mistake is, and know what to do.
Ex captluis cognduit quo in 15co hostium cQpiae consSdissent
{Caes. B. G. v. 9), he learnt from the prisoners where the
efMmy*s forces were posted.
Ign5rS.bat rex iitSr e5rum esset OrestSs (Cic. de Am. 7. 24), the
king knew not which of the two was Orestes.
Ex hoc quantum bdnl sit In ILmlcItia, iadlcSjI potest (Cic. de
Am. 7. 23),/rom this a judgment may he formed, how mwih
happiness there is in friendship,
Existit quaestiO num quando &mlcl nSuI uStSrIbus sint antS-
p5nendl (Cic. de Am. 19. 67), there rises the guestiony whether
at any time new friends are to be preferred to old friends.
Oum incertiLs essem, Ubi essSs (Cic, ad Att. i. 9), being uncer-
tain where you were.
Discent quemadmddum haeo ftant (Cic. de Am. 12.41), they
will learn how these things are done.
Diiblto an YSniisiam tendam (Cic. ad Att. xvi. 5. 3), I am at a
loss whether to make for Vemisia.
C5pia8 suas, iudlci5n$ non conduxSrit, &n ^ultum aduentti
prohlbltus, dilbiumst (Caes. B. G. vi. 31), whether it was
* Care must be taken not to confound the relative and interrogative.
Seio quid qwteras means, ' I know the question you wish to put ;* but
sow quod quaeris, *" I. know the answer to it' Compare Ter, And. iii. 3. 4,
it quid te ego uelim, U quod tu quaeris scies,
B B
278 STHTAX,
from design that he omitted to coUeet hu forces, or hecaute ke
was prevented ly the arrival of ow cavalry , is dotibtful,
D^eam necnS ddleam nihil interest (Cic, Tusc. u» 12. 29),
whether I am hurt or not hurt, makes no difference.
Id ulsO, tun iin iUi insilmant (Ter. And. in. 3. 3), the obfect of
my visit is to see whether it he you or they that are Triad,
De paSris quid ftgam, nQu h&be5 {Cic. ad Att. yii. 19), what to
do with the hoys, I know not^
Hanc (p&ludem) bI nostil translrent, hostSs expect&bant (Goes,
B. G. IL 9), this (morass) the enemy were waiting to see whe-
ther our men would cross,*
1197 In the older writers, and occasionally in Horace and Virgil, an
indicatiye is found in indirect questions : as,
Si nunc mgmdr9.r6 uSlim, quam fideli &nImo In illam ful, u6rS
possum (Ter. Hec. lu. 5. 21), if at this very moment 1 wished
to mention howfaithftd 1 have been towards her, I could do
so toith truth.
Vide ut discldit l&hrum (Ter. Ad. iy. 2. 20), see how he has cut
my lip open.
Adsplce Ut antrum
Siluestris r&iis sparsit l&brusc& r&c6mis ( Virg. Buc T. 6),
See how the wHd lahruscaji
Mas sprinHed the cave with scattered grapes^
1198 An interrogative clause sometimes accompanies the phrase quid
ais, or the imperatives die, cddS, or the indicative quaeso, but
without being dependent on them : as.
Quid aisty ubi inteU^xeras I'd consilium c&pere, cur non dixti
extemplo P&mphilo ? (Ter. And. m. 2. 37) just teU me this :
When you saw that they were going to play that game, why did
you not immediately teU FamphHus t
Dic§ mihi, pl&cetnS tibi edSre iniussU me5 ? (Cic. ad Att. xni.
* It has been already noticed (§ 495) that in these indirect qnestions
there is often an ambiguity whether tiie existing time or futiue time be
meant. Compare f § 594 and 600.
t * A wild yine.*
X The phrase quid ais is also used in expressing surprise at something
heard : as, ' What do you say ? surely I misunderstand you,* or ' You
don't say so.*
§ This dio mt^t, like the conjunction eho^ is merely a mode of invitiiig
a person's special attention to some coming question. The Frendi in the
same way use diS'VMti,
8UBJUV0TIYE. 279
21.4) be to good <u to ansufer me this: Do you approve of
yowr pvilisking the book wUhoiU my authority f
€Md, quid iurgftbit tecum ? {Ter, And. n. 3. 15) pray^ what
quarrd will he have with you f
QuaefiG, quStiens dicendumst tlbi t {PlauL Most. iy. 2. 32) how
often, wast I tdl youy prithee f
1199 The phrase nescis-qui- is to be lool^ed upon as a trisyllabie
word partaking of the nature of an adjeotiye. Henoe there is no
irregularity in the cons<a*uction with an indicative : as,.
Alii nesciO-quO pacto obduruSrunt (Ctc.ad Fam. t« 15. 2), othen
somehow or other have become hardened.
1200 A similar union accounts for the indicative in such phrases as,
S&l6s in dicendO nimium-quantum* u&lent (Cie. Or. 26. 87),
jokes tdl immensely in oratory.
Id mirum-quantum* pr5fuit ad concordiam clult&tls (Liv. n.
1), this conduced wonderfvUy to hannwny amxmg the citizens,
ImmSuS-quantum &nlmi exarsSrS {Sal, ap. Non.), the men fired
up beyond all measure.
Reported Speech or Thoughts (OBLiQrA Oratio). .
1201 When the words or thoughts of another are reported and
not in the first person, it is called the obliqua oratio, and all se-
condary clauses, that is, clauses dependent upon the relative or
upon conjunctions, are in the subjunctive mood. Compare the
following passages :
Sfinfttu relquS publlcae ig6 non der6, si audacter sententias
dlcSr^ uuUis; sin Oaes&rem respicttXs atque 9ius gr9.tiam
s^uimtni, ut stLpSriOrlbus fecistis tempSribtLs, Sg6 mihi
consilium cdpiam, nSquS sSn&tCLs auct(SrIt9.ti obtenipSrahd^,
I will not be wanting to the senate and the country j if you are
unUing to express your opinions boldly ; but if you look to
Caesar y and make his favour your object, as you have done on
recent occasions, then I wiU take my measures for mysdf, and
will not be guided by the authority of the senate,
* Still the original phrases must haye been, nimium est quantum
uaieant, mirum est quantum profuerit, &c. Compare the Greek phrase
Bavixatrrov 6<rov,
f See Caesar, B. C. 1. 1.
SBnata reique publlcae li non defviiirum poUieetur, si audaeter
seutentias dlcSre vAint; Bin Caes&rem raptciam atque eius
grfiitiiuD liquaniiir, ut BilpjriJtrlbuB flohinL tempfitlbuB, ii
«i8i conBllium eoptaram nfiquS B8n5taa auotSrttati oilempl!-
rSiiiram, he promita that he loill not be wanting Sc.
1S03 Or the tenses miglit be tttrown into past time (whicb is more
ooDUDonlj used) bj writing polUceMtGr or pollfolliils est, ueUent,
reapIoBrent, BBquSrentfir, iSoissent
1202. 1 In the oUiqua oratio, as compared with the direeta oratio, the
changea are aa follows :
The main tenses, which are indicatives ia the original speech,
are changed to the aocuaative and infinitive.
ImperatiTes are changed to imperfects o( the sulgunctive.
SubjnnatiTes remain subjunctives.
Direct interrogatives in the indicative are clianged to the ac-
cusative and infinitive, provided the person was either the first or
third ; but if it was the second person, then the subjunctive is
required.*
With regard to the tenses, imperfects remaia imperfects, and
perfects remain perfects ; but which of the imperfects or perfects
b to be preferred, depends upon the tense of the indicative verb
to which the whole is subjoined.
The pronouns ho- (in its original sense) and isto- have no place
in the oUifua oratio, any more than EgiJ, tii, niSe, u08,,&c. lUo-
commonly supplies the place of the second person. See Sal. Jug,
CO. 61, 62, 64, 65, 77.
AH this however does not prevent the use of the indicative
mood in the midst of the oUiqua oratio, where the writer chooses
to saj something of his own.
L203 Sometimes the oHijaa oraiio is introduced bj a verb of recom-
mending &c. with the subjunctive mood, and this is followed hj
an infinitive ; before which in the English some word signi^ing to
my must be inserted : as,
OensBbant ut noctu Iter ^IcSrent, poseS priQs Sd angustias
uSnlil quam sentlrentUr {Cats. B. C. i. 67), th^ reoom-
meadfd that they shmdd march by nigH, observing that they
miffhi mate their way to tkt pau befort they were perceived.
]
* See Hadvig's OpuscuU, vol. i:
SITBJTOOTITE. 281
1204 At otli«r times the obltqua orcOio is introduced by a verb of
saying, &c, with the infinitive mood, and this is followed by a
subjunctive ; before which in the English some word dgnifyihg to
recommend &o. must be inserted : as,
Ddcent sul itldlcl rem ndn essS ; proinde yibeat rfttitoem pos-
t^tlt&tls {Ccte^ B. 0. 1. 13), they point out that it is not a
matter for them to decide upon, and they recommend him
therefore at once to consider the consequerbces.
1205 Without a formal use of the ohliqua oratioy a verb in a depend-
ent clause may be in the subjunctive mood, when it expresses the
thoughts or words or alleged reasons of another.
Aristldes^ nonne Sb eam caussam ezpulsust p&triSi, quod praeter
mMum iustiis esset !* (Cic, Tusc. v. 36. 105) Aristides again,
was he not driven from his country on the very ground that
he was just beyond m^aswre f
FS.bi5 dict& dies est, quod ISg&tiis in Gallos pugnasset {Liv, vi.
1), n/otice of trial was given to Fabius, for having fought
against the QaUi when ambassador.
Aedem ded 15ul uduit, si eo diS hostes fudisset {Zdv, xxxi. 21),
he voiced a temple to the god Jupiter, if he routed the enemy
that day.
1206 In these cases the power of the subjunctive may be expressed
by inserting such words as they said or they thought : for example,
in the last sentence but one the English might have been, ^ be-
cause he was just they said beyond measure.'
1207 Sometimes the verb to say or think is expressed in these phrases,
and unnecessarily put into the subjunctive mood : as,
Ills pStSrS contendit ut rglinquSretur, partim quod m&rS tlmS-
ret, partim quod rellgionlbtLs impSdL^ sSsS dicSret (Caes,
B. G. V. 6), the other zealously entreated to he l^ behind,
partly because he was afraid of the sea, partly because he was
prevented, he said, by religious scruples,
• The subjunctive mood may be thus used, when the writer speaks of
a feeling which moved himself at a former time: as, JI/iAt Jcademiae
eonsuetudo non ob eam caussam solum placuit, quod . . . ., sed etiam quod
esset ea maxuma dicendi exercitaUo {Cic, Tusc. il. 3.9), 'For myself the
practice of the Academy pleased me, not merely because . . . ., but also
because it afforded the best exercise in speaking.' (Madvig). — Ocourrebant
(mMt) coUes campique et Tibetit et hoc caelum, sub quo natus educatusque
essem {Liv, y. 54).
bb2
282 srvTAX.
4
Here tmpediretur would haTe expressed the same, though less
forcibly ; on the other hand, timeret might have been translated,
' he was afraid, he said.'
Cum Hannlb&lis permissu ezisset d9 castris, rSdiit paulo post,
quod se oblltum nesci5-quid dicSret (Cic, de Off. 1. 13. 40),
after leaving the camp vrith Hannibarsjyermimony he retwmed
shordy after y because he had forgotten something or other^ he
said.
Le^tos suos multl de prOuinci& dScSdSrS iussSrunt, qn5d iUo-
rum culpS. s9 minus commSde audire arbltr3.renttir (Cic, ii.
Verr. in. 58. 134), mang (governors) have directed their lieu-
tenants to leave a province, hecav>se throtigh the misconduct of
these lieutenants they themselves, they thought, had got a had
naTM,
Quem qui rSprendIt, In e9 rSprendit, quod grSLtum praeter
m^dum dicat ess^ {Cic. p. Plane. 33. 82), and he who cen-
sures him, censures him for being, he saysy grateful beyond
measure.
1208 It has been said above that the subjunctive is used in speaking
of that which does not exist. Thus, what is denied is in the sub-
junctive after a coDJunction : as,
Istos tantum &best tit omem^, tit ecflcl non possit quin e($a
OdSrim {Cic. Phil. xi. 14. 36), so far from complimenting
those persons you speak of, I cannot be prevented from hating
them,
Tantum &bSrat ut binos scnbSrent, uix singtQos conflScSrunt
{Cic. ad Att. xiii. 21. 5), so far from copying two sets {of the
work), they with difficulty cor/ipleted one.
PtLgllSs in iactandis caestlbtLs ingSmiscunt, non quod ddleant,
sed qui& prSfundenda uOce omnS corpiis inteudlttlr {Cic,
Tusc. II. 23. 56), the boxer in throwing out the caestus utters
a groan, not because he is in pain, but because by sending out
the voice every muscle in the body is strained.
N5n eO dlc9 qu(S mihi uSniat in dtibium tu& fIdSs {Cic. p.
Quinct. 2. 5), / do not say this because you/r word is dottbted
by me,
M&idres nostri in dSmlnum de 8eru5 quaeil noIuSrunt, non
* The rule applies of course to omem, not to the other subjunctives
in this sentence.
BUBJUircTivE. 283
qui& non posset uSrum inu^Dlrl, sed quiS. uldf batiir indig-
num ess8 (<7*c. p. Mil. 22. 59), (mt ancestors were unwUUng
that evidence should he dravm by torture from a slave against
his master, not because the truth could not be got aJt^ but be-
cause (in this case) there seemed to be something degrading,
Non quin conftdSrem diUgentiae tuae (Cic, ad Fam. xyi.24.1),
910^ thai I in any way distrusted your carefulness,
1209 Another example of the subjunctive employed in speaJdng of
what does not exist, is seen in hypothetical* sentences, both in the
clause of condition and the clause of consequence. These sen-
tences are conveniently divided into present and past.
a. Hoc nee scid, nee si sciam, dlcSre ausim {Idv. praef.), this
in the first place I do not know, and secondly, if I did inouf,
I should not venture to say,
Tu si hie sis, filter sentias (Ter, And. IL 1. 10), you yoursdf,
if you were in my situation, would fed differently,
b. Quid ^iam, si furtum f^cSrit ? {ffor. Sat. i. 3. 94) what
should I do, were he to commit a theft f
c. NonnS s&piens, si ^Ime ips8 confXciattir, absttQSrit clbum
altSn ? MInlimS uSrO {Cic, de Off. iii. 6. 29), would not a
wise man, if he were himsdf on the point of being starved^
rob sorrve other of food f Assuredly not,
d. Id si accIdSrit, slmiis armSLtl {Cic, Tusc. i. 32. 78), if that
were to happen, we should be ready armed,
e. Si frS.tSr esset, qui m&gis m5rem gSrgret ? {Ter. Ajl, ly. 5.
74) if he had been a brother, how could he have been more
obUging ? •
/. Si quis hoc gnat6 tuo Tuds s6ruds faxetf, qu&lem hab^res
• See aboye, § 1153 and §§ 496, 497, 498.
t ThbXfaxit is inadmissible here, even Madvig would allow, although
he denies the existence of the word ./odrem. Moreover the explanation
of the form^^o given in § 566 is confirmed bj a line in the same scene,
Pol si tstuc fasts, haH sine poena fSceris; for the law of the Latin lan-
guage requires that the two verbs should here be in the same tense (see
Madvig's own 6r. § 340, obs. 2), and the difference of form is agreeable
to a peculiarity of the iambic senarius, which, while it admits contracted
forms in the middle, prefers the uncontracted at the close of the line, as
periclum and periculo^ Plant, Cap. iii. 5. 82 ; norit and nouerit, Ter,
And. Frol. 10; Ht and sies or siet. And. ii. 5. 13, Haut. iii. 1.47; fao
generally, but face at the end. And. it. 1.56, v. 1.2 ; besides a large
number of words which are commonly monosyllabic in pronunciation ex-
cept in the last place, as mtAi, And. iv. 4. 4, Uaut. iii. 1* 101* Madvig^s
. 284 BTNTAX.
gr&tiam ? (PlatU. Cap. in. 5. 64) tfimy slave of yours had
done the tame for your A)n, whA vmdd your gratitude have
been like f
Si h&8 InXmlcItiaB cS.uer8 pj^tuisset, oluSret {Cie. p. Rose. Am.
6. 17), if he had been able to guard againxA the enmity of
this party^ he wotdd Iiave been now alive,
g. Absque eO esset, recte Sgo mihi nldissem {Ter, Ph. i. 4. 11)) if
it had not been for him, I shovJId have taken good care of
mysdf,
B^umne Mc tu pdssides t Si p6ssiderem, om&tus esses ^x
tuis uirtiitibus {Ter. Ad. n. 1. 21), are you lord paranumnt
here f If I had been, you should have had a dressing such
as your special merits deserve,*
h. NScassem tS uerbMbus, ulsi — IrfLtiis essem {Cic» R. P. i.
38. 59), / should have flogged you to death, if I had not —
put mysdf in a passion.
Deletiis exer(^tus fSret, nl f&gientis siluae texissent {Liv, ni.
22), the army would have been afmihUatedy had not the woods
covered them in their fligM.
1210 It will be seen that in hypothetical sentences with the present
tenses (whether imperfect or perfect), the condition, though not
fulfilled at the present moment, is not an impossibility, for it may
yet pediaps be fulfilled.
1211 The^e»^ tenses in h3rpothetical sentences (both imperfect and
perfect) allude to past time, or at any rate to an obstacle in past
time affecting the present state of things. In either case it is
now too late to alter matters ; and therefore these tenses often
imply not only the non-existence of a state of things, but also
impossibility.
1212 The tenses in hypothetical sentences are determined in the
usual way. If the imperfect be used in the conditional clause,
iiie notion of the verb is not completed before that in the clause
view is, that /oxo and such forms are the equivalents of the Greek rv^^,
Tpa|«, and consequently nmple, not perfect iiitures. See his Opuscula,
Tol. iL p. 60, && This is clearly wrong.
* It should be remembered that in the obliqua oratio the subjunctive
will be lofund after «t, even when the construction is not that vhieh we
have called hypothetical, but the ordinary sentence of condition, which
in the directa oratio would be in the indkative.
SUBJUNCTIYB. 265
of the consequence. On the other hand, a perfect tense m the
conditional clause generally* denotes an action completed before
what is expressed in the clause of the consequence. As regards
the past tenses of hypothetical sentences, in the clause of the con-
sequence the past-imperfect is used to denote a continued state of
things, or something not yet completed, whereas a single occur-
rence is expressed by the past-perfect.
1213 Thus the general construction of sentences containing the word
i/, is, that the hypothetical, i,e. those which put a case, the non-
existence of which is implied, have the subjunctive in both clauses,
while in other cases the indicative is required in both clauses.
1214 The apparent exceptions to this rule are for the most part to
be explained by the sentences being elliptical. Thus in hypothe-
tical sentences the participles in tUro and endo are often found in
the clause of consequence ; and, if so, always attended by an in-
dicative : as.
Si m6 triumphSrS prohlbSrent, testis cltSLturusf ful rSrum &
mS gest&rum {Idv. xxxviii. 47), if they had attem/pted to
prevent my tnvm/phmg^ I tihovld have called tip witnesses of
my achievements.
lUi ipsi qui rSmansSrant rSlicttIri &gros Srant, nisi littSra^ ml-
sisset {Cic, ii. Yerr. m. 52. 121), even those who had remained
behind would have abandhned the lapds, if he had not sent
the letter »l
Quid quod si AndrS.h5dor5 consHiS, prdcessissent, HsraclSae
cum cSt^ris fuit seruiendum§, nay, if the plans of Andra-
nodorus had succeeded, Heradea must have become a dave with
the rest of the people.
Si pilu&tlis esset, t&mSn ad tantum bellum Is Srat dsUgendfis
* This word is inserted with a view to such a sentence as, Id sifecisses,
per mihi gratum fecisses, where however the real consequence is expressed
in pergratum, * I should have been greatly your debtor.'
f Literally * I intended to call them,' for which our translation sub-
stitutes, by no very violent inference, ' I should have done so.' The lat-
ter literally translated would have been citauissem.
X That is, ' They were preparing to leave, and' (though the author
omits expressly to say so) ' no doubt would have done so/
§ This passage occurs in Liv. xxiv. 26, with the alterations required
by the obliqua oratiot viz. sibi and fuerit in place of Heraclecie and fuit.
Compare a similar change in the same chapter of the phrase, Si effugivm
patuisset in publieumt impleturae urbem tumultufuerunt.
286 BTHTAX
{€ic. p. leg. Man. 17. $0), if he had been in a private skUicn,
iHUfar 90 serious a ivar he was the man who ouffht to have
been seUeted,
1S15 A similar explanation accounts for the following phrases : —
2^1 mStuam p&trem, hiU>eo quod m^neam prtfbfi {Ter, And. y.
4. 15), if I were not c^raid of myfaJthtr, 1 could give him ca^
excdlewt*^ hint.
Id ^5, si tu nSgSs, certs sciot (Ter. Haut. iv. 1. 19), even if
you were to deny this, I know it for certain {and consequen^y
your denial of it would be fruitless),
Adm5n6bat me rSs fit intermissidnem 6lSquentiae dSplOr&rem,
nl uSrSrer n6 ds me IpsO uld6rer qu6n {Cic, de Off. n. 19.
67), / was reminded by the matter* before us that I ought to
lament the disappearance of do<nience from among us; and
should have yielded to the suggestion^ had I not feared that I
might be thought to be wging a merdy personal complaint,
Bl per MStellum Ucltum esset, mi&trfis ilKSrmn, uxores, s5rores
uSnifibant (fiic* ii. Verr. ▼. 49. 129), their mothers, wives,
sisters were coming {cmd would actually have com^), if Me-
teUus had permitted,
Mult& me dehortantUr & uf^bis, m BtfLdinm relpubllcae stipSret
{Sal, Jug. 31), many considerations dissuade mje from trot^
Uing you {and- they would probably prevail), if my love for
my country did not outweigh them.
Pons Iter paene hostlbus dedit, ni unus uir fuisset {Liv, u.
10), the bridge all but offered a passage to the enemy, {and
would have done so completdy^ had it not been for one brave
man.
Quod nl prVpSre pemGtuisset, haud multum &b exitis l^ti
&berant {Tac.X Ann. i. 23), and if this had not speedily be-
come generally known, {they would have put an end to the
lieutenant-general, for even as it was), they were not far from
so doing,
* Literally ' I have an excellent hint to give, and but for the reason
assigned I would give it.'*
f Of course * my knowledge* is in no way conditional upon ' your
speaking the truth or not'
X Tacitus abounds in this construction : see in the very same chapter,
ferrum parabant, m . . . . interiecisaet.
SUBJUVOTIYB. S87
1216 Such sentences as the following are mere instances of ordinary
exaggeration forthwith corrected^ : —
Me tmnctis illapsus cSrSbrd SusttilSrat, nM Fauntis ictum
Dextr& ISuasset (j5br. Od. n. 17.27), Horace a trunk down
gliding on his shdl had carried offy (or at least fpoidd have
don^ so)y had not Fawmu with his hand lightened the blow.
1217 The verbs of dutj and power, already expressing in themselyes
what is less forcibly implied in the subjunctive mood, generally
retain the terminations of the indicative in hypothetical sentences :
Uunc p&tris 15c9, si uUa in t6 piSt&s esset, cdlSrS dSbebSLs {Oic,
Phil. u. 38. 99), this man you ought to have respected as a
father y if you had had any affection in you,
Oonsid ess5 qui pStuI, nisi hunc ultae cursum tSnuissem &
puSrlti& ? {Cic, B. P. i. 6. 10) how could I have been consul,
if I had not kept strictly to this course oflije from my hoy-
hoodf
1218 In the same way the verb ' to be' in the indicative is accom-
panied by adjectivest, and occasionally substantives^ when the
hypothetical form of the sentence might have suggested the sub-
junctive : as,
Longumst 81 titbi narrem quamSbrem id f&ciam (TVr. Haut. ii.
3. 94), ii would he tedious if I were to tell you why I do so.
Aequiiis Srat id u01unt&tS fiSrl (Cic. de Off. i. 9. 28), it would
have been better ^ it had been done willingly.
NonnS fuit s&tius tristis Am&rylUdXs Iras AtquS stLperbft p&tl
fiEtstldi& ? (Virg. Buc. ii. 14) had it not better been Amaryllis*
bitter wrath and Iiaughty whims to brook f
Quants melius fuSratt in h5c prOmissum pfttris ndn essS seruS-
tum ? (Cic. de Off. m. 25. 94) how much better would it have
been, if in his case his father's promise had not been kept f
1219 The conjunction in hypothetical sentences is sometimes omitted,
as in English ; but in this case the verb is commonly placed first :
as,
* It Bhoald be obserred, that in sentences of thia character the nisi
or M commonly follows.
f Particularly adjectives of propriety.
X The past-perfect tenee in place 9f a simple perfect is common in
sach phrases, and also with the verbs of dnty and power.
288 BTHTAZ.
Bdges mS, nihil fortassS respondeam (Cic. N. D. i. 21.57), tpere
you to <uk mcy I should perhaps make no answer,
I>&res banc uim Crasso, in fSrO salt&ret {Cic, de Off. in. 19. 75),
had you offered this power to Crassus, he would have danced
in the forum.
1520 Very frequently the conditional clause is omitted : as,
StiIrS plitSs, fideO pr5c6dunt temptfrii tarde {Ov. Trist. v. 10. 5),
you would think {if you were here) that tims was standing
stm, so dotdy does it advance.
Beos dicSres {Liv. n. 35), you would have said they were on
their trial {had you been there).
Hoc confirm&uSrim, SlSquentiam rem unam esse omnium dif-
ficilllimam {Cic. Brut. 6.25), this I would maintain {if there
were occasion), that doquence is the one thing of all mast dif-
^cult to attain,
1521 Thus, mSlim / should prefer, n5lim 1 should be ununRing, uSlim
1 should wish, are modest expressions, not partaking of the rude-
ness of mftlo I prefer, nOlo / wovCt, uSlo linsMA; while mallem,
nollem, uellem, signify I should have preferred <&c,, and refer either
to past time, or to what is now impossible. Hence,
Nollem* factum {Ter, Ad. n. 1. 11), / wish it had never been
done, i. e. / beg you/r pardon,
1222 The consequence also is at times omitted : as,
si Sub rastrO crSpSt argeuti mihl s6ri& {Pers. ii. 10), oh, if
neath the harrow ajar of silver were to chink for vm,
1223 The consequencef again is generally omitted in sentences con-
taining qu&sl as if or equivalent words : as,
Qu&sl u6rO conslll sit rSs {Caes, B. G. vii. 38), as if forsooth
it were matter for deliberation.
Ms itluat, uSlut si ipse in parts l&boris fuSrim, ad f[nem beUl
peruSnissS {Liv. xxxi. 1), / am delighted^ as though I had
myself shared the toil, to have arrived at the dose of the war.
* Literally ' I should have wished it not done.' The suppressed con-
dition may have been, 8% optando potuissem quae facta sunt infecta red-
dere, NoUm factum would signify, ' I should he sony to have it done.'
f Thus in the second sentence the fuller form would have been, ' I
am as much delighted as I should have been if &c'
SVBJVVOTITB. 289
Eius orudeUt&tem, uSlut 61 cdma ftdesset, horrebant [CatB, B.
G. L 32), ^^ hept shudderirig at M man's UoocUhintiness^
(u ihmgh he had been, present.
Sio quaestdr est faxstuB, quam si esset summQ 1^ nAttis (Cic,
p. Plane. 25.60), he teas made quaestor with the samefaeSityf
as if he had been bom in the highest station,*
1224 When the second personf is used to denote generallj one, a
man, the subjunotive commonly enters into secondary clauses,
whether preceded by a relative or conjunction : as,
In excltando plliritmum uUet, sX laudes eum quern cohorterS
(Oie, ad Fam. zt. 21 • 5), in rousing to action, the greatest
ejfedt is produced, if one praises the person whom one is en-
cotmtging.
B^nus segnior fit, tLbi neglSg&s (Sal, Jug. 31), the good man
becomes less active, when you neglect him.
'Saatxuxx r^mSiOJdt, quod recte fadds consScutus Sis (Cic, de Sen.
19. 69), that onlg is left behind, which a man has obtained by
good deeds,
1225 Seoondaiy dauses which are attached to clauses in the sub-
junctive or infinitive mood and form aa essential part of the idea
therein expressed, are themselves in the subjunctive mood : ^,
Si ICLcS quSquS c&nes Ifttrent, quom Peos s&lut&tum &UquI
ufinSrinty his orOrft suffringantur, qu5d ftcres sint quom
susplciO nuUft sit (do, p. Eose. Am. 20. 56), if even in the
light dogs were to bark, when any persons come to a temple to
offer their prayers, they would have their legs broken for being
$0 watchful u^ien there is no ground for suspicion,
1226 Hence verbs of promising and threatening, inasmuch as they
express in one word * the saying that something will be done', take
a subjunctive of the condition : as,
Praemium prOp^Jsuit quit inuenisset nSuam u^upt&tem (Cic.
*^ See % 499. In the four examples here given the tenses in the in-
dicative mood with a negative would have been respectively, consili res
non est, in parte iaboris non/ui^ nan aderat, non erat summo looo natus.
Thus it is only the mood that is here altered by the hypothetical form of
the sentence.
f This remark is from Madvig,
t For the omission of the antecedent 0t see § 1126.
00
290 BTKTAX.
Tosc. Y. 7. 20), he promised a reward to the man, who shotdd
find a new pleasure,*
1227 By the omission of the governing verb the subjunctive appears
to cany with it a meaning which really belongs to that verb.
a. Possibility, potest esse Ut understood. This construction
however is very rare unless some such word as forslt&n, for8&i,t
accompany the subjunctive : as,
YSlim dSs Spgram, quod commSdo tu9 fiat (Cic. ad Fam. xiii.
27. 3), I would heg you to give yov/r assistance, so far as may
he done without inconvenience to you.
Me misenun, forsan hie mihi paruam habe&t fidem (Ter. E. i.
2. 117), alcLSy maybe my friend here may have litiU faith in
m^.
Nlmium forstt&n haec illl mlrenttir {Cic. n. Verr. iv. 66.124),
those 'people may perhaps admire these things overmwdu
N5que id f^io, ut forsltan quibusdam uldear, 8lmtlULtidn$((7kr.
ad Fam. i. 8. 2), nor do I do this, as some perhaps may think,
hy way of make-hdieve,
h, PermiBsion and concession, such a verb as ^tor permit, or
c6d- grant, being understood : as,
FruSltur}: s&ne hoc 8olS<;i5 {Cic, de Prov. Oon. 7.16), let him
enjoy forsooth this consolation,
yt§ desint ulres, t&mSn est laudand& uSluntas {Ov, Pont. in.
4.79), though strength he wanting, praiseworthy still the vnU,
FuSrit ciipldus, fuSrit Ir&tus, fuSrit pertinax, scSlSris uer5 cil-
mInS Uceat mortuO c^Srg (Cic, p. Lig. 6. 18), he may have
been ambiti/ms, he may have been revengeful, he may have
been obstinate; hU the charge of impiety at any rate dUaw
him, now that he is dead, to be dear of,
Tt Snim c6tSr& p&ri& TubSroni cum YSjrd fuissent, hoc oertS
• See § 503.
f The an at the dose of these words is no doubt identical with the
Greek ay ; but as this takes the form kcv in Homer, we probably haye
in it only a variety of our verb can. Compare our may-be and the
French peut-itre, Moreoyer the root can was not a stranger to the Latin
language, for it virtually occurs in the old form ne-quin-ont for nequeunt,
t Observe that the concessive tenses nearly alwa3r8 commence a clause,
unless modo or dum accompany them.
§ ' Even granting that'
BUBJUNOTIYB, 291
praeclpuom TubSrOnis fuit {Cic* p. Lig. 9. 27), for even,
dUomng that every thing dse had been shared by Tubero with
Varus J this at least vtas the peculiar qualijicatum of Tubero.
Sit cl&ros Sdpio, ometttr exlmift laude Afiic&nfis, h&be&tur uXr
6gr8giu8 Paullus, sit aetemft gl9ri& M&riiiSy antSpdnfitttr
omnibus PompSitLs, Srit prSfecto iatSr hOrum laudSs &1X-
quid Itfcl nostrae glOriae {Cfic. in Oat iv. 10. 21), let Scipio
he renovmedy let Afrioanus he covered with especial glory ^ let
Pavllus be accounted a great man, let Marius enjoy eternal
faTMf let Pompey take precedence of aU, stiU there will assur-
edly be amid the glories of these men some room for our fame
also.
Ke sit sammum m&lum dSlor, m&lum certe est (Oic. Tusc. ii.
5.14), granting that pain is not the greatest evily an evil it
certainly is,
Mftnent ingSni& sSnXbus, mM6 perm&neat sttLdiom {Cic, de
Sen. 7. 22), the intellect remains wUh the agedy provided ordy
there stiU remain energy.
8eru5s est n6m5, qui m5d5 tSlSr&blll condlciOnS sit serultatis,
qui ndn audSLciam cluium pSrhorrescat (Cic. in Cat. iv. 8.
16), there is not a single dave even, if his position as a slave
he hut tolerahle, that does not shudder at the audacity of m>en
who call themselves citizens.
Id quoque possum f6rre, m6do si reddat (Ter. Ad. ii. 1. 51),
that also I can put wp withy provided only he pay.
Tii fors quid me fiat parui p6ndis, dum ilH c6nsula8 (Ter. Haut.
IT. 3.37), yonperhaps care little what becomes of me, provided
only you secure your master there.
Homines, quamuis* in turbldis rebus sint, t&mSn interdum
ftnlmis r61axantttr (Cic. Phil. n. 16. 39), men, aUovjing that
they are in circumstances as troubled as you please, still at
times unbend,
c. Indirect interrogative, rSgfts understood : as,
A. Quid i^cit ? B. Quid m fecSrit ? (Ter. Ad. i. 2. 4) A. What
has he done f B. What has he don£y ask you f
d. Wishing, uls, prSctfr, ko. understood : as,
* The poets, together with Livy and later writen, use ^Mtnuis with
an indicative, and vice versa mianquam with a subjunctive: as, quamuis
est fustiea ( Virg, Buc. ixi. 84}, quanquam moueretur (JAv. xxxvi. 84).
Quid fSdam t {Ter, E. 1. 1.1) what VfcMyou have msdof
Quid Ocerem? (Ter. E. t. 1.16) what ouffht I to have done?
Yaleant qui intSr noB diflcidi^un uolant {Ter. And. ir. 2.13),
farewdl to those who insist wpon teaHng us asunder,
K9 ulaam -si id tlbi 6ono6d9 {Cic. ad Fam. tii. 23. 4), may I
die if I grant you that.
Difip&^am nl Sabmosses onmls (J3br. Sat i. 9.47), may I he
uttedy destroyed^ if thou wouldst not have made the whole of
them move off*
Atque it& me di ament 4t ego ntmc non t&m meapte catusa
Laet6r qiuun illiuB {^er, Hani. it. 3. 8), omd so may heaven
love me, as lam ddigkted now not so much on my own account
as on his.
e. Bemanding, posttLlantt &c. understood: as,
Tu ilt unquam t6 corrlg&s ! (Cfic, in Gat. i. 9. 22), you ever cor^
rect yoursdf /
Hicine ut tibi resp6ndeat ! {Ter. Ph. y. 8.3), this man answer
f. Duty, 5portet &c. understood : as,
YllXciis iniussG d{$mlnl crSdat nemXnl {Cato. B. R. 5. 8), a bailiff
should lend to no one without his master's authority,
P5tius dicSret nOn esse aecum {Cio. de Off* m. 22.88), he should
rather have said^ it was not fair.
Stimeret Alicdnde (2Vr. Ph. n. 1. 69), he should have borrowed
it from som/e one.
FrtUnentum ne dmissSs {Cic, il Yerr. m. 64. 196), you shmLd
not have bought the wm,
g. The object is often expressed elliptically, more particularly
in a parenthesis, which ought always to be brief : as,
YSre ut dlcamf {Cic. ii. Yerr. v. 69. 177), to speak candidly.
SSnectus est n9.tur9. 16qu&ciort, ne fib omnlbtLs earn ultiis
uldear uindIcS.r6 {Cic, de Sen. 16. 66), old age is naturally
somewhat talkative, so y<m wiU not charge me with deftnding
it from every fauU.
* See § 1247 and note.
f Perhapg in this example ' penm8fion*i8 the notion understood, (iaMv
X Hoc dioo understood, ^ I aay this that 1 may not appear Slc*
isnBJxrHOTiTB. 293
Ylx incedo in&nis, ne ire p6s8e oum onere existumes {Plaut,
Am. I. 1.174), lean warody VHtlk with nothing abotU mey to
do not suppose that lean get en with a load.
1228 For the sake of brevity, such a verb as existilmSs or dicam is
often omitted in sentences like that just given. Thus Plautus
might have said in the last example^ Yix incSdo Inftnis, ne irS
possim cum dn6r6 : as,
Ntfuam earn ptftest&tem 6rlpu6r8 p&tritbus nostris, ne nunc dul-
cOdXnS sSmel capti fSrant dSsld^rium (Liv. iii. 52), this power y
when yet unknown to them^ they wrested from our fathers ;
much less nowy having once tasted the sweets of it, wiU they
tolerate the loss,
Mort2lli& fitctft pSribunt, Nedum sermOnum stSt hSnSs (Hbr,
Ep. n. 3. 68), deeds wHl perish, much less wiU t?ie glory of
words survive.
Yix in ipsis tectis frlgus ultfttur, nSdum in m&rl sit f&cfle ftbesse
&b initLrift temptfrls {Cic, ad Fam. zyi. 8), even in a roofed
building it is difficult to avoid the cold, much less is it easy
at sea to escape being hurt by the weather.
Erat Snim multO ddmXcXlium huiiis urbXs aptiils hUm&nlt&tl
tuae quam tStft P61dponn6sus, n6dum P&trae (Cic. ad Fam.
Yii. 28. 1), for in those days this city was better suited as a
residence to one of your r^ned haJbitSy than any part of the
FdoponnestUy Ut alone Fatrae*
1229 Quum or cum in clauses signifying a reason for or against any
thing is followed by a subjunctive : as,
Quum ult& sine ftmlcis mSttis plSn& sit, r&tio ips& mSnet &ml-
dtias comp&rftrS {Cfic. de Fin. i. 20. 66), seeing that life
without friends is fuU of danger y reason Hsdf warns us to
form friendships.
Quae quum omni& fiictft sint, tfimSn tln& sOla Srat clultas M&-
merttQ&, quae ICgfttos qui istum laud&rent mIsSrint {Cic,
II. Yerr. u. 5. 13), in spite of all these doings, Messana was
the one sole city that sent an embassy to speak in favour of
the accused.
SSd e& quum contempl&rl ctipSrem, uix adsplciendl pStestas
fuit {Cic. de Or. i. 36. 161), but although I Vfas eager to have
a good stare at these things, I could scarcdy get a look at
theM,
oo2
SI94 BniVAX.
Quad quum It& sint {(He. in Okt. i. 5.10), ikia being the com.
1230 Quum aa an adverb of time in the past tenses has the subjuno-
tiye moody being translated with the imperfect by whUe or a<,
with the past-perfect by (xft^ : as,
Quum &cerrlmd pugn&rStur, BilbXtO sunt Aedui uisi ab I&tSrS
nostils &pert5 {Cae». B. G. vn. 50), <u the batde was pr^
oeedififf with the greateet epirit, there suddenly appeared a
body of Aedui on the expomd!^ jUmk of ow men,
Quum dies complareti tmnmso^t^ silbltd pfc explQrfttSres cer-
tior facttis est (Oaa, B. O. ni. 2), e^ier many daye had al-
ready passed by, he was tmddefUy informed by hie eoouts*
1231 Quum followed by tum^ in the sense of not only^ hU aleOy has
generally the indicative, occadonally the subjunctiye : as,
Quum multae rSs in phll5B5phi& n6qu&quam s&tis explXc&tae
sintt, tum perdiflflcUis quaestio est de n&tOrft deSrum {Cie.
K. D. I. 1. 1), while there are many things in philosophy
which have been by no means fvUy explained, one of the most
difficult is the inguiry about the nature of the gods,
1231. 1 After antS-quam and prius-quun, a. a subjunctive is used, where
the speaker would imply the non-ooourrence of the act ; & an in-
dicative, where he would imply the occurrence of the act, and
therefore particularly where a n^ative precedes, and dbove all in
past sentences. In other cases there seems to be some indifference
as to the mood.
a. JSubj. NtLmXdae, priusquam ex caritris subuSnlretitr, in prox-
ftmos oollls disoedunt (SaL Jug. 54), the Nwmidians went
off to the nearest hiUs^ before assistance came from the camp,
Ant^uam h5mXnes nSlftril d9 meo aduentu audirS p5tuissent,
in M&cSdSniam perrexl {Cic, p. Plana 41. 98), before the
villains eotddhear of my approach, I went straight on into
Macedonia,
AxitS Hues pascentilr Xn aethSrS cerui, Quam nostro illxus l&b&-
turt pectSrS uoltus (Viig, Buc. x* 60), sooner altft in air
* i,e, the right, which had no shielcU to protect them.
i* The examples of this constraction are not numerous, and what there
are seem open to doubt. In some perhaps, instead of tum we should
read iamen, and translate the quum by * although.'
t Yet in a similar passage (A., it. 27) Viigil has uiolo and tesoluo.
IVVINITITi!. S96
^uM graze the hart, than from this breast hie feaiwee pass
away,
h. Ind, NSquS prius ftigSrS destltSnint, quam ad flumen per-
uSnSrunt (Goes, B. Q. i. 53), nor did they stop fi/ying, before
they reached the river*
N^ue ants dimlsit emn, qtuun fidem dSdit {Liv. xxxnc 10),
rwr did he let him gOy till he gave his word,
Non def&tlg9,b5r, antSquam ill9ram uias percept {Oic. de Or.
in. 36. 145), I will not give in, before Ifidly understand their
ways.
Ante &Uquant5 qnam til n&tiis 4a (Cid. ad Pam. z. 3. 2), a «o»-
siderable time before you were bom,
I5FINITITE.
1232 ^e infinitive* is an xmdedined neater substanti'vey wMdi de-
notes in the most general way tibe action or state expressed by the
verb. The use of it, as of other tmdedined substantives (§ 149),
is in strictness limited to the iKuninative and aecusativey indeed
almost exolusivelj to the latter. (Yet see 4 1255.)
a. It seems to occupy the place of a nominative in such sen-
tences as,
Docto hSmlnl uXu6re est cSgltajrS {Cic. Tusc. v. 38. Ill), with
the educated man to live is to think.
Non cfidit autem inuXdSre in s&pientem {Cic. Tusc. in. 10.21),
hut envy is incompatHie with the character of the wise man,
or the wise man is not suscq>tible of envy,
b. It occupies the place of an accusative in such sentences as,
StoXci Irasci nesciunt (jOic, de Or. in. 18. 65), Oie Stoic know
not anger,
Emtfil ciipio (Ter, Haut. T. 2. 18), / lor^ for death {that I may
get out of my misery).
1233 Hence the infinitive is occasionallj, though veiy rarely, found
after prepositions which govern the accusative : as,
IntSr optiimS u&lere et gr&uissfime aegrotftrS nihil dicSbant
intSressS (Cic, de Fin. n. 13. 43), between the best health and
the severest sickness there is no difference they said.
* In the Greek language this is so completely the &ct, that the article
may be prefixed to it in all its cases. The English also treat thek lafini-
tive as a substantive, when they place before it the piepcMitioB * tOb'
296 SYNTAX.
Quod crimen dlcis praetSr ftmassS meum t {Ov. Her. vii. 164)
what charge dost allege against me, except the having loved?
1234 Hence also a neuter adjective oocadonaUy accompanies the
infinitive : as,
YluSre ipsum turpe est nObis {Cvg. ad Att. ziii. 28), life itsdf
is disgracefvl to us^
TOtom hoc displXcet phXlSsdph&rl (Cic. de Fin. i. 1. 1), cXL this
acting the philosopher offends me,
1235 The most common use of the infinitive is as the object of active
verbs, particularly those which signify tpish, power, dtUg, hahit,
hn/ywUdge, intention, commencement, continuance, cessation : as,
Arteriae mIc&rS non deslnunt {Cic, N. D. n. 9. 24), the arteries
never leave off thrchbing,
Intuen sGlem aduorsum nSquItXd {dc, Somn. Sc. 5), you can-
not gaze directly upon the tewn,
Et nesci6-quid tibi sum oblitus h6die, ut uolui, dicere {Ter.
And. V. 1. 22), and somehow or other I forgot to teU you to-
day, as 1 intendeds
YincSrS scis, uictSria iLtl nescis {Liv. xxii. 51), you know how
to gain a victory, you know not how to use a victory.
1236 Some verbs besides an accusative of the person* take a second
accusative of the thing expressed by an infinitive : as, dSce-t teaeh^
iilbe- hid, \i&isL- forbid, ttfn- permit, c(5g- compd, mSne- warn, horta-
(r.) encourage, impSdi- lander, 'prohUbe- prevent, &c. Thus,
D5c6bo eum posthac t&cSr6 {Oic, in Bull. m. 2. 4), lunH teach
him to he silent for the future.
HSrus m6 iussit Pamphllum obseru&r^ (fer. And. n. 5.1), mas-
ter has ordered me to keep an eye upon PamphUus.
Ab dp&5 leg&tos disced^rS u6tu8rat {Goes. B. G. n. 20), he had
forbidden the lieutenants to leave the work.
Me Snim imp^t ptLdSr &b hSmlnS gr&uisstUno haec exqulr6r8
{Cic. de Or. i. 35. 163), for I cannot for shame urge this re-
guest on one of his dignity,
1237 After the passive too of manj of the verbs given in the preoed-
* See Madvig, Gr. 390.
f All these verbs, except the first two or three, are also found with a
subjunctive following. See §§ 1180, 1181
nrviHiTiYB. 297
ing section the infinitive is used, tbe accusative of the preceding
constniction, which expressed the person, becoming now the nomi-
native; asy
An sum Stiamnuno Graec6 IdquI dScendtLs 7 {Cic, de Fin. ii. 5.
15) or am I at this time of life to he taught to speak Greek f
OonstUes itibentur scrlbSre exercXtum {Liv, ui. 30), the cotisuU
are directed to enrol cm aarmy,
Mtir5s &dlrg u8ti(tl sunt {Liv, xxiii. 16), they were forbidden to
approach the walls,
Prohlbiti estis in prduindA pSdem pGn6r8 (Oie. p. lag. 8. 24),
you were prevented Betting foot in the province.
1238 Yerbs of saying*^ hearing ^feding^ thinking^ knomngy are fol-
lowed by an accusative and infinitivet : as,
Th&l6s &quam dixit esse InXtium rSrum (Cic. N. D. l 10. 25),
Tholes said that water was the beginning of things.
Perliibentfo audlul te ess8 Oaes&rl f%mlli&rem (Cic. ad Fam.
Tii. 14.2), I heard %Dith very great pleasure that you were on
irUimate terms with Caesar.
Te multum pr5flSciss5 sentio (fiic. ad Fam. v. 13. 2), I fed that
you have advanced matters greatly.
8pero nostram ftmlcltiam n5n SgSrS testlbils {Cic. ad Fam. n.
2), I hope that ont friendship needs not witnesses.
Tlbi eos sdo obtempSr&ttiros mSgIs {Ter, Ad. xv. 5.70), I know
that they will more readily comply with your wishes.
1239 An abstract substantive or a neuter pronoun which conveys
the same meaning as the verbs of the last section, may be followed
by the construction of the accusative and infinitive : as.
Ilia Opinio tolletur, Orassum non doctisstUnum fiiissS {Cic. de
Or. II. 2. 7), that opinion shall he put an end tOy that Crassus
was not a most learned man.
De h5c ips5, nihil essS bSnum nisi qu2$d h^Snestum esset, dis-
ptLt&uit {Cic, Tusc. ii. 25. 61), he held an argument on this
very pointy that there is nothing good except what is right.
1240 An impersonal passive of saying, thinking, <kc. is sometimes
• See §§ 911, 912. 1, also § 1202 with note, and § 1203.
t The same applies to phnses such aafama est, auetor sum, eertiorem
tefaoioi &c.
298 * SYNTAX.
used with an accusatire and infinitive, particularly with the per*
feet tense or the participle in tfndo : as,
Nunti&tum est ftdessS SclpiOnem cum ISgiOnS (Goes. B. 0. ni,
36), vford was brought that Scipio was dose at hxnd vnth a
legion,
Ibi dicendumst nullam cssS rempublXcam (Cic, R. P. in. 31. 43),
there toe cannot hit acknowledge there is no constitiUion.
1241 Sometimes the same idea is expressed bj the personal passive
together with the nominative and infinitive : as,
Oaes&r a GergdmSi discesdsse audiebatiir (Caes, B. G. vii. 59),
reports reached them from time to tirw that Caesar had left
Oergovia,
YSluntSLria mortS intSrissS crSdItiLs est {Tac, Hist. rv. 67), he
iffas hdieved to have perished hy his own hand,
Gl&di5rum multitude dSprehendl posse indlc9,bs.tiir (fiic. p.
Mil. 24. 64), secret information was given hy more than one
person, that a large number of swords might be seized. •
Perspectust & me de t6 o5glt9.rg (Cic, ad Fam. i. 7. 3), / saw
dearly that he was thinking of you,
1242 Yerbs of wishing, permitting, bidding, hindering, &c. are fol-
lowed by the accusative and infinitivet : as,
Oorp5r& itiuSnum firm&rl I&b5r6 udluSrunt (Cic. Tusc. n. 15.
36), they wished the muscles ofyomtg men to be strenglhenad
bylahowr.
Pslectum h&b6ri prohlbsbo {Liv, rv. 2), I will prevent the levy
of troops from being hdd.
Rem ftd arm& dedtLcI sttLdSbat {Caes, B. 0. i. 4), he was eager
that matters should be brought to a content of arms.
1243 The verbs, iiibe- Ud, Tx^isir forbid, ^ToYCS^yQ- prevent, imp&a-
eommand, may be used passively with a passive infinitive]: : as,
* See § 911 and note.
f The conBtruction with the subjunctive with many of these verbs is
more common. See § 1180.
X This construction is widely different from that noticed in § 1237*
The iu which is the nominative to iussu'^s would be the accusative after
renuntiare in the active construction ; whereas in consules ittbefitur scrib-
ere eaerciium, the word consules would be the accusative after iubent
_ itself.
luBSu's rSnuntian constU {Cic, Phil. n. 32. 79), direetums were
gvoen that you shoiild he returned as consuL
In lauttbnias dedtici impSrantiir {Cw, ii. Yerr. y. 27. 68), an
order is given that they should he conducted down into the
stone-quarries,
* 1244 The perfect passives, ooeptils est, dSsXtils esf*^, are preferable
to the active when a passive infinitive is used : aS|
M&tSri& coepta Srat comport&rl {Caes, B. G. iv. 18), they had
hegun carrying timher,
P&plsiiis est u5c&rl dSsXtiis {Cic, ad Fam. ix. 21. 2), he ceased
to he called Papisius.
1245 The verbs which express the emotions of the mindf are fol-
lowed by an accusative and infinitive to express the cause of the
emotion]:: as,
Haec perfecta essS gaudeo {Cic. p. Bosc. Am. 47. 136), / am
ddighted that these matters are settled.
Tantum se Sitls dpinionis dSperdXdissS dSlebant (Goes. B. G. v.
54), they were hurt that they had lost so much of their repiiUir
turn in this respect.
1246 A predicate consisting of a neuter adjective, or a substantive,
or an impersonal verb, is accompanied by the accusative and in-
finitive to express the subject : as,
KOn est rectum mInSrI p&r6r8 m&Lorem {Cic. Univ. 6)yitis not
fitting that the superior should obey the inferior.
F&dfaitts est uincin duem BOmSinum {Cic. ii. Verr. v. 66. 170),
Uisa seriotcs matter for a Roman citizen to he hound.
Omn^us bSnis expSdit saluam essS rempubllcam {Cic. Phil.
XIII. 8. 16), it is for the interest of all good men that the coun-
try shotild he free from danger.
* So in the old writers there occur such phrases as nequitur oomprmi
{Plant. Rud. iv. 4. 20), retrahi nequitur (Plaut. ap. Fast.), id fanum
nequitum exaugurari (Goto ap. Fest.), mppleri queatur {Lucr. i. 1045),
and perhaps uMsd nequitur {Sal. Jug. 31).
t This construction is similar to horret tenebras. id gaudeo, &c. See
§§ 401, 893, 909.
X The construction with quod is more common, and in some cases that
with eum is admissible. See § 1455 i.
300 8TKVAZ.
Hob tHl($ld&ri 0port6bat* {Cic. in Cat I. 4* 9), iheae mm ought
to have been butchered.
Oorpns mortale ILUquO tempore int^rlr^ ntoesest* (Cic. do Inv.
u. 57.170), mortal fle^k must, mime time pr other perish.
1247 Broken sentences consisting of an aocusatiyet and xnfinitiye
are often used interrogatiye]^ to express any strong feeling, as
indignation about the present or past, rarely about the liiture : as,
Ex*illan f&mXlia tarn inlxb^r&lS f&clnils esse ortum ?t (Ter. Ad.
III. 4. 2) to thirdc that so ungenUeTmrdy a proceeding should
have originated with that/am»7y /
Te ista uirttite in tant&s aerumn&s indtdissS f {(He, ad Fam.
xiY. 1. 1) that you vnih yowr merit should have fallen into
such troubles /
MSne incepta dSsist&rS uictam 9 {Virg. A. L 41) Juno indeed de-
sist from what she has hegun^ defeated I
1248 Tho accusative that precedes the infinitiye performs the same
office as the nominative in the other moodsy and it is for this
reason often called the #u^^-ao0Uflativ9« There is this differ-
ence however between the infinitive and the other moods, that
the latter have suffixes to denote the different peraons^ so that
the nominative need not be expressed by a separate pronoun.
With the infinitive the subject-accusative pronoun is nearly al-
ways expressed : as,
Scrlbis, yofii write ; but, dico t6 scxlb^rS, I say ikM you write.
1249 But even with the infinitive the subject-accusative pronoun is
occasionally omitted if both the infinitive and the nuun verb have
the same subject § : as,
OonlttSre hue e& sp9 uSnissS {Cfic, p, Rose. Am. 22. 61), confess
that you came here with this hope.
Id nesdrS Mftgo dixit {Liv, xxiii. 1Z\ liago said that he did
not know this,
, * Oportet and neeewe est are also at times used with the subjunctive,
but rarely with ut. Necesse est prefers a dative to an accusative if it be
a person, as, homini necesse est fnori {Cic. de Fat. 9. 17).
t The construction of ui with the subjunctive refers to the future.
See § 1227 e.
% This infinitive is dependent upon some such phrase as eredendum
0fft*
§ See also § 879.
nrviiriTiTB. 301
ESfracturos carcSrem m![n&bantiir (Liv, yi. 17), theif kept threat-
ening that they would break open the prison.
1250 On the other hand, the refiective pronouns are sometimes used
unnecessarily with verhs of wishing : as,
Grfltum s9 uXden sttLdet (Cic. de Off. n. 20. 70), he is anxious
to be thought gratefvl,
Attlcum s8 dici 5r9,t0rem udlebat {Cic. Brut. 82. 284), he in-
sisted on being called an Attic oraior,
1251 When to the construction of the accusative and infinitive a
short clause is attached by means of a relative or the conjunction
quam, the same construction, by a species of attraction, is at times
introduced into this clause also : as,
Affirmaul, quiduis me pdtius perpesstirum, quam ex It&lia exl-
tilrum* {Cic. ad Fam. ii. 16. 3), / sdemmly declared that I
would suffer any thing rather iluin leave Italy.
AntQniiis aisbat sC tantldem frumentum aesttLmassS, quanti
S&cerdOtemt {Cic. n. Verr. in. 92. 215), ArUony kept de-
daring that he had valued the com at the same price as Sa-
cerdos,
Susplcor te hisdem rebus qulbus me ipsum!]: commduen {Cic.
de Sen. 1. 1), I suspect that you are moved by the savM cir-
cumstances as myself.
1252 There are constructions where the infinitive seems to supply
the place of a genitive : as.
Nisi quern fortS ItLbldo tSnet pdtentiae paucQrum llbert&tem
suam gratlflcan {Scd. Jug. 31), urdess perchance a fancy
possesses any one for sacrificing his liberty to gratify the power
of a few.
TemptLs est hinc &bIrS m6 {Cic. Tusc. L 41. 99), it is tim£ for
me to go away.
Summa 61udendi occ&siost mi ntino senes, Et Pha6driae curam
&dimere§ argent&riam {Ter. Ph. v. 6. 2), 1 have a glorUms
'opportunity now of dodging the old people y andrdieving
Fhcedria of his anxiety about TMmey,
* For quam ex Italia exirem. f For quanti Sacerdos aestumasset,
t For quibut ipse comnumeor, § For adimendi,
J> J>
302 8TVTAX.
1253 In narratire the infinitiye is at times used as the mam verb*
with the power of the past-imperfect of the indicatiye ; and when
80 used, is called the historic infinitive : as,
OonstQem anceps ctira ftgltSirS ; nollS dSsSrSrS sdcios, noll$
mXnuSre ezercXtum {Liv. xzxiy. 12), a twofdd anxiety
troubled the consul ; he was unwilling to desert the allies, he
was wnwUling to dimhdsh the army.
Ego instSire ut mihi respondSret, qujs esset {Cic. n. Yerr. ii.
77. 188), I meanwhile kept pressing him to tdl me who he was.
late unmuquodqud u&s in m&ntis stimSrS, laud&rS, mlrSj*It ((7u;.
n. Verr. nr. 27. 63), yowr worthy praetor kept taking into his
hands and praising and admiring every separate vase,
1254 After the words p&r3.to- ready, prepared, and insuSto- wmccus-
tomed, an infinitive is at times used by good writers, t and in the
poets and later writers after contento- eoniented, suSto- and assuSto-
accustomed: as,
Omnift perp^l pftrSrtI, maxime ft r8 frumentftrift l&bor&bant
{Caes. B. 0. in. 9), prepared to endure the worst, tkey suffered
mast in the txrtide of grain.
Id quod p&rS>tI sunt f&cSrS {Cic. p. Quinct. 2. 8), the iohidi they
are prepared to do,
InsuStus uSra audlrS {Liv, xxxi. 18), vwiccufimMi, to hear the
truth.
1255 Some writers, especially the poets, use the infinitive in many
constructions where good prose writers employ a diff^ent form of
words: as,
Fruges consumSx^ nftti§ {Hor. Ep. i. 2.27), horn to consume
grain,
* In such a phrase as iamque dies consumpttu erat^ quum iamen bar-
bari nihil remittere, &c. {Sal. Jug. 98), the verb remittere is still the
main verb.
t For a copious use of the historic infinitive see Cass, B. G. iii. 4,
where there occur in succession, deourrere<t eonicere, repugnare, mittere^
occwrrere, ferre, auperari.
$ Cicero more commonly however uses ad with the gerund.
§ In this and the following sentences more legitimate phrases would
have been : ad fruges consumendas, ad pellendos inimioos, committendae
pugnae, epeeundi, qui cantaretur, ut adiret^ the supine uisum,^ habendaot
quae habeat, ad sequendum, persequ^ndi. The use of the adjective with
an infinitive is very common in the lyric poetry of Horace.
Non mihl sunt ulrOs Ii^bDQlooB peUSrS {Ov. Her. i. 109), J have
not armgth to dnve away my foes,
Auldus oommittM pugnam (flv. Met. y. 75), eager to join
battle.
Nulla hinc ezIrS pStestas (Virff, A. ix. 739), no power of going
wtffom, hence*
Pu6r ipeS fuit cantftri digniis {Virg, Buc. v. 54), the boy kiftiaelf
was worthy to be sung of,
Vlnim t^ %iiM l&bSres ImptUit {Virg, A. 1. 14), she urged the
hero to encounter so many toUs,
PSettfl «glt altos Ylfl^rS montli {Eor. Od. l< 9.7), ke drove his
cattle to visit the lofty mountcdns.
Ills BUG mSriens dat h&bSrS nSpGtl ( Virg, A. iz. 362), he again
dying gives them to his grandchild to keep*
OSlSrem s^ui Aiftoem (Eor. Od. 1. 15. 18), Ajax swift to follow.
NScesfiltudo pen^ul (Sal. Jug. 92), the necessity for pursuing.
1256 The Latin language often admits the perfect infinitive where
the English language uses the simple infinitive ; but it will be seen
in sudi cases that the completion or consequences of the action
are regarded more than the action itself. This distinction applies
especially to phrases of regret or satisfaction in the future tenses,
also to phrases of wishing and prohibition, &c. : aS|
OontentI simils Id Onum dixissS (Veil. n. 103), let us be saiisfied
with this one observation.
Quiesse Srit mdliiis {Im. m. 48), you had better be (pUet.
Baochas n6 quXs ftdissS nSlit (Jnscr. S. 0. de Baoc), let no one
wish to approach the priestesses of Bacchus.
Magniim 81 pectSrS possit Excussissfi deum ( Virg, A. vi. 78),
in hopes she may have power to shake from her breast the
mighty god.
S5ciis maxiimS lex consultum essS uolt (Oic. in Caecil. 6. 21),
the law Irishes to provide for the interests of the allies above alL
1257 On the other hand, while the English express past time by the
perfect infinitive after the aoxiliaiy verbs couldy might, ovghty the
Latin writers generally consider it sofilcient to express the past
time in the main verb, and to use with it the simple infinitive : as,
Licuit in Hisp&niam IrS {Liv. Xxi. 41), 2 might have gone to
Spain.
304 SYNTAX.
Hoc SgS cur&r6 non dsbul {Cic. ad Fam. y. 2. 9), thU I otiffht
not to have cared for,
125B Still not unfrequently both the main verb of duty and the in-
finitive are in the perfect tense : as.
Tunc dScuit flessS (Liv, xxx. 44), then was the time for weeping.
Quod iamprldem fjEkctum esse Sportuit {Cic, in Cat. i. 2.5), what
ought to have been done long ago,
Adulescenti m6rem gestum op6rtuit {Ter, Ad. n. 2. 6)^ you
ought to have humowred the youngster,
1269 In the compound tenses of the infinitive, both active and pas-
sive, the verb essd is often omitted : as,
DenSg&rat sS commissurum mihi gn&tam suam uxorem {Ter,
And. I. 5. 6), he had dedared that he would not trust his
daughter in marriage to me,
Omnis uOs 5r3.tos udlo {Ter, Haut. proL 26), I must entreat you
aU.
N4que tu hoc dices, tibi non praedictiim. Caue {Ter, And. i.
2. 34), nor shall you say that no previous notice was given
you. So he on your guard,
1260 The future infinitive, both active and passive, is often expressed
by the circumlocution of fSrS with tit and an imperfect subjunc-
tive* (called the periphrastic future) : as,
Sp6ro fdre ut contingat id nObis {Cic, Tusc. i. 34. 82), 1 trust
that we are destined to have this Iiappiness,
Pompeius dixSrat f5re iiti exercltus Oaes&ris pellSrStiir {Caes,
B. C. m. 86), Fompey had foretold that Caesar's army would
be routed,
1261 The participle in tiiro with fuissS is exclusively used as a hypo-
thetical tense : as,
An Pompeium censes tribus suis constilS,tlbus laetS.ttlrum fiiissS,
si sclret se in sSUttidlne Aegyptiorum trtlcld&tum Irl ? (Cic.
de Div. n. 9. 22) or do you think that Fompey unmld have
gloried in his three consulships^ if he had knoum that he was
to be butchered in a desert of Egypt f
* This construction is the only one where the verb has no participle
in tuTo, Obserye however that the periphrastic future differs from the
simple future by being unlimited in point of time.
PASTI0IPLE8 AVS YBXBAL SUBSTAKTIYES. 900
NIbI nuntix d9 uletdrte p9r SqpdtSs essent allftti ezistXm&bant,
f&tttraiii foiaee dti oppldum ftmitt^retttr {does. B. 0. ni.
101), they iioert of cpimon that if the Tkews of the victory had
not been hrtnught by men on horeebacky the town would have
been lost,
1262 A future passive may be expressed by the impersonal passive
infinitive of i- yo and the accusative supine : as,
Arbltrantur sS bSnXfXcos ulsum Irl (Oic, de Off. i. 14 43), they
think they shaU he considered hind* *
1263 A future-perfect passive is at times expressed by the infinitive
fSrS and the perfect passive participle : as,
Debell&tum mox fSr6 rSbantiir {Liv. xxiii. 13), they thought
that the war tvould be ehorUy brought to a doee.f
PARTICIPLES A5D VERBAL SUBSTANTIVES.
1264 Participles are partly like adjectives, partly like verbs. Like
adjectives they agree with some noun in case, gender and number.
On the other hand tbey are derived from verbs, denote an act, and
govern the same case as the verb from which they are derived.
The tense or time of a participle depends upon the verb which it
accompanies.
1265 The participle in enti is an imperfect, and corresponds to the
English participle in ing ; as,
Gtibem&tor cl&uom tfoens sSdet in puppi {Cic. de Sen. 6. 17),
the pilot holding the tiller sits on the stem; — i,e, the pilot
holds the tiller and sits at the stem. Here tSnens refers
to present time^ because sSdet is present.
ArantI 0incinnS.t5 nuntiSitumst eum dict&torem essft fEUstum
(Oic, de Sen. 16.56), tcord was brought to Cincinnatus plough-
ingy that he had been made dictator ; — i, e. as Oincinnatus
was ploughing, word was brought to him that he had been
made dictator. Here &rantl refers to past time, because
nuntiatumst is past.
^ More literally, * that people are going to look upon them as kind.*
The beginner should take care not to confound this sujHne with the per-
fect paflsive partidple.
t For the significations of the tenses see also §§ 509, 511, 512, 513.
PP2
300
Cboetfii HSI^ pCDftans iini^Htm perooitCi 9p6Bt aim (qootod
bfGe.de Bnr. n. 5& 115), OncMf penOwatim^ to ike HaUf
iciU overturn a migkhf power; — i. e. wfacn (Vobiib shall
penetate to the Ha^ he viU U f eiimu a mii^blj power.
Here pteltaais reiien to Jbtture tiiney bccaoae peraortei is
fdiure:
The participle in enii is often best tiansUted hy the oonjiino-
tioDS a#, wkUsty &c^ with the proper tense of the indicative mood.
1266 The participle in enti is scmietimes used idiere the act is com-
pleted, bat onlj jast completed : as,
BAmam a^niens cJhnltia edizit {Liv. xxrr. 7), immediately upon
hie arrival at Rome he proclaimed the day for the election,
1267 Similaiij the participle in enii is sometimes osed when the act
has not jet began, bat will commence forthwith : as,
Discedens in It&liam l^;&tl8 impSrat fitl n&ols r^dendas cai&-
rent (Caee, B. G. y. 1), immediately before setting out for
Italy he yives orden to the lieutenants to have the ehipe re-
paired*
1268 The participle in tHro* is ased by the best writers larelj except
in connection with the verbs Ss- he and fa- be; with the former
to denote intention or destiny, with the latter to denote what would
have happened under a certain hypothesis.
1269 In Livj and the later writers it is often osed at the end of the
main clause of a sentence with the same significations : as,
Dllabantilr In oppId&, moenXbos sS dsfensuil (Liv, vin. 29),
they fiip away into different towns^ intending to defend themr
selves by means of fortifications,
DSdit mihi quantum pStuit, d&ttirils amplius tSL p^tuisset (Plin,
Ep. ni. 21), he gave me as much as he was able; and would
have given me m>ore, if he had been able.
1270 The perfect participle in to had probably at first only an active
signification. It still retains this power in those verbs which are
called reflectives or deponents, and traces of it also appear in the
poetical construction : Membr& stib arbtLto Strfttils (§ 892).
1271 Still in the ordinary language the participle in to is nearly al-
* See §§517 and 702-711.
PABTIOIPLES AND YEBBAL 8UB8TANTIYES. 307
ways used as a passiyOy unless the verb whence it is formed be
employed exclusively as a reflective or a deponent.* Thus, with
8crlb-6r6 to write^ we have scripto- written, being written, having
heenwritten; but with s8qu-I tofdUow, stetito- having foUotoed,
1272 At the same time there are not a few perfect participles from
reflective or deponent verbs which are at times used passively : as,
SSnecttitem tLt &dXpiscanttir omnSs optant, eandem accussant
ftdeptam {Cic, de Sen. 2. 4), dd age all pray that they may
attain to, yet abitse when it is attained,
Virttls ezperta atquS perspectft (Cic, p. Com. 6. 16), merit that
has been tried and proved,
Partltot exerdtu {Caes, B. G. vi. 33), having divided his army,
Euersio exs^r&tae c^umnae {Cic, Phil. i. 2. 5), the overthrow of
the accursed pillar, X
1272. 1 Although, when the simple verb is not transitive, the passive
is commonly used only as an impersonal, still the poets take liber-
ties in this respect, especially in the perfect participle : as,
Triumph&tae§ gentSs ( Virg, G. in. 33), nations that have been
triumphed over.
1273 A few participles in to from deponents appear at times to be
used as imperfects : as, SpSrato-, fISri&to-, Oso-, sScuto-, uecto-,
sdllto-, &o. Thus,
Yldit se SpSr&tum {Tac, Ann. n. 14), he saw himself sacrificing
(in a drearn),
Ooncl&mant sdcil laetum pae&n& sSctiti (Virg, A. x. 738), his
comrades following pour forth the happy paean,
1274 The participle in ^o is at times used with the verb h&be- have,
by which circumlocution a sort of perfect indicative of the active
voice is produced : as,
Hftbes iam st&tutum quid tibi figendum ptltSs (Cic. ad Earn. iv.
* Still there are exceptions. Cenato- is equiyalent to quum eenauis-
get, and has nothing of the passive signification. Other exceptions are
pranso-, potO'^ nupta-, exoso-, iurato-, ooniuratO'y adulto-y &c. See also
§§ 392, 393.
f Literally ' his army baring been divided.*
X Others are comitato-t ootifesso'^ emenso-f emerito-, pacta-, perfunoto-,
populate', &c.
§ But for the simple verb, tHumphare de gentibus.
306 STITTAX.
2. 4), y(m have at lout dOermined whai eaurse yarA deem, it
right to pursue,
B5mftDi in Asift pteunias magnas collScfttfta h&b^it (Cic, p. leg*
Man. 7. 18), Bamam have invested large aims of frumey in
Asia,*
1275 The participle in to is used with the futures of the verbs da-
give and redd- give hack^ so as to form a future perfect; but the
phrase further denotes that the act is done for another person : as,
Sic str&tas 18gi9nes L&tlnOmm d&bQ, quemadmddum l6g&tum
i&oentem uldstis {Liv, yui. 6), I will lay the legions of the
Latins low for you, just as you see their ambassador lying on
the ground.
Hoc ^o tibi ecfectum reddam {Ter, And* iy. 2.20), this I wiU
effect for you,
1276 The participle in to in agreement with a substantive is largely
used, where the English language commonly prefers an abstract
noim. Thus,
BarbftHis eum ^ Iram interfecti dtfmXni obtrunc&uit {Liv, xxi.
2), a barbarian cut him down ottt of revenge for the murder
of his master,
M&idr ex clulbtis amissis dSlor quam laetlti& ftisis hostlbus fuit
(Liv, IV. 17), there was more sorrow for flie loss of their fellow-
countrymen than ddight at the rout of the enemy,
Ab condlta urbe ad llbSr&tam {Liv, i. 60), from the foundation
of the city to its liberation,
Post nfttOs homines {Cic, Brut. 62. 224), sbvce the creation of
vnanm
1277 The neuter nominative of the participle in to is occasionally
used (by Livy for example) as the subject of a verb. Thus,
Audltum omnem exercltum prSficiscI laetltiam ingentem fecit
{Liv, xxvni. 26), the hearing that the whole army was setting
out caused v/nJbov/ndedjoy,
BSgSnSrfttum In &lils artlbiis huic qutfquS dteSri offBcit {Liv.
I. 63), his degeneracy in other qualities stood in the way of
his credit in this respect also,
* ^fore literally ' they have large sums inVMted.' From this con-
struction arose the formation of the perfect in the languages derived from
the Latin.
I
PABTIOIPLBS AND YBBBAL SUBSTANTIYBS. 309
Diu non perlltfttum tdnuSiat dict&tOrem ne antS mfiildiem sig-
num dftrS posset {Liv» yii. 8), a Icng dday in obtaining a
fucoessfid ismie to the sacrificea had prevented the dictator from
giving the signal before noon,
1278 The ablative of the participle in to is used at times as an abla-
tive absolute with a whole sentence for its substantive : as,
EzpdsltS quid InlquXtas Idd posset {Caee, B. G. vii. 52), having
eaiplained to them what consequences tmfavourable ground
could produce,
Edicto ut quicunque ad uallum tendSret pro hoste h&berSttir
{Liv, X. 36), having proclaim^ that whoever made for the
entreTichmerU wondd he dealt with as an enemy.
PermissS seu dicSrS prius seu audlrS mallet, lt& coepit {Liv,
xxxrv. 31), permission having been given him to speak first
or to listen, as he preferred, he began thus,
AudltO Marcium in Glllciam tendSrS {Sal, Fragm. v.), havin>g
heard that Marcius was hastening into Cilicia.
1279 The ablative of the participle in to* is occasionally used abso-
lutely even without a noun : as,
N5n est pecc&t5 mi ignosci aecum (Ter, Hec. v. 1. 10), I am
not entitled to be forgiven if I offend (more literally, an of-
fence having been committed),
1280 An ablative of the participle in to, with or without a noun in
agreement, is used with dptLs estt : as,
Nihil 8rat cur prdpSrftto SptLs esset (Cic. p. Mil. 19. 49), ^ere
was na reason why they need maJce haste,
Prius quam incXpias, consulto ; St iibi constUuSris, m&turS fetcto
dp&s est {Sal, Oat. 1), before you commence, you must delibe-
rate; and when you have ddiberated, you mtcst act wUh due
haste,
1281 As the Latin language is for the most part without a participle
for the perfect active, the following circumlocutions are in use.
a. The ablative absolute : as,
* Some ablatives of this kind have yirtually become adverbs : as, avr
spieato, litato, &c.
t Vsus est is foand with the ablative of the participle in to in the older
writers. The construction is consistent with the use of the same phrases
in connection with other ablatives. See § 999.
310 tTirvAZr
Hae part^ c5pi9.rum ffoota XtSnitti cam Sftblnis oondlgltftr (Liv.
I. 37), having increased thii pari of his f&ftss, he engages
again with the SMnei*
h. Quum with the past-petf6ct subjunctive, or iibi tnth the
Bimple perfect indicative : asy
Quum ab sfidd 8u& prG^fhiisset &m8uSrlque &b altftrlbus i&uSnem
inssisset {Liv, ii. 12), havimg leapt dawn from his seat and
ordered the young ma/n to he moved atpayfrom the altars,
Ybi e9 u6nit, prSpS trlbiinal constltit (Liv, n. 12), having
arrived there, he at once posted himself near the tribunal.
c. An accusative of the perfecft paEnalve participle dependent
upon the main verb : as^
Galium caesum* torqufi spifliiuit (Liv, n. 42), having dain the
Qatd, he stripped him of his collar,
1282 The participle in to is a perfect, and its tense or time depends
upon the verb which it accompanies. Thus,
a, Omni& quae dico d6 Plancio, dico expertiis in nSbis (Cic, p.
Piano. 9. 22), all that I sag about FlancitM, I sag hamng
made trial of him in my oum person. Here expertiis is a
present-perfect, because dico is a present — I have had
experience of his great worthy and therefore speak with
certainty.
b, ConsScutiis id quM &nlmo propdsuSrat, rSceptuI c&nl iussit
{Goes, B. G. VII. 47), having obtained what he had proposed
to himsdfy he ordered the signal for retreat to he sounded.
Here consScutils is a past-perfect, because iussit is a past
— He had obtained what he wished, and so he sounded a
retreat.
c, NQn admissi, Earth&glnem prdtlntls ibunt (Liv. xxi. 9), if
not admitted^ they will proceed straightway to Carthage. Here
admissi is a future-perfect, because Ibunt is a future ; and
indeed if the conjunction si be used, the phrase will at once
become : si admissi n9n Stunt. Thus the perfect participle
which accompanies a future teiime is £tr from expresang a
fact.
1283 The gerund is a neuter substantive in ervdo which denotes the
* Often a better transhttion if eflbeted by two verbs : aj, ' he slew him
and stripped him &c.*
PABTICIPLES A5D YBKBAL 8UBSTA5TIYES. 311
action or state expressed by the verb. It differs from the infini-
tive, in that it is declinable, and that through all the cases (in-
cluding, what is commonly omitted, the nominative). Also like
an ordinary substantive it may be governed by some few preposi-
tions (lu, &b, ds, eZ| rarely pro, with the ablative ; and with the
accusative by M, 5b, int^r, rarely In, circft^ antS).
^om. liiugnl p&randum, sSni utendumst (Sen. Ep. 36), earning
hdongs tp the young y using to the old man. •
Ace, Homo &d inteUSgendum n&tust (Oic. de Fin. u. 13. 40), man
is horn to understand.
Gen, Dicendl diiFlcultStem pertXmescIt (Cic. de Or. i. 26.120), he
dreads the difficuUy of speaking,
Deus bSuem &randl caussS. f^cit {Cic. K. D. ij. 14. 37), Ood
made the ox for the jmrpose of 'pLoughinjg,
Dot, Telum fSdiendo ftctimlnfttum {Plin. xi. 2), a weapon poitvted
for digging.
All. Yirttites cemunttbr In ftgend(^ {Cic. Part. Or. 23. 78), the mavdy
virtues are seen in action.
1284 The simple ablative of the gerund is used at times in such a
manner that the nominative of the ordinary imperfect participle
might be substituted for it : as,
Miscendo* consilium prgcesquS, nunc Orabant n5 se extUarS
pS.tSr6tur, nunc mSn6bant n9 mOrem pellendl rSg6s Inultum
sInSret {Liv. it. 9), mixing advice and entreaties together^
they one moment legged him not to suffer them to remain in
exile, another warned him not to leave the practice of expeUing
kings unpunished.
1285 The gerund is followed by the same case as the verb to which
it belongs : as,
Viam quam n5bis qu^ue ingr^undumst {Cic. de Sen. 2- 6),
the road which we also have to travel.
Su5 quoiquS iudlciost Gtendum {Cic. N. D. iii. 1.1), each must
tcse his own judgment.
Pi&lectlcast ars U(9ra ac fiEdsft dliudlcandl {Cic. de Or. ii. 38.
157); logia is the art of judging between truth and falsehood,
* Equivalent to misoenies. It is probably to this use of the gerund
that the Italian and Spanish languages are indebted for their impei^bct
participle in ndo. So aUo reporUmdo {Liv* xxv. 8. 10), omnia temptando
[Sal. Jug. 70).
312 8TNTAZ.
TrYbuendS suom quoiquS {Cic, de Off. i. 5. 14), by <jiUoUing to
every man what belongs to him,
M5rl mftluit fidsum f&tendS {Cic, Part. Or. 14. 60), he preferred
to die through confessing a falsehood,
1286 The gerund being a substantive may also have a genitive after
it (but this usage seems'limited to the genitive of the gerund) : as,
Reiciundl trium iudXcum leges Gomeliae f&ciunt pStest&tem
{Cic, II. Verr. n. 31. 77), the Comdian laws give the power
of challenging* three jv/ryrrien.
Ego eius uXdendi ctLpIdils {Ter, Hec. 3. 3. 12), / desirous of
seeing* her,
Sul purgandit causft {Com, B. G. iv. 13),/or the sake of dear-
ing* themsdves,
1287 Gerundive. — When a noun in the accusativej would accom-
pany the gerund, the construction is commonly altered so that
this noun takes the case of the gerund, and the gerund, now called
a gerundive, takes the number and gender of the noun : as,
DllXgentIa c^lendast nSbIs {Cic, Or. n. 35. 148), vfe must culti-
vate a habit of precision,
Ooniimgo mS cum hSmlnS m&gis ad ua8tandam§ It&liam quam
ad uincendum p&r&tS {Cic. ad Att. viii. 16), / am uniting
mysdf with a man who is better prepared for devastating
Italy than for conduding the war victorioudy.
KSqug r6s ull& quae ad pl&cando8§ deos pertXnSret praetermis-
sast {Cic, in Cat. iii. 8. 20), nor was any thing omitted which
was thought likely to appease the gods,
* The insertion of the preposition ' or after these participles would
make the phrases vulgar ; but a vulgar phrase is generally an old one. In
&ct the formation of the Latin participle in endo from an abstract sub-
stantive called the gerund is exactly parallel to the origin of our own
participle in ing from a substantive in ing. With us the substantive
was the older form ; and the use of the participle originated in such a
phrase as, 'the house was a-building* (t. e. * in building'), ' I was a-hunt-
ing of a hare.*
f The pronominal genitives in t, even when they refer to a plural
noun, require that the gerund should be a genitive singular.
X The same construction is also admissible with the four reflective
verbs, ut- * use,* fru- * en)oj,* Jung- * discharge,' and poti- ' make oneself
master.'
$ All the best Mss. have uastandam and plaoandot, as Madvig has
pointed out ; not, as our editions, uastandum^ placandum.
PABTICIPLES AND YSBBAL SUBSTAJTTIYES. 313
InXt& fiiint coaiB!(lia urbis delendae, duium trilcldazLdGnim, n5-
minis R5mSju extinguendl {Oic* p. Mur« 37. 80), plana were
formed for de^royi/ng the cUy^ hutcheriaig the dtieem, extinr
guisking the Boman neUton.
1288 The two constructions of the neuter gerund with a noun de-
pendent upon it, and the gerundive in agreeme&t with the noun,
are not to be used indifferently. The construction with the gerund
was the earlier one, and so belonged to the older writers*, but still
maintained its ground in certain phrasesf. In those which are
commonly considered the best writers, the construction with the
gerundive was for the most part preferred^!. Indeed, when the
phrase is attached to a preposition governing the accusative, the
gerundive construction is adopted almost without exception.
1289 The use of the gerundive with the accusative is very common
after the verbs 15ca-, condiic-, cura-, rSdIm-, da-, susclp-, &c. : as,
Moniimfintum el marmSreum f&ciundum IScarunt {Cic. ad Fam.
IV. 12. 3), they placed the making a marble monwment in his
handsy i. e. they contracted with him that he should huild the
m/mument.
CSlumnam conduxfirat fSciundam (Cic, de Div. ii. 21. 47), he
had undertaken the erection of a pillar^ or he had contracted
to erect.
Pontem In Ar&rl f&ciendum curat (Goes, B. G. 1. 13), he has a
bridge built over the Arar,
1290 The gerundive is often omitted in these phrases for the sake of
brevity: as,
Si Rhddiis turpS ndn est portOrium 15cS.rS§, ne HermacreontI
quidem turpest conducSrS (i, e, exigendum understood)
(Cic. de Inv. i. 30. 47^ if it is not disgraceful in the Eho-
* Mihi hao ndctu agitandumst uigilias (Plant. Trin. iv.2.27), * I have
to keep watch to-night ;* aetemas poenas in morte timendumst {Lucr. i.
112), ' they have to dread -eternal punishment when dead.*
t See §§ 1285, 1286.
i Madvig has carefully examined this question in his Opusctda, i.
380, &c. He there points out that in the phrase ad occupandum Veson-
Honem (Caes. B. 6. i. 38) there is no violation of the rule, Vesontionem
being masculine, like Narbo Martins in the same country.
§ Hence the connection hetween the two significations of locare, to
place* and ' to let,' the latter alone surviving in the F)rench loner,
B E
314 STVTAX.
diatu to let the port dueSy neither is it ditffraceffd in Henna-
ereon to farm them.
AnsSillmB dtb&ri& Itfcantlir (i.e. praebendA understood) (C£e,
p. Bo8C. Am. 20« 56), the providing food for the {sacred)
geese is farmed out,
1291 This constmction is used with impSra^ imposd^^ the gerandiye
being always omitted : as,
Eqoltes impSrat dnIt&tlbiLs (i.e. o5gend08 understood) (Oaes^
B. G. yi. 4), he imposes upon the states the providing horse-
soldiers, or he commands them to provide him with cavalry.
1292 The genitive of the gerandiye is usedt to denote a tendency,
fitness or purpose, more particularly in connection with the verb
Ikhhe: as,
Quae difltlnae obsldidnis t^Srandae sunt (Idv. xxx. 9), what-
ever is of use for supporting a long Uockade.
Quae tSmSre figltftuSrant, e& prOdendi impSrI Rom&nl, tr&-
dendae Hannlb&ll uictoriae Srant {Liv. xxvii. 9), the hasty
measures they had taken, tended to sacrifice the Roman empire^
to betray the victory into the hands of Hannibal,
Cetera in duddScim t&btilis minuendl sunt sumpttis {Cio. de
Leg. n. 23. 59), the other regulations in the twelve tables have
for their object a diminution of expense,
Arm& cSpit, non pr5 sua iniuri&, sed ISgum ac llbert&tis sub-
uertendae}: {8al, Fragm. Or. Philippi c. Lep.), he has taken
up arms, not to avenge any wrong done to himsdfy biU to up*
set our laws and our liberties,
1293 The datiye§ also of the gerundive is used to denote fitness or
purpose: as,
Qu&sl firmandae u&l6tudlni in Oamp&niam concessit {Toe. Ann.
m. 31), he retired into Campania as if to improve his heodth,
* That this is the literal translation of impera- is consistent with the
translation of separo', disparo', compara-, appara-, ' put apart, in dif-
ferent places, together, before a person.*
t Particularly by Livy.
X This construction is commonly explained, but whether rightly ia
doubtful, by an ellipsis of caussa. It often occurs in TacituB.
§ Tacitus has even the ablative in this sense : explenda simulationef
Ann. xlv. 4.
PASTICIPLBS kSJ> VEBBAL SUBSTANTIYES. 315
Qui dnSrI fSrendo Srant (Liv, u. 9), mck as were capable of
hearing the burden,
Nee soluendo aeri ftliSnS respublXca 8rat (Idv, xxxi. 13), nor
was the state in a condition to pay its debts.
DScemuXrOs £gr9 Samnltl mStiendO dluXdendoquS creat {Liv.
zxxi. 4), he appoints ten commissioners for the purpose of
measfwring and dividing the Samnite territory.*
1295 The oonstruction of the gerundive with the verb Ss- hCy in the
sense of duty, is only a particular case of what has been ah*eady
noticed in § 966, and the dative of the person in fact belongs to
the verb Ss rather than to the gerundive, f Thus,
Yt tXbi ambtllandum, ungendum, sic mihi dormiendum (estt)
{Cic. ad Att. IX. 7. 7), as you must walk, must anoirU your-
self ^ so Imttst sleep; — ^which would be more literally trans-
lated, as walking, as anointing bdongs to you, so does sleeping
to me,
1296 The frequent use of the gerund and gerundive with ^s- be, in
the sense of dtUy or fUness,% led the mind at last to attach the
notion of duty to the gerundive itself, so that the latter is at times
used as an equivalent of an adjective in hUu Thus,
Nee t6, itiugnis mSmSrand^, sXlebo {Virg. A. x. 793), nor thee,
ever-m^emoraUe youth, wiU I pass by in silence.
* The last three phrases are common. See § 984.
f So in such a phrase as legionem in Morinos ducendam Fabio dedit
{Caes. B. G. t. 24), the dative Fabio is dependent not upon duoendam,
but upon iiedit ; and again, the accusative after dedit is not legionem^ but
legionem ducendam, * the duty of conducting the legion.* But although
the dative case commonly accompanies the gerund and gerundive, yet
there are occasional examples even in Cicero where ab and the ablative
occur, especially when the verb takes a dative of its own, and a second
dative in the sense of the agent would cause ambiguity. Thus, guibus
eat a uobis consuiendvm (cSe. p. leg. Man. 2.6), ^ whose interests you
must consult'
% Est mihi admits the translation, ' I have ;' and preeisely in the same
way, est mihi ambulandum may be well translated by ' I have to walk.*
Thus the origin of the dative in this phrase is without difScuIty.
I The notion of possibilUy is sometimes expressed by the participle
in endOf but it occurs in the best writers only with a negative or tM> .* as,
malum uue ferendum {Cic. de Fin. iv. 19. 53), * an evil scarcely to be
endured.* For the use of this participle with fw * be* in hypothetical
sentences, see §§ 715-721.
316 BTIFTAX.
1297 The phrases denoting duty at the same time refer commonly
to the future time for the performance ci the act ; and indeed
generally, as the gerund or gercmdiye is strictly an imperfect, the
completion of the act most belong to fixture time. Hence the
idea of futurity gradually atta^ed itself to this form,, and gram-
marians have giyen it, though inaccurately, the name q£ a future
participle. That it is truly an imperfect* ia well seen in such
phrases as:
IntSr &gendum (Virg, Buc. ix. 24), while driving.
In p&tri& del^ida occiip&ti et sunt et fuCrunt (Oie, de Off. i«
17. 57), the^ both are and have been for some time occupied in
blotting out their fatherland from the face of the world,
1298 The so-called verhal ai^ective in hmdo is really a participle^
and so sometimes found with an aocusatiTe : as,
Ylt&bundus castra hostium (Zrtv. xxv. 13), carefvU^ avoiding
the enemi/'s camp,
1299 The verbal substantive in ^u is used in the aoousativet after
verbs of motion to denote the object : as^
Ad Oaesftrem grfttillAtum conuenfirunt {Caes, B. G. i. 30), they
cam/efrom different quarters to Caesar to congrattdate him,
QuinquS cohortis frfLment9.tum mlat (Caes* B. G. vi. 36), he
sent five cohorts to get com*
Id rescltum in crSdIt {Ter, Ad. 1. 1. 45), he believes that people
are going to find it out, or he bdieves that it will be found out,
1300 It governs the same case as the verb from which it is derived :
as,
Pftcem pStltmn OrStOres mittont (Idv. i. 15), they send ambas-
sadors to seek peace,
L^fttos mittunt rtfgfttum auxllium (Caes, B. G. 1. 11), they send
ambassadors to ask aid,
1301 The verbal substantive in to is used in the ablative with cer-
tain adjectives : as,
* Something like an imperfect participle is seen in the sc-called ad-
jectire secundo' (L e. sequendo-) *' ibllowing, second.'
f This accusative of the rerbal In ^ is often called the supine afitiye,
and the ablative of the same the supine passive ; bat there is nothing
passive in the latter, and therefore the distinction is inappropriate. A
similar error exists in our own language in the foolish practice now be-
ginning to prevail of saying, ' a house to be let,* instead of * a house to let'
PBSPOBITION&-AB. 317
Diff^c^S dicta est {Cic. de Off. n. 14. 48), it is difficuU to my
(literally, in the taying).
Optttmum fitctu est {pic, ad Fam. vii. Z.\\iti%ikt lest thing
to do,
1302 The verbal in tion sometimes govems the same case as the verb
from which it is derived : as, .
lustitia est obtempSr&tiS scriptis ISglbtLs {pic, de Leg. 1. 15. 42),
justice i8 ohedience to written laws,
DSmum rSdXtiQnis sp9 subl&t& {Caes, B. G. i. 5), the hope of
retwming home having been taken away*
1303 PREPOSITIONS.
Ab (or & before some consonants) seems to have signified ori-
ginally proxi/mity ; and hence it was well suited to denote the
quarter from which an action commenced, and therefore the source
and origin of things. Thus it signifies :
a. The quarter at or near which, expressed by at, in, on, <fec. : as,
A fronte 8t ab sinistra partd nud&tis castrls (Caes, B. G. ii. 23),
the camp being laid bare in front and on the left,
Gallia ab Sequftnis et HeluStils adtingit BhSnum {Caes. B. G.
L 1), Gallia reaches to the Bhine at the parts occupied by the
Sequani and Hdvetii,
Isthmus dud m&ria &b occSLsu 8t orta solis flnlt!m& dlrlmlt
{Liv, XLV. 28), Hie isthmus divides two adjoining seas on the
west and the east,
A m&trS Pomp6ium arctisslmo contingSbat gr&du {Su£t, Aug.
4), he was very nearly rdated to Pompey on the mothefi^s side,
Apud sacrum tuam prdpe & mels aedlbus sSdeb&s {Cic, in Pis.
11. 26), you were sitting at your mother-in-law^ s near my
house,
b. With the verb sta- stand, &c., by, on the side of, in favour
of; as,
Nemo S. sSn&tu et bdn5rum caussft stStit constantitLs {Cic, Brut.
79. 273), no one stood more firmly by the senate and the caust^
of good m£n.
Hoc nihils mfi^s &b aduors&riis quam ft nSbis f&cit {Cic, do
Inv. I. 48. 90), this tells no more for our opponents than for
us,
bb2
318 mrTAZ.
Vide ne hoc t5tam sit ft m6 (Cie. de Or. 1. 13. 55), have a care
Utt the whole of this argumenl be in my favour.
c. In, in respect ofy in point of, as regards : vs,
Sttmiis Snim imp&r&tl, cam & mllltlbus turn ft pSct&nift (Cic» ad
Att. yii. 15. S),for ^lae are indeed tmprepared, not merely in
point of troops J hut even of money,
AntOnitLs fib SquXtStfl firmtLs essS dlc6lAtilr {Cic. ad Fam. x.
15. 2), ArOony tpas said to he strong in cavalry.
d. The department in which the services of an officer or servant
are called for, and thus arises a name for the office : as,
HdminSs h&bet quSs &b Spisttflls et libellls et r&ti5n!tbiis appel-
lat (Toe, Ann. xv. 35), he has persons whom he calls secre-
taries, registrars, accotmtants,
Fhll6m5nem, ft mftnfl senium, simpUd mortS puniit (Suet.
Jul. 74), his amannensis Philem4m he punished hy simply
putting to death,
Anti5chus Ti. Olaudl Oaes&ris ft bibli^thScft {Inscr. ap. Grat.
584. 6), Antiochns, librarian to Tiberius Clauditu Caesar.
#. At, in reference to time : as,
SummisstLs ft pnm5, post exsultftuit aud&ciils (Cic. Or. 8. 26),
subdtied at first, he afterwards burst out in a bolder style.
f. From, the point of departure : as,
Mfttteit &b urbS prSflcisd (Cotff. B. G. i. 7), he hastens to set
orUfrom the city.
Ab BOmft ISgfttI u6n6runt {Liv. zxi. 9), ambassadors eaimefrom
BxyfM.
g. With, after verbs signifying commencem^ent : via,
OaedXs Inltium fedsset ft me (Cic. Phil. v. 7. 20), he would have
made a beginning of the massacre with me,
Ab his sermo 5rltur, respondet LaeliiLs {Cic. de Am. I. 5), with
these the conversation commences, Laelius replies,
h. From, the commencement of time : as,
Ab hOrft septlma ad uespSrum pugnfttum est {Caes. B. G. i. 26),
the battle corUinuedfrom one o'dock until evening.
Tufts 6pist51fts ft pnmO 16go (Cic. ad Att. ix, 6.5), lam reading
your letters from the beginning.
AB. 319
QuibtLs ft puSris dSdlfX folmiifi {Ok. de Or. 1. 1. 2), to whUh we
have been devoted from our boyltcod. *
i. From, the commencement of a series : as,
Came&des est quarttLs &b ArcSsUft (Cic, Acad. n. 6. 16), Car-
neades u fourth iiL the line from Areesilae,
j. Immediate succession of time, translated by Tffiihy after : aS|
Ab his praeceptis conti5nem dimlsit (XtV^ xuy. 34), loith these
injunctions he dismissed the assemM^,
Ab hoc sermOnS prSfecttLs est {Liv. xxii. 40), imjmedioiXdy after
this conversation he set otU,
h With verbs signifying to pay, the source whence the money
proceeds: as,
TXbi quod debet, &b £gn&ti9 soluet {Cic. ad Att. vii. 18. 4),
what he owes you, he wiU pay by a draft on JEJffnatitts.
BSUquam pSotlniam & F&bSrid rSpraesent&blmtis {Cic, ad Att.
xu. 25), the rest of the money we wHlpay at onoe by drawing
on Faberius*
I, With personal pronouns and the names of persons, ./Vvm their
house: as,
A, TJnde est ? jB. A n5bls {Ter. And. iv. 4. 16), A. Where did it
come from ? B. From our house,
Ab Andriast ancilla haec {Ter, And. m. 1. 3), this maid-servant
is from the Andrian woman*s house,
n&ec cistella, ntimnam hinc ab nobis domost? {Plaut, Oist.
IV. 1. 6) this casket, pray did it come from our hottse here f
m, A motive, from, out of, in consequence of: as,
Tanto ardorS mllXtum est ustLs &b Ira inter condlciQnes p&cXs
interfectae st&ti9nls {Liv, xxiv. 30), he was so warmly sup-
ported by his soldiers J from their anger at the troops on guard
having been JdUed dwring a negociation,
N5n Si ciipldlt9.t$ sOlum ulciscendi &grum nostrum inu&dent
{Liv, V. 5), not m/erdy from the desire of reveTige wiU they
invade our territory.
n. The agerU with passive verbs, expressed by the preposition
by: as,
* Literally ' £rom boys,* an idiom which agrees with our own.
820 SYNTAX.
Ab sScils tinXcS dllIg6b&ttLr {Oie. p. Plane. 9. 24), he was mogt
highly esteemed by his ecUeagues.
A me tH coactiis es conflterl {Cic. n. Yerr. y. 30. 76), you were
compelled by me to confess,
0. What is considered as an agent, with intransitive verbs : as,
Mfire & sGl6 collucet {Cic. Acad. Pr. u. 33. 105), the sea is made
a mass of light by the sun.
Nihil est uftlentitis, & quo intSreat {Cic, Acad. Post. i. 7. 29),
there is nothing stronger (fhan iisdf) by which ii may be de-
stroyed,
p. Removal, separation, distance, expressed commonly hy from :
as,
Ab delect&tiSne omni nSgStils impSdimtir (Cic. p. Mur. 19. 39),
tpe are prevented from taking any amusement by business.
Proxlmtis & tectis ignis dsfendlttir aegre (Ov. Rem. Am. 625),
an adjoining fire is warded off from buildings with difficulty*
Ab XnlmlcSrum aud&ciS. telisquS ultam dSfendSrS {Cic. p. MiL
2.6), to defend our lives against the audacity and weapons of
our enemies.
Ipse ftb hSrom turpItudXne &bhorr6bat (Cic. p. Sest. 52. 112),
he himsdf turned away in horror from the baseness of these
men,
Mlli& passuum tria &b eSrum castris castr& ponit {Caes. B. G.
I. 22), he pitches his camp three miles from their camp.
Obs. In many of these constructions a mere ablative is suffi-
cient (see § 1023), but before persons the preposition ftb is required.
q. Ab is sometimes placed before the measure of the distance,
instead of the place measured from : as,
Ab mlllbus passuum oct5 uent5 tSnSbantiir {Ca^s. B. G. iy.
22), they were detain^ by the wind eight mites off.
P5sltis castris & mlllbus passuum quindSdm auxUia expect&.r6
constituunt {Caes. B. G. vi. 7), having encamped at a dis-
tance of fifteen miles ^ they resolve to wait for the allied troops,^
1304 In composition with verbs &b denotes, a. removal, absence : as,
aufSr- carry away, &b8s- be absent ; hence &btit- (r.) xue up. b. doum :
* See Matthiae*s Greek Grammar, TransL ii. 878, onro craZwy r^r-
rapoKovra njf OoXamis.
AB. £!>.
ai^. ftblch or Sibld- (abiid-)' throw downy absorbe- such dwD%. abs-
trtLd-* ^rzM^ down^ affllg-* cZ^ <2o2£^7i, app^ or ^^dJB^* Bet down.f
In composEtion with adjeotiveff &b denotes aibsenee^ d^fkrtnce :
as, &menti- or &ment- vntkoni vdndy mad, abetfno- c^ of tune or
1305 Ad signifies — a. Motion to Q. e. up to^ not irOo) : as,
Exerdtum ad C&slllnum dtlcSt {Liv. xuxi« VJ), he. hods his
army ta (t^ fw^ o/} Cewftftnttm.
MttnltiQtoem ad fl.^Hinen perdoxSrat {poits, R 0. nx. 66^ ^ ^^'(^
carried the fortification to the {banJt of the) river,
h. To what time: as,,
Ad id dtibios seruftraat &n!m58 (Liv, xxi. 62), up to that time
they had kept their minds in a state of dovht,
c. To what exterU : as,
OmnSs &d unum Xdem sentiunt (Cia, de Am. 23. 86), tJiey have
aUto a man the sarmfedin^g.
Serui ad quattuor milia hSmlnum O&pttolium occHp&nSrS (JAv.
m. 15), the daves to the number of 4000 m^n seiaed the Ca-
pitol.
IncautSs ad s&tiSt&tem triicld9ibitXs {Liv. xxiy. 38), unpre-
pared as they wiU he, you wiU hUeher them tiU you are tired,
Ad:^ uiginti m&trSnis per ui9.t5rein acdtls {LCv, viii. 18), as
many at twenty ladies having been suaninoned by the mes-
senger*
d. Direction^ to, tonpords : as,
Via ad CS-sHlnum obsessS. {Liv, xxii. 16), the road to Casilinum
being occupied by the enemy,
Yerglt ad septemtriOnSs {Goes, B. G. i. 1), it indines to the
norths
e. Purpose, for: oBy
Multft sunt ^nlmadiiDraaberbftnim g9n&ra ad morsus bestiSjom
(Cic, de Diy. i. 7. 13), many kinds of herbs have been dis-
covered for the bUes of beasts,
• See 1 451. 1.
f Compare the Gennan alrgshen * go devn,' &er
% In this usage the numeral alone depends upon the preposition, the
substantive adapting its cas» to the rest of the sentenee. See f 1 155. 1.
322 8TVTAZ.
Ad lUdos pScaniae deoemuntiir {Cie, ad Q. F. L 1. 9.26), niume^
is voted for the games.
Ad Sgrum instrueudum ulres nOn Srant {Liv. yi. 5), they were
too tveak {in puree) to stock a farm.
Pfilus ROm&nOs &d ins^uendom tard&bat {Goes. B. G. vii. 26),
the marsh made the Eomans dow tojmrsue,
f, TOf in reply : as.
Ad ill& quae m6 m&gis mOuerunt respondebO {flic, p. CaeL 11.
27), / wiU reply to those other points which moved tne more,
g. In respect of^ looking to : as,
Ylr &d usum pSrltiis, ad fortunam felix {Cic. p. Font. 15. 43),
a man of experience as regards the world, andfavowred in
respect to fortune,
h. In addition to : as,
Si ad c6tSrft uolnSra banc quSquS plftgam inflizissSs {Cic, in
Yat. 8. 20), if in addition to the other wounds you had tn-
flicted this blow also.
Ad hoc prOmissft barba et cftpiUi eff^r&uSrant spSciem oris {Liv,
n. 23), in addition to this a long beard and long hair had
given a savage character to his face,
i. By, of future time : as,
NGs hie te ad mensem Iftnu&rium ezpectftmtLs {Cic, ad Att. i.
3. 2), we expect to see you here by the month of January,
Kescio quid intersit tLtrum nunc uSniam, &n ad dScem annOs
{dc, ad Att. XII. 46), I know not what it matters, whether I
come now or ten years hence,
j. Near, before, off, to, over (all in the sense of nearness) : as.
Ad Gkronium constXtSrat bellum {Liv, xxii. 32), before Oero-
nium the war had come to a standstill,
dassis quae ad SlcUiam drat {Liv. xxvii. 22), the fleet which
was lying off Sicily.
G&nimt ad tibiam cl&rOrum uXrGrum laudSs {Cic. Tusc. iv. 2. 3),
they sing the praises of great men to ihefiute.
Konnimquam ad ulnum dXserti sunt {Cic. p. CaeL 2&. 67), they
are sometimes eloquent over their wine.
k. In comparison to, by the side of: as,
▲D. 323
Nihil ad nostram banc (TV. E. n. 3. 69), nothing to this ofie of
ours.
Terra &d unXuorsI caell complexum qufisi puncti instSr obtXnet
{Cic, Tusc. I. 17. 40), the earth, compared to what the whole
heavens ernbrace, is as it were but a point.
L In accordance with, after : as,
O&to ultam ad certain r&tiOnis normam dirlgit {Cic, p. Mar. 2.
3), Cato shapes his life hy the strict sqtiare of reason.
Yixit Sd S>li5rum arbXtrium, non ad suum (Cic. p. Mar. 9. 19),
he has lived according to the pleasure of others, not his own.
m. Among, before (in tbe same sense as &piid) : as,
Minus clS.dis, c6tSram non plus S.nlm5rum Sd hostis Srat {Liv,
X. 35), there was less loss, ha not more confidence among the
enemy,
SSnS.t5rum stLperbiam ad plebem cilmlnantiir (JAv. iii. 9), ikey
attach ike tyranny of the senators before the commonalty,
n. Immediately upon, in consequence of at : as.
Ad &mam obsldionis dslectiis b&ben coeptiis est {Liv. ix. 7),
at the report of a siege, a levy of troops was commenced,
KSc ad dticis cILsum perculsS, m&gis quam irrltftta est multlttldo
{Liv. IX. 22), and the great mass of the men were not so muck
panic-struck as roused to fury at the accident to their chief,
0, Before a word denoting a person, to the house o/that person :
Magnl dSmum concurstis &d Afranium*^ flebant (Caes, B. 0. i.
63), great crowds k^t flocking to the house of Afranius,
NSquS ddmum unquam ad m6 littSras mittam quin adjungam
eas quas tibi reddl uSlim (flic, ad Fam. iii. 8. 10), nor shall
I ever send letters to my own house, without adding to the
packet a letter for you.
BSuortit Olddiils ad s8 (fiic. p. Mil. 19. 51), Clodius turns out of
the road to his own hottse.
p. With a noun denoting the department in which a servant's
offices are looked for, whence arises a name for the office (see 8b,
§ 1303 d.) : as,
* And this phrase is used although Afranius himself was in Spain at
the time. See § 1303 /.
as,
SS4
Mdtanm seraom sifai h&liuit ad m&Rwn {da, de Or. m. GO,
225), he had a slave Licintufor his amamtetms,
PU)6r qufo ex aulfi cftpillis Ad qyi&thiim st&tuetiir unctis ! (Hor.
Od. I. 29. 7) s/iaU some page from the palaoe with perfumed
locks he stationed beside the wine-ladle f*
1306 Ad in composition with verbs denotefr—«. motion to : as, lld-i-
§0 to, approeu^y aooed- stqp tip to* b. addition : as, aoced- be addedy
ascrlb-t etiroU with, a. nearness : as^ .aaside- sit near, adi&ce- lie
near, aasurg- (alicui) rise to (a person), d. ass^at^fdvotor: as, anna-
nod assent, arrlde- smile on, accl&ma- express assent by acclamation^
cheer. But see § 1308. 1, &G.
1307 Aduerstts or -am (old form aduorsils or -aim) is literally trans-
lated bj our UHwards, It denotes :
a. Motion towards : as,
Qnis ha6c est, quae me ada^rsom inoeditt (Pkaut. Per. n. 2.
18) who is tJbis vHyman, that is coming towards me f
ImpStum aduersus montem in cohortis f&ciunt {Goes, B. 0. i.
46), they make a charge upX the mountain upon the cohorts.
b» Opposite, faeingi, before (without motion) : as,
Ii6ro et Lerma aduerst&s AntlpSlim {Plin. m, 11), Zero arid
Ijerina opposite AntipoUs.
£g6ne ut te adu6r8iEm m^xrtiar, natdr mea ! {PUeat. Aul. iv.
7. 9), I teU a falsehood before you, mother !
c. Conduct towards (good or bad, friendly or unfriendly) : as,
QuSnammSdo mS gSram aduorsus CaeB&rem? {Oic, ad $'am. xi.
27. 5) how in the world am I to bear mysdf toipords i^aesar ?
Id gdctum fuisse adu6rsum te, habeo gr&tiam {Ter, And. i. 1.
15), thai this was pleasing to you, Ifed grateful,
d. To counteract, against : as,
Sunt t&men quaedam r6m8di& propria adaersuB quaedam u8-
* In very late writers, as Vegetius, ad was used to denote the means :
as, ad spongiam detergere (in. 4. 2), ad aoutam cannam exsecare (in. 3.
12), ad nphonem paulatim infundes (i. 10.'2), od acum pa/m auneulme
signatur (in. 2. 27), perforate ad acum (ibid. 28).
t See §451.1.
t He who goes up a mountain goes facing it. Compare the use of
the ablative absolute, aduerto monte ire, and § 1320 b.
• N
AD. ADTOBSVK. AK. ANA. 325
n6D& {Cds, y. 27. 12), there are however certain ipec^ reme-
dies against certain poisons.
e. At variance withy in opposition to : as,
P^liniae concIliS.tae aduorsum l6g6s, aduorsum rempabllcam
{Cic, II, Verr. in. 84. 194), nioney quietly obtained in oppo-
sition to the law, in opposition to the interests of the cov/ntry,
. /, Aduorsum is used adverbially with i- go &c. and a dative of
the person : as,
Cesso hSro meo Ire aduorsum ? (Flaut, Cas. in. 6. 5) why do I
^ not at once go to meet my master f
1308 Am, rarely if ever used except in composition, when it signifies,
a. with verbs, round: as, anquir- look round for^ amplect- (r.)
embrace^ &m-Ic- or &m-Ici- throw round, h. in adjectives, on both
sides : as, anclp- or anclplt- two-headed^
1308. 1 Ana {=ava)j used in its full form only as an adverb, and only
in medical* prescriptions, signifies distribution or each : as,
Sacc&ri, erul pollXnIs, &na unciam dnam (Veg. Art. Yet. m.
65. 6), sugar, and the flour of Hack vetches, one ounce of each.
F51il capp&ris, f51il mirtl siluestris, f51il ctiprcssi fina uncias
tres dlUgentissIme detSrSs {ibid, lu. 2. 6), tcJee of caper-leaves,
wUd-myrtU-leaves, cypress-leaves, three otmces each, and pound
them as fine as possible,
1308. 2 Ant up {=ava) is found only in composition. The form in which
it appears greatly varies, a. In &n-h6la- it retains its correct form.
b. Frequently it has the consonant assimilated to that which fol-
lows, as in acc&miila-, addormisc-, allSua-, amm5ne-, apprehend-,
acquiesc-, arrlg-, assicca-, att^r-. c. Sometimes the consonant is
altogether lost, as in a-gnosc-, a-scend-. d. More commonly it is
attracted into the form of the fitmiliar preposition &d, thus chang-
ing the dental liquid for a dental mute, as in &d&resc-, &dSd-, 8dlm-,
&d51esc-, &dur-. e. Not less frequently it is attracted into the
form of the familiar preposition In, by an easy change of the
vowel]!, as in inclp- or inclpi-, Xnhorre-, inttLmesc-, imbu-, ignosc-.§
* As the medical art at Rome was in the hands- of Greeks, Greek
words obtained admission into this part of the language.
f See § 834 b, and note.
t So in^ the negative prefix, corresponds to the privative ay.
§ Even Hm-U- {Smiit-) represents the c.f. of oy-ny/u.
326 BTNTAX.
1308. 3 An vpy like its equivaleat am, has the following meanings : a.
wpy as anhela- ktvA up {a Matt of air\ mahs a vident expiration;
ascend- climb upy acctlmiUa- heap up^ adiilua- lift up and so aidj
allSua^ raise up, apprehend- take up^ arrig- erecty adaequa- raise to
a levd withy inhorre- hristU up, inttimesc- swell up, instltu- set up»
b, hack, as Xnhlbe- hold up or hackj incllna- lend lack, inflect- bend
back, infring- refract, c, again, as agnoso- recognise, amm5ne- or
admSne- remind, adsurg-* rise up again, instaura- (=sre8tanra-)
cdebrate anew, ingSmlna- redouble, d, reversal of a preceding act, as
igao^Q' forget, acquiesc- repose after labour, e. loosening, opening,
as ad&pSri- open up, In&ra- plough up, infind- deave open, plough
up, f, commeneement, as &d&ma- fall in love, addonniso- fall
adeep, aduespSrasc- begin to be dusk, ambiir- begin to bum, singe,
imbu- wet for the first time, infonna- give a first shape to, immlnu-
impair {what was entire), indp- or inoSpi- take up, begin, g. sepO"
ration, rem^tval, disappearance, as ftdlm-t lake up and so take away,
ampiita- out off, assicca- dry up, &d&re6c- dry up (intr.), infiing-
break off, incid- out off„ int&besc- meU away^ A. thnmgh, as &dlg-
drive through, transfix, admisce- mix up or thoroughly, i. intensity,
as accid- cut deep into, &dSd- eat deep into, attonde- cut (the hair)
close, &dar- burn a deep hcie in^ att^- rub a deep hole in^ affic- or
9ffidr produce a deep impression on, serioudy affect.
1308. 4 An signifies up in the adjective acclmi- uph^.
1309 Anti$« a. Before in place ; as;,
Imm^bat antS praetorium {Oie* de Bit. i. 33. 73), he vxu so-
erificing before his tenS.
Ants trtibtiiial tuum M. Fanni, antS pSdes uostros Indices, cae-
d98 Srunt (Cic, p. Bosc Am. 6. 12), before your tribunal,
Marcus Fannius, before your feet, gentlemen of the jury,
wiU murders be committed*
b. The same without a case : as,
Fliiuitis ab tergo, antS circfiquS uSlut rlp& praeceps, ^Srarn til-
miili omnem cingSbat {Liv. xxrii. 18), a river in the rear,
in fr^nt and on the sides something like a precipitous bank
shut tn the ufkoU eiremt of the eminence^
* Stee lAv, xxr. 36;. 7, xxn. 3*6, and tiJ^msurtf ^^zn. 4. 3.
t Compan tm^mpt'.
c. Befwre a person (rare) : as,
Dlcer6 caussam antS iUdlcem ((7ft^« L Terr. 3. 9), to make a
defence before a judge.
d» lAoiion forward (withoat a noon) : as,
Tt si aut m&nibtis ingrSdiftttir quXs, aat ii5n ant6 sed rSM
{Gic» de Fin. y. 12. 35), as if a person wre to walk upon Am
kandSj or to ioalk^ not fortpardif but backwank,
«. B^ore in order : as.
Quern antd mS dlUgo (Balh. ap« CSc ad Att. Tin. 15 A.), whom
I esteem above myself^
/• JB^ore in time (which is the ordinary meaning of the word) :
Multo ants noctem cSpias rSdimt (Idv. xxrii. 42), long before
night he led the forces back.
g. Before in time without a noun : as^
Et fietoi ante et fi&cio nunc {Cia. ad Fam. zy. 14. 3), I have done
so btfore^ and I do so now.
Panels ants diebiis oppldum obpugn&rant {Liv. zli. 11), a few
days before (^m) they had assaulted the town.
Anno ants quam mortuost {pie. de Am. 3. 11), £^ year before
he died,
h. This preposition, ae well as post, often causes this ablative
to be changed for an accusative by attraction, as if it depended
upon Uie preposition. Thus,
Ohalddem dies antS paucos prQdIdSrat {Liv, zzzi. 24), he had
betrayed Chalcis a few days before.
Sulci ante annum flunt quam ulnet& consSruntilr {Col, v. 5),
the furrows are made a year before the vineyards <xre planted,
L&tlnae fSriae fu6re antS diem tertium nSnas Mai&s {Idv, xli.
16), ^ Latin festival was two days brfore the nones of May ^
i, e. the 6th of May.
ft. Hence another preposition may be placed before antS : as,
Oaedem conttUisti In antS diem quintum kftlendas NSvembrls
(Oic. in Cat. i. 3. 7), the massacre you fixed for the fourth
day before the kalends of November ^ i. e. October the 28^.
SuppUc&tio indicta est ex antS diem quintum IdOs OctObrls
cum eO die in quinquS dies {Liv. xlv. 2), a thanksgiving
328 BTITTAX.
VHuprodatmed to emtinue/rom thef&urth day lefore the idea
of Oetcher induHve for five days, i. e. from the llth to the
I6th of October,
1310 Ants in composition with verbs signifies "befwe in place, time
and excdlence: as, ante-i- walk heforen live before, surpass; antS-
iM-* precede in plMce, in time, in gvalUy,
1311 Ap&d ^ptLt) is for the most part limited to persons. It de-
notes :
a. Near, with plaoes (rarely) : as,
AptLd oppldum Cybistrft castr& fSd {Cic. ad Fam. xy« 4. 4), /
efnoamped mar the town Cyhistra,
Apud forum modo e D6.uo audiui {Ter. And. n. 1. 2), i heard
itjtist now from Daws near the forum,
Cluicam cdronam &pud Britanniam mSrItiis Srat (TW.f Ann.
XYi. 15), he had earned a civic crown among the Britons.
h. Near, with persons : as,
In lectd Crassiis Srat, St ftptLd eum Sulplcias sSdSbat {Cic, de
Or. II. 3. 12), Grassus was on the cottch, and near him Sul-
pidus was sitting,
Apt&d exercltum est (Cic, n. Yerr. it. 22. 49), he is wUh the
army,
Anet ftnlmtis ftpiid illud consilium dicSrg {Cic, Phil. y. 5. 13),
my soul longs to speak before that bench of judges,
c. At the house of a person}^, even though he be away : as,
Brtitum &p^d me fuissS gaudeo {Cic, ad Att. xv. 3. 2), I rtjoioe
{to hear) that Brutus has been at my house.
P5mi esse &pud sSse archlplrfltas dixit du5s (CtV. ii. Yerr. y.
29. 73), there were at his house, he said, tv)o of the chief pirates,
d. Metaphorically in oneU senses : as,
Non sum aptit me {Ter, Haut. v. 1. 4d), I am aU abroad, am
lostf am out of my senses,
Proin tu f&c apud t6 ut sies {Ter, And. n. 4. 5), do you then at
once take care you have aU your wits about you,
♦ See §461.1.
t This use of apud with the names of countries is almost peculiar to
Tacitus.
:{: See$§ 1303 /,1305 a.
ABTB. AFTD. AB. €IBCA. 3S9
€m Inthe time of: as,
Apud ptoes nostrOs (C^. p. Mur. 36. 75), amtong owr fathers^
i,e^intki timet of&ur/atken,
Apud saedum piiiis {Ter, E, o. 2« 16), in the preceding getfiera-
tioti,
/. In the mind: as, ^
Fraemia &p4d me miniimum uiUent {Cie. ad Fam. z. 0. 11),
rewards with me home very litUe weight.
Apud uXroe bdnos gratiam oonsScutl Bttmlis {Oie» ad Att. it.
1. 3), we have obtained influence with good men.
g. In authors: as,
y t iUe &pud Tgrentium (Cie. de Ful ▼. 10. 28), like that old
man in Terence,
De sSpulcris nihil est &pud S^flOnem amplius quam • • . • {Cie.
de Leg. n. 26. 64), on the whfect of septdehree there is nothing
in the laws of Solon more than • . . .
1312 Ar (of the same meaning as &d), rarely if ever used except in
composition*, and then it signifies — a, to •* as, aroess- and arci-
caU to (you), send for; anidca- call to (you)y otaSLaL-flg to, aruSna-
one lately arrived, a stranger, h, presence : as, arbXtSro- a person
present, a witness, umpire, judge; arfu- he present (whence arfuit).
1313 Girc&. a» About, rotmd, in reference to place : as,
Custddes circa omnis portas missi n6 quis urbe SgrMSrStiir
(Liv, xxTiii. 26), guards were sent round to all the gates to
prevent any one from leamng the city,
C&nes circS. se h&b6bat (Cio* n« Yerr. l 48. 126), he had dogs
ab<mthim»
h. The same without a noun : as,
L&P& cfttiens ex montlbus qui circS. sunt ad puSillem uSgltum
oursum flezit {Liv. i. 4), a thirsty wolf out of the mountains
which lie around, upon hearing the crying of a child turned
iU course thither.
c. About, as to time : as,
Post^ro die circa eandem hOram cQpi943 admouit (Liv. xlii. 57),
the next day abotU the same hour he moved up his troops,
• But tee Plant. True. u. 2. 17.
rr2
330 BTITTAX,
d* Ahottt, as to number : as,
Deindd pSr insSquentls dies circ& singiilfts hSmlnfis Smittendiim
(Cds. VII. 15), then dwring ike faUowing daye aUnrnt an he-
mina Utohe drawn offeackday^
e. About, wpon, concerning, in reference to (chiefly in the later
writers): as,
Hi circa consilium eUgendl successdrls in duas factidnes scin-
debant&r {Tac, Hist. i. 13), theae vfere dividing themsdves
into two parties wpon the question of decting a successor,
1314 OircltSr. a. Ahonty as regards place (rare) : as,
Vt 5pInor, l«ca haeo circItSr excldit mihi {Plaut» CSst. iv. 2.7),
I fancy it was hereabouts I dropt it,
h. Ahoviy as to time : as,
OircItSr idus Sextllls pilto me &d Ic5nium fSrS {Cic, ad Fam.
III. 6. 4), ahoui the ides of SextUis, i. e. August 13^A, / col-
culate I shall he in the neighbourhood of Iconium,
c. Ahouiy as to number (the chief use of the word) : as,
Dies circlter quind^im Iter f^runt {Caes, B. G. i. 15), they
marched for about fifteen days,
1315 Oircum, round, whether in rest, or circular or other similar
motion : as,
Terr& circum axem s6 conuortit {Cic. Acad. Pr. u. 39. 123), the
earth turns round its axis.
Ex e& turri quae circum essent 9p8r& tuSrl sS possS confix sunt
{Goes, B. C. n. 10), from this tower they fdt confident that
they should he able to defend the works which lay arouruL
PuSros circum fimlcos dimittit {Cic. p. Quinct. 6. 25), he sends
the servants round to his friends,
Paucae, quae circum illam essent, m&nent {Ter. E. m. 5. 33),
a few women remain to wait upon that lady,
1316 Qia, a. On this side of, vnthin, as regards place : as,
Saepe &b his cis P&dum ultr&qud lSgi5nes fusae Srant (Liv. y.
35), the legions had heen often routed hy them on this side of
the Padvs and heyond it.
L Within, in regard to time (only in Plautus) : as,
Ntilla, faxim, cis dies pauc6s siet (Plant. True. ii. 3. 27), /
would make it whody disappear within a few days.
OIBOA. OIBOYH. 018. OITBA. CLAM. C017TBA. 331
1317 Gls in the composition of adjectives signifies on this side of:
as, cisalpino-, cisrhCnSno-, dsp&dftno-, on this side the Alps^ the
Bhine^ the Po.
1318 CXtrSi. a. On this side ofy within^ as regards place : as,
Erat Snim cum suis nS.uibus dtrS. YSliam mlli& passuum tri&
{die, ad Att. XVI. 7. 5), for he was in fact vntk Ida fleet three
miles on this side Vdia.
b. The same without a noun : as,
Tela hostium dtrS. cS,d6bant (Tac. Hist. ni. 23), the missiles of
the enemy heptfcHlir^ shyrt,
c. Within, as to time : as,
Ldcis ullglnOsis dtrS. k&lendEs OctSbris sSmln&rS conuSnXt {Ccl,
u. 8), on wet lands it is right to sow before the Ist of October.
d. Short ofy in degree : as,
PeccSLuI dtrSi scSltis {Ov, Tr. v. 8. 23), my guilt is short of vm,"
piety.
1319 Clam and the diminutive danctilum are used only before per-
sons, in the sense of without their huyidedge :
a. As prepositions : as,
Sibi ntinc uterque c6ntra legion6s parat
Pat^rque filidsque clam alter <erum (Plaut. Oas. pr. 50),
Against each otJier now are they preparing armies.
Both sire and son, each unknown to each,
Emptast clam tixorem et clam filium* {Plant. Merc. m. 2. 2),
she has been purchased wnhnown to his wife and wnknown to
his son.
Alii clanciilum p&tres quae f&ciunt {Ter. Ad. L 1. 27), what
others do without their fathers^ knowledge,
b. They are often used adverbially without a substantive.
1320 OontrSi. a. Ooeragainxt, facing : as,
Quinctius trans Tlb^rim contra eum IScum iibi nunc n&u&li&
sunt, quattuor iugSrum cdlebat &grum {JAv, in. 26), Q^iryc
tius was cultivating a farm of hutfowr jugers on the other
side of the Tiber, opposite where the dockyard now is,
* So Ritflchl from the palimpsest ; but otherwise the best Mss. have
uxors and filio.
832 8TKTAX.
AspIoS-dum oontrft me (PlatU, Most. v. 1. 56), just look me in
the face.
h. Up*: as,
Dtlc6nftri& dud contrft sc&las f^rebat {Plin. T. 20), Ite would
carry two two-hundred weights up stairs.
c. Metaphorically, opposition^ against : as,
Res B5mSii& contra spem aOt&qae eius rteurgebat (Liv, xxiy.
45), the power of Borne was rising again corUrary to his hope
and his prayers,
d. Towards^ of the feelings or behaviour : as^
ElSphantI tant& narrfttur cl6menti& oontr& minus nUldOs tit
^a (Plvn. Yui. 7), the kindness of the elephant towards the
weak is said to he so great that Ac*
e. The reverse (with or without a case) : ae^
In stultltia. contrast {flic. p. Clu. 31. 84), infcUy it is just the
reversSm
Quod contrS. fit S. pl6risqu8 {Cic. de Off. I. 15. 49), whereas the
contrary of this is done hy most people.
f. Weighed against (and with a dative case apparently) : as,
Non dirust auro c6ntra (PlatU, £p. m. 3. 30), he is not dear at
his weight in gold.
1321 C5ram. a. In the presence of, only before persons : as,
Mihi ipsi, cSram gSnSrO me5, quae dlc^re ausu's ? {Cic. in Pis.
6. 12) even to mey in the presence of my son-in-law^ what lan^
guage did you dare to use f
PrScSs ad uos conuerto, disque et p&tri& cdram obtestdr (Tac»
Ann. IT. 8), / turn my prayers to you, and before the gods
and my country ianplore yen*
h. Frequently without a substantive : as,
Qu&sl tecum c5ram 15quSrer (fiic» ad Fam. u. 9. 2), as if I had
been talking with you face to face.
1322 Oum. a, TTttA, chiefly in the case of persons : as,
Yftg&miir figentes cum conittglbtbB et llbSrlB (die. ad Att. vin.
%2)fWe wander about in poverty with our wives andchUdren.
* Because he who moves facing the stain ascenda them. See aduor-
sum, 1 1307 a.
OONT&A. CORAH. GYM, 333
Tecum essS uehSmenter u^im {Cic, ad Fam. v. 21. 1), I should
he injmitdy ddxgkted to he with you»
3, A relation between two parties is expressed by the dative of
the chief party, and cum with the other : as,
Tecum mihi rSs est {(He, p. Rose. Am. 30. 84), my dealings are
with you.
Intercedunt mihi InXmldtiae cum istlus miili6ris uXrO {Cic, p.
Gael 13. 32), there is a disagreement existing between me and
the husband of that woman,
c. With or iny in the sense of wearing : as,
Nolo me in uia Cum hac u6ste uideat {Ter, E. y. 2. 67), I must
n^t have him see me in the street in this dress,
Oenfiuit cum td^ pullft {Cic. in Yat. 13. 31), he dirked in a Uack
toga.
Ipse esse cum tele {Sod. Oat. 27), he himself went about armed,
d. Two nouns are at times united by cum, so as to have a
common predicate or adjective or genitive attached to them : as.
Ipse dux cum SJXquot princXpXbus c&piuntiir {Liv. xxi. 60), the
general himsdf with a considerable number of the leading m/en
are taken.
A^bin hinc in mal&m rem cum suspicione ist6.c scelus % {Ter,
And. II. 1. 17) go and he hanged^ you and your suspicions,
you scoundrd.
Pedem cum u5ce rSpressit {Virg, A. n. 378), he checked hisfoot,
and checked his voice,
InduXt albos cum uitta crlnls {Virg, A. vii. 417), she puts on
locks andfUet white alike.
Clmlnl cum montS l&cum {Virg. A. vii. 697), the lake and
m/)untain of Giminus.
e. Withy denoting coincidence of time : as,
Summl puerorum fimeres saepe OnS. cum praetexta pOnuntiir
{Cic, de Am. 10. 33), the strongest attachments of hoys are
often laid aside together with {at the same time as) the pro-
texta.
Pfirlter cum ortH sells castr& metfthSLtiir {Sal. Jug. 106),j7fY-
cisdy as the sun was rising he was m^aswring otU a cam^p,
/. Withy in^ &c., to express accompanying feelings, circum-
stances: as,
dS4 STITTAZ.
AthenienBes cum sUentio audit! eunt (Idv* xzztiii. 10), the
Athenians vtere heard «» eUenee.
Fl&mlnl corpus magn& cum cQra inqulsltum nOn inuenit (Ztv.
xzii. 7), the body of Flaminiw he made seareh after with the
greatest care, hvt did not find it»
g. The immediate consequences, expressed by to .* as,
YSoit Lampsftcum com magn& c&L&mlt&te et prdp9 pernXcie
dultfttls {do. u. Yerr. i. 24. 63), he came to Lampeacum*
to the great damage and all hut utter ruin of the citixns,
h. With, in compaiisoos : aa,
Conferte banc p&oem cum Hid bdl5 (Cie* n. Yerr. iy. 62.115),
comjHire thispeaee with that war.
Com meum &ctum cum tuO comp&ro {Oic. ad Fam. m. 6. 1),
when I compare my condtict vnth gours,
i. Withy in the sense of againety with verbs denoting contest :
as.
Cum omnibus s&lutis meae defensOrlbus bellS gSrunt {Cic, p.
Sest. 2. 4), theg wage war with all who defend my life and
fortunes.
Hannibal de impM5 cum pSpiilO RSmftnO certftuit {Oic, de Or.
IL 18. 76), Hannibal contended for empire with the Roman
people,
j. Cum eO, followed by tit and a subjunctive, is employed to
express an addition or qualification : as,
L&n&ulnis s&cr& su& redditft, cum eo Ht aedes lunOnis com-
munis L&niiulnis cum pdpiil5 BGmS«no esset {Idv, viii. 14),
to the people ofLanuvittm their sacred property was restored,
on the condition that the temple of Juno should he in common
between the burgesses of Lanuvium and the people of Home.
Ynum gaudium affulsSrat, cum eo Ht app&rSret hand prdctU
exitia fuissd classem {Liv, xxx. 10), one joy had shone upon
themy together with the certainty that the fleet had been at one
time on the verge of destruction.'^
1323 Cum or cdn in composition with verbs ugnifies — a. union : as,
conoilr-t run together, co-i- meet, consill- [sit together], ddiberate.
*
* Lampsaeum, not Lampsaeui^ ii the nominatlTe in Cicero. See ii.
Yerr. i. 24. 63.
t See also § 1065. 1, examples 2, 8, 4.
H: See § 451. 1.
OYH. OON. DE. 335
h. compldeness (in the 'way of destruction) : as, oomSd- eai up,
oom-bilr-* him wp, conttld-* hammer to pieces, oonfXo- or conftci-
diepatchi concid- cat to pieces, e, completeness (in the way of suc-
cess) : as, conftc- or oonflci* make up, oonsSqu- (r.) overtake, obtain,
conseota- (r.) huTit down^ d, with a great effort : as, c5nlc- or c5nlci-
hud, conclftma- cry ovi lotuUy, colldca- place with care, place for a
permanence, conciit- or conc&ti- shake violendy, comprehend- seize
firmly* «• in harmony : as, ooncXn- and oonsdua- accord, harmonise,
consenti- agree {infedir^), /. the same as de in English, at once
changing the construction of the verb and adding completeness :
as, constSr-* bestrew or pave, collXn- besmear, (See § 905.)
1324 Com or c5n in adjectiyes denotes union : as, conscio- sharing
knowledge, coramuni- shared in common, comm^do- having the same
measure, fitting, coniiig- yoked together, yokemate,
1325 Cam or c8n with substantives denotes fellow : as, conseruo-
fetlow-dave, commotion- feUow-soldier, consdcSro- on>e of two fathers-
in-law,
1326 De. a. Down, down from : as,
Ruunt ds montlbtLs amn6s {Virg, A. iv. 164), adovm the mown-
tains rush the rivers.
ClXpe& de cSlumnis dempsit {Liv. xl. 51), he took the shields
dotanfrom thepiUars.
Atque haec figebanttlr in conuenta pftlam d5 sellaf {Cic, n.
Verr. iv. 40. 85), and what is mare, these remarks were made
in court openly from the chair.
h. The source from which : as,
Hoc audlul de p&trS meo (Cic. de Or. ni. 33. 133)^ this 1 heard
from my father.
Mills iagSrum de Pilio emit (Cic, ad Att. xiii. 31. 4)^ he bmgkt
a thousand jugers {of land) of PUius.
PScfLniam niim^rfiuit de Bu6 {Cic. ad Att. xvi. 16 A. 3), he paid
the money down out of his ovm pocket.
"VirtOs, quam tii n6 de f&cie qixldem nosti (Cic. in Pis, 32. 81),
Virtue, whom you know not even by sight,
c Part of, one or «or« of: a%
* See § 451. 1.
t Wh^h was on elevated gnrand.
/
s
336 8TVTAX.
DS tills iimiimST&blUbtts in me offlcilB, Silt hoc grfttiesiimiiin
(Ctc. ad Fam. xvi. 1. 2), of y<ywr innvmerabU kindnesses to
me J this will indeed be the most wdcom/e,
inLbe&tur s&ne Orator sed d6 mindrlbiis {Cic, Opt. gen. Or. 4. 9)»
let him he accounted indeed an orator, btit one of an inferior
doss.
d. The material of which any thing is made : as,
Pilmum slbi fScit poctUH d8 l&t5 {Tilml, i. 1. 31), hefwit made
him dtps of dirt.
DS fratrg quid ftet* ? {Ter. Ad. y . 9. 39) what will become of my
brother f
e. Motives, causes, suggestions, variously translated, as by
under, for, on, &c. : as,
lustis de caussis r&tiOnes deferrS pr5pSr&uI (Cic. ad Fam. v.
20. 2), for good reasons I made haste to give in my accounts,
Qu5rdm de sententi^ tot& res gestast (Cic, p. SuIL 19. 55), under
whose advice the whole matter was conducted,
f. Down upon, on : as,
D5 grftdii c5narl {Liv, xxxiv. 39), to fight their best on foot,
Etiamsl cScIdSrit, d6 gSnfL pugnat {Sen, de Prov. 2), even if he
fall, he fights on his knee.
Non possum, inquit, tXbi dIcSrS, nesdo Snim quid d6 gr&du
f&ciat — ^tanquam de essM&rio interrdgSretiir {Sen, £p. 29),
I cannot teU you, says he, for I know not what he could do
fighting on foot — as thmigh the question had been about a
chariot-soldier.
g. On (a topic), over, dhovt, of, concerning : as.
Nihil dico ds meo ingSniS {Cic. in Oaecil. 11. 36), I say nothing
of my ovm abilities,
RSgiUus de captluis commfitandis R5mam misstts est {dc. de
Off. 1. 13. 39), Regulus was sent to Rome about an exchange
of prisoners.
Ds me autem susclpS paulisper meas partis {Cic, ad Fam, m.
12. 2), on the other hand, as regards myself, put yowrsdf in
my position for a m^oment.
AMc&nus ds NtLmantlnis triumph&uSrat {Cic, Phil. xi. 8. 18),
Africanus had triumphed over the people of Numantia»
* Literally ' will be made.* See % 1003.
DEy DI. 337
h. With words of time the meaning is somewhat doubtful. It
would seem however that here also the notion of a part (see sub-
division c.) prevails, and that the determination as to what part
is only to be inferred from the context. Thus the best translation
perhaps is our preposition by or in the course of : as,
Yt iiigiilent hSmlnem, surgunt d6 noctS lS,trdnes {Hor. Ep. i.
2. 32), to murder man, rises hy night the robber.
OoepSrunt SpiQSjl ds die {Liv» xxiii. 8), they began banqueting
by daylight,
De tertia uXgUia exercltum rSdtlcit (Oaes. B. 0. n. 35), in the
eov/rse of the third watch he leads back the army,
i. At times ds is used with a noun to denote immediate suc-
cession of time, directly after : as,
Non bSnus sompniis est d9 prandio {Plant, Most. in. 2. 8),
deep directly after breakfast is not good.
lamque ftdgrit multo Pri&mi ds sanguing Pyrrhus ( Virg. A. n.
662), and soon wiU Fyrrhus be here^ fresh from the streaming
blood of Priam.
1327 Ds in composition with verbs denotes — a. down : as, dem- (for
de-lm-) take dovm, dSmlt-* let down, b, removed: as, dstonde-
sheary dScortlca- strip off the bark, c. absence : as, deSs- or rather
d6s- be wanting, dsbe- (for dehXbe-) owe^ dsftc- or dsflci- fail, d.
prevention : as, dehorta-. (r.) dissuade, dSprSca- (r.) pray a thing
may not be, e. unfriendly feding : as, dSsplc- or dSsplci- despise,
deilde- laugh at. /. partially : as, dSperd- lose in part, dSpSri-
1 perish in part, der^ga- take part away (by a rogation), g, inten-
sity (?) : as, depSptUa- (r.) lay thmmtghly waste, de&ma- love to dis"
tractio7ij'.
1328 Ds with adjectives denotes — a. down : as, decllui- sloping dovm-
wards, b, absence : as, dementi- or dSment- witJwTtt mind, mad.
' 1329 Dl or dls (dXr) is used only in composition. With verbs it de-
notes — a, division : as, diuXd- divide, did- distribute, discrib-* dis-
tribute by uniting, dllftb-* slip away in different directions, 5, dif-
ference : as, discrSpa- sound a different note, dissenti-/<?e? differently,
c. the reverse of the simple notion : as, displlce- displease, diffld-^
• See § 451. 1.
f In this last sense the prefix was perhaps originally the prepoBition
dioidis. See § 1329 d.
GG
338 SYNTAX.
distruHf difioing- ungird. d. irUensity : as, dllauda- hepraise^ dig-
ctlp- or disctLpi- deHre to distraetion*
1330 Dls in the composition of adjectives denotes — a. differenee : as^
disc3l5r- of different colotMr or colours, discordi- or discord- (from
corda- a musical string) sounding a different note, h. negation, : as,
dissXmlK- urdike, disp&ri- or disp&r- unegucd,
1331 [Ec], S, ex may be looked upon as the opposite to Xn, just as &b
in its ordinary senses is to &d ; and an attention to this distinction
is often a useful guide in the translation of the English preposition
from. It denotes — a. out of (with motion) : as,
Tslum 6 corp5re extraxit {Cic, p. Eosc. Am. 7.19), he drew the
weapon out of the flesh.
Eum Sxturbasti ex a6dibus {Plaut. Trin. i. £.100), this man
you bundled otUofthe hcmse.
h. Off, i. e. from on (and it may be obsenred that In Gagnified
on as well as in) : as,
Ex ^uis dS^iunt et pgdibus proeliantiir {Cau. B. G. i. 2),
they leap off their horses and fight on foot.
Nisi 6 campo in c&uam hanc uiam demittXmiis Squds (Liv,
XXIII. 47), vadesa we ride dotm from the plain into this
hollow road.
c. On, from, when a person is m or on a place and directs his
e£Ebrt8 thence : as,
Cast5r et Pollux ex ^uis pugn&rS ultil sunt {Cic. N. D. n.
2. 6), Castor and Folltuv were seen fighting on horseback.
Contidn&ri ex turri alt& s(^bat {Cic. Tusc. v. 20. 59), he was
wont to harangiu the people from a high tower.
d. The material of which any thing is made, of: as,
Exponit multum argentum, non pauc& pocilla ex aur5 {Cic. n.
Terr. iy. 27. 62), he displays mxtch silver, and not a few cups
of gold,
St&tua ex aerS fiictast {Oie. ii. Yerr. ii. 21. 50), a Oatm was
made of bronze.
Qui ^rat totiis ex fraude et mendfido facttLs {do. p. Glu.
26. 72), who was made vp eniirdy of roguery and lying.
e. A change from one character to another, /nmi .* as,
Quaero ex te sisne ex pauperriimo diues factiis {Cie. in Vat.
EO, Vy BZ. 339
12. 29), I ask you whether or no from being very poor you
have become ridi.
Bio hSmXnes saepe ex fSLoOBis firmi sulFrS^tOrSB eu&dnnt (Q.
(He de Pet. 27), in this way men tiftem turn out firm from
haaing been deoeUftd supporters^
/. The preceding construction is also used to denote an inter-
mediate condition : as,
Pallidum 6 uMdi et moUS Mum h&bet {Plin. xzi. 90), it has
a palish ^reen and soft leaf,
g, Ofy signifying part of, preceding the ivhole : as,
NaoftG 6 dScffloi s9ji9. mente est {Cie, de Leg. iii. 10. 24), not a
man of the ten is of sound mind,
Ftlfiiis, uniis ex mels intiimis {Cic, ad Fam. xili. 3), Fufius^
one of my most intimate friends,
h. The commendng point of time whenae measurement pro-
ceeds, expressed hy from : as.
Ex k&lendis I&nu&rils &d hano hOram iQu!(gil&uX rexpubllcae
{Cic, PhiL XIV. 7. l^)yfrom thefkst of January to the pre-
sent howr 1 have kept a dose watch upon the interests of the
country,
JBx eft difi septentriones uenti fuGrS (Cic, ad Att. ix. 6. Z),from
that day the wind continued in the north,
e. Immediate succession of time, after : as,
Ex conslil&tu est prdfecttLs in GalUam {Oic, Brut. 92. 318), tm-
msdiatdy after his consulship he set out for CfaUia,
Oppldum ex ItlnSre expugnftrS (Caes, B. Q, n. 12), to storm the
toum immediately on his arrival.
Diem ex die expect&bam (Cic, ad Att. vn. SS6. 3), / was waiting
day after day,
J. Source of information with verbs of asking, hearing, &c. : as,
SSd WquXd ex PompGia sciam {Cic, ad Att. v. 2. 3), but I shall
learn something from Pompey,
Hoc te ex ftlils audirS m9lo {Cic, ad Att* 7* 17. 2), this J prefer
you/r hearing from others,
Quaeslui ex Phanifi, quam in partem prOuinciae piit&ret tS
uelle ut uSnirem {Cic, ad Fam. m. 6. 1), 1 asked Phania
into whatjpart of the province he supposed you to wish me to
come.
340 STHTAZ.
k» Cause: as,
Gr&olter claudlc&bat ex uolnSre ob rempubUcam aooeptO (Cte»
de Or. n. 61. 249), he was vety lame from a VHmnd received
in his oownJtry's service*
Arctiiis ex lassItfLdXnS donniebant {pic. de Iny. n. 4. 14), th^
toere deeping somewhat soundli/ from fatigue,
L That on which any thing depends physically or moraUj : as^
YXdetis pendere 8.1ios ex* arbSrS, puls&ri autem 8.1ios et uerbS-
rftrt {Oic. n. Verr. iil 26. 66), r/ou see some hanging from a
treey others again beaten and flogged.
Ex quo uerbO t5ta ill& caass& pendebat (Cic. de Or. n. 25. 107),
on which word the whcU of that cause depended*
m. The authority upon which a person acts : as,
Ex sSnfttus consults Manlius uinciilis llbSr&tiir (ZtV. vi. 17),
under a decree of the senate Mardius is released from prison.
Bob ex foedSrS rSpStunt {Liv, xxi. 10), they demand redress
under the treaty.
n. The standard hy which any thing is measured : as,
NOn est ex fortunSi fides pond8rand& {Cic, Part. Or. 34. 117), U
is not hy success thai fidelity is to he measured.j"
Ex euentu homines d6 tuO consUio existtLmabunt {Cic. ad Fam.
I. 7. 5), the world will judge of jour prudence by the restdt.
0, As suggested by, in accordance with : as,
St&tu6s iit ex fide f^& rSquS me3. uXdeblttLr {Cic. ad Att. y.
8. 3), you will decide as shaU appear to be in accordance with
my honour, character and interest,
Te ex sententift n&uIgassS gaudeo {Cic. ad Att. v. 21. 1), I am
ddighted that yowr voyage has been satisfactory. X
Piscis ex sent6ntia Nactds sum {Ter. Ad. iii. 3. 66), I have fallen
in with a dish offish to my heart'' s content.^
* Very frequently ah is used with this verb.
t Literally ' weighed.'
X Literally ' that you have sailed according to your wishes or feeling.'
§ The phrase ex met animi tententia is ambiguous, meaning, either
' to my heart's content,' or ' on my word of honour' (literally * according
to the fieeling of my heart'). Hence the pun in Cicero (de Or. ii. 64.
260), Nasiea censori, quum Ule — Ex iui animi tententia tu tucorem habesJ
— Non hereulet inquit, ex met animi sententia.
BO, X. SK. d4X
^> *#
p. 7n ^TTO^XMtibn ; as,
F&cXt haeredem ex deano6 Oaeomam (Oic p. Oaec. 6. 17), he
makes Caecina heir to deven-twdfths of his property.
Ex parts magnS. tXbi assentiSr (Cic, ad Att. yii. 3. 3)^ I agree
with yov, in a great measure*
q. The quarter on or at which : as,
Yna ex parts BhenG contXnentiir (Caes. B. G. i. 2), on <mtf side
they are shut in by the Rhine,
r. The liquid in which anj thing znore solid is dissolved, is pre-
ceded by ex: as,
Resinam ex melle Aegiptiam* uor&to, saluom fSoeris {Plant.
Merc. 1. 2. 28), take a bolus of Egyptian gwm mixed in honey,
and you unU make it right*
OtLctimgris silvestris pars intSriSr ex laotS . . dllultiir {Cds. y.
21. 1), the inner part of a wild cuewmber is dissolved in milk.
1332 (Ec], 6, ex in composition with verbs denotes — a. <na : as, exlm-
tahe outy exi- go otU, 6gr6d- or ^r6di-(r.) march oui, ecfSr- or efiFSr-
earry outy expSs-f set forth* h, removal by the act expressed in the
simple verb i as, excanta- remove hy charms, Sdormi- deep off, ex-
Xi&cT^ frighten away* e* escaping by means of the act expressed in
the simple verb : as, Qulta- escape hy moving on one side, elucta- (r.)
get away hy wrestling, ecfiig- or ecf iigi- escape hy flight, d, obtaining
an end by the act of the simple veib : as, «xtiid-t hammer ovA^
eaestlga- trojce out, Sl&b5ra- work out, exa^rx- follow out, attain* e,
ptihlicity : as, 6dXc-t proclaim, Cnohtia- divulge, f. ascent : as,
6mexg- emerge, 6ueh- carry wp or raise, exsist- stand up* g, covn-
pieteness : as, Qdisc- leam by heart, extir* bwm up, fim&re- ij.) com-
plete on^s service* h, change of character with verbs formed from
adljectives and substantives : as, expia- make cleans atone for, ec-
fSra- make savage, ecfBmXna- convert into a woman, i. removal of
what is expressed by the noun whence the verb is formed : as,
exossa-X hone {as a fish), 6n(kia-$ make smooth hy removal of knots*
J, the reverse : as, expUca- unfold, exaugtLra- deprive of a rdigious
character^ exauctSra- discharge (i*e* relieve a soldier of the obliga-
* So Ms. fi, not Aegyptiam*
t See § 451. 1.
X Perhaps immediately from the adjectives Mossi' ' boneleBS,^ enodi-
* witiioat knots.'
oa2
342 BTNVAZ.
tion expressed by the Latin auctQrftmento-). L distance : as, ez-
audi- hear in the distance or on the mUside.
1333 In adjectives formed from substantives this preposition denotes
absence : as, Snerui- wUhovi mtLsde^ ezsompni- sleepless^ extoni-
(Jor exterri-) banished*
1334 Ei^gft with an accusative, a. Facing {verj rare) : as,
Tonstric^m Suram Nouisti nostram, quae h&s nunc erga aedls
habet* {Pkmt. True. n. 4. 61), you know our coiffeuse tSura,
who lives now/acinff this house,
b. Towards (of friendly feeling) : as,
Eodem mddo erga ftmlcGs afifecti stUnus quo ergft nosmSt ipsSs
(Oic, de Am. 16. 56), we are disposed in the same way towards
friends as towards ourselves*
c. Against (of unfriendly feeling, rare) : as,
Quasi quid filius Mens d61iquisset m% erga (Plaut. £p. ni. 3. 8),
as if my son had committed any offence against me,
1335 Extr&.t a. Without (no motion) : as.
Hi sunt extra prSuinciam trans KhSd&num primi (Caes. B. G.
I. 10), these are the first people trithout the province on the
other side of the Rhone,
b. The same without a noun : as,
Extra St intiis hostem h&b6bant {Caes, B. 0. in. 69), they ha4
an enemy without and vnthin,
c. Metaphorically: as,
Extrft caussam Id est {Cic, p. Oaec. 32. 94), that is foreign to the
question before us,
Dico omnis extrft culpam fuissS {Cic, n. Yerr. y. 51. 134), I
afi/rm thai all were blamdess,
Sed meherciiles extra i5cum hSmo belliis est {Cic, ad Fam. vn.
16. 2), but reaUy without joking he is a pleasant fdlow,
d. Except: as.
Extra dtLcem paucosquS praetSrea, rSUqui in bell5 r&pacSs, fa.
OratiOnS crudelSs {Cic, ad F^m. vii. 3. 2), except the chief
* This reading is partly conjectural,
t For the preposition ex, e, see § 1831.
nr. 343
and a few Besides, the rest were rapacious in thefidd, Hood-
thirsty in langtujige,
N6u8 n&ulg&to cltr& Calicadnum extrft quam bI qu& nSuis l^g^
to8 portabit (Idv. xxxyiii. 38), neither shaU he navigate the
sea on this side of Calicadmis, always excepting the case of a
ship carrying ambassadors.
1336 In is used with the ablative and accusative ; with the former
when there is no motion,* with the accusative when there is
motion.
In with the ablative denotes — a. In, in reference to place : as,
In eO conclS.ui el ctLbandum fuit (Cic. de Div. n. 8. 20), in that
chamber he wovld have had to deep.
Atttilit in c&ueft pullos {Oic. de Div. n. 34. 72), he brought the
chickens in a cage.
In hortis cum ulcln5 suo ambiilS.bat {Cic. Acad. Pr. n. 16. 61),
he was uDolking i7i the park with his rt^ighhou/r.
b. On or over : as.
Nemo eum unquam in SquO s^entem uldit {Oc. ii. Yerr. v«
10. 27), no on£ ever saw him on horseback.
EquItS.re In &rundXn8 longa {Hor. Sat ii. 3. 248), to ride on a
long reed.
Pons In IberO prSpe effecttls &rat {does. B. 0. i. 62), the bridge
over the Ebro was nearly fmished.
c. Amxmg: as,
Oaesfirls in barb&ils Srat nSmSn obscuriiis {Goes. B. 0. i. 61),
CcBsar's name wa^ not wdl knoum among the barbarians,
Exerdttum In Aulercis coUdcftuit (Caes. B. G» m. 29), he guar--
tered the army in the country of the Aiderot.
d. Included in, part of: as,
Nihil praeter uirtfLtem in bSnis dQcSrS (Cic. de Fin. in. 3. 10),
to look upon nothing but manliness as entitled to a place among
blessings.
C&plto in dScem Is^tls Srat (Oic, p. Rose. Am. 9. 26), Capita
was one of the ten deputies.
e. In, in the sense of within the range of, but only in certain
phrases: as,
* That is, no motion in relation to the noun ; or rather, no metion
from the exterior of it to its inUr%or,
BA4 SYNTAX.
Com in 85le ambtilo, cSl5r5r {Cic. de Or. n. 14. 60)p when I
walk in the sun, I get browned,
' l8t& mMSrfttio &nlmi In ^Ulis clftrifistimae pr5uinciae atque In
auiIbilB omnium gentium est pSsItft {Cic, ad Q. F. 1. 1. 2.9),
th(U power of 9df'(xyrUr6l you po8$e^ lies under the eyes of a
most distinguished province^ and within the hearing of aU
nations.
/. In, denoting the position in which a person is^ as regards
the feelings of others : as,
DiSlcile est dictfi, quanto In 5did sImtLs &piid extSras nS.tion8s
{Cic. p. Leg. Man. 22. 65), t/ is difficult to say in what de-
testation we are held among foreign nations^
E& cinltas tibi una In SmorS fuit {Cic. ii. Yerr. lY. 1. 3), that
state was the special object of your affection.
AptLd eum sunt In hdn&re ^ in prStiO (Cic, p. Roso. Am.
28. 77)^ they are respected and valued by him,
g. luy before persons, signifying in the case of in whaJt noncems
^em: as,
Respondit se id quM in Keruiis fSeisset &cturum {Goes, B. G^.
IL 32), he replied that he wovld do the sarM as he had done
in the case of the Nervii,
Idem in b5n5 seruS dioi s51et {Cie, de Or. n. 61. 248), the saine
is commmdy said of a gsod slave,
h. Dressed in, wearing, armed with : as,
Pfttlbiilo adfixtis, In isdem 9.ntUis quos gest&bat {Tac. Hist. iy.
3), fixed to the gaUows with the savM rings on, which he wore
{when alive).
Trlfldft NeptfLntLs In hastft {Val. Fl, i. 641), Neptum armed
with a ihree-fanged spear.
i. In respect of, in reference to : as,
Yex&ttir &b omnlbtis In eo Ubro quem scripsit dS ult& befttft
{Cic. Tusc. Y. 9. 24), he is attacked by all in referefivce to the
book which he wrote on a happy life.
/. A period of time in the course of which a thing happens is
often preceded bj In : as,
Yix tSr In anno audirS nuntium possunt {Cic. p. Rose. Am.
46.132), ^ley can receive news scarcely three times in the year.
IK« 345
Hae res contrft nos ffidunt In hOc tempSrS {tUc, p. Quinct. 1. 1),
then things make agamst tu under present cvrcumstaruses*
Fere in diebus paiicft quibus haec 4.cta sunt Ohrysis nicina
haeo m6ritur {Ter, And. i. 1. 77), loUhin a few days or so
after this occwrredy my neighbour here Chrysis dies.
k. The simple verbs of placing, such as p5s- ptUy ISca- place,
Btfttu- set up (even though motion be implied in them), take in
with an ablative in the best writers, and that whether used in
their simple sense or metaphoricallj : as,
T&biilae testSmentl K5mam Srant adlfttae, Ht In aerSriO p9n5-
rentiir {Goes, B. C. ni. 108), his will had been carried to
jRom£, that it might he deposited in the treasury.
Omnem curam in sidSrum cognltionS p5su6runt (Cie. de Div.
L 42. 93), they employed aU their thoughts in the study of the
stars,
Apud P&tronem te in maxtimft grS.ti& pSsuI (Cic. ad Att. v.
11.6), I have caiuedyou to be in very high favour with Patro.
1337 In with an accusative denotes — a. Into : as,
Gl&dium hosti in pectiis infixit {Cic. Tusc. iv. 22. 50), he drove
the sword into the enemas breast,
Paene in fSueam dScXdl {Flaut, Per. iv. 4.46), laU butfdl into
a ditch.
Inde Srat brSuissimiis in Britanniam tr&iecttis {Caes» B. G. iv.
21), from theTice teas the shortest passage to Britain.
b. Onto: as,
Fllium In htimSros su5s exttUit (Cic. de Or. i. 53. 228), he lifted
his son on to his shoulders,
Dei5t&rum In Scum susttilerunt (Cic. p. Deiot. 10.28), they
lifted {the aged) Beiotarus on to his horse,
c. Among (with motion) : as,
Oohortis quinque In £bib*5nes misit (Caes. B. G. v. 24), he sent
five cohorts into the country of the Eburones.
d. The new form or character into which any thing is changed
has In before it : as,
Ex h5mXnS s6 conuortit in beluam {Cic. de Off. iii. 20. 82), he
changes himself fnym a rrvan into a beast.
AquS. m&rlna in dimldiam partem dSc^quenda est {Col. zii. 24),
the sea-iDater must be boiled down to one-half.
346 BTITTAX
«. The object on whidii any tibing is fpmit or employed : a^
Kullus tSrunoittfl insftmlttkr* in quemquam (Cic. ad Att. v.
17. 2), not a farthing %8 tpent on d^y one.
MsiOrem sumptum in prandium fecSront (Oie. n. Yen*, iy.
10. 22), ^ey spent a Ixvrgtt $vm on a breakfast,
/. Direction of sight or thoughts on or to an object : as.
In quSius fortunas n9n 5ctilos dsflgit t {Oic, Phil. XL 5. 10)
on whose property does he notji^ his eye f
In te tinum sS t5t& conuortet cIuItSLs {Cic, Somn. Sc. 2), the
whole body of citizens wiU turn their thoughts to you alone,
g. Direction of power towards or o^oer an object : as^
TXri in uxOres ultae n^isque h&bent pStest&tem {Caes, B. G.
YL 19), ike htLsband has power of life and death over the wife.
N6 tamditi quidem dSmXntLs 8rlt in su5s ? {Cic, p. Rose. Am.
28. 78) shall he not even for this litUe time be master over his
own people F
h. Feeling towards^ whether friendly or hostile (though more
frequently the latter) : as,
Ad impiStfttem in deOs, In Io^js&oSb adiunxit iniuriam {Cic.
N. D. lu. 34. 84), to impiety towards the gods he added out-
rage to man.
Si fSrae partils suos dllXgnnt, qifl nOs in libSros nostras indul-
gentia essS dfib&ni&s ? {flic, de Or. ii. 40. 168) ifwHd beasts
love their offspring^ what ought to be our Jdndness towards
owr child/ren ?
i, Purposef (even though not attained), /or, ^; as,
Null& p^tinift nid in rem mlllt&remst d&tS. {Cic. p. Bab. Post.
12. 34), no money was given except fw military purposes.
In banc rem testem SlcUiam cit&bo {Cic. ii. Verr. ii. 59. 146),
/ wiU caU /Sicily itself as a witness to prove this fact.
J, Tendency, sense of words, ^., /or, to, as: bs^
* Tet with pos' and consum- the best writers prefer in with the abla-
tive.
t This usage was carried to a great extent by the later writers, but is
more limited in Cicero, who instead of such a phrase as in fwnorem aU^
ctfitM, would have said f^onoris alieuius eatuta. (See Madvig, Opusc.
I. p. 167.)
IV. 347
Ego qua6 in rem tuam sint, ek uelim fact&s (Ter, Ph. n. 4 9),
CIS for me, whatever coiwse may he far your interest^ that I
thould wish yon to adopt.
In earn sententiam mult& dixit {Cic, ad Ait. il. 22. 2), he mid
much to this effect,
Haec in suam conttimeliam uertit {Caes, B. 0. L 8), aU this he
interpreted as an insult to himsdf.
h Resemblance (resulting from an act)^ manner, form, <ifter : as,
PSdltum agmSn in m{$dam f&gientium ftgeb&ttLr {Liv. xxi. 41),
the infantry was hwrryi/ng along so as to look like a body of
runaways,
L In distributions the unit is expressed by In and an accusative
plural with or without the adjective singtQo-, while the English is
expressed by every , each, the, &o. : as,
Jam ad dSnSjios quinquSginta in singiilos m5di5s annOn& per-
uSnSrat (Oaes. B. 0. i. 52), the price of com had now reached
to fifty denaries the hishd,
QuingSnos denftrios prStium in c&plt& st&tu6rant {Liv» xxxnr.
50), they had fixed 500 denaries as the price per head.
TempSra In horas commtitSrl uld€s (Cic, ad Att. xiv. 20.4),
the state of things changes you see every hour,
Yltium in dies cresctt {Cic, Top. 16. 62), vice increases every
day.
m. The future in phrases of time expressed by /or, untU, &c. :
as,
Ad cenam hSmXnem inult&uit in postSrum diem (Cic, de Off.
m. 14. 58), /le asked the man to dinner for the next day.
Sermonem in multam noctem prSduxImils {Cic. Somn. Sc. 1),
we kept up ike conversation untU late at night.
n. In some phrases denoting the position of a party, the verb
Ss- he is used with In and an accusative, although no motion or
change is expressed^ : as,
Pulcerrtimum duc6bant ftb extSris n&tidnlbus quae In &mlcl-
tiam ptfpiill EOmSnl dIciOnemque essent, initLrias pr5pul-
s&rS (Cic. in Oaedl. 20. 66), they deemed it a most glorious
* This originated, says Madvig (Lat. Gr. § 230, obs. 2, note)^ in an
inaccuracy of the pronunciation, where the distinction between the accu-
sative and ablative rested on the single letter m. «
348 SYNTAX.
dvty to ward off outrage from foreign nations who stood in
the relation of friends and vassals to the Roman people,
Quum uostros portus in praedonum fuissS pdtestatem sci&tls
(Cic, p. leg. Man. 12. 33), when your ovm harbours have heeriy
you are aware, in the possession of pirates,
1338 In when compounded with verbs* denotes — a, into : as, Ini-
enter^ indiic-t lead in, h, upon : as, imUg-f place (as a yoke) upon,
indu- put on, indilc-t draw on^ impSra- impose, c, against .* as,
infSr- carry against, illld- dash against, inulde- look with, envy at,
d> at, over : as, ingSm- groan at, ill&crtLma- weep over, e, privacy :
as, inaudi- or indaudi- Iiear as a secret. But see § § 1308. 1, 1308. 2.
1339 InfrS. denotes below, a. In regard to place, with or without a
noun: as,
Aigentum ad m&re infra oppldum exspect&bat (Oic, n. Yerr.
lY. 23. 51), he was waiting for the silver by the sea-side below
the town,
InfrS. nihil est nM mort&lS ; stiprft lunam sunt aetema omni&
{Cic, Somn. Sc. 4), below there is nothing but what is mortal^
above the moon every thing is eternal,
b. Of time : as,
H5m6rus n5n infra stlp8ri5rem L^curgum fuit (Cic, Brut. 10.
40), Homer was not of a later date than the elder Lycurgus,
c. Of number: as,
HiSmS pandora ou& sublclto, non ttoSn infrS. n5u6n8. {Plin„
XVIII. 26), in winter yov> must place fewer eggs under them,
not a smaller nurriber however than nine at a time,
d. Of magnitude : as,
Vrl sunt magnltudlnS paulo infra SlSfantds {Caes, B. G. vi. 28),
the v/rus in size is a little below the elephant,
e. Of worth: as,
* In in the composition of adjectives signifies not, but has no con-
nection with the preposition. On the other hand, verbs are never com-
pounded with the negative in, Ignora- * be ignorant* seems to be an
exception, but only seems, for it is formed from the adjective ignaro^,
which as an adjective was entitled to the negative prefix before the sim-
ple adjective gnaro-. Substantives compounded with in ' not' are at times
found, but only in the ablative, as initusu * without permission.'
t See §451.1.
INFBA. IKTES. 349
Infrft se omnia humftn^ dtlcet {Cic, de Fin. lu. 8. 29), he wiU
deem every iking human hdow him, i. e. unworthy his atten-
tion,
1340 IntSr denotes between or among, a. Of place : as,
Mons lura est inter S^u&nos St HeluetiOs {Goes, B. G. I. 2),
Mount Jwra lies between the Sequani and the Hdvetii.
Inter sObrios bacch&rl uldstilr {Cic. Or. 28. 99), he seems to be
acting Bacchus among sober people,
b. Of time, between^ during: as,
Dies qiL&drS.gint& quinque inter binos lados tollentUr (Cic, n.
Verr, ii. 62. 130), forty-five days between the two festivals
shall be struck out.
Hoc inter cSnam dict&ul {Cic, ad Q. F. m. 1. 6. 19), / have
dictated this during dinner.
c. Mutuality: as,
Inter se asplciebant {dc. in Oat. m. 5. 13), they kept looking at
one another.
OlcSr5nes pu6ri &mant inter s6 {Cic. ad Att. vi. 1. 12), the young
Ciceros are great friends.
1341 IntSr in composition with verbs denotes between: as, interp5s-
place between. But see § 1342. 1.
1342 IntSr is compounded with nouns forming both substantives and
adjectives — a. with the sense between : as, interuallo- (n.) the space
between tufo stakes in a palisade, an interval, intertignio- (n.) the
space between two beams, intemuntio-a messenger who goes backwards
and forwards between two people, b. within : as, inter-ciiti- or -ciit-
wilhin the skin. c. between, as regards time : as, interliLnio- the
interval when nx> moon is visible.
1342. 1 Inter — ^&om In or &n up^ava (see § 834, and compare § 308. 1)
— denotes a, up : as, intell6g- pick or gather up (information), per-
ceive, interturba- stir up, intermisce- mix up. b. again: as, inter*
p^Sisb-fuU (cloth) again, vamp up anew, c, reversal of a preceding
act : as, interiilg- unyoke, interquiesc- repose after labour, d. sepa-
ration, removal, disappearance: as, interrilp- break of, intermlt-
leave off or let out (the fire), intercltLd- shut off, intercid- fall away,
escape, interfrig- break off, intSrfiresc- dry up, interbib- drinJe up,
interdIc-/or^'<^, intermXna- (r.) warn off with threats, e. especially of
HH
350 btntjlx.
disappearance by death, as inter-fXc- w -fid- make away withy Ml,
intMm- take of, kill, intSri- jhjub away, die, inter-mSr- or -mSri-
die off, iniemSca- kiU off, interfrlgesc- die of cold (hence be ne^^ected
and so become obsolete), f, through: as, inter-fSd- or -f5di- di^
through, intersplra- breathe through, inter-fUg- or -ftigi- jf^ throvghy
interlace- and interf ulge- ehine through.*
1348 Intra denotes withiiu a. Of place without motion : as,
Intrft p&riStes meos dS meft pemXoi^ oonsllia Ineuntiir {Cic. ad
Att. in. 10. 2), plane are entered into within the wdUs of my
houeefor my own destruction,
Ajxti5cham intra montem Taurum regn&rS iussSnint {Oic, p.
Sest. 27. 58), iJiey decreed that Antiochus shotUd rule vnthin
Mount Tawrus,
b. Of place with motion : as,
Intra portas compelluntiir (ZiV. vii. 11), they are driven within
the gates,
e, Metaphoricfdly : as,
EptQamtir Una non m5d5 non contra legem sM Stiam intril
legem {Og, ad Fam. ix. 26. 4), we feast together not 07dy
not against the law, but even within it.
Quidam phrSnStIci intra uerbS dSeilpinnt {(Ms. m. 18), some
Iwnatics show the disease ordy m words.
d. Of number (particularly in regard to time), within,, dwring :
as,
Intra annos quattuordScim tectum non stlbiSrant {Caes. B. G.
I. 34), for fourteen years they had not passed under a roof.
Intra paucos dies oppldum c&pltiir (Idv, il 25), wUhin a few
days the tovm is taken.
1344 Intrd in is used in composition with verbs of motion or direc-
tion : as, introi- enter, introdtlc- lead in, intro-spic- or -spici- look
in,
1345 luxtat (root itig- yoke, join) denotes — a. Proximity of place,
close by: as,
* This inter became soon in a great measure obsolete, so that many
of the woids belong exclusively to the older writers, Gato, Plautus, Lu-
cretius. It may be useful to compare the meanings of this inter with
those of an and its representatiyes, § 1308. 2.
t This word is scarcely to be met wi& in Cicero. In Tacitus it is
'iry common.
INTBA. lYXTJL OB. 351
. Iazt& mtiruin castrtl pSsoit {Caes. B. 0. 1. 16), he pitched hie
camp near a waR,
h. The same with motion, neadi/ to : as,
luxta sedXtiQnem uentom (Toe, Ann. Ti. 13), mattere came
nearly to a eedition.
€. Proximity of time, immediately after : as,
NSque Snim oonuSnit iuxta inSdiam prOtlnus s&tiStfttem essS
{Ode, n. 16), nor indeed ie it reasonable that irwmediaiely
cfter fasting there should he afuU meal.
d. Nearness in quality, akin to : as,
VSlQcXtas iuzt& formldlnem est {Tac, G(er. 30), speed is akin to
fear,
EOnim ^5 ultam mortemquS iuxta aest&mo {Sal, Oat. 2), the
life and death of such men I look upon as much the same.
e. Equality without a noun, equally : as,
S5l0 caelGquS iuxt&* gr&ul {Tac. Hist. y. 7), the soil and at-
m>osphere being equally unhealthy.
1346 Ob denotes — a. Towards^ with motion (but only in very old
writers): as,
Ob ROmam nocttl ISgiOnes dticSrS ooepit {Enn. ap. Fest.), he
began to lead the legions by night towards Rome*
b* Against, brfore^ with or without motion : as,
Follem sibi obstringit ob gtOam (PZau^. Aul. n. 4. 23), he binds
a bladder before his mouth.
Lluiam ob oculum hab^bat (Flout. MiL GL y. 1. 37), he had a
piece of wool over his eye.
Mors ei Sb ^iilos saepd uersatast (Cic. p. Bab. Post. 14. 39),
death often passed to and fro before his eyes.
c» Against, for, in accounts, where money is set against the
thing purchased, pledged, Ac, or the thing purchased, &c. against
the money : as,
A'ger obpositust pigneri Ob d6cem nmas {Ter. Ph. iy. 3.56),
my land has been put as a pledge against ten mince, i. e. has
been iiwrtgaged for that sum,
* In this Bense a dative is found : as, res parua ao iuxta magnis dif"
fieUis (Liv, xxiT. 19), * a little matter, but equally difficult with great
matters.'
352 8TNTAZ.
Quin firrrabonem a me ^ccepisd ob mtdierem (Plant. Rud. m.
6. 23), nayywi receivedfrom me eameBt-mofiey for the woman,
Alt Be ob asinos f^rre argentum {Plant, As. n. 2. 80), he tays
that he has brought the m/oryey to pay for ^ aeees.
Est fl&gltiOsum ob rem iildlcandam pfictliiiam accIpSrS {Cie, n.
Yerr. ii. 32. 78), it is indeed a seandalons thing to take money
for giving a verdict,
d, A purpose or reason, /or, on account of: as,
Haeo Sgo ad te 5b earn caussam scrlbo ut iam d8 tu& quSquS
r&tiOnS mgdlterS (Oic, ad Fam. i. 8. 3), all this I write to
yon with this object^ that you may consider the course of pro-
ceeding yon also shxmtd now adopt,
VSrom id frustra &n ob rem f&ciam, in uestr& mSnti situm
{Sal. Jug. 31), hut whether I am doing this in vain or to
som^jmrpoaey is in yowr hands ^ my friends.
1347 Ob in composition with verbs signifies— <i. to, towards : as, 5bi-
go tOy ostend- hold out to, occ&r-^ run to meet* h. before : as, obam-
biila- walk before, obudllta- keep flying before, obuersa- (r.) pass to
and fro before, obtlne- hold in the presence of (an enemy), c, shut-
ting, obstructing : as, obd-^t^ to, obstru- buHd up, obs!de- blockade*
d. against (physicallj) : as, oblucta- (r.) struggle against, offend-
strike against, e, against (morally) : as, obnuntia- bring an un-
favowrahle report, obtrecta- depreciate, 5bSs- be injurious, f. upon :
as, occulca- tread upon, opprXm- crush, obtSr- trample upon, g.
covering, affecting the stMrface : as, obdtic-* draw over, offiid-^ pour
over, occalle- grow hard on the surface.
1348 P&Iam openly, publidy, in the presence of many. a. With an
ablative (or perhaps dative) : as,
IndS rem cr6dlt5rl p8,lam p5piilO soluit (Liv. vi. 14), upon this
he paid the money to the creditor in the presence of the people,
b. The same without a case : as,
Anna in templumt lilce et p&lam oomport&banttLr (Cic, in Pis.
10. 23), people were carrying arms into the temple in daylight
and openly,
1349 PSnSs denotes — a. In the hands of, in the possession of: as,
• See § 451. 1. t Al. templo.
OB. PALAX. PEVE8. FEB. 863
PSnte earn est pdtestfts {Cie, ad Fam. it. 7. 3), the power is in
his hands.
Istaec p^nes uos psaltriast ? {Ter, Ad. m. 3. 34) is that singing-
girl at gour master^ s house f
Serul centum dies pSnSs accussfttOrem fuSrS {Cic. p. Mil. 22. 60),
the davesfor a hundred days were in the custody of the ac-
cuser.
Culpa t^'st penes {Ter, Hec. ly. 1. 20), thefavU lies with you.
PSnes te & ?* {Hor. Sat. 2. 3. 273) are you in your senses f
1350 P&r denotes — a. Through^ with motion : as.
It liast& T&g9 per temptLs tLtrumque ( Virg. A. ix. 418), passes
the spear through Tago's either temple.
Helu6til pSr angustias suas copias transduxSrant {Caes, B. G.
1. 11), the Hdvetii had led their forces through the defile.
h. Through^ as seen through : thus,
Nftttirft membr&nSfl 5ctil5rum perlucldas f^it ut pSr eas cemi
posset {Cic. N. D. u. 57. 142), nature made the memhranas of
the eye transparent, that they might be seen through.
Quod uldebam Squldem, sed qu&sl per c&Ilglnem (Cic, Phil.
zii. 2. 3), which I saw aU the time it is true, but only through
a doud as it were,
e. When a similar thing occurs at consecutive points of a line :
Inult&tl llbSrSllter per d5m5s {Liv. i. 9), generoudy invited to
all the houses, L e. some to one, some to another.
Quid h6c negotist quod 6mnes homines ^bulantur p6r uias 1
{PlatU. Cist. Y. 1.1) w?iat is this business which all the world
is talking about in every street of the tovm f
d. Of time, during, through, for: as,
TSnuistI prOuinciam per dScem annds {Cic. ad Att. tii. 9. 4),
you have dung* to the province during ten years,
B5g5 tS n6 t9 uiae pSr hiSmem committfts {Cic. ad Fam. xti.
8), / beg you not to expose yowrsdf to the danger of travdling
duHng the winter.
e. The means by which a thing is done, through, by, by mean*
of: as,
• Compare this with a minilar use otapud above.
hh2
364 BTNTAZ.
QuM ftdeptHs est per scSltts, id per luzHriam ecfandlt {die, p.
Rose. Am. 2. 6), what he has obtained through impiety, he is
iquanderinff in luxury,
QudmXnus discessiS fiSret pSr aduors&rios tuQs est factum {(He.
ad Fam. i. 4. 2), it waa owing to yowr opponents that a divi-
nan did not take place,
/. When the means employed are deoeitful, p^r may be trans-
lated by under. In this case the nouns employed are such as
BpSde- appearance, ndmSn- namCy caussa- cauee, &g, : thus,
Per spSciem &liSnae fungendae uXcis su&s 0pes firm&uit (Liv, i.
41), under pretence of acting for another, he ttrengthened his
oum power,
Aemtilfttidnis suspectos per nQmSn obddum ftm^uSbat {Tae.
Ann. XIII. 9), those suspected of rivalry he was endeawmring
to get rid of under the name of hostages.
g. When the agent does not act through any intermediate
means, he is said (though incorrectly) to act through himself : as,
QuoscunquS n5uis rebtis Idoneos cr6d6bat, aut per se aut pSr
&lios solUdtabat (Sal. Cat. 39. 6), all those whom he thought
wdl fitted for taking part in a revolution, he was worhing
upon, either him^Lf or by maans of others,
NihH audactSr ipsi per sSsS slnS P. SuUfi f &cSrS p5tu6runt (Cic.
p. Sul. 24. 67), they cotdd do nothing daring of themselves
without the aid forsooth of PuUius SuUa.
A. With phrases denoting hindrance, <&c., the point where the
hindrance exists is expressed by pSr ihrovgh : as,
Ytrisque adp&ruit nihil pSr altSros stftrS qu9 mlniis incept&
persSquSrentiir {Liv. ti. 33), to each nation it was evident
that there was no obstacle on the part of the other to prevent
them from carrying ovt their intentions.
Per dtLces, non per mlUtes stStSrat, n6 uincSrent (Liv. m. 61),
it had been the fault of the generals, not the soldiers, that they
had not conquered.
i. With verbs denoting permission or power, the person who
might have stood in the way is expressed by p^r : as,
Digl&dientiir illl per m6 licet (Cic. Tusc. ly. 21. 47), they may
fight it ovt for me, i. e. as far as I am concerned,
Quum et per u&lC^tLdXnem et pSr anni tempus n&uI^S pStSiIs,
ad nos uSnl {Cie. ad Fam. xyi. 7), when both your health
and the season of the year permit your saiHng, cotne to im.
J, By, in entreaties, to express the person or object in consi-
deration of which the favour is asked* : as,
P5rt Sg5 tS deos 6ro (Ter, And. v. 1. 16), / entreat you by the
gods,
PSr Sg6 16 fill quaecunquS iOrit llbSros iungont p&rentitbus prS-
oor quaes5qu8 {Liv. xxiii. 9), hy aUthe ties, my son, which
hind a child to a parent^ I pray and entreat thee.
k. Hence in oaths, hy : as,
IHi^rem per ISuem DeosquS PSnatls me e& sentIrS quae dlo8-
rem {Oic. Acad. Pr. n. 20. 65), I wovld have sworn hy •/«-
'piter and the Household Oods that I really fdt what 1 said*
1351 PfirJ in composition with verbs denotes — a. through : as, per-
dllc-§ lead through, perflu-./W through, h, completion: as, perflc-
or -fici- complete, permIt-§ let go altogether, abandon (to others),
p8r9r&- conclude a speech, c. destruction : as, pSri- perish, perd-
[fordo], destroy, p^rlm- hill\\,
J 352 ' PSr in composition with adjectives denotes — a, through : as,
pemoct- lasting all night, perulgll- atpake all night, pSrenni- Icut-
ing through endless years, h, very^i : as, perlgui- very light, per-
magno- very great, c. destruction : as, peritlro- vidjxting an oath,
perfldo- hreahing faith,
* This in fact is only another example of the means noticed in § e.
A weak party approaches an offended superior through some third party;
as for instance in Caesar, B. G. ti. 4, the Senones, in applying for his
mercy, adeunt per Aeduos,
f Observe how the preposition is separated from its noun in these
examples.
^ X In expergise- (r.) * wake up,* the preposition is par, the old form
being exporgiso- L e. exporrigiso-. Again m perhibe- the old form was
probably porhibs'. Compare permdCf a corruption of proinde or rather
porinde,
§ See §451.1.
II The per signifying desintetUm is perhaps of a different origin. At
any rate it is the same as the German prefix ver, seen in verthun 'de-
stroy;* and as our English /or, seen in the obsolete /ordo i.e. ' destroy,*
forswear, forget, &c.
f The prefix per * very' is often separated from the simple adjective :
as, per mihi mirum uisumst (CUh de Or. I. 49. 214), * it seemed very won-
derful to me.'
366 SY5TAX.
1353 POnS (closely connected with post) signifies behind, a. With
a noun: as,
P6ne nos rec6de {Plata. Poen. in. 2. 34), gtep hack behind us.
Yinctae pong tergum m&nus {Tac. Hist. in. 85), his hands were
bound behind his back.
b. Without a noun : as,
Et ante et pOne, St ad laeuam St ad dextram, et sursum et
deorsum [m8u6b&tilr] {Cic. de Un. 13 ad fin.), [it moved]
forward and backtcard^ to the left and to the right, upward
and doumward,
PdnS sSquens ( Virg. A. x. 226), fdlowiik^ behind.
1354 Poet denotes behind, after, a. Of place : bb,
SltlmSn Srat post castr& (Goes. B. G. n. 9), there was a river in
the rear of the camp.
Sed magnum mStuens 86 post cr&tSr& tSgehat {Virg, A. ix.
346), but behind a vast bowl in his fear he hid him^
b. The same without a noun : as,
CSaedSre inclpiunt seruos qui post &ant {Cic, p. Mil. 10. 29),
th£^ begin to cut down the slaves who were in the rear.
c. Of time, after, since : as,
Post tuum discessum bin&s & Balbd ; nihil nSuI {Cic. ad Att. XT.
8), since ycwr departure two i}etteri)from BaUms; no news.
Hoc sexennid post Yeios captos factumst {Cic. de Div. 1. 44 100),
this occwrred six years afUr ike capture of Veii.
Post diem quintum quam barb&ri ItSrum m&lS pugnftu^nt,
]6g&ti a Bocchd uSniunt {Sal. Jug. 102), on the fifth day
after the second defeat of the barbarians, an embassy from
Bocchus arrives.
d. The same without a noun : as,
InltiS meft sponte eum, post inultftttL tu5 mittendum duxl
{Cic. ad Fam. vii. 5. 2), at fi/rst of my own motion, after-
wards at your invitation, I thought it right to send him.
Post pauds diebtis* &lios dScem l6g&t58 adduxSrunt (ZtV. xl«
47), a few days after they brought other ten ambassadors.
SSn&tus post paul5* de his rebtts h&blttls est {Liv, r, 65)^ a
senate was hdd soon after on this suJbject.
* Or these may possibly be datives dependent yx^on post, BB'mpostiXn.
Compare §§ 957, 958, and the use of contra with auro.
POITE, POST. PSAE. 357
e. Metaphorically: as,
Ybi pSriciilum aduSnit, inuldia et stLperbift post fu6rS {Sal,
Oat. 23), when danger approached, ewoy and pride fdl inta
the rear,
1355 Post in composition with verbs signifies — a, after, of place : as,
postscrib-* (Toe,), write after, h, after, of time : as, postfeoto-
done afterwards, postgSnXto- horn afterwards, c, after, in import-
ance : as, postpSs-* and posth&be- deem, of secondary importance.
1356 Prae denotes before, a. Of place : as,
TibSrim, prae se armentum ftgens, nand5 tr&iScit {Liv, i. 7),
he swam across the Tiber, driving the herd before him.
Stillantem prae 86 pugiSnem ttUit (Cic, Phil. ii. 12. 30), he
carried the dripping dagger before him.
Also as an adverb : thus,
I prae (Ter, And. 1. 1.144), go first,
b. The same metaphorically : as,
Oet^n tectiorSs ; Sgd semper mS dXdIcissS prae mS ttUl {Cic.
Or. 42.146), the others are more reserved; lever avowed the
fact that I once studied the sv^ect,
c. The cause (but chiefly in negative sentences), /or: as,
Solem prae i&ciil5rum multltudXnS non uldsbltls {Cic, Tusc. i.
42. 101), you wiU not see the sun for the number of darts.
Nee 15qul prae maerdrS p5tuit {Cic, p. Plane. 41. 99), and he
could not speak for grief,
Prae lassittidine opus est ijX lauem {Plaut, True. n. 3.7), lam
so fatigued I must take a bath,
CrSdo prae &m5re exclusti hunc f9rS.s {Ter, E. i. 2. 18), Isv/p-
pose it was for love you shut him out.
d. In comparison with, by the side of: as,
EOmam prae su& O&pua inrldsbunt {Cic, in Bull. n. 35. 96),
they win laugh at Borne compared with their own Capua,
1357 Prae in composition with verbs denotes — a, before : as, prae-
mlt-* send in ndvaruie, praebe- {i. e, praehlbe-) hdd before, presint,
pmeetsi' place or stand before, b, before, in the sense of passing by:
as, praeflu-^ot^ by, praen&ulga- saU by, c, at the head of, in com'
« See § 451. 1.
398 BTXTAX*
momd : as, praeSs- he in command^ prae-ftc- or -fid- place in conk-
mamd, (Lot the extremity: as, piaerSd-* £fruiw at the end, praedild-'*^
doae at the end, e. superiority : as^ praesta- and praecSd-* surpass,
/. before^ in time : as, praecerp- gather too soon^ pxaedXc-* say he^
forehand^ praesftgi- fed beforehand. g» the doing a thing first for
others to do after : as, prael-rS uerb& to teU A person tohat he is to
say^ prae-clp- or -clpi- teach, praescrlb-* er^oin by writing,
1358 Piae in the composition of adjectives denotes — a, before^ of
place : as, praeclp- or praeclplt- headrfirst* b, before, of time : as,
praescio- knomng beforehand, e* at the extremity: as, praSusto-
humt at the endy praS&cuto- sharp at the end, d, very : as, prae-
alto- very deep, praeclftro- most gloriousf,
1359 PraetSr denotes — a. Passing by : as,
Praeter castrft Oaes&ris soas c5piaa tnuiBduzit {Oaes. B. G. i.
48), he led his own troops past Caesar's camp,
Serul praetor SctLlos Lolli haec omni& fSrebant {Oic, u. Verr.
ni. 25. 62), the slaves kept carrying aJU these things along be-
fore the eyes ofLdlius,
b. Beyond, in amount or degree : as,
L&cus praeter m5dum crCuSrat (Oic, de Div. L 44. 100), the lake
had risen above its usual levd.
Hoc mihi praeclpuom fait praetSr &li5s {Cic. p. Sul. 3. 9), this
belonged especially to me above others,
c. Besides, i. e. in addition to : as,
Praeter se denOs ad conlSquium addacunt {Caes, B. G. L 43),
they bring to the conference ten men each besides themselves,
PraetSr auctOrlt&tem, ulrSs qu5que ad coercendum h&bebat
{Goes, B, 0. in. 57), besides the authority of a name, he had
the physical means also for compulsion,
d. Excepttf exdvding : as,
• See §451.1.
t This fonnation is scarcely if at all found in Cicero ; for praeeebo'
(ii. Verr. iv. 48. 107) has been altered into perejtcelso- 1>7 Zumpt on the
authority of Mas.
X This signification and the last are not so opposite as may at first
seem. Thus in neque uestitus praeter pellis kahent quicguam {Caes, B.
G. lY. 1), either translation is admissible without any difference of mean-
ing. See also § 12SS.1.
PBAE. PBABTBB. PBO. 359
Omnibus sententiis praeifir unam condempnfttust {Cic, p. Clu.
20. 55), he VHufoit/nd guilty by aUthe votes save one.
Frtimentum omnS praeter quod sGcum port&tCLri Srant com-
btirunt (Caes, B. G. i. 5), they 1mm up aU the grain except
what they purpoeed to carry mth them,
PilmO ol&m5re ofppldum praeifir arcem captum est (Ltv. vi.
33), <xt the first ehxmt aU the town hU the citadel was taken*
In the sense except praetor may be used like a conjunction, so
as to be followed bj a noon in the same case as some preceding
noon :
OetSrae multltCldlnl diem st&tuit praeter rQrum c&plt&lium
dampnatis {Sal, Oat. 36), he fixes a day for the rest of the
multitude^ except those convicted of capital offevices,
€. Chntraryto: as.
Nihil el praetSr ipslus u^untfttem acddit {Cic, in Oat. u. 7. 16),
nothing happened to him contrary to his own wish.
Multa impendSrd uldentur praeter n&turam {Cic, Phil. i. 4. 10),
many things seem likely to happen out of the usitdl course of
nature,
1360 PraetSr in composition with verbs signifies paxdng 6y : OB,
praetSri- go by, praetermit- let go by,
1361 PrO denotes — a. Before^ of place : as,
Praesldi& pr5 templls omnibus cemltis {Cic, p. Mil 1. 2), yofu
see troops before all the temples.
Laud&tl pr5 conti5ne omnes sunt {Liv, xxxyiii. 23), they were
all commended in front of the assembled army,
b. B^ore, with the notion of defending, in defence of:BB,
Pr5 nfld&t& moenlbus p&tri& corpora oppOnunt {Liv, xxi. 8),
in defence of their native city, now stripped of its walls, they
present their bodies to the enemy,
Eg5 pr9 s5d&li et prO mea omni f&mft dScemd {Cic, de Or. ii.
49. 200), I am fighting the last battle for my friend and for
my own character altogether,
Haec contra legem proquS ISgS dictft sunt {Liv, xxxit. 8), such
were the arguments urged against and in favour of the law.
e. In place of : as,
360 STirrAX.
LtLbenter uerb& iungSbant, ut sodes* prO si atides, ns pr5 n uis
(Ctc. Or. 45. 154), they wen fond of joining tcordsy as Bodes
for si audes, sis /or si uis.
Quoi ISg&tiis et prO quaestOrS fufirat (Cie. i. Yeir. 4. 11), untier
tohom he had been lietUenarU and proqtujestor, i. e. deptUy"
quofgtor,
d. Equivalent to, as good as, as, for : as,
Pro occisS rSlictust {Cic, p. Sest. 38. 81), he was left for dead,
OonfessiSnem c^entls hostis prO uictOria hftbeo {Liv, xxi. 40),
th^ confession of a retreating enemy I look upon as a victory.
Id sumunt prO certO {Cic, de Div. n. 50. 104), this they assume
as certain.
e. In payment for, in return for, for : as,
MisXmus qui prG uecturft solvSret {Cic* ad Att. L 3), we have
sent a person to pay for the freight,
/. In consideration of, for : as,
Hunc &m&rS pro 6ius suftuItfttS dSbemtLs {Cie, de Or. i. 55. 234),
this man we ought to love for his own sweetness of character »
Te pro istis factls ulciso&r {Ter. E. T. 4.19), PU punish you for
those doings.
g. In proportion to, considering, in accordance with : as,
Proelium &trOcias quam pro niimSrO pugnantium SdXtiir {Liv,
XXI. 29), a fiercer battle is fought than could have been ex-
pectedfrom the number of the combatants,
PrO multltudlne hdmXnum et prG gl5ri& belli angnstos h&bent
finis {Goes. B. G. i. 2), considering the number of inhabitants
and their military reputation, their territories are confined,
Dteet, quidquld &g&s, fig&8 prO ulrlbtLs {Cfic. de Sen. 9. 27), it
is right that whatever you do,you should do to the best of your
power.
His raptim pr5 tempore instructis {Liv, xxx. 10), these men
being hastily drawn up as well as the circumstances admitted,
h. For, infavowrof: as,
Hoc non in5d5 non prO m6, sed contrft me est pStitLs {Cic, de
* An error no doubt of Cicero*8. Sodes must be for m wiles, I and d
being interchanged, as in ho many words; odor and oleo, lacruma and
daenima, Vlixes and G^waws,
PRAETEB. FOB, PBO. PBOPB. 361
Or. lu. 20. 75), this, 80 far from heitig for me, is rather
against me,
1362 P8r and pr5 in composition with verbs signify — a. forward :
aSy prOgrfid- or progr6di- (r.) advance, porrig- stretch <yui, prOcttr-*
nm forward, h, out: as, pr5di- come forth, prOslli- leap otU. c» to a
distance: as, prfifiig- or pr5ftigi-yfy to a dtstance, jpr^terre- frighten
ofy prOsfiqu- (T.)foUowfor some distance, prohlbe- keep of, d, dovm-
wards : as, prOfllga- knock dovm, protSr- trample dovm. e. extension :
as, promlt-* aUow to grow long, f. jyuMidty : as, prSfXte- (r.) de-
dare pvhlicly, pr5mulga- advertise {a law), proscrlb-* offer a reward
for ike life of, prGnuntia- aniMAmce publicly, g, progress, profit :
as, proflc- or pr5fXci- make progress, advance, pr5d6s- be of service,
h, in place of: as, prOcUra- take care of in place of another, i, be-
fore, in time : as, prQlud- rehearse beforehand, j. postponement or
continuation : as, prOdIo-* name afutwre day, ^tQ/D^t- postpone, pr3-
rdga- continue for a longer period (by enactment),
1363 Pro in the composition of adjectives denotes — a, dovmward :
as, pr5cllui- downhiU, b. negation : as, pr5fundo- bottomless, pr5-
1^0- not sajcred,profane,
1364 Pro in composition with nouns of relationship denotes greater
distance, expressed in English hy great: as, ^T^n^^^t- great-grand-
son, pro&uo- great-grandfather, prosdcSro- mfe's grandfather,
1365 PrSp^t denotes near, a. Of place : as,
Ipslus c5piae pr5pe hostium castr& ulsae sunt {Caes, B. G. i.
22), his otm forces were seen near the enemies* camp,
b. The same without a case, or with &b and a noun : as,
Qute hie 18qultur pr8p6 1 (Plata, Rud. i. 4. 11) who is talking
dose by here f
Bellum tam pr5pe a Sicflia, t&mSn in SiciliS. non fuit {Cic, ii.
Verr. v. 2. 6), ^ war though so near Sicily, yet was not in
JSicUy,
e. The same metaphorioallj : as,
Pr5p8 secessiOnem plebis res u6nit {Liv, vi. 42), matters came
almost to a secession of the commonalty,
* See § 451. 1. f See also $ 908.
XX
362 8TKTAZ.
d, Near, of time : as^
Ptope ad6rt quum alieno mdre uiuendtunst mihi {Ter. And. i.
1. 125), the time is at hand whenls/iall have to live in ac-
cordance toith another'a ideas,
1366 Propter (from pr5pS) denotes — a, Near^ with or without a
case: as,
Propter Pl&tGnis st&tuam oonsOdlmtLs {pic. Brut. 6. 24), we took
<ywr seals near a statw of Plato.
J>\A ftlil propter ctibantes nS sensGront qoldem {flic. p. Rose.
Am. 23. 64)y his two sons deeping dose hy were not even aware
of it.
b. On account ofyfor^ through : as,
TirOnem propter hum&nltfttem et mSdestiam m&l5 saluoniy
quam propt&r usiim meum {Cic. ad Att. yii. 5. 2), / wish
Tiro to recover more otU of regard to the ddicacy and modesty
of his character than for any benefit to mysdf
Nam n6n est aecum m$ propter uos d^cipi {Ter. 1%. t. 7. 34),
for it is not reasonable that Ishoidd be a loser through you.
1367 Be (or rSd) in composition with verbs signifies — a. backward :
as, r6tr&h- drag booh, rSnuntia- carry word bach, rSpSt« go backy
rdformlda- draw back in fear. b. hence reflection of light or sound :
as, rSsdna- re-echoy rSfulge- Mne brilliantly, e. in return: as, r^
pend- repay f rSfSri- strike in return, red-d- repay, d. opposing an
effort in ike other direction : as, rStlne- hold back, r^uinci- bind back,
r6t!oe- ke^ back (a secret), e. refusal : as, rSnu- refuse by a shake
of the head, rtouasa- make some excuse and so decline. /. reversing
some former act : as, resold-* cut down again (that which has been
erected), rSmIt-* let go again (that which has been stretched), r^
quiesc- repose (after labour), rescisc- discover (that which it has
been attempted to conceal), rSc&lesc- grow warm again, g. revers-
ing the act expressed in the simple verbf ; as, rgfXg-* unfix, r6-
signa- wnseal, rSclud-* open, rStSg- urmover, rSsSra- uinholt h. put-
ting away from sight, concealing, sheltering : as, rSl^a- {J>eave be-
hind), banish far away, rScond- put away into some secret place,
• See § 451. 1.
I Hence the adjective reeidiuo^ * rising again* shows that redd- once
signified * rising again after falling or being felled,* as the new shoots from
the stump of a chestnut- or oak-tree.
PBOPTEB. SB. BBTRO. BE. BEOYNDYM. 363
rS-cIp- or -dpi- receive and ehdter. i. reiMxining bAtnd when the
greater part is gone : as, r&nXne- remain behind, r^de- remain
UiU at the bottom. J. chanffe of itate: as, red-d- render, make, rSdXg-
reduce to tome state,* k repetition: as, r^Sreso- blo»eo9n a second
time.
1368 RQtrS by the later writers is compounded with Yerfos of mo-
tion, and fflgnifies backwards : as, rStrOgrftdi- (r.) march backtoards
(Plin.),
1869 S& in the old writers is used as a preposition with the ablatiYe,
and agm&ea st^Mxration or vfithout : as,
Si plus mlfnus steuerunt, sS fraude estO (XII. TableSy ap. Gell.
XX, 1), if they cut more or less, it shall be without detriment
(to them).
1370 Se (or sSd) in compodtion signifies — a. with Yerbs, sq>aration :
as, sSced- withdraw, sSpds-t j9tt< cuide. b, in a^jectlYes, absence:
as, sQcuro- free from care, sScord- or sOoord- senseless, spiritless*
1371 Secundum (». e* sSquendum, from s8qu- (r.) fcUow) denotes —
a. FcUowing : as,
I ta secundum {PlauL Am. n. 1. 1), do yott come after m£.
b. Along: as,
L^OnSs Iter secundum m&6 sfipSnun flUnunt (C^. ad Att.
XYi. 8. 2), the legiofis are marching along ^ upper sea,
c. Behind, without motion : as,
YolntLs acoGpit in c&pItS s^undum aurem (Sulpic, ad Cic. Fam.
lY. 12. 2), he received a wound in the head behind the ear,
d. After, of time : as,
Spem ostendis secundum ctfmiti& {Cic, ad Att. m. 12. 1), you
held oiit a hope of improvement <xfter the elections.
Secundum uindSmiam {Cato, B. R. 114), after the vintage,
e. Second in order, n^xt ^ •* as,
Secundum te nihTl est mihi ftmloius sGlItudXnS {Cic, ad Att.
XII. 15), next to you I have no better friend than solittide,
* To this heed belongs the use of redi- in such phrases as, iam res
in e{an rediit locum {Ter, Haut. ii. 3. 118), 'matters are at last come to
this state ;' ad sum ntmma imperi redibit {Cues, B. C. i. 4), ' the chief
command will deyolve on him.*
t See i 451. 1.
364 8THTAX.
/. In aeoordanee tnth : as,
Omm& quae sficondum n&ttiram ftunt sunt h&benda in bdnis
(Cic. de Sen. 19.71)9 every thing that happens in accordance
with natwre is to be reckoned among blessings.
g. Infavou/rof: as,
PontXfices secundum eum d6cr6u6nint (Cic. ad Att. iv. 2. 3),
the pontifical ccUege decreed in hisfawmr,
1372 Bind denotes loithout : as,
H0mo &n& r6, ^in& fide, ^in& 8p€ {dc. p. OaeL 32.78), m man
mthovt money y mtlumt eredity tcithout hope,
InfSro m&rl ndbis n&uXgandumst, fig6 iam com frfttre an sinS ?
{Cic. ad Att. yiii. 3. 6) tpe must sail along the lower secu
True ; btUjiut tell me^ wUh my brother or unthout him f
1373 SUb has for its original meaning up, as is seen in its deriva-
tives the adjectives si&pSro- ahove^ sommo- highest, the prepositions
sUpSr 'wpon, siLprft above; and above all in the use of si&b itself in
the composition of verbs*. It is found with both accusative and
ablative.
1374 Si&b with the accusative denotes — a. Up tot : as,
Sub prlmam nostram &ciem successGrunt {Caes, B. G. i. 24),
they came up to our first line,
h. Under, with motion : as,
Exerdtus sub iHgum misstUi est (Caes, B. G. i. 7), the corny
teas sent under the yoke,
TOtamquS stLb arm& coactam HespSriam (Virg, A. vii. 43), and
aU Hesperia to arms compdledX,
c. Within reach o/ things from above (with motion) : as,
Vt siLb ictum uQnerunt, tSlOrum uls ingens effusa est In eOs
{Idv, XXVII. 18), the moment they came within throw, an
efnorrrums quantity of missiles was showered upon tli£m.
Quod si&b 5ctilos uSnit (JSen, de Ben. i. 5), what comes within
the range of the eye,
* See § 1376. Indeed our own word up is the very same word as
sub ; and the Greek bwaro- * highest,* the title usually given to the Ro-
man consul, is a superlative from the same root.
t The sense of to belongs to the accusative termination, and not to
the preposition.
X Compare the common phrase without motion, sub armis esse.
8UIB. BYB. 96ft
E& quae sub sensas subiectiL simt (Oie, Acad. Fr. n. 23, 74),
^ose tJdnga which are hrougJU vnthin reach of the senses.
d. Subjection to dominion, uTider (with action) : as,
Sub pSptUi ROm&ni imp&ium c^IdSrunt {Cic, p. Font. 1. 12),
they fell under the dominion of the Eoman.people,
e. In phrases of time, ifmuediatdy after; and sometimes,
though laxeLj^jtut h^ore :
Silb eas littSras st&tim r^t&tae sunt tuae (Cic^ ad Fam. x.
16. 1), immediaidy after these dispatches^ yowrs were read out.
AMciim bellum sub rScentem ROmftnam pftcem fait (Liv, xxi.
2), the war with the AfrifcUowed dose upon the peace vnth
Borne.
Silb haec dicta omnes m&ntLs ad constUes tendentes prOciibue-
runt {Liv. tii. 31), immediately after these words they aU
prostrated themsdves, stretching out their hands to the consuls.
Quid Ifttdt ut m&rlnae Fllium dlcnnt ThStldis sub lftcrfm98&
TrOiae FuiU$r&? {ffor. Od. i. 8. 13) why skulks he^ as did
sea-bom Theti^ son they say oftihe eve of Troy^s mmmful
carnage f
1375 Stib with the ablative signifies— a. Under (without motion)* :
Sob tmfl semper h&bXt&u&ant {Cic N. D. n. 37. 95), they had
edwaye lived underyroumd,
Hostes sub mont9 eonsedihrant (Cats. B. G. x. 21), the e/Mmy
were encamped under a Tnountain,
b. Within reach o/ things above (without motion) : as,
Adpr^^inqu&rS nOn ansae n&ues, n9 stLb ictu stLpefstantium in
rtLpIbus pIr&tSrum essent (Liv, xxxvil 27), the ships did
Ttot dare to approach, lest they should be vMdn shot of the
pirates stationed above on the diffs.
lam ItLoescebat, omni&qu8 siib 5ciills Srant {Idv. iv. 28), it was
now yettiny light, and all that was passing bdow was visible.
e. Inferiority, subjection (without action), wnder: as,
* Under with motion is at timoB ezpreised by the ablatiye : for in-
stance, when the mind dwells upon the state that follows lather than the
act, or when other prepositions are added to signify the precise motion.
Thus, sub terra uitd devnsti sunt m Icewm aaato eonseptum (Liv, xzii.
57), ' they were let down alive into a stone chamber ondeigroimd.'
Il2
366 BTKTAZ.
Mfttris sUb impSriost {Ter, Haut. n. 2.4)^ «Ae i» wnder her mty-
therms rule.
Ylr impIgSr et si&b HannlbfilS mftgistro omnis belli artis edoo-
ttts {lAv. XXT. 40), a man of energy ^ and who had been tho-
rottghly instnicted in the art of war wnder Hannibal.
d. In conditions, uTider : as,
lussit el praemium tribal stLb e& condXciOnS n6 quid posteft
BcrlbSret {Cie, p. Arch. 10. 25), lie ordered a reward to be
given him, under the condition thai he shotdd never wriU
ogam.
e. In phrases of time — during, in. Just at : as,
Ne stLb ip8& prSfectiOnS mllltes oppldum irrumpSrent, portSLs
obstruXt {Caes. B. 0. i. 27), that the ecldiere might not burst
into the town during the very emharhation, he builds up the
gates*.
1376 StLb in composition with verbs denotes — a. up: as, subuSh-
carry up (as a riyer), stim- (i. e. si&blm-) take up, surg- (t. e. sor-
rlg-) rise, subdi&o-t draw up, sustlne- hold up, b. under: as,
si&bfis- be under, subiftoe- lie under, submerg- sink. c. assistance :
as, subuSni- come to assist, succttr-t run to assist, d. succession :
as, sucdn- sing after, succl&mi^ cry out after, e, in place of: as,
sofflo- or suffici- appoint in place of supp^t put in place of, sub-
stXtu- setup in place of. /. near : as, siibSs- be at hand, subs^u-
fcUow dose after, g, wnderhand, secreUy: as, suriip- or surrlpi-
snatch away secretly, siLboina- equip secretly, subdiLc-t withdraw
quietly, h. in a slight degree: as, subrlde- smUe, si&baccussa- accuse
in a mann^. i. ahundanceX : as, sofflo- or suffici- and suppSt- be
abvmdant.
1377 sub in the composition of adjectives denotes — in a slight de-
gree: as, sUbobscOro- rather dark, subfusco- dvbsky.
1378 SubtSr is used generally with an accusative, rarely with an
ablative, often without a noun. It signifies — a. Under: as,
Lnun in pectSrS, ctLpIdlt&tem subter praecordift ISc&uit {Cic,
* Compare the me otsub with an accusative in phrases of time.
t See § 451. 1.
X This sense is connected with that otsub 'up.' Compare the op-
posite, d^' or d^fid' ' be low, wanting.'
8YB. BTBTEB. 8YPBB. 367
TuBC. 1. 10. 20)9 anger he placed in the breatt, desire under
the midriff,
Ferrfi ii&uat subter densft testlidXnS cSsob (Virg, A. ix. 514),
they glory beneath the dose array of shields to bear each
chance.
Omnia haec, quae si&pra et subtSr, unum essS dix6runt (Oic»
de Or. m. 5. 20), aU these bodies, which are above and below,
form one whole they said,
b, Metaphorioallj, in stihfection, under: as.
Virtus omni& subter se h&bet {Cfic, Tusc. t. 1. 4), virtue holds
every thing in subjection to her,
1379 SubtSr in composition with verbs signifies — a, under : as, sub-
terl&b-* glide underneath, b. secretly: as, subterdtic-* withdraw
secretly,
1380 SUpSr is followed both by an ablative and an accusative. With
an ablative it signifies — a. Over (without motion) : as,
Destrictiis ensis cuX siip^r impia OerulcS pendet {Hor, Od. m.
1. 17), oV whose unhdy neck a drawn sword hangs,
b. Upon (without motion) : as,
PdtSras rSquiesoSrd mScum FrondS siiper uMdl {Virg. Buc. i.
80), thou mighiest have reposed wUh me upon green leaves,
c, Concemvng: as.
Quid niincias Stiper anu ? (PlatU. Gist. iv. 1.7) what news do
you bring abovX ike old woman f
YSlim cOgltes quid figendum nobis sit siiper I6g&ti9n8 {Cic, ad
Att. XIV. 22. 2), / wish you would consider what we must do
concerning the embassy,
1381 SUpSr with an accusative denotes— a. Upon (with motion) : as,
Impradens si&pSr aspldem assidXt (Cic, de Fin. n. 18.59), unr
wittingly he sits doum upon an asp.
Alii siiper uallum praeclpltantttr {Sal, Jug. 58), others are
throvm headforemost upon the stakes,
b. Above in order (as at table) : thus,
KOmentftniis 6rat silpSr ipsum {Eor, Sat. n. 8. 23), Nom^entamu
lay above him,
* See f 451.1.
368 8THTAX*
c. Beyond (but with a notion of greater height*) : aa^
Proxime Hispftniam Maori sunt, siiper NtLmXdiam GaetfLll (Salm
Jug. 19), next to Spain are ihe Moon^ beyond NvrnMia the
Ocehdi.
d. More, in amount : as,
S&tis sUperqud dictumst (Oie, N. Dt n. 1. 2), etwugh and more
than enough has been said,
e. Besides: as,
Ptlnlcum exerdtum siiper morbum dtiaxn GkaOa aff^cit (ZeV.
xxYii. 46), the Funic army, besides sicknessy suffered severely
also from famine,
1382 SiipSr in compoation with verbs signifies— a. over : as, stLper-
uSni- pass over, siipSr6mIne- project above, stlperftLd-t poiir over,
b, dbtrndanee: as, siip&rSs- abou/nd. e. retftaining over, survival:
as, stlpfefo- remain over, survive, d, iai addition: as, 6l^;>taddilo-t
bring in addition,
1383 StLprft denotes — a. Upon, with motion : as,
Sub terra h&bXt&bant nSque eziSrant unquam stLprft terrain
{Cic. N. D. u. 37. 95), they lived umderground, and had never
come out above the ground
Et saltti Buprft uen&biil& fertnr {Virg, A. iz. 553), and with a
bound he flies upon the spears.
b. Upon, in oontaet with : as.
Nereides siipA delphlnos sSdentfs (Plin, H. N. zzxyi. 5.
med.), Nereids seated upon dolphins,
c. Over, at some distance above : as,
EccS siiprft c&piit]: h5mo ISuIs ao sordldus, sed t&mSn ^uestil
OMisfl, O&tifintb ; »um is ]«ni«ttlr {Cic. ad Q. F. i. 2.2.6),
see, there is ready to pounce down upon my head afeHow de-
void of principle and honour, but yet ofepiestrian station, I
mean Catienus, Ihen he shall be appeased
* For example, in the instance quoted Sallurt used the word becanse
thej were fiirther from the sea, and therefore probablj higher.
t See $ 451. 1.
' t Dr. Butler (Latin Prepositions, p. 121) has given this paange to
prove that supra caput means ' exceedmgly.' He connects it with leuis,
though the words are sepaiated bj homo.
SYPEB. BTPBA. TBNYS. 369
d. Above, in order (as at table) : thus,
AccttbuSram ftptLd eum et quXdem iiiiprft me AttlctLs, infr&
YerriiiB (Ctc, ad Fam. ix. 26. 1), I had fust sat dovm to dm-
ner at his hotise, and hy ike way Atticus sat next above me,
Verriushdow,
e. Above, in amount : as^
Oaesa eO die stLprft mlli& uiginti {Liv, xxz. 35), there were dain
on that day above twenty thotuand.
Etsi haec commSmSr&tiO udreor n6 stLpra hSmiois forttinam
essS uXde&titr {Cic. de Leg. n. 16. 41), and yet what I am
yoinff to mention wiU be thought, I fear, to exceed the lot of
man,
f . In addition to, over and above, besides : as,
Stiprft belli S&bmi mStum id qudque accessSrat (Liv, n. 18),
besides the fear of a Sabine war, there was this further trouble,
g. In reference to former times, before: as,
Paulo stlpra banc mSmSriam serui tin& cr$m&bantiir {Goes, B.
G. Yi. 19), a little before the times which those now living can
recollect, the slaves {of the deceased) used to be burnt with him,
h. In referring to a preceding part of a book or letter, above : as,
Yt sUprft demonstr&uImiiB {Caes, B. G. yi. 34), as we have shown
above,
1384 TSntLs (from tSn- or tend- stretch), which always follows its
noun, signifies reaching to, and is used — a. With an accusatiYO
(Yory rarely) : as,
R^giO quae uirglnis aequSr fid Helles
Et T&nain tSntis immen86 descendlt &b Euro (Fa^. Fl, i. 537),
The region which to the maiden Hdki's sea
And far as the Don from the vast Bast descends,
b. With an ablatiYe of the singular, particularly with words in
a or 0*: as,
AntiSchus Taur6 tSnus regn&rS iussust (Cic. p. Deiot. 13. 36),
it was ordained that Antiochus should rule only as far as the
Taurus,
e. With an ablatiYe of the plural (Yery rarely) : as,
* This fonn was probably at first an accusative, Taurom,
370 BTVTAX.
Pect^rlbusquS tSnuB moll^ 6rectils In auras
N&ribfis et p&ttUO partem mftrls 6utfmU Ore {Oo, Met. xv. 512),
Chest'hi^h upraiaed into the moving air
Fram wide-tpread Tnouth and noetriU vomiU cut
One half the 9ea,
d. With a genitiye of the plural, parfcioularlj in the oonsonant
deolension : as,
Et crOrdm tSntLs ft m6nt6 p&leftri& pendent ( Virff. G. m. 53),
And leg-deep from the chin the detdap haiige*.
1385 Trans signifies — a. On the other side of: as,
Gdglto interdum trans TlbSrim hortOs filXquos p&rSrS {Cic, ad
Att. XII. 19. 1), I think at times of purchasing some park an
the other side of the Tiber.
h. To the other side of: as,
Trans Alpis transferttlr {Cic, p. Quinct. 3. 12), he is carried to
the other side of the Alps,
1386 Trans in oomposition signifies across: as, transmlt-t or trilmlt-
send across, transi- go across,
1387 Yorsiis (uorsum, uerstlSi uersum) signifies direction : as,
BrondHsiuin uorsiis Ib&s {Oic, ad Fam. xi. 27. 3), you were going
in the direction of {or towards) BrundusiumX*
1388 YorstLs is also used in conjunction with the prepositions &d
andbi: as,
Ad dce&num uersus pr5flcis(S itibet {Oaea, B. G. Ti. 33), he
orders him to set out in the direction of the ocean.
In It&liam uorsus nfiulgfttvbriis Srat {Sidpic, ad Cic. ad Fam.
jy. 12. 1), he was about to sail towards lUdy,
1389 Vis on the other side of^ with an accusative (but rarely used) : as,
S&cra St uls et cis TlbSrim flunt {Varr, L. L. it. 15), sacrifaes
are offered both on yonder aind on this side of the Tiber,
1390 Yltrft denotes — a. On the other side of, beyond : as,
yitrS. SlliSnam uillam est uilltQ& sordlda et ualde ptLsillft {Oic,
ad Att. xiL 27. 1), on the other side ofSUius' coimtry-house
is a cottage of mean af>pearance and very small*
* See also $ 803. f See § 451. 1.
$ See also $ 798.
TBAKS. YOBSTS. YLS. TLT&A. 371
5. To the other side of, beyond: as,
Paulo ultra eum IScum castrft transtiilit {Caee. B. 0. m. 66),
?ie moved the camp to a spot a little beyond that place,
c. Metaphorically: aSy
Sunt certi dSniqufi fines
QuOs ultra citriiqaS nSquit oonaiBtSrS rectum (Hor. Sat.i. 1.106)^
There are in fine fixed limits
Beyond and short of which truth cannot halt.
N5n ultra hemlnam &quae assumlt {Cds, ly. 2.4), he tahes net
more than a pint-and-a-half of water,
d. The same without a noun : as,
Estne SlXquld ultra, quo prOgrSdl cnldelltas possit? (Cie, u.
Yerr. y. 45. 119) is there any thing beyond this to which
Hoodthirstiness can go f
1391 In the examples already giyen, it has been seen that preposi-
tions are at times placed after their nouns, although their name
implies the contrary*. In the old language this appears to have
been the case with perhaps every preposition, and the practice
prevailed to the last in some legal phrases. It may further be
observed that — a. The preposition cum is always placed after the
ablatives of the personal pronouns : as, m6cum, tScum, s6cum,
nObiscum, u5biscum, and for the most part after the ablatives of
the simple relative : as, quOcum, qu&cum, quicum, qulbuscum.
b. The prepositions t&itLs and uorsiis always follow their case. c.
The disyllabic prepositions generally are more apt to occupy the
second place than those which are monosyllabic, d. The relativef,
and the pronoun ho- this^ when it occurs at the beginning of a
sentence, have a tendency to throw the preposition behind them.
* It may be useful to compare the meaning of the term ease with
that of the term preposition,^ They both denote primarily the relationa
of place. They are both so intimately connected with the noun as to be
pronoimced with it, and even written with it, although printers have as
regards prepositions abandoned the authority of the best inscriptions and
manuscripts. Thirdly, as the case-endinp; is always added as a sufiiz, so
also in the old language was the preposition. Hence there is no original
distinction, either in essence or form, between a case-endinff and a prepo^
sition. These considerations may perhaps tend to create m the mina a
clearer notion of what a case is.
f This explains the form quoad, as compared with adeo, and also
quamobrem, guemadmodumf gtiooirea.
372 SYNTAX.
e. When an emphatic adjeotive or genitive accompanies a noun,
this emphatic word commonly comes first, and is immediately
followed by the preposition, which must then be considered as an
enclitic attached to it, and should be pronounced accordingly.
1392 The preposition is occasionally separated from its noun. The
words which may come between are included for the most part
under the following heads : a, an a^ective belonging to the noun ;
h, a genitive belonging to it ; c. an adverb or case attached to that
noun when it is a gerund or participle ; d, the enclitics nS, quS,
u8, although in the case of the monosyllabic pronouns the noun
as well as the preposition commonly precede these enclitics* ; e,
the conjunctions which commonly occupy the second place in a
sentence, as autem, Snim, quXdem, t&mSn, u6rO.
1393 The preposition may attach itself to the adjective in place of
the substantive, or even to a genitive which depends upon the
substantive, and the substantive itself be removed to a distance ;
or, lastly, the preposition occasionally is found before the verbf.
1394 Whether a preposition is to be repeated or not before each of
two nouns, is to be decided by the intimacy of the connection
between them. When that intimacy is close, the nouns may be
considered as one, and a single preposition will be sufficient. Thus,
the Aulerci and Lexovii being close neighbours in the map of Gallia,
one preposition is enough in —
Exercltum In Aulercis LexSuiisquS conl5c9.uit {Goes. B. G. in.
29), he posted the army in the country of the Aulerci and
Lexovii,
1395 On the other hand, if the nouns be looked upon as very distinct,
two prepositions are requisite : as,
S&tis St ad laudem St M utillt&tem profectum arbltr&ttlr (Coes.
B. G. rv. 19), he thinks that sufficient progress has been, made
both for glory and for utUityX.
* See §§ 836, 837.
t As, dum longus inter saeuiat Ilion Romamque pontus {Hot. Od.
III. 3. 37).
X Hence the preposition inter is often repeated : as, interest inter
eaussas Jortuito antegreastu et inter eaussae naturalis {Cic. de Fat. 9. 19).
So also do, de Fin. i. 9. 30, Farad, i. 3. 14.
ADYSKBS. 373
1396 When the antecedent and relative are dependent upon the
same preposition, the preposition may for brevity's sake be omitted
in the relative clause, if the verb be not expressed : as,
Ms tuae littSrae nunquam in tantam spem adduxSrunt, quan-
tam Siliorum {Cic. ad Att. iii. 19. 2), as for myself, y<mr Ut-
ters have never led me to entertain so strong a hope as those of
other friends,
1397 If two prepositions have a common noun, that noun must be
repeated in Latin (except in the case of those disyllabic preposi-
tions which are used adverbially) : as,
Hoc non m5d5 non pro m6, sed contrS. me est pStiils {Cic, de
Or. III. 20. 76), this, so far from being for, is rather against
me,
ADVERBS.
1398 An adverb, as its name impHes, is commonly attached to a
verb, and usually precedes it ; but if the adverb is emphatic, it
may commence or end the whole sentence ; or if unemphatic, it
may occupy the non-emphatic, that is, the second place* in a
clause.
1399 An adverb may of course be used with participles, a&d this
usage is sometimes retained by them even when they have be-
come virtually substantives : as, facto- (n.), dicto- (n.), responso-
(n.), &c. Thus,
In 5dium adducentiir aduorsSjril, si quSd eorum silperbS, cru-
dellter, m&UtiosS factum pr5fSr6ttLrt (Cic. de Inv. i. 16. 22),
the opposite joarties wUl be brought into discredit, if any tyran-
nical, crud, or spiteftd act of theirs be brovght forward,
Sul nSgOtI bSnS gSrens {Cic. p. Quinct. 19. 62), a good manager
of his own affairs,
Pol m^i patris bene plirta indiligenter Tut4tur {Ter, Ph. v. 3. 6),
faith he takes poor care of what my father earned so creditably,
1400 An adverb often accompanies adjectives and adverbs, but is
rarely found with substantives, and perhaps only under one of the
• See § 1473.
f Observe that if factum had not been a substantive, the pronoun
must have been quid, not quod* See § 306.
XK
374 filTNTAX.
two conditions : a. ihsX the substantive shall be in apposition ; I,
that it shall b6 interposed between a substantive, and its adjective
or dependent genitive : as^
a. M&rius fiepttimum consul dSml suae est mortuSs {Cic, N. D.
III. 32. 81), MaHiM in his seveiUh conmdcUe died at his own
house,
P5piilus, l&te rex ( Virg, A. i. 21), a cUy that ruleth far and
wide.
b. E't heri semper l^nitas uer6bar quorsum eulbderet {Ter. And.
I. 2. 4), and master's constant ^lentleness, I was afraid what
it vmdd end in*,
Omnes circa. pSptUi (Liv. xxiv. 3), all the states around,
1401 Adverbs are used in some phrases with the verb Ss- he, when
an adjective or participle might have been expected : as,
Ytl nSquS uos c&pi&mini St illl &ustrS. sint {Sal, Jug. 85), that
you may not be deceived, and that the other party may be dis-
appoirOed.
Aput uStSres dicta impune Srant {Tac* Ann. i. 72), amofng <mr
afycedors mere words were vm^wfiMked.
YSliae liil s&nS ItibentSr &pud Talnam nostrum {Cic, ad Att.
XVI. 6. 1), at Velia I was indeed most comfortable at our friend
Talna's,
NEGATIVE PARTICLES.
1402 The simplest form of the Latin negative is net. On the other
hand, n5n has some other element added to the simple negative^
and is therefore more emphatic. Hence hSidX is used with the
* Even here it ia £u frcpn certain that temper does not belong to
uerebar,
t The same is the form of the English negative as it appears in our
old writers. It also enters into the formation of never fi>om ever. The
particle enters into the formation of many Latin words : as, nSgid' * be
unable/ nSfas^ nSfctsto-^ n^fario-y n^fando-, n^uis * thou wilt not,' in
which it is short ; and the following with a long e, neue, nedum^ nemon-^
neqttam^ nequUior, nequaqiumy neguiquam. Other words into which ne
enters are nunquam, n&tiquam, neuter (old form ne-cuier), as also the
phrase ne minus. See also $ 761.
X Non may possibly be formed from ne and unum, just as our English
no is a corruption of nonet i* e. ne one. Compare the German nwi from
ne em. Indeed the old La^tin writers use the form nenu^ which aeems
more clearly to be a contraction of n^ unum*
NE. S0V, HAUD. 375
indicative, and with tlie subjunctive when a result is expressed,
in which case the subjunctive evidently assumes the meaning of
the indicative*.
1403 When n5n affects a single word in a sentence, it precedes it ;
when it affects a whole sentence, it commonly precedes the verb.
Occasionally, in order that it may have great emphasis, non is
placed at the beginning of a sentence, or at the beginning of the
predicative part of a sentence, and in these cases it often becomes
difficult to give a translation which shall not greatly alter the
order of wordst : as,
N5n hos p&lus, non sHuae m5rantiir (Caes, B. G. vi. 35), no
marshy no woods restrain them,
1404 la sentences containing a main verb of thinking or saying, the
negative, which really belongs to the infinitive mood, is at times
for emphasis placed before these main verbs : as,
NOn existtim&uit suis sYmlUbus prtfbin poss8 se esse hostem
p&triae, nM mihi esset Inlmlciis {Cic. Phil. IL 1. 2), he
thought that the men of his ovm stamp eotUd never he satisfied
he was a pvMio enemy to his country^ w/dess he was a private
enemy of mineX,
1404. 1 N6, baud (hau), n5n, are all proclitics§. Hence the form of
the verbs nesci-, hausci- (so in Ritschl's Plautus) ; and hence such
an order of words as :
Yt iam llceat un& conprehensidne omni& complecti, non-dtibl-
tantemquS dicSre, omnem n&turam essS sero&tilcem sul
((7u7. de Fin. v. 9. 26, ed. Madvig), so that we may now in-
* In the same way the French use the strengthened negatives, ne^.pcu,
ne.. point, ne..r%enj m such phrases BAJe n*irai paa^je n'irai point, je ne
vois rien, &c., where the particles p€u^ point, rien, severally represent the
Latin nouns p€U3um, punctum, rem. On the other hand their subjunctive
mood commonly takes a simple ne.
f In the commencement of Horace^s Satire (i. 6), Non quia Maecenas
^c. naso suspendis adunco Ignotos, the negative is separated from the verb
to which it belongs by nearly five lines.
X In the same way the Greeks use the order ouk c^, although the
negative belongs to the following Infinitive. In Latin also nega- probably
owes its formation to the same principle, the negative in this word too
belonging always to the accompanying infinitive.
§ So also ovK (ov) is commonly a proclitic ; and similarly our not
(c&nnot, kndw-not) is an enclitic.
376 BTKTAX.
dttde aU in one ^general assertion, arid without hesitation sa'g
thai 'MtJtwre is always sdf -preserving,
1405 Between n6* and quXdem the word (or words, if intimately
connected) on which the emphasis lies is always interposed : as,
EgS ne titllem qoXdem arbltrSr essS ndbis fiitur&nim rSrum
Scientiam {flic, de Div. n. 9. 22), /(9r my part I do not think
it even expedient for us to know the future,
Ns 81 ciLpiam quidem {flic, in Pis. 28. 68), fwt even if I desired it.
1405. 1 Besides not — even, the ordinary meaning of n6 — quidem, it is
sometimes to be translated neither^ : as,
NeV&rius quidem diibltat cOpias prOdticSrS (Goes, B. 0. n. 33),
neither does Varius hesitate to lead out his forces,
Hulc ut scSlus, sic n6 r&tio quidem defuit (Cic. N. D, ni. 26. 68),
as this woman (Medea) was not d^icient in viUany, so neither
was she in wit.
Si illtid, hoc ; n9n autem hoc ; Igltur ne illud quidem {Cic. de
Fin. IT. 19. 55), if that he true, then this must he so ; hut this
is not true ; consequently neitherl is that,
1406 Where in English the conjunction and is followed by a nega-
tive pronoun or adverb, the Latin language commonly prefers nS-
quS accompanied by an affirmative pronoun or adverb : as,
NSque ex castris quisquam discessSrat {Sal, Oat. 36), and not a
man had left the camp,
N^ue uUam stfciSt&tem confirm&rl possS credldl {Cic, PhU. n.
35. 89), and I thought that ru> alliance could he ratified,
Ngque est usquam consUio 15cils {Cic, de Ofif. u. 1. 2), and there
is nowhere room for deliheraiion,
1406. 1 In writers after the Augustan period nSc often has the power
of not even : as,
P&tris iuss& nee pStuissS fUium d6trect&r6 {Tac. Ann. iii. 17),
the orders of a father it was not even in the power of a son to
decline {let alone the will).
♦ As quidem is itself a word of strong affinnation,it was enough to use
the simple negative ne.
f In German auch nicht. See Madvig ad Cic. de Fin. p. 816.
t This distinction has been thoroughly established by Madvig (ibid.),
who has dealt with all the apparent exceptions in Cicero, Sallust, &c.
• • •
NB. NOlf. 377
. Nee puSrl cr6dant, nlsX qui nondum aerS l&uantur {Juv,
II. 152), {aU this) not e'en cur haima hdieve, save thosSf Who
for the penny-bath are yet too yotmg.
Sed nee TibSriO pardt {Suet. Oct. 86), hut not even Tiberitu does
he spare,
1407 Similarly an intention to prevent anj thing is expressed in
Latin by n6 and an affirmative pronoun or adverb, although the
English often uses the coi^unction that, followed by a negative
pronoun or adverb : as,
Yt d&ret dpSram n6 qu5d his oollSquium inter se esset {Liv,
xziii. 34), that he should take core that they should have no
wnferenoe wi^ each other,
Disptfsdttls ezplOr&tdrlbus nScilbi B5m&nl oOpias tiansdUcSrent
(Caes. B. G. vii. 35), scouts being placed at different points,
that the Romans might not lead their forces over at any
point, ^
Tti tftmSn e&s SpistSlas concerplto nSquandO quid 6m&net {Cic,
ad Att. X. 12. 3), you however wiU tear up those letters, that
nothing may ever oox out.
1408 On the other hand, where a result is denoted, the conjunction
(it is employed with the negative pronouns, drc. : as,
Tantis impSdiSr occiip&tiOnXbiiB ut scrlbendl f&cultas null&
detiir {Cic, ad Fam, xii. 30. 1), I am hindered by so many
engagements, that I have no opportunity of writing,
Obuiam mihi sic est prOdltum, ut nihil posset fiSri om&titLs
(Cic, ad Fam. xvi. IL 2), they came out to meet m£ in such
a manner, that nothing could be more complim^entary*,
1409 But when the negative affects a single word, and not is ex-
pressed by et nOn : as,
TStiis et nOn igndbllis dlcendl mftgistSr (Cic. Brut. 91. 315),
an old and not unknoum professor of oratory,
* Thus in the following tables the words in the fint column belong to
clauses of purpose, those in the second to clauses of result :
ne , , , , tU non.
ne qutsquam J
*^^"?f • XutnihU.
nsquidquam /»♦»»»«"•
KK2
•*H
nc'cubi , , ut nusqwun,
ne ullu8 . ut nuUus,
378 BTBTTAZ.
IncredlblUs &nImtLs et nOn tLnlus uYrI ulrSs {Cic, p. Mil. 25. 67),
a spirit past belief ^ aind a power of work such as no single man
ever had.
1409. 1 Again, when and not introduces an idea directly opposed to
what precedes, et n9n or ac n5n are required : as,
lUl iudlces, si iudXcSs, et non parrlcldae p&triae nomlnandl sunt
{Cic. p. Plane. 29. 70), those jurymen, if indeed they are to
he called jurymeny a7id not rather parricides of their father-
land.
Qu&sl u6r5 me tuo arbltr&tu, et non meo grfttum esse Sporteat
{Cic. p. Plane. 29. 71), a» if forsooth your opinion and not
my own ought to decide the Tifieasvre of my gratitude.
Quid tn fiBcisses, si t6 T&rentum et non S&m&rdbrluam misis-
sem ? {Cic. ad Fam. vii. 12) what wotdd you have done, if
I had sent you to Tarentum, instead of Samarobriva ?
Null& res recte potest admlnistrftrl, si tijusquisquS u^t uerb&
spect&re, et nOn ad udlunt&tem 6ius qui e& uerba h&buSrit
accedSrS {Cic. de Inv. n. 47. 140), nothing can he executed
property y if every separate person is to look to the words ordy^
instead of complying with the intention of him who used those
words.
Non dicSrem, si puSri esse iUam culpam, ac non p&trls existii-
m&rem {Cic. ii. Verr. iii. 68. 169), I should not have said sOy
if 1 had thought that was the hoy^s and not the father's fault,
Plurlbus uerbis ad te scrlbSrem, SI res uerb& desldSr&ret, ao
non pr5 se ips& ISquSrSttir {Cic. ad Fam. iii. 2. 2), I should
have written to you at greater length, if the subject had needed
words, and not itself spoken in its own behalf.
Qui pStes rSp^rlre ex eO gSnSre hSmlnum qui te ftment ex
&nImo ac non sul comm5dI caussft simtilent ? {Cic. ad Q. F.
I. 1.5. 15) how are you to find men of that doss who love you
sincerely y instead of pretending to do so for their own advan-
tage F
1410 The adjective nullo- and the indeclinable noun nihil are occa-
sionally used emphatically for non and n6 : as,
Nihil nScessest {Cic, ad Att. yii. 2. 8), there is no necessity.
Sextiis 8.b armis nullus discsdit {Cic. ad Att. xy. 22), Sextus
has not a thought of laying down the sword.
NE. NON. 379
1411 An accumulation of negatives is common in Latin, so as to
produce a strong emphasis (but attention must be paid to the
position of n5n in such phrases*) : as,
a, Kon nihil lit in tantis mS,lls est profectum {Cic, ad Fam.
XII. 2. 2), some progress has been made, considering the very
unhappy position we are in.
PSpiilus s51et non nunquam dignos praetgrirg (CiV. p. Plane.
3. 8), the citizens are wont at times to pass by the worthy.
Ss non noUS dixit {Cic. de Or. ii. 18. 75), he said he was no way
unwiUing.
h. Tuum consilium nSmO potest non laudS.rS {Cic. ad Fam. ly.
7. 2), the course you are pwrsuing no one can avoid praising.
Aperte &dulantem nSmo non uldet {Cic, de Am. 26. 99), a man
who openly flatters, every one sees through.
Kihil non aggrSdientiir h5mInSs {Liv. ly. 35), mj&n, wUL aJttach
any thing.
1412 After a general negative, a second negative may be introduced
under either of the following circumstances — a. when some word
or phrase is made emphatic by being placed between n6 and qul-
dem ; and 5. when the main clause is divided into two or more,
of which each has its own negativef : as,
a. Aduentus noster nSmlnl n9 mlntimS quidem fuit sumptui
{Cic. ad Att. v. 14. 2), our arrival was not even the least ex-
pense to any one,
Non 6nim praetSreundumst ne id quidem {Cic. ii. Verr. i. 60.
166), for we must not pass over even this,
h. Sic h&beas nihil te mihi nee cilriiis essS nee su9.uitLS {Cic, ad
Att. y. 1. 6), he assured that there is nothing either dearer or
sweeter to me than yoursdf.
* Thus,
non nihil^aliquid,
non nemo \ _-^/(^^^
non nvMus J ^
non nunquam^ aliquando.
non nusquam => alicubi.
nihil non^ omnia,
nemo non^omnes,
nullus non^ omnia,
nunquam non^ semper,
nusquam non=ulnque.
Similarly non modo — , non tantum — , mean * so much and more besides ;'
whereas modo non — , tantum non — , mean * something just short of — .*
i* Occasionally a double negative with the power of a single negative
occurs through carelessness: as, quos non miseret neminis, ' who don't pity
no one.* (Cato ap. Fest. y. nemini.)
380 STVTAX.
1413 After clauses containing words compounded with n6, a second
clause is sometimes introduced which requires that the affirmative
notion*, instead of the negative, should be supplied : as,
N^nt Caes&rem in condlciOnS manstirum, posttOat&que haeo
ftb eo interpSsXta essd^ quOmlntU & nobis p&rtlr6tiir {Cie. ad
Att. Yii. 15. 3), they my that Cketar will not oHde by the
termsy and thai these demands have been pni forward by him
to prevent our making preparations,
N6mo exttUit eum uerbis qui It& dixisset ut qui ftdessent in-
tellSgigrent quid dlcSret^ sed contempsit eum qui mXntLs id
f&cSr5 p^tuisset {Cic, de Or. lU. 14. 52), no one ever extolled
a man for speaking so as to make himself tnteUiyibU to those
present^ btU aU despise one who is unalfle to do sof,
1414 A negative will often extend its influence over a second dause
attached to the first by ant or uS : as^
N^u6 consistendi aut ex essSdis deslliendl ftcult&tem d6ds-
runt (Caes. B. G. v. 17), nar did they give {them) an oppor-
tunity of halting or leaping doionfrom their war^chariots,
N9n tlbluis cOramuS quibusUbSt {ffor. Sat. i. 4. 74), not any
where or before any people,
1414. 1 A negative prefixed to two clauses may be used to deny not
each separate clause, but the combination. Thus in the following
example each of the three negatives a£fects what has been included
for the nonce in brackets.
NOn Snim (dixl quidem sed non scripsi), nee (scripsi quldem sed
nOn tf bil l6g&ti5nem), nSo (^il quldem sed non persuftsi Th&-
b&nls) {Quintet ix. 38. 55), /or you must not suppose that I
spoke, and then ahstainedfrom writing ; or that I wrote indeed,
but took no part in tfie embassy; or that I did take part in the
embassy, yet failed to persuade the Th^ns.
• i. e, for nega- ' deny,' dio- * say ;' for nol- * be unwilling,' uo/- ' wish ;'
for netno ' no one,' omnea ' all.* Aj regards nega- see § 1404. Compare
too Hot. Sat. i. 1-3, nemo . . . uiuai, laudet (L e. nmnes lawdent) ; Liv.
xxTi. 2, nemo memor essett praesidio soeiis essent; Plant, Trin. ui. 2.62,
nolo • • ., «0/ . . .
f Observe that nemo exitdit has caused contempsit to be an aorist as
well as a singular, though a plural present is required by the sense.
t Translating Demosthenes p. Cor. o. 55.
INTEBSOaATIYE PARTICLES. 381
1416 The negative in nS — quldem, when followed by a common
predicate, often extends its influence over a preceding clause be-
ginning with non m5d5 or non s5lum : as,
Assent&ti5 non mSdo &mlc5 sed n6 llbSro quldem dignast {Cic,
de km.. ^,S^\ flattery is unworthy not merely of a friend,
btU even of a freeman,
S^n&tul non sSlum iiiu&rS rempubllcam, sed nS lugSrS quldem
llcuit((7iV. in Pis. 10.23), the senate were forbidden not merely
to assist, hit even to mourn over their country*.
1416 In imperative sentences, and in subjunctive clauses dependent
upon iit or nS, n6u8 is used rather than nSquS or et nS : as,
Suis praedixSrat ut Caes&rls impStum excIpSrent n6uS 86 Idco
m5u6rent (Goes, B. C. iii. 92), he had told his men before-
hand to wait for Ccesar's attack, and not 7nove from their
ground,
H5mlnem mortuom In urbS nSuS sgpSllto nSue tirltS (apud Cic,
de Leg. ii. 23. 68), neither bury rwr bum a corpse in the city,
1416. 1 Hand ru>t (in old writers often hau) is used chiefly before ad-
jectives and adverbs, but also in the phrase baud scio or hau scio
I know not,
INTERROGATIVE PARTICLES.
1417 The simplest interrogative particle is the enclitic ng, which is
affixed to that particular word on which the question turns, whe-
ther verb, substantive, adjective or particle : as,
PStestnS uirtus, Crassg, seruIrS ? {Cic. de Or. i. 62. 226) is it
possible, or is it not possible^ Crassus, that virtue should be a
dave ?
ApollInemnS tu Delium sp51i&re austis 6s ? IlllnS ta templo tam
sancto mSuus impias a£ferr6 cdn&tiis 6s ? {Cic. ii. Yerr. i.
18. 47) Vfas Apollo of Delos the god whom you dared to de-
spoil f Was that the temple with all its sanctity on which you
attempted to lay your unholy hand ?
* It is in such passages as these that non modo is said to be used for
non modo non. The distinction is well seen in Cic. p. leg. Man. 13. 39 :
Qttoius legiones sic inAsiam peruenerunt, ut non modo manits tanti exer-
citus, sed ne uestigium quidem quoiquam pacato nocuisse dicatur. . . . Non
modo ut sumptum faciat in miiitem nemini uis adfertur, sed ne cupienii
quidem quoiquam permittitur.
^2 BTVTAX.
NMoQ eg6 Ohrem^tis paoto adfinitatem ecfiigere potero f {Ter,
And. I. 5. 12) U there no way in which IshaU he able to escape
a marriage into Chremes* fan/vdy f
A. Quid co^tis Thraso ? B. Eg6ne ? {Ter. E. v. 7.1) A. What
are you after ^ Thraso f B. What am I after f
Siclne &gls ? {Ter, Ad. i. 2. 48) is this the way you act /
riicone crMere ea quae dixi oportuit te? {Ter, E. v. Q, 11) if
you must needs believe what I said, ought you to have done so
at once %
1418 A question is often asked without any interrogative particle :
as,
R6gitafl ? N6n uides ? (Ter, E. iv. 4, 8) do you ask ^ Don't you
see?
N^ueo te exorire ut maneas triduom hoc ? {Ter, Ph. iii. 2.4)
can I not prevail upon you to wait the next three days ?
Cl5diils insldias f^dt Mllonl ? (Gie. p. Mil. 22. 60) did Clodius
waylay MUo ?*
1419 In directf questicms the particle num commonly implies the
expectation of an answer in the negative, and nonnS one in the
afBrmative: as,
Kum facti piget % Num eitis color puddris signum usquam in-
dicat ? {Ter, And. v. 3. 6) m A« sorry for his conduct f No.
Does his cheek show any sign of sham/e f No.
Quid cS.nis, nonnS slmllis liip5 ? {Cic, N. D. i. 35. 97) wdl and
the dog, is he not like the wolf? Of course he is,
1420 In simple indirect questions (not commencing with an interro-
gative pronount) n3 is commonly employed, sometimes num : as,
Ylde&mus primum, de5rumnS prouldentis. mundus rSgSitur ;
deindg, constilantnS rebtLs humS.nls {Cic, N. B. iii. 25. 65),
let us consider first whether the universe is governed hy the
foresight of the gods ; secondly, whetfter they provide for the
wdfaxe of man,
Sp8ciilS.rI iussi sunt, num solllcltftti &nlml sSciOrum & rSge
* Id many of these cases it would be perhaps better to consider the
words as an assertion either put ironically or in the name of the other
party. Thus, ' Clodius waylaid Milo, you say.'
f See § 1134 and note.
:|: Such as gut-«, uhky unde, quo, quando, &c.
NX. SUM. AN. 383
essent {Liv. xlii. 19), they were directed to he on the look-out
to find whether the kirig had been tampering with the allies.
1421 The particle &ii is not used in the simple direct question ; and
in the simple indirect the best writers seldom use it except in the
phrases nescio &n, haud sdo &n, dtLblto &n, incertum &n : as,
Est id quidem magnum atque haud scio an maximum, sed tibi
cpmmtlnd cum multls (Oic, ad Fam. ix. 15.1), trtte^ that is
an important m/ztter, and I would almost venture to say the
most important of all, btU still it is common to you with many.
Hoc dliudlc&rl nescio an numquam*, s^ hoc sermOnS certS
non potest {Cic. de Leg. i. 2L 56), the decision of this point
lam strongly indinedto think can never^ke place, hU cer-
tainly not through the present conversation,
MSriendum certe est, ^t Id incertum &n hOc ips5 die (Oic, de
Sen. 20. 74), die we must, some time or other, and poseihly
this very day,
1422 The use of si (and SI fortS) in indirect questions is very rare,
except in phrases where hope or expectation is expressed or implied
{if perchance) : as,
Expect&bam SI quid de eO consllio ad me scrlb^es (Cic, ad Att.
XVI. 2. 4), 1 was waiting to see whether you would write any
thing to me about this plan,
CircumfundunttLr ex rSUquis partlbus, 81 quem Sdltum rSp^-
rlrS possint (Gaes. B. G. vi. 37), they pour round on the other
sides, in hopes Ihey may find some place to enter at,
1423 The term disjunctive question is used to denote those cases
where one or more alternatives are added (which in English are
preceded by the word or). The forms used, alike for direct and
indirect questions, are the four which follow: a, iitrumf ,
* In many of the ordiaary editionB the negative in these phrases has
been deprived of its first letter. Thus Ramshom, p. 710, quotes nescio
an ulK from do, ad Fam. ix. 9. 2, though the best Mas. have ntMi, See
Orelli*s edition. So also Cic, ad Att. iv. 3. 2.
f Num is limited in its use to the simple question. Yet at times it
appears to be used in disjunctive questions, because at the close of that
ample question which alone was intended at starting, it suddenly occurs
to the writer (see § 1426) to draw attention to the absurdity of some al-
ternative, which he attaches as usual by the particle an. See Madvig's
Opusc. II. 230.
384 SYNTAX.
&n* ; b. nS, &n ; c, , &n ; d, , nS :
asy
a. Ytrum nescis quam alte escendgris, an pro nihllo id piitSs ?
{Cic. ad Fam. x. 26. 3) which is the right explanation of your
conduct; that you do not know to what a high station you
have risen, or that you set tio value upon it ?
Id &gltiir, tLtrum hac pStltione an proxtlma praetor flas {Cic.
ad Fam. x. 26. 2), the question is this, whether you are to be
praetor this election or next,
h, £& fSrarumne S,n hdmlnum caussSl gignSrS uldettir? {Cic.
N. D. II. 62. 166) is it for the wildr-heasts think you or for
num that it {the earth) produces these things ?
Quaero eum, BrutlnS slmllem malls, S.n Anion! {Cic. Phil. x.
2. 5), I ask whether you would wish him to he like Brutus or
Antony,
c: SortiSttir, an non ? {Cic, Prov. Cons. 16. 37) shall he cast lots
or not f
PostrSmd, fiigSre an mSLnSrg tutius fSret^ In incerto Srat {SaZ„
Jug. 38), lastly, whether to fly or stay were the safer, was a
matter of douht.
d. Sunt haec tu& uerbS,, necnS ?t {Cic, Tusc. iii. 18. 41) are
these your words or are they not ?
Nihil intSressS nostra ptLt&mus, uSileamtls aegrlnS slmtls {Cic,
de Fin. iv. 26. 69), it makes no difference to v^s we thinky
whether we are well or iU,
1424 The forms, ng, n6 ; Sn , Sn , are found in
the poets (and but rarely elsewhere) : as.
Qui tgneant oras, hdmlnesnS fSraene,
QuaergrS constXtuit ( Virg, A. I. 312),
Who occupy the borders, men or beasts,
He resolves to ask.
* Care must be taken not to confound with disjunctive questions those
in which, although the English language uses the same particle, there is
really no opposition between the parts, but all may be equally denied or
affirmed, so that aut and not an must be interposed : as, quid ergo, solem
dicam aut lunam aut caelum deum ? {Cic. N. D. i. 30. 84) ' what then,
shall I apply the name of god to the sun, or to the moon, or to the sky ?'
t Ne in the second part of a direct question is rare, and perhaps
limited in the best writers to the form neone. So utrum , necne
occurs in an indirect question. The Pseudo-Nepos has utrum ,
matremnef &c.
Air. 81. TTBTH. KB. 386
SaepS m&ntls SpSrI tentantes admSuSt, an sit Oorpiis &n illiid
Sbur {Ov, Met. 10. 254), oft h%8 hands he moveth to the worh^
trying whether that before him he flesh or ivory.
1425 The old construction with litram has after it n8, &n :
as,
ytr6m, studione id sibi habet an laudi putat Fore; si perdiderit
gn&tum ? (Ter, Ad. m. 3. 28) does he look upon this as an
amtisementy or does he think it will he a credit to him, if he
ruin his son ?
Ytrum Srat utllius, suisnS seruire an pSptQO B5m&no obtempS-
rfirS ? {Cic. n. Verr. iv. 33. 73) which was the mare expedient
cou/rse, to he slaves to countryman of their own, or to m£et the
wishes of the Roman people f*
1426 It has been seen that Sn is the particle ordinarily used before
the second part of a question. Hence &n (or an u6r0) is well
adapted for those cases where a statement is immediately followed
by the altematiye put in the form of a question : as,
NSoessest quicquid prOnuntiSs, Id aut esse aut nOn essS. An
tu di&lectlcis ne imbutus quidem Ss ? {Cic. Tusc. i. 7. 14)
what you put forward must needs either he or not he. Or are
you not acquainted toith even the A B C of logic Ff
Ad mortem t6 0&tXlln& dtlcl iamprldem Sportsbat — an u6r0
SclpiO Graccum prlu&tiis interf^cit, C&tUlnam nos constUes
perfSrCmtLs? (Cic, in Cat. i. 1.3) death, Catiline, ought long
ago to have heen your fate — or does any one really pretend,
that when Scipio, though a private man, slew Oracchus, the
consuls ofBjome are to tolerate Catiline ?
N5s hie te exspectSmtLs ex quodam rtimdre, &n ex littSris tuls
&d ftlios missis {Cic» ad Att. i. 3. 2), v)e meanwhile are ex-
* The particle n« is at times added to the interrogatiTe pronouns and
also to the particles num and an : as, quinSf quone, qttantane, uteme^
utrunme^ nutnne, anne. But care must be taken to distinguish those
elliptical phrases where the relative and not the interrogative pronoun
precedes ne. Thus, Ter. Ph. v. 7. 29 : De. ArgSntum tube reseribi. Ph.
Quodne eg6 discripsi p6rro Hits quibtu debut ? De, ' Order the money to
be repaid. Ph. What, the money which I paid away forthwith to those
creditors I spoke of?' And again, Ter. And. iv. 4. 29 : Quemne eg6 heri
wdi ad u6s adferri uksperi ? ' What, the child which I myself saw being
caiiied to your house yesterday evening?'
f Which must be the case if you deny my proposition.
LL
886 8TVTAX.
pecUng you here on the autkority ef same rumour^ or {ara I
right f) letters of yours to some other peojj^*
1427 An answer in the affirmative may be expressed by Stiam, Xt&
or Ita est, sic or sic est, uSrum, uSro, factum, sftnS, maxiime,
qoidnl?, admddum, oppldo, plSji6, &c., by a personal pronoun
with uerO, or lastly by the yerb of the preceding sentence re-
peated :t as,
H&ecin tua domdst ? Ita {Plant. Am. i. 1. 206), is this your
house f Yes,
KSuI tibi quidnam scrlbam ? — quid ? — Stiam {flic, ad Att. i.
13. 6), have I any news to write to yon f-^^ny nevn f-^es.
P, It&ne patris &is conspectum u6ritum hino abiisse ? G. &d-
modum. P. Ph&nium relictam solam? G. Sict. P. Et
irattim senan ? G, Oppido (Ter. Ph. 2. 2. 1), P. Do you
really mean that, afraid to face his father, he is gone off
G. Precisely. P. That Phanivm has been left by herself f
G. Just so. P. And that the old man is in a passion f G.
Exa4!tly.
A. Dasne hoc ? B, Do sane {Cic. de Leg. L 7. 21), A. Do you
admit this f B. Tes, 1 do admit it.
1428 An answer in the negative may be expressed by nOn, mIntlmS,
nihil mlntls, ^c. : as,
Oognlt5rem adscrlbit SthSni5. Quem 9 Oogn&tum &llquem ?
N5n. Thermlt&num &llquem 9 Ne id quidem. At Slctl-
lum ? MIniimS {Cic. n. Verr. ii. 43. 106), he appoints a per-
son to act as attorney for t^henius. Whom, think you f Some
relative f No, 8o7M inhabitant of Thermos f Not even that.
Still a Sicilian of course f By no moans.
1429 Im5 seems to have signified properly an assent with an im-
portant qualification (but from carelessness it is used at times
where the correction amounts to a total denial) : as,
Ylult ? Imo ^tiam in sSn&tum uSnIt {OUs, in C^t. i. 1*2), is
* Hence in Toe. an is lued almost with the sense oiuel: as, Ann. ii.
^2ffinem tdtae aponte an fato impleuit^ 'he ended his life by an act of
his own, or was it by a natural though sudden death.'
f At times the affirmation is understood without a formal expression ;
as when a reply begins with at * true but,* at enim ' true but beyond a
doubt,* et quidem ' true and no less truly/
X Just as si ' so,* ' yes,' is used in French &c.
ET. QYB. ATQVE. 387
he (dive f Tes indeed he is, and more than that, comes into
the senate.
Caussa Igltur non bdna est 9 Imo opttLmft, M &getur foedis-
sliinQ (Cic, ad Att. ix. 7. 4), the cause then is not a good one f
Nay, the best of causes, hut it mUl be supported most disgrace-
fully.
A. Sic huDO d6cipi8 9 D. Imo 6niinuero A'ntipho^ hie me
d6cipit {Ter, Ph. 3. 2. 43), A. Is this the way you cheat this
poorfdhw f D. Not exa4sdy so ; it is this poor fdlow, An-
tipho, wJm is cheating m«*.
COPULATIVE CONJUNOTIONa
1430 Of the three copuktive coujunctionB, St, qu8, atquS (&g), the
enclitic quS is more particularly employed to attach something
subordinate to what precedes and unites two things more closely
together into one : as,
Soils et lunae rgllquOrumquS sidSrum ortus (C^. de Div. i. 56.
128), the rising of the sun and moon and tlie other stars.
SSn&tus pdptilusqud BSm&ntls (Cic. PhiL iii. 15. 38), the senate
and people of Home.
1431 Long phrases are connected commonly by St, sometimes by
quS, rarely by atquS ; whereas all three are employed to connect
words or short phrases, except that quS is never attached to those
demonstrative pronoims or adverbs which end in c,
1432 When two words or phrases are to be united, a still stronger
union is effected by employing a pair of conjunctions. Thus, a.
St St is employed either with single words or long
phrases, b. quS, quS is used in the connection of re-
lative clauses, and sometimes with a pair of words the first of
which is a pronoun ; and also generajlly in the poets, c. quS,
St 1 is limited to single words, of which again the first is often
a pronoun, d. even St , quS occurs, but again rarely
except with single words : as,
* A friend and former colleague suggested that imo is merely a con-
traction of in modo * in a manner/ and referred to the arguments I had
put forward elsewhere ('Alphabet/ p. 141), to show that modo when used
as an adrerb had a monosyllabic pronunciation.
f This form occurs in Sallust, not in Cicero.
388 BTKTAZ.
o. Nihil est dnim sXmtll St inuentmn et perfectum {Cic, Brat.
18. 70), for nothing was ever both invented and perfected at
once.
b, QulquS BOmae, qulque In exerdCtu Srant {Liv. zzii. 26), both
those at Rome and those in the army,
MequS regaumquS meum (Sal, Jug.- 10), both mysdf amd my
sceptre.
Alii fontemque ignemquS fSrebant {Virg. A. xii. 119), others
the lim/pid stream arudfwe tpere bearing,
c, Seque et cohortem {Liv, zxy. 14), both himsdfand the cohort.
d, Id et dngiills tinluersisquS sempSr hSnOrl fiiit {Liv. it. 2),
this was ever an honour alike to individual leaders afid to the
whole mass of those who followed,
1433 When more than two things are to be united, of which no one
is to be more closely united to one than to another, the following
forms are admissible :
a, 8t , St y St .
b, , St f St .
c, , y quS.
d, , quS, quS* : as,
a. Is, St in cust5diam cluls dSdit, et suppUcfttidnem mihi dS-
crSuit, St indices praemils affScit {Cic, in Gat. it. 5. 10),
this person has ordered citizens into custody ^ has voted a pub-
lie thanhgiving in my nam^y has rewarded the informers,
b, Admlr&rl sSled grS.uIt9.tem et iustltiam et s&pientiam Oaesft-
rls {Cfic, ad Fam. ti. 6. 10), I always admire the high prin-
cij^y andjvLstice and wisdom of CcBsar,
e, Yrbem pulcerrtLmam florentissiimam pStentisstLmamque essS
uSluSrunt {Cic. in Oat. ii. 13. 29), they wished Rome to stand
foremost in splendowTy prosperity^ and power,
d, A cultti prouinciae longisslme absunt, mlnlmSque &d eos
mercfttores saepS commeant, proxImlquS sunt Germ&nis
{Caes, B. G. i. 1), ^ley are farthest from the civilisation of
the province, are visited very rardy by m^erchants, and lie
nearest to Oermanyf,
• Very rarely -^— , atqtie (oc) — , atque (ac) .
t The poets often attach a que to the first, as well as all the following
members of a series : as, oblitua regisque ducumque meique {Ov, Met. xui.
276), ' forgetful of prince, of chiefe, of me.'
ET. <JVE. ATQYE. 389
1434 When of the words or phrases to be united, the union is to be
closer between some than others, more than one of the conjunc-
tions St, quS, atquS must be used ; and thus the Latin language
has great power in grouping together the different parts of a sen-
tence according to their importance''^ : as,
Caedes atque incendia, et ISgum intMtum, et bellum clulle ac
ddmestlcum, et tdtliis urbfe atque impSri occftsum apprS-
pinqu&rS dixSrunt {Cic. in Cat. ni. 8. 19), massacres and
conJUxffratioTU, the annihilation of law, civU and domestic
war, the downfall of the city and the empi/rey all these were
approa4ihing they said.
niud signum sSlIs ortum, et fSrum curiamquS consplclt {Cic.
in Oat. in. 8. 20), yonder statue looks upon the rising sun^
and the forum and senate-housef,
Nauigantes indS pugnlltum ad Llljrbaeum fasasque et}: captils
hostium nauls acc6p6rS {Liv, xxi. 50), as they were sailing
thence they received the news that a battle had heenfovbght ^off
LUylxBumy and that the enemies^ ships had been aU put to
flight or J taken,
It&quS prOductis copiis ante oppldum coneddunt ; et proximam
fossam cr&ttbiis intSgunt atque}! agggre explent, sSque &d
Sruptionem atque omnis casus compSrant {Caes, B, G. vii.
79), accordingly having led out their forces they take a posi-
tion before the toum ; and the first ditch which presented itself
they bridge over with hwrdles, orXfUl up with earth, at the
same time that they prepare against a sally and every other
mischance^.
1435 There are three modes by which an enumeration is made so as
* Cicero at times in his orations purposely uses et alone throughout a
long period to connect all the single words and phrases and clauses, whe-
ther long or short ; his object being rather to deluge his hearer^s mind with
a torrent of ideas, than to place them in due subordination before him.
t The omission of the word the before senate-house has the same effect
of bringing the latter pair of nouns nearer together, as the change of con-
junction has in Latin.
X Tills disjunctive use of e/ and atque is not uncommon.
§ If every one of the three conjunctions be translated by and, the
repetition at once offends the ear and confuses the mind. The variety
of stops in our modern printing enables us to make that distinction visible
to the eye, which the Romans made sensible to the ear also by a variety
of conjunctions. See * Journal of Education,* iv. 135.
ll2
390 BYJSTAX.
to be highly impressive : — a, that abready mentioned (in § 1433)
with the prefixed and repeated St (called Fdyayndeton) ; b, a sim-
ple enumeration without conjunctions (called Asyndeton) ; c. a re-
petition of some word at the beginning of each clause (called ^;mz-
phora): thus,
h. Semper audax, pSttUans, ItLbldXnOsiis {Cic, p. SulL 25. 71),
always daring^ mischievous^ sefnxwdl.
Quid u51uSrit, cSgltftrit, admlsSrit, n5n ex crlmlne est pondSr^
andum {Cic, p. Sull. 25. 69), his criminal wishes, intentions,
actions, are not to be measured by the charges of his accuser »
c, Erepti estis slnS caedS, dnS sanguXnS, sine exercltu, ^ih&
dlmlc&ti5n^ {dc. in Oat. m. 10. 23), you have been rescued
without a massacre, without bloodshed, without an army, with-
out a struggle.
1436 An omission of a conjunction is — a. common in the old lan-
guage and public formulae between two words; b, the regular
construction with words or phrases opposed to one another ; and
c, occasionally used in a light and liyely style for the sake of bre-
vity: as,
a. K5^ti5nem promulg&uit, uellent itLbSrentnd* PhUippo r^
bellum indlcl {Idv, xxxi. 6), he put up a public notice of
his intention to take the pleasure and order of the people for
dedaring war against king Philip.
Lex Aeli& Senti& {Oaius, i. 6. 18), the law passed by jElius and
SerUius.
Ysus fructiist est ills ftliSnis rSbtLs utendl fruendl salua rSrum
substantia. {Paul, in Dig. vii. 1. 1), the usufruct is the right
to the use and produce of property bdonging to others, without
detriment to the property itsdf.
b. N6 cursem htlc illuc uia. dSterrtimS. {Cic. ad Att. ix. 9. 2),
that I may not keep running first to this place and then to that
along the worst possible road.
OmniS., mIntLm& maxtLma, ad OaesSrem mitti sciebam {Cic. ad
Q. F. m. 1. 3. 10), all the news, from the most unimportant
to the most important, I knew was regularly sent to Ccssar.
* More literally ' he advertised a bill asking whether they wished
and ordered that war should be declared against lung Philip.*
t Thus what was originally two independent words became almost
one i still the accusative is usum Jruetum,
BT. QTB. ATQYE. 391
Quum diu anceps fuisset certSmSD, et Sftguntlnis''^ qui& pni€t6r
spem r&istSient creuissent &nlml, Poenus qui& non ulcisset
pr5 uicto esset, clfimOrem rSpente oppId9.nI tollunt (Liv,
XXI. d), when the contest Jiad been for a long time doiih^tlj
and the spirit of the Saguntines was increased because they
had up to this time made a resistance beyond their hopes^
whUef the Carthaginian was as good as defeated because he
was not already victorious^ the townspeople suddenly set up a
shoutt,
' StiUd pdtuit, ^0 non pStSro ? {Pomp, ap. die. ad Att. iz. 10.2),
was Sulla abUy and shall not I be able f
c, AdSrant prSpinqui, &mICI ((7ic. n. Yerr. i. 48. 125), his eon-
net^ionsy friends were present.
In fSrIs InessS fortlttidXnem saepS dlclmiis, lit In Squls, in leO-
nlbiis {Cic, de Off. i. 16. 60), we often attribute courage to a
beasty as the horsCy the lion,
1437 When clauses follow one another without any conjunctions to
connect them, the same order is commonly used in each (except
that an inversion is admissible in the last clause) : as,
Ad hoc praeusti artus, nluS rigentes nerul, quassAtft fract&que
arm&, claudi ac dQbXl6s 8qul§ {Liv, xxi, 40), in addition to
this their limhs frostbitteriy their musdes stiffened by the snow^
their arms shattered and broken^ their horses lame and ex-
hatuted.
Is mOtus terrae mult&rum urbium magnas partis prostrfiuit,
m&rS flilmlnlbtLs inuexit, mentis lapsu ingenti pr5ruit {Zdv,
XXII. 5), this earthquake threw down a great portion of many
citiesy carried the sea up rivers, caitsed fearful avalanches\\,
* In the passages where long clauses are opposed, the writer takes
care to place opposed words at the beginning of each clause, as here :
Sagvntinis . . ., Poenus, . , Where the phrase is a short one, this is not
necessary, as in Cio. in Cat. ii. 11.25, quibua nos suppeditamus, eget illst
* of which we have abundance, while he has none.*
t This conjunction is almost necessary in the English translation when
two opposed clauses are attached by a conjunction to another sentence.
X Compare also the use of such opposed clauses after an in § 1426 ;
and see ' Journal of Education,' it. p. 140, &c.
§ After nerui the editions have membra torrida gelu ; which, to say
nothing of the substantive preceding the epithet, is evidently a mere mar^
ginal interpretation of praeusti artus,
II Here again our editions insert after prostrauit, auertitque eursu
rapidos amnety which is evidently an interpolation*
392 8THTAZ.
*
1438 With adjectives and adverbs of oomparison*, the conjunctions
St and quS are used in such a manner that the two things com-
pared are brought together and under a common construction,
while the adjective or adverb of comparison either precedes or fol-
lows the things compared ; or is interposed after the first of the
things compared, as a sort of enclitic. Thus, if we include the
double and single use of each conjunction, there are six varieties :
a. StrCnuI mlUtls et bSni impSriltOrls officiS^ slmiil exsSqueb&-
tiir (Sal. Cat. 60), he was perfartnin^ the parts at once of a
zealous soldier and a good generals
h, Quoi-sImtQ et YolcatiS pScuni& ntimSr&tast {Cic, ii. Yerr.
ni. 76. 176), the mone^f having leenpaid to him and Vdcatius
at the same time.
e. Nihil est Snim ctfmiil 9t inuentum et perfectum (Oic. Brut.
18. 70), for nothing was ever invented and hrovght to perfec-
tion both at the sarm time.
d. Alien&tSr mentS simul luctu mStfiqud (Liv. xxiv. 26), their
minds distracted by the double feding, of sorrow {for their
mjoihef^s death) and fear {for themsdves).
e. Hoc, prindpitim-filmiil OmenquS belli {Liv. xxl 29), this^ at
once a commencement and an omen of the war.
f. PSriter, c5mitlque 5nSiIquS tXmentem {Virg. A. n. 729),
fearfvZ alike for his com^nion and for the load he bore.
1439 The use of atquS with acyectives and adverbs of comparison ie
much more free, as neither an identity of construction nor the
dose union of the things compared is essential Thus,
M8 c51It St obseruat aeque atque ilium {Cic. ad Fam. xiii.
69. 1), he pays as much respect and attention to me as to him.
Si qui dlc&ttLr Slium occldisse ac uSluSrit {Oic. de Inv. n. 7. 23),
if a person were charged with having killed a different person
from what he had intended.
Par dSsIdSrium sul rSIlquit ac Ti. Qracchus rSllquSrat {Cic. p.
Bab. 5. 14), he died as much regretted as Tiberius Gracchus
had done,
1440 Et is occasionally used in the sense of * also,' * too,' even in
* This word is here used in a wide sense, so as to include sach adjec-
tives as aeguo-^ par- or pari-, aimili-, disaunUi', idem^ uno-, dMUhy dupHoi^f
and the adverbs aequet pariter^ emul^ una^ &c.
BT. QYE. ATQTB. AYT. YXL. 393
the best writers*, but for the most part only in certain combina-
tions : as, sSd St, slmiU 8t, sic St^ St ipsS.
1441 QuS and nS in the poets are sometimes placed, not after the
second of the two words compared, but affcer a word which is the
common predicate of both clauses : as,
Insginum te omnes puSrI cl&mentquSf puellae {Hor, Sat. ii»
3. 130), the Tnadman ! aU would exdaim, both hoy a andffirUt,
1442 The poets take the liberty of placing quS behind a later word
than the first of its clause, particularly in a pentameter line : as,
Quum maesttLs &b alto
HiSn, ardentes respIcSretquS decs (Tibul, ii. 5. 21),
As in sadness from the deep
On Hum and the hwming gods he was looking hack.
1443 The construction n6qu6 St , and also that of St
nSquS deserve attention, because they differ from the English
idiom. Thus,
P&tSbat uia, et cert& nee long& {Cic. Phil. xi. 2. 4), a road lay
open to them which had the douUe advantage of heing certain
and not long.
YSluptatSs ftgrlc^rum, nSo ulla impSdiuntur sSnecttite, et
mihi ad s&pientis' ultam proxiimS uldenttlr accSdSrS (Cic,
de Sen. 16. 51), the pleasures of the fanner {have a twofold
recommendation : they)^ are never ohstructed hy old age^ how-
ever advanced^ and they seem to me to approach mast nearly to
the life a wise man would lead*
DISJUNCTIVE CONJUNCTIONS.
1444 The difference between autH and uSl, though commonly trans-
* See Allen*8 ' Doctrina Copularum,' p. 52.
f A construction that probably began with a repetition of the predi-
cate : pueri clament olamenique puellae. Other instances are to be found
in Horace ; as, mutatosquet Od. i. 5. 5 ; horrihUiquey ii. 19. 24 ; medituque,
ji. 19.28 ; tetigiiquej ii. 19.32: and in Tibullus; sa, pereatque, i. 1.51;
sequiturque, i. 3. 56. See Orelli ad Hor. Od. ii. 19. 28.
X See Allen^s ' Doctrina Copulanim,' p. 120.
§ Or the words within brackets might have been omitted, and the
word * and' exchanged for ' at the same time that.'
ii See § 840, notes f and %.
394 8THVAZ.
lated by the same word in Englifih, ia marked. Ant divides two
notions essentially different, while ufl marks a distinction either
not essential in itself or unimportant in the mind of the speaker,
so that it is often used to correct a mere expression. When they
are repeated, the distinction becomes still more marked. In the
construction aut aut ^ the denial of one clause is an affir-
mation of the other. Whereas in the construction uSl uSl
all the clauses may coexist or not, the speaker merely ex-
pressing his indifference as to a choice between them. Lastly, n<SL
is used with superlatiyes and in other phrases with the sense of
even, or perhaps more precisely if you like*.
a. Audendum est lUlquId GnXuerSIs, aut omni& singtUis p&ti-
end& {Idv, vi. 18), we muet nudx a bold effort in a body, or
else every individiial must suffer the worst.
Aut occiibuissem hSneste, aut uictOrGs hMie uIuSrGmiis (C£c.
ad Att. lu. 15. 4), either I should have faUen htmowrMy, or
dse we should have been now living as conquerors.
b. MagntLs hSmo, uel pdtius summtLs {Cic, Brut. 85. 293), a
great man, or rather the greatest of men.
Yna atque altera aestas uel mStH uel sp6 uel poen& uel prae-
miis uSl armis uel ISglbus potest tOtam GaUiam sempltemis
uinctUls adstring^rS {Cic. Prov. Cons. 14. 34), on« or two
eummersy by the influence of fear or hope or punishment or
rewards or arms or laws {I care not which), may bind all
Gallia in eternal chains.
e, Yldetur uel mdrl s&tius fuissS quam essd cum his {Cic. ad
Att. IX. 6. 7), it seems to me that even death would have been
better than to live in the company of these people.
YestrS. caussft m6 loqul quae Idquor, uSl eS fidss sit {Liv. xxi.
13), that it is for your sake that I say what I do say, let even
this be a security to you.
Ctlilis e5 tempdrS uel maxiima &pud r^m auct5rlt&s Srat {Liv.
xxxTi. 41), whose influence with the king at this time was the
very greatest f.
* It will be Been that all the meanings here given to uel are consistent
with its being in origin an imperative of uo/- 'wish/ in the sense of 'make
your own choice.* See § 840, note f .
f The use of ue agrees nearly with that of uel, from which it is pro-
bably formed ; but it is always an enclitic, and occurs more frequently in
poetry than in prose.
AS, 395
VARIOUS CONJUNCTIONS AND ADVERBS.
1445 The conjunction &t denotes rather addition than opposition.
It is commonly employed after a concession, especially —
a. After SI, in the sense of tfet^ 9tiU : as.
Si minus suppUdo afflci, at custOdiri Sportebat {Cic, n. Verr.
. y . 27. 69), if it was not right they should he severdy punished^
still they ought to have been guarded.
Si non bSnam, &t fiUquam r&tiOnem afferrS sMent {Cic. ii. Verr.
in. 85. 195), they usually hriing forwardy ifiwta good reason^
yet some re€uon,
b. In a reply, when a proposition of the other party is assented
to, but at the same time ri^dered useless for his purpose by some
addition: as,
Nunquam nisi hSnOrlflcentisstLmS FompSium appellat. — ^At In
eius perB5n& mult& fteit aspSriiis {Cic, ad Fam. vi. 6. 10),
he never speaks of Pompey except in the most complimentary
terms, -^Precisely so, but in dealing with him he acted on
mjany occasions somewhat roughly,
c. Hence it is employed to anticipate an opponent's objection,
in which case the verb inquiSs or dicSs is commonly omitted, and
not unfrequently the particle 8nim or u6r5 added : as.
At sunt mOrGsi et difflclles sSn5s {Cic, de Sen. 18. 65), btit you
wiU tdl me, old men are cross and difficult to please.
At Snim Q. C&ttQIis &b hao r&tiOnS dissentit {Cic, p. leg. Man.
17. 51), true, I shaU be told, but Quintus Catttlus dissents
from this view.
d. It denotes a sudden emotion of the mind, and is employed
in sudden transitions in a speech : as,
Exi foras sceldste. At etiam r^stitas ? {Ter, E. iy. 4. 1) get out
cf ike house, you scoundrd. What I do you still resist f
Narr&bat se hunc necl^gere cognat4m suom. At qu6m uirum ?
{Ter, Ph. ii. 3.19) he often told me that this kinsman took no
notice of him. And yet what a noble creature he was /
e. Hence the repeated form att&t, i, e, &t&t£t''^, is used to mark
a sudden discoveiy : as,
* See §24.
396 8TVTAX.
Att&t hoc illtLd est {Ter. And. 1. 1. 98), dh^ ahy I see it theriy this
explains that htuineas*
.1446 Autem strictly denotes agaiuy and is never used in the sense
of opposition, hut real addition. It never occupies the first place
in a clause. Its significations are —
a. Again: as,
Turn autem hoc timet {Ter, And. i. 5. 34), then again she is
afraid of this,
Sed quid Sgo haec autem nequlquam ingr&t& rSvolvo ? ( Virg.
A. IL 101) hia why do I again in vain twm 6*er these unwd-
C07M thoughts f
Porro autem &li0 {Ter. Ph. L 1. 14), and ere long with another
(xgain.
b. On the other hand: as,
KSque Snim tu is es qui quid sis nescias; nSque autem ^
sum It& demens tLt &c. {Cic» ad Fam. v. 12. 6), nor indeed
are you the person not to know what is due to you^ rwr on the
other hand am, I so mad as <&c,
c. And or now (especially in a parenthesis) : as,
Di^gSnem &dtQescens, post autem P&naetium audiSrat (Cic, de
Fin. n. 8. 24), he had attended the lectures of Diogenes when
a yovmg many and afterwards those ofParuBtius,
KSmlnem conuSnl (conuSnio autem quStldiS pltiriimos) quin
omnes mihi grS,ti&s &gant {Cic, ad Fam. ix. 14.1), 1 have
met no one {and I daily meet very many)y Intt they aU thank
me,
d. But or nowy especially in adding the new propositions of a
syllogism : as,
Si Smittl ult& he9.t& potest, beS.ta essS non potest. Quis gnim
confldit sibi sempSr id st&hllS permanstirum quod frSgllS
sit? Qui autem diffldat perpStuIt&tl bSnSrum 8u5rum,
timeat nScessest, ne &lIquando fimissis illis sit miser. Be-
S.ttls autem esse in maxtLm&rum rSrum tImdrS nSmO pStest.
N6mo Igltiir ess6 beSltus potest (Cic, de Fin. ii. 27. 86), if
happiness can be lost, it cannot be happiness. For who feds
sure that that will always remain stable to him which is in
itsdf frail? But if a man feds no security in the continU"
ance of his blessings y he must needs be afraid of some time or
ATTEM. BEKTV. DYH. 3^
Other losing theniy and so heeoming miserable. But no one
can be happy when in fear about matters of the greatest im-
portance. Consequently no one can he happy,
e, Autem is also used in catching up some objectionable word
or phrase, where we insert some such expression as did J say f
Numquis testis posttLmum* appell&uit ? testis autem, num ac-
cuss&tSr ? {Cic, p. Bab. P. 5. 10) now did any witness mention
the nam/e of Postumus / Witness did I say^ did the accuser ?
Intelllgis quam meum sit scIrS quid in r6 publlcft ftat ; flat
autem, imm5 u6ro Stiam quid ftLturum sit {Cic. ad Att. y.
13. 3), you understand how much it concerns me to know what
is doing in the public world; doing did Isay^ nay even what
win he done.
In Sfrlcam* transcendes ; transcendss autem dlc5 ? h&o ipso
ann5 duos constilSs, tinum In hispftniam*, altSrum In &frl-
cam*mls9runt {Liv. xzi. 44), you unll cross over into Africa.
WiU did I sayy this very year they have sent their two consuls^
one into Spain, the other into Africa,
1447 Dsmum is strictly an adverb of time, and signifies — a. At last,
a very long time having preceded : as,
Ego n6uos maritus &nno demum quinto et sexag^nsumo Fiam !
{Ter, Ad. v. 8. 16), I hecome a bridegroom now for the first
time in my sixty-fifth year I
Nunc dSmum uSnis ? Cur passu's ? {Ter, Ad. ii. 2. 25) are you
come now for the first tim^ ? Why did you put up with it so
longf
Quarta uix dSmum expOnlmiir hora {Hor, Sat. i. 5. 23), at last
at ten o'clock {and then with difficvlty) we land.
h. Nothing short of especially with the pronoun i- or eo- : as.
Sic Snim sentio, id dSmum essS mIsSrum quod turp^ sit {Cic,
ad Att. VIII. S)yfor I fed that that, and that alone, is wretched
which is base.
Idem uelle St Idem nolle, e& d€mum firma &mlcltia est {Sal,
Cat. 20), an identity of desires and dislikes, that and nothing
short of that constitutes lasting friendship.
1448 Dum is strictly an adverb of time, and signifies — a. While, as
long as (nearly always with the indicative) :
* To copy the Mas., where proper namee haT« no capitals.
398 SYNTAX.
Bum haec dicit^ abiit h6ra {T&r. £. ii. 3. 49), while he was
saying thUy an hour passed away.
Dum haec in uSnStis^ gSrunturf, titurius in finis unellorum'^
peruSnlt {Caes, B. G. iii. 17), whUe these things were going
on amjong the Veneti, Titttrius arrives in the territories of the
UneUi.
Dum lS.tln8^ l^uentur littSrae, querciis huic 15co non dMt
{Cic, de Leg. i. 1.1), so long as literatwre shall talk Latiny
this spot will not he withotU its oak.
Diem ins^uentem quiSuSrg mllites, dum praefectiis urbis ulr6s
inspIcSrett {Liv. xxiv. 40), the next day the soldiers rested,
that the general might in the interval examine the strength of
the city.
h. Until (nearly always with the indicative mood, imless a pur-
pose be intended) : as,
Expectabo diim uenit {Ter, E. i. 2. 126), I shall wait untU he
comes.
Expecta S.mSlbo ts, dum attlcum* conuSniam^ (Cic. ad Att. yii.
1. 4), /loaity I pray you, untU I can see Atticus.
c. Provided thai (always with the subjunctive) : as,
OdMnt, dum mutuant (ap. Cic, Phil. i. 14. 34), let them hate,
provided they fear.
Omnia hSnest& neclSgunt, dum m5dS pStentiam cons^uantiir
{Cic. de Off. III. 21. 82), they neglect aU that is hmwu/raUe,
if they can btct attain political power.
d. Tety a while, as an enclitic after negatives (including uix) or
a present of the imperative : as,
Yixdum gpistSlam tuam l6gSram cum curtius^ uCnit {Cic. ad
Att. IX. 2 A. 3), I had scarcdy yet read your letter, when
Curtius called.
L8g3.tidnS decreti& necdum missS. {Jjiv. xxi. 6), when the embassy
had been decreed, hut not yet sent.
Adesdum, paucis tS u51o {Ter. And. 1. 1. 2), here a 9noment, I
want a few words with you.
1449 Enim must commonly be translated by the English conjunction
for, but at times retains what was probably its earlier signification
♦ See p. 397, note. f See § 458.
X The subjunctive, to denote a purpose. *
DTM. ENIM. lAM. ITA. 399
indeedy as in ^nimu8r5 indeed, indeed, n^ue Snim nor indeed,
StSnim aTul indeed, S,i^mm* true you wiU say, hut in fact, sSd
Snim hut indeed, &c. : as,
Enimu6ro dauet, nillocist segnitiae nee 80c6rdiae (^er. And. i.
3. 1), indeed, indeed, Davus, there ia no room for doth or
stupidity.
Quid ttite tecum ? Nihil enim {PlatU, Most. iiL 1. 24), what
are you saying to yoursdff Nothing, I assure you,
1450 lam is an adverb of time, and often differs from nunc just as
65 temp^rg differs from hoc tempSrg. It commonly denotes some-
thing extreme in point of time : as,
a. Already (sooner than might have been expected) : as,
Hermae tul pentSlXclf iam nunc m6 delectant {Cic, ad Att. i.
8. 2), your Mercuries of Pentdic marble already now charm
me {before I have seen them),
' Haec iam turn cum &dSras offendSre SitLs S.nimum intellSgebam
{Cic, ad Att. 1. 11.1), this, already when you were with us, I
perceived annoyed him,
b. At last (later than might have been expected) : as,
PostiQo ut r^eat iam in uiam (Ter. And. i. 2. 19), I expect him
to return at last into the right path, {He has gon£ astray long
evvovgh,)
c. Presently: as,
De qidbus iam dicendl ISciis SrXt {Cic, Brut. 25.96), of which I
shall presently have an opportunity of speaking.
d. Then again, lastly (to denote a transition from one subject
to another) : as,
Iam quantum dicendl gr&ult&tg u&leat, uos saepS cognostte
{Cic, p. leg. Man. 14. 42), then again how impressive he is as
a speaker, you yourselves have often witnessed,
e. Iam iamquS, of what is expected every moment : as,
Quanquam ipsS iam iamque &dSro {Cic. ad Att. xiv. 22. 1), and
yet I mysdf shall he with you forthwith,
1451 It&t ^ differs from sic so as the logical i- or eo- ikis from the
demonstrative ho- this,
* See § 1445 c, f See p. 397, note.
t The oldest form of the neuter pronoun id. Compare the Gothic
neuter tkata, whence our that.
400 imAZ*
a. So (so exceedingly)^ pointing to a coming tLt that : as,
Indtlsum in ctLriJl sSn&tum h&bu6rant it& multoB dids ttt in*
tSriSrint nonnulll f&mC {Cic. ad Att. ti. 2. 8), ihey kept the
eenaU shut up in their houae so many days that wnu died of
hunger,
h. So (so littUy or with a restrictive sense), with the same con-
stmction: as,
It& trimnphftnmt, iit illS pulsos silpSr&tasqaS regnftret (Cic,
p. leg. Man. 3. 8), they trxumipked^ it is trucy yet ao that the
other y routed and overpoufered though he was, was itiU a sove-
reign.
€, Soy referring to the preceding sentence : as,
It& sunt omni& deblllt&t& (Cic. ad Fam. ii. b), to such an extent
is every thing exhausted,
Ita est (Ter, E. i. 2. 44), yes, it is so,
d. Soy corresponding to a preceding or following as (tit <fec.) :
Vt quisque optiime graec6 scit, Ita est n6qaissilmtts (dc. de
Or. II. 66. 265), as each man is better acquainted with Qreeky
so is he a greater rogue,
e. So*, in expressing a prayer : as,
It& mS Di S.ment, nonnihil timeo (Ter. E. ly. 1.1), «o may the
gods love m^, 1 am someufhat frightened,
/. Ut . . . It& although ,..yet: as,
Vt & proeliis quiStem h&buSrant, Itft non noctS, non die un-
qnam cess&uSrant &b dpSr6 (Liv, zxi. 11), although they had
had rest from fighting, yet they had never ceased either by day
or by night from working,
g, It&t ., ,&Lonthe one condition , . . that : as,
Pftds Xta &liqa& sp€s est, si uOs ut uicti audietis (Liv. xxi. 13),
of peace there is not the slightest hope, except on the condition
that you listen to the terms offered as men who are conquered.
* Sic is used in the same way : nc te diua potens eypri . . . regat^
Hot. Od. i. 3. 1.
t So also sic is used in Horace (Ep. i. 7. 69) : sic ignouiase putcUo
Me tibi^ si cenaa mecum. Indeed sic is only si with the demonstrative
suffix added. Compare the use of so in English for ^: * So you dine with
me, 1*11 forgive you.*
ITA. NAX. QYIDEM. 401
A. This^ referriog to an accusative and infinitive following* : as,
It& constltui, fortXtSr esse figendum {Cic. p. Olu. 19. 51), this I
resolved upon^ that I mtcst act vrUhfirmTiess,
%, So {so very)y with the words by which the degree is to be
measured, not expressed (especially after negatives) : as,
Slmiil&cr& praecliLrS, sed nOn Xta antlqu& (Cic. ii. Yerr. iv. 49.
109), figures of great reptUe, hu not so very old,
1452 Kam, while it commonly signifies /or, has two other meanings
which deserve attention :
a. ThtUyfor example (introducing a particular instance after a
general proposition)t. b. It often assigns a reason why a parti-
cular name or fact which might have been expected is not included
in a series or argument just preceding. Thus,
b. Nam quod nSgas te diibXtftrS quin magna In offens3. sim S.pud
pompSium hoc tempSrS, non uldeO caussam cur it& sit (Cic.
ad Att. IX. 2. 2), I purposelt/ pass over y(mr statement that
you have no doubt of my having given great ofence to Pompey,
for this simple reason^ that I do not see any reason why it
should be so.
Nam maeciam, non quae iQdXcS.ret, set quae reicSrStiir essS
utfluisti (Cic, p. Plane. 16. 38), I omit the Mcecian tribe, for
in presenting that tribe yo7i intended it to be, not one of those
to famish a jury, but the one to be challenged by your oppo-
nents.
1453 Quldemt gives emphasis to the word or words before it, and
its meanings deserve great attention. They are —
a. At least : as,
lit mihi quXdem uldetilr (Cic. de Fin. i. 7. 23), so it seems to me
at least.
Me& quldem sententift p&cl sempgr est constQendum (Cic, de
Off. 1. 11. 35), in my opinion at least (whatever others may
think) peace ought ever to be the object of our cou/nsds,
b. N8 . . . quldem$ not even : as,
* Sic is used in the same way.
t See Caes. B. G. iii. 28 ; Plant. Trin. i. 2.46.
% The same in meaning and perhaps in form as the Greek y€. See
'Alphabet,' p. 141.
§ See §§ 1405, 1412, 1415.
mm2
402 SYNTAX.
Id n6 fSrae quidem f&ciunt {Cie, de Fin. 1. 10. 34), thU even the
wUdrbeast does not do.
Ne id quidem est explOrfttum {Cic, ad Att. z. 8), even that is
not certain,
c. Et quXdem and indeed, naif : as.
Me cum g&blniS sententiam dicSre, et qiddem ilium r5gS.rl
prills {Cic, ad Att. z. 8), that I ehovld give my opinion in
the same room with OahiniiLS, and indeed he he asked his first/
d, Et quidem, and qui-quldem (in replies), assenting to what
is said, and at the same time ironicallj adding what renders the
assent useless : as,
Torquem detraxit hostl. — Et quidem s6 texit nS intSrIret. — ^At
magnum pSilciilum S.dilt. — In dcillis quidem exercXtus {Cic,
de Fin. 1. 10. 35), he tore the collar fro9)i his enemy* s neck, —
TeSy and (excuse my adding) covered himsdf with his shield,
that he might not he killed, — BtU still he incwrred great danger.
"-Certairdy, in the eyes of the army.
At Srat mecum sSn&tiis — et quidem uestS muta^. At tota
It&li& oonuSnSrat — quoi quidem uastlt&tis mStils inf^rS-
b&tiir {Cic, p. Piano. 35. 87), hU the senate, you say, were
with me. They were, and (you have forgotten to add) dressed
in moUfmifig, But all the inhalntants of Italy had assembled
to support me. They had, and (py way of enfiowragement 1
suppose) were daily threatened with the devastatiovC of their
property,
e, Qui-quldem which hy the way : as.
Quo quidem in bell5 uirttis Gnltuit 8grSgi& 'm- c&tdnis pro&ul
tul (dci pro Mur, 14. 32), in which war hy the way, the
valour and abilities of your great-grandfather M, Goto shone
' conspictuyus,
De triumphs tlbi assentior, quem quidem tOtum f&clle abiecSro
(Oic, ad Att. ix. 7. 5), about the triumph I agree with you,
and- hy the way I shaU readily at once ahandon aU idea
of it,
f. It is true, certainly (a concession commonly followed by sSd) :
as,
F&ds &mXc6 tu.^ quidem, sed mihi ulderls &liud tu hdnestum
* See § 1080.
QTIDBM. QYOD. 403
itLdX(Are atque Sgo existiiniem {Cic, ad Att. viii. 2. 2), you
act like a friend I grants htU gtiU you seem to me to hold a
different opinion of what ie right and proper from that which
I entertain.
Ignosco SquXdem^ tibi. Bed tti quSquS mihi uSlim ignosc&s
{Cic, ad Q. F. iii. 1. 3. 7), I forgive you certainly j hut I must
leg you too to forgive me.
g. Similarly in a transition from one subject to another, the
last okuse of the preceding matter has a quidem, while the new
matter is introduced with an autem. Thus,
Ac de primd quidem offlcl fontS dizlmus. D6 tilbtLs autem
rSlXquis latissiime p&tet e& r&tid quft s5ciSt&s hSmlnum
contlnStilr {Cic, de Off. i. 6. 19 et seq.), and we have now
said enough of the first source of duty. Of the three which
remain^ the mast extensive in its operation^ is the principle
by which society is hdd together.
1454 Qu5d (in origin only the neuter of the relative, signifying this
or that) is translated by the words that, because, &c. In the older
constructions it is generally preceded by some part of a logical
pronoun. The difference in use between qu6d and lit in the sense
of that, lies chiefly in this, that qu6d commonly precedes a state-
ment of facts past or present in the indicative, iit commonly in-
troduces purposes or results expressed in the subjunctive. The
uses of qu5d belong for the most part to the following heads :
a. Thaty the fact that, after a logical pronoun (see §§ 301 i&c,
1112 <kc.): as,
£o ips5 quod nScesse Srat solul, flUniltas soluendi imp W8b&tiir
{Liv» VI. 34), by the very fact that it was necessary payTnent
should be made, the means of making that payment were oh-
structed.
Horum fortisslml sunt belgae, propt^re& qu5d & cultti prOuin-
ciae longis^tme absunt {Caes. B. G. i. 1), of these the bravest
are the Bdgce, for the reason that they are furthest removed
from the civilisation of the province.
Praeterquam qu6d admissi audltlquS sunt, e& qu5quS u&n&
* i. e. ego quidem, and perhaps pronounced ekem or eke,
t Literally * extends most widely.'
404 BTNTAX.
legS,tio fuit {lAv. XXI. 10), beyond the fact that they were
admitted and heard^ this emhaesy also was tinthotU effect,
h. As quid why is used for propter quid, so qudd is commonly
used for propter qu5d, that is because. Thus,
GrS.tiS.s S.glmus dticlbus uestris, quSd Sctilis m&gis quam auilbus
credldSrunt (Liv, vi. 26), we thank your generals for that
they gave credit to their eyes rather than to their ears.
In uiam quod t€ d6s^ hoc tempSrfi, nihil est {Cic» ad Fam. xir.
12), there is no reason why you should expose yoursdfto tror
vdling at this season,
Laudat ilMc&num quod fuSritf abstXnens {Cic, de Off. ii. 22.
76), he praises Africanusfor having been temperate,
e. In that, where quum or the relative itself might have been
used (see § 1455 h,) : as,
BSnS fSoltis qu5d Srbomln&mlnl (Liv. vi. 18), you do wdl in
rejecting it as something impious.
FecistI mihi pergr&tum quod s8r&pi5ms Ubrum ad mS misisti
{Cic, ad Att. ii. 4. 1), you have done what is rnost agreeable
to TMy in sending me SerapivrCs book.
d, Qu5d often introduces a clause which serves as the nomina-
tive or accusative to the main verb, or stands in apposition to a
noun. Thus,
AccSdit quod mirlfXce ingSnils excellentlbus d6lects.tiir (C^. ad
Fam. VI. 6. 8), there is added the fact, that he is tooTtderfuUy
charmed with men of extraordinary genius.
Mitto qudd omnis meas tempest&tes siibiSrls (Oic. ad Fam. zv.
4. 12), I pass over your having encountered, as you say, aU
the storms to which I have been exposed.
Me un& consolfitiS sustentat, quod tibi nullum S. mS piStfttXs
offXcium dsfuit (Cic, p. Mil. 36. 100), /or mysdfbut one con-
solation supports me, I mean the fact, that no duty demanded
of me by affection has been wanting to you,
e. QuSd often introduces a sentence, which is to be the subject
of remark, when the English may be expressed by with regard to
the fact that, or more simply. Observe too that a, if the sentence
so introduced be a present or past fact, the indicative is required ;
b. if it be a future possibility, the subjunctive : as,
* See§ 1189. f See § 1205.
QTOD. 406
t
a. Quod scilbis tS &. uSliin ad m8 uenturam, SgS uSro te istic
essS udlo (C)'^;. ad Earn. xiy. 3. 5), as to your offer to come to
me iflmsh it, I do not wish it {my dear Terentia); on the
contrary, I wish you to remain where you are.
Quod m6 uStas quidquam susplcftrl . . ., ggram tibi m5rem {Gic.
ad Att. III. 20. 3), you forbid me to harbour any suspicion —
/ win oblige you.
Qudd ad crimlna attlnet, qidbus moti bellum indixistis, uel
f&teri eSL tutum censemiis {Liv. vi. 26), as regards the
charges which indued you to declare war, we think it safe
for us even to confess them.
b. Turn quod tS postMus purgSs, huius non fS.ciam {Ter. Ad.
II. 1. 8), then as to your trying afterwards to clear yourself,
as you perhaps wiU, I shall not value it at this,
Nam qu6d de argento sp6rem, aut posse p6stulem me f&llere.
Nihil est {Ter. Haut. iv. 2.4), for as to my entertainirhg any
hope ahovt the vnoney, or expecting to be able to take them in,
thaCs at an end.
f. Kon qu5d 7u>t becatue, not that (or more commonly non quO*),
with a subjunctive, is used to deny a reason, or to guard against
an inference (see § 1208) : as,
Kullo m5do prorsiis assentior, non quod diff)[cllS sit mentem
S.b 5ciilis s8u5cS>rg; sed quo m&gis s6u5co, e5 mlniis id
quod tu uis possum mentS comprehendSrS {Cic. N. D. iii.
8. 21), I by no uneans give an unqtudified assent, not that I
find it difficvlt to abstract my thoughts from what I see with
my eyes, but because the m^ore I do this, the less able am I to
grasp with my mind the idea you wish tm to grasp,
g. Qu5d, like quum (see § 1455 g\ is used to denote duration
of time : as,
I&m diu est quod u6ntri uictum n6n datis (Plata. Am. 1. 1. 146),
it is now a long time since you gave my belly any food.
h. Quid qu5d often introduces a new and striking fact when
the literal translation would perhaps be : what would you say to
the fact that ? but the idea may often be more simply ex-
pressed by nay. Thus,
* Not only is non quo more common, but the examples with ntm
quod seem apt to have a following rf, as difficile here, and doleant 5 1208,
ex. 3 ; and so are open to suspicion.
406 STNTAZ.
«
Quid quod BSn&tHs eos u51uit praeessS prGuinciis^ qu! non prae-
fuissent ? {Gic, ad Att. vi. 6. 3) nay the senate decreed thai
those should preside over the provinces, who had not already
done so,
i, QuSd followed by a conjunction, as bI, nM, iitlnam, iibi,
Ac, is often used to connect a new sentence with what precedes ;
in which case it often admits such a translation as Intt, whereas^
and. Thus,
Quod si tu u&lSres, iam mihi quaedam explDrUta essent (Cic.
ad Att. VII. 2. 6), whereas if you had been in health, some
points wotUd have been deared up for me before this,
1465 Of quom, quum, or cum*, the chief uses are as follow : —
a. To denote time, with the past-imperfect subjunctive, while,
i. e. at some point of time in a long period. Thus,
Ad hannlb&lem, quum ad l&cum &ueml esset, quinquS noblles
iiiuSnSs ab TS.rent5 uenSrunt (Idv. zxiv. 13), there cwme to
ManniJbal, while he wa^ near the lake of Avemus, five yowng
men of high family from Tarentum,
h. Time with the past-perfect subjunctive, after\, when : as,
Cum hostis f udisset, moenia ipsa oppugn9.re est adgresstis (JAv,
VIII. 16), after rovling the enemy, he advanced to storm the
fortifications themselves,
c. In indefinite expressions J, quum, when preceded by a verb
signifying existence, is followed by a subjunctive : as,
Erit illud pr5fect5 tempus quum gr&uisstimi hSmlnis fidem
d6sldSr6s (Cic, p. Mil. 26. 69), there assuredly will come the
time when you will feel the loss of so high-principled a man,
d. When a time is precisely defined, as for instance by the two
particles tum quum, the indicative is used even with the past
tenses, both perfect and imperfect : as,
Tum quum in S.siSi res magnas permulti amls^rant, sclmus
romae fldem concldissS {flic. p. leg. Man. 7.19), at the time
* In form an old accusative of the relative. Compare the English
when^ the old accusative of who^ as then is of the.
t Yet after postquam, ubif and uf, in a sense nearly the same, the
indicative aorist is used.
$ See§ 1189.
QYOD. QYOM. 407
when very many lost vast properties in Asia, we know that at
Borne credit wets imocked down.
Quid quum d&b&s his lltSras, non e5s ad mS uentur5s arbitra-
b&r6 ? (Oic. ad Fam. iii. 7. 3) tpdl, and when you were hand-
iTig the letter to them, did you think that they wotdd not come
to meF
e. When, used with the perfect and the other tenses in a man-
ner not included under the heads a, h, c, and requiring commonly
the indicative : as,
Quum se intSr Squltum turmUs insinuS.uSrunt*9 ex essSdis d8-
slliunt {Ca£8, B. G. iv. 33), their habit is, when they have
worked their way among the squadrons of cavalry ^ to leap
down from their chariots,
Quum caes&r in galliam uSnit, alt^rius factiOnis princlpSs Srant
aedui, altSrius sSqu&nl {Case, B. G. vi. 12), when Coeaar
first cavne into OalUa, the .^Jdui were at the head of one party,
the Sequani of the other,
Longum illud tempus, quum non Sro, m&gis mS mSuet quam
hoc exiguom {dc, ad Att. xii. 18. 1), that long period, when
1 shall no m^ore exist, has mjore influence with m/e than the
present short span.
Cum inde &beot, iam tum ino^perat Turba int^r eos (Ter. E. iv.
4. 68), when Icam/e away, there had already comm>enced a row
between them.
Iam &ddicta atque abdiicta erat, quom ad p6rtum uenio {Plaut.
Merc. III. 4. 31), she had already been knocked down {by the
auctioneer) and carried off, when I got to the harbour,
f. When, where the time or circumstances are first defined, and
then follows quum with an indicative verb, which is in substance
the main verb of the sentence : as,
LSgebam tuas littSras, quum mihi Spist^ afferttir & leptS.,
circumuallatum essS pompSium {Cic. ad Att. ix. 12. 1), /
was in the act of reading your letter, when behold despatches
* This reading, not insinuauerint, is justified by the Mss. and required
by the idiom of the language. It is one of many such passages corrupted
by editors. See Madvig ad Cic. de Fin. v. 15 ; and above § 1159.
t A present with the power of an aorist seems to have been the idiom
of the language in phrases of this kind. Compare in this same play re-
spkno (II. 3. 50), aduenio (ii. 3. 53), perit (iii. 3. 16). See also § 458.
408
are bnmgkl me from Leptay eiating that Pampey was com-
pletdy blockaded.
OommMom ad te d^^ram littSras, cam ad mS diSn^os fiiit
{dc, ad Att. X. 16. 1), J had only thai moment serU off a letter
to yoUy iffhen Dumysius made his appeanmce here*',
g. It is used to express a long period down to the present in-
dusiye : as,
H&nc domnm lam mMtos annos M qnom possideo 4t oolo
{PJavi. AuL prol. 3), ikie hcmee I have occupied and taken
care cf these many years,
Mnlti annl sont cam ille In aerS meo est (Cie. ad Fam. xy.
14. 1), it is now many years that that man has been in my
debt.
Quia s^ptem menses s6nt, quom in hasoe aedis pedem Kemo
intro tetulit {Plavl, Most. ii. 2.39), heooHsefor the last seven
moTUhs not a sotd has set foot in this hotise,
h. With two indicative verbs in the same tense, it expresses
identity of action as well as identity of time (when the best trans-
lation is by the preposition in): as,
Quae quum t&ces, nulla essS concSdXs {Oic. p. Rose. Am. 19. 54),
in the very fact that you say nothing dhvat these matters, you
acknowledge that they amount to nothing^
PraeclSrS f&cis quum puSrum dlUgls {Cic. de Fin. m. 2. 9), you
act a most nolle part in thus loving the child.
Ldco ills mottis est cum est ex uibS dSpulsiis {Cic. in Cat. ii.
1.1), in driving him otU of BrnM, we didodged him from his
(military) position,
i. When used as an equivalent for quSd, it has an indicative :
Gr9.ttQor tlbi quum tantum u&lSs &piid eum {Cic. ad Fam. ix.
14. 3), / congratulate you on yov/r having such influence toith
him,
j. Quum^ since, as, although, used to denote a reasonf for or
against, requires the subjunctive. Thus,
* Literally * at my bouse.* See § 1 161.
f The text of Cicero, particularly in the sixth and Allowing books of
the miscellaneous letters, has often quum or quanth where the best Mss.
hare the more correct reading quonkuny yiz. where a reason is given and
an indicative mood follows. See WumLer^i V. h, ex codice Brfuitensi,
pxM£ p. 97 &IC. See also § 1229.
QTTH. YBBO. 409
Qui cum UD& d5in9 iam c&pl non possint, In Slias dSmos exeunt
{Cic, de Off. 1. 17. 54), and cu at last they cauTiot all he con-
tained in one house, they move off into other houses.
Druentift quum fiquae uim uehat ingentem, non t&men n&uium
p&tiens est (Jjiv, zxi. 31), the Durancey although it carrieB
with it a tremendous volume of water, still is not able tofioaJt
ships*
1r, Quum followed by tum^ unites two clauses, the first of
which deals with what is general, or common, or old, while the
latter opposes to it that which is special, or strange, or new.
Hence the turn is often accompanied by emphatic adverbs, such
as maxilmS, imprimis, u6ro, <kc. In this construction sometimes
the subjunctive mood, more commonly the indicative, follows
quum. Kot unfrequently the quum is used without any verb of
its own. Thus,
Quum plurtimas commddXtfttes UmldtiS. contlneat, tum ill&
praestat omnlbiis (Cic, de Am. 7. 23), among the very many
advantages which friendship possesses, the most important of
aU is this.
Quum ipsam cognltionem iurls augilril cons^ul cilpio, tum
merciile tuis stildils ergS. m6 dslectfir (Cic. ad Fam. iii.
9. 3), at the same time that I am eager to acquire a knowledge
of th^ augural law for its own sake, I am upon my word
charmed vnth your zeal in my f avow.
Quos Sgo s&iS,tores uldl, qui S,cerriimS cum cStSrS., tum hoc
Iter pompei ultilpSrfirent (Cic. ad Att. vii. 5. 4), what sena-
tors have I seen most fiercely attacking every thing that had
been done, hut above all this march of Pompey^s 1
1456 YSrd always gives great emphasis to the word before it. Its
chief uses are as follows : —
a. Added to Snim indeed^ giving it greater power : as,
Enimu6ro daue nil locist segnitiae nee soc6rdiae (Ter. And. i.
3. 1), indeed, indeed, friend Davus, there is no room now for
doth or stupidity.
h. In answering questionst emphatically, in which case it com-
monly follows either the verb or a personal pronoun which stands
first in a sentence. Thus,
* See § 1231. f See §§ 578, 586, 1079, 1427.
410 BTITFAX.
Eg5 aSro &ptiliam pri^ (Cic, ad Att. x. 7.1), yes, my friend^
you are right ; 1 do approve cf Apulia {as the jdacefor you
to go to),
e» It is particularly used after the pronoun i- or eo-, as also
after the particles of time, turn, iibi, iit, to introduce the end of a
cUmax, then beyond all mistake, then with a vengeance : as,
Hoc sSn&tuI curam inisdt n6 turn uer5 sustlnerl sSdltiS non
posset (Liv, Y. 7), this filed ike senate with dUtrm lest their
last hope should now be destroyed^ and the sedition should be
indeed past resistance.
y t u6r0^ niimld&s insSquentQs &quam ingresid sunt, turn rlgSre
omnibus corp5r& {Liv. xxi. 54), but the moment that, in pur-
suit of the Numidians, they entered the water ^ then, beyond all
mistake the bodies of all the men became numbed with cold.
Id uSro Xta accendit &nlmOs ut p& omnS fiLs atquS nSfsBis s8cn-
turl uindXcem llbert&tis uid6rent&r {Liv, yi. 14), this indeed
completed their indignation, enraging them to such a degree
that they seemed ready to follow the asiertor of tlteir liberties
even to the violation of every divine and human law,
d. As a connecting particle it may be translated by hut; yet
some words should always be inserted to express the importance
of the matter added : as,
Gertior feictiis est ttls iam copi&rum partis heluStios transdux-
issS, quartam uSrO partem cltrfi flumen rSUquam essS {Goes,
B. G. I. 12), he received information that the Hdvetii had
conveyed over three parts of their forces, but thai the fourth
part fortunatdy was stUl on his side of the river.
1457 Vtf is translated by that or to, as, how, when, <&o. Its con-
structions are as follows :
a. That, to, to express an object (always with an imperfect sub-
junctiYe)!)! : as,
* Observe that the full translation of uero after ut or ubi is not given
until the apodons as it is called of the sentence. To understand the force
of uero in this passage, it should be known that the Roman troops had
come out of their camp without sufficient clothing, without breakfast, in
a winter-day amid snow and wind.
f F/ is in origin only another form of quod. The difference in form
IB explained by the several changes which have occurred in illud and iUut,
in qumus and cuius, in eubi and ubL
t See § 1179.
YE&O. VT. 411
Ab &r&,tro ab(liix6rant cincinii&tum, ut dictS>tdr esset {Cic, de
Fin. II. 4. 12), they took Oincinnaius fr<mi the plough^ that he
might he dictator,
SSd (Ut &d e& quae comuncti5r& r6bus tuis sunt r8uort&r) {Cic,
ad Fam. i. 8. 5), hut (to return to what is more do%dy con-
nected with yottr afairs*).
Vt te omnes di deaequQ p^rduint (Ter, Haut. iv. 6. 6), oh that
all the gods and goddesses Tcotdd destroy thee !
Hos IftbOres timeo ut sustlneSLs (fiic. ad Fam. xiy. 2. 3)^ these
lahowrs lam afraid you wiU not support.
h. That, so that, to, so as to, to express a result (always with a
8ubjunctive)t : as,
Sol ecddit tLt omni& flOreant {Cic. K. D. ii. 15.41), the sun
causes every thing to liossom.
Siclliam tt& uexftuit iit e& restltui In antloum st&tum nuUO
mddO possit {dc. i. Yerr. 4. 12), he has harassed Sicily to
such a degree that it cannot hy any meaiis he restored to its
former condition.
c. Thaty in the sense oi granting that, even allowing that, al-
ihoughX, in which case it commonly begins the sentence (still with
a subjunctive) : as,
S§d iit fuSris dignior, non compStlt^r in culpast {Cic. p. Plane.
4. 10), hut even allowing you were the more worthy of the tivo,
it is not your competitor who is in fault.
Verum tLt hoc non sit, praeclS.rum spect&ctQum mihi prdponO
{Cic. ad Att. ii. 15. 2), hut even supposing this is not so, I
promise mysdf a glorious sight.
d. That, to think that, the idea of .' in elliptical phrases of
indignation or ridicule§ : as,
P&tSr tit SbessS Mi5 dsbeat I {Cic. p. Plane. 13. 31), the idea of
a father heing hound to damage his son /
e. In explanation of some preceding word, namdy (still with a
subjunctive): as,
Qudd ipsi diebus uiginti aegerrlmS conf^Srant, ut flumen
translrent, ille UnO die f^cSrat {Caes. B. Q. i. 13), w?iat they
themselves had completed with the greatest difficulty in twenty
♦ See § 1227 g. t See §$ 1182, 1187.
% See § 1227 h, § See $ 1227 e.
412 SYNTAX.
dai/9^ fiamdy the passage of the river, the other had done in a
single day,
/. How (with an indicatiye in direct, a subjunotive commonly
in indirect sentences) : as,
Vt u&les ? {Plata. Most. III. 2. 29) how do you dof
Audisti ut me circumstStSrint (Oic, ad Att. 1. 16. 4)^ you heard
how they planted themsdves round me,
g, Asy to express similarity, often with sic or lt& so to corre-
spond with it. An indicatiye is required in this and all the fol-
lowing constructions. Thus,
It& est, ut scrlbXs* {Cic. ad Att. vii. 8. 1), it is as you say.
Ips8 rex, sic ut sompno exclttls Srat, sSmlnudus fd:glt {Liv.
xxiY. 40), the king himself y just as he was when roused from
deepy with but half his clothes on, runs off.
H5mo Ut Srat ftLriSsus respondit {Cic. p. Rose. Am. 12. 33), the
fdlow with his usual madness replied,
Illi, Ut est hSmlnum gSnus suspIciOsum, hoc arbltrantiir {Cic,
in Gaecil. 9. 28), tli^se {Sicilians), with that readiness to sus-
pect which characterises their nation, hold this opinion,
h, Asy to judge from what . Thus,
Vt st&m rem uideo, stiusf obsatur^bere {Ter. Haut. ly. 8. 29),
to judge from what I see of that business of yours, you wiU
have yourflU of it,
»• As was to be expected . Thus,
Vt &b Ir&tO uictorS {Liv, xxi. 12), as might be expected from an
angry cont^ueror.
j. As, so far as ispossvUe, making allowance for (in ellip-
tical phrases, no yerb following the conjunctiout). Thus,
Multum ut temp5rlbiis iUis u&luit dicendO {Cic. Brut. 7. 27),
he had great power in oratory, making allowance for those
times.
Non nihil iit in tantis m^ls est profectum {Cic. ad Fam. xn.
* Literally ' write,' the extract being from a letter in answer to one
fh>m Atticus.
t See § 288, note.
% Some such phrase as Jieri potest understood. This construction
must be carefully distinguished from another elliptical use of ti^ withySm
Molet understood, ' as naturally happens.* See Heindorf ad Hot, Sat i.
s80.
YT. 413
2. 2), some prcgren hou been nuxde, eonnderin^ the very bad
ttaie of affairs.
k. To express contrast, rather than similarity, when the ilt and
It& may be translated by though^ yet. Thus,
Yt ISous prScul mflrO s&tls aectts Sgendis ulneis fait, Ita baud-
qu&quam prospSrS, postquam &d effectum dpSris aentumst,
coeptis succedebat {Liv, xxi. 7), althovgh the ground at a
distance from the wall was sufficierUly levdfor brinying up
the vinecBy yet when they came to the actual employmerU of
them^ no success whatever attended their efforts,
I, As applied to time, tit commonly signifies immediate succes-
sion, the instant that, and is most frequently followed by the aorist
of the indicative : as,
FtLg& s&tellXtum, ut i¢em uldSrS regem, factast (Liv. xxit.
7), a flight among the guards took place the m^yment they saw
the king lying on the ground,
m. It is also used to denote the point from which a period of
time commences, but with the same notion of immediate succes-
sion, /ram the very moment that : as,
Yt c&tlllna ertlpit ex urbS, semper u^^ftul {Cic, in Oat. iii.
1. 3) f from the very moment that Catiline sallied from Bomey
I have ever been on the watch.
Yt &b urb^ discessi, nullum &dh1ic intermlfil diem, quin &11-
quid ad te litt6r&rum dftrem (Cic, ad Att. yii. 15), from the
time of my leaving the dty, I have never yet aUotoed a single
day topass^ without sending you something in the way of a
letter,
Yt primum fSrum attYgl, spect&ul sempSr ut tibi possem quam
maxUme essS coniunctiis {flic, ad Fam. y. 8. 3), from my
fw^ setting foot in the forum to the present honir I have ever
made it an o(>ject to be as dosdy as possible united with you,*
1458 ORDER OF WORDS.
In the simplest form of sentence, viz. one which denotes an
action^ the common order is the nominative, the accusative, the
* Other examples are : «/ setnel etnigrauimu* {Plaut. Most. ii. 2. 39),
uwrem ut duxit {Ter. Hec y. 1.25), ut uenit (Ilor. Sat. u. 2. 128), ut
teHgi {Ov. Trist. xii. 8. 27).
ir V 2
414 BTNTAX.
^rb ; «. e, first the quarter whence the action proceeds, then the
direction of that action, lastly the action itself. Any words be-
longing to the nominatiye and accusative commonly follow them,
while those belonging to the verb commonly precede it. The lat-
ter consist of adverbs or adverbial phrases which express the time,
maimer, means, and generally the attending circumstances..
1459 But as the grammatical connection between Latin words is
expressed in the terminations of those words, a greater freedom
of position is admissible than would be practicable without am-
biguity in English. Hence the words of a Latin sentence are
commonly placed with a view to marking their relative import-
ance and emphasis,* and on this principle must the arrangement
of the Latin sentence be studied.
1460 The most conspicuous place in a sentence or clause of a sen-
tence is the first. Hence this place is allotted to an emphatic
word. Thus, Caasar's QaUic war properly begins with the word
OaUia, Again, in the seventh chapter there occurs a sentence
beginning with Caesar^f because the preceding paragraph spoke
I only- of what the other party, the Helvetii, were doing. Hence a
sentence thus beginning with the nominative of a proper name
should have some such words tta onthe other hand, meanwhile, &c.
inserted after the nominative, to give it a sufficient prominence in
I English.
1461 A still greater emphasis is given to other wordst when placed
at the commencement of a sentence, because the very inversion of
the ordinary order draws the greater attention to them : as,
Susceptum§ cum s&guntlnis helium, h&bendum cum rdm&nis
est (Idv, XXI. 10), we began the war lotth Sa^untum, we must
conduct it against Rome.
* Emphasis always implies an opposition to some other word ex-
pressed or understood ; and the student would do well in each case to ask
himself what the opposed word or notion is.
f See also the sentences beginning with Dttmnorix^ c. 9 ; HelfteHiy
c. 11; Cciesar^ c. 18; or ZAv. xxi. c. 3, Hanno; c. 6, Hannibal ; c. 7 y Han-
nibal; c. WySaguntini.
X See the examples in interrogative sentences, § 1417. See also the
position of the verb in cases of concession, §§ 1156, 1227 6, and in hypo-
thetical conditions, § 1219 ; also § 1436 b^ third example.
I Still sutoeptum in the Latin is only a participle ; but the Engliih
uislation would lose its force if the sentence began with * the war.*
OBDBB Ol* WORDS. 415
1 462 The word est^, commonly the most unimportant word in a sen-
tence, acquires a strong accent when placed first in a sentence or
clause (see $ 1080, 1st example ; $ 997, 3d example) ; but est and
Srat are also found in the first place when a formal narrative or
description commencest : as,
Erant In eft ISgiOud fortisslml ulrl centiiriOnes qui &c. {Cae8»
B. G. y. 44), now there happened to be in that legion two very
brave officers ^ with the rank of centurions, who <&c.l
Est in sScessfl loogd IdctLs <fec. ( Virg. A. i. 163), there is in a
deep recess a place So.
1463 Relatives, interrogatives, and conjunctions naturally occupy the
first place in their several clausea If they give up this place to
another word, the strangenes8§ of the transposition gives unusual
emphasis to the word thus occupying the first place : as,
Nos tlia progenies, caell quibus ^dnuis &rcem {Virg, A. i.
25411), we^ thine own progeny, to whom thou promisest the
height of heaven.
Adeon rem rSdissd, p&trem Ht extlmescam (Ter, Ph. 1. 3. 1), to
Mnk that matters should be come to this^ that a ffither should
be the object of my dread I
Posth&c si quidquam, nil precor {^er. Ph. 1. 2. 92), if aught
occur hereaft^, 1 offer no prayer {for him),
Bgo illlus ferrS possum magnXfIc& uerba, YerbH dum sunt {Ter,
E. IT. 6. 3), / can bear that fdlow*9 grand words, so long as
they are mere words.
* Thus in Greelc, cvri, generally an enclitic, has an accent when it
commences a sentence.
f The monosyllabic verbs datt/itt tVjSeem at times to occupy the first
place when not emphatic. Possibly their very brevity is a reason ibr
giving them this advantage, lest they be wholly overlooked. See a parallel
case m § 1469, note §.
t See also i. 6, Erant f iii. 12, Erant 8tc. ; v. 6, Brat; v. 25, Erat
&c; VI. 38, Brat. See also Virg. A, ii. 21.
§ This doctrine of emphasis growing out of a strange position is well
exemplified in the heroic verse. The most natural place for a sentence
to begin is at the beginning of a verse. But there occur passages where
a sentence begins in the sixth foot ; and in such cases the isolated word
is always specially emphatic in good writers. See Bentley ad Ltican, i.
281, and Journal of Education, iv. 356. Perhaps too, when a sentence
terminates with a word in the first foot of a line, that equally isolated
word should be one of importance.
II Compare also v. 1, Troiai qui &c.; 392, Tpridm qui &c.; atid in.
158, inffhu cut &c.
416 8T1ITAX.
1464 It should be recollected that there are many actual pauses in
a sentence where the printer inserts not even a comma. The
word which follows such a pause must, for the purposes of em-
phasis, be considered a commencing word"*^.
1465 It must be recollected too that many little words, as tit, 81, 8t,
nte, s^, n9, nOnt, &n, quamt, and the prepositions, are at times
proclitics§, that is, pronounced with the word which follows them,
BO that they must not be deemed to be first words to the exclusion
of the following word.
1406 The last place in a sentence is often an emphatic one : as.
Qui hSnos post condltam banc urbem h&bltust tdgato antS m6
nSmlnl (Cic. Phil. ii. 6. 13), an honour whick since thefoury-
dation of this city was never paid to any one wearing a toga
he/ore me.
AliiLd Xt^r h&bebant nullum {Caes, B. G. i. 7), other road tkeg
had none.
AptLd heluStios longS ditissXmus fuit orgStSrix (Coe*. B. G. i.
2), among the Hdvetii hyfar the richest man was Orgetorix,
Nam ex his pra6diis tal^nta argenti bina Oapi6bat statim {Ter.
Ph. V. 3. 6), for from these farms he received two talents of
silver every year invariahly.
AnXmos uestros tempt&bunt semper, ulres nOn expSrienttur
(Liv. IT. 5), your courage and yourfedings they wUl attempt
to master, aye without intermission; of your actual strength
they wiU make no trial,
1467 It has been stated that the ordinary place of a verb is at the
end, and that it is emphatic at the beginning of a sentence. When
placed elsewhere it has the power of making the preceding word
or words emphatic|| : as,
* Thus in the ordinary hexameter there is frequently a pause after
the first two feet and a half, which is followed by an emphatic word: aa
in Virg. Buc. x. 73,—
Gdllo, cHius amor tantdm mihi oreseit in h6rat,
Qy4nium vere nouo uiridis se a^bioit dlnus; —
where uirxdit means * with the sap flowing freely,' not ' green.'
t See § 1404. U
X In the Mss. these little words are very often, if not generally, writtea
in immediate connection with the following word.
§ See § 28.
II The reason of this appears to be, that the predicate of a sentence l»
OBDEB or W0BP8. 417
S%untain uairi circumddent exercItOs : mox karthcUftnem
circumsldebunt r5m&nae ISgidnSs (Idv, xxi. 10), SoffurUum
18 besieged by your armies : ere long Oarthage will he besieged
by tkelegione of Borne,
Ytlnam pr5 dScSrS tantom et non prO s&late easet cert&mSn
{Liv, XXI. 41), ok that the struggle had been one for glory
(mty and not for existence.
y t seruemXnl desf*^ uObis ftnlmos % Quid, si mdriendum prd
pS.tria esset, f&cSretXs ? {Liv, xxii. 60) when the object is to
save yoiirselveSf does your courage run low f What then wordd
you have doney if you had had to die for your country f
Prius semprOnid per cluium agmen quam pdr ho8ti4int fuit
erumpendum {Liv, xxii. 60), Sempronius had to force a
passage through the ranks of his own courUrymen before J*^
forced one through those of the enemy,
1468 Sometimes the word thus placed before the yerb is not itself
so emphatic as the word with which it is intimately connected,
and which then stands at the end of the sentence : as,
Qeta, Prouinciam cepisti duram {Ter, Ph. i. 2.22), oh Qeta,
the duty you undertook was a hard one,
Maecenas &t&uls edltS rSglbus {Hor, Od. i. 1. 1),
McBcenas sprung of royal line,
1469 An adjective!]: or dependent genitive, if emphatic, commonly
precedes its substantive ; whereas when not emphatic, it com-
monly follows§. Thus,
Saepe et contempttLs hostis cruentum cert&mSn Sdldit, St in-
clitl pSptlll rSgesquS perlSul mdmentd uicti sunt {Liv. xxi.
commonly the more emphatic part, and that the verb is commonly the
chief part of the predicate. Observe too that a participle in its own clause
has the same influence.
* So generally in Mss., not deest,
t The comma usually inserted after hostium is inadmissible, as the
fuit should be pronounced almost as thoug;h it were attached to it like an
enclitic.
X In the phrase tuom offiehtm faeere ' to do your duty/ it would at
first seem that tuom has no title to the emphatic position which it com-
monly, though not always occupies in this phrase ; but the answer is, that
qfficium {^opi/icium) originally meant not * duty,' but * work,' so that the
phrase literally translated is, * to do your own work, not another person^.*
§ When a substantive is very short compared to its adjective!^ the
former commonly precedes, as aes alienunij resfamiliaris.
418 SYNTAX.
43), if a despised /<» has often maintained a bloody contetty
not less often have renowned staUs and monardu been con-
quered by the slightest blow.
Pulchrum £rit camp&nl, rOmftnum imp^rium uestA fide, ues-
tris ulrlbus rStentnm essS (Liv. xziii. 5), it wiU be a proud
reflection, men of Capua, Ouxt the empire ^Rome herself wa»
saved from faUing by your flddiiy, by joux power*
1470 A still stronger emphasis belongs to the adjective or dependent
genitive when it throws* as it were its substantive to the end of
the sentencet : as,
Ds qud quum dispiit&rem, tuam mihi d&n uellem cotta Ql6~
quentiam (Cic, N. D. ii. 59. 147), in discussing which I
shotdd have wished your doguence, Cotta, to have been given
tome.
Hoc tibi iHuentus rdm&na indlclmus bellum {Liv, ii. 12), such
the war which we, the youth of Rome, dedare against you.
Bonds me absente hie c6ufeci8tis ntiptias (Ter, Ph. ii. 1.28), a
pretty marriage you have knocked up here in my absence,
E quibiis Qniis &uet quoMls aspergSrS cunctos, PraetSr eum qui
praebSt, &qu& {Hor, Sat. i. 4. 87), one of whom ddighis to
sprinkle vdth any {the dirtiest) water aU save him who acts
purveyor,
"S^o cum huiusmodi tisus uenit iit conflictar^s malo {Ter, Ph.
III. 3 21), and have never been called upon to struggle with a
misery of this kind,
Kam per Hv^ unam, ut a^dio, aut oiuam aiit moriar sent^n-
tiam {Ter, Ph. iii. 1. 10), for on his one vote ii depends, I
hear, whether lam to live or die,
1470. 1 And generally any qualifying word may in this way be sepa-
rated from the word qualified : as,
ltd patrem adolesc^ntes &cta haec t61erare audi6 uiolenter
{Ter, Ph. v. 1.4), so very furiously is the young man^s father
offended with these proceedings,
* This wide separation of the adjective and substantive would cause
confbsion, but that the great emphasis of the adjective causes it still to
be ringing in the ear when we come to the substantive.
f Compare in the first book of the Aeneid, v. 647, patrius amor, rapt-
dum Achaten ; v. 661 , noua eonsilia ; v. 673, nottro dolore; v. 675, Iwuh
nto hospitia ; v. 679, magno amore ; v. 680, nostram mentem ; v. 688,
notot uoliut.
OKDBB OV W0BD8. 419
1471 The demonstrative pronoans, and the logical pronoun i-or eo-,
commonly occupying the place before the substantive, appear to
acquire a special emphasis when placed after it : as,
Te appi tuumquS cftput sanguine h5c cons^rd {Liv, iii. 48),
the^ ApptttSf and thy head with this Uood 1 devote,
1471. 1 Numerals are often placed at the end of a sentence or clause.*
Gallia est omnis diulsa in partis tns {Goes, B. G. 1. 1), OaUia
as a whole is divided iiUo three parts,
1472 Nouns in apposition and the genitive commonly follow the
substantive to which they belong, and therefore have an emphasis
when prefixed to the substantive : as,
Ynl constUi serulliG ius fiiit dlcendl dict&torls {Liv. xxii. 31),
to ServUitis alone^ as consul, belonged the power to name a
dictator,
S^ lt& forsltan dScuit cum foedSrum ruptOrS dtice ac pSptUd
de5s ipsos committSre ac prSfligarS helium, nos qui secun-
dum deos uiSlatl stLmus, commissum ac profllg&tum confl-
cSrS {Liv, XXI. 40), but perhaps it was fitting that, with a
general and a people who habitually violate treaties, the gods
themselves should commence the war and break the neck of ift,
and that we who ivext to th^ gods have been injured shovldthen
come in and finish it,
F&bius patens uir, quum inter sul corporis hSmlnes, tum Stiam
ad plsbem {Liv. vi. 34), Fabitis, a man of influence not
merely among the m^en of his own bodyXy but also with the
comm/ynalty,
1473 As an emphatic word demands a large share of the attention,
it tends to prevent the mind from dweUing on the word or words
which follow. Hence as the first place in a sentence or clause is
allotted to emphatic words, so the second place is adapted to un-
important words§, which are inserted here although unconnected
with the adjoining words : as,
* A habit borrowed probably firom the form of accounts, where the
numbers are placed at the end of the lines in a vertical column for the
convenience of addition.
f Literally ' to give the knock-down blow which ail-but finishes.*
X ue, class or order.
§ Such words should be read most faintly, so as not to attract atten-
tion.
490 STITTAX*
I&nii& se ac p&riStYbus tezit (Cie, p. Mil 7. 18), he protected
hinudf behind the gate and the waUs of his hoiue.
An huitis ill6 ISgU mentiSnem f&oSre ausiis esset? (Cic. p.
MIL 12. 33) or wotdd he have dared to make mention qf this
lawf
Huno illi 6 n3.ui Sgressum comprehendSrant atque in uincill&
couiScSrant {Caes. B. G. iv. 27), this man had no sooner die-
emharhed than they had seised him and thrown him into
prison,
Magniis ^i niimgrus pSc^ris rSperttls est {Caes. B. G. y. 21), a
great mtmber of sheep was found there.
Magnam haeo res caes&l difflcult&tem adfSrSbat {Caes. B. G.
Yii. 10), no litde diffi>culty did this occasion to Casar,
B&istes autem si s&tis firmos stl^tSris, si te n^uS collSgae uS.n&
glGri& nSquS tii& £klsa in&mi& mduSrit {Liv, xxii. 39), afid
resist him yoa wiH^ if you stand firm enough^ if — nor your
colleague's empty glory ^ nor your own iU-founded disgrace
affect you,
YnO di^ intermissS galli, atque hoc sp&tiS magn5 crSitium nil-
mSro effects, m6di& nocte ad munltiones acoSdunt {Caes.
B. G. VII. 81), having allowed one day to pass {without any
attack), and having in this interval made up a great quantity
of hurdles, at midnight the Oauls guieUy advance to the lines.*
Quos sXbi caes&rf obl&tos gS.uIsus r^tlnerl iussit {Caes. B. G.
IT. 13), delighted that these men should he thrown in his way,
Ccesar ordered them, to he detained^*
1474 It is because of their enclitic character§ that autem, quidem,
qu0quS, &c. never occupy the first place in a clause or sentence.
Iglt&*, Snim, u6ro, are occasioDally found at the beginning, and
* Many editors would place a comma before Gallic thus giving it an
importance it does not deserve. It is in fact a sort of enclitic, and should
appear in the English translation in the least prominent place. Similarly
a comma should follow, not precede the word Caesar or Gulba in the first
line of the following chapters, — B. G. ii. 2, ii. 7; iii. 3, iii. 28 ; it. 6,
IV. 13, IV. 20; V. 7, V. 11.
f Here both sibi and Caesar have the nature of enclitics.
X For the enclitical position of a word which refers equally to two
words or to two clauses, see § 1438 b and e.
§ The vocative when in the first place is of course emphatic Other-
wise it is commonly an enclitic, and should be thrown in after an em-
phatic word.
OBDBR OV WOBBB. 421
then haye more importance than when they occupy their more
ordinary place after the first word.
1475 In short**^ sentences, words which are opposed to one another
are either brought close together, or placed as far apart as possible,
in the latter ease occupying the two emphatic positions of first
and last.
Host!s hostem ocddSrS u^lul {Liv, ii. 12), / unshed to dat/ the
enemy of my country,
Hosp6s necauit h6spitem {PlatU, Most. ii. 2. 48), he strangled
one who wets his own guest.
Cum h&nc sibi uidebit pr^iesens praesentem 4ripi {Ter. Ad. it.
5, 34), when he shaU see her torn from him before his very face.
B&tiO nostril consentit, pugnat drfitid {Cic, de Fin. iii. 3. 10),
our principles agreey our language is at variance.
K8c ad mortem miniis &nXmi est, quam fait ad caedem (Liv,
II. 12), nor have I less courage to die myself , than I had hut
now to slay another.
Mihi mSgis littSrae sunt exspectandae & t6, quam & mS tibi
(Cic, ad Fam. ix. 10), I have a letter right to expect a letter
from you, than you from me.
1476 When two clauses opposed to one another contain the same
word in different cases or tenses, that common word usually pre-
cedes the words opposed.
Si cluis uester, sictit ad pdcem p&endam uSnit, Wj&pdcis condt-
cidnes rettiilisset, stiperu&c9jieum hoc mihi fuisset ItSr (Liv.
XXI. 13), if your countryman, who came to ask for peace^ Iiad
in the sarne patriotic spirit reported the terms of that peace,
this visit wovld have been superfluous for m£.
Yinc^rS scis, uictOria dtl nescis (Liv, xxii. 51), how to gain a
victory, you know ; how to use a victory, you do not know,
* See § 1436 b note, and § 1437.
00
APPENDIX I.
ON THE CRUDE-FORM VIEW OF LANGUAGE, ITS TRUTH AND ITS
PRACTICAL ADVANTAGES.*
As the very phrase * crude form' is yet strange to the ears of most
scholars, it may be useful to explain what is meant by it ; to es-
tablish the truth of the new system ; and to show the practical
advantages which it offers even for elementary instruction.
In the first place, it may be noted, if only to conciliate the
attention of readers, that upon the system of crude forms every
Sanskrit grammar is constructed.
" Inflection*', says Professor Wilson (§ 48 of his Grammar^ 2d
ed.), ^* whether of declension or conjugation, is contrived by the
Sanskrit grammarians on the same principle. It consists of two
parts : 1, the an^a, ' body,' or inflective base, that is the word
itself; and 2, of certain particles, which, being attached to the
base, complete the inflected word". He goes on to say, at the
latter part of § 51, *^ there is but one general declension in Sans-
krit grammar" ; and though it is convenient to divide nouns into
classes, yet even then, he adds, " no arrangement admits of more
ready reference than that which classes them according to their
final letters."
Again, in § 167, he founds the system of conjugation on the
dhatUy or * crude verb ;* observing also, in § 171, that '* the verb
in its inflected form is composed of two elements : 1, the angay or
^ base,' the modified verb to which the inflections are subjoined ;
and 2, certain letters or syllables which constitute the inflectional
terminations, and are subjoined to the base."
The exhibition of the Greekf and Latin languages upon the
* Chiefly reprinted from the Engliih Journal qf Eduoation (Bell),
New Series, Nob. 48 and 50 (Dec. 1850 and Feb. 1851).
t See the ElemenU of Greek Qrammar by Joseph G. Greenwood, Eaq.,
now Principal of Owen's College, Manchester.
ON THB OBUDB FOBM. 423
crude-form system is in perfect accordance with the passages we
here quote from Professor Wilson's Grammar, and with the remarks
of Bopp in his Vergleichende Orammatik, § 112, Ac.
The first proposal in print to apply the principle to the analysis
of the classical languages was made by the present writer in a re-
view of Zumpt's Latin Grammar in the first Number of the Journal
of Editcationy published by the Society for the Diffusion of Useful
Knowledge in 1830 (pp. 98-100 and 105). The system had been
previously expounded in the classical lecture-rooms of the Univer-
sity of London (now University College).*
In endeavouring to give a more distinct exposition of the sys-
tem of crude forms, we shall, for the sake of brevity, for the most
part limit our observations to the Latin language.
In the ordinary grammars it is the practice to start from the
nominative of a noun, and from the infinitive or first person of
the present indicative of a verb. Now the nominative of a noun
is something more than the naked word, as it also expresses a
certain relation to the sentence. So again, the first person of a
verb includes in its termination a representative of the pronoun
' r. The infinitive mood in like manner presents to us a suffix,
by means of which the notion of the verb is expressed in the form
of an abstract substantive. Thus, in eveiy one of these three
cases we have some foreign matter, so to say, added to the pure
metal. *
Now the principle of the crude-form system is to get rid of
this foreign matter, and thus to exhibit the simplest form of a
word, or, as Bopp expresses it, die Orundformy die nackte Wort-
gestalt But it would be thought a false step to introduce that
which, though in a certaia sense more true and more philosophical,
would involve a complicated process of analysis. To such an ob-
jection the supporters of the crude-form system answer, that their
principles are not only true, but at the same time are recommended
by extreme simplicity. Thus they affirm, with Professor Wilson,
that on the crude-form system there is at bottom but one declen-
sion and but one conjugation ; and if for some purposes it is still
* In the year 1836 was published the Bromsgrove Laiin Grammar
by the Rev. G. A. Jacob, M.A. (late Scholar and Tutor of Worcester
College, Oxford) ; which is drawn-up in a great measure, but far from
uniformly, upon the crude- form system. Mr. Jacob subsequently pub-
lished a Greek Grammar upon the same plan.
424 APFBNBIZ I.
conyenient to divide nouns and verbs into classes, these classes
depend upon one simple and unvaiying rule, viz. the character-
istic or last letter.
But examples will best explain what is meant. In the fourth
declension, that oigradu% for example, the same letters down to
the vowel v, inclusive, appear in every case both of the singular
and plural, except in the dative and ablative of the latter, and the
doubt which this one exception might suggest is removed by the
occurrence of such forms as veruHm^y acuJlmi, From the fact of the
five letters grodu being thus common to all the inflected forms, it
becomes to some extent probable that the several ideas of number
and case are distinguished by the letters which follow j^rotft^. Si-
milarly in the fifth declension, diu for example, the three letters
die^ being constant, tend to a similar conclusion. In the third
declension, nouns such as turrU^ auUy differ much in several of
the case-endings from rex, komOy aestas. The former exhibit an i
in nearly eveiy case ; for we have turrim in the ace. singular, and
turrU, auiSy as well as turres, aues in the ace. plural ; turriy aui^
as well as turre, aue in the abl. sing. Nay, even a plural nom.
such as turru is well established as an archaic variety. Thus an %
presents itself in every case of both numbers. On the other hand,
we never meet with an ace. r<;ym, nor with such plural cases as
regis or regium. Under these circumstances there are strong rea-
sons for separating the consideration of such words as rex from
those nouns which have a nominative in is. Looking then, in
the first instance, to turris as an example of a class, we find turri
in every case. To proceed : in the nouns of the first declension,
as musay an a is traceable through every case of both numbers, if
we include in our view such datives as equahusy duahuSy amhabusy
and the Greek forms fiovacusy &c.
In the nouns so far discussed, the parts common to every case
are gradu, die, tttrri, musa ; and so we have come across classes
which end in four out of the five Latin vowels. There remains
one declension, the second, and one vowel, viz. o. Now the nouns
of this declension exhibit the vowel in question in the dat. and
abl. of the singular, in the gen. and ace. of the plural, as domino,
dominorum, dominos* The corresponding Greek declension helps
us out in many of the other cases, as bovkos, bovXoto or bovkovy
bnvkovy bovkoiy bovXois, But WO need not depend on the Greek
alone. Cicero also wrote seruos^ seruom^ rather than seruiu, ser-
ON THfi OEUDE VOBH. 425
uum; and so in all words where the ordinary ending of these cases
would give us the combination -v/My -utim. Again, Cicero's geni-
tive of qui was quo-iris, not cuius. So also we may fairly assume
that nvllius with its long i is a contraction of milJUhius, a genitive
which bears a marked affinity in its termination to the Homeric
genitive Xoyoco. We may the more safely assume that nuUius is
only a reduced form of nvUoius, because a long i in Latin often
corresponds to the diphthong oi of the Greek, as in domini (nom.
pi.), chminisy compared in respect of ending to bovKoi, bovkois.
In the nom. pi. Terence wrote Addphoe ; and oloe is said to have
been used as an archaic form for the nom. iUi, At any rate, as
regards the abL pi. Festus says : * abohes dicebant pro ah illis,*
Thus the ang. vocative alone in this declension presents any diffi-
culty. But the change to a short e is seen even in the nom., as
in ille, iste, ipse ; and that the last of these grew out of an old
ipsos is pretty well established by the fact that the old writers
give us a nom. ipsus. In truth, it is nearly a law of the Latin
and other languages, that any short final vowel is soon reduced to
a short e. Thus magisy scnberisy aetatis*, scripserunt, when de-
prived of the final consonants, become at once mageyscribere^aetate,
seripsere. Add to this, that a vowel o is wholly unknown to the
terminations of the other declensions. From all these facts it is
inferred that in the second declension the part essential to the
noun, as opposed to case-endings, terminates in the vowel o.
But we have passed over that portion of the third declension
which differs in the mode of forming the cases from turris. Ex-
amples of such nouns are, if we define them by their nominatives,
rea:, nux, lapis, paries, uirtus, aetas, pater, consul, hiemps, ratio,
homo, puluis, <fec. Upon any grammatical system such words pre-
sent anomalies in the nominative case. In the other, or so-called
oblique cases, the difficulties are few ; and it will be found that
the essential part of these words ends in a consonant, viz. reg-,
nOc-, lapidr, pariH', uirtUt-, aetdt-, ki9mr; and again, j^a^^r-, con-
sul-, ration-, homdn-, puhiis-. The modification or loss of the final
consonant which ensues in the first seven of these nouns on the
addition of an « to form the nominative, is nearly parallel to what
happens in the formation of the perfect tenses, rejd, duad, diuisi,
fm^ stmipsi; and this was to be expected, as the same consonants
* See Grammar, § 909 note.
oo2
426 APPBNDIX I.
are brought into juxtaposition. As regards pvluisy cucumis and
cints, the final s of the nominatives in reality performs a double
office. In other words, pvluias would have been theoretically a
more correct form ; and hence it is that the last syllable of this
nominative is at times found long, as inVirg. Aen. i. 478, et uersa
ptduU ingcribitur hcuta. That the base of pvluis must put in a
claim to an «, is proved by the ^wmxiivrQ pvluUculus as compared
with nauicvlay canicyla^ fraterculua. The oblique cases j^t^tf^r^m,
ptUueris, &c. confirm this, for the syllable er in these words repre-
sents the is of the base, just as ^ in scripserunt corresponds to the
middle syllable is of scripsistiSy and the er of the reflective or pas-
sive scriMr-is to the is of the simple verb scribis. The change of
9 between vowels into r is familiar to every Latin scholar. It
must also be admitted, on consideration, that while i is the vowel
which the idiom of the language prefers before «, a short « is all
but required before r.
The absolute disappearance of the final s in the nominatives
pater^ constUy ratioy homo^ and the loss in addition of a liquid from
the end of the last pair of words, wiU need a fuller discussion, and
shall be considered presently.
Thus fjEir we have dealt only with the declension of nouns. As
regards the verbs, the question is exceedingly simple. No one
will have any difficulty in assigning ama, 7M>7ie, reg^ and avdi^ as
the essential elements in the conjugation of the verbs ama-re^
mone-re, reg-ere, and avdi-re. The only parts of the verb amare
which fail to exhibit an a after the m are the first person amo of
the indicative present, and the whole of the present subjunctive,
amentj &c. But a contraction of qtml-o into amo woidd be per-
fectly parallel to what is seen in the Greek grammar in rtfuxo),
rtfuo ; and the compression of amarom^ amoHiSy ama-at, &o. (which
the analogy of scrib-am, scrHhos, scrU>-aty <Src. would have led us to
expect) into amemy amesy amet, &c. is a matter of no extraordinary
character, considering the intimate connection between a long
vowel e and the simple a. A Greek scholar is of course familiar
with this fact ; and in the Latin perfect eg-i (as compared to the
present ag-o) we seem to have a word which has been contracted
from a perfect of reduplication a-ag-i. In the second conjugation
we should have' been able to trace the vowel e throughout all the
deduced forms, if we had taken for our example any of the verbs
le-rCf ne-rCf de-le-re, or ea;-ple-re, for in these the perfect and so-
OK THE GBUDE FOBH. 427
called supines stiU exhibit an t in the base of the word. And even
among those verbs which commonly form the perfect in -%iy as
m/oneOy kaheoj &c. , the archaic forms, such as Jiahessit, seem to im-
ply an old perfect haheui ; for kabesait must have been a contrac-
tion of habeuesity just as amcuso and amassim are admitted to be
contractions from old forms amatteso and aiTuzttesim, which pre-
ceded amauero and amatterim. Lastly, the conjugation of audi-re
in no single instance fsdls to retain the t.
Thus we reduce the four conjugations to the four heads, of
verbs in a, in e, in consonants, and in i. The question here sug-
gests itself, how is it that there are not six conjugations to corre-
spond to the six declensions ? in other words, what has become of
the conjugations in o and iauF To speak first of the verbs in ^ .*
the class exists, and as examples of it may be taken the verbs
nu-ere^ ph^ere, acit-^e, metu-ere; but the vowel u is rarely subject
to contraction with a following vowel, so that it was found unne-
cessary to separate verbs of this class from those which ended in
a consonant. On the whole however it is perhaps desirable, for
simplicity's sake, to make a u conjugation; and in fact in the
third person of the plural of the present indicative these verbs
have a peculiarity which distinguishes them from such verbs as
reg-ercy scrih-ere; we mean that mauunt and sequurUuTy though
supported by the authority of our grammars and ordinary editions,
are not so legitimate, if manuscripts are to be trusted, as metuont
and secwrUiM^, Secondly, an advantage is gained by the separation
of verbs in u from verbs in a consonant, in the complete analogy
of the perfects col-^%, avdi-ui, ne^i, ama-uif gwMii^ plu-ui, where
we have the same suffix added without distinction to a verb end-
ing in a consonant, and to verbs in all the five vowels, i, e, a, o, u,
Pluuit was the only perfect known to Livy ; and the older writers
generally adopted either the form anrmuit^ or at least annuit with
a long u, thus distinguishing the perfect from the present. But
there still remains a vacancy caused by the non-appearance of a
class of verbs in o. Such vacancy can only be filled by a wretched
remnant of a conjugation. The iormB gno-ui^ gno-Hm {rumi^ tio-
tum)y the participles potus and aegrotusy all point to bases in o,
'viz.gno-,po-y aegro-. The present of the first exhibits a somewhat
fuller form in the so-called inceptive gnosc-o. That there was
once a verb j90- ' drink,' is proved by the substantives po-tionry
pO'Cvlo- (nom. pctioy poculum), by the frequentative po-ta-rcy and
426 APPENDIX I.
by the Greek ttcd-o-co, 7r«rfi>-*ca. Again, a verb aegro-o from the ad-
jective (icgero (nom. aegety aegra, &c.) would be in perfect keeping
with the Greek verb dovXo-6> from the noun bovKa- (nom. bovKos)^
Unfortunately there was a tendency in the Latin language to force
all those verbs which are formed from substantives or adjectives
of the second declension into the first conjugation. Thus fr!Oin
the substantives dcmo-j domino- (nom. don/um^ domintis), and from
the adjectives misefo-y denso- (nom. misery den8U8)y were deduced
the verbs dona-re, domina-riy misera-ri, densa-re. The readiness
which exists in the Latin language to interchange the vowels a
and is well seen in ignora-rey from an adjective ignaro- (nom.
ignanii), while the simple adjective gnaro- (nom. gnarui) is de-
duced from the verb gno- {gnosco or noaco).
The application of the crude-form system to verbs was virtually
adopted in the Latin grammar which was used in the Charter-
House during the headship of the Bev. Dr. Russell, as the three
coiyugations of amarty monere and audire were treated as contract
verbs, arrvao amo, amais amaSy amait amaJty <fec. It has at times
been objected to this view, that a contraction of amaU to amoA
ought to have led to a long vowel in the last syllable of amoA*
The argument is valid, but yet no way damages the theory, for
the syllable was originally long, as indeed is seen in the passive
amaiUTy vMynMuTy audUtir, whereas from regU comes regUur, It is
thus that the old writers, as Plautus, Terence, &c. never hesitate
to treat the third person of a tense as having a final long syllable,
whenever the corresponding vowel is long in the first and second
persons of the plural. Examples may be seen in the ** Prolego-
mena" to Ritschl's Plautus, p. 182, <kc., such as udit, audiU, fU,
solety attinety kahety git, dety fudiy maudlty afflictdt, eget, desiderety
tty lubety though followed in every example he quotes by a word
with an initial vowel. There are not wanting similar examples in
Yirgil and Horace ; but editors and teachers complacently get over
the difilculty by attributing the unusual length to the so-called
principle of caesura, or to poetical license. What therefore at first
view appeared as a defect in the theory of crude forms, only tends
to prove the validity of the system.
In the irregular verbs the system of crude forms has its usual
superiority. The conjugation for example of the so-called sub-
stantive verb, in both Greek and Latin, becomes more intelligible,
and therefore more easy to remember, when attention is paid to
ON THE OBUDE FOUH. 429
the form of the base. Snim and ec/u, when examined by them-
selves, appear utterly unconnected ; but a light is thrown even
upon these, and still more decidedly on many other parts of the
conjugation, when & is regarded as the point of departure. Yarro,
for example, tells us that €»wm.y esumusy esunt were the old forms,
which, losing their initial vowel, became severally tfwniy gumusy
mmt. That ea-tu* in Greek should be changed to f t/ii was to be
expected from the habitual tendency of that language to suppress
the sibilant. Further, an attention to the crude form h at once
explains the so-called adjectives, but really participles, absens^
praesensy which are but reduced forms of ab-es-ens prae-es-ens.
Again, the beginner in Greek is somewhat confused at times by
the similarity in many parts of the verbs €ifii * I am' and tifu ' I
go'. He will have most of his doubts at once solved by the know-
ledge that the former has €a; the latter i, for its base.
We next proceed to examine the proposition that all the Latin
declensions in reality belong to one type. In the process of word-
building the chief difficulty arises from the fiict, thkt if vowels are
brought together, contraction commonly results ; while if conso-
nants are placed in juxtaposition, the one or the other is frequently
modified, so as to harmonise with the other. Hence it follows
that where the choice presents itself, we should select for our first
consideration those forms, where, of two syllables brought into
contact, either the first ends in a consonant and the second begins
with a vowel, or vice versa, where a vowel at the end of the first
is followed by a consonant at the beginning of the second. Now
it so happens that among the suffixes which have the office of
denoting cases, the majority commence with a vowel. Hence
the consonant declension for the most part exhibits the cases in
a fuller and less modified form. Thus to take the accusative,
reff-em assigns a whole syllable to the case-ending, whereas in
turri-m, die-m, mttsa-niy seruo-m (or serutt-m), gradu-my a vowel
has been lost. The same applies to the plural accusatives reg-es^
turri-s {tufres)y die-By mtua-Sy semo-Sy gradus. Similarly in the
ablatives of the singular, reg-^y turn {turrfjy diiy musdy seniOy
gradu, the first gives us a letter ^ as the representative of the
case, whereas contraction absorbs this vowel in all the vowel de-
clensions, yet at the same time leaves a trace of the same termi-
* The modem Lithuanian, or the language now spoken around Memel
and Riga, conjugates its substantive verb, e«mt, essiy esti, &c.
430 APPENDIX I.
nation in the length of the final voweli as arising from oontrao-
tion.
The genitival is of reff-is would lead us to expect from analogy
turri-is, die-is^ musa-Uy semo-is, grctdu-isj not one of which occurs.
This fact at first sight appears somewhat fatal to the theory ; but
a closer inspection will remove much of the difiicultj, and the
satis&ctory removal of a difficulty ought to be held a strong con-
firmation of a theory. Now the forms gru-isy su-isy anvr^s (the
last in Terence) really exhibit what is demanded ; and the long u
in gradus gen. has always been held to be the result of contrac-
tion from graduis. Secondly, in the first and fifth declensions
the older language has at least two forms, musai and nmscu (as
in pater-familias, to say nothing of the Greek gen. a'o(l>ias)y dieiy
dies and die. Now it is evident that all these varieties would
grow out of musa-is and die-is. By the loss of the s we obtain
musai and dieiy and then by an ordinary contraction musae and
die; while the absorption of the i in musais and dieis gives us
musds and dies. In the second declension, although serao-is is
unknown, yet in nvUiuSy or rather mtUo^vaSy we get even more
than the suffix wished for ; and a termination us harmonises better
with the Greek genitival suffix os than the ordinary Latin suffix is.
Thus in the celebrated Baccanalian inscription we find seTKOurOs
for the genitive of senatw:
But there still remain the genitives auisy tturis, which refuse
even in their quantity to justify the theory of a previously exist-
ing aui'is or turri-is. The explanation probably is this : the Latin
language had some twenty verbs which blended together the third
and fourth conjugations, nafacioy iadoy orioTy gradioTy which in
the first person singular and third plural follow the analogy of the
fourth, but in the other persons that of the third conjugation.
Nay, as we look further and further back into the language, we
find such forms ssparire for parley monmur for nwrimur, euenat
for euenidtf &c. Similarly in the declensions they seem at times
to have had double forms, one ending in a consonant, one in the
vowel i. Thus by the side of naui- ' a ship' we may assume a
shorter form natt^ : compare the Greek vav-s. Thus naur-is would
be a legitimate genitive, and wm-fraguSy natUa need not be deemed
contractions from naui-fragtiSy naui-ta. So au in atuxps, auspexy
may have been an original base, signifying ' bird,' from which the
gen. aU'is with a short i is regularly formed. In fiact^ we have
ON THE OBUDB FOBH. 431
probably in this tendency to double fonns the explanation of the
confusion by which the Romans themselves were led to force the
nouns ending in a consonant and those ending in a vowel i into a
oommon declension.*
In the genitives plural die-nmi, musa-runiy senw-rum we have
a common sufBx; while in reff-ttmy aui-um, ffradu-um we only
miss the r, the addition of which would bring them into perfect
agreement with the preceding trio. Now this r really represents
the s which formed the essential part of the genitival suffix in the
singular, it being a law of the Latin language to change an s into
r whenever it is thrown between vowels, as in such neuters as
optMy operisy in the verb esse, eram, erOy <fec. But this s of the
genitive is itself lost in mitsaiy miuaey in seruiy in VHxi, AchUli,
Oleomem (for Vlixisy AckiUiSy Cfleomenisjy and in dUi, Hence
there is nothing very surprising in the disappearance of its repre-
sentative r in the plural. Besides, axeHcolvm, amphorumy num-
mwifiy dwwniy and even diefu/m,y spedetMn, are more or less familiar
contractions for eadicolarumy amphorarumy nwmmorm/iy dtiorumy
dierumy gpecierum. Lastly, it is a well-known £iict that niicerumy
baueriMn were the old forms of nuctimy boum. And these two
words by the way justify the theory at which we have hinted
already, that the plural cases are in reality formed from the sin-
gular genitive by the addition of a suffix for plurality. Thus nttcer
and houer, of the two archaic forms mtcerumy houerumy represent
the singular genitives mieisy bouisy precisely as from the base cinis
or ptduis we have a genitive ciner^j ptUtier-is, Thus musarum
is for musas-unif of which mtuas is an old genitive singular. In
the Greek language this s falling between vowels is of course lost
as usual, and we have yuovauav instead of fiwcraa-'av. Similarly
theory would give us for the noun y€V€a'' (nom. ytvos) a singular
genitive y€V€<r-osy but in place of this the Greek ear preferred
'ycvc-of ; while the Latin has g^ner^.
What we have said of the plural genitive being formed directly
from the singular genitive has its parallel in the accusative. Thus
muaamy Mruom should be considered as the Latin mode of writing
what would have appeared in Greek as mttsan and seruon. The
* Indeed there is strong reason for believing that the final t is in
origin a diminutival suffix, the special power of which was soon lost. In
other words the two forms nau- and na«t- stood to each other in the same
relation as our lad and laddie.
432 APPBin>ix I.
addition of an « as the sjmbol of pluiality would have given us
musa/My teruons; but as n was never pronounced in Latin, any
more than in Greek, before the consonant s, it was at last omitted
in writing, and so there arose mu9d8y seruos, but of course with a
long vowel. In the Cretan dialect of the Greek language such a
fonn as ihvkovs for the accusative plural was in ordinary use ; but
the Attic dialect substituted dovkovs, precisely as the nominative
of obovTs became not odovs but odovs.
The Latin dative reg-i would suggest other datives, auii, diei,
mvsaiy ieruaif gradui. Of these did and gradui occur in the
ordinazy language ; iMJoai is an archaic variety of mutae ; and
even in the second declension qwtiy as we have already observed, ex-
hibits the desired form. But gradui and did are often contracted
into the disyllables grcdu and dit. Moreover the Greek grammar
habitually so far suppresses the final t as to make it subscript,
which seems veiy like retaining it as an etymological symbol,
while in pronunciation it was altogether destroyed. Hence 9ervJo
agrees substantially with dovX^ . Besides, the Latin datives nvRiy
vtriy &c. are evidently representatives of nvJJLoi^ utroi^ as nuUius,
nuUi nom. pL, ntiUisy stand for nttUoiuSf nuUoiy nvUois.
We have said that i is the ordinary suffix of a singular dative.
An older form must have been hi. Such is seen in the so-called
adverbs, but originally datives, irU (nom. w), u-bi (or cvM^ as
seen in si-cuMy nuntrcubi, ne-cubi, from the relative), ali-M (archaic
nom. idi'g), tUro-bi (nom. tOer), vM-que (nom. quinque), no-hi-s,*
whbis ; secondly, in the plural datives reg-i-huy aui-bust die-husy
equa-busy duo-btts, acvrbus ; thirdly, in the Homeric datives c-^i,
/Sii/H^c, ovpaifOH^c, oTi7^€(r-4^i ; fourthly, in the Sanskrit datives of
the dual and plural nau-hhy-am and naurbhy-iu from nau- * a ship,'
as well as the plural instrumental case nofUrbhi-s. But if it be
admitted that a b once belonged to the datival suffix, it remains
to be explained how it came to disappear, as in muds and 9erui»,
This objection will be answered if it be shown that those very
forms which long retained a b have since lost it. Now the four
little words, tibi, dbiy tibi, ibi have all lost the labial in the French
derivatives toi, soiy ou^ y. Again, the three prepositions a5, wh,
6b are subjected to the same curtailment, in a, in cuporto (for ab9-
porto), in stupendo, atudtOy stutoHo (for 8uhs-)y and in ostendo (for
* Sibi, tibi are omitted in this enumeration, because there is reason
to belieye that the bases of these words ha^e a claim to the b.
ON THa OBVPS f OBX. 433
ohs'tendo). The two verbs iubw and ha^ also lose their b at timesy
the first in jtusiy juuum^ the second in the derived substantive
a-^mofUvm for habi'-mfntum ' something to hold by/ and also in the
French present fai^ tu a»j il ay iU ant. The persons avonSf avez
do indeed retain the b virtually in the form of a «; ; but when the
French add this present tense to the infinitive in order to make a
future, ' I have to ,' the syllable av falls off from both av-ons
and av-eZf as seen in finir-ai^ finir-<Uy finiiML^ finir-ons^ finir-es^
finir-tyiU, Similarly the conditional of the French verb is always
made up by attaching the past tense avauy &c. to the infinitive^
but in this process the syllable av again disappears, and we have
fimr-aU^ &c. The Qerman verb hab-tn and our own have suffer
in the same way. Thus the Qerman hahen in the present exhibits
hat not habtf and in the past tense hatU not hab-U ; while we say
ha9y had^ rather than havesy haved.
Hence with a knowledge that the b in Latin words had no saife
footing, we may boldly infer that from an old dative mtua-bi were
formed first mtuai and ultimately miwa«/ and from a plural mtua-
bisy on the one hand mtua-biUf on the other, with the loss of the
by mtuaisy musis. For the vowel-changes compare the three words
qttairo (the old form), qtuxero, in-quiro.
The nominative has been reserved to the last, because it con-
tains what has been deemed by some a grave difficulty. Although
a is visibly the suffix of the nominatives regs (rex), aui-a, die-Sy
Aeneas, gemo-s {aerutu), gradtt-Sy yet it has been objected that
neuters, with few exceptions, are without the final sibilant, that
the same is true of nearly every nominative of the first declension,
of such words as piter in the second, and oi pater j conatU, ordoy
ratio in the third declension.
With r^;ard to neuters, the identity of the nominative and
accusative in every instance is a difficulty which must attach to
every grammatical system, as much as to that founded upon crude
forms. Perhaps the cause may lie in this, that in the simplest
form of sentence, viz. one consisting of a nominative, a verb, and
an accusative, as dcmintu seruvm caedit, the action expressed in
the verb proceeds from the nominative to the accusative, from
the master to the slave ; and so the idea of the nominative in
origin was identical with that of an agent. But an agent having
life must of necessity be either masculine or feminine. Thus a
neuter noun would have no cl^dm to serve as a nominative, and
p p
434 APPiirDiz I.
oonsequenily ooold not in Btrictness be entitled to the nominatival
suffix s. Again, if neuters had at first no nominative, there was
little use in a distinctive mark for an accusative, these two cases
being under ordinary circumstances specially opposed to each
other. But in the second declension a special difficulty presents
itself. In other neuter nouns the nominative, vocative and ao-
cusative obtain theur identity by the omission of all case-endings,
and at times by sacrificing a portion even of the crude form,
whereas with nouns in o an m seems to be attached, in violation
of the general rule as regards the accusative, and with still less
justification in the nominative. This difficulty is one which will
be considered in the next appendix (§ xxii.), and we hope solved.
It is mixed up with a somewhat recondite question.
The «* in the first declension, it must be admitted, is only
found in masculine nouns, and even they are of foreign origin, as
the word above quoted, Aeneas, Still there is so close a connec-
tion between the first declension of the Latin and the first declen-
sion of the Greek language, that any thing proved for the one has
a bearing upon the other. Thus the t of rofuat and iroXmjt leads
to rather a strong belief that the Latin also must once have pos-
sessed such a letter, although no longer found in what is left of
the language. But it has been said that the office of this s in the
Greek words is not that of denoting a nominative, but to mark a
gender. The assertion is founded solely on the accident that the
masculine nouns take an « in the nominative, which the feminine
nouns have discarded. But even the masculine nouns appear with-
out this letter in many phrases of Homer, as v€<f}€\rjyep€ra Zcw,
fujrura Ztvs, hnrora Nrorrop, &e. ; and Cicero too preferred the
forms without a sibilant in the Greek words Archly Arista^cray
as well as in the names of his countrymen Sulla and Oinna, More-
over, an argument such as that of the Greek grammarians might
just as well be used in proof that s in Latin is a mark of the femi-
nine gender, seeing that of acer^ acrie^ acre, the middle form aerie
is generally feminine. We have a parallel error in the Icelandic
grammarians. This language, it is well known, has a general
tendency to employ the letter r where the classical and other kin-
dred languages have an e. Accordingly an r is found as an ending
of many nominatives ; but it happens to be limited for the most
* The grefUer part of this argument was first printed in an article in
the Clattical Museum^ No. xix. p. 59.
09 THE CBUDE FORK. 435
part to those of a masculine gender. Hence, in 4 141 of his Gram-
mar. Bask calls it the sign of the masculine. Unfortunately for
his doctrine, kur * a cow', at^- * a sow', also take an r to form the
nominatives kyr, syr (§ 170) ; and in § 159 he has the candour to
say, " In the oldest times there were also many feminines in r,
e. g. cedr * a vein', afterwards ad, dfr ' river', afterwards df," &c.
But a comparison of the Greek and lAtin grammars will present
us with evidence to prove that even feminine nouns of the a de-
clension were not averse to the nominatival s. In the Greek lan-
guage it is the ordinary doctrine that (ro<^ia and (rof^ii; are but
dialectic varieties of the same word. If we may extend the same
doctrine to the Latin language, we are entitled to say that there
is no substantial distinction between Ittanma and luxtiries, tristiiia
and tristities, materia and materiesy words which (as Madvig ob-
serves) rarely form their genitives,^ datives and ablatives after the
model of the fifth declension.
We next consider those nouns whose crude form ends in a
liquid, as pat^-, consiil-, ratifin- or orddn-. Our theory as regards
these words is, that the «, originally added, was first assimilated
to the preceding liquid ; that by a second change one of these
two liquids was dropped, but so dropped that the preceding vowel
by its increased length was made to compensate for the loss ; and
thirdly, that this long s^ilable was finally deprived of its length.
A triple assumption such as this, of course requires strong proof
in the way of analogy ; and it is believed that t]ie nine arguments
which are presented in the following paragraphs will be thought
to contain such proof.
1. The four Greek verbs (rTrrtpea, arcXXa), i^iv6>, and vcfuo, to
take these as examples of classes, have for their respective bases
the syllables (nrtp, trreKt <f>aif, and vf^i. From these, if the regular
formation had been followed, we ought to have had, as first
aorists, €(rw€pa'a, rorcXfra, c^avcra,* evtfiarL, Assimilation would
have changed them to €tTirtppa, roTfXXa, €<f>avvay and (P€fifia ; and
again, the suppression of one of the liquids, together with the fit-
ting compensation by increase in the length of the vowel, would
give us, what is actually found, €(Trr€ipa, forrtXa, €(f)rjva, €P€ifui.
2. As the feminine of a^ectives ending in a consonant was
often formed by the addition of the syllable tra, e,g, Ttmrov-a-a,
* Aorists c«c€p(ra, ccXtra, cKcyim «cciir in Homer.
436 APPBNi>lX I.
Xap**0'-a'af ^luuT'fra, for rvnTOKr-cra, \apievr'€ra^ ^ivuirtra^ BO from
the crade forms fuusap^y rtiKav-, rcpcv- should have been formed
luucap-tra, TdXa.V''araf r^pwiMra, which, if our view be correct, passed
through an intermediate fuucap-pa, raXav-pa^ Ttpcv^va^ to fuucaipay
Tokaiva T€p€tua,
3. The Latin suoerlative ended commonly in mmo*- or sinuh;
but in acer-nmo-, deter^mo-y dmilrlwuh^ the s has assimilated
itself to the preceding liquid, r or I.
4. The Latin infinitival suffix ^ appears to have grown out
of an older form he^ as seen in es-ie ' to be' (for (ti-48e). This view
is confirmed both by the universal habit of the old language to
present an 9 between vowels where the later language preferred r,
as in Fusitu, cua, afterwards Furius, ara ; and bj the occurrence
of a passive infinitive dad (see Forcellini), which of course implies
an active infinitive dam for dare* Hence vd-U^ twldey mal-le have
in ^ a substitute for an older re, as that was a substitute for m.
5. In the Icelandic tongue, as we have already said, an r in-
stead of an « is the ordinary nominatival suffix of masculine nouns.
But when such a noun ends in 9i or ^, the r is at times assimilated,
so that from a base ketU- * kettle', graeti- ' green', spaiv- ■* spoon',
we have the nominatives ketiU^ graenn^ spann. Again, some words
whose base has a final r, as dor- * spear', are not afraid to take a
second r in the nom., as dorr. And if the base ended in s, the
old language at times even added a second 8 for the nominative.
Thus from U- * ice', latu- ' loose', were formed old nominatives Us,
latus. We have here, by the way, a case precisely parallel to the
theoretic nominative ptduiss mentioned above. But in the later
Icelandic language there was a tendency, as was to be expected,
to discard one of two similar consonants at the end of a nomina-
tive ; and thus what wm a virtual symbol of the nominative wholly
disappeared. In § 139 of Bask's Grammar it will be seen that the
nouns which were thus truncated had a base ending in the letters
r, If n and «, «'. e. the veiy endings which are subject to the same
mutilation in Latin. We have here then a simile which really
runs on all fours, and which alone ought to settle the problem.
But to proceed.
6. The Icelandic verb in the third person regularly takes an r
corresponding to the s of English, as from the base td- ' tell', hann
tdr * he tells' ; yet from skin- * shihe', the old writers preferred sHnn
for sJbinr ' shines', and this »kinn afterwards became akin (§ 93).
ON THS OBUDB VOBK. 487
7. The genitive plural in Icelandic has regularly a suffix ra
(corresponding to the Latin rum, and so a corruption of 9um\ jet
from hvn^ ' the', and gamail-' ' old', the gen. pi. is hin-^nay gamama
(§ 93).
8. The ordinary termination of the neuter comparative in Ice-
landic is ara or ro,* as IcdLdara ' the colder' ; but from vcun- ' &ir*,
melr- * happy,' are formed the comparatives vaen-7uiy gad-la (§ 199).
9. The Latin language is specially apt to discard any final s
which follows an r. Thus for uidebarisy mdererisy we find in pre-
ference uidd)are^ uiderere. Again, although the analogy of the
Oreek dip, rpis, the Latin bi$ (duis)y and our own twicey thrice,
would have led us to expect triM and guatris in Latin, yet we find
nothing but ter and quaUr, It is therefore no matter for surprise,
if instead of puenuy patersy lintris, which strict theory demands,
we find ptter, pater, linter, Bui the Qreek nominatives irarrjpy x^^Py
rtprjpy from the several crude forms irartp-y x^P'f T€p€Vy exhibit
the long vowel of compensation ; and so also does the Latin more
frequentiy than is commonly believed, as patir in Virgil :
Ostentans artemque pater arcumque sonantem. Aen. y. 521.
Concilium ipse pater et maf(na incepta LatinuSi &c. xi. 469.
Congredior. Fer sacra pater et concipe foedus. xii. 13.
What we have said would account for such nominatives as
ratioriy homon ; but even these are not found. The difficulty is
however cleared up when we call to mind that while the Greeks
wrote ^Tpafiav, the Romans preferred Strabo. Nay the Greeks
themselves changed eycav to cyw.
So much for the singular. In the plural nominative a com-
parison of req-es with the forms exhibited in the other declensions
leads us to the conclusion that auis (archaic), graduSy and dies
have all by contraction lost an e before the final «, whereas musaey
standing for mtcsa-esy has lost the sibilant itself. Lastly, serui
(bovXoi) must be considered as contracted from seruoe, and this
reduced from an obsolete seruo-es.
Thus all the Latin declensions appear to have been moulded
upon one common type.
We will close these remarks with a word or two of comment on
an objection, to which reference has already been made. Even if
* This suffix in the Moeso-Gothic has a sibilant in lieu of the liquid r.
p p2
438 APPBirsiz I.
we admit your system to be founded on the firmest basis of philo-
logical truth, it requires much complicated argument to prove its
truth, and for that reason would be found utterly impracticable
in the instruction of the young. The answer is simple. The
proofs are for the learned alone. The business of the pupil is to
learn the contrary process, by which from the bare word or crude
form the so-«alled oases are formed by the addition of syllables or
letters. This process is &r easier than that put forward in the old
grammars. Thus the Latin words for ' king', < bird', * thing', ' wing*,
' slave', ' step', are presented for the first time to the beginner in
the forms ng-y aui-, r^, ala-, teruo-^ gradu-. From these he is
taught to build up the different cases. In this process he has at
once an advantage over those who follow the old course. He can
never be at a loss for the declension, as the last letter is an in-
variable guide. Nay, he may throw aside all consideration of the
order in which the declensions follow, as the terms ' consonant
declension', ' i declension', Ac are at once simple and sufficient.
Thus he is saved from many traps which are set for one who uses
the Eton Qrammar. For example, the words ptuTf linier, pater
are only deceitful guides to the declension until we know some
other case or cases ; whereas the crude forms jpie^ro-, linUrt-^pcUir'
at once give a direction which cannot be mistaken. A treacherous
similarity exists between equtts^ uirtus and tenaius^ between aeruM
and arbosy between dies taidjMiries; but there is no chance of the
pupil referring to the same declensions e^uih, uirtM' and atMxtvr^
or servAh and arbds-^ or di^ saidjMri^-.
We now pass from the familiar matters of declension and con-
jugation to a part of grammar usually much neglected — ^the gene-
ral doctrine of derivation ; and we shall still find that the crude
forms of nouns and verbs give us a safer foundation on which to
build. Thus from the substantives ciui-, fide-^ uUa-y trUm-y we
more readily proceed to the adjectives cmiAi-^ fide-li-^ utta-li-y
triiu-li'f than we can from the nominatives cium, fdes^ uita,
trilms. Still more decided is the advantage in deducing directly
from the crude forms mari^y Roma-^ bdlo-^ trihu-^ rather than
from the nominatives mare, Rjoma, beUufHy trUnu, the derivatives
marino'f Bomafio-y Bdlona-, trihtmo-. Again, the diminutives
nautcula, uirguncrda,'^ diectda, sucuUiy ratiuncula, are with little
* Zumpt, through looking to the nominatiyes, speaks of uirguncvla
as formed by the addition of a safiix vneula.
THE SUrVIZ AGH ? 439
difficulty referred to the orade forms naui-, uirgdnr^ dii-y su-j
The light which the study of Latin throws upon the etymology
of our own tongue is a secondary but still an important oonaide-
ration. Here again the crude forms have a marked advantage
over the nominatives. Thus our English adljeotives re-al, reg-^Hy
gradu-aly manu-aly verHcndy noHon-al^ are less easily referred to
the nominatives re*, twpy gradiu^ manusy uertex^ natiOy than to the
crude forms, which present themselves at once to the eye. Tho
same, or nearly the same, is true of the words lapidary ^ avi-ar^y
mngmn-aryy tahU-aryy Mtatum^ry,
In what has been hitherto said, the chief stress has been laid
upon the forms of words. But there is another consideration of
even greater moment for the student. To give the name of no-
minative to what is really something more than the mere expres-
sion of a name has naturally led to the utter neglect of that some-
thing more ; and the logical view of language has only confirmed
the error. On the other hand, when we know that the nominative
is really a case, in other words that it expresses a relation between
the word and the other members of a sentence, we have much
light thrown on the nature of the Latin language. We then see
that the special office of the nominative is to define the source of
the action implied in the verb. Nor let it be objected that such a
view is traversed by the employment of nominatives with a passive
Verb, for the passive is at bottom a reflective verb.* Nay the con-
struction of a passive sentence only confirms what we have said ;
for the moment the true agent is formally expressed in a passive,
the preposition ab is called in aid ; so that in the two sentences
dominus mruum caedit and serufM caediiur a domino, domimu and
a domino are equivalent phrases.
APPENDIX IL
ON TRACES OF AN OLD diminutival SUFFIX, MORE OR LESS LIKE THE
KELTIC agh, IN THE LATIN VOCABULARY.
A nisoussioir, ill-fitted for admission into the body of a school-
grammar, may yet deserve a place here ; and I am desirous that
my more precise views should be accessible to the reader of these
* See Grammar, §§ 375-379, and the two notes * pp. 59 and 60.
440 APFEin>iz II.
pages. Stilly for details, that is for the full argamentSy which
alone can carry oonyiction, I must refer to the paper, as printed
in the Tramaetums of the PhUologioal Society of London for 1856.
Here I can give only an abstract.
I. Introduction. — ^The Gaelic suffix aeh or ag * little* has its
representative in the final syllables of the various Scotch diminu-
tives, lass-ocilt and lass-ow, hj»-4ck and lass-tf, ^ a little lass.' But
the Latin and Greek also have intimate relations with the Keltic:
Again, as our own tongue throws off final gutturals in way^ day,
honey, Norway y &c. (German fBtg, tag, honig, Norweg, d^c), so the
Latin also loves to drop a ^, as in maixir {^mayor)y tnavcloy mdlo»
Yet as with us derivatives sometimes restore the y, for example
in NoTweg-iany so is it in Latin. Another mode of avoiding a
guttural with us is to substitute a labial sound for it, as in laughy
rough. This habit also prevails in Latin. Lastly, diminutives in
form often discard their diminutival power, as French eol-eil, Ita-
lian fraieUo, ooreUa ; and these are apt to stand alone in a lan-
guage, without any primitive to contrast with them.
II. Aghy as seen in substantives : lim-ae- ^ slug.' In Greek
occur some 60 examples, as pob-oK- ' dwarf-rose,* iroXX-ox- * youth,'
fAfip-oK" ' young person.' The Latin substantives of the first
declension have lost a final guttural, as shown by the derived
adjectives roMc^eo-y femlac-eo^y membranoui'-eio^ (24 of them), and
twmac-^o-. To the double-diminutives, Gaelic cur^ach-an 'a
coracle,' Scotch UM^k-iny German veil-{i)eh'en ^a little violet,'
correspond Latin fervL-ag'omry &c. (about 20) ; and hence it is
inferred that ferubL-ac- or ferkil-^^ were older forms of fervH-or,
Plants in the form feruL^ag-, lapp-ag-y would correspond to our
eharlroeky skanw'-ocky aour^ock (sorrel).
III. Agh in verbs. A diminutival sufGbc added to verbs gene-
rally denotes a succession of petty acts, as tmnkUy eprtnkUy hobble^
So with Latin verbs which take the suffix agh. The guttural
still traceable in a few of these verbs, which therefore adhere to
the third conjugation, as plang^y frajig^y trah-y strong') whence
etraviy sb. Hrage-y adj. ttragvlo-. In the great majority the loss
of it has transferred the verbs to the first conjugation, in which
however it is seen that the final a is something foreign to the root,
as cuJfHi-re, lav-orre, beside cumb-erey lav-ere. The guttural again
traceable in derivatives, as or-ao^o-y lav-ac-ro-.
IV. Agh in verbs supplanted by a6 (for ahh), Latin generally
has h at the end of syllables where Greek has ^. Hence a final
THS svrrix aoh ? 441
h Sb seen attaohing itself to verbs of the a ooigugation in the de«
rived odjeotives medicab^v-'f laudab-dH' (over 400), compared with
fU'Uu; in the sbs. voixilhido'^ venab-nla-f compared with jac-u^-/
in dohb^ra"' ; and in the finequentatives (note this idea) plorab^
undo-y eofUianalhundo- (over 60). Bat if a6 be thus adapted to
denote continuity of time, it may well be the element seen in
am^ab^anif and even in em^ab^y so that am^alho will strictly be
an imperfect present. Similarly ero^ efroyuoA, ttfUy are in form pre-
sents, in power futures.
V. ^& for o^ in substantives after a guttural, as eannrob^i*
* hemp,' and otherwise, as, tr-ab- ('^dor^- f) ' tree.'
VI. As offh denotes what is habitual in all Manx verbs and
many Manx adjectives, so it enters into such Greek words as
ffoX-ojc- * flatterer,' (^cf-ok- * cheat,' XoX-oy * prattler' (above
5X>), and into the Latin bvb-<tc-, ed-ac'^ loqu-ac" (about 60).
VII. Aic, so common in Greek sbs., gives place to ec or ic in
Latin. Thus to iraXXojc-, v/xue-, ffwdojc- correspond pdlec-, wrec^^
podee-. The lists of words in ec and ic (together over 60) very ge-
nerally exhibit the idea of smallness, as cvlec- 'gnat,' putec- 'flea,'
eimeo- 'bug.' So too, as plants and small birds with us often
end in our diminutival suffixes oek and ow^ the Latin also has for
plants xdec-'y rumec^y cattery wUc-y fnUio-y scandic-, aalic'yfilic'f
tamaric-; and for \Ar^ perdiC'y fuLic-y eomic', cotumic-y ioric^,
VIII. Agh in sbs. becomes i*^ or kc, so as to lie nearer our own
ock, Latin examples cruc-y frug-es. The word crva (bo-icoXo^)
examined.
IX. Agh reduced to a mere guttural, as in our own park for
poTT'Oek, Jr-c-, e(d^4hy fal-C'y lan-O'y mer-c^y analysed.
X. Our ee often, yet not always, reduced to d in the body
of such words as ros-^'tum for fo«-ec-<tt»i, i. e. ros^agh^tum (see
raaac'eo- in § i). Sometimes the two forms, as mrectnm and viri-
tunty dumectum and dumStumy exist beside each other.
XI. As the Scotch reduce haaoek to lassotr, so the second Latin
declension owes its existence chiefly to a similar loss ; but the ac^.
aprug-no' still bears traces of an older aperogh- ' a wild boar ;' and
similar evidence is found in hardeae-ethy sebae-eo-y foUae-eO'y hvXbac*
eo' (19 such), as well as in raptc^io^y tribtmio^tO'y &c.
XII. As the Scotch reduce lass»<^ to lassw, so ensio-vltUy canity
tUa, retic'tUum tell us that enn-y cani-y reti' had once a final gut-
tural. Again in the fifth declension jE^5ec-4<^, due-^da bear wit-
ness that pUbe'y die' had once a final c ; which is confirmed as
448 APPB5DIZ II.
to the latter by a oomparison of our day and the Oerman tag. In
the fourth dedenrion the argument would ha^e been smoother, if
we had found anue-vla and genue^fdum, rather than anic-vla and
genie-'xd'um* But we know historically that geniSbus grew out of
genubuB, Moreover as yow {genu) : knee : : do/iv : tree : : genuc^
vlum : knuck4e^ This seems to establish the legitimacy of genuc-
vlum, Plautus too by his twice-employed adjective metiUndostu,
implies a sb. mMe-idw, Observe too that as kusie i lastf so
eani- : can-; and a cr. ean- 'dog' is consistent with can-um
gen. pi., and with Kw-osf &c. So with ap^um, juven^um,
ziii. Agh in sbs. sometimes doubly represented, as in verben-
ae'O'^ farmrvc-a^y tamh-vjc-o-y fwr-e-a-. So ocdhdo^ has the like
suffix d thrice over.
xrv. The softened oif, for ocky seen in English adjectives, as
shaU-ow, yeU-ow, virtually occurs in the Greek jSpax-v-y yXvjc-v-,
tkax'V-f <fec., and so is represented in the Latin equivalents brethi^y
duio-i-y leV'i'y — an argument confirmed by the derivatives hrevie-'
lUo'y dulcic-tdo-, levic'fdo'. Tnu!', i. e. tor-^uc-y retains the suffix
in greater purity.
XV. Agh in adjectives also sometimes doubly represented, as
in jUaoc^- (—/uiX-aie-o-), jian^c-o-y gU-h-o-y flrav^o-y gil-v^o-y cur-
V'O'y tor^v-o^ (comp. ^r4«?-), ard^oro^y &c.
xTi. Some adjectives in o are deduced from genitival forms, as
patriusy igneits; and so no way connected with our suffix.
XVII. Agh in verbs reduced first to ttg or tte, and then to «,
as ia Jkt-yfrU' (r,), stru-y wv-, volv'y 8olV' (with lu')y ferv'y loqti^y
nw-y rt^y tpU", tent' {terU'4a-r%y (rraX-ci^^iv), dec.
xvin. Agh in verbs reduced to ^ or ic, as 9pec-j plec- c^pUct-y
neC" of luctryjUc' of Jlect", and (g)nic' of (g)nitiy (gynuna,
XIX. Agh in verbs reduced to a simple guttural, as fn^r-^-,
gpaf^'y ter-g-y verg^ * incline,' ver^ *pour,'yw^-, par-c-y pos-c^y
veS'C' (r.), ut-e- (tdeisci), torgw-^.
XX. Agh in verbs supplanted by a labial, first by p. Examples
such as oarp-'t rup-y soalp-y ierp^y trep', are examined.
XXI. Secondly by J, as scrib- (— ypa^), t{e)rib' (rptfi-) implied
in triviy tribnlum ; «(«)r-t6- implied in cr-tJ-ro- n., glid^^. An ex-
tinct b claimed for some other secondary verbs on the evidence of
derivatives, as vd-vb-y mA-vh'y /-«J-, fe»-«6-, lug^ub-y iUte-'ib'y
gal-'ib'y in place of voh^y «9^, JU', teM-y luge^y Ulici', saH-,
XXII. Thirdly by m. The direct interchange of x ^^'^ f* ^P*
pealed to in support of this doctrine. Examples of such verbs in
THE 8UVFIX AQH ? 443
m coundered, as frem-^ premry trendy crtfA^a^'re, and a vb. crem"
implied in the sb. cremror. The m which appears in the alleged
suffixes men (jiat) and menium daimed for the preceding verb, so
that we should rather divide the several elements, as in om-an*^
eniumy monrum^erUtimy Ug-um-enj ovoii^ot' or ov-vii'ttr-y &c. The
same ai|^ument applied to the infinitive rvirr-c/i-ei/, dec. The paper
then reverts to substantives ; and after noticing the &ct that the
suffix om of hottomy fathom, is represented in the oldest Qerman
by am and umy vApod-wm or pot-am and vad-wmy treats this suffix
as a labialised agh. Thus the old Qerman var-am corresponds to
our brake {^har-agh) * fern ;' and potam not only to the Latin
fundo-y but also to its equivalents irvyd-cue- and pod-tc-. Hence
om («m), the strange ending of the nominatives and accusatives
of Latin neuters, ervomy beUumy is justified as ifepresenting ervoghy
hdLoghy older forms, it is thought, than «rvo-> JMo-, Hence too
apiwm^y Uium- (IXioi/-), form adjectives aptac-o-y IHac-o-.
xxiii. Agh in verbs passes through a; or ^ to tf, as ver-e- (r.)
beside verec-undo-. The cases of euade-y denee-y ruhe-y tetie^y late-y
scate-y luge-y expiU-y spre-viy cre^vi considered.
XXIV. Agh in verbs passes through ic &o. to t. If the adj.
lent- stand for lenighy so also must the verb I^nir; and similarly
with like cases. Derivatives too, as orig^on-y claim a guttural in
behalf of ori- (r.), &c.
XXV. Agh in verbs exchanges its guttural for a sibilant, as
TOfMfra^ (beside ropax-i;) ; so in Latin incipise-y petess-. The
French forms ^isMin^ &c., and our oymjmishy show that the
Latin sb. and vb./ni- stood in place oijm-igh. So also the Ita-
lian ^niffco brings in with its own claim one for all inceptive , or,
as Homer treats them, iterative verbs ; and these two meanings
alike accord with the power assigned to our suffix in § iii.
XXVI. ^c or ic &c. exchange the guttural for a t, chiefly after
a preceding guttural, like our own gobb-etot for gabb-ocky giml-et
for ginU-icky spig-ot for spig-ock. But the license is often carried
beyond the excuse, as in emm-^ for emm-ock. Thus abiet- stands
for abiec-y witness the adj. abieg-^no-, Vdl-ic-a-rey fod-ic^a-re,
mors-io-a-re have our suffix in the legitimate form, ic; but fre-
quentative verbs generally have changed ic for it, as ag-it'O-re,
which with no less than 300 similarly constituted verbs, may plead
in excuse a preceding guttural ; but not so esitare, aaJUarey puUare.
AedUit-io- &c. we know stands for aedilic-io-, and perhaps brevit-er
for brevic-er &c.
444 APPBZiPix n.
zxm. Oar tff reduced to d in oUier forms. Sach oomparati'vtiB
-as trist-ie-^ary laeC-tC'dor (afterwBids irutU^ier, laetU'^ior), esta-
IQnhed on good ms. anthoritj; and henoe (fitfd-ta-, UutU-iBt'^
explained aa simDar to gra^4a-. The same explanation proposed,
more or less donbtingly, for words of the fnm nav'4p<i>-j serv-it-ith
and noV'U'io'j wttbdU^e-io- and aMliMt-io-.
xxTin. Agh &c. change the gattond for a <f , as in mi-td-
beside ewoi^ia, muywunf. Hence rubed&n-y tdbedtm-y in place of
the classical rohtgon-, aUbugtm^y &c. MuU-ic-udrun^ 0f the older
form) would have a valid excuse for d in place of ^.
XXIX. The many changes of yowe!, which have been here aa-
rigned to our suffix, justified hj the law which assimilates yowds
in adjoining syllables. Thus a €h«ek writes iMaKannr^y tptav',
fuiXunr-f opwnr- (o being habitually followed by v rather than by
another o). So a Roman prefened : 1. at-a-^ ar-ai-ro- n., ar'ab-€tmf
ar'Ob-ili'y cHrac-^r (a?- * nose*) ; 2. gemr^l>-wndfHy frem-eb-undo-y
tremreb-undo-j ver-e- (r.), ver-to^ndi^^ Un-€', ten-dhomy ten^eb-ra-^
ter^eb-ra-y ed-dherv-y fer-etrro- n., ver-^t-ro- n., pet-ess-y nee-esaey
<j(tf)r-e-rt, jp(tf)r-frw,/(tf)r-«-to-; 3. mt-tb^ndo-y rid-ib-ando-y rid-
te-tdo'y in-dp^im-y vic-issim; 4. Ing-^ub-ri-, htc^ub-ra'-re ; or with
not identical, yet kindred vowels, as 6, lat-e-y lat-dhrory aoat-eb-rchy
tat-df^Ory lac-ess-y fao-es9-y cap-ess-, par-e-y manre-y alg-e-y ard^- ;
or 6. guer-ib^ndo-y c{e)r''ib-rO' n., t{eyr-i*viy <(tf)r-i-to-, <(tf)r-tJ-
tUo- n., vert'tg-im- ; or again, 7. votrue-ri-'y tfol-up-i-y vol-tih-Ui-y
wUrUfn-en-, irirvol^fte-ro- n., solru-to-y «o^t<^t2t-, tol-u^m, doe-u»'
ento-y monriim''entO'y inrccl-vmr^r. Some exceptions from this law
considered. A convincing example of vowel-assimilation is seen
in the series of words : a, wdKka^ m. ' a youth ;' 0, Lat. pdlex f.
* a concubine ;' t, JUUe ' a young mare ;* 0, Scotch poUoek ^ a
young fish,' irioKos ' a foal ;' Uy Lat. ptdluSy either a colt or chicken,
— ^where the words are at bottom identical, and in themselyes de-
note merely ' a little young one.'
XXX. The many changes of consonant which have been as-
signed to our suffix explained, partly from the desire to avoid
gutturals, especially repeated gutturals, partly on the principle
that aspirates readily interchange. By way of example, the irre-
gularities of the verb ^p- (Sanskrit bhri or dhri) considered in
Greek, Latin and English.
INDEX
The namerals refer to the aeettoiie, BOit to the pages, exseept wJMre the latter j». is pre-
fixed. The lettor n. me«Af note, h^tin words nad pftrts of Laiin vords we in
a conjugation, 519, 522, 523.
a declension, 89-99, p. 424.
ab, 810, 816, 1303, 1304.
abd-^ 542.
abdioa-^ 1023.
abegtut, 1208.
a5to-, 1304.
dbin^ 1171.
ablative, 50, 51, 989, p. 429, s;
absolute, 1013 ; ' by' or ' with,'
1000; for dat. 1019; 'from,'
1021 ; in d^ 50, 1021 : 'in point
of,' 997; of circumstances, 1009 ;
of degree, 1017 ; of gerund, 1294;
of means, lOOO; of penalty,
1005.1; of measure, 1014; of
price, 1005 ; of quality, 1010 ;
of road, 1008; of time, 992; of
*' where,* 991 ; with comparative,
1015, 1055, 1055 d; with fao-^
fi'^ 1003; with prep., 1025;
with verbs of buying, 1005; of
removal, 1023; of sacrificing,
1006.
ahs, 810 n.
absenti-, 725.
a5Wtn«-, 940.
abstract nouns, 907.
ac, 1430 &c.
00 non, 1409. h
accent, 22-28.
accessary conjunctions, 846.
aocUui'j 1308. 4.
accusative, 45, 46, 369, 884; singu-
lar, p. 429 ; plural, p. 429, p. 431 ;
after active verb, 888; after adj.
in bundo^ 1298; after deponents,
891; after in transitives, 893 ; af-
ter participles in to, 892 ; after
quo, 918; after mibstantives,
907 ; cognate, 894 ; and inf. 911,
1248 ; factitive, 896 ; for nonu
912; of time, &c. 915; two to-
gether, 896-902 ; with verbfl of
calling, 827; of feeling, 889.
accusing, adj. o^ 933 ; verbs o^
944.
active verb, 367 ; conjugated^ ^75,
acu', 207. 1.
ad, 1305, 1306.
adama-, 1808. 3.
adaequa', 1308. Sp
adeo, 799.
adim-, 1308. 3.
adig-, 900.
adipet, 1026.
adjectives, 211-239; ooneord of,
1037 ; as sub., 936, 1034, 1042;
for adv., 1049, 1051; gender o^
1040 ; place of, 1468; possessive,
1047, 1054 e; in predicate, 1060;
suffixes of, 225-234 ; in «, o, t,
have lost a guttural, p. 442, ziv«
XV., p. 444, xxvii. ; in d^H,
p. 441, iv. ; in 00, p. 441, vi.;
m ao^o, p. 440, ii., p 441, zi.;
in ao-o, p. 443, xxii-; in btuuh,
1298 ; in t0-to, p. 441, xi. ; in U*
to, p. 443, xxvi. ; of oomparisoa,
1438 ; of fitness, &c^ 956.
admodum, 797.
admone-, 1308. 3.
adturg-, 1308.8.
adulU', 979.
advorttUt 1307.
etemula-f 979.
aetate gen., 909 ».
afflig-, 1304.
<iQ
446
INDBX.
agnate-, 1308. 8.
at-, 739.
adyerbs, 767, 1398; in a, 366,
793 ; in afn^ 782, 791 ; in bi.
866, 785 ; in i, 768 ; in im, 790 ;
in (Uf, 366, 790, 800; in l«, 783 ;
in Wr, 773, p. 443, xxvi. ; in
m», 777 ; in 0, 366, 771, 789,
1056 ; in per, 778 ; in seeus, 80 1 ;
in tenus, 803; in Urn, 779, 780;
in tr^t 788; in um, 792; in t»,
781 &c.; in vorsum^ 798; in
predicate, 1401 ; of comparison,
1438, ]439; place of, 1398; pro-
nominal, 366, 1 150; with partic,
1399; with sub., 1400.
at- vb., 739.
ait-, 320, 327.
alio-, 110, 111, 327, 1148.
aHqui", 1 141.
alphabet, 2.
alter differs from alteri, 324.
aliero-, 110, 111,330,1149.
a//erifM, 111, 380.
am, 834 a, 1308.
amdur-, 1308. 3.
amplius, 1055. 1.
an, 1421 &c.; use of, 1426 ; a
proclitic, 1465; repeated, 1424.
on 'up,' 834 5, 1308.2.
ana, 1308. 1.
anaphora, 1435.
Anglo-Saxon superl., 838 n.
animi, 9S5 n,
annona^, 210.
annuvitt p. 427.
ante, 1309.
antea, 8u2.
antecedent omitted, 1126, 1151.
antequam, 1231. 1.
anu-, 142, 207. 1.
aorist, 445, 446, 585, 586, 614.
appot', 1304.
apposition, 1052, 1058, 1472.
apud, 816 n., 1311.
apprehend- 1 1308.8.
ar, 1312.
arasso, 567.
artusere, 568.
arduo-, 555, 1. n.
<w, divisions of the, 270.
asking, vbs. of, 902"
asyndeton, 1435.
at, 1445.
aigve(ae), 1430, 1439; for quamn
853: with comp., 1056.4.
attraction, 1039, 1055 5. obs., 1059,
1125, 1251.
au, 862 n.
auersa-, 904.
awl* gen., why short, p. 430.
aut, 840; differs from tiel, 1444.
autem, 1446; place of, 1474.
benigno', 238.
5/an</f-, 971.
bookkeeping, phrases of, 982.
bou-, 157.
buying, vbs. of, 946, 1005.
c, 11.
cant-, 190.
can-um gen. pi. explained, p. 441.
capess-, 754.
cardinal numbers, 247, 252, 253.
care-, 1023.
case, 42, 1391 n.
oassum, 540.
«? suffix, 289,293, 319, 792,1112 n.
c&fo, 731, 1198.
c«/a-, 898.
centena milia, 1072.
certa-, 956.
c«rutc«9, 1026.
cetera f 916.
ctm^c-, 207. 1.
<;trca, 1313.
circiter, 1314.
ctrcum, 1315.
circumda-, 906.
CM, 1316.
ct/o, 772.
ct^ra, 1318.
clam, 782, 1319.
eland-, 760 n.
ooepttu est, 1244,
cognate ace, 402, 894.
collectives, 195. 1.
comparative, 240-246, 838, 1015,
1055,1193.
comparison, adj. and adv. of, where
placed, 1438.
composition, 36; of verbs, 758.
condona-f 975.
conditional sentences, 1153.
conduc-, 1289.
contct-, 812 n.
conjugation, 518; a, 519,522,523;
IITDBZ*
447
e, 386, 519, 524, 525; t,519,528,
529; 0, 519, 520; u, 519, 526,
527 ; consonant, 518, 521 ; of
verb actiye, 576 See. ; deponent,
685; impersonal, 699; part, in
turo with es- and /u-, 702 &c. ;
passive, 655; pass, impers. 701;
reflective, 570, 636 &c.
conjunctions, 839; omitted, 1436;
postponed, 1462.
conscio-, 957.
consonant conjugation, 518, 521.
consonant declension, 55, 87«
consperg', 905.
consul' vb., 555. 2.
consul for consuls, p. 485.
coTitrOf 1320.
contract verbs in Latin, p. 426.
contracted perfect, 563-7.
copula, 874.
copulative conjunctions, 840, 1430
&c.
coram, 1321.
corona-, 210.
cred-, 981 n.
crude form, 41, p. 422; in Sanscrit
grammars, p. 422; simplicity of,
p. 438.
cut bono ? 983 n.
cuiouimodi, 311.
cum prep., 820, 1322, 1323, 1391.
cum conj., 1455.
cum maxume, 1057 d^ p* 226.
oura-, 1168, 1289.
custom, vbs. of, 1007.
dfl-, 549, 732, 975, 1275, 1289.
dative, 49, 110 n., 950; doubled,
982; dat. ethic, 978; in poets,
986,988; of attraction, 985; of
fitness, 1293; of motion to, 987;
of name, 985; of part, in endo,
1293; of person concerned, 877;
of person whose body is con-
cerned, 972; of purpose, 984; of
serving as, 983; plur., p. 433;
sing., p. 432; with adj., 961 ; with
adv., 962; with gerundive, 967 ;
with perfect particip., 967 ; with
static vbfi., 963; with sba, 969;
with vbs. of giving, 973; with
vbs. of taking away, 973.
<;;, 1326-8.
(i^ as a suffix, 366, 800.
debut, 1257.
decet, 964.
deciens, 1071.
declension, 54 ; first or a, 89-99 ;
second or o, 100-24; third or t»
125-39 ; third or consonant, 55-
87 ; fourth or u, 140-44 ; fifth or
e, 145-8; vowel, 88; irregular,
157 ; mixed, 148. 1 ; reduced to
one, p. 423, 429).
defectiye nouns, 149, 1032.
defung-, 1023.
demonstratives, 286, 1091.
dcmum, 1447.
denario-, 1070.
deo', 158.
deponent Terbs, 399, 400 ; conju-
gated, 685.
derivation, 34 ; of verbs, 740 &c. ;
from prep., 838.
desideratiye verbs, 755.^
desin-, 940.
desitus est, 1244.
tieterior-, 812, 814, 824.
<ft,1329, 1330.
die-, 534.
dicam omitted, 1228.
dignc, 1016, 1192.
diminutives, 198 &c. and Appen-
dix ii.
diminutive verbs, 750.
direct interrogative, 308.
dirim-, 812.
discrib-y 1329.
disjunctive conjunctions, 1444 ;
question, 1423.
distributive numbers, 249,252, 262»
1066.
dUi', 221.
doce-, 553, 556, 898, 1236.
domi, 114,952,1036.
dome-, 159.
domum, 886, 1036.
due-, 534.
dum, 1448.
duo-, 117, 118, 120.
duplici', 1067 n.
e, 1331.
e declension, p. 424.
ea, 304, 366.
fc, 811,813,817, 1331.
ecastor, 861.
eooet 862.
448
iin>BZ.
\
eafer"^ 811.
edepol^ 861.
ego^ crude form of^ 274 «.
ehoy 8b'2 n.
elision, 29.
ellipBiaofab., 1033; of main verb,
1227 ; of vetb of requesting, 1204;
of verb of saying, 1203.
«m-, 1005 n.
emolumento-, 530 fi.
emphasis decides order of words,
1459.
emphatic adjective precedes, 1468 ?
emphatic genitive precedes, 1468,
1472.
enclitics, 27, 1473.
enim^ 1449; place of, 1474.
tfo, adv., 304, 366,789.
^picenes, 190.
epistolary tenses, 1160.
epoli 861.
eguidem^ 336, 1453/. n.
equa-^ 124. 1.
erat first, 1462.
erga^ 1334.
es', ' eat,' 722 ; « be,' 723.
esse omitted, 1259.
est first, 1462.
gt, 1430 &c.; 'also,' 'too/ 144»;
a proclitic, 1465.
et non^ 1409.
et — neque, 1443.
et, que, and alqtte opposed, 1434.
ethic dat., 978.
etiam, 1171.
eiiamnum, 806.
eof, 1331.
excess, dejfree of, 1056.6.
exerce- , 555. 2.
existumes,, 1228.
extent of place, &c., 915.
exporgisc-, 555. 3.
extra, 1335.
/oc, 1168.
factitive ace, 896.
fastidi', 939.
/ojreiw, 566, 1209 n.t.
/opo, 566, 1209 n.t.
fearing, verbs of, 1 186.
feeling, verbs of, 393, 872, 889, 938,
939, 1245.
feminine sufiixes, 193.
fer-y 729.
>?., 736, 1003.
JUnri, 736 »,
ftg'i 535.
first word emphatic, 1460, 1461.
foras, 886.
forbidding, sentences of, 1178-7-
fore, 725.
forem, 725.
/(w« «/, 1260.
/om, 952.
forgiving, verbs of, 975.
fractions, 268-272.
frag-, 535.
frequentative verbs, 745.
fretf}', 1002.
fru; 1001, 1287 n.
y«-, 723, 723.1, 1152.5.
fugi', 558.
fullness, adj. of, 931 ; verbs of, 9*1.
fung-, 1287 n.
future,439,441, 447, 448, 466-469 ;
f. perfect, 476 ; f. perf.subj., 503,
505, 1226; f. perf. pass., 1263;
f. periphrastic, 1260 ; £ for im-
perative, 1170.
genders, 39, 183 Ac, 1040.
genitive, 47, 48, 919 ; sing., p. 430;
plur., p. 431 5 emphatic, 1891 «,
1469, 1470 ; after gerund, 1286;
after neut. pron., 922; in ius, 110
«. ; inpointof,935; objective,927;
of cause, 929 ; of connection, 926;
of definition, 926. 1 j of quality,
927; of removal, 930, 940 ; of
tendency, 1292; partitive, 922 j
place of, 1468, 1472; possessive,
924 ; subjective, 921 ; with adj.,
929 ; with adv., 923; with gerund,
1286; with possessive, 1048;
with subs., 920 ; with verU, 938.
gentile name, 1046.
genu- 9 p. 442, xii.
genus, 917.
gerund, 435, 634, 1284*6, 1294,
1295.
gerundive, 1287 &c.
giving, verbs of, 973.
GlyceHo-9 208.
gra^fiofl', 971.
Greek ace, 916; noons, 166 &a
gus'1 748.
hahe-, 386.
habessit, origin of fonn, p. 427.
IHDXZ.
449
Aau, 1404. 1.
hand, 1416.1.
historic present, 449 n., 455; hist.
infin , 1253.
Ao-, 295-300, 1092 &c.
hoc adv. 300.
hocine^ 293.
Ao<f««, 804.
hordeo-, 207.2.
Aor«um, 366 n.
house, 1035, 1303 /., 1305 o., 1311 e.
htUvs, 947.
Aumt, 114, 952.
hypothetical sentences, 496-9, 705,
1153, 1209, 1223.
t consonans, 9.
t conjugation, 519, 528, 529.
f declension, 125-39, p. 424.
t-or«o.,302, 1113 &c.
t»^, 25.
•- verb, 787.
iaoe-, 386.
iam, 1450.
ibi, 304, 366.
t-(20m, 342.1, 1132.
iffitur^ place of, 1474.
ignora-, 1338 n.
iffnose-^ 762 n., 979, 980, 1308. 3.
i/tco, 797.
t//t, tV/tm, adv., 298, 366.
t//o-, 287 &c., 1101 &c.
Ulo adv., 298, 366.
•TOO-? 748.
imbu-, 1308. 3.
tmmtTitt-, 1308. 3.
imo-, 823, 1429.
impera-, 1281.
imperative, 421, 422, 424, 479, 593,
1163, 1173.
imperfect, 439 &c.; conjugated,
556; infin. 506-13; past, 459-65.
impersonal verb, 371, 393, 699-701,
872; conjugated, 699, .700; pas-
sive, 383, 701.
m, 913, 1336.
inoip-^ 1308.3.
inde, 304, 366.
indefinite pronouns, 1138 &c.
indicative, 1152.8; for subj. 1215;
of concession, 1 1 56 ; of supposi-
tion, 1155.
indirect interrogative, 318, 494, 495,
1196,1197. I
indirect oration, 492, 1201.
indirect question, 1196.
infero-, 822.
infiniUve, 430-2, 506-13, 1232 &c.;
after adj 1254; after relative or
conjunction, 1251 ; and ace. 1238-
1240; as a gen., 1252; historic,
1253; imperfect, 509, 512,513,
625; in poets, 1255; of hypo-
thesis, 1261; of indignation, 1247;
passive, 1 244 ; perfect, 5 1 0, 5 1 1 ,
628; with pxep., 1233.
infUias, 886.
informor, 1308. 3.
infra, 1339.
inhibe-, 1308. 3.
inquam^ 408.
inser-, 906.
tiu/ar, 833. 1.
tTistteto-, 1254.
intelleg-j 818.
inter, 1340, 1341, 1393 n., 1395 n.
inter, * up,' 818, 834 d.^ 1342. 1.
inter se, 1087.
intercludrj 1342. 1.
interdiC', 1023, 1342. 1.
interest^ 910, 948.
interfic-, 1342. 1.
inleri', 1342. 1.
interim, 797.
interiuff', 1342. 1.
interjections, 860.
interlunio-, 210. 1.
intermit', 1342. 1.
interpola-f 1342 1.
interrogative, direct, 308,1 134,141 7-
1419, 1423, 1425, 1426 ; double,
1136; indirect, 318, 494, 495,
1196, 1197, 1420-1424; par-
ticles, 1417 ; pronouns, 1134 &c.
intra, 1 343.
intransitive verb, 373, 378, 394;
used transitively, 401-403.
inlro, 1344.
inttimesO', 1308. 3.
inuide-t 979, 1023, 980.
inuicto-, 763.
ipso-, 326, .1090.
tVt, 1262
irregular nouns, 149 &c.
irregular verbs, 892 &c.
is ea id, 302.
isti adv., 299.
iatim adv., 299.
2
Uo adv., 399.
iitf, 2R6, S88, 1096.
Uo, 14fil.
Jt only hefire s, S.
JTortAa^i, 9S1.
Keltic Buffii <wft in L»tw, p. 4S9.
/or«? 267.
ioi-, 5S3.
{apidcrum, 376 n.
last word emphatic, I486.
last word in an heiameter begm-
ning a claiue, 1463 n.
latum, mS.
leavea, 1031.
lett«n, number of; 2.
Ubera-, ?40 n^
Hbram. ^0^B.
lieel. 607 n.
UmiU, 1ZG7.
fin/er, for litUrU, p. 487.
liquida, order of, S.
flucto, 883.
Madvig lettneA to in n«l«i, 725,
815, 951. 1141,1183,1166,1176,
1182. 1185, 1203, 120S, 1209,
1^2f, 1236, 1287, 1286, 1337 i.,
1337, 1404.1,1428, W05.!.
mag'u, 776. 1.
maitr, 1066. 1.
mo&n nm, 8B6.
mo/in^ 1221.
taallem, IS3I.
tnaism, 863.
ntanica-, 210.
Tnoitu-, 207. 1.
maaculine lufRxei, 191.
majiumo-, 1019.
meats, 1030.
7iiede-, 979. 980.
Mii»ti. »5i «.
"-,257, 1064.
minor-, 1058. 1.
ninui, 776. 1, 1066. 1.
nuni-, 939.
minim— ifuatUvia, 1200.
niiKr!-, 956.
mixed numbers, 1065. 1 5.
morfem-, 979,
modo, 794.
moods, 4SS Ac
mori- conjugatnd, 657.
nuAM for Bituont, p. 432.
mm, 1452.
na, 1173,1179, 1228, 1402 I a pro-
clitic UeSi diffsre from ot mob,
1408 n.; «e-qtudm, 1405, 1468
5.
n«, ' Terilj,' 862.
ni, 1417, 1420; affiled to inteno-
galiires, 1425 n.i repeated, 1424.
nmt a proclitic, 1465 j 'notoreD,
1406. 1.
necKiie <»(. 12« «■
fwrfum, 1228.
ntga-. 1404 n.
negatives accumulated, 1411.
negative pflrtioles, 1402.
negative repeated, 1412.
neg-leg-, 83* A., n.
nonon-. 1149. 1.
tM^tM — rt — , 1443,
neque quiiquam, 140S.
n^^uitw, 1244 n.
fietcic410n.! rusna on, 14SI.
netciv-TUi-, 1 1 99.
Mr, 1416.
Iter nom in vm, p. 443, xxii.
iternom. rejects!, why? p.43.1-
iter-paBBivvB. 392.
ucuier suSicB, 194.
nip- orniu-, 162.
nSm toi rum, 1410.
Bimi.. 776. 1.
nimium- quantum, 121
nif., 655. 3; 1001.
jm>xz.
461
'no,* how expressed, 1428.
no/tm, 1221.
nollem, 1221.
nominative, 44, 48, 368, 867; for
TOC, 880; form of, p. 425; plur.,
p. 437; power of, p. 433, 439;
singular, p. 433 &c.
non, 1402 ; a proclitic, 1465 ; place
of, 1403.
non modo for non modo mml 1415.
non nemo, 1411 iu
non gtUn, 1208.
non quo, 1208.
non quod^ 1454/
non-emphatic words, where placed,
1467.
notit, 389.
nos, 1082.
noun in apposition, where placed,
1472.
nonfie, 1419.
nub', 533, 977.
nucerum, 376 n.
nudiustertiiUf 805.
nulla- for non, 1410.
num, 1419, 1423 ».
number, 52 ; differs from English
idiom, 1026 ; concord of, 1040.
numerals, 247 &c.; place of, 1471. 1.
numquid uis, 1 183 n. f .
nuncine, 792.
nuper, 778.
conjugation, 519, 520.
declension, p. 4*24.
final in verbs, 410.
ob prep., 1346; in comp., 1347;
»«iri, 830 n,
obiter, 797.
objective gen., 927-
oblivisc, 943.
obliqua oratio, 492, 1201.
obsolesc; 555. 1.
ocu/o-, 207. 3.
odi, 390.
officio-, 1469 n.
om-t^, 1308. 2.
opes-, 999.
opitula', 742. 1 ».
oportet, 1246 n.
o^tM e«/, 1280.
order of words, 1458.
ordinal numbers, 248, 252, 261,
1065. 1.
ordo for ordons, p. 435.
owner, 1036. 2.
paenitei, 889, 938.
j»«yr-, 535.
palam, 782, 1348.
parato-, 1254.
;>orc-, 979, 980.
par*-, 956.
' part of,' 1057. i.
parti-^ verb, 398.
participle, 436, 514 &c., 1264 ; for
abstract differs from adj., 934 n,;
in endo, 1296; in endo with e*-,
712; in endo with /«-, 715; in
ertti, 1265; in /o, 1270; in turo^
1261, 1268; in two with <?«-, 702;
in tuTo with y«-, 705; perfect,
892; perfect, circumlocution for,
1281 ; question in, 1135.
particles, 764.
partitive gen., 922, 925.
p€tso-^ 1001.
passive, 379, 380,570; conjugated,
655 ; impersonal, 701, 981; of
saying and thinking, 1241.
past imperfect, 4.')9-65, 580-2; past
perfect, 473; ind. 588, 589; eubj.
621-4.
paier for paters, p. 435.
pater, p. 437.
pause in hexameter, 1464 n.
penalty, gen. of, 945.
penes, 1349.
pensi, 947 n,
per, 1350 ; in com p., 1351 ; of de-
struction, 1351 n. §.
per me Stat, 1183 n.
perd-, 1351.
perfect, 439 &q., 442, 443, 478,
533 &c.; form of, 471; conjuga-
tion of, 561 ; contracted, 563-7;
present, 472 ; infin., 510, 511,
1256-1258; of intran8itives,477;
third person of, 472 n. ; use of, 478.
perinde, 80U.
permission, subj. in, 489.
personal pronouns, 274, 1076.
personal suflixes, 4U6 &c
personal verb, 370.
plaff', 535.
plural suffixes of nouns, 52 ; of
verbs, 4 1 4 &c.
plural for sing., 1026.
452
INDXX.
p/tu, 245 n., 776. 1., 1056. 1.
poena', 975 n.
poUinff", 818.
polysyndeton, 1485.
jHmdo, 1075.
pone, 1353.
por, 818, 834 e, 1862.
porro, 788.
poaaessive adj., 1047; gen., 924-25.
pronouns, 359.
potsid't 386.
posmm, 728.
jMW/, 1354; in comp., 1355.
postilla, 802.
postquantf 958 9».
pottumo', 823.
port- verb, 942, 1287 n.
prae, 1356 ; in comp., 1857.
praedito-, 542 n.
praeter, 1359; in comp., 1360.
predicate, 874.
prepositions, 808, 830,914 n., 1283,
1308, 1397; case after, 914 n.;
change of form in, 809 &c.; La-
tin compared with Greek, 830 n.,
834 «.; meaning of, 1391 n.*;
omitted, 1896; place of, 1391-3.
present tense, 449, 452-8; ind.,675-
9 ; historic, 449 n., 456 ; perf.,
472; subj., 694-602; perf. ind.,
684, 587; perf. subj., 613-620.
price, 1006.
primo-1 828, 1060.
primoT', 838 n.
principal parts, 681 fitc.
prior', 823.
priusguam^ 1 23-1 . 1 .
pro, 1361; in comp., 1362-4.
procUtics, 28, 836, 1404. 1, 1465.
prodes', 727.
proh, 862 n.
prohibe-, 1237.
proindej 800.
pronominal adverbs, 366, 1160.
pronouns, 273 &c.; demonstrative,
286, 1091, 1471 ; gender of, 1039 ;
indefinite, 1138 &c.; interroga-
tive, 1134 &c. ; logical, 301,
1112; personal, 274, 1076; pos-
sessive, 369, 1088; reflective,
278-85, 1083-89.
prope, 1366.
propior-, 908.
propter, 1366.
prwwn, 798.
Pseudo-Nepos, 951 fi.t; 1423 n.
pudet, 938.
puer for puertiB, p. 437.
puluis, 8, p. 426.
punishment, verbs of, 975 n.
purpose, 490, 1407.
q,6.
gu&, 316, 316.
quam with comp., 1066; with sup.,
1067 e.\ a proclitic, 1466.
quamquatii% 368, 791.
quamuis, 362, 791, 1227 5.
fuando, 795, 1466 j,
quandoquidem, 857 n.
quanti, 946 n.
quati, 499, 1223.
fuaww, 366.
que, 840 n., 1430 &c.; displaced,
1441.
quer-, 555. 8.
^ttt- verb, 788.
qui' or quo-, 305, 1120-81; 'any,*
1138; =1-, 1131.
qui-cunque, 1146, 1168.
quid aii, 1198.
^t<fm? Il72n.
quidquod, 1464 A.
qui-dam, 343, 1 146.
9tiM/«m, 857 n., 1080, 1403, 1416,
1453 ; place of, 1474.
qui-lubet, 1 144.
qui-nam, 346.
qui-piam, 345, 1143.
quippe qui with subj., 1194 n.
^tM-^ttam, 344, 1142.
qui-que, 847-60, 922. 1.
ytti-9«t-, 1147, 1158.
qui-uis, 851, 1144.
yworf, 1454; with eius, 922.
quondam, 792.
^uontam, 1465 j.n.
qudque, place of, 1474.
^ttoto-, 248, 1065. 1.
quumy 1229, 1281 6, 1455.
'rather,' 1056.3.
ratio for rations, p. 435.
rtf- sb., 910 «.
r«, *back,' 1367.
recidiuO', 1367 n. f*
reciprocal verbs, 898.
redim-, 1289.
453
reduplieation, 471.
rediU, 472 n.
r^er/, 910,948.
reflective pronoan, 27tt-85, 1083-9;
omitted, 1249.
reflective verb, 874 8cc.; 398-400;
conjugated, 570, 666.
regerumy 376 n.
relative, 3i>79 1120-31; attraction
o^ 1U61; double form of, 353-8,
1158; postponed, 1463.
remit; 975.
repeated action, 1159.
reported speech, 1201.
repptdi^ 555. 2.
re-jmblieor^ 163.
refcisc; 1367.
result, subj. of, 491, 1408.
retice-, 1367.
retro, 1368.
rite, 770.
Ritschl, 1319 n., 1404. 1.
rueor, 391.
road by which, 1008.
roga-, 903.
roots, 30.
rosa-y 1031.
r«-, 396.
rt#p-, 533.
rurt, 952.
riM, 886.
rtMtim, 798.
t final lost in nom., p. 435.
sacrificing, vbs. of, 1006.
sanguir, p. 9.
aatis^ 776. 1.
eoilioety 807.
«crt5-, 533.
se, 1083, 1369; crude form of, 280.
second person, 1152. 3, 1175,
1224.
second word non-emphatic, 1473.
secondary clauses, 1225.
teaundum, 1371.
eecusf 917.
eed, 834, 1369; a proclitic, 1465.
eedition-, 815 n.
eemel, 264 n.
temper^ 778.
sen- or senec^^ 164, 207. 1.
sense supersedes form, 1038.
s«r-, 542 n.
terfnooina-, 745 ft.
i^nit-, 971.
seeeentO't 1063.
settertio-, 272, 1070.
jMter/itim, lo73.
showing, vbs. of, 976.
n, 496-9, 1153, 1154, 1159, 1209;
omitted, 1219; as an interroga-
tive, 1422; a proclitic, 1465.
nc, 800, 1451^, n.
simple voice, 405.
nmpiiei-y 264 n.
simul, 853, 854.
gin-, 1236.
»inoero-f 264 n.
«inir, 1372.
sing, for pi., 1032.
n-gui-f 1159, 1140.
siue, 1157.
smelling, vbs. of, 895.
sodes, 1361,0, n.
solo-, 110, 1050,1192.
sordidO'f 555. 1 n.
«or/t- vb., 398.
'P<wy-, 635.
spondee, 410 n.
static verb, 385, 391.
«<o- pron., 288 n.
strengthened form of verb, 451. 1.
stude-y 939.
suade-t 979.
*a5, 913, 1373-6.
subici'j 812 n.
subject, 874.
subject-accusative, 911, 1248-50.
subjective gen., 921.
subjunctive, 427-9, 481-505, 1178
&c.; as a future, 500-5, 1226;
for imperat. 1167; in commands,
488, 1180; in concessions, 1227
b / in elliptical sentences, 1227 ;
in hypothesis, 496-9, 1209 &c. ;
in indirect questions, 494, 495,
1196 ; in obliqua oratio, 1201-6;
in parenthesis, 1195 ; in permis-
sion, 489, 1180; in purposes,
400, 1179; in results 491, 1182;
of duty, 1227 /; of indignation,
1227 «; of possibility, 1227 «1;
of prayer, 1227 cf; translated as
indie, 491, 493, 494; with ut
qui, 1194 n.
substantive, number of, 1026 ; in
predicate, 1060 ; in a, o, t, u, e,
have lost a guttural, p. 440, ii.
454
IITDEX.
I &c, ; in alh-ulOf p. 441, iv.; in
ao'uh^ p. 440, iii.; in ac'To, p.
440, iii. ; in ap-wi, p. 440, ii. ;
in am-enio &c. p. 443, xxii. ; in
c, p. 441, ix. ; in io-uia, p. 441,
xii.; in ec or «o, p. 441, vii. ; in
ee-ula, p. 441, xii. ; in ed-on^ p.
444, xxvii. ; in «/, p. 443, xxvi. ;
in e-/o, p. 441, x. ; in ie-ulo^ p.
441, xii.; in it-ia^ p. 444, xxvii.;
in U-udon^ p. 444, xxvii. ; in U-
ut, p. 444, xxvii.
mbter, 1378 ; in comp., 1379.
suffix, 32 ; of adj., 225-234 ; of
maaculine Bubs., 191, 192 ; of
feminine, 193 ; of neuters, 194 ;
personal, 406 &.c.
mm, iuntj explained, p. 429,
sumtno'f 823.
tuo-, 361, 1083.
9uppe€lita-j 396.
supelleg-, 818.
super, 1380; in comp., 1382.
superlative, 240-46, 1057; from
prep., 838.
supine, 433, 484, 887, 998, 1299-
1301.
supra, 1383.
suscip-, 1289.
susum, 798.
syllable long by nature, 14 ; long
by position, 15 ; short, 13.
symbols, numerical, 251.
syntax, 866.
tag-^ 535.
taking away, verbs of, 973.
tanquam, 1223.
tanii, 946 n.
tarUum, 1 065. 1 c,
to as a dat, 977 n.
telling, verbs of, 976.
tempera^i 979.
•temple,' 1035.
tene-j 386.
tense, 437 &c.
tenses of Latin verb, 451 &c.
tenusy 1384, 1391 b.
tepefac'f 756.
tor, 783, p. 437.
terg-, 535.
' that of,' 1036. 1.
third person, quantity of, 412.
Hg-, 535.
time, difference of, 1017 ; how long,
915; within which, 993-5; when,
992.
•too,' 1056.
torque-, 553.
towns, 884, 951, 990, 1021.
traic', 900.
trans, 1386.
transitive verb, 372; used reflec-
tively, 39 ♦-7.
trusting, verbs of, 974, 1002.
tUf crude form of, 275.
u consonanB=3iiT, 10, 25.
u conjugation, 519, 526-7.
u declension, 140-4, p. 424.
ubi, 315, 366, 953-4.
ubigue, 347, 366.
ue, 1444, n.; displaced, 1441.
uel, S4Q, 1057 h.
uelle, how formed, p. 436.
uend', 542.
uenum, 886.
uere-^ 939.
uero, 1456; place of, 1474.
ueso-f 1001.
ueta-, 1236, 1237, 1243.
ttfc-, 534.
uicem, 917.
uiciens, 1071.
uicinitie, 1150.
tt//b-, 334, 1142.
uls, 1389.
ultumo-, 823.
ultra, 1390.
ultro, 788.
ultumo-, 823.
un^, 305 n., 315, 1150.
undeclined subs., 1032. 1.
imo-, 1062.
uorsus, 1387, 1391 5.
ut, 316, 796, 1451 ; a proclitic,
1465.
ut; 1001, 1287 «.
uHnaffif 796.
uHque, 347, 796.
ntut^ 358, 796.
ui qui with subj., 1194 n.
utrum, construction of, 1425.
vegetables, 1030.
verb, 367 &c.; after emphatic word,
1467; derivation of, 740 ; dimi-
nutive, 750 ; frequentative, 745;
IVDEX.
455
impersonal, 371; of ■aying,
&&, 1238 ; of wishing, 1242 ;
place of, 1458, 1461, 1467 ; in
a, 522 ; in ag^ p. 440, iii. ; in
etna, 745 n. ; in e, 386, 524 ; p.
443, xxiii. ; in ee or tc, p. 442,
xviii. ; in esc or i»o, p. 443, xxv. ;
in est or «m, 754, p. 443, xxv. ;
in Qf p. 442, xix. ; in i, 528, p.
443, xxiv. ; in t^o, p. 443, xxvi. ;
in m, p. 442, xxii. ; in o, 519, p.
427; inp, p. 442, xx.; in / final
long, p. 428 ; in turi^ 755 ; in
M, 526, p. 427, p. 442, xvii. ;
in a6, eb, ib, 6, p. 442, xxi. ; in<
ceptive, 762; intransitive, .373-
S ; irregular, 392 ; of accusing,
944 ; of buying, 946 ; of com-
manding, &c., 1180 ; of compar-
ing, 956 «.; of duty, 1217; of
fearing; 1186; of feeling, 393,
889, 938-9 ; of hindrance, 1138 ;
of memory, 943 ; of requesting
omitted, 1204; of saying omitted,
1203 ; of smelling, 895 ; of wish-
ing, 1242; passive, 380 &c. ;
personal, 370; place of, 1437,
1467, 1468; plural suffixes of,
414 &c. ; reciprocal, 398 ; reflec-
tive, 374 &;c., 398-400 ; static,
385-91 ; transitive, 372.
verbal sb., 1264; in Han, 1302;
in tuj 887, 1299.
vt-, 165.
vita-y 1029.
vocative, 43 n., 882 ; fornom. 883;
place of, 1474 n.
voci/era-, 742. 1 ».
vol; 733.
vowels, order of, 3 ; vowel silent,
24 ; vowel-assimilation, p. 444,
xxix.
weather, 1027.
words opposed, place of, 1475.
worth, gen. of, 947.
a, last letter, 2 ;«sAv, 5 ; or rather
X2, 813 n.
p not a Latin letter, 2.
' yes,* how expressed, 1427.
z not a Latin letter, 2.
THE END.
lovdoh;
ranrriD bt lsvict, bobsok, and fbanxltv,
Great New Street and Fetter Lane.
ABDENDA EI COEKIGENDA.
S8M.«,60,5S
iabttm mdtrae
S36 lint 8
» fqu»dm) „ rquidm]'
238 „ 6
„ (beno.) „ [bene-]
iI2 „ 4
„ krt-tttr „ ftrat-Si
486, note + ; cftncel the whole note. See App. II. | ir. p.
634 fin. 12
for dti«a«d read j>r<¥. <'««<
6S8 „ SO
, torque. , tonjuo- or
- 3*
. tor- or toito. „ torn- or toi
6S6.3 „ 60
„ei+dad. , ei+cHld-(
Dote*)'
779 , 2
„ Uulf „ OM
822 « 9
»«d- . Bd
876.1 „ 6
„ 982 „ 983
927 „ 8
„ £iB. Ti. 31 „ ouu. a. O.
939 „ S
„ Teretar „ Tereturf
9*6 „ 2
„ mpitiB „ eapitist
„octupliJ „ octuplij
„note| „ 3
„ preceding „ followine
1050 „ 4
„ ee. i< „ &<
107S „ 6
„ octo „ octB
11£6: add: othei em
Dplei are leen in LaudabuTU alii . . . -
tun, Ac. m
r.Od.i.Mi inEiiut uiro air...
lege NecnutBi, &c., Od. iii. 1.9 ; in Opial quietem . . .,
Opiat PromeiheuB . . ., Opiat aupTemo ... — tid uetant
It^ES louii, Epod. 17. BG.
Riu 2 far at timea reaA at timea pattnAe-
1222
„ 3 „ chink „ crn>k,i.e.6T€ak
1228
^10 „ Mortalia tiuiU „ Facta
„ 19 „ teller „ mash belter
1295
„ land4 „ genuidiv* „ gerund or genindlTe
1342.1
„ 1 ,,308.1 „ I SOB. I
1408
tn^ntt porlant
• Smcketi In the form [ ] an used la denote ofaBoIele vorda, nsd at tl
Uieontlf woida, vbicb. [bougb ddC oecurrlng, in Implied In darlTUlTea.
'^
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11